WQ0035809_O&M Manual_20181028

Stateside WWTP
Operations & Maintenance Manual
October 28, 2018
Prepared for:
Old North State Water Comapny
PO Box 67o
Bailey, NC 27807
>o/1'AAW
Prepared By
iii F
4�04���
Burgin Engineering Inc.
P.O. BOX 1804
IRMO, S.C. 29063-1894
[phone]

O&M Manual
Table of Contents
Stateside WWTP Upgrade
1. Air Flow Meter IFM SD2001
2. Clean In Place & Sludge Waste Auto Valves
3. Clean In Place Eductor- Dosatron
4. Effluent Pump- AMT Multistage
5. EQ Pump- AMT
6. Liquid Flow Meter IFM SM2001
7. Liquid Level Transducer Esterline
8. Liquid Pressure Sensor IFM 3227
9. Membrane Pressure Sensor IFM 2209
10. Membrane- Main & Sludge Holding
11. Oxic and Anoxic Internal Recycle Pumps Faggiolati
12. Oxic Diffusers Magnum
13. Permeate Pump Varisco
14. SCADA System GO Blue Box
15. Sludge Dewatering Pump
16. Submersible Mixers
17. Ultraviolet Disinfection
18. Contacts: Emergency, Plant Operators, Owners, Regulatory Agencies

ifm electronic
Operating instructions
Compressed air meter
12f -1-2—Ctor31010
SD2001
co
0
N
O
0

Contents
1 Preliminary note...................................................................................................4
1.1 Symbols used................................................................................................4
2 Safety instructions...............................................................................................4
3 Functions and features........................................................................................5
4 Function...............................................................................................................5
4.1 Processing of the measured signals..............................................................5
4.2 Volumetric flow monitoring.............................................................................5
4.3 Consumed quantity monitoring (totalizer function)........................................6
4.3.1 Consumed quantity monitoring with pulse output.................................6
4.3.2 Consumed quantity monitoring with preset meter................................6
4.4 Monitoring of temperatures............................................................................6
4.5 Volumetric flow monitoring / switching function.............................................6
4.6 Volumetric flow monitoring / analogue function............................................7
5 Installation............................................................................................................ 8
5.1 Installation location........................................................................................8
5.2 Installation conditions....................................................................................8
5.3 Mounting position..........................................................................................9
5.4 Installation in pipes......................................................................................10
6 Electrical connection..........................................................................................10
7 Operating and display elements........................................................................11
8 Menu..................................................................................................................12
8.1 Menu structure.............................................................................................12
8.2 Explanation of the menu..............................................................................13
9 Parameter setting..............................................................................................14
9.1 General parameter setting...........................................................................14
9.2 Settings for volumetric flow monitoring........................................................15
9.2.1 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT1.....................................15
9.2.2 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT2.....................................16
9.2.3 Scaling of the analogue value for volumetric flow..............................16
9.3 Settings for monitoring of consumed quantities...........................................16
9.3.1 Settings for quantity monitoring by pulse output.................................16
9.3.2 Settings for quantity monitoring using the preset meter ....................16
2

9.3.3 Settings for meter reset controlled by the program ............................16
9.3.4 Switch off the meter reset...................................................................17
9.4 User settings (optional)................................................................................17
9.4.1 Determine the standard unit of measurement for volumetric flow ......17
9.4.2 Configuration of the standard display.................................................17
9.4.3 Setting the damping of the measured values.....................................17
9.4.4 Setting the error behaviour of OUT1 / OUT2......................................17
9.5 Service- Fun ktionen......................................................................................18
9.5.1 Reading the min./max. values for volumetric flow..............................18
9.5.2 Reset all parameters to the factory setting.........................................18®
9.6 Setting of the preset meter / pulse value (Imps).........................................19
10 Operation.........................................................................................................21
10.1 Read the set parameters...........................................................................
21
10.2 Changing the display unit in the Run mode...............................................21
10.3 Error indication..........................................................................................22
10.4 General operating conditions.....................................................................22
11 Technical data and scale drawing....................................................................22
12 Factory setting.................................................................................................23
IKI

1 Preliminary note
1.1 Symbols used
► Instruction
> Reaction, result
[... I Designation of buttons, switches or indications
Cross-reference
Important note
• Non-compliance can result in malfunctions or interference.
2 Safety instructions
• Please read this document prior to installing the unit. Ensure that the product is
suitable for your application without any restrictions.
• Work on compressed air equipment as well as mounting, setting for operation
and set-up of the unit must be carried out by suitably qualified personnel. When
doing so, state of the art, safety and accident prevention regulations must be
adhered to.
• Ensure that the installation is at a standstill and no pressure is applied before
mounting components into or removing them from compressed air equipment.
• Improper or non -intended use may lead to malfunctions of the unit or to
unwanted effects in your application. That is why installation, electrical con-
nection, set-up, operation and maintenance of the unit must be carried out by
qualified personnel authorised by the plant operator.
• In all applications test the compatibility of the product materials (--� 11 Technical
data and scale drawing) with the media to be measured.
For the scope of validity cULus: The device shall be supplied from an isolating
transformer having a secondary Listed fuse rated as noted in the following table.
Overcurrent protection
Control -circuit
wire size
Maximum protective device rating
Ampere
AWG
(mm2)
26
(0.13)
1
24
(0.20)
2
22
(0.32)
3
20
(0.52)
5
18
(0.82)
7
16
(1.3)
10
An

3 Functions and features
The unit monitors the standard volume flow of operating compressed air.
It detects the 3 process categories volumetric flow, consumed quantity, medium
temperature.
Applications: compressed air equipment.
All data refer to standard volume flow according to DIN ISO 2533, i.e. volume flow
at 1013 hPa, 150C and 0% relative air humidity.
The general operating conditions of compressed air equipment apply.
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED): Devices with a measuring section comply
with art. 3 sec. (3) of the Directive 97/23/EC and are designed and manufac-
tured for stable gases of the fluid group 2 in accordance with sound engineering
practice.
4 Function
4.1 Processing of the measured signals
• The unit displays the current process values.
• It generates 2 output signals according to the parameter setting.
OUT1: 3 selection options ..................................................... parameter setting
switching signal for volumetric flow limit values .................................. (---> 9.2.1)
or pulse sequence for totalising meter ................................................ (--+ 9.3.1)
or switching signal for preset counter ................................................. (---> 9.3.2)
OUT2: 2 selection options
switching signal for volumetric flow limit value ................................... 9.2.2)
or analogue signal for volumetric flow ................................................ 9.2.3)
4.2 Volumetric flow monitoring
The flow rate is monitored by a calorimetric measuring system, the measured
signals by the electronics.
• 2 switching signals for volumetric flow limit values can be provided (output 1
and output 2). For the switching functions --� 4.5.
• An analogue signal proportional to the volumetric flow (4...20 mA) can be
provided on output 2. For the analogue functions --� 4.6.
R

4.3 Consumed quantity monitoring (totalizer function)
The unit has an internal quantity meter which continuously totals the volumetric
flow. The sum corresponds to the current consumed quantity since the last reset.
• The current meter count can be indicated.
• In addition the value before the last reset is stored. This value can also be
indicated.
The meter saves the totalled consumed quantity every 10 minutes. After a power failure
this value is available as the current meter count. If a time -controlled reset is set, the
elapsed time of the set reset interval is also stored. So the possible data loss can be
maximum 10 minutes.
The meter can be reset as follows:
• Manual reset (--� 9.3.3).
• Time -controlled automatic reset (--� 9.3.3).
4.3.1 Consumed quantity monitoring with pulse output
Output 1 provides a counting pulse if the value set in [ImPS] is reached (--� 9.3.1).
4.3.2 Consumed quantity monitoring with preset meter
2 types of monitoring are possible:
• Time -dependent quantity monitoring
- Settings: [ImPS] = quantity x, [ImPR] _ [no], [rTo] = time t.
- If the quantity x is reached during the time t, output 1 switches and remains
switched until the meter is reset.
- If the quantity x has not been reached after the time t, the meter is automati-
cally reset and counting starts again; output 1 does not switch.
• Quantity monitoring not time -dependent
- Settings: [ImPS] = quantity x, [ImPR] _ [no], [rTo] _ [OFF].
- If the quantity x is reached, output 1 switches and remains switched until the
meter is reset.
4.4 Monitoring of temperatures
• The unit detects the current system temperature and shows it on the display
(--� chapter 10.2 Changing the display unit in the Run mode).
4.5 Volumetric flow monitoring / switching function
OUTx changes its switching state if it is above or below the set switching limits
(SPx, rPx). The following switching functions can be selected:
• Hysteresis function / normally open (fig. 1): [OUx] _ [Hno].
0

• Hysteresis function / normally closed (fig. 1): [OUx] _ [Hnc].
First the set point (SPx) is set, then the reset point (rPx) at the requested
distance.
• Window function / normally open (fig. 2): [OUx] _ [Fno].
• Window function / normally closed (fig. 2): [OUx] _ [Fnc].
The width of the window can be set by means of the distance between SPx and
rPx. SPx = maximum value, rPx = minimum value.
HY = hysteresis; FE = window
When set to the window function the set and reset points have a fixed hysteresis of 0.25 %
of the final value of the measuring range. This keeps the switching state of the output stable
if the volumetric flow varies slightly.
4.6 Volumetric flow monitoring / analogue function
• The analogue start point [ASP] determines at which measured value the output
signal is 4 mA.
• The analogue end point [AEP] determines at which measured value the output
signal is 20 mA.
Minimum distance between [ASP] and [AEP] = 25 % of the final value of the
measuring range.
7

Factory setting
Measuring range scaled
I [mA]
I [mA]
20
----------------------------- ---
20
................................
4
4
3,6
0 MEW Q
0 ASP AEP MEW Q
MEW = final value of the measuring range
In the set measuring range the output signal is between 4 and 20 mA.
It is also indicated:
• Volumetric flow above the measuring range: output signal > 20 mA.
• Flow rate below the measuring range: output signal between 3.6 and 4 mA.
5 Installation
The rules and regulations for the installation and operation of compressed
• air equipment must be observed.
5.1 Installation location
• Behind the cold dryer / near the load.
• If compressed air is fed into the main pipe through parallel pipes, the unit
should be mounted in the main pipe.
• Installation after the maintenance unit is also possible. If oil is used for the
loads, the unit must be mounted before the oiler.
5.2 Installation conditions
To achieve the specified measurement accuracy, the following mounting condi-
tions must be adhered to: defined inflow / outflow pipe lengths, defined flow cross -
sectional area, fixed installation depth and correct positioning of the measuring
elements.
The unit is delivered mounted on a pipe section meeting these conditions.
0

In case of turbulances at the inflow side additional baffled pipes (B) are recom-
mended:
changes to the pipe diameter
B = 15 x pipe diameter
90' elbow
B = 15 x pipe diameter
two 90' elbows, one plane
B = 20 x pipe diameter
0
two 900 elbows, two planes
valve, slide
B = 25 x pipe diameter
B = 45 x pipe diameter
5.3 Mounting position
• Permitted mounting positions: pipe length vertical, any position (fig. 1, 2), pipe
length horizontal, unit vertical (fig. 3, 5), unit on side, pipe length right (fig. 4).
• Avoid the mounting position shown in fig. 6 (unit on side, pipe length left). If the
flow rate is low, the specified measurement accuracy cannot be adhered to.
1
2
3
A
�
5
6

5.4 Installation in pipes
Integrate the pipe length so that the direction of flow (1) and the marking arrow (2)
show in the same direction.
6 Electrical connection
F•
F The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.
► Disconnect power.
► Connect the unit as follows:
2 switching outputs
1 switching output / 1 analog output
1 BN
L+
2 WH
4 BK
2:OUT2 3 BU
4: OUT1 L_
I BN
L+
2 WH
4 BK
2:OUT2 3 BU
4: OUT1 L—
OUT1: switching signal or pulse sequence pnp
OUT2: switching signal pnp or analogue signal (1)
Core colours of ifm sockets:
1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black).
10

7 Operating and display elements
000®O©0®
III � I r a a
v5i vvi o` Q cn to
'II'f1111111
9 1 1 1 1
Mode/Enter Set
10 11
1 to 8: Indicator LEDs
- LED 1 = current volumetric flow in standard cubic feet/minute (scfm).
- LED 2 = current volumetric flow in standard cubic feet/hour (scfh).
- LED 3 = current consumed quantity since the last reset in standard cubic feet (scf).
- LED 3 flashing = consumed quantity before the last reset in standard cubic feet (scf).
- LEDs 3 and 5 = current consumed quantity since the last reset in 103 standard cubic
feet.
- LEDs 3 and 5 flashing = consumed quantity before the last reset in 103 standard cubic
feet.
- LED 4 = current medium temperature in OF.
- LED 6 = not used.
- LED 7, LED 8 = switching state of the corresponding output.
9: Alphanumeric display, 4 digits
- Indication of the current volumetric flow (if [SELd] = [FLOW] is set).
- indication of the meter count (if [SELd] = [TOTL] is set).
- indication of the current medium temperature (---> 10.2).
- indication of the parameters and parameter values.
10: Mode/Enter pushbutton
- Selection of the parameters and acknowledgement of the parameter values.
11: Set pushbutton
- Setting of the parameter values (scrolling by holding pressed, incremental by pressing
briefly).
- Change of the display unit in the normal operating mode (Run mode).

8 Menu
8.1 Menu structure
1-400
SCf M
OF
Fsjj,
15s
15s
15s
15s
10 5
L
pit
S
=c2n uni u77
u
U.UU
.........................................
-jnr-L
H
SP
S
10 G' I n-I P S
S
U. LIU
U.
S
nnn
LU
U.UU
r-P
S
T
rnPR
S
YES r70
IF1
LILI
S
OFF
..........................................
=1
FOLJ2
S
0 F IF
0
.rL
AL
ou 1
S
1lr70jHr7cjFrio jFrio
j-Ln7Pj
v
Cjp-,`P- ►
S
DES
LIU
S
Hr-yo I [Inc: I Fno I Frx:
T
L
I j
S
r- To
OFF
.........................................
-InFIL
Je
S
$
S
d I S
013
SPCA
1-31 IG7 L- 11 11-01 S P
U.UU
I I
On
S
SCFH
r-P2
S
9LIB REP
S
21-4 �12
..........................................
JEL 01
S
F-L Un UU
r-ES
S
L 1400
JEEV RUN
(0 = [Mode/Enter] / (3) = [Set]
scf = current meter count in standard cubic feet
(scf)* = stored meter count in standard cubic feet
12

8.2 Explanation of the menu
SP1/rP1
Maximum / minimum value for volumetric flow, at which OUT1 changes its
switching status.
IMPS
Pulse value.
ImPR
Pulse repetition active (= pulse output) or not active (= function preset meter).
Output function for OUT1 (volumetric flow or consumed quantity):
OU1
- Switching signal for limit values: hysteresis function or window function,
normally open or normally closed.
- Pulse or switching signal for quantity meter.
Output function for OUT2 (volumetric flow):
OU2
- Switching signal for limit values: hysteresis function or window function,
normally open or normally closed.
- Analogue signal: 4-20 mA.
SP2/rP2
Maximum / minimum value for volumetric flow, at which OUT2 changes its
switching status.
ASP
Analogue start value for volumetric flow.
AEP
Analogue end value for volumetric flow.
EF
Extended functions / opening of menu level 2.
HI / LO
Maximum / minimum value memory for volumetric flow.
FOU1
Behaviour of output 1 in case of an internal fault.
FOU2
Behaviour of output 2 in case of an internal fault.
dAP
Measured value damping / damping constant in seconds.
rTo
Meter reset: manual reset / time -controlled reset.
diS
Update rate and orientation of the display.
Uni
Standard unit of measurement for volumetric flow: standard cubic feet/minute
or standard cubic feet/hour.
SELd
Standard process category of the display: volumetric flow value / meter
count.
IrES
Restore factory setting.
13

9 Parameter setting
During parameter setting the unit remains in the operating mode. It continues its
monitoring function with the existing parameters until the parameter setting has
been completed.
9.1 General parameter setting
3 steps must be taken for each parameter set:
1
Parameter selection
► Press [Mode/Enter] until the
[ 0 E E E E E
QIQ►uh�r1 1= 1=1 1
Mode/EnterOSet 11 1
requested parameter is displayed.
2
Setting of the parameter value
► Press [Set] and keep it pressed.
> Current setting value of the param-
r-n�_ 56��.
WddEnbrSd 11 1 1
eter flashes for 5 s.
> After 5 s: The setting value is
•
i
changed: incremental by press -
171 1 1
in brief) or scrolling b holding
g Y 9 Y 9
11=-,1 1
pressed.
Numerical values are incremented continuously. If the value is to be reduced: let
the display move to the maximum setting value. Then the cycle starts again at the
minimum setting value.
3
Acknowledgement of the parameter
value
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
_ _
Mode/EnterSet ►_ _1
> The parameter is displayed again.
WD o
The new setting value is stored.
Setting of other parameters
► Start again with step 1.
Finishing the parameter setting
► Press [Mode/Enter] several times until the current measured value is displayed or wait
for 15 s.
> The unit returns to the operating mode.
14

• Change from menu level 1 to menu level 2
► Press [Mode/Enter] until [EF] is
displayed.
In.�,�,
1 1 �
Mode/Enter Set
O
1 1
► Press [Set] briefly.
> The first parameter of the sub -menu
����......;
� • • • • • A� • •
ModeEnteSet
1 I T
is displayed (here: [HI]).
o
• Locking / unlocking
The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional wrong settings
► Make sure that the unit is in the
normal operating mode. 1T ►_1,._._.,_�.
► Press [Mode/Enter] + [Set] for 10 s. Mode/EnterSet 1_ #0C
> [Loc] is displayed.
During operation: [Loc] is briefly displayed if you try to change parameter values.
► Press [Mode/Enter] + [Set] for 10 s.
> [uLoc] is displayed.
Mode/EnterSet ' 1 0 C
When delivered: unlocked.
• Time out:
If during parameter setting no pushbutton is pressed for 15 s, the unit exits the param-
eter setting mode. The parameter value is not changed.
9.2 Settings for volumetric flow monitoring
9.2.1 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT1
► Select [OU1] and set the switching function:
1 I1 1
1
[Hno] = hysteresis function/normally open,
1111
_ _
1
[Hnc] = hysteresis function/normally closed,
C �j -1
1
[Fno] = window function/normally open,
[Fnc] = window function/normally closed.
1 1
1
► Select [SP1] and set the value at which the output switches.
► Select [rP1 ] and set the value at which the output switches back.
15

9.2.2 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT2
► Select [OU2] and set the switching function:
1 1► 1 _=1
[Hno] = hysteresis function/normally open,
1 11 11
► _ ► 1
[Hnc] = hysteresis function/normally closed,
_=I
11
[Fno] = window function/normally open,
_ 17171__
[Fnc] = window function/normally closed.
1 1 c
► Select [SP2] and set the value at which the output switches.
► Select [rP2] and set the value at which the output switches back.
9.2.3 Scaling of the analogue value for volumetric flow
► Select [OU2] and set the function: ► 1► 1 _=1
= current signal proportional to volumetric flow 4 20 mA � 1 � 1 C
► Select [ASP] and set the value at which the minimum output value is ► I II
provided. ►_=1� ►_=1
► Select [AEP] and set the value at which the maximum output value is I IL I
provided.
9.3 Settings for monitoring of consumed quantities
9.3.1 Settings for quantity monitoring by pulse output
► [Select [OU1] and set [ImP]. ► 1► I I
► Select [ImPS] and set the volumetric flow quantity at which 1 pulse is � I� I I
provided (--� 9.6). ; ; C -11
1-11 1
► Select [ImPR] and set [YES] T I I j -11 7 1
> Pulse repetition is active. Output 1 provides a counting pulse when the
value set in [ImPS] is reached.
9.3.2 Settings for quantity monitoring using the preset meter
► Select [OU1] and set [ImP]. ► I► I I
► Select [ImPS] and set the volumetric flow quantity at which output 1 1 11 1 1
switches � ► _
( )
9.6 L MY 1
► Select [ImPR] and set [no] T 1�11-11 1
> Pulse repetition is not active. The output switches ON if the value set in —
[ImPS] is reached. It remains switched until the meter is reset.
9.3.3 Settings for meter reset controlled by the program
► Select [rTo] and continue with a) or b). _ T
a) Reset the meter manually I I-1
► Press [Set] until [rES.T] is displayed, then press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
b) Enter the value for time -controlled reset
► Press [Set] until the requested value is displayed (intervals from 1 hour
to 8 weeks), then press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
16

9.3.4 Switch off the meter reset
► Select [rTo] and set [OFF]. The meter is only reset after overflow
(= factory setting). o
9.4 User settings (optional)
9.4.1 Determine the standard unit of measurement for volumetric flow
► Select [Uni] and set the unit of measurement:
[SCFm] = flow rate in standard cubic feet / minute.
[SCFH] = flow rate in standard cubic feet / hour. __
The setting only has an effect on the volumetric flow value. The counter � �� ��
values (consumed quantity) are automatically displayed in the unit of meas-
urement providing the highest accuracy.
9.4.2 Configuration of the standard display
► Select [SELd] and determine the standard process category. ►__ ► ► 1
[FLOW] = display shows the current volumetric flow value in the stand- JL L #.J
and unit of measurement. 01I
[TOTL] = display indicates the current meter count in scf or 1000 scf.
► Select [diS] and determine the update rate and orientation of the display:
[d1] = update of the measured values every 50 ms.
[d2] = update of the measured values every 200 ms.
[0] = update of the measured values every 600 ms.
[rd1], [rd2], [rd3] = display as for d1, d2, d3; rotated by 1800
.
[OFF] = the display is switched off in the operating mode.
9.4.3 Setting the damping of the measured values
Select [dAP] and the damping constant in seconds (t value 63 %). ojj 71171
9.4.4 Setting the error behaviour of OUT1 I OUT2
► [Select [FOU1] and determine the value: ��I
[On] = output 1 switches ON in case of an error.
[OFF] = output 1 switches OFF in case of an error. i i 1 i 1 C
[OU] = output 1 switches irrespective of the error as defined with the
parameters.
► Select [FOU2] and determine the value:
[On] = output 2 switches ON in case of an error, the analogue signal
goes to the upper end stop value.
[OFF] = output 2 switches OFF in case of an error, the analogue signal
goes to the lower end stop value.
[OU] = output 2 switches irrespective of the error as defined with the
parameters. The analogue signal corresponds to the measured value.
17

9.5 Service-Funktionen
9.5.1 Readina the min./max. values for volumetric flow
► Select [HI] or [LO] and press [Set] briefly. 1__I T
[HI] = maximum value, [LO] = minimum value. 1 1
Delete memory: j j j
► Select [HI] or [LO].
► Press [Set] and keep it pressed until [----] is displayed.
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
It makes sense to delete the memories as soon as the unit works under
normal operating conditions for the first time.
9.5.2 Reset all parameters to the factory settin
► Select [rES], then press [Set] and keep it pressed until [----] is dis- _ 1 1_=
1-
played. 1
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
The factory setting is listed at the end of the instructions (--� 12 Factory
setting).
It makes sense to write your own settings in this table before executing the
function.

9.6 Setting of the preset meter / pulse value (ImPS)
7 setting ranges are available:
LED
indication
in steps of
value
1
3
10 1.41 0 0 ... 19 1.918 10-1
0.020 scf
0.400 ... 9.980 scf
2
3
11
0
.0
0
... 19191.9187
0.02 scf
10.00 ... 99.98 scf
3
3
1110
1 OM
... 19 19 19 0
0.1 scf
100.0 ... 999.9 scf
4
3
110
1 0
0
... 9 19 19 9
1 scf
1000...9999 scf
5
3+ 5
1
0
.0
019191.917
10 scf
10 000...99 990 scf
6
3+ 5
1110
1 OM
... 19 19 19 J.-91
100 scf
100 000...999 900 scf
7
3+ 5
111010 141010101
1000 scf
1 000 000 scf ...
4 000 000 scf
Setting operation:
► Ensure that [OU1] is set to [ImP].
► Select [ImPS], press [Set] and keep it pressed.
> The current numerical value flashes for 5 s, then one of the 4 digits becomes
active (digit flashes, can be changed).
► Set the requested value as indicated in the following table.
First select the requested setting range. Then set the figure from the left digit to
the right digit.
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly when all 4 digits are set.
As soon as the first digit flashes there are 3 options:
► Press [Set] once The flashing digit is increased. 9 is followed by 0 - 1 - 2, etc.
18
[Set] pressed 1 x 19 2 3
[Set] pressed 1 x 0.1 2 3
[Set] pressed 1 x 1 2 3
19

► Press [Set] and keep it
The flashing digit is increased, 9 is followed by 0 and the first
pressed.
new digit (left) becomes active.
8.183
[Set] permanently pressed 181.119131
[Set] kept pressed 18 .1 0 1 3
If digit 1 is increased this way, the display changes to the
next higher setting range (9 is followed by 10).
8.123
[Set] permanently pressed 9 2 3
[Set] kept pressed 1
► Press no pushbutton
The digit following on the right flashes (= becomes active).
for 3 s.
If the fourth digit flashes unchanged for 3 s, digit 1 becomes
active again (if the value of digit 1 is > 0).
18
no pushbutton pressed; after 3 s 18 .1 2 1 3
after 3 s 18
after 3 s 18 1.112 13
3
after 3 s 18 [=
If digit 1 has the value "0", the display changes to the next
lower setting range.
01.23
no pushbutton pressed; after 3 s 10 111.21 3
after 3 s 10111.2131
after 3 s 10111.2131
after 3 s (new digit 4 active and set to 0) 0.2 3 0
after 3 s (new digit 1 active) 1 1[ 3 0
Highlighted grey (0) = flashing digit
Note: If [Set] is pressed continuously, the display moves through all setting ranges;
after the end value it jumps back to the start value. Release [Set] briefly and start
the setting again.
20

10 Operation
Correct operation and compliance with the measurement accuracy can only be
ensured if the environmental conditions specified in the Technical data (www.ifm.
com) are adhered to. Ensure that the maximum pressure range, measuring range
and permitted operating temperature are not exceeded.
After power on and expiry of the power -on delay time (approx. 0.5 s) the unit is in
the Run mode (= normal operating mode). It carries out its measurement and eval-
uation functions and generates output signals according to the set parameters.
• Operation indication —> chapter 7 Controls and indicating elements.
• During the power -on delay time the outputs are switched as programmed: ON
for NO function (Hno / Fno) and OFF for NC function (Hnc / Fnc).
• If output 2 is configured as analogue output, the output signal is at the maxi-
mum value during the power -on delay time.
10.1 Read the set parameters
► Press [Mode/Enter] until the requested parameter is displayed.
► Press [Set] briefly.
> The unit displays the corresponding parameter value for about 15 s. After
another 15 s the parameter is displayed again, then the unit returns to the Run
mode.
10.2 Changing the display unit in the Run mode
► Press [Set] briefly in the Run mode. Press the pushbutton to move to the next
display unit.
> The unit displays the current measured value for approx. 15 s, the correspond-
ing LED lights.
21

10.3 Error indication
[SC1]
Short circuit in OUT1.*
[SC2]
Short circuit in OUT2.*
[SC]
Short circuit in both outputs.*
[OL]
Measured value > 120% of the final value of the measuring range.
[UL]
Measured value < lowest value of the measuring range.
[Err]
Fault in the measuring probe.
*The output concerned is switched off as long as the short circuit continues.
These faults are indicated even if the display is deactivated.
10.4 General operating conditions
The unit is maintenance -free for media which will not adhere to the measuring
probes.
• From time to time check the measuring probes visually for build-up.
• If necessary, clean them at regular intervals. To do so, use a suitable cleaning
liquid (e.g. alcoholic solution).
• Avoid mechanical damage to the measuring probes.
11 Technical data and scale drawing
Technical data and scale drawing at www.ifm.com --� Data sheet search --� Enter
the article number.
22

12 Factory setting
Factory setting
User setting
SP1
4.80 * 101
rP1
4.68 * 101
IMPS
0.400
ImPR
YES
OU1
Hno
OU2
SP2
Hno
9.60 * 101
rP2
9.48 * 101
ASP
0.00 * 10,
AEP
24.72 * 101
FOU1
OFF
FOU2
OFF
dAP
0.6
rTo
OFF
diS
d3
Uni
SCFH
SELd
FLOW
More information at www.ifm.com
23

=A-
ASAHVAMERICA
35 Green Street
Malden, MA 02148
781-321-5409
INSTRUCTIONS
Series 83A Electric Actuator
"ELECTROMNI"
Description
1. Valves Corrosion Resistant Thermoplastic uni-body construction ball valve in PVC or
CPVC with Teflon seats and EPDM or Viton Backing Cushions and EPDM or
Viton stem seal. Also available for our Tru-Union Type 21 ball valves and
Tru-Union Type-23 Multi -Port 3-way ball valves.
2. Motor The Series 83 ` Electromni" motor is a brushless, uni-directional (non -
reversing) shaded pole electric motor, which opens and closes the omni or
Type-21 ball valve in approximately 5 seconds through 90-degrees of travel.
Type-23 Multiport 3-way ball valves run 10 seconds for 180-degrees of travel.
3. Operation Travel is controlled by an internal single pole double throw limit switch
activated by a cam/coupling with 90-degree positive and negative lobes. (180-
degree for 3-ways)
4. Adiustment The Actuator limit switch has a small amount of adjustment for fine tuning the
open and close positions. Any changes will affect both open and closed
positions simultaneously. The adjustment can be achieved by loosening the
hex standoffs that secure the switch plate to the motor housing and moving the
plate slightly ahead to trip the switch later or slightly back to trip the switch
sooner. To see if change is valid look inside the valve itself and watch the ball
travel.
Engineering Data
Valve Size
Voltage
Current Draw
Cycle Time
Duty Cycle
1/2"-2"
115 VAC
2.1 AMPS
5 sec.
25%
l/2"-2"
220 VAC
.60 AMPS
5 sec.
25%
Standard enclosure is weather/corrosion resistant (NEMA 4X).
Options: 1 additional limit switch (Dry set of contacts)
2-position indicating lights (For visual position indication)
2-wire control (For Retrofitting Solenoids must provide constant voltage )
Attachments: 4-Drawings #0002EL, #0119BV83, #0046BV83, #132BV83
File: omni115.man Rev. F 03/29/10 Actuation
Page 1 of 1

I B IINTIAL RELEASE I JJG I KB/DHI 9/9/041
C ICHANGES PER ECR# 014-07 1 JJG I KB 6/19/07
WIRING DIAGRAM:
Electromni
Cam/Coupling
Motor
Lrednc
COMM. no hlnr
Limit Switch
FOR OTHER REVISIONS SEE ECO HISTORY FILE.
--------------------
Customer provided wiring, switch
and optional lights
- — — — — — — — — — — — — — I
I
(Line
Single Pole Double Voltage I
Throw Switching
I I
Position Indicating
Lights
_C reen (ground) — — — — — _— = — — LJ
ELECTR❑MNI WITH EXTRA LIMIT SWITCH
Electromni
------------------
External Wiring
white
— — — — — — — — — — — — --
I
orange _______
bY'OWn— — — — — — — —
fLine
Ctc
tra
Voltage
COMM..Swtch
Ano
ellow
----------
-reel _ T SPDT switch
I
Standard Switch
black
------------------J
ELECTR❑MNI WITH TWO WIRE CONTROL
------------------
Electromni External Wiring
I
white---------1L-- I
Relay f Control
Cam 5 blue— — — — — J i Switch CoLinennt
/ A B blue _ ————— — — —
___ _ Voltage
Motor `` nc black
I
comm. no
reencground)--------( --��
Standard Switch I
------------------
WHITE = NEUTRAL
BLACK = HOT COMMAND OPEN
RED = HOT COMMAND CLOSE
GREEN = GROUND
WHITE = NEUTRAL
BLACK = HOT COMMAND OPEN
RED = HOT COMMAND CLOSE
GREEN = GROUND
CONTROL SWITCH ❑PERATI❑N
CLOSURE = OPEN COMMAND
NON -CLOSURE = CLOSED COMMAND
THIS DRAWING AND ALL INFORMATION
HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF q S A H g M E R C A
ASAHI/AMERICA. ANY COPYING,
REPRODUCTION OR UNAUTHORIZED USE IS❑ 90 1 CERTIFIED
IS FORBIDDEN WITHOUT WRITTEN 19 GREEN STREET, P.O. BOX 653, MALDEN, MA. EEEEE&
CONSENT.
NAME DATE WIRING DIAGRAM
DR I JJG 6/19/07 I FOR ELECTR❑MNI 115 & 220 VAC
CHK K.BLYST❑NE 6/19/07 SIZE DWG. NO. REV
APPD A 0002EL C
PATH SCALE
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NTS SHEET 1 OF 1

NOTE: The shape and appearance of assembly differ
a little with nominal size
n
REV DATE DESCRIPTION I DR JAPPD�
A 3/8/10 FIRST ISSUE I CW I DH
SIZE
H 1
H
W
D
1 /2"
.61
5.93
3.82
4.14
3/4"
.94
6.15
4.06
4.14
1 "
1.16
6.35
4.45
4.14
1-1 /4"
1.15
6.36
5.00
4.14
1-1 /2"
1.45
6.75
5.94
4.14
2"
1.74
7.04
6.97
4.37
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL
QTY
1
OMNI BALL VALVE
PVC,CPVC,PP,PVDF
1
2
ELECTROMNI ACTUATOR
ABS & PVC
1
3
COUPLING
303 STAINLESS STEEL
1
4
ALLEN SET SCREW
STAINLESS STEEL
2
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
THIS DRAWING AND ALL INFORMATION
HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF
ASAHI/AMERICA. ANY COPYING,
REPRODUCTION OR UNAUTHORIZED USE
IS FORBIDDEN WITHOUT WRITTEN
CONSENT.
A H I TC
T/AM E R 1
ISO 9001 ('EI2TIPIED
35 GREEN STREET, P.O. BOX 653, MALDEN, MA.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
MACHINING 2PLDECIMALS ±.01
TOLERANCES: 3 PL DECIMALS ±.005
ANGULAR ±1/2°
FRACTIONAL ±1/64
FABRICATION 1/2"-8" ±1/4
TOLERANCES: 10" AND UP ± 1/2
ANGULAR ±1.01
1 /2" THRU 2" OMNI BALL VALVE
ELECTROMNI
NAME
DATE
DR
APPD
SIZE A
DWG. NO. 0119BV83
REV A
PROD
MATERIAL:
PRODUCT:
SCALE
1 5
SHEET OF
FINISH: N/A
WO#/CO#

NOTE: The shape and appearance of assembly differ
a little with nominal size
1 - ELECTROMNI (SERIES 83) ACTUATOR IS
AVAILABLE IN 110 VAC, 220 VAC, 24 VAC,
12 VAC, 24 VDC, AND 12 VDC MODELS
I I 2
REV DATE DESCRIPTION DR JAPPID]
A 3/8/10 FIRST ISSUE CW I DH
MMMMM
*PVC/CPVC/SOCKET/THREAD
FOR FLANGED/OTHER SEE CATALOG
*PVC/CPVC/SOCKET/THREAD
FOR FLANGED/OTHER SEE CATALOG
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL
QTY
1
T-21 BALL VALVE
PVC,CPVC,PP,PVDF
1
2
ELECTROMNI ACTUATOR
ABS & PVC
1
3
COUPLING
303 STAINLESS STEEL
1
4
BOLT
STAINLESS STEEL
4
5
FLAT WASHER
STAINLESS STEEL
4
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
THIS DRAWING AND ALL INFORMATION
HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF
ASAHI/AMERICA. ANY COPYING,
REPRODUCTION OR UNAUTHORIZED USE
IS FORBIDDEN WITHOUT WRITTEN
CONSENT.
T/AM E R 1 T C
A H I
ISO 9001 ('EIZTIPIED
35 GREEN STREET, P.O. BOX 653, MALDEN, MA.
DIMENSIONS
MACHINING
TOLERANCES:
FABRICATION
TOLERANCES:
ARE IN INCHES
2PLDECMALS ±.01
3 PL DECDECMALS ±.005
ANGULAR ±1/2°
FRACTIONAL ±1/64
1/2"-8" ±1/4
10" AND UP ± 1/2
ANGULAR '- 1.01
1 /2" THRU 2" T-21 BALL VALVE
TO SERIES 83 ACTUATOR
NAME
DATE
DR
APPD
SIZE A
DwG. NO. 0046BV83
REV
A
PROD
MATERIAL:
PRODUCT:
SCALE
1 5
SHEET OF 1
FINISH: N/A
WO#/CO#

5.40
H
Hl
2.63
NOTE: The shape and appearance of assembly differ
a little with nominal size
I � /
REV DATE DESCRIPTION I DR JAPPID1
A 3/8/10 FIRST ISSUE I CW I DH
SIZE
H 1
H
L
D
1 /2"
3.05
6.58
4.45
4.14
3/4"
3.56
6.83
5.08
4.14
1 ''
1 4.34
1 7.11
1 5.75
1 4.14
1-1 /2''
6.09
7.80
7.24
4.59
2''
6.87
8.25
8.23
5.10
*PVC/CPVC/SOCKET/THREAD
FOR FLANGED/OTHER SEE CATALOG
L-
ITEM
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL
QTY
1
T-21 BALL VALVE PVC,CPVC,PP,PVDF
1
2 ELECTROMNI ACTUATOR ABS & PVC
1
3
COUPLING 303 STAINLESS STEEL
1
4
BOLT STAINLESS STEEL
4
5
FLAT WASHER STAINLESS STEEL
4
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
THIS DRAWING AND ALL INFORMATION
HEREON IS THE PROPERTY OF
ASAHI/AMERICA. ANY COPYING,
REPRODUCTION OR UNAUTHORIZED USE
IS FORBIDDEN WITHOUT WRITTEN
CONSENT.
TC
T/AM E R 1
A H I
ISO 9001 ('EI2TIP'IED
35 GREEN STREET, P.O. BOX 653, MALDEN, MA.
DIMENSIONS
MACHINING
TOLERANCES:
ARE IN INCHES
2PL DECIMALS ±.01
3 PL DECIMALS ±.005
ANGULAR ±1/2°
FRACTIONAL ±1/64
1 /2" THRU 2" T-23 BALL VALVE
NAME
DATE
FABRICATION
1/2"-8" ±1/4
TO ELECTROMNI ACTUATOR
DR
TOLERANCES:
10" AND UP ± 1/2
ANGULAR '- 1.01
APPD
SIZE A
DwG. NO. 0132BV83
REV A
PROD
MATERIAL:
PRODUCT:
SCALE
1.5
SHEET OF 1
FINISH: 125N'
WO#/CO#

D05,64TROM 0
WATER POWERED ❑OSING TECHNOLOGY
ISO 9001 : 2000
Quality System Certified
M
a
E
MANUFACTURED BY - FABRIQUE PAR: u
z
z
DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL S.A.
Rue Pascal - B.P. 6 - 33370 TRESSES (BORDEAUX) - FRANCE
Tel. [phone]
Fax. [phone]
e.mail : [e-mail] - http://www.dosatron.com
This document does not forma contractual engagement on the part of Dosatron International and is for
information only. Dosatron International reserves the right to alter product specification or appearance
without prior notice. © DOSATRON INTERNATIONALS A. 2004.
Z>aSATRa1V
WA rER Pr]N+ERFo DoSING TFc fNO1 oG Y
0.7 m3/h - 3 GPM D 07 RE 125
mmlllliiiiii D 07 RE 5

00SATR0N 0
WRIER POWERED ❑OSING TECHNOLOGY
CUSTOMER SERVICE
SERVICE CLIENTELE:
WORLDWIDE - EUROPE :
DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL S.A.
Rue Pascal - B.P. 6 - 33370 TRESSES (BORDEAUX) - FRANCE
Tel. [phone]
Fax. [phone] (0)5 57 97 10 85
e.mail : [e-mail] - http://www.dosatron.com
NORTH & CENTRAL AMERICA :
DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL INC.
2090 SUNNYDALE BLVD. CLEARWATER - FL 33765 - USA
Tel. [phone] - Fax [phone]
Customer Service: 1-800-523-8499
e.mail : [e-mail] - http://www.dosatronusa.com
You have just become the owner of one of the latest in the line
of DOSATRON proportional dosing pumps and we congratulate
you on your choice.
The development of this model is the result of over 30 years
experience. Our engineers have placed the DOSATRON series at
the forefront of technical development in the field of nonelec-
tric proportional dosing pumps.
The choice of materials used in manufacture was most meticu-
lous in order to resist chemical attack from the great majority of
injectable products on the market. This DOSATRON will, as time
goes by, prove itself to be a most faithful ally.
A little care and attention, regularly spent, will guarantee you
an operation in which the word breakdown has no place.
PLEASE, THEREFORE, READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY
BEFORE PUTTING THE DOSATRON INTO OPERATION.
Important !
The complete model reference and the serial number of
your DOSATRON is stamped on the pump body.
Please record this number in the space below and refer to
it when you call your distributor for information, parts,
and service.
Ref. #................................................................................
Serial#............................................................................
PurchaseDate................................................................
© DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL/ 3

SPECIFICATIONS
I D07RE125 D07RE5
Practical operating flow range*: 5 I/h mini - 700 I/h maxi
"For operating unit with other fluids than water, please contact us. [0.022 US GPM-3 US GPM]
Operating pressure:
bar 0.308W 0.30 - 6
PSI 4.3-8 4.3-85
Externally adjustable injection rate:
% Fm 0.15-1.25 0.8-5.5
ratio 1 : 666 - 1 : 80 1 : 128 - 1 : 20
Concentrated additive injection:
Mini I/h - Maxi I/h EL 0.0075 - 8.75 0.8 - 38.5
US FI. oz/min 0042 - 5 0.45 - 21.8
Package contents: 1 Compact Dosatron - 1 mounting bracket -
1 transparent suction tube 175 cm long [69"], o 6 x 9 mm [1 /4"id x 3/8" od] -
1 owner's manual Package size: 16 x 33 x 18.5 cm (6 5/16" x 13" x 7 1 /4" -
Package weight: 1 kg [92.2 us Ibs]
Maximum operating water temperature: 40-C [104°F]
for operating the unit with higher temperatures, please contact us.
Minimum operating water temperature: 5OC [4171
Dosing rate: i.e. Adjustment at 1 % = 1 : 100
= 1 V concentrate into 100 V water
Average dosing accuracy: +/- 5% (charts on demand)_
Repeatability: +/- 3% (API Standard)_
Pressure loss: 0.3 — 1.4 bar [4.3 — 20.3 PSI]
Built-in airbleeder: yes
Motor: hydraulic piston
Hydraulic motor capacity: 0.225 1 [0.059 US Gallons] (1 cycle)
••
Infection : internal
Dosing plunger: simple effet, injection on the upstream
Injection check valve: spring -loaded cone
•
Self -priming: yes
Maximim viscosity of concentrate: 400 cSt at 200C [68°F]
Max. vertical or horizontal suction of the concentrate: 4 m [13ft]
Strainer: yes — foot strainer with weight
Housing: polypropylene, EPDM Injection area: polypropylene, poly -
Motor piston: polypropylene, peek, ethylene, hastelloy (check valve spring)
stainless steel, teflon, EPDM HT Injection hose: PVC
option : standard : not available for this model
Optimized compatibility
AF : Recommended seals for
alkaline concentrate
VF : Recommended seals for acid
concentrate
Injection hose: Special material
hose and foot strainer available
Optimized installation
BP: integrated by-pass -
Other: please contact us
These options allow adapting your Dosatron to your needs.
Contact our technical service to help determine what option
you may need.
Each Dosatron unit is factory tested.
The Dosatron Compact is equipped with a security valve integrated in the
Dosatron inlet, which will open and let the
water flow through in case of inop-
portune stopping of the
motor. This security -"bypass"
needs a differential pressure P1 ' P2
of 1.5 bar [21 PSI] below which
the valve will not operate.
Pressure 1 - Pressure 2 a 1.5 bar [21 PSI]
O DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL / 4 O DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL / 5

Precise, simple
and reliable
Motor
Clear
water
Dosing
Adjustment
(%) ratio
A unique technology associating
all dosing functions
Installed directly in the water supply
line, the Dosatron operates by using
the flow of water as the power sour-
ce. The water activates the
Dosatron, which takes up the requi-
red percentage of concentrate
directly from the container and
injects it into the water. Inside the
Dosatron, the concentrate is mixed
with the water, and the water pres-
sure forces the solution
downstream. The dose of concentra-
I Solution
water
+ % additive
Concentrated
additive to be
dosed
to will be directly proportional to the
volume of water entering the
Dosatron, regardless of variations in
flow or pressure, which may occur in
the main line.
1 -GENERAL REMARKS
- When connecting a DOSATRON
either to the public water supply
or to its own water source, you
must respect the regulations in
force concerning protection of the
source i.e. backflow prevention,
etc.
When installing a Dosatron
Compact, check that the bypass is
on the "ON" -position.
-The Dosatron Compact is equipped
with a security valve integrated in
the Dosatron inlet, which will open
and let the water flow through in
case of inopportune stopping of the
motor. This security -"bypass" needs a
differential pressure of 1.5 bar below
which the valve will not operate.
- Install the Dosatron Compact taking
into consideration the direction of the
water flow (arrow on the pump body),
otherwise the security valve might
move and damage the dosing unit.
-In a case where the water installa-
tion is higher than the DOSATRON
itself, there is a possible risk of water
and concentrate flowing back
through the DOSATRON. In this
case, installing a non -return valve
downstream is recommended.
- Do not install the DOSATRON just
above an acid container, (risk of acid
fumes attacking the DOSATRON)
and protect it from possible contact
with corrosive products.
- Protect the DOSATRON from
freezing temperatures by draining it
and store it away from sources of
excessive heat.
- Do not install the DOSATRON on
the suction side of the supply pump
(risk of siphoning).
- During any intervention the
operator must stay in front of the
DOSATRON and wear protective
eyewear and gloves.
-Turn off the water supply and allow
the pressure to drop to zero before
adjusting the injection rate.
- It is the responsibility of the
owner/operator to replace the
injection seals annually to ensure
precise injection.
- The setting of the Dosatron's
dosing rate is the sole responsibility
of the user. The user has to respect
the recommendations given by the
manufacturer of the chemical pro-
duct.
- It is the responsibility of the
owner/operator to check that the
flow and pressure of the installation
do not exceed the DOSATRON cha-
racteristics.
- It is the responsibility of the
owner/operator of the DOSATRON,
to determine the correct amount of
solution and injection ratio to
obtain the desired result.
-An air inlet, an impurity or a chemi-
cal attack on seal can interrupt the
O DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL / 6 O DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL / 7

dosing function. It is recommended
to periodically check that the solu-
tion is being correctly drawn up into
the DOSATRON.
- Change the suction tube as soon as
it seems damaged by the chemical.
- Relieve the pressure after use
(advised).
- Rinsing of the DOSATRON is
required :
when changing chemicals,
before handling the DOSATRON, to
avoid any contact with the chemical.
- Before applying any aggressive
chemicals, please consult your dis-
tributor to confirm compatibility
with the dosing pump.
- All assembly should be done
without tool, hand tighten only.
2 - WATER WITH HIGH PARTICLE
CONTENT
- A (ex.: 300 mesh - 60 microns
depending on your water quality)
water filter must be installed prior to
the DOSATRON (see accessories), if
a filter is not installed abrasive subs-
tances will cause the DOSATRON to
deteriorate prematurely.
3 - WATER -HAMMER / EXCESSIVE
FLOW
- For installations subject to water
hammer a protection device such as
a check valve or union ball check
must be fitted (pressure/flow
control system).
- For automatic installations, slow
opening and closing solenoid valves
are preferable.
- In an installation where a
DOSATRON serves several sectors, the
closing of one sector and the opening
of another sector must be done at the
same time (simultaneous operation of
the solenoid valves).
4 - INSTALLATION LOCATION
-The location of the DOSATRON and
concentrate container should be
accessible, but should never present
a risk of pollution or contamination.
- It is recommended to label all
water lines with a warning about
the injected solution i.e. Not For
Human Consumption.
5 - MAINTENANCE
- Rinse the injection areas after
using the DOSATRON. To do this,
insert suction tube into container of
clean water and inject about a 1 /4
liter [8 1 /2 US Fl.oz].
- Routine maintenance once a year
will add to the life ofyour DOSATRON.
Change the dosing seals at least once
a year, depending on its use.
6 - SERVICE
- This DOSATRON was tested prior to
packaging.
- Complete maintenance and seal
kits are available.
-Call your DOSATRON distributor for
service or parts.
ATTENTION: Check that the bypass
is in "ON" -position.
'�c?���
Partially open the water inlet valve.
�_i
Press the bleed button on the top
-'
-
of the DOSATRON.
j .�
- When a constant flow of water is
ON
OFF
seen coming from around the bleed
button (no more "spitting" of air), release the button.
}
- Open the water inlet valve slowly, the DOSATRON is
self -priming.
- Operate the DOSATRON until the product to be injected is drawn up into
the injection part (the product is visible through the plastic
tube).
- The DOSATRON makes a characteristic "click -clack" noise when working.
NOTE: The time required to prime the suction tube depends on the water
flow -rate, the ratio setting and the length of the suction tube. To bleed the
air from the suction tube and accelerate the priming, set the injection rate
at maximum. Once the DOSATRON is primed, adjust to the required injec-
tion rate (see § ADJUSTING THE INJECTION RATE).
IMPORTANT ! Use no tools
Adjustment must be made when there is no pressure in the Dosatron.
- Turn off the water supply and allow the pressure to drop to zero.
- Unscrew the
blocking ring.
- Screw or u nscrew
the adjusting nut
so as to bring the
top of the nut into
line with the des-
ired injection rate.
- Tighten the
blocking ring.
O DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL / 8
O DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL / 9

coDloe�
ja- y---
MP006
I �
� I I
MPDM
Fl
-
PCDlase
ri
\_ IMJJ
_I
PJDI108
coDloosMEL
L MP000------------
ICI
I $
I
INS �� ^ MP0115B
JA ------
PCDion
tl
I w tl
CJP
logo
e II m tl I
© DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL/ 10 © DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL/ 11

Troubleshooting
Note: the Dosatron Compact is equipped with a security valve integrated in
the Dosatron inlet, which will open and let the water flow through in case of
inopportune stopping of the motor. This security -"bypass" needs a differential
pressure of 1.5 bar below which the valve will not operate.
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
SOLUTION
Motor.
DOSATRON does
The Dosatron is not on "ON"
Put the button on "ON"
not start or stops
Air has not been
Bleed air from unit,
bled from unit
by bleed button
Maximum flow
1. Reduce flow, restart unit
exceeded.
2. Return the Dosatron
to your distributor
Motor piston stalled
Return unit to your
or damaged
service center for repair
Leak at the security
1. Check or clean
valve
the valve seal
2. Return the Dosatron
to your distributor
No water at
Network pressure is
Increase the pression
the outlet
not sufficient
to more than 0.3 bar
Water flowing back
Contaminated, worn,
Clean or replace them
into concentrate
or missing check
container
valve parts
No suction of
The motor piston
See motor piston section
concentrate
has stopped
Air leak (inlet) in the
Check the tightness be -
suction tube
tween nut and suction hose
Blocked suction tube or
Clean or replace it
clogged strainer
Missing or worn
Clean or replace it
suction check valve seal
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
SOLUTION
No suction of
Missing or worn
Clean or replace it
concentrate
plunger seal
Worn injection stem
Replace it
Under injection
Suction of air
1. Check the tightness of
the nuts in the injection
area
2. Check suction tube
Dirty or worn check
Clean or replace it.
valve seal.
Maximum flow
Reduce flow
exceeded (cavitation)
Worn plunger seal
Replace it
Worn injection stem
Replace it
Leaks between
Injection sleeve seal
Replace it
motor part and
is damaged or
injection part
positioned incorrectly
Leaks between the
Injection stem
Replace it
adjusting nut and
seal damaged,
the blocking ring
positioned incorrectly
or missing
Leaks between
Top cap seal is
Unscrew the top cap,
pump body and
damaged, positioned
clean the seal seating,
top cap
incorrectly or missing
replace or change the seal.
Position correctly
the top cap.
THE MANUFACTURER DECLINES ALL RESPONSIBILITY
IF THE DOSATRON IS USED IN CONDITIONS THAT DO NOT
CORRESPOND TO THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
AS INDICATED IN THIS MANUAL.
© DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL/ 12 © DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL/ 13

Limited warranty
DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL S.A. will
provide for replacement of all parts
shown to be defective in material or
workmanship during a period of twelve
months from the date of purchase by
the original purchaser. To obtain war-
ranty replacement of a part, the
DOSATRON must be returned with ori-
ginal proof of purchase receipt to the
manufacturer or authorized distributor
and thereafter recognized as defective
after examination by the technical ser-
vices of the manufacturer or
distributor. The DOSATRON must be
flushed of any chemical and sentto the
manufacturer or distributor prepaid,
but will be returned free of charge once
repairs are made if found to be covered
by the warranty. Any repairs made
under warranty will not extend the ini-
tial warranty period.
This warranty only covers circumstan-
ces where the part has failed due to
defects caused by the manufacturing
process. This warranty is invalid if the
defects are found to be due to the pro-
duct's misuse, inappropriate use of
tools, lack of maintenance or defective
installation or environmental acci-
dents or corrosion by foreign bodies
and liquids found within or in proximity
to the DOSATRON. Before using any
aggressive chemicals, please consult
your distributor to confirm compati-
bility with the dosing pump.
The seals and "o-rings" are not covered
under warranty, nor is damage to the
DOSATRON caused by water impuri-
ties such as sand. A filter (ex.: 300
mesh - 60 microns depending on your
water quality) must be used in front of
the DOSATRON for the warranty to be
valid. DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL
S.A. declines any responsibility if the
DOSATRON is not used in compliance
with the operating instructions and
tolerances as indicated in this owner's
manual.
This warranty gives you specific legal
rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
But any implied warranty or merchan-
tability or fitness for a particular
purpose applicable to this product is
limited in duration to the time period
of this written warranty or any implied
warranty.
There is no warranty express or implied
relating in anywayto products used in
conjunction with DOSATRON INTER-
NATIONAL S.A. products.
The manufacturer or authorized distri-
butor shall not be liable for incidental
or consequential damage, such as any
economic loss, resulting from breach of
this written warranty or any implied
warranty.
There are no warranties, express or
implied, which extend beyond those
described above.
This document does not form a contractual engagement on the part
of DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL and is for information only.
The company DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL reserves the right
to alter product specification or appearance without prior notice.
© DOSATRON INTERNATIONAL/ 14

Please read and save this Repair Parts Manual. Read this manual and the General Operating Instructions carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate
or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing all safety information. The Safety Instructions are contained in the General Operating
Instructions. Failure to comply with the safety instructions accompanying this product could result in personal injury and/or property damage! Retain instructions
for future reference. AMT reserves the right to discontinue any model or change specifications at any time without incurring any obligation.
©2014 American Machine & Tool Co., Inc. of PA, A Subsidiary of The Gorman -Rupp Company, All Rights Reserved.
Periodic maintenance and inspection is required on all pumps to insure proper operation. Unit must be clear of debris and sediment. Inspect for leaks and loose bolts. Failure to do so
voids warranty.
Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
Vertical Inline Models AGorman-Rupp Company
Refer to pump manual 1808-634-00 for General Operating and Safety Instructions.
DESCRIPTION
APPLICATIONS
These commercial/industrial centrifugal pumps are non -self -priming (gravity feed) units designed to handle high-pressure/low-flow liquid transfer applications
where no suction lift is required. Typical installations include hot and chilled water, boiler feed, condensate return, irrigation, high pressure wash -down, booster
service, and sprinkler systems. These pumps have NOT been investigated for use in potable (drinking) water systems.
FEATURES
The in -line port design and compact footprint of these pumps allows for a clean installation. All models feature a shaft seal that can be replaced easily without the
need to disassemble the entire pump. An optional ANSI/ASME flange kit is available. Pumps are equipped with high efficiency closed impellers, and have a cas-
ing working pressure to 536 ft./232 psi [1600 kPa]. Handle liquid temperatures from 40° F to 180° F [4° to 82° C]. For use with clear, nonabrasive, nonflammable
liquids compatible with pump component materials.
MOTOR
All models have 3450 RPM (2850 RPM for 50 Hz) continuous duty TEFC motors. Single phase units are capacitor start and have automatic reset thermal protec-
tion. All models are manual mode and require field wiring, no controls are supplied.
A CAUTION
Motors have multi -voltage options. To avoid damage to motor, be sure to arrange internal motor wiring to match electric supply voltage before applying power
(see motor nameplate for specific wiring diagram).
PUMP CONSTRUCTION
Pump construction is cast iron casing and adapter; 304 stainless steel impellers, chambers and column; Teflon® wear rings; 304L stainless steel pump shaft
with tungsten carbide sleeve bearings; EPDM o-rings and gaskets; a mechanical shaft seal of stainless steel, carbon graphite, and tungsten carbide wear faces.
A WARNING Screws (Ref. No. 41) are loosened, be sure to re -tighten evenly and torque to
33 ft-lbs [45 N-m] to avoid Gasket (Ref. No. 39) failure.
All units are for use with non-flammable, non-abrasive liquids compatible
with pump component materials. Starving the pump of liquid could cause low performance and damage to pump
and seal. To avoid this, use suction piping that is short and either matches
IMPORTANT: Not for use with petroleum based liquids. pump port diameter or is larger, do not reduce. Also, immediately preceding
pump inlet, provide a section of straight pipe equal in length to a minimum 4
INSTALLATION diameters of pipe size and avoid using valves.
MOUNTING
Preferred mounting position is with motor shaft aligned vertically.
(See Figure 1)
1. Choose a solid, level surface with adequate support such as a concrete
slab floor.
2. Use a level against pump to check for plumb. For uneven surfaces, shim
beneath feet of Casing (Ref. No. 38) to attain proper alignment.
3. Securely fasten Casing to mount surface at all four mount holes to avoid
tip -over of pump. If space limitations dictate, pump may also be mounted
horizontally if adequate support is provided. Do NOT mount motor end
down or with shaft centerline below horizontal plane.
PIPING
Pump may have a protective cover over inlet and outlet for shipping purposes.
If present, be sure to remove these covers prior to attaching piping. If flange
These pumps develop very high pressures. Be sure to confirm that pressure
rating of all piping and fittings is adequately sized before use. Rating must be
sufficiently larger than the combination of both inlet pressure plus the maximum
pressure pump can develop.
Preferred Mounting Alternative Mounting
Mounting
5910-251-00 1 4/2014

Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
AWARNING
Piping and/or pipe fittings with an insufficient pressure rating may burst
and cause personal injury and/or property damage.
MAXIMUM INLET PRESSURE
"1" Series
2 to 25...................................................................... 335 ft./l45 psi [1000 kPa]
27 stage................................................................... 500 ft./217 psi [1500 kPa]
"3" Series
2 to 15...................................................................... 335 ft./l45 psi [1000 kPa]
17 to 25.................................................................... 500 ft./217 psi [1500 kPa]
"5" Series
2 to 9........................................................................ 335 ft./l45 psi [1000 kPa]
10 to 29.................................................................... 500 ft./217 psi [1500 kPa]
If system pressure has potential to exceed number listed above, then a check
valve is required on discharge side of pump. This will ensure that proper inlet
pressure is maintained when pump shuts off.
MAXIMUM OUTLET PRESSURE
If system pressure in excess of 536 ft./232 psi [1600 kPa] is possible, then it is
necessary to provide means to prevent this. Examples include a bypass valve
or pressure switch on discharge of pump set at or below this number.
OPERATION
Become familiar with pump components (See Figure 2).
Vent Plug (Ref. No. 13) — Used to purge air from pump.
Wash Plug (Ref. No. 11) — Used in applications where seal wash is desired to
extend life of shaft seal.
Bypass Valve (Ref. No. 42) — Connects suction and discharge sides of pump,
making filling/draining procedure easier. During operation, bypass valve must
be closed.
A CAUTION
Never run pump dry or with flow shutoff. When pump is running, always
maintain a minimum flow of 4 gpm [0.9 m3/h] to avoid damage to pump.
STARTUP PROCEDURE
A CAUTION
To avoid pump damage, it is very important to purge all air from pump
before initial startup.
1. Close discharge valve if present.
2. Permit liquid to flow into pump thru suction port by gravity.
3. Allow air to escape from pump by cracking open Vent Plug (Ref. No. 13)
in top of pump housing near motor.
4. Wait for liquid to cease sputtering. When liquid flow changes to a steady
stream with no air, close Vent Plug.
Wash
Drain
Byp;
Va
Figure 2 - Components
5. Run pump briefly, then repeat steps 1 thru 4 repeatedly until all air is
evacuated. Pump is now ready to be run.
ROTATION
Proper rotation is CLOCKWISE when looking up at shaft end of motor, see
directional arrow cast into motorAdapter (Ref. No. 8). Bump motor on/off briefly
to confirm motor is wired for correct rotation. Disregard rotation information
found elsewhere in safety manual.
DRAINING
1. Remove Bypass Valve (Ref. No. 42) and Vent Plug (Ref. No. 13)
completely.
2. Allow liquid to drain.
3. If pump is to be subjected to freezing temperatures, do not reinstall Valve/
Plug.
CYCLING
Frequent on/off cycling can shorten motor life. System should be designed so
that pump is NOT starting more than 15 times per hour.
MAINTENANCE
AWARNING
Make certain that unit is disconnected from power source before
attempting to service or remove any components!
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to Figure 7
1. Remove two coupling Shields (Ref. No. 9) by unscrewing two Fasteners
(Ref. No. 10) for each.
2. Loosen four Fasteners (Ref. No. 4) in Coupling (Ref. No. 3) evenly until
Motor shaft (Ref. No. 1) can turn independently from Coupling.
3. Remove four Fasteners (Ref. No. 14) from Adapter (Ref. No 8). Motor is
now free, lift straight up to remove from unit.
REASSEMBLY
1. Remove key (if present) from new Motor shaft and discard.
2. Wipe any protective film from Motor end bell and shaft, be sure they are
5910-251-00 2 4/2014

Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
A
Prager I k-:--
Al
Figure 3 - Coupling Alignment
clean.
3. Carefully guide Motor shaft into Coupling while setting new Motor into
place.
4. Reinstall four Fasteners thru Adapter. Tighten evenly and in diagonal
pattern, then torque to the following specifications:
3/8..................................................................................17 ft-Ibs. [23 N-m]
1/2..................................................................................30 ft-Ibs. [41 N-m]
5. Locate shaft keyway in center of Coupling (See Figure 3) and maintain
this position, then snug up Fasteners evenly. Check gap between coupling
halves to be sure it remains even on both sides. Torque Fasteners to the
following specifications.
M6 .....................10 ft-Ibs. [14 N-m]
M8 .....................23 ft-Ibs. [31 N-m]
M10....................46 ft-Ibs. [62 N-m]
6. Rotate pump Shaft by hand. If binding or rubbing is found, loosen Coupling
and readjust position.
7. Reattach Shields and proceed to Startup Procedure section.
SHAFT SEAL REPLACEMENT
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to Figure 7.
1. Remove Motor (see Motor Replacement section).
2. Remove Coupling (Ref. No. 3) and Rod (Ref. No. 2) by unthreading
Screws (Ref. No. 4).
3. Loosen, but do not remove set screws in Shaft Seal Assembly (Ref. No.
7).
4. Unscrew Shaft Seal Assembly in a counter -clockwise direction, then
carefully lift off of Shaft (Ref. No. 21).
REASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT: Pump Shaft may have been gouged from set screws. Before
installing new Shaft Seal Assembly, smooth -over these gouges with a light grit
emery cloth to prevent damage to new seal.
1. Once shaft is free of burrs, lubricate Shaft and o-ring cavity in Adapter
(Ref. No. 8) with soapy water.
2. Carefully slide new Shaft Seal Assembly onto Shaft, then tighten in
clockwise direction and torque to 26 ft-Ibs [35 N-m].
3. Mark or otherwise note shaft height. Lift shaft as high as it will go, then
lower it back down'/2 the total distance. Maintain this position while evenly
tightening 3 set screws in seal collar and torque each to 2 ft-Ibs. [2.5 N-m].
4. Place Rod thru Shaft, then reinstall Coupling and screws but do NOT
tighten.
5. Proceed to Reassembly under Motor Replacement section.
PUMP OVERHAUL/INSPECTION
To inspect condition of pump internals, proceed as follows:
NOTE: To facilitate overhaul, a handy holding device can be made easily. Take
a short piece of 2x4 lumber and on the narrow side, drill a 1/2" diameter blind
hole 3" deep. Place block into bench vice with hole facing up to receive pump
shaft after step 5 (see Figure 4).
DISASSEMBLY
1. Proceed to Disassembly under Shaft Seal Replacement.
2. Remove 4 Fastener sets (Ref. Nos. 15 & 16).
3. Lift Adapter (Ref. No. 8) from pump, use a soft mallet to break loose
if necessary. NOTE: Inspect o-ring groove in Adapter after o-ring is
removed. Rust/pitting in this region may cause leaks, be sure to clean or
replace Adapter entirely if damage is excessive.
4. Remove wave Spring (Ref. No. 18) from Adapter. NOTE: Inspect wave
Spring for cracks and replace if found.
5. Pump internals can now be removed all at once. Use pump Shaft (Ref.
No. 21) as a handle and gently lift the entire assembly out. If stage-1
Volute (Ref. No. 38) stays behind, it can be removed and inspected later.
IMPORTANT: Stainless steel components deform easily, be careful to avoid
damaging pump components during disassembly.
6. Unscrew Hex Nut (Ref. No. 37) from pump Shaft in a counter -clockwise
direction and remove along with Sleeve Cup (Ref. No. 35).
7. Lift Volute (if still present) and Impeller (Ref. No. 26) from stack and set
aside.
IMPORTANT. Take note of sequence parts are arranged in and direction they
are facing, number and mark if necessary (see Figure 6 & 7).
8. Lift next Volute/Crossover (Ref. No. 34), Inner Bearing (Ref. No. 32), and
Figure 4 - Inspection
-iaft
oral Nail
tench Vise
5910-251-00 3
4/2014

Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
Impeller from stack.
NOTE: Inspect Inner and Outer Bearings for wear. If grooves can be seen or
felt, replace both bearings as a set.
9. Use a large straight blade screwdriver to carefully pry Cap (Ref. No. 28)
from Crossover to free Wear Ring (Ref. No. 29).
NOTE: Inspect for wear by placing Wear Ring over nose of Impeller and noting
clearance between two diameters. If fit is not snug, replace Wear Ring.
10. Repeat Steps 7 and& 8 for each stage (some stages have no bearings)
NOTE: Inspect Shaft (Ref. No. 21) for grooves, replace if splines are worn.
11. Lift Cylinder (Ref. No. 20) from Casing (Ref. No. 39), use a soft mallet to
break loose if necessary.
NOTE: Inspect o-ring groove in Casing after o-ring is removed. Rust/pitting
in this region may cause leaks, be sure to clean or replace Casing entirely if
damage is excessive.
12. If stage-1 Volute (Ref. No. 38) remains in Casing, now is the time to
remove it. Gently pry loose with a straight blade screwdriver, being careful
to avoid bending it.
13. Unscrew 2 fasteners (Ref. No. 42).
14. Use a straight blade screwdriver to pry pipe Flange (Ref. No. 41) loose.
15. Use a putty knife to scrape off old Gasket (Ref. No. 40) from Flange and
Casing.
REASSEMBLY
1. Always use new Gaskets (Ref. No. 40) when reassembling. Attach pipe
Flanges (Ref. No. 41) with Fasteners (Ref. No. 42). Tighten evenly and
torque to 33 ft-Ibs [45 N-m].
2. Place new O-ring (Ref. No. 19) into cleaned groove of Casing (Ref. No.
39), be sure to lubricate with soapy water or suitable material.
3. Place stage-1 Volute (Ref. No. 38) back into Casing (Ref. No. 39) making
sure it is seated properly.
4. Carefully guide Cylinder (Ref. No. 20) back into Casing and press down.
IMPORTANT: If Cylinder does not fully seat, 0-ring may be pinched. If this
occurs, lift Cylinder back out and try stretching O-ring. Be sure components are
adequately lubricated and have not been damaged. Repeat process until end
of Cylinder bottoms on Casing.
5. Reassemble Impellers (Ref. No 26), Crossovers (Ref. No. 34), etc. onto
pump Shaft (Ref. No. 21) in same order they were removed (see Figure 6
& 7) and torque Hex Nut w/Nyloc (Ref. No. 37) to 13 ft-Ibs [18 N-m]
IMPORTANT: NEVER reuse Hex Nut w/Nyloc, ALWAYS replace with new
unused one.
6. Take Impeller/Crossover stack by Shaft and lower into pump until properly
seated.
7. Place new O-ring (Ref. No. 19) into cleaned groove of Adapter (Ref. No.
8), be sure to lubricate with soapy water or suitable material.
8. Install wave Spring (Ref. No. 18) with ends pointed towards Adapter. With
wave Spring seated on proper landing in Adapter, carefully guide Adapter
onto pump and press down.
IMPORTANT: If Adapter does not fully seat, O-ring may be pinched. If this
occurs, lift Cylinder back out and try stretching O-ring. Be sure components
are adequately lubricated and have not been damaged. Repeat process until
Adapter bottoms on end of Cylinder.
9. Reinstall Fasteners (Ref. Nos. 15 & 16) onto Staybolts (Ref. No. 17) and
tighten diagonally.
10. Proceed to Reassembly portion of Shaft Seal Replacement.
5910-251-00 4 4/2014

Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
26
36
37
n
mm
ME
MM
�L
Et
EC
ME
Mw,
0
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
r9 R
N %b r� Op G1
Figure 5 -Assembly Map "1" & "Y Series
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
r y
a1 .
a1
(M
a1
a1 !
a1
at
at
a1
a1
a1
i
27
26
25
24
23
5910-251-00 5 4/2014

Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
26 (: �W
36
37
A
0
C
C
��t
��C
LAW
®C
©MC
MENE
EMM©C
©"M0ire
C
C
I C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
B
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
a�
Vl
N(
w
i N
M
0
H
4
iv
i iA
Lh
0w
N
lb
H
1�
d
Vl
I 00
w
Vl
0!
N
cn
O
w4
0)
Ir
rl
0?
av
i
N
rl
0l
; c�
M
rl
07
cv
E
V4
m
: 0
IA
rl
v
> cm
tb
3 V4
w
c�
00
j rl
Ol
c�
O
N
IV
c�
? N
i N
d
cs
'� et
N
0V
c+
tD
N
' cn
i GM
N
Figure 6 -Assembly Map "Y Series
5910-251-00 6
29
28
27
26
25
24.
23
_..............
22
19
20
17_.�.
15
14.
13.__.
12
11
10Y
9___.
6
4.._.
1
4/2014

Multistage Centrifugal Pumps
For Repair Parts contact dealer where pump was purchased.
Please provide following information:
-Model Number
-Serial Number (if any)
Part description and number as shown in parts list
Figure 7 - Repair Parts Illustrations
5910-251-00 7 4/2014

Repair Parts List
1
Motor
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
1
2
Rod
5900-072-00
5900-072-00
5900-072-00
1
3
Coupling
Incl. w/Ref 5
Incl. w/Ref 5
Incl. w/Ref 5
2
4
Socket Head Cap Screw - ISO Class 12.9
* Incl. w/Ref 5
* Incl. w/Ref 5
* Incl. w/Ref 5
4
5
Coupling Kit (ncludes Ref. Nos. 2, 3, 4)
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
1
6
O-ring - EPDM
* M2.65x22.4
* M2.65x22.4
* M2.65x22.4
1
7
Shaft Seal - EPDM, Carbon, Tungsten Carbide (Includes Ref. No. 6)
5900-300-00
5900-300-00
5900-300-00
1
8
Adapter
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
1
9
Shield
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
2
10
Pan Head Machine Screw
* M4-0.7x8
* M4-0.7x8
* M4-0.7x8
4
11
O-ring - EPDM
* M2.4x17.8
* M2.4x17.8
* M2.4x17.8
3
12
Wash Plug Assembly (Includes Ref. No. 11)
5900-044-90
5900-044-90
5900-044-90
1
13
Vent Plug Assembly (Includes Ref. No. 11)
5900-044-90
5900-044-90
5900-044-90
1
14
Hex Head Cap Screw - SAE Grade 5
* See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
4
15
Hex Nut -ASTMClass A2-70
* M12-1.75
* M12-1.75
* M12-1.75
4
16
Flat Washer - SS
* M12
* M12
* M12
4
17
Staybolt (multiple lengths)
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
4
18
Spring
5900-036-00
5900-036-00
5900-036-00
1
19
O-ring - EPDM
* M3.5x138
* M3.5x138
* M3.5x138
2
20
Cylinder (multiple lengths)
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
1
21
Shaft (multiple lengths)
See Page 9
See Page 9
See Page 10
1
22
Retaining Ring
5900-090-00
5900-090-00
5900-090-00
1
23
Collar
5900-086-00
5900-086-00
5900-086-00
1
24
Top Plate Weldment w/Crossover (Standard)
5900-172-00
5900-172-00
5930-172-00
1
24a
Top Plate Weldment (2-Stage Models Only)
5900-170-00
5900-170-00
N/A
1
25
Sleeve 18.Omm (2-Stage Models Only)
5900-094-00
5900-094-00
N/A
1
26
Impeller Weldment
5900-010-00
5920-010-00
5930-010-00
Varies
27
Sleeve17.5/26.Omm (Standard)
5900-080-00
5900-080-00
5930-090-00
Varies
28
Cap
Incl. w/Ref 30
Incl. w/Ref 30
Incl. w/Ref 30
Varies
29
Wear Ring - Teflon®
Incl. w/Ref 30
Incl. w/Ref 30
Incl. w/Ref 30
Varies
30
Crossover Weldment (Includes 28, 29)
5900-160-00
5900-160-00
5930-160-00
Varies
31
Sleeve 6.5/15.Omm (Bearing Companion)
5900-078-00
5900-078-00
5930-088-00
Varies
32
Bearing Inner - Tungsten Carbide
5900-082-00
5900-082-00
5900-082-00
Varies
33
Bearing Outer - Tungsten Carbide
Incl. w/Ref 34
Incl. w/Ref 34
Incl. w/Ref 34
Varies
34
Crossover Weldment w/Bearing (Includes 28, 29, 33)
5900-162-00
5900-162-00
5930-162-00
Varies
35
Sleeve Cup
5900-076-00
5900-076-00
5900-076-00
1
36
Star Washer
* M8
* M8
* M8
1
37
Hex Nut w/Nyloc
* M8-1.25
* M8-1.25
* M8-1.25
1
38
Volute Weldment (Includes 28, 29)
5900-150-00
5900-150-00
5930-150-00
Varies
39
Casing
5900-001-00
5900-001-00
5900-001-00
1
40
Oval Gasket - EPDM
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
2
41
NPT Flange
5900-050-01
5900-050-01
5900-050-02
2
42
Hex Head Cap Screw - Class A2-70
* M10-1.50x40
* M10-1.50x40
* M10-1.50x40
4
43
Vent Plug Assembly (Includes Ref. No. 11)
5900-048-90
5900-048-90
5900-048-90
1
44
Hex Head Cap Screw
* 5/8"UNCx2'/z'
* 5/8"UNCx2'/z'
* 5/8"UNCx2'/z'
8
45
Pipe Flange -ANSI/ASME 250# (Outer)
* 1'/4" NPT
* 1'/4' NPT
* 1'/4' NPT
2
46
Pipe Flange-ANSI/ASME 250# (Inner)
* 1" NPT
* 1" NPT
* 1'/4' NPT
2
47
Gasket
5900-068-00
5900-068-00
5900-068-00
2
48
Hex Nut
* 5/8"-18UNC
* 5/8"-18UNC
* 5/8"-18UNC
8
49
Pipe Nipple
* 1" NPT
* 1" NPT
* 1'/4' NPT
2
50
Pipe Flange Kit -ANSI/ASME 250# (Includes one each: 45, 46, 47, 49; and
5900-064-90
5900-064-90
5900-064-91
2
four each: 44, 48)
KIT
Seal Kit - Complete (Includes Ref. Nos. 7, 11, 19, 40)
5900-300-90
5900-300-90
5900-300-90
1
(*)
Standard hardware item, available locally.
5910-251-00 8
4/2014

J
N
i`
IL
U)
U)
5910-251-00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 C
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 c
M
M't
Li)
(o
f-
w
0
0
r
N M
LA
f:
0
r
M
u)
f�
M
M't
LC')
Co
I�
M
M
O
r
N
M
Ltj
f�
0 c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
n
LL)
Ln
LL)
LL)
LL)
Ln
LD
LL)
LO
lf)
In LD
l(.
LO
LL.
L(i
LD
Ln
LD
LL)
La
LD
L()
LD
LL)
LO
LL)
La
LLi
Lfi
LD
Lo
LD
LL) L(
C)
O
O
O
0
O
0
O
O
O
O 0
O
O
O
O
0
O
0
O
O
0
O
o
O
0
O
O
0
O
o
0
O
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
a)
O
O
O
a)
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
6)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O a
m
U')
LO
In
In
U')
m
LO
In
In
LO In
LO
LO
In
In
LO
In
La
In
In
m
LO
m
LO
m
In
In
In
LO
m
LO
m
LO
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
N
N
V
LO
(D
n•
w
m
O_
M
Ln
n•
0
M
LO
n•
N
N
V
m(0
n•
w
0
O_
N_
M
Ln
n•
(A
O
O
O
CD
CD
C)
CD
O
_
_N
N
N
N
N
O
C)
CD
CD
CD
O
CD
O
_
C4
CO
CO
O
O
CO
O
CO
O
Ca
CO CO
CO
co
Ca
Ca
CO
9
O
CO
CO
O
CO
O
CO
O
CO
CO
(D
CO
(o
CO
(o
a
CO CC
O
CD
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O c
CDCD
O
O
O
CDO
CD
O
O
O O
CD
O
O
O
O
CDO
CD
O
O
CDO
CDO
CD
O
O
C)O
CDO
O C
O
O
O
O
0)O
0)O
0)O
O 0)
O
O
0)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O a
LO
LOLn
La
0Ln
In
LO
In
LO
LO In
LO
In
La
Ln
In
LO
In
Ln
L()
LO
Ln
In
LO
LOLn
LO
LO
U')In
LO
In
Ln if
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
N
N
V
LO
(0
n•
w
0
0
N M
LLi
n•
O
LO
LL)
n•
N
N't
Ln
(0
n•
M
0
0
N
M
L(i
n•
O
O
C)
O
O
O
C)O
C)N
N
N
N
O
C)O
C)O
O
O
O
n
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Cl
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o c
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O a
LO
l()
LO
In
In
l()
m
In
In
In
U') In
LO
LO
LO
In
lfl
U')
m
In
In
In
In
l()
LO
l!)
In
In
In
LO
LO
LO
l0
In if
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r r
X X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
x
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r
X
r c
X X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z 2
0
r
(D
r
(D
r
m
r
m
r
(D
r
m
r
(D
r
0
r
m
r
(D 0
r r
m
r
0
r
F
r
(fl
r
r
F
(D
r
r
F
r
F
0
r
r
F
(D
r
F
r
(D
r
0
r
r
F
0
r
F
r
0
r
F
r
(D
r
0
r
F r
r c
ao
00
0o
e0
ao
0o
ao
00
a0
0o
00 c0
0o
a0
0o
a0
a()
0o
a0
0o
00
0o
0o
b0
00
60
00
00
Co
0o
ao
00
c0
00 c�
M
M
M
M
eM
M
eM
M
M
M
M M
M
cM
M
M
eM
M
eM
M
M
en
M
eM
M
M
M
M
eM
M
eM
M
M
M c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
CO
CO
(O
w
w
CO
w
(O
Ca
CD
CO (0
(O
(O
w
(O
w
CO
m
(o
(o
00
(O
m
(0
w
(o
(o
m
(O
m
(O
w
(o a
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M C'
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O
0
0
O
0
O
O
O
O 0
O
O
0
O
0
O
0
0
0
0
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
O
0
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O n
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O a
In
In
LO
LO
lf)
In
In
LO
In
In
LO In
LO
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
lf)
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
LO
In
LO if
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C,C
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
m C'
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
0
0
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
O
0 0
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
0
0
0
O
O
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O n
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O a
LO
LO
LO
L()
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
L()
Ln LO
U)
U)
LL)
LO
LO
LO
LO
L()
LO
0
LO
LO
In
LO
L()
LO
LO
LO
LO
In
LO
M L(
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O a
O
O
Cl
O
O
O
O
Cl
O
Cl
O O
Cl
O
O
O
O
O
O
Cl
O
O
O
O
O
0
Cl
O
0
O
O
O
O
O C
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 c
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O 0
O
O
0
O
O
O
0
O
O
0
O
0
O
0
O
O
0
O
0
O
0
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O n
O
O
m
m
m
O
m
m
m
rn
O O
m
O
m
0
0
0
m
m
0
0
0
0
m
O
m
0)
O
0
0
0
0
m a
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
In
LO
Ln
LO
LO Ln
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO
LO v
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
o
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
C?O
O
O
O
C?O
O
O
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 c
Co
Co
(o
Co
�
�
Co
00
Co
o
a) o
0
0
o
w
w
w
w
w
a)
o
0
0
0
o
c
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
M
M
M C
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M C'
Co
Co
Co
Co
(0
Co
(0
Co
Co
(D
(D (D
(D
Co
(o
(D
(D
(D
(0
(o
Co
(D
Co
co
Co
Co
(D
Co
(D
Co
(D
(D
(D
(D a
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N n
CO
r
CO
r
CO
r
O
r
O
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
O
r
Ca
r
CO O
r r
CO
r
O
r
CD
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
(fl
r
CO
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
O
r
CO
r
O
r
CO CC
r c
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
(N
N
(N
co
co co
I-
qT
L()
LO
LO
L()
N
N
N
N
N
M
co
m
V
V
V
L()
LO
Lo
Ln
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
co
M
M
M
m
M
M
M
M
(M
M M
(M
M
(M
M
CM
(M
M
(M
M
C)
M
M
M
M
(M
M
(M
(M
M
M
CM
(M
co
(6
(6
(o
(o
Ca
(0
(0
Co
(0
Ca (o
w
(D
(D
(o
(D
(D
(D
(D
Co
(0
Co
(0
Co
Co
(0
Co
(0
co
(0
(D
0
(0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N G
CO
CO
(D
(0
(0
(0
(0
(D
M
(D
(D CO
(D
O
(0
CO
W
CO
(D
(0
CO
(0
(D
(0
(D
O
(0
to
(D
(D
(0
CD
O
(0
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r 2
V
V
V
V
V
V
M
M
M
M
M
M
r
r
r
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
r
r
r
r
N
N
N
M
M
M
M L(
N
N
N
N N
N
N
N
a)
N
N
N
d
N
N
N
(D
(U
N
(U a
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
O
0)O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
L
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
N
(4
(4
(6
(6
(4
(6
(p
w
f6
B B
B0
B
y0
B
y0
B
y0
y
f6
(6
(6
(4
(6
f0
(6
(p
w
f6
w6
y0
�0
y6
B0 R
c )
( )
Cn
U)
w
( )
�
(�
(�
U)
U) U)
U)
U1
U)
U)
U)
C9
?
Ui
U)
(n
(n
�
U)
�
(�
(n
U)
(�
U)
U)
w
0 U
N
M
V
LO
O
n•
00
0
O
r
N M
r
Ln
—
r
0
r
_
N
M
N
N
N
�
N
M
_
N
M
V
In
O
�
00
0
O
r
N
r
M
In
—
r
0
r 0
9
1©
(U
A
N
4/2014

5910-251-00
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 c
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o C
M M
V Ln
M
r
a0
o
O_
N_
M
V
rn
M
40
O
N
V
CO c
O O
O O
O
O
O
_
N
N
N
N (�
m m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m LI
O O
O Cl
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
Cl) Cl)
M M
M
M
co
M
M
M
co
M
co
M
M
M
co
M
co
M K
O O
O O
O
O
O
m
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
m
O
m
O
m
m m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m v Lf
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
N M
(fl m
m
r•
N_
m
m_
N
M
m
(2
r•
O
N
V
w 6
O O
O O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N C�
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
co
O
co
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0 c
O M
O M
O
M
O
M
O
m
m
M
O
M
m
O
M
m
M
m M
m m
m m
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
m
m
O
O
O
O
O
m 6
m m
m to
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m v
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
N M
M LO
0
I'-N
m
M
M
r•
O
N
V
M 0
O O
O O
O
O
C)N
N
N
N
N
N
N n
r• r•
r• r•
r•
r,
�
r•
r�
�
�
�
r•
r�
�
r•
r•
r•
r•
r• r
0 0
0 Cl
O
O
0
0
0
0
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
0 c
O M
O Cl)
O
M
O
M
O
M
co
M
O
M
M
O
M
M
M
M K
m m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m 6
m m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m LC
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
U U
U U
U
U
U
C)
C)()
C)
U
0
U
c)
U
U
L)
c.)
0 c:
Z Z
Z Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
z 2
(fl (O
(O CO
(fl
(O
(O
(O
(2
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M M
CO 00
W 00
00
00
00
00
00
-
N
N
-
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
W a0
a0
CO
a0
M
a0
M
a0
a0
M
a0
W
a0
a0
M
W
CO
a0
IX
M M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
m (,
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
0
0
0
0 c
m m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m v Lr
O
O O O O C
O
O
O
O
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
0
O
O
O
O
O C
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M C'
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
0
O
0 0
0
0
O
0
O
O
O
O
0
O
0
O
0
0
0
0 c
m
m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m v rr
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
m
m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m 9
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
r•
r
r• r-
1—
r•
r
r•
r
r•
r
r
r•
r
r•
I-
r.
r.
r
r• r
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o C
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 c
O
CD
O
O
O
CD
C)N
N
N
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
m C'
m
m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m a
U')
m
m m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m LM
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
0
O
O O
0
0
O
O
O
O
O
O
M
M
M M
M
M
M
M
M
w
(O
(O
(o
m
(O
CO
m
(O
(O
(C Cf
(M
C?
C? C?
C?
C?
co(M
coM
(M
M
(M
M
M
M
M
(M
M
(M C'
O
O
M M
M
M
M
M
M
O
M
M
M
M
M
M
O
O
(o
w c
N
N
N N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N C,
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O C
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
0
Lo
L')
N
N
N N
N
N
N
N
N
M
(M
C?(M
I?
C?(M
C?
C?M
M
M M
co
M
M
M
M
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q 4
(NO
(NO
(NO (NO
(NO
(NO
r
(NO
(NO
(NO
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z 2
« w
N
N
N N
N
N
M
M
M
m
m
m
m
m
m
r•
r•
r-
r-
m LC
N
d
0
0
0
0
a).
w
o
o
o
o
m a
m
m
m
m
m
m
m c
in
Mn
�
Cn
U?O
NC;
M
m
CD
O
N
V
m a
N
M
I')
M
r•
M
MA
—
——
N
N
N
N n
10
O
O
M
M
O O
O �
M
m @
m @
Y
V) Q
0 t
In c)
_T 0
C O
Z
N = N
a _
4/2014

N �
� � N
V
F�1 d
Q% c N H N
C °'
= a D a0.
Q1 f0
U1 N an > D
N
C �
N O CO� O
� A-_ Q N
ro
3
cn v m N v °t b a y
@ EV-4tt� 3 ZLA fo
y
O 0)
y t t7) r�C-i4 2u V� y
----------- C N
Cr
a
D
4-
z
m
Z O
E N
U ❑ � � N
F�1
C
O
� v
y 's
L7 a
fu
Figure 8 - Replacement Shaft Seal
5910-251-00 11 4/2014

C AL
I&=;
A Gorman -Rupp Company
General Information
American Machine & Tool Co., Inc. of PA
(herein "AMT")
400 Spring Street
Royersford, PA 19468
Phone: j610f949.3800
Fax: [phone]
www.amtpurnp.com
SALES POLICY: AMT products are sold through our established Distributors. We do not sell
direct to the consumer or organization not entitled to trade recognition- Therefore,
possession of our catalogs and/or price list(r) does not infer an offer to sell_
MINIMUM ORDER: We apprecrate your order, however, all orders are subject to a
minimum $35,00 net invoice charge !excluding frefgho. This applies to all pump and parts
purchase orders.
PRICES: Prices are subject to change without notice. All orders accepted are subject to
prices In effect at time of shipment,
PAYMENT TERMS: Terms, upon establishment of Credit, are Net 30 days. Past due
accounts may be subject to a service charge of 1.5% per month. Domestic or assignable
letter of credit is required for all export trade.
PAST DUE ACCOUNTS: AMT reserves the right to withhold open account shipments on
any past due account. Invoices are considered past due after thirty (30) days. In the
interest of sound business, all orders are subject to approval of the Credit Department.
SHIPPING; INSTRUCTIONS: All shipments will be made F.M8. the factory. Where instruc-
tions for shipment do not appear on the order, the shipment will be made according to
our best judgment. Full risk of loss (including transportation delays and losses) shall pass
to the customer upon delivery of the products to the carrier at the F.O.B. point, When loss
or delay occurs, primary responsibility for trarmi; rests with the customer. When there is
LOSS or APPARENT VISIBLE DAMAGE to a shipment, when tendered for delivery, DO NOT
give the carrier a clear receipt, Note such damage on the carrier's delivery receipt and
HAVE THE DRIVER SiGN THE RFCCIP'r.
PRODUCT REVISIONS: AMT reserves the right to discontinue, change or improve its
products or any portions thereof without being obligated to provide such a change or
improvement for units sold and/or shipped prior to such a change or improvement,
12 Month Limited Warranty
WENT AND DURARONOFLIMITED WARRANTY
Coverage: American Machine & ToDI Company (herein "AMT") or IPT Pumps by
Gorman -Rupp (herein "IPT" J or Gorman -Rupp Industries Division of The Gorman -Rupp
Company, Patterson, or the Gorman -Rupp Company (herein referred to as "G-R Unit''')
each individually warrants that its products and parts shall be free from defects in
material ad workmanship for twelve (12) months from the date of purchase by the
original end user when installation is made and maintenance is performed in
accordance with G-R Unit's recommendations. Wear and tear resulting from use and
items normally consumed in use are not covered.
EXCEPTIONS
( A ) This Limited Warranty shall not apply to mechanical seals in AMT or IPT pumps and
the following products and parts: engines, motors, trade accessories and all other
products, components, parts and materials not manufactured by the G-R Units- These
items may, however, be covered by the warranties of their respective manufacturers.
( B ) This warranty does not extend to or apply to any unit which has been repaired or
altered at any place other than by a G-R Unit, or by persons not expressly approved by
a G-R Unit to make repairs or alterations, nor to any unit the serial number, model
number of identification of which has been removed, defaced or altered. ( C I This
warranty does not extend to any product manufactured by a G-R Unit, which has been
subjected to mis-use, neglect, accident, improper installation, or use in violation of
instructions fumshed by a G-R Unit. I D ) Pump Kits: This warranty does not extend to
any product sold by a G-R Unit unassembled as a Pump Kit. Pump Kits are warranted
against defects in material and workmanship for 60 days from the date of shipment
from a G-R Unit. Any Pump Kit parts deemed defective by a G-R Unit will be replaced
free of charge within 60 days of shipment. Pump Kits are not returnable for credit.
LIMITATIONS
THE G-R UNITS' SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THEIR PRDD-
UCTS AND PARTS IS THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND/OR;MPLIEU WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND DAMAGES
The sole and exclusive remedy For breach of this Warranty by a G-R Unit and the entire
extent of its liability for such breach or for damages arising from the use of the
products and parts covered under this Limited Warranty, shall be as follows:
LEAD TIME: Products designated "Quick Ship Product, also referred to as
"QSP" will normally he shipped within 24 hours of receipt of a non -
cancellable purchase order. Only limited quantities of "QSP" pumps are avail-
able.
STANDARD LEAD TIME. Lead time is two weeks far all non "QSP" product.
AMT reserves the right to revise lead times as required due to availability of
materials and all other causes beyond our control.
ViP SHIPMENT: Select AMT and IPT branded pumps are avallable for next
day shipment for non-QSP (Quick Ship Products) items and subjected to a
specific model surcharge per unit noted in the respective price book. Requlres
calling for availability, confirmation and a non cancellable purchase order or
credit card payment prior to shipment. The expedited shlpping charges are an
additional cost added separately from the VIP charges per item. AMT reserves
the right to revise lead times as required due to availability of materials and
all other causes beyond our control. Q5P quantities are III miled as determined
by AMT.
ALL purchase orders must be submitted via hard copy sent to AMT customer
service department by fax, EDI Dr a -mail,
RETURN GOODS POLICY: Goods shall not be returned without a return goods
authorization number (RGAJ issued by AMT customer service, The RGA
number must be listed on the packing list. Only current model and part
numbers with a valid date code may be returned (within one year from date
of purchase). A 20% restocking and packaging charge will apply to all
returns. All shipping charges must he pre -paid. No exceptions.
ORDER CHANGES BY CUSTOMER; Orders in process may not he changed
except with written consent and may be subject to special charges.
1, Repair or Replacement: If inspection shows that any G-R Unit product
or part covered under this Limited Warranty is defective in materials or
workmanship, the G-R Unit shall repair or repiace the defective or non-
conforming product or part without charge, whichever the G-R Unit
chooses. You must have properly maintained and used the product or
part claimed to be defective in accordance with the maintenance
schedule or manual, which comes with the product. No allowance will
be made far labor, instahatan, removal, transportation or other charges
incurred by you in connection with such repair or replace men!.
2. To obtain the above remedy:
A. Immediately notify the G-R Unit upon discovery of the
claimed defect in materials or workmanship and provide the
serial number or date code of the product and/or part(s) or
provide the G-R Unit with the Invoice or bill of sale
referencing the product by no later than the expiration date
of the warranty period.
B. The G-R Unit Will advise whether inspection Will be
necessary and how whether repair or replacement will be
made. If inspection by the G-R Unit is necessary, the pump
or defective part must be sent freight pre -paid to the G-R
Unit. Return shipment will be F.O.B. theta-R Unit's plant.
C. Return Goods Authorization Requirement: No product will
be accepted for return or replacement without the prior
written authorization of the G-R Unit, Upon such
authorization, and in accordance with instructions from the
G-R Unit, the product will be returned to the G-R Unit,
shipping charges prepaid by the Buyer.
3. Damages: The G-R Unit's liability for damages for breach of this Limited
Warranty shall not exceed the amount of the purchase price of the product or
part(s) in respect to which Such damages are claimed, IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE G-R UNiTS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have
other rights, which vary from state to state.
American Machine & Too l Co., Inc. of PA, A Gorman -Rupp Company, 40D Spring Street, Royersford, PA 19469, USA

Please read and save this Repair Parts Manual. Read this manual and the General Operating Instructions carefully before attempting to assemble, install, operate
or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing all safety information. The Safety Instructions are contained in the General Operating
Instructions. Failure to comply with the safety instructions accompanying this product could result in personal injury and/or property damage! Retain instructions
for future reference. AMT reserves the right to discontinue any model or change specifications at any time without incurring any obligation.
©2013 American Machine & Tool Co., Inc. of PA, A Subsidiary of The Gorman -Rupp Company, All Rights Reserved.
Periodic maintenance and inspection is required on all pumps to ensure proper operation. Unit must be clear of debris and sediment. Inspect for leaks and loose bolts. Failure to do so
voids warranty.
Self -Priming Centrifugal Pumps
High Volume Dewatering Cast Iron Models AGorman-Rupp Company
Refer to pump manual 1808-634-00 for General Operating and Safety Instructions.
DESCRIPTION
These centrifugal pumps are self -priming (to 20 ft. lift) units designed for high volume liquid transfer, irrigation, dewatering, lawn sprinkling, etc. These pumps
can also accommodate semi -solids (up to 3/8" dia.), sediment laden liquids, and liquids with entrained air or gases. Units are constructed of cast iron and include
Buna elastomers (Viton® elastomers optional, contact factory for availability). They are direct coupled to NEMA 56J frame, 3450 RPM motors which require field
wiring, no controls are supplied. Each pump is equipped with a flapper valve to shorten re -prime time after initially filling casing with liquid. Handles liquids from
400 to 1800 F (40 to 820 C). For use with nonflammable, non-abrasive liquids compatible with pump component materials.
MAINTENANCE
9.
After seal seat is in place, ensure that it is clean and has not been marred.
A WARNING
10.
Using a clean cloth, wipe shaft and make certain that it is perfectly clean.
11.
Secure adapter, foot and handle on motor mounting face. Carefully guide
Make certain that unit is disconnected from power source before
motor shaft through seal seat.
attempting to service or remove any components!
12.
Apply a light coating of soapy water to inside rubber portion of seal head
and slide onto shaft (with sealing face first) so that rubber portion is just
NOTE: The pump casing should be removed and inspected periodically to
up over shaft shoulder.
ensure that any foreign material is not clogging internal pump parts. This unit
A
CAUTION
is equipped with a dual volute pump casing. One of the volutes runs 180°, all
the way from the side opposite the discharge into the discharge through a
Do not touch or wipe polished face of seal head.
completely enclosed passageway. If foreign material clogs this area, it can be
13.
Replace any impeller shims (Ref. No. 9) that may have been removed in
dislodged by using a wire or long spring.
disassembly. (See "Shim Adjustment' below).
14.
Screw impeller back into place, tightening until it is against shaft shoulder.
MECHANICAL SEAL REPLACEMENT
15.
Replace impeller nut and tighten until snug.
Refer to Figures 1 and 2
16.
Remount casing and casing seal on adapter.
IMPORTANT: Always replace both seal seat (Ref. No. 7) and seal head (Ref.
No. 8) to ensure proper mating of components! Recommend replacing casing
seal (Ref. No.6) if wear or damage is present.
1. Unthread fasteners (Ref. No. 5) and remove casing (Ref. No. 12) and
casing seal (Ref. No. 6) from adapter (Ref. No. 4)
2. Unscrew impeller fastener (Ref. No. 11) and impeller (Ref. No. 10)
separately by turning each counterclockwise.
NOTE: Most motors use an open end 7/16" wrench across flats on rear of
motor shaft (remove bearing cap for access) to prevent shaft from turning.
Other motor shafts have a screwdriver slot instead of flats.
3. Unscrew fasteners (Ref. Nos. 3 & 16) and remove adapter, foot (Ref. No.
17) and handle (Ref. No. 2) from motor (Ref. No. 1) mounting face. Seal
head will come loose at this time.
4. Push seal seat from adapter recess with a screwdriver.
5. Clean adapter recess before inserting new seal seat.
6. Carefully wipe polished surface of new seal seat with a clean cloth.
7. Wet rubber portion of seal seat with a light coating of soapy water.
8. Press new seal seat squarely into cavity in adapter. If seal seat does not
press squarely into cavity, it can be adjusted in place by pushing on it with
a piece of pipe. Always use a piece of cardboard between pipe and seal
seat to avoid scratching seal seat. (This is a lapped surface and must be
handled very carefully.)
SHIM ADJUSTMENT
When installing a replacement impeller (Ref. No. 10) or motor (Ref. No. 1), it
may be necessary to adjust number of shims (Ref. No. 9) to ensure proper
running clearance between impeller and casing. Proceed as follows:
NOTE: A proper running clearance is less than 0.010".
1. For impeller replacement, add one 0.010"shim in addition to those
removed originally.
2. For motor replacement, add two 0.010" shims in addition to those removed
during disassembly.
3. Reassemble the pump as described in steps 15, 16 & 17.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that the casing is snugly in place and check shaft to
make sure it is turning freely (use screwdriver slot in motor to turn shaft). If it
turns freely, check to ensure that adapter and casing are fitted tight together. If
they are not, tighten fasteners (Ref. Nos. 3, 5 and 17) and recheck shaft for free
turning. Tighten carefully, turning shaft while tightening so that motor bearings
are not damaged in the event that too many shims were installed. If shaft seizes
before fasteners are completely tight, disassemble pump and remove one shim
and repeat reassembly.
2761-252-00 1 8/2013

Self -Priming Centrifugal Pumps
FLAPPER VALVE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Remove bolts (Ref. No. 19) and suction plate (Ref. No. 15). Replace flapper
valve assembly (Ref. No. 14). Remount suction plate and bolts; tighten bolts
evenly to ensure proper seal.
2761-252-00 2 8/2013

Self -Priming Centrifugal Pumps
For Repair Parts contact dealer where pump was purchased.
Please provide following information:
-Model Number
-Serial Number (if any)
Part description and number as shown in parts list
19
Figure 1 - Repair Parts Illustrations
2761-252-00 3 8/2013

Repair Parts List
1 Motor - 1 Phase ODP 1626-009-00 1626-010-00 1626-012-00 1626-024-00 1
Motor - 3 Phase ODP 1626-013-00 1626-014-00 1626-016-00 1626-025-00 1
Motor - 1 Phase TEFC 1626-302-00 1626-303-00 1626-305-00 1626-306-00 1
Motor - 3 Phase TEFC 1626-308-00 1626-309-00 1626-311-00 1626-312-00 1
2
Handle
1515-000-00
1515-000-00
1515-000-00
1515-000-00
1
3
Fastener
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
2
4
Adapter Kit
2820-030-95
2820-030-95
2820-030-95
2820-030-95
1
(includes Ref. Nos. 3, 4 and 5)
5
Fastener
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
4
6
Casing Seal
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
1
7 & 8
Shaft Seal Assembly - Buna-N
1640-161-90 &
1640-161-90 &
1640-161-90 &
1640-161-90 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Shaft Seal Assembly - Viton
1640-161-91 &
1640-161-91 &
1640-161-91 &
1640-161-91 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
9
Impeller Shim Set
1657-000-90
1657-000-90
1657-000-90
1657-000-90
1
10
Impeller- 1 Phase
2820-011-01
2820-011-03
2820-011-05
2820-011-07
1
Impeller -3Phase
2820-011-02
2820-011-04
2820-011-06
2820-011-08
1
11
Impeller Fastener
1784-001-00
1784-001-00
1784-001-00
1784-001-00
1
12
Casing Kit - Buna-N
2820-001-135
2820-001-135
2820-001-B5
2820-001-65
1
Casing Kit -Viton
2820-001-V5
2820-001-V5
2820-001-V5
2820-001-V5
1
(includes Ref. Nos. 5, 13, 14 and 15)
13
Pipe Plug
3
14
Flapper Valve Assembly - Buna-N
1674-000-90 &
1674-000-90 &
1674-000-90 &
1674-000-90 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Flapper Valve Assembly - Viton
1674-000-91 &
1674-000-91 &
1674-000-91 &
1674-000-91 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
15
Suction Plate
1501-000-01
1501-000-01
1501-000-01
1501-000-01
1
16
Fastener
2
17
Foot
1506-000-00
1506-000-00
1506-000-00
1506-000-00
1
18
Washer
2
19
Fastener
4
KIT
Seal Kit - Buna-N (standard)
2820-304-95
2820-304-95
2820-304-95
2820-304-95
1
Seal Kit - Viton (optional)
2820-305-95
2820-305-95
2820-305-95
2820-305-95
1
(includes Ref. Nos. 6, 7, 8 and 14)
(")
Standard hardware item, available locally.
2761-252-00 4 8/2013

Self -Priming Centrifugal Pumps
For Repair Parts contact dealer where pump was purchased.
Please provide following information:
-Model Number
-Serial Number (if any)
Part description and number as shown in parts list
19
Figure 2 - Repair Parts Illustrations
2761-252-00 5 8/2013

Repair Parts List
1 Motor - 1 Phase ODP 1626-012-00 1626-024-00 1626-026-00 1
Motor - 3 Phase ODP 1626-016-00 1626-025-00 1626-027-00 1
Motor - 1 Phase TEFC 1626-305-00 1626-306-00 - 1
Motor - 3 Phase TEFC 1626-311-00 1626-312-00 1
2
Handle
1515-000-00
1515-000-00
1515-000-00
1
3
Fastener
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
2
4
Adapter Kit
2820-030-95
2820-030-95
2820-030-95
1
(includes Ref. Nos. 3, 4 and 5)
5
Fastener
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
Incl. w/Ref 4
4
6
Casing Seal
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
1
7 & 8
Shaft Seal Assembly - Buna-N
1640-161-90 &
1640-161-90 &
1640-161-90 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Shaft Seal Assembly - Viton
1640-161-91 &
1640-161-91 &
1640-161-91 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
9
Impeller Shim Set
1657-000-90
1657-000-90
1657-000-90
1
10
Impeller- 1 Phase
2820-011-09
2820-011-OB
1496-002-02
1
Impeller -3Phase
2820-011-OA
2820-011-OC
1496-002-02
1
11
Impeller Fastener
1784-001-00
1784-001-00
1784-001-00
1
12
CasingKit- Buna-N
2760-001-135
2760-001-135
2760-001-65
1
Casing Kit -Viton
2760-001-V5
2760-001-V5
2760-001-V5
1
(includes Ref. Nos. 5, 13, 14 and 15)
13
Pipe Plug
3
14
Flapper Valve Assembly - Buna-N
1683-000-90 &
1683-000-90 &
1683-000-90 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Flapper Valve Assembly - Viton
1683-000-91 &
1683-000-91 &
1683-000-91 &
1
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
Incl. w/Ref KIT
15
Suction Plate
1487-000-01
1487-000-01
1487-000-01
1
16
Fastener
2
17
Foot
1506-000-00
1506-000-00
1506-000-00
1
18
Washer
2
19
Fastener
4
KIT
Seal Kit - Buna-N (standard)
2760-304-95
2760-304-95
2760-304-95
1
Seal Kit - Viton (optional)
2760-305-95
2760-305-95
2760-305-95
1
(includes Ref. Nos. 6, 7, 8 and 14)
(*)
Standard hardware item, available locally.
2761-252-00 6 8/2013

C AL
I&=;
A Gorman -Rupp Company
General Information
American Machine & Tool Co., Inc. of PA
(herein "AMT")
400 Spring Street
Royersford, PA 19468
Phone: j610f949.3800
Fax: [phone]
www.amtpurnp.com
SALES POLICY: AMT products are sold through our established Distributors. We do not sell
direct to the consumer or organization not entitled to trade recognition- Therefore,
possession of our catalogs and/or price list(r) does not infer an offer to sell_
MINIMUM ORDER: We apprecrate your order, however, all orders are subject to a
minimum $35,00 net invoice charge !excluding frefgho. This applies to all pump and parts
purchase orders.
PRICES: Prices are subject to change without notice. All orders accepted are subject to
prices In effect at time of shipment,
PAYMENT TERMS: Terms, upon establishment of Credit, are Net 30 days. Past due
accounts may be subject to a service charge of 1.5% per month. Domestic or assignable
letter of credit is required for all export trade.
PAST DUE ACCOUNTS: AMT reserves the right to withhold open account shipments on
any past due account. Invoices are considered past due after thirty (30) days. In the
interest of sound business, all orders are subject to approval of the Credit Department.
SHIPPING; INSTRUCTIONS: All shipments will be made F.M8. the factory. Where instruc-
tions for shipment do not appear on the order, the shipment will be made according to
our best judgment. Full risk of loss (including transportation delays and losses) shall pass
to the customer upon delivery of the products to the carrier at the F.O.B. point, When loss
or delay occurs, primary responsibility for trarmi; rests with the customer. When there is
LOSS or APPARENT VISIBLE DAMAGE to a shipment, when tendered for delivery, DO NOT
give the carrier a clear receipt, Note such damage on the carrier's delivery receipt and
HAVE THE DRIVER SiGN THE RFCCIP'r.
PRODUCT REVISIONS: AMT reserves the right to discontinue, change or improve its
products or any portions thereof without being obligated to provide such a change or
improvement for units sold and/or shipped prior to such a change or improvement,
12 Month Limited Warranty
WENT AND DURARONOFLIMITED WARRANTY
Coverage: American Machine & ToDI Company (herein "AMT") or IPT Pumps by
Gorman -Rupp (herein "IPT" J or Gorman -Rupp Industries Division of The Gorman -Rupp
Company, Patterson, or the Gorman -Rupp Company (herein referred to as "G-R Unit''')
each individually warrants that its products and parts shall be free from defects in
material ad workmanship for twelve (12) months from the date of purchase by the
original end user when installation is made and maintenance is performed in
accordance with G-R Unit's recommendations. Wear and tear resulting from use and
items normally consumed in use are not covered.
EXCEPTIONS
( A ) This Limited Warranty shall not apply to mechanical seals in AMT or IPT pumps and
the following products and parts: engines, motors, trade accessories and all other
products, components, parts and materials not manufactured by the G-R Units- These
items may, however, be covered by the warranties of their respective manufacturers.
( B ) This warranty does not extend to or apply to any unit which has been repaired or
altered at any place other than by a G-R Unit, or by persons not expressly approved by
a G-R Unit to make repairs or alterations, nor to any unit the serial number, model
number of identification of which has been removed, defaced or altered. ( C I This
warranty does not extend to any product manufactured by a G-R Unit, which has been
subjected to mis-use, neglect, accident, improper installation, or use in violation of
instructions fumshed by a G-R Unit. I D ) Pump Kits: This warranty does not extend to
any product sold by a G-R Unit unassembled as a Pump Kit. Pump Kits are warranted
against defects in material and workmanship for 60 days from the date of shipment
from a G-R Unit. Any Pump Kit parts deemed defective by a G-R Unit will be replaced
free of charge within 60 days of shipment. Pump Kits are not returnable for credit.
LIMITATIONS
THE G-R UNITS' SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THEIR PRDD-
UCTS AND PARTS IS THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND/OR;MPLIEU WARRANTIES, INCLUDING IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND DAMAGES
The sole and exclusive remedy For breach of this Warranty by a G-R Unit and the entire
extent of its liability for such breach or for damages arising from the use of the
products and parts covered under this Limited Warranty, shall be as follows:
LEAD TIME: Products designated "Quick Ship Product, also referred to as
"QSP" will normally he shipped within 24 hours of receipt of a non -
cancellable purchase order. Only limited quantities of "QSP" pumps are avail-
able.
STANDARD LEAD TIME. Lead time is two weeks far all non "QSP" product.
AMT reserves the right to revise lead times as required due to availability of
materials and all other causes beyond our control.
ViP SHIPMENT: Select AMT and IPT branded pumps are avallable for next
day shipment for non-QSP (Quick Ship Products) items and subjected to a
specific model surcharge per unit noted in the respective price book. Requlres
calling for availability, confirmation and a non cancellable purchase order or
credit card payment prior to shipment. The expedited shlpping charges are an
additional cost added separately from the VIP charges per item. AMT reserves
the right to revise lead times as required due to availability of materials and
all other causes beyond our control. Q5P quantities are III miled as determined
by AMT.
ALL purchase orders must be submitted via hard copy sent to AMT customer
service department by fax, EDI Dr a -mail,
RETURN GOODS POLICY: Goods shall not be returned without a return goods
authorization number (RGAJ issued by AMT customer service, The RGA
number must be listed on the packing list. Only current model and part
numbers with a valid date code may be returned (within one year from date
of purchase). A 20% restocking and packaging charge will apply to all
returns. All shipping charges must he pre -paid. No exceptions.
ORDER CHANGES BY CUSTOMER; Orders in process may not he changed
except with written consent and may be subject to special charges.
1, Repair or Replacement: If inspection shows that any G-R Unit product
or part covered under this Limited Warranty is defective in materials or
workmanship, the G-R Unit shall repair or repiace the defective or non-
conforming product or part without charge, whichever the G-R Unit
chooses. You must have properly maintained and used the product or
part claimed to be defective in accordance with the maintenance
schedule or manual, which comes with the product. No allowance will
be made far labor, instahatan, removal, transportation or other charges
incurred by you in connection with such repair or replace men!.
2. To obtain the above remedy:
A. Immediately notify the G-R Unit upon discovery of the
claimed defect in materials or workmanship and provide the
serial number or date code of the product and/or part(s) or
provide the G-R Unit with the Invoice or bill of sale
referencing the product by no later than the expiration date
of the warranty period.
B. The G-R Unit Will advise whether inspection Will be
necessary and how whether repair or replacement will be
made. If inspection by the G-R Unit is necessary, the pump
or defective part must be sent freight pre -paid to the G-R
Unit. Return shipment will be F.O.B. theta-R Unit's plant.
C. Return Goods Authorization Requirement: No product will
be accepted for return or replacement without the prior
written authorization of the G-R Unit, Upon such
authorization, and in accordance with instructions from the
G-R Unit, the product will be returned to the G-R Unit,
shipping charges prepaid by the Buyer.
3. Damages: The G-R Unit's liability for damages for breach of this Limited
Warranty shall not exceed the amount of the purchase price of the product or
part(s) in respect to which Such damages are claimed, IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE G-R UNiTS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have
other rights, which vary from state to state.
American Machine & Too l Co., Inc. of PA, A Gorman -Rupp Company, 40D Spring Street, Royersford, PA 19469, USA

A Gorman -Rupp Company
BY
GORMANmRUPP�
www.amtpump.com

CE
O
N
O
ifm electronic
Operating instructions
Magnetic -inductive flow meter
SM2001
SM9001

Contents
1 Preliminary note...................................................................................................5
1.1 Symbols used................................................................................................5
1.2 Warning signs used.......................................................................................5
2 Safety instructions...............................................................................................5
3 Functions and features........................................................................................6
4 Function...............................................................................................................6
4.1
Measuring principle for volumetric flow monitoring........................................6
4.2
Processing of the measured signals..............................................................7
4.3
Volumetric flow monitoring.............................................................................8
4.3.1 Volumetric flow quantity........................................................................8
4.3.2 Direction of flow....................................................................................
8
4.4
Consumed quantity monitoring (totaliser function)........................................8
4.4.1 Consumed quantity monitoring with pulse output.................................9
4.4.2 Consumed quantity monitoring with preset counter .............................9
4.5
Temperature monitoring...............................................................................10
4.6
Empty pipe detection...................................................................................10
4.7
Volumetric flow or temperature monitoring / switching function...................10
4.7.1 Hysteresis function.............................................................................11
4.7.2 Window function.................................................................................11
4.8
Volumetric flow or temperature monitoring / analogue function...................12
4.8.1 Current output.....................................................................................12
4.8.2 Voltage output.....................................................................................13
4.9
Volumetric flow monitoring / frequency output.............................................14
4.10 Start-up delay............................................................................................14
4.11 Low flow cut-off(LFC)................................................................................16
4.12 Simulation..................................................................................................16
5 Installation..........................................................................................................17
5.1 Recommended installation position.............................................................17
5.2 Not recommended installation position........................................................19
5.3 Grounding....................................................................................................20
5.4 Installation in pipes......................................................................................20
6 Electrical connection..........................................................................................21
7 Operating and display elements........................................................................22
2

8 Menu.................................................................................................................23
8.1 Process value display..................................................................................23
8.2 Main menu...................................................................................................24
8.2.1 Explanation main menu......................................................................25
8.3 Extended functions — Basic settings............................................................26
8.3.1 Explanation extended functions(EF)..................................................27
8.3.2 Submenu basic settings (CFG)..........................................................27
8.4 Extended functions — Min/max memory — Emtpy pipe — Simulation ............ 28
8.4.1 Explanation extended functions(EF)..................................................29
8.4.2 Submenu min/max memory(MEM)....................................................29®
8.4.3 Submenu empty pipe(EPD)...............................................................29
8.4.4 Submenu simulation (SIM).................................................................29
9 Set-up................................................................................................................30
10 Parameter setting............................................................................................30
10.1 10-Link....................................................................................................... 31
10.1.1 General information..........................................................................31
10.1.2 Device -specific information...............................................................31
10.1.3 Parameter setting tools.....................................................................31
10.2 Parameter setting in general.....................................................................32
10.2.1 Switching between the menu levels.................................................33
10.2.2 Locking / unlocking...........................................................................33
10.2.3 Timeout.............................................................................................33
10.3 Settings for consumed quantity monitoring...............................................33
10.3.1
Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT1...................................33
10.3.2
Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT2...................................34
10.3.3
Setting the analogue value for volumetric flow .................................
34
10.3.4
Setting the frequency value for volumetric flow ................................
34
10.4 Settings for consumed quantity monitoring...............................................34
10.4.1 Settings for quantity monitoring via pulse output..............................34
10.4.2 Settings for quantity monitoring via the preset counter ....................35
10.4.3 Setting the pulse value.....................................................................35
10.4.4 Manual counter reset........................................................................35
10.4.5 Time -controlled counter-reset...........................................................36
10.4.6 Deactivation of the counter reset......................................................36
10.4.7 Configure counter reset using an external signal .............................36
10.5 Settings for temperature monitoring..........................................................36
3

10.5.1 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT2...................................36
10.5.2 Setting the analogue value for temperature.....................................36
10.6 User settings (optional)..............................................................................37
10.6.1 Setting of the standard unit of measurement for volumetric flow ...... 37
10.6.2
Configuration of the standard display...............................................37
10.6.3
Changing the direction of the flow rate measurement ......................
37
10.6.4
Setting the output logic.....................................................................37
10.6.5
Setting the start-up delay..................................................................37
10.6.6
Setting the measured value damping...............................................37
10.6.7
Setting the error behaviour of the outputs........................................38
10.6.8
Configuring the empty pipe detection as diagnostic output..............38
10.6.9
Activating / deactivating empty pipe detection..................................38
10.6.10 Time -delay empty pipe detection....................................................38
10.6.11
Setting of the empty pipe detection................................................39
10.6.12 Setting the counting method of the totaliser...................................39
10.6.13 Setting the low flow cut-off..............................................................39
10.7 Service functions.......................................................................................39
10.7.1 Reading the min/max values for the volumetric flow ........................ 39
10.7.2 Reading the min/max values for the temperature .............................39
10.7.3 Simulation menu...............................................................................40
10.7.4 Resetting all parameters to factory setting.......................................40
11 Operation.........................................................................................................41
11.1 Reading the process value........................................................................41
11.2 Reading the parameter value.....................................................................42
11.3 Error indications.........................................................................................43
12 Technical data..................................................................................................43
13 Factory setting.................................................................................................44
2

1 Preliminary note
1.1 Symbols used
► Instructions
> Reaction, result
[...] Designation of pushbuttons, buttons or indications
Cross-reference
Important note
• Non-compliance can result in malfunction or interference.
Information
n Supplementary note.
1.2 Warning signs used
Warning of personal injury. Slight reversible injuries may result.
2 Safety instructions
• Please read this document prior to set-up of the unit. Ensure that the product is
suitable for your application without any restrictions.
• If the operating instructions or the technical data are not adhered to, personal
injury and/or damage to property can occur.
• Improper or non -intended use may lead to malfunctions of the unit or to un-
wanted effects in your application. That is why installation, electrical connec-
tion, set-up, operation and maintenance of the unit must only be carried out by
qualified personnel authorised by the machine operator.
• In order to guarantee the correct condition of the device for the operating time it
is necessary to use the device only for media to which the wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant (--� Technical data).
• The responsibility whether the measurement devices are suitable for the
respective application lies with the operator. The manufacturer assumes no
liability for consequences of misuse by the operator. Improper installation and
use of the devices result in a loss of the warranty claims.

• For medium temperatures above 122 °F some parts of the housing can heat up
to over 149 'F. Moreover, during installation or in case of a fault (e.g. housing
damage) media under high pressure or hot media can leak from the system. To
avoid personal injury, take the following measures:
► Install the unit according to the applicable rules and regulations.
► Ensure that the system is free of pressure during installation.
► Protect the housing against contact with flammable substances and
unintentional contact. To do so, equip the unit with suitable protection (e.g.
protective cover).
► Do not press the pushbuttons manually; instead use another object (e.g.
ballpoint pen).
3 Functions and features
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED): The units comply with section 3, article 3 of
the Directive 97/23/EC and must be designed and manufactured for non -super-
heated liquids of group 2 fluids in accordance with the sound engineering practice.
The unit monitors liquid media.
The unit detects the 3 process categories volumetric flow quantity, consumed
quantity and medium temperature.
Application area
Conductive liquids with the following properties:
• Conductivity: >_ 20 pS/cm
• Viscosity: < 70 cST at 104 °F
4 Function
4.1 Measuring principle for volumetric flow monitoring
The magnetic -inductive measuring principle means that a magnetic field is gener-
ated in the measuring pipe via current -carrying coils. When a conductive medium
flows through the measuring pipe, the ions therein are diverted perpendicularly to
the magnetic field. Positive and negative charge carriers flow in opposite direc-
tions. The voltage induced is measured by two electrodes that are in contact with
the medium. This signal voltage is directly proportional to the average flow veloc-
ity. The volumetric flow quantity is derived from the inside pipe diameter.
0

1: Field coil
2: Measuring pipe
3: Electrode
4: Charge carrier in the medium
5: Magnetic field
Ez
Both electrodes must be wetted by the medium. Otherwise the signal
[SEnS] for empty pipe is provided, if empty pipe detection is enabled.
4.2 Processing of the measured signals
The unit displays the current process values.
It generates 2 output signals according to the parameter setting.
OUT1/10-Link: 5 selection options
- Switching signal for volumetric flow limit values
- or frequency signal for volumetric flow quantity
- or pulse signal for quantity meter
- or switching signal for preset counter
- or switching signal for empty pipe detection
OUT2: 6 selection options
- Switching signal for volumetric flow limit values
- or switching signal for temperature limit value
- or analogue signal for volumetric flow quantity
- or analogue signal for temperature
- or input for external reset signal (InD)
- or switching signal for empty pipe detection
Parameter setting
(�
10.3.1)
(�
10.3.4)
(�
10.4.1)
(�
10.4.2)
(�
10.6.9)
Parameter setting
(�
10.3.2)
(�
10.5.1)
(�
10.3.3)
(�
10.5.2)
(�
10.4.7)
(�
10.6.9)
7

4.3 Volumetric flow monitoring
4.3.1 Volumetric flow quantity
The signals for measuring the volumetric flow quantity can be provided as follows:
1. Two switching signals for volumetric flow quantity limit values on output 1 and
output 2. On the switching functions --* 4.7.
2. A frequency signal (10 Hz ... 10 kHz) on output 1. On the frequency functions
4.9.
3. An analogue signal (4...20 mA or 0...10 V) on output 2. On the analogue
functions � 4.8.
4.3.2 Direction of flow
In addition to the flow velocity, the unit also detects the flow direction. An arrow on
the unit indicates the positive flow direction.
The flow direction can be inversed (—> 10.6.3).
E2 ► Use the supplied label to mark the changed flow direction.
Direction of flow in accordance with "flow direction"
> process value and display positive.
Direction of flow against the "flow direction"
> process value and display negative.
MflnOnly positive process values are processed for the signal output (limit
values and analogue values for volumetric flow).
4.4 Consumed quantity monitoring (totaliser function)
The unit has an internal mass flow meter which continuously totals the volumetric
flow. The sum corresponds to the current consumed quantity since the last reset.
• The quantity meter takes account of the flow direction for totalisation.
- Flow according to the marked flow direction (arrow "flow direction"): meter
adds.
- Flow against the marked flow direction: meter subtracts (—> 10.6.11).
- Meter pulses are only provided as the sum increases. After subtraction
(consumed quantity decreases), the pulses are only provided again when the
consumed quantity has exceeded the previous maximum value.
0

V = volumetric flow quantity, Imp = output pulses
• The current meter reading can be displayed (—> 11.1 Reading the process
value).
• In addition the value before the last reset is stored. This value can also be
displayed (--> 11.1 Reading the process value).
- The meter saves the totalled consumed quantity every 10 minutes. In the
event of a power failure this value is retained as the current meter reading. If
a time -controlled reset is set, the elapsed time of the set reset interval is also
stored. So the possible data loss can be maximum 10 minutes.
There are different ways to reset the meter
10.4.4 Manual counter reset
10.4.5 Time -controlled counter -reset
10.4.7 Configure counter reset using an external signal
4.4.1 Consumed quantity monitoring with pulse output
Output 1 indicates a counting pulse when the set volumetric flow quantity has
been reached (--� 10.4.1).
4.4.2 Consumed quantity monitoring with preset counter
Output 1 switches when the set volumetric flow quantity has been reached (�
10.4.2). 2 types of monitoring are possible:
1. Time -dependent quantity monitoring (� 10.4.5 Time -controlled counter -reset).
- If the quantity x is reached during t, output 1 switches and remains switched
until the meter is reset.
- If the quantity x is not reached during the time t, the meter is automatically
reset and counting starts again; output 1 does not switch.
E

2. Quantity monitoring not time -dependent (—> 10.4.6 Deactivation of the counter
reset).
- If the quantity x is reached, output 1 switches and remains switched until the
meter is reset.
4.5 Temperature monitoring
The following signals are provided for temperature monitoring:
• A switching signal for temperature limit values on output 2. On the switching
functions --� 4.7.
• An analogue signal proportional to the temperature (4...20 mA or 0...10 V) on
output 2. On the analogue functions --� 4.8.
4.6 Empty pipe detection
The unit detects when the two electrodes are not wetted by the medium (---> 4.1
Measuring principle for volumetric flow monitoring). The empty pipe detection can
be activated or deactivated (---> 10.6.9). If it is active and the pipe is empty, the unit
reacts as follows:
> [SEnS] is indicated in the display.
> The flow is set to zero.
The empty pipe detection can be set as time -depending or not time depending (�
10.6.10).
4.7 Volumetric flow or temperature monitoring / switching
function
OUTx changes its switching state if it is above or below the set switching limits
(SPx, rPx). The following switching functions can be selected:
10

4.7.1 Hysteresis function
Normally open: [OUx] _ [Hno]
Normally closed: [OUx] _ [Hnc]
First the set point (SPx) is set, then the
reset point (rPx) with the requested
difference.
When SPx is adjusted rPx is
n changed automatically; the
difference remains constant.
Example of volumetric flow monitoring
HY = hysteresis
4.7.2 Window function
Normally open: [OUx] _ [Fno]
Normally closed: [OUx] _ [Fnc]
The width of the window can be set by
means of the difference between SPx
and rPx.
SPx = upper value
rPx = lower value.
Example of volumetric flow monitoring
FE = window
EWhen set to the window function the set and reset points have a fixed hys-
Il teresis of 0.25 % of the final value of the measuring range. This keeps the
switching state of the output stable if the volumetric flow varies slightly.

4.8 Volumetric flow or temperature monitoring / analogue
function
4.8.1 Current output
0
4
0
[mA]
5
0
;
22,0
21,5
---------------------------------------'
---------;------
20,0
----------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------ir
0
®
09
4,0
�► 10
3,5
-130
-120
0
100 120 130 0 1%l
-58
-40
-4
176 212 230 0 ['F]
I
ASP
AEP MEW
Characteristics of the analogue output according to the standard IEC 60947-5-7
1: Output current
2: Volumetric flow quantity
3: Temperature
4: Display range
5: Measuring range
6: Range between analogue start point and analogue end point
7: The unit is in the error state (FOU = OFF).
8: The process value transmitted in an analogue way is therefore below the display range.
9: Curve of the analogue signal at factory setting
10: Curve of the analogue signal with shifted ASP and AEP
11: The process value transmitted in an analogue way is therefore above the display range.
12: The unit is in the error state (FOU = ON).
ASP = analogue start point: determines at which measured value the output signal is 4 mA
AEP = analogue end point: determines at which measured value the output signal is 20 mA
VMR = final value of the measuring range = 100 %
! Minimum distance between ASP and AEP = 20 % of the measuring range
In the set scaling range the output signal is between 4 and 20 mA.
12

4.8.2 Voltage output
O
an•----------------------------------------------- '
O® 10 11
7
0
0000
0 100 120 130 O N
-4 176 212 230 0 [°Fl
I
ASP AEP MEW
Characteristics of the analogue output according to the standard IEC 60947-5-7
1: Output voltage
2: Volumetric flow quantity
3: Temperature
4: Display range
5: Measuring range
6: Range between analogue start point and analogue end point
7: The unit is in the error state (FOU = OFF) or the process value transmitted in an ana-
logue way is below the display range.
8: Curve of the analogue signal at factory setting
9: Curve of the analogue signal with shifted ASP and AEP
10: The process value transmitted in an analogue way is therefore above the display range.
11: The unit is in the error state (FOU = ON).
ASP = analogue start point: determines at which measured value the output signal is 0 V
AEP = analogue end point: determines at which measured value the output signal is 10 V
VMR = final value of the measuring range = 100 %
[![] Minimum distance between ASP and AEP = 20 % of the measuring range
In the set scaling range the output signal is between 0 and 10 V.
13

4.9 Volumetric flow monitoring / frequency output
O
130-------------------------------- ----- ;------------
120
FrEP 100
;f
0
0 100 120 130 0 [%]
FEP
Output curve frequency output
1: Frequency output
2: Volumetric flow quantity Q
3: The unit is in the error state (FOU = OFF) or the process value transmitted in an ana-
logue way is below the display range.
4: The unit is in the error state (FOU = ON).
REP = configured frequency at FEP (---> 10.3.4 Setting the frequency value for volumetric
flow)
4.10 Start-up delay
Ez
The start-up delay dST influences the switching outputs of the volumetric
flow monitoring.
If the start-up delay is active (dST > 0), note: As soon as the volumetric flow
quantity exceeds the LFC (LFC = low flow cut-off --� 4.11), the following processes
are carried out:
> The start-up delay is activated.
> The outputs switch as programmed:
ON for NO function, OFF for NC function.
After the start of the start-up delay there are 3 options:
1. The volumetric flow quantity increases quickly and reaches the set point / good
range within dST.
> Outputs remain active.
14

2. The volumetric flow increases slowly and does not reach the set point /good
range within dST.
> Outputs are reset.
3. Volumetric flow quantity falls below LFC within dST.
> Outputs are reset at once; dST is stopped.
Example: dST for hysteresis function
Condition
Reaction
1
Volumetric flow quantity Q reaches LFC
dST starts, output becomes active
2
dST elapsed, Q reached SP
output remains active
3
Q below SP but above rP
output remains active
4
Q below rP
output is reset
5
Q reaches again LFC
dST starts, output becomes active
6
dST elapsed, Q has not reached SP
output is reset
7
1 Q reaches SP
output becomes active
15

Example: dST for window function
Condition
Reaction
1
Volumetric flow quantity Q reaches LFC
dST starts, output becomes active.
2
dST elapsed, Q reached good range
output remains active
3
Q above SP (leaves good range)
output is reset
4
Q again below SP
output becomes active again
5
Q below rP (leaves good range)
output is reset again
6
Q reaches again LFC
dST starts, output becomes active
7
dST elapsed, Q has not reached good
range
output is reset
8
Q reaches good range
output becomes active
4.11 Low flow cut-off (LFC)
With this function small volumetric flow quantities can be ignored (--� 10.6.13).
Flows below the LFC value are evaluated by the sensor as standstill (Q = 0).
4.12 Simulation
With this function small volumetric flow quantities can be suppressed (--* 10.7.3).
The simulation does not have any effect on the totaliser or the current flow. The
outputs operate as previously set.
When the simulation starts, the value of the totaliser is saved and then the
simulated totaliser is set to 0. The simulated flow value then has an effect on the
simulated totaliser. When the simulation is finished, the original totaliser value is
restored.
16

Mn During the simulation the original totaliser value remains saved without any
changes even if there is a real flow.
5 Installation
! ► Avoid deposits, accumulated gas and air in the pipe system.
5.1 Recommended installation position
Example of an optimised installation:
► Install the unit so that the measuring pipe is completely filled.
► Arrange for inlet and outlet pipe lengths. Disturbances caused by bends,
valves, reductions, etc. are compensated for. It applies in particular: No shut-off
and control devices are allowed directly in front of the unit.
2 5 x D
i
�°°
i
2xD
=fE
i
o�°
o i
i
S = disturbance; D = pipe diameter; F = flow direction
17

► Install in front of or in a rising pipe:
F = flow direction
MWith empty pipe detection:
► Install the unit according to figure 1, 4 or 5.
W

5.2 Not recommended installation position
► Avoid the following installation positions:
Directly in front of a falling pipe.
At the highest point of the pipe
system.
On the suction side of a pump.
Directly in front of the spout of the
pipe.
F = flow direction
19

Mn The unit can be installed independently of the orientation if the following is
ensured:
- No air bubbles can form in the pipe system.
- The pipes are always completely filled.
5.3 Grounding
If installed in an ungrounded pipe system (e.g. plastic pipes), the unit must
• be grounded (functional earth).
Ground brackets for the M12 connector are available as accessories (--> www.ifm.
com).
5.4 Installation in pipes
The unit can be installed in pipes using adapters. The adapters have to be ordered
separately as accessories (--� www.ifm.com).
A B C D D C B A
1. Screw the adapter (B) into the pipe (A).
2. Place the seals (C) and install the unit according to the marked flow direction.
► To mount the adapters on the process connection of the sensor use
Il suitable lubricants.
3. Screw the adapter (B) with the threads (D) until it is hand -tight.
4. Tighten the two adapters in opposite direction (tightening torque: 30 Nm).
After installation air bubbles in the system can affect the measurement.
Corrective measures:
► Rinse the system after installation for ventilation (rinsing quantity > 3.3 gpm).
20

In case of horizontal installation: As a result of design requirements a small quan-
tity of the medium always remains in the measuring channel after switching off the
pump
6 Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply according to EN 50178, SELV, PELV.
► Disconnect power.
► Connect the unit as follows:
2 1 BK: black
• BN: brown
3 4 BU: blue
WH: white
Colours to DIN EN 60947-5-6
Sample circuits:
1 BN L+
WH OUT2
BK OUT1
B� L-
I2 x positive switching
2 x negative switching
1 BN
L+
2WH
1 BN
L+
2WH
4 BK
4 BK
3 BU
zofL-
3 BU
L-
1 x positive switching / 1 x analogue
1 x negative switching / 1 x analogue
1 BN
ZW L+
2 WH
1 BN
L+
4 BK
4 BK
3 BU
L-
2 WH
3 BU
L-
21

Pin 1
L+
Pin 3
L-
• Switching signal: limit values for volumetric flow
• Pulse signal: 1 pulse every time the defined volumetric flow quantity is
Pin 4
reached.
(OUT1)
' Switching signal: quantity meter reached preset value
• Frequency signal for volumetric flow quantity
• Switching signal: empty pipe detection
• 10-Link
• Switching signal: limit values for volumetric flow
Pin 2
' Switching signal: limit values for temperature
(OUT2/
' Analogue signal for volumetric flow quantity
InD)
' Analogue signal for temperature
• Switching signal: empty pipe detection
• Input for external reset signal (InD)
Core colours of ifm sockets:
1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black)
7 Operating and display elements
000®®©o®
1 j 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1' Enter O� 11
10
1 to 8: Indicator LEDs
• LEDs 1-6 = Unit of the currently represented numerical value --� 11.1 Reading the
process value
• LED 7 = switching state of output OUT2 / of input InD
• LED 8 = switching status of output OUT1
9: Alphanumeric display, 4 digits
• Current volumetric flow quantity (with setting [SELd] = [FLOW])
• Meter reading of the totaliser (with setting [SELd] = [TOTL])
• Current medium temperature (with setting [SELd] = [TEMP])
• Parameters and parameter values
22

10: [Enter] button
• Selecting the parameters
• Reading the set values
• Confirming the parameter values
Representation in --> 8 Menu: O
11: Buttons up [ A ] and down [ V ]
• Selection of the parameters
• Activation of the setting functions
• Changing the parameter values
• Change of the display unit in the normal operating mode (Run mode)
• Locking / unlocking
Representation in --> 8 Menu: O and O
8 Menu
8.1 Process value display
gpm gph gal gal* OF
b b b b b
gal = Current consumed quantity since the last reset in 101 oiler 101 Gallonen
gal* = Consumed quantity before the last reset in 101 oiler 101 Gallonen
Main menu
23

8.2 Main menu
T Process value display
►-tJ I -- I �_J�I O T �j1__ 1 1 1► �� I O �_ 1 1_� JI 1► I
I L _I l O i ii 1_ _I O LI , 1 1 1 1 1 O I f= 1 O
I*
I J JIJ �
I*
T I__1►-r Lill= L-
I*
►_J I
f 1 1
fT I f_ J 10
! IYI 1 fi
O
1
f7 U
Q
Fr-EP O luau
-�
----------------------'---------------------------'
i
r li'rll
1 1 1 1 I
UU I
O
1 __
hlr Ill
1
hifil
Fno
i'-"fil_
T lJ
i lill
1►
LIIJr 1
UULJ 0 %l'ill_j %l'f71_17Li11C LInU 1l,ll i U O
T*--
*--------------------
*--------------------**
i
Ii►=�j ii I-1-Ifl -�1=J r=J_JLJ 0 T1T_ 5 �� L ►�Iru��nr-1--n O-
Il,f-1_ O 1�, l O 11 � O 11 I l O 11!IiL O ri�lari r_u�irr_1il_l C1►r�
=0 o i P21 O II_I i o
- ----------------------------------------------
I Extended functions
* The parameters are only displayed when selected at OU1.
** The parameters are only displayed when selected at OU2.
24

8.2.1 Explanation main menu
SP1
Maximum limit value for the set process value
rP1
Minimum limit value for the set process value
IMPS
Pulse value
ImPR
Pulse reset
FEP
Frequency output of the end point of the flow value
REP
Frequency output of the end point of the frequency
OU1
Output function for OUT1 (volumetric flow or consumed quantity)
OU2
Output function for OUT2 (volumetric flow or temperature)
As an alternative: configure OUT2 (Pin2) as input for external reset signal:
Setting: [OU2] = [In.D]
F—
Hno
Hysteresis normally open
Hnc
Hysteresis normally closed
Fno
Window normally open
Fnc
Window normally closed
ImP
Pulse output
FRQ
Frequency output
dOU
Diagnostic output
Current output
U
Voltage output
In.D
External input
ASP2
Analogue start value for the set process value
AEP2
Analogue end value for the set process value
SP2
Maximum limit value for the set process value
rP2
Minimum limit value for the set process value
Dln2
Configuration of the input (Pin2) for counter reset
--TEF
Extended functions / opening of menu level 2
25

8.3 Extended functions - Basic settings
T Main menu
M
* The parameters are only displayed when selected at OU1.
** The parameters are only displayed when selected at OU2.
26

8.3.1 Explanation extended functions (EF)
rES
Restore the factory setting
rTo
Counter reset: manual reset / time -controlled reset
CFG
Submenu basic settings
MEM
Submenu min/max memory
EPD
Submenu empty pipe
SIM
Submenu simulation
8.3.2 Submenu basic settings (CFG)
FOU1
Behaviour of output 1 in case of an error
FOU2
Behaviour of output 2 in case of an error
dST
Start-up delay of volumetric flow monitoring
P-n
Output logic: pnp / npn
dAP
Measured value damping / damping constant in seconds
diS
Update rate and orientation of the display
Uni
Standard unit of measurement for volumetric flow: gallons/minute or gallons/
hour
SELd
Standard measuring unit of the display: volumetric flow value / medium
temperature / meter reading
SEL2
Standard unit of measurement for evaluation via OUT2
LFC
Low flow cut-off
FPro
Totaliser: behaviour with negative flow
Fdir
Direction of flow
27

8.4 Extended functions - Min/max memory - Emtpy pipe -
Simulation
T Main menu
* Parameters are only displayed for the selection EP.On = On.
C

8.4.1 Explanation extended functions (EF)
rES
Restore the factory setting
rTo
Counter reset: manual reset / time -controlled reset
CFG
Submenu basic settings
MEM
Submenu min/max memory
EPD
Submenu empty pipe
SIM
Submenu simulation
8.4.2 Submenu min/max memory (MEM)
HI.F I Max. value flow
LO.F I Min. value flow
HI.T Max. value temperature
LO.T Min. value temperature
8.4.3 Submenu empty pipe (EPD)
EP.On
Empty pipe detection on / off
dEP.E.
Delay time empty signal
dEP.F
Delay time full signal
EP.Pr
Current measured value of empty pipe detection
EP.SP
Switch point of empty pipe detection
8.4.4 Submenu simulation (SIM)
S.FLW
Simulation flow value
S.TMP
Simulation temperature value
S.TIM
Simulation time
S.ON
Simulation start
29

9 Set-u p
After power on and expiry of the power -on delay time (approx. 5 seconds) the unit
is in the normal operating mode. It carries out its measurement and evaluation
functions and generates output signals according to the set parameters.
• During the power -on delay time the outputs are switched as programmed:
- ON with normally open function (Hno / Fno)
- OFF with normally closed function (Hnc / Fnc).
• If output 2 is configured as analogue output, the output signal is at 20 mA (cur-
rent output) or 10 V (voltage output).
10 Parameter setting
Parameters can be set before installation and set-up of the unit or during opera-
tion.
If you change parameters during operation, this will influence the function.
► Ensure that there will be no malfunctions in your plant.
During parameter setting the unit remains in the operating mode. It continues to
monitor with the existing parameter until the parameter setting has been com-
pleted.
MA I
For medium temperatures above 122 OF some parts of the housing can heat up
to over 149 OF.
► Do not press the pushbuttons manually. instead use another object (e.g.
ballpoint pen).
30

10.1 10-Link
10.1.1 General information
This unit has an 10-Link communication interface which requires an 10-Link-capa-
ble module (10-Link master) for operation.
The 10-Link interface enables direct access to the process and diagnostic data
and provides the possibility to set the parameters of the unit during operation.
In addition communication is possible via a point-to-point connection with a USB
adapter cable.
You will find more detailed information about 10-Link at www.ifm.com/gb/io-link.
10.1.2 Device -specific information
You will find the IODDs necessary for the configuration of the 10-Link unit and
detailed information about process data structure, diagnostic information and
parameter addresses at www.ifm.com/gb/io-link.
10.1.3 Parameter setting tools
You will find all necessary information about the required 10-Link hardware and
software at www.ifm.com/gb/io-link.
31

10.2 Parameter setting in general
Select the parameter
O 2
1. Press [Enter] briefly.
2. Press [A] or [V] until the requested
parameter is displayed.
i►►��
O 11 1
Changing the parameter value
3
O
3. Press [Enter] briefly.
> The currently set value is displayed.
4. Keep [ A ] or [ V ] pressed for 1 s
I � 11 E I '
> Display flashes first, then permanent.
5. Change value by pressing [A] or [1].
o [A] or [ V ] pressed.
Il > Faster cycle of the numerical
11 11 1
values.
11_l,l_I
i
11_,1_I
i
►T lfDlam, - O
!laauu� l_ � • 5
Confirm the parameter value
6. Press [Enter] briefly.
> The parameter is displayed again. The
new setting value is saved.
_ _
---1
L
��
Finish parameter setting and change to the process value display:
► Wait for 30 seconds
or
► Change from the submenu to the main menu, from the main menu to the process value
display with [A] or [V].
Mn If [C.Loc] is displayed when an attempt is made to modify a parameter
value, an 10-Link communication is active (temporary locking). If [S.Loc] is
displayed, the sensor is permanently locked via software. This locking can
only be removed using a parameter setting software.
32

10.2.1 Switching between the menu levels
Change to the
Switching to the next submenu via the parameters [EF], [CFG],
submenu
[MEM], [EPD] or [SIM].
► Select a submenu with [A] or [V] and switch to the submenu
by pressing [Enter].
Back to the process
► Wait for 30 seconds
value display
or
► Change from the submenu to the main menu, from the main
menu to the process value display with [A] or [V].
10.2.2 Locking I unlocking
The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional settings. Setting at
the factory: not locked.
Locking is also possible via an 10-Link capable parameter setting tool.
Locking
► Make sure that the unit is in the normal operating mode.
► Press [ A ] and [ V ] simultaneously for 10 s.
> [Loc] is displayed.
EDuring operation: [LOC] is briefly displayed if you try to
change parameter values.
Unlocking
► Press [A] and [V] simultaneously for 10 s.
> [uLoc] is displayed.
10.2.3 Timeout
If no button is pressed for 30 s during parameter setting, the unit returns to the
operating mode with unchanged parameter.
10.3 Settings for consumed quantity monitoring
10.3.1 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT1
► Select [OU1] and set the switching function:
► ►► ► ►
- [Hno] = hysteresis function/NO,
►� ► ►
- [Hnc] = hysteresis function/NC,
1 =1 1
- [Fno] = window function/NO,
- [Fnc] = window function/NC.
1__ _►
► Select [SP1] and set the value at which the output switches.
► Select [rP1 ] and set the value at which the output switches off.
33

10.3.2 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT2
► Select [SEL2] and set [FLOW].
1-1_-1 -1
► Select [OU2] and set the switching function.
IL
- [Hno] = hysteresis function/NO,
1--1
► 11 11111
- [Hnc] =hysteresis function/NC,
- [Fno] = window function/NO,
► _ ► =1 _ _I
11
- [Fnc] = window function/NC.
► =1
► Select [SP2] and set the value at which the output switches.
__
1 1
► Select [rP2] and set the value at which the output switches off.
10.3.3 Setting the analogue value for volumetric flow
► Select [SEL2] and set [FLOW]. 1-1_-1 -1
► Select [OU2] and set the function: IL
- [1] = current signal proportional to volumetric flow (4...20 mA); ► 11 1--1
- [U] = voltage signal proportional to volumetric flow (0...10 V). 11111
► Select [ASP2] and set the value at which the minimum value is provided. r I j I J-:
► Select [AEP2] and set the value at which the maximum value is pro- R
E7-
i_ 0
vided. 1 1-
10.3.4 Setting the frequency value for volumetric flow
► Select [OU1] and set [FRQ]. ► 1► I I
► Select [FEP] and set the flow value at which the frequency set in FrEP � 1� 1 ►
is provided. �_�_ �=_I
► Select [FrEP] and set the frequency. '__ ►__'__ �_1
10.4 Settings for consumed quantity monitoring
10.4.1 Settings for quantity monitoring via pulse output
► Select [OU1] and set [ImP]. 1 1► 1 1
► Select [ImPS] and set the volumetric flow quantity at which 1 pulse is 1 11 1 1
provided (--� 10.4.3). � 11=11
► Select [ImPR] and set [YES].
> Pulse repetition is active. Output 1 provides a counting pulse each time � 1 i 11=11 1
the value set in [ImPS] is reached.
34

10.4.2 Settings for quantity monitoring via the preset counter
► Select [OU1] and set [ImP]. ► 1► 1 1
► Select [ImPS] and set the volumetric flow quantity at which output 1 1 11 1 1
switches (--> 10.4.3). � ���101 ►
► Select [ImPR] and set [no].
> Pulse repetition is not active. The output switches ON if the value set in � 1i1171 1
[ImPS] is reached. It remains set until the counter is reset. rr
10.4.3 Setting the pulse value
► Select [ImPS].
► Press [Enter] briefly.
> The currently set value is displayed.
► Keep [ A ] or [ V ] pressed until "r_ ►_ ►_ r_" is displayed.
► Press [ A ] or [ V ] to select the setting range.
> With each press of the pushbutton the display changes to the next set-
ting range (decimal point shifts and / or LED changes).
► Press [Enter] to confirm the setting range.
► Press [A] or [V] until the requested numerical value is displayed.
► Press [Enter] briefly.
Setting ranges:
LED*
Unit
Display
Value
Step
increment
3
gal
_�� �.U►_'... _1_;' �� ;
0.02 ... 99.98 gal
0.02 gal
3
gal
_�� �_�.► ...J J
0.2...999.8 gal
0.2 gal
3 + 5
gal x 103
; '_UU
2...9998 gal
2 gal
3 + 5
gal x 103
�._�►_'..._�_�._�►_�
20...99 980 gal
20 gal
3 + 5
gal x 103
; ;; ;; ;.,_'...__;_,,_
200...999 800 gal
200 gal
3 + 6
gal x 106
' ' '
;.,
2000...9 998 000 gal;;
2000 gal
3 + 6
gal x 106
Mir ;r'... 'r_; ;.; -IF-'
20 000...80 000 000 gal
20 000 gal
* indicator LED ---> 7 Operating and display elements
10.4.4 Manual counter reset
i 1i11 =1 J
► Select [rTo] and set [rES.T]. �_�
> The counter is reset to zero.
35

10.4.5 Time -controlled counter -reset
► Select [rTo] and set the requested value (intervals of hours, days or
weeks).
1=1
> The counter is reset automatically with the value now set.
10.4.6 Deactivation of the counter reset
► Select [rTo] and set [OFF]. 1" i 0> The meter is only reset after overflow (= factory setting).
10.4.7 Configure counter reset using an external signal
► Select [OU2] and set [InD]. 1 11 1 _=1
► Select [Dln2] and set the reset signal:
1 11 11
- [HIGH] = reset for high signal,
i
lL i Ii i
- [LOW] = reset for low signal,
- [+EDG] = reset for rising edge,
- [-EDG] = reset for falling edge.
10.5 Settings for temperature monitoring
10.5.1 Settings for limit value monitoring with OUT2
► Select [SEL2] and set [TEMP].
1-1_-1 -1
► Select [OU2] and set the switching function.
IL
- [Hno] = hysteresis function/NO,
1 11 1--1
1 1 11 1
- [Hnc] = hysteresis function/NC,
► _ ► =1
- [Fno] = window function/NO,
_=1
11
- [Fnc] =window function/NC.
1=1
► Select [SP2] and set the value at which the output switches.
__ _=1
1 1 c
► Select [rP2] and set the value at which the output switches off.
10.5.2 Setting the analogue value for temperature
► Select [SEL2] and set [TEMP]. 1=_ 1__ 1 =_1
► Select [OU2] and set the function: IL IL
= temperature -proportional current signal 4 .20 mA 1 i 1--1
- [U] = temperature -proportional voltage signal (0...10 V).
► Select [ASP2] and set the value at which the minimum value is provided.
► Select [AEP2] and set the value at which the maximum value is pro-
vided.
36

10.6 User settings (optional)
10.6.1 Setting of the standard unit of measurement for volumetric flow
► Select [Uni] and set the unit of measurement: [gpm] or [gph].
MThe setting only has an effect on the volumetric flow value. The 1 1 __
counter values (consumed quantity) are automatically displayed in � 11 11
the unit of measurement providing the highest accuracy.
10.6.2 Configuration of the standard display
► Select [SELd] and determine the standard measuring unit: I__ I__ I __1
- [FLOW] = the current volumetric flow value in the standard unit of # 1-1
measurement is displayed. 1=� 1
- [TOTL] = display indicates the current meter count in gal, 101 gal or
101 gal.
- [TEMP] = the current medium temperature in OF is displayed.
► Select [diS] and set the update rate and orientation of the display:
- [d1] = update of the measured values every 50 ms.
- [d2] = update of the measured values every 200 ms.
- [d3] = update of the measured values every 600 ms.
- [rd 1 ], [rd2], [rd3] = display as for d 1, d2, d3; rotated by 1800.
- [OFF ] = the display is switched off in the operating mode.
10.6.3 Changing the direction of the flow rate measurement
► Select [Fdir] and set the direction of flow: Fiat 1 r
[+] = flow in the direction of the flow arrow (= factory setting)
[-] = flow against the flow arrow ► label over the arrow
10.6.4 Setting the output logic
► Select [P-n] and set [PnP] or [nPn]. 1 -1--1-7
10.6.5 Setting the start-up delay
► Select [dST] and set the numerical value in seconds. 1_•j ►__I
10.6.6 Setting the measured value damping
► Select [dAP] and set the damping constant in seconds (T value 63 %). 101_-1
01 11
37

10.6.7 Setting the error behaviour of the outputs
► Select [FOU 1 ] and set the value: F � i'i 1
1. Switching output:F
- On = output 1 switches ON in case of an error. r ' ' -
- [OFF] = output 1 switches OFF in case of an error.
- [OU 1 ] = output 1 switches irrespective of the error as defined with the
parameters.
2. Frequency output:
- [On] = 130% of FrEP
- [OFF] = 0 Hz
- [OU1] = continues running
► Select [FOU2] and set the value:
- [On] = output 2 switches ON in case of an error, the analogue signal
goes to the upper error value.
- [OFF] = output 2 switches OFF in case of an error, the analogue signal
goes to the lower error value.
- [OU2] = output 2 switches irrespective of the error as defined with the
parameters. The analogue signal corresponds to the measured value.
10.6.8 Configuring the empty pipe detection as diagnostic output
► Select [OU 1 ] or [OU2] and set [dOU]. i ► i ► i
► Select [P-n] and set [PnP] or [nPn]. I � � � �
o The empty pipe detection is only effective if it is activated at [EP. r— -- n
Il On] --> 10.6.9. When the empty pipe state is detected, the diagnostic-� --
output is inactive. c .� � � �
10.6.9 Activating 1 deactivating empty pipe detection
► Select [EP.On] and set the function: 17 1.1 ► i
- [OFF] = empty pipe detection deactivated. f '� � n
- [On] = empty pipe detection activated.
10.6.10 Time -delay empty pipe detection
► Select [dEP.E] and set the delay time from 0...30 s, at which the signal 1 i c
should be provided when the pipe is empty. I L: i_ 'L.:_
► Select dEP.F and set the delaytime from 0...30 s, at which the signal
-
should be provided when the pipe is full.
C

10.6.11 Setting of the empty pipe detection
► Select [EP.Pr] to display the current value of the empty pipe detection in EP.Pr-
percent.
► Select [EP.SP] and set the switch point of empty pipe detection. ERS P
10.6.12 Setting the counting method of the totaliser
► Select [FPro] and set the value: F P r at
[-+] = totalling the volumetric flow values with the correct sign.
[0+] = totalling only positive volumetric flow values.
10.6.13 Setting the low flow cut-off
► Select [LFC] and set the limit value. j j C. j
10.7 Service functions
10.7.1 Reading the min/max values for the volumetric flow
► Select [H I. F] or [LO. F] 1 i F[HI.F] = max. value, [LO.F] = min. value. II
Delete memory: � � � .� -
► Select [H I. F] or [LO. F].
► Press [Enter] briefly.
► Keep [ A ] or [ V ] pressed.
> [ ---- ] is displayed.
► Press [Enter] briefly.
It makes sense to delete the memories as soon as the unit operates under
normal operating conditions for the first time.
10.7.2 Reading the min/max values for the temperature
► Select [HI.T] or [LO.T] T �
[HI.T] = max. value, [LO.T] = min. value. .
Delete memory: n T
IL U .8
► Select [HI.T] or [LO.T].
► Press [Enter] briefly.
► Keep [ A ] or [ V ] pressed.
> [ ---- ] is displayed.
► Press [Enter] briefly.
It makes sense to delete the memories as soon as the unit operates under
normal operating conditions for the first time.

10.7.3 Simulation menu
► Select [S.FLW] and set the flow value to be simulated.►__ ► i
► Select [S.TMP] and set the temperature value to be simulated. i 'I I IL o
► Select [S.Tim] and set the time of the simulation in minutes. _• , i 71
i Mo r,
► Select [S.On] and set the function: T
- [On]: The simulation starts. The values are simulated for the time set =•� . ' I rro
at [S.Tim]. [SIM] is displayed simultaneously with the process values. i._ i 1
Cancel with [Enter]. �� � � � �
- [OFF]: The simulation is not active.
10.7.4 Resetting all parameters to factory setting
► Select [rES]. __ �__ ►__
► Press [Enter] briefly.
► Keep [ A ] or [ V ] pressed.
> [ ---- ] is displayed.
► Press [Enter] briefly.
For the factory settings please refer to the end of these instructions ---� 13.
We recommend taking down your own settings in that table before carrying
out a reset.
,O

11 Operation
11.1 Reading the process value
The LEDs 1-6 signal which process value is currently displayed.The process value
to be displayed as standard (temperature, flow velocity or meter reading of the
totaliser) can be preset ---> 10.6.2 Configuration of the standard display. A standard
unit of measurement can be defined for the flow velocity (gpm or gph --� 10.6.1).
Further process values can be read in addition to the preset standard display:
Press the buttons [A] or [V].
> The LED of the selected process value display is lit and the current process
p pY
value is displayed.
> After 30 seconds the display changes to the standard display.
000®®
j
w -n o 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LED
Prozesswertanzeige
Einheit
1 ❑
Current flow volume per minute
gpm
2 ❑
Current flow volume per hour
gph
3 ❑
N
Current consumed quantity since the last reset
gal
3(
Consumed quantity before the last reset
gal
3 + 5 ❑
Current consumed quantity since the last reset
101 gal
3 + 5 (
Consumed quantity before the last reset
101 gal
3 + 6 ❑
Current consumed quantity since the last reset
101 gal
3 + 6 (
Consumed quantity before the last reset
101 gal
4 ❑
Current medium temperature
OF
❑ LED is lit; 9 LED flashes
* The consumed quantity is automatically displayed in the unit of measurement providing the
highest accuracy.
41

11.2 Reading the parameter value
To display the currently set parameter value, take the following steps:
Select the parameter
1. Press [Enter] briefly.
2. Press [A] or [V] until the requested
parameter is displayed.
O Q
0riCI ii
Display the parameter value
O
3. Press [Enter] briefly.
> The currently set value is displayed for
0
30 s.
�►_i�►_i��,_,
o By pressing [Enter] briefly several
n
i
times, the display switches between
parameter and parameter value.
1 1
11=-,1 1
Switching to the process value display
► Wait for 30 seconds
or
► Change from the submenu to the main menu, from the main menu to the process value
display with [A] or [V].
WA

11.3 Error indications
Warning message
[SC1]
Short circuit in OUT1.
LED8 for OUT1 flashes (--� 7 Operating and display elements).
[SC2]
Short circuit in OUT2.
LED7 for OUT2 flashes (--4 7 Operating and display elements).
[SC]
Short circuit in both outputs.
LED7 and LED8 flash (--4 7 Operating and display elements).
[OL]
Detection zone of volumetric flow or temperature exceeded.
Measured value between 120 % and 130 % of the final value of the measuring
range.
[UL]
Below the detection zone of volumetric flow or temperature.
Measured value between -120 % and -130 % of the final value of the
measuring range.
[Err]
• Unit faulty / malfunction.
• Measured value greater than 130 % of the final value of the measuring range.
• Measured value lower than -130 % of the final value of the measuring range.
[C.Loc]
Setting pushbuttons locked, parameter change rejected.
Active 10-Link communication.
[S.Loc]
Setting pushbuttons locked, parameter change rejected.
Unlock using parameter setting software.
[SEnS]
Sensor signal invalid.
• Measuring pipe not sufficiently filled.
• Medium with too low a conductivity.
F[IOE.n]
Malfunctioning. The unit is faulty and must be replaced.
12 Technical data
Technical data and scale drawing at www.ifm.com.
L91

13 Factory setting
Factory setting
User setting
SP1
20 % *
rP1
19.5 %
IMPS
0.1
ImPR
YES
OU1
Hno
OU2
I
SP2 (FLOW)
40 %
rP2 (FLOW)
39.5 %
SP2 (TEMP)
68 OF
rP2 (TEMP)
67,3 OF
ASP2 (FLOW)
0 % *
AEP2 (FLOW)
100 %
ASP2 (TEMP)
-4 OF
AEP2 (TEMP)
176 OF
FEP
100 %
REP
1 kHz
Mir
+
Pro
-+
LFC
1,1 gpm
D.In2
+EDG
FOU1
OFF
FOU2
OFF
dST
0
P-n
PnP
dAP
0.6 s
rTo
OFF
diS
d2

Uni
gpm
SELd
FLOW
SEL2
FLOW
EP.On
OFF
dEP.E
0 s
dEP.F
2 s
EP.SP
75 %
S.FLW
20 %
S.TMP
68 OF
S.Tim
3 min
* of the final value of the measuring range
More information at www.ifm.com
45

measurement
TM
KPSI
INNOW - Level -
Transducers :
V!,
Thi
S P
F
C I
A
L T
I E
S
6
�S-
0

measurement
S P E C I A L? I E S
KPSI Analog Manual 22nd Edition •`
Table of Contents
1.0 Product Description..........................................................
2
General Characteristics.......................................................
2
Care and Handling...............................................................
2
Calibration............................................................................
3
Approvals............................................................................
3
2.0 Product Accessories and Options ...................................
4
NoseCaps...........................................................................
4
Stainless Steel, SuperDryTM Vent Filters or Aneroid Bellows 5
SacrificialAnode...................................................................
5
Absolute/Sealed Gage Transducer .......................................
6
Polyurethane & ETFE Jacketed Cable .................................
6
LightningProtection...............................................................
9
1/2" Male NPT Conduit Fitting ................................................
10
Electrical Outputs.................................................................
10
Reverse Signal Output........................................................
11
Temperature Output...........................................................
11
CableHanger......................................................................
11
Submersible Cable Splicing Kit............................................12
3.0 Installation & Maintenance Tips.......................................13
General Installation Procedures..........................................13
Transducer Anchors............................................................13
Transducer Submersion......................................................14
Vent Filters or Aneroid Bellows.......................................14
Cable Protection..................................................................15
Bending of Cable.................................................................15
Cable Compression.............................................................16
4-20 mA Output Wiring........................................................16
VDC Output Wiring..............................................................16
Models 745/750...................................................................17
Sealed -Gage Transducer Above Sea Level ........................17
Transducer Position Sensitivity............................................17
General Maintenance Tips..................................................18
Desiccant Maintenance.......................................................18
Clogged Nose Piece or Dirty Diaphragm .............................18
Cleaning Your Transducer...................................................19
4.0 Warranty and Product Return Procedures ......................22
Restocking Policy...............................................................
23
Appendix A Drawings and Diagrams.............................................25
Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions....................................29
Appendix C Field Checkout & Troubleshooting Techniques ......
34
Appendix D Calibration Calculations.............................................50
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 1 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22nd Edition • i
1.0 Product Description
General Characteristics
KPSITM Level and Pressure Transducers use isolated -
diaphragm sensors that are specifically designed for use
with hostile fluids and gases. These sensors utilize a
silicon pressure cell that has been fitted into a stainless
steel or titanium package with an integral, compliant
stainless steel or titanium barrier diaphragm. This sensor
assembly is housed in a rugged 316 stainless steel or
titanium case which provides for a variety of level ranges
from 2.3 ft (0.75 m) H2O through 4614 ft (1408 m) H2O
and pressure inputs from 0-1 (7 kPa) through 0-15000 psi
(103 mPa). Our devices feature internal signal
conditioning. Standard outputs are 4-20 mA and VDC.
All units containing active electronic components have
surge and reverse polarity protection. For ease of use in
the field, our transducers are permanently laser engraved
with our logo and name, wiring information, part number
(P/N), serial number (S/N), date of manufacture (DOM),
range, excitation and output. Transducers are offered in
diameters of 1.0 (25 mm) and 0.75 inches (19 mm).
Care and Handling
Our transducers are designed for rugged use. However,
they need protection from over pressure and sharp
impact. When lowering them into a liquid, penetrate the
surface slowly and only to the depth necessary. Avoid
dropping the unit from above the surface. Clean all
transducers by rinsing them in a mild detergent. Direct
probing of the diaphragm or attempts to remove
protective screens will damage the sensor, voiding the
warranty.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 2 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22nd Edition • i
Calibration
All transducers are shipped with calibration information
unique to each transducer. Make sure you keep each
calibration report. However, should you misplace your
calibration sheet, contact the factory and request a
duplicate. All KPSITM Transducer calibrations are
traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST).
Approvals
Most of our products have UL and FM certification for
intrinsic safety. Their respective installation control
drawings can be downloaded from our website. Several
of our product lines also carry ABS approval. Most
products are CE compliant to EN 61326-1:2006 and
EN 61326-2-3:2006. CE compliant units are labeled
accordingly.
These units are designed for installation in a Class I,
Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, Class 11, Division 1,
Groups E, F and G, Class III, Division 1 hazardous
location when connected to appropriate apparatus such
as those manufactured by R. G. Stahl, Inc., and others.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 3 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
s P L C I A L 1 I f S
KPSI Analog Manual 22' Edition
2.0 Product Accessories and Options
WARNING: POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING
HAZARD
In hazardous locations:
Avoid building up static charge on case of data protector
and plastic accessories.
Use damp rag to wipe data protector and plastic accessories
to avoid static build up.
Nose Caps
There are several different user -installable nose caps for
the 700, 710, 720, 730, 735 submersible level
transducers. The ported nose cap (POM) with #8-
32UNC-2B threaded hole is best used where weights are
required and for those installations where users may
encounter sharp, protruding objects. The open -face nose
cap which allows maximum contact with the liquid media
is ideal for wastewater and "greasy" applications where
clogging of the sensor is a concern. The piezometer
nose cap allows the unit to be buried in saturated soil
without damage to the sensor diaphragm. The 1/4"
male NPT pressure nose cap is not only useful for
calibration purposes but also allows the device to be
used as a submersible or above ground pressure
transducer.
WARNING: Caution must be exercised when inserting a
screw into the nose cap as the maximum insertion length
should not exceed 0.175".
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 4 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
810 SuperDryTM, 811 Stainless Steel Vent Filters or
815 Aneroid Bellows
All KPSITM submersible transducers with vented gauge
format are supplied with a protective barrier that guards
against moisture buildup in the cable vent tube. The 810
SuperDryTM vent filter is installed free of charge and is
guaranteed to operate maintenance free for one year.
The 811 Stainless Steel Vent Filter is housed in a 316
stainless steel body containing desiccant to provide vent
tube moisture protection for a minimum of five years
without maintenance.
We also offer the 815 Aneroid Bellows as a maintenance
free option that can be used on submersibles with
accuracies of: ±1 %, ±0.5%, or ±0.25% FSO. These
barriers ensure reliable operation and long life as they
protect sensitive electronic components from mildew and
prevent the formation of a liquid column in the vent tube.
Any such liquid column directly affects calibration of the
transducer.
Sacrificial Anodes
Our sacrificial anodes are made from a special zinc alloy
formulated to guarantee continued effectiveness over
long periods. Because the anodes are 95% galvanic,
they will not corrode unless there is an electrolytic
demand. The anode maintains a high driving potential
throughout its 12 month life, is self -sloughing and always
exposes new zinc for the best possible protection. For
those applications where cable buoyancy is a problem,
the sacrificial anode can be substituted for hanging
weights.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 5 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Sacrificial Anodes provide cathodic protection against
galvanic corrosion for our submersible pressure
transducers. Galvanic corrosion occurs when dissimilar
metals are placed in contact with an electrolyte. This
condition causes a potential difference to exist between
the two metals, causing electron flow between them.
Corrosion of the less corrosion -resistant metal is
increased and attack of the more resistant metal is
decreased. The 820 Sacrificial Anode is clamped to the
exterior of a one -inch bore submersible transducer. We
also offer a 1" diameter pencil anode, the 825, that
attaches to the nose cap of either a 3/4" or 1 " bore
submersible transducer.
Absolute/Sealed Gage Transducer
The sealed gage option for submersible transducers
eliminates the need for a vent filter. The standard output
of a sealed gauge transducer is 4 mA at 14.70 psia.
Before ordering a sealed gauge transducer, the customer
should determine the altitude (above sea level) of the
installation and inform Customer Service of this value
before order entry. During manufacture, the output of the
transducer will be adjusted to compensate for the altitude
difference, if applicable.
Polyurethane & ETFE Jacketed Cable
It is considered best practice when deploying vented
gauge format transducers, to provide atmospheric
reference at the shortest point of the transducer's cable
run. This point is often the end of the transducer cable's
vertical drop at the top of the well head or tank.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 6 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22 Id Edition • i
Most installations of our submersible level transducers
connect our polyurethane or ETFE cable to a junction
box.
From this junction box, users typically run their own cable
to the required instrumentation. Polyurethane -jacketed
cable is used for most applications while ETFE material is
recommended for more aggressive environments.
Specifications for our standard polyurethane and ETFE
jacketed cable are as follows:
Standard
Standard
Specifications
Submersible Cable
Non -Submersible Cable
Weight
0.05 Ibs/ft (0.07 kg/m)
0.025 Ibs/ft (0.035 kg/m)
Min. OD
0.28" (7.10 mm)
0.189" (4.8 mm)
Max OD
0.31" (7.87 mm)
0.19" (4.9 mm)
Conductors
2 - 22 AW G
4 - 22 AWG
Insulation
PVC
Conductors
Polyurethane or ETFE
Color coded PVC
Outer jacket
Shield
36 gauge spiral tinned
Aluminum/polyester foil
copper wire foil shield with
facing outward
drain wire
Vent Tube
Polyethylene, .060" ID
Drain wire
7/32 tinned copper
(1.52 mm)
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 7 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Chemical resistance of polyurethane:
Potable Water, Wastewater, Borax, Butane,
Animal Fat, Carbonic Acid, Citric Acid, Cod
Liver Oil, Corn Oil, Diesel Fuel, Glycerin,
Glycol, Mineral Oils, Potassium Nitrate,
Potassium Sulfate, Sea Water, Silicone Oils,
Sodium Hydroxide, Stoddard Solvent, Tannic
Acid (10), Tartaric Acid, Turbine Oil.
Chemical resistance of ETFE: Acetic Acid
(Glacial), Acetic Anhydride, Acetone, Aluminum
Chloride, Anti- Freeze, Bromine, Calcium
Chloride, Calcium Hydroxide, Chlorine, Copper
Chloride, Ferrous Chloride, Hydrochloric Acid,
Ketones, Lacquer Thinners, Sodium Hypochlorite,
Sulfuric Acid.
The vented cable termination end is specially prepared at
the factory to eliminate the potential for moisture
migration. Where the lead wires emerge from under the
jacket, there's potting material and a shrink tube "boot",
every effort should be made to leave this feature intact.
Should the cable be longer than needed for the
installation, it is recommended that the excess length be
accommodated in a service loop and that the potted end
of the cable NOT be shortened.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 8 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
The cable attached to this instrument is specifically
engineered for submersible applications. The
polyurethane outerjacket provides long term reliability
under most conditions. The cable should be handled
carefully, however, as the jacket may be subject to
cutting should it be "raked" over extremely sharp edges.
To guard against water incursion should an inadvertent
minor cut occur, we have incorporated an exclusive
"water block" feature immediately beneath the jacket. The
cable is fully shielded, with the shield connected to the
metal housing at the transducer end and terminated in a
drain wire at the termination or user end. The shield
should always be terminated to a good earth ground,
unless the transducer is installed in an area where
galvanic corrosion is known to be a serious problem.
Lightning Protection
Lightning and surge protection for VDC and 4-20 mA
output are available. This is achieved through the use of
2 protectors, one is integral to the transducer housing
and one is provided for the outside line located
at the surface and grounded to a DIN -Rail. Please
remember this option must be factory installed at the time
of order entry or as a factory upgrade. This option
cannot be installed in the field. Lightning protection is
also available for unit only. Contact customer service for
details.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 9 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Featuring quick response and low clamping voltages,
these devices protect against fast rising voltage
transients as well as severe current surges associated
with lightning discharges up to 20,000 amperes.
Following a surge, the protector automatically restores
the line to normal operation and awaits the next surge
without having to reset a breaker or replace a fuse. The
power supply needs to be 12 VDC minimum and limited to
150 mA to avoid lock up of the gas tube after a
suppression event. Transducers installed with this
option have a lifetime warranty against damage due to
all voltage surge events.
Please note: When using the lightning protection
option on 4-20 mA products, users should take into
account the additional series resistance of this
option when selecting the loop power supply. This
option will increase total loop resistance by 88 Ohms.
%" Male NPT Conduit Fitting
Submersible level transducers can be attached to a rigid
conduit and the cable run through the conduit. To
achieve this, all of our submersible transducers can be
fitted with an optional'/2' NPT male conduit fitting (specify
"Electrical Connection Option 4" when ordering) where
the cable exits the transducer. This fitting can be mated
to a standard rigid conduit.
Electrical Outputs
We offer the industry standard 0-5 VDC and 4-20 mA
outputs. In addition we also offer a variety of voltage
output ranges.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 10 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Reverse Signal Output
For some applications, it is important to know how far the
water is from the top of the tank or the surface of the
ground. If specified by the customer, our factory can set
the transducer so that zero pressure reads full scale
electrical output and maximum pressure reads zero
electrical output.
Temperature Output
A temperature output option is available for most
transducers having 4-20 mA pressure output. The
temperature sensor requires an excitation of 9-28 VDC
and is calibrated for a temperature range of -20 to 60°C
with an accuracy of ±4°C.
Output Option 6 (4-20mA output for -20 to 60°C)
(mA Reading x 5) - 40 = Temperature °C
Example: Reading is 20mA (20 x 5) - 40 = 60°C
Reading is 12mA (12 x 5) - 40 = 200C
Reading is 4mA (4 x 5) - 40 = -20°C
Cable Hanger
We can supply an optional cable hanger (P/N 12-90-
0931) to help end users secure the cable. The cable
hanger can be positioned anywhere on the cable by
pushing the ends together. Once positioned, the cable
hanger expands and provides a snug grip on the cable.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 11 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P E C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
When mounting the transducer in a
well casing, the cable hanger can
be secured to a hook on the well
plate or an eye bolt may be
HANGER.
attached to the side of the well
casing. The cable hanger loop is
then secured to the eye bolt by
using any number of types of CABLE
fasteners. A similar technique can \
be used when working in stilling
wells for surface water level
measurement. In this case, the
loop- end of the cable hanger can
be attached directly to a screw or
bolt bored into the still well shelf.
Submersible Cable Splicing Kit
Our field -installable cable splice kit
(P/N 830) allows you to splice
polyurethane and ETFE
submersible cable. It is most
commonly used for well applications
where the more expensive ETFE
cable is required for suspension in
corrosive media where the liquid CABLE HANGER
level is fairly shallow, but the well is hundreds
of feet in depth. It is also used in emergency
situations where cable must be spliced together
to get an application up and running.
Warranty claims for moisture incursion will be null and void
when the splice kit is used.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 12 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
3.0 Installation & Maintenance Tips
WARNING: POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC
CHARGING HAZARD
In hazardous locations:
• Avoid building up static charge on case of data
protector and plastic accessories.
• Use damp rag to wipe data protector and plastic
accessories to avoid static build up.
General Installation Procedures
The following is important installation and
preventive maintenance information. Our
Customer Service or Applications Engineering
Support staff can provide additional instruction.
Transducer Anchors: Most users either
suspend our submersible transducers in
stilling wells or attach them to rigid conduit.
This is done to prevent damage to the
transducer from shock caused by water
turbulence. It is not advisable to tie your
transducer to a pump or to piping, as any
problem with the transducer could require that
the pump be pulled from the installation. This
could prove to be very expensive. (Please
refer to the Cable Anchoring Schemes drawing
in Appendix A.)
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 13 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Some applications use an optional bracket to
clamp the transducer to a fixed object (i.e., wall,
ladder, step) or require the unit to be suspended
without any protective still well or attachment
device. In all installations, care should be taken
to ensure no damage occurs to the cable.
2. Transducer Submersion: Damage to
submersible cable is one of the most frequent
causes of transducer failure. Lower your
transducer into the liquid slowly, making sure the
cable does not drag over sharp edges and only to
the depth necessary. Avoid dropping the unit from
the surface. This does not apply to Series 27, 28,
and 30 transducers.
3. SuperDryTM Vent Filter (Desiccant), Stainless
Steel Vent Filter, or Aneroid Bellows
Installation (For submersible transducers
vented gage pressure format only) Always install
a desiccant vent filter or aneroid bellows
immediately after transducer installation. Failure
to use one or the other could result in premature
failure of the transducer; which would not be
covered by warranty. If you use a desiccant filter,
you should establish a regular maintenance
schedule. You should change your vent filter
when it is 75% spent (pink color). Replacement
filters are available at a nominal cost from the
factory. Do not remove the old vent filter until a
new one is available. The most common failure
mode of our transducers is moisture and cor-
rosion damage due to lack of use or maintenance
of the vent filter. This will allow air into the
desiccant filter and allows the transducer to
properly vent with changes in barometric
pressure.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 14 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
The KPSI° 811 Stainless Steel Vent Filter is housed
in a 316 stainless steel body containing desiccant to
provide vent tube moisture protection for a minimum
of five years without maintenance. A Gore -Tex°
filter plug provides the vent filter with atmospheric
pressure reference. These vent filters are 2.75
inches (7.0 cm) long with a 0.75 inch (1.9 cm)
diameter.
To install/replace either the aneroid bellows or the
vent filter, simply unplug the old unit from the vent
tube and plug the 0.062" x 1" stainless steel
connector tube (supplied with each filter or
bellows) into the vent tube. (Installation and
mounting instructions are supplied with each
aneroid bellows and vent filter.) The diagram on
page 16 shows typical vent filter and aneroid
bellows hookups.
4. Cable Protection An inexpensive way to protect
the cable from damage is to order the
submersible pressure transducer with a '/2"
conduit attachment. Connect an inexpensive
flexible 5/8" garden hose to the'/2' conduit fitting
with an equally inexpensive female PVC'/2" NPT
x 3/4" NHT swivel fitting, available at your local
hardware store
5. Bending of Cable Our polyurethane and ETFE
jacketed cables are quite flexible. Care needs to
be taken to ensure that when bending the cable to
suit your installation you do not crimp the vent
tube inside the cable. Consequently, do not bend
the cable more than a radius of 1 foot.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 15 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22 Ind Edition • i
6. Cable Compression Many users require a
compression fitting to secure our ETFE and
polyurethane jacketed cable as it enters a junction
box. Care needs to be taken that you do not
over -tighten the fitting so as to damage the cable.
7. 4-20 mA Wiring When connecting a 2-wire 4-20
mA transducer to a typical power supply and mA
meter, verify that the meter has an input
impedance of at least 10 Ohms. If you are unsure
of the input impedance, then a 10 Ohm resistor
may be placed in series with the meter and
transducer. Connect the + (red) lead of the
transducer to the + terminal of the power supply.
If the 10 Ohm resistor is required, connect it to the
- (black) lead of the transducer. Use a short
length of 22 AWG or heavier wire to connect the +
terminal of the meter to the resistor (if it is required) or
the - (black) wire of the transducer. Connect the -
terminal of the meter to the - terminal of the power
supply with a length of 22 AWG or heavier wire.
Connect the drain wire from the transducer to a good
earth ground. (See Appendix, page 14 for wiring
diagram.) Please refer to "Maximum Cable Lengths
and Minimum Supply Voltage" in Appendix C,
page 22 to verify minimum loop supply voltage
requirements.
8. VDC Wiring To connect a 3 wire VDC output
transducer to a typical power supply and the
voltmeter, connect the - terminal of the power
supply to the - input terminal of the meter with a
length of 22 AWG or heavier wire. Connect the -
excitation (black) lead of the transducer to the -
input terminal of the meter. Connect the + input
terminal of the meter to the signal lead (white) of
the transducer.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 16 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Connect the + terminal of the power supply to the
+ lead (red) of the transducer. Connect the drain
wire to a good earth ground. (See Appendix A,
page 14.)
9. Models 745 and 750 come standard with a field
removable diaphragm protector (one -inch or 25
mm standoff). The diaphragm protector can
easily be taken off by removing six (6) fasteners
located on the bottom of the unit.
10. Sealed -Gage Transducer Configured For
Altitude Above Sea Level Since sealed -gauge
transducers are normally calibrated at sea level,
there may be considerable error induced when
used at a higher elevation. If the transducer was
calibrated without taking into consideration the
difference in atmospheric pressure at sea level
and the higher elevation, an offset error will
occur. In order to eliminate error due to this
difference, the customer must identify the
elevation where the transducer will be installed.
The nominal atmospheric pressure at the
location is calculated and the transducer will be
ranged accordingly.
Not all KPSITM Transducers are available in
a sealed pressure format. Please refer to
the appropriate datasheet for availability.
11. Position Sensitivity The transducer should be
installed so that the diaphragm located behind the
nose cap is oriented in a vertical position,
otherwise the unit could exhibit an offset.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 17 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
KPSI Analog Manual22nd Edition •`
General Maintenance Tips for Submersible
Transducers
1. Desiccant Maintenance
WARNING: POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING
HAZARD
In hazardous locations:
• Avoid building up static charge on case of data protector
and plastic accessories.
• Use damp rag to wipe data protector and plastic accessories
to avoid static build up.
If you use a desiccant vent filter, you should
establish a regular maintenance schedule.
You should change your vent filter when it is 75%-
90% spent (pink color). Replacement filters are available
at a nominal cost from the factory. Do not remove the old
vent filter until a new one is available. Remember that
our improved 810 SuperDryTM Vent Filters are designed
to be effective for at least one year before requiring
replacement. The 811 Stainless Steel Vent Filter is
designed to last 5 years.
2. Clogged Nose Piece or Dirty Diaphragm
Either of these conditions could result in
erroneous readings from your transducer.
WARNING: NEVER attempt to clean your transducer's nose
piece or diaphragm with any object. This will dent the sensor
diaphragm and cause permanent damage to the transducer.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 18 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Your transducer may be cleaned in accordance with
the procedures listed in step 4, below.
3. Cleaning your transducer
Materials required:
• (3) Plastic basins 8-12 inches (200-300
mm) across and 4-6 inches (100 - 150
mm) deep
• Supply of clean, lint -free cleaning rags
• Rubber Gloves
• Mild dishwashing detergent such as Dawn®,
noted for its grease dissolving/cleaning
capabilities
• Enough clear clean water to fill two of
the basins
• 32 oz. bottle of "The Works® -Tub and
Shower Cleaner" available
commercially through Wal-Mart, K-Mart,
Target, and Ace Hardware stores, or at
www.theworkscleans.com/index.html
Preparation: Prior to cleaning your pressure
transducer, ensure that all procedures have
been followed in the proper cleaning of the cable
and transducer to remove any biologically
and chemically hazardous materials. The
vent filter (or bellows) must be properly attached.
The cable should be coiled to ensure ease of
handling and it must be protected against the
possibility of accidental abrasion and/or penetration
of the cable jacket by sharp objects. A lead length
of 1 to 1 1/2 feet (0.3 - 0.45 m) of cable from the
transducer should be allowed to facilitate handling
during cleaning.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 19 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
The protective covering (or similar protective device)
that is shipped with each transducer should be
attached to the transducer at all times. It should
only be removed prior to installation or cleaning.
Your work surface needs to be clean and free of
clutter and large enough to accommodate all
materials required in addition to the transducer
and cable. Rubber gloves should be worn when
working with "The Works®" cleanser. MSDS
available from the manufacturer. Wearing your
rubber gloves, fill one of the bowls with fresh
water, one with a mild detergent mixed with water,
and the last with 16 ounces (0.45 kg) of "The
Works®".
Cleaning:
Step 1: Immerse the unit in the bowl
containing the mild detergent and stir
for 20-30 seconds, gently rubbing
the exterior casing of the transducer
to remove stubborn and built-up dirt
and grime. Remove and thoroughly
rinse in the bowl containing the fresh
water. Rinse and wipe dry.
Step 2: Holding the body of the transducer
with one hand so that you are
looking at the retaining screen
protecting the sensor, carefully
remove the sensor nose piece by
simply unscrewing it from the
transducer body.
Do not touch the sensor diaphragm
with your finger or any other object.
Also, do not try to dry the inside
portion of the transducer, as you risk
damaging the pressure sensor.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 20 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Step 3: Place the transducer in the bowl
containing "The Works®" solution,
and gently stir for approximately 15-20
seconds. Rinse in the bowl
containing clean water and wipe dry
the external casing only. Place the
nose piece in the same solution for
15-20 seconds, working to
thoroughly clean it out. Rinse and
wipe dry.
Step 4: Holding the transducer in a vertical
position so that you can see the
face of the sensor, screw the
protective nose piece back into
place.
4. Cleaning the Lightning Protection Data Line
Protector
WARNING: POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING
HAZARD
In hazardous locations:
Avoid building up static charge on case of data protector
and plastic accessories.
Use damp rag to wipe data protector and plastic accessories
to avoid static build up.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 21 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
4.0 Warranty and Product Return
Procedure
KPSITM products are warranted for a period of two
years commencing from the date of shipment to the
original purchaser to be clear of title, free from
defects in material and workmanship, and in
conformity with product specifications.
Any transducer/transmitter that is less than 2 years old
(see DOM) which does not meet the product's
specifications and exhibits no obvious physical
damage to the housing, sensor, or cable (cuts), will be
replaced under warranty.
Units 2-3 years old: Units that fall within this age group
and exhibit no obvious physical damage to the housing,
sensor, or cable (cuts), may be replaced at a discounted
list price.
Units greater than 3 years old: Units that fall within this
age group are not replaced under warranty.
Merchandise Return Procedures
Contact the Applications Support Group or the
Customer Service Department at Measurement
Specialties if your transducer is not operating properly.
Our staff is available for troubleshooting at (757) 766-
1500 or toll free at 1-800-745-8008 during normal working
hours, Eastern time. If your transducer or accessory
needs to be returned to Measurement Specialties, obtain
a Returned Merchandise Authorization (RMA) from the
Customer Service Department prior to shipment.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 22 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Be prepared to supply the following information when
requesting the RMA:
! Part number
! Serial number
! Complete description of problems/symptoms
! Bill To and Ship To address
! Purchase order number (not required for warranty
repairs)
! Customer contact, telephone number, and email
The above information, including the RMA number, must
be on the customer's shipping documents that
accompany the equipment to be repaired. Measurement
Specialties also requests that the outside of the shipping
container be labeled with the RMA number to assist in
tracking the repairs. All equipment should be sent to the
following address:
ATTN: KPSI TRANSDUCER REPAIR
DEPARTMENT (7-digit RMA number)
Measurement Specialties
1000 Lucas Way
Hampton, Virginia 23666
Prior to returning to Measurement Specialties, the
transducer and cable must be cleaned per
instructions provided on the cleaning certificate
supplied when the transducer was delivered. The
certificate can also be found on Measurement Specialties
website: www.meas-spec.com
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 23 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
The completed certificate must accompany the
transducer when shipped to Measurement Specialties. If
the transducer has been used in media other than
potable water, Measurement Specialties customer
service must be notified at the same time an RMA
number is requested.
Measurement Specialties reserves the right to reject any
shipment deemed to be unsanitary or environmentally
unsafe to handle. If these guidelines are not met, the
package will be sent back unopened and at the
customer's expense.
Please include the attached vent filter or aneroid
bellows with each returned vented gauge submersible
transducer.
Measurement Specialties will return warranty items
prepaid via UPS GROUND. If the customer desires
another method of return shipment, Measurement
Specialties will prepay and add the shipping charges to
the repair bill. Expedite premiums and shipping charges
are non-refundable.
Incoming freight charges are the customer's
responsibility. The customer is also responsible for
shipping charges to and from Measurement Specialties
for all equipment not under warranty.
Once the return is received, it typically takes 5-10
working days for the technician to make a fault
determination.
A 60% Purchase Order Cancelation fee will be applied
when the order is canceled within 24 hours of placement
The order cannot be canceled after 24 hours of placement.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 24 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Appendix A
Drawings and Diagrams
Wiring Diagram VDC, mA, and Temp Output
Cable Anchoring Schemes ...........................
Reference Connection Schemes ..................
Submersible Cable Termination ....................
.26
.27
.28
.28
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 25 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P E C 1 A L I I E S° -g
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Wiring Diagram VDC, mA and Temp Output
+ EXCITATION
- EXCITATION POWER SUPPLY
VDC m
Configuration COMMON
� _j + SIGNAL VOLTAGE METER
WHITE
-RE-Di
_ z z
RED BLK = �c ,
POWER I M 3l I mA
4-24 mA
Configuration
DRAIN WIRE
Temperature output
Option
Note:
1. These diagrams depict typical installations.
Refer to your power supply and instrumentation
Manufacturer for the specifics of your application
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 26 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I F S,
KPSI Analog Manual 22nd Edition •`
Cable Anchoring Schemes
Measurement Speclatles, Inc. 27 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hamr:ton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement .
S P IF I A L T I IF •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
11
Reference Connection Schemes
TRANSDUCER
CABLE _ -
'`� VENTED VENT FILTER
TANKS OR
ANEROID
ANBELLOWS
(option)
�- NON -VENTED VENT FILTER ��
TANKS TI OP OF
TANK
Submersible Cable Termination
ANEROID
O b BELLOWS
I
II
Ii
II �I
SHIELD OR
�I
EARTH i VENT FILTER
GROUND
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 28 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Appendix B
1. Question: What installation ideas do you have to
help me get rid of electrical noise
interfering with the signal?
Answer: An ounce of prevention goes a long
way. Either try to eliminate the source
of noise or move the transducer as far
away from it as possible. We strongly
encourage you to secure our cable
shield to a good earth ground and that
you use a 4-20 mA signal output.
Armed with these precautions and the
fact that many of our transducers are
CE approved for electromagnetic
interference, you should have few
problems.
2. Question: The cable on the submersible
transducer always seems to get cut
and damaged. What am I doing
wrong?
Answer: This is the most common problem that
our users encounter. Make sure that
all of your colleagues and staff
understand the importance of handling
the cable with care. The cable should
not be bent around rough or sharp
edges. Always use a cable reel during
transport. Where possible, suspend
the unit in a perforated 2" (50 mm)
PVC pipe and thread the cable through
protective conduit to the nearest
junction box.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 29 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
3. Question: I have an application where the
transducer is frequently damaged by
voltage spikes. What can be done to
prevent this?
Answer: At a minimum, make sure the cable
shield is connected to an earth ground
as near as possible to the transducer.
We can provide a surge protection kit
for both our submersible and non -
submersible transducers. See page 4.
These kits will handle typical spikes
that might come in through the power
lines as well as surges that travel
through the ground due to nearby
lightning strikes
4. Question: How much impact shock can your
submersible transducers withstand?
Answer: Our transducers are not shock tested
and the lower pressure ranges can be
damaged if dropped from several feet
onto an unforgiving surface like
concrete. We recommend that the
protective shipping foam remain in
place until the unit is installed.
5. Question: What is the response time of your
transducer?
Answer: From initial power up, the transducer
output will stabilize within a fraction of
a second. The frequency response is
rather low, probably less than 1 kHz,
but it depends on the application, the
media, plumbing, etc. Call our factory
for application assistance if frequency
response is critical in your application.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 30 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
6. Question: How do I attach your vent filter or
aneroid bellows to my cable vent tube?
Answer: The vent filter can be mounted
anywhere convenient, preferably out of
the weather. It can be mounted in any
position and connects to the cable vent
tube via the extension tube with metal
connector tube provided. The aneroid
bellows must be mounted in a way that
its movement is not encumbered. It is
provided with a mounting base.
7. Question: What is the best way to mark my
cable?
Answer: Use white vinyl marking tape available
from your local hardware or electronic
stores. These same stores may also
sell cable marking kits.
8. Question: Any ideas for preventing marine growth
on your submersible transducers?
Answer: You might want to try waterproof
grease. Remove the threaded nose
cap to facilitate applying the grease.
Take care not to damage the
diaphragm when applying the
grease and not to trap air bubbles
against the sensing diaphragm.
9. Question: How many measurements can you
make before the diaphragm on the
sensor fails?
Answer: In normal operation - millions of cycles.
We find that sensor failure is rarely due
to diaphragm fatigue.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 31 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22 Ind Edition • i
10. Question: What is the turnaround time on
repairs?
Answer: Once we receive a unit into our facility
it takes less than 10 working days to
complete an evaluation.
11. Question: What is the longest length of cable you
have attached to a submersible
transducer?
Answer: Two thousand feet (610 meters).
12. Question: Why do you use 316 SS housings and
sensors for your standard transducers?
Answer: It offers a good combination of
corrosion resistance and reasonable
cost. As an option, we do offer
titanium for more aggressive
environments.
13. Question: What wire gauge should I limit myself
to when connecting to your 22 AWG
wire?
Answer: Use 22 AWG or heavier.
14. Question: Does it make any difference if I mount
the transducer in a vertical or
horizontal position?
Answer: Yes. Our units will experience a
certain amount of position sensitivity.
You should mount it in a vertical
position throughout the measurement
cycle. If you lay the transducer down,
the user must realize than an offset will
occur.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 32 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
15. Question: What happens when you freeze your
transducer in a column of water?
Answer: We have frozen our transducers in a
container of water in a home freezer,
with no resulting damage. However,
depending on the level range of the
unit, over pressure of the unit is
possible. In harsh environments where
debris is common and ice shifts, you
might expect damage to both the
transducer and cable.
16. Question: Why would I choose a KPSI
Transducer versus a competitor?
Answer: Reliable, long lasting products
Rapid delivery
Lightning protection lifetime warranty
Excellent pre & post sales/application
support
No hassle service
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 33 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Appendix C
Troubleshooting Techniques
Quick Check Procedure
The following is a quick field checkout procedure for KPSI
Level and Pressure Transducers. It will be referred to
throughout the troubleshooting section.
Should a problem be encountered with a transducer or
transmitter, it is sometimes helpful to test the transducer
independently from the rest of the system, thereby
establishing where to concentrate the troubleshooting
effort.
On the next page is a simple hookup diagram for the
most common types of electrical output, a 0-5 VDC
transducer and a 4-20 mA transmitter. In either case, the
"power supply" can be a common 12 volt lantern battery,
or even a 9 volt transistor radio battery, although the
lifetime of a 9 volt battery will be limited. The meter
should be a digital type capable of reading at least 2
digits to the right of the decimal point. Use 22 gage or
heavier hookup wire or clip leads for jumpers. If your unit
has other than a 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output, please call
Applications Support at [phone] for assistance.
Once your transducer is correctly configured per one of
the diagrams below, orient the transducer in a vertical
position with the pressure port down and then read the
zero output on your meter. For a 0-5 VDC output, the
zero should be between 0 and 0.10 volts, and for a 4-20
mA output, between 3.80 and 4.20 mA. For Series 300,
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 34 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I F S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
the values do not change for VDC output but the values
for mA are between 3.80 and 4.20 mA. If the output is
outside of these limits, you may, at your option, choose to
troubleshoot the transducer per the suggested
measurements shown below. Otherwise, contact our
Customer Service Department at [phone] for a
Return Material Authorization number (RMA).
If the zero output is within these limits, the problem will
more than likely be found elsewhere in your system.
0.5 VDC �THFSF,IIIAAPFFS� 4-20 mA
•
I �
•
} I
I +
- + + -
m
0 A
�n n
c
Qy
MM
O
m
3
ink M
9
arr
c-
cK m
✓o
m
_U
vA W
<
;U
K�
m
When an error is observed at a customer's installation, it
is important to determine if the fault lies in the transducer
or the instrument reading the transducer signal, ie. digital
panel meter, programmable logic controller, etc.. To do
this, a second instrument should be used to confirm the
observations. The second instrument may be a handheld
DMM (Digital Multi -Meter) or a dedicated milliammeter
capable of reading 4-20 mA of current to a resolution of
at least 0.1 mA. The diagram above illustrates the
attachment of the meter in series with the black (negative
signal) wire of the transducer using a 9-28 VDC power
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 35 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22nd Edition • i
supply for transducer excitation. Some suggested power
supplies are:
1 - 12 VDC automotive battery.
2 - 6 VDC lantern batteries connected in series (for
a total of 12 VDC).
2 - 9 VDC transistor batteries connected in series
(for a total of 18 VDC).
Batteries are suggested to power the transducer during
testing to eliminate the possibility that line noise is
passing through an improperly filtered, grounded, or
damaged power supply. All measurements should be
recorded and sent to Measurement Specialties along with
the transducer to assist in the evaluation process.
Further Measurements:
0-5 VDC Should read: 4-20 mA Should read:
+Excitation
> 2.5 Mohms
+Excitation (red)
> 2.5 Mohms
(white) to Shield
to Shield (drain)
(drain)
-Excitation
> 2.5 Mohms
-Excitation (black)
> 2.5 Mohms
(black) to Shield
to Shield (drain)
(drain)
+Output (red) to
> 2.5 Mohms
Shield (drain) to
< 2 ohms
Shield (drain)
Housing
Shield (blue) to
< 2 ohms
Housing
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 36 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22 Ind Edition • i
Maximum Cable Lengths and Minimum Supply
Voltage
The maximum length of cable to be used with our
submersible transducers is largely dependent upon the
type of electrical output of the transducer. For a 0-5 VDC
output, a maximum cable length of 100 feet (30 m) is
recommended. A voltage output is more susceptible to
electrical interference than a 4-20 mA signal. A 4-20 mA
signal can be transmitted much longer distances,
depending upon such factors as temperature, wire size,
length of the wire, power supply, and voltage
requirements of any devices to be powered. At 250C the
22 AWG conducting copper wire used in our
polyurethane jacketed cable has a resistance of 16.45
ohms per 1000 feet (304 m).
Using Ohms Law (E=1R) where E=voltage, l=current and
R =resistance, one finds that a 20 mA signal requires
.329 volts to drive it along 1000 feet (304 m) of 22 AWG
copper wire (E=16.45 x .020). This drop is seen on both
the supply and return wire for a total loop voltage drop
of 0.658 volts
To find out how much voltage is required to drive our
Series 700 submersible level transducer's 4-20 mA signal
10,000 feet, just add the minimum power requirement of
the 700 (9 VDC) to the resistance offered by 10,000 feet
(3048 m) of our polyurethane jacketed cable
(10,000-1000 x .658=6.58). The resulting power
requirement is 15.58 VDC (9 + 6.58).
Connect the cable shield (drain wire) to a good earth
ground. This will protect the transducer from relatively
minor transient voltages. The only exception to this rule
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 37 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
is if high rates of electrolytic corrosion have been
previously experienced with grounded submersible
devices. In this case it may be better to leave the shield
disconnected.
Please note: When using products with the lightning
protection option on 4-20 mA products, users should take
into account the additional series resistance of this option
when selecting the loop power supply. This option will
increase total loop resistance by 88 Ohms.
Troubleshooting Techniques
Symptom: Transducer fails to give output of
any kind.
Procedure: Isolate the problem to either the
transducer or the power
supply/readout. See the Quick Check
Procedures (above) for this check. If it
can be determined that the
transducer is no longer operable,
remove it from service for further
analysis. If the transducer output falls
within the limits described above, the
fault lies somewhere else in your
system.
2. Symptom: Transducer has failed and has
been removed for analysis.
Procedure: Inspect the cable for physical
damage. Cuts in the cable jacket can
result in liquid incursion into the
transducer housing, which can cause
permanent damage. If operational,
the cable can be repaired by using a
splice kit (P/N 830) supplied by
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 38 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Measurement Specialties.
Inspect the transducer housing. It
should be intact and free of corrosion.
If the outer surface of the transducer
is pitted, this could be an indication of
galvanic corrosion caused by stray
ground currents. If this is the case,
the transducer will probably require
replacement. If the external case
exhibits none of these characteristics,
carefully unscrew the nosepiece and
look into the pressure sensing end of
the transducer. The concentric rings
of the sensing diaphragm should be
visible. If they are not, it could be that
residue has accumulated on the
diaphragm, preventing it from
responding properly to pressure
changes. The transducer can be
cleaned by gently swishing the
transducer back and forth in a bucket
of warm, soapy water until the residue
softens and washes off. (See
Cleaning Your Transducer, page 8.)
Under no circumstances should
any object or tool be used to
remove residue from the sensing
diaphragm or else permanent
damage will be done. If cleaning the
diaphragm does not solve the
problem, the transducer should be
returned to the factory for repair or
replacement.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 39 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
3. Symptom: Transducer develops a negative
offset and gets worse over time
(actual level exceeds specified
level).
Procedure: This may be a sign that moisture has
entered the reference (vent) tube in
the cable and is inside the transducer
housing. This is usually the result of
not maintaining the desiccant vent
filter or of operating the transducer
without a desiccant filter or aneroid
bellows. If caught early enough, the
transducer can be saved by coiling
the cable and transducer in a pan and
baking it in an oven at 50'C (122'F)
for a minimum of 2 hours. Be careful
that the oven temperature does not
exceed 50°C (122 F) or both the
transducer and the cable can be
damaged. Alternatively, suspend
both the cable and transducer in a
vertical position (with vent tube
down), overnight to allow water to
drain from the transducer and vent
tube.
4. Symptom: Transducer suddenly fails during
or just after a nearby lightning
event.
Procedure: This failure is usually caused by
overvoltage due to ground transients
resulting from a direct or indirect
lightning event. These transients can
travel distances of a mile or more.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 40 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
The transducer may be returned to
the factory for repair and optional
retrofit of our lightning protection
system. This system carries a
lifetime warranty against transducer
damage due to lightning.
5. Symptom: Transducer response to
pressure/level input changes
becomes sluggish.
Procedure: This is usually a sign that the sensing
end of the transducer has become
fouled with residue. The transducer
must be removed from service and
the sensing diaphragm cleaned as
described in Item 2, (warm, soapy
water). If fouling persists, the
transducer may be replaced with a
Series 705 or Series 750 (non -
fouling) transducer, which is
specifically designed for trouble -free
operation in a high residue
environment.
6. Symptom: Output reading is within limits but
"freezes" at one point
Procedure: In certain environments "crust" may
form over the sensing diaphragm,
preventing the sensor from identifying
change in level. Removing the
transducer from service and cleaning
it (as described in Item 2) will
generally solve the problem. To
combat marine growth, you might try
wrapping the transducer with copper
wire similar to that found in wire
scouring pads for cleaning dishes.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 41 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Marine growth occurs on the copper
and eventually erodes the copper and
drops off or the copper is manually
removed during routine maintenance.
Alternatively, there are various
companies that will impregnate/coat
the 316 stainless steel with anti-
fouling chemicals of coatings. Level
transducers temporarily removed
from the well or sump should not be
stored dry, but should be stored in a
bucket of fresh water in order to
prevent "crust" formation.
7. Symptom: Readings increase very slowly
over time.
Procedure: Our cable is shipped coiled and
consequently takes time to straighten
when installed. Attaching a weight to
the transducer (e.g., one of our
sacrificial anodes) will help. To
prevent cable stretch with lengths
greater than 200 feet (60 m), secure
the Kevlar fibers (just under the cable
jacket) to your junction box or other
secure object.
8. Symptom: No electrical output from your
transducer.
Procedure: Check all electrical connections to
ensure they are correct and secure.
Double check your power supply or
use a battery (as described
previously) to ensure the transducer
is getting power. If all checks OK, the
problem could be a circuit board or
the sensor in your transducer. The
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 42 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
unit must be returned to the factory for
evaluation. The most probable cause
of this type of failure is damage
to the submersible cable jacket
allowing water to leak down the cable
and into the transducer housing or
lightning damage.
9. Symptom: Formation of marine growth on a
submersible transducer.
Procedure: Certain transducer construction
materials, for example, 316 stainless
steel, attract marine life (snails) and
algae. Clean the transducer
diaphragm by soaking it in a bucket of
warm water with a non -aggressive
cleaning solution. You can also coat
the transducer with marine grease.
This may be the most effective and
inexpensive way to protect your
transducer.
10. Symptom: Submersible transducer exhibits
corrosion or pitting on body or
diaphragm
Procedure: Dissimilar metals (for example, your
transducer housing and your pump
housing) in an electrolytic
environment (fluid in your well) can
lead to galvanic corrosion of the metal
that is nearer the anodic end of the
galvanic series. Likewise, a voltage
potential between the ground wire of
the transducer and the ground of
other equipment in the well can lead
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 43 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
to galvanic corrosion. Installation of a
P/N 820 or 825 sacrificial anode will
help protect your transducer from
galvanic corrosion. Our sacrificial
anodes are made of a zinc alloy that,
being nearer the anodic end of the
galvanic series than the 316 stainless
steel or titanium housing of the
transducer, will corrode before the
transducer.
11. Symptom: The transducer is buried in dirt or
silt and the readings seem to be
erroneous.
Procedure: Use of a piezometer nosepiece in this
application would help. This
nosepiece can be easily installed in
the field and features a very fine
screen to keep dirt from fouling the
diaphragm, but allows the diaphragm
to sense moisture levels.
12. Symptom: Transducer has an offset error.
Procedure: Our submersible transducers perform
best when the sensing end is pointing
in a downward manner. Keep in mind
that you can experience offset error
due to the position sensitivity or
orientation change of the sensor.
Offset errors are more prominent in
low pressure applications with the
sensing end of the transducer lying
flat or pointing upward.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 44 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S° •
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
13. Symptom: I am testing a Series 700 4-20mA
sensor for use with our data
logger. On page A-2 of the KPSI
Level and Pressure Transducers
User's Manual, I see the standard
4-20mA configuration. Does the
recording channel of my data
logger become the mA meter?
Procedure: Most data loggers cannot measure
current (mA) directly. When this is the
case a load resistor must be used to
convert the current (mA) output into
an appropriate voltage. If the User's
Manual for your particular instrument
does not illustrate a preferred method
for recording current (mA) data then
you should attach your transducer
signal wires to your data logger in the
following manner.
Transducer red wire - Data Logger
Excitation Terminal
(The minimum excitation for a Series
700 Transducer is 9VDC)
Transducer black wire — Data Logger
signal input (+) terminal
Attach a Load resistor between the
Data Logger signal input (+) terminal
and the Data Logger signal input (-)
terminal.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 45 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Attach a separate piece of wire
between the Data Logger signal input
(-) and analog ground.
In this configuration you will turn your
data logger into a milliammeter. The
size of your load resistor can be
calculated in the following manner.
D/0.02=R
W here:
Data logger input range = D
Full scale output of transducer = 0.02
A (20 mA)
Load Resistor Value = R
Pick an appropriate standard value
250 Ohms results in 1 to 5 VDC at 4
and 20 mADC
125 Ohms results in 0.5 to 2.5 VDC
(500 to 2500 mVDC) at 4 and 20
mADC
At this point the discussion needs to
address IR loss (voltage drop) in
series circuits. Note that Series 700
transducers need a minimum of 9
VDC to operate correctly. When the
transducer is operating correctly it will
output a current which, when driven
through a resistor, will generate some
amount of voltage drop. If the resistor
value is 250 Ohms then the voltage
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 46 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
measured across that resistor will be
0.004 A * 250 Ohms = 1.000 VDC
and 0.020 A * 250 Ohms = 5 VDC.
Notice that, if the available voltage
from the data logger is12 VDC then
12 VDC - 5 VDC = 7 VDC which is
less than the voltage required by the
transducer to operate. If this scenario
were to occur the transducer would
actually stop functioning correctly
when its output reached 12 mADC
(50% of transducer full scale range).
In this case the appropriate choice for
a load resistor value is 125 Ohms.
14. Symptom: I have a Series 700 4-20mA
transducer rated for 7.5 PSIG
attached to a pressure source that
is outputting 7.5 PSIG. With
20VDC being supplied I am
getting 19.94 mA. I can't find the
upper range allowance for the
sensor, but this seems low to me.
Does this mA reading fall into the
acceptable range for the
transducer with the settings I've
specified?
Procedure: When evaluating a transducer it is
sometimes convenient to make some
broad generalizations in order to
rapidly determine the condition of the
unit. In general, transducers that
output a 4-20 mADC signal have a 16
mADC span (4 - 20 = 16). If the
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 47 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
transducers accuracy is reported as
being some percentage of its full-
scale range then the following table
could be used in conjunction with the
instructional notations to determine
whether a more detailed analysis of
data quality is required.
Model Accuracy
(Accuracy in mADC)
700 1.00%FS
±0.16 ma
710
0.50%FS
±0.08 ma
720
0.25%FS
±0.05 ma
730
0.10%FS
±0.016 ma
735
0.05%FS
±0.008 ma
In order to approximately determine
how many milliamps a transducer
should output at a given depth:
1. Determine the depth (in feet) at
which the transducer is sited.
2. Divide the depth value (from step
1) by the transducer full-scale range
(in feet). - Record the value.
3. Multiply the value calculated in
step 2 by 16 (the transducer span in
milliamps).
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 48 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S' -
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
4. Add 4 to the product of step 3. This
is the approximate value in milliamps
that should be output by the
transducer at its current depth.
In order to approximately determine
the depth of a transducer (in feet)
using a given value of milliamps:
1. Divide the full-scale range of the
transducer (in feet) by 16. Record
this value.
2. Subtract 4 from the milliamp
output of the transducer. Record this
value
3. Multiply the result of step one by
the result of step 2. This is the
approximate depth at which the
transducer is sited.
If the resulting numbers are
reasonably close to some verified
value for current water depth, then
the unit is functioning. In order to
determine the quality of measure-
ment, additional steps need to be
performed.
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 49 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P L C 1 A L 7 I E S'
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition • i
Appendix D
Calibration Calculations
Measurement Specialties ships a calibration sheet with
every KIPS ITM Transducer. This sheet lists the actual
values that were output by the transducer, when it was
being manufactured, at several different pressures. In
addition, two coefficients are provided that can be used to
calculate the actual depth from any given mA output
value. These coefficients are derived from a Least Squares
Best Fit Straight Line (BFSL) calibration using the data listed
on the datasheet. Our accuracy specification is referenced to
the line described by the BFSL coefficients and so the
transducer may not output exactly 4 mADC at zero pressure
and 20 mADC at full- scale. On the next page is an example
of data for a typical transducer.
In this case, even though the offset or 0 PSIG output was
4.0017 mADC and the full-scale point was 20.0219 mADC
the unit actually performed better than its specified accuracy
of ±0.25% of full-scale range as indicated in the Error % FS
column. The calculation for pressure is illustrated below:
PSIG = (Span*Output (in mA)) + Offset
And, to convert to feet of water
Feet H2O = PSIG * 2.3073
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 50 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

measurement
S P E C 1 A L 1 I F Sn
KPSI Analog Manual 22Ind Edition •`
Calibration Report
Test Date: 08110/2012
Test Tlme 752.10
Mod. No: 73OT14AOA005.000000.00OC10020A
Serial No: 1206916
Pressure Range: 0.00 to 5.00 PSIG Teat Temps: Room = 25.0 DegC
ExGtatbm 9-28 VOC
Output: 4-20 mA PCU Serial No TRF146
BFSL
------ Run #1
------
------ Run #2
_____-
Target
Rm Temp
Rm Temp
Erna
Rm Temp
Error
Test Pressure
Outputs
Outputs
%F30
Outputs
%FSO
0.00
3.98W
a 99C
0 0286
3.9918
0 0149
1.00
7.1913
7. 1888
-0.0155
7.1893
-0.0123
2.00
10.3936
10.3901
-0.0217
10.3914
-0.0138
3.00
13.5951
13.59d2
-0.005s
13.5953
0.0010
4.00
16.7979
16.7991
0.0079
16.7888
0.0057
500
19.9999
20.0010
0.0073
20.0006
0.0049
4.00
16.7977
16.7990
0.0136
16.7995
0.0114
300
13.5961
1359%
-0.01
03
135951
-0 C063
2.00
10.3935
10.392D
-Ooo9G
10.3911
-0.0151
1.00
7.1911
7. 1899
-0.0144
7.1895
-0.0101
0.00
3.9996
a9926
0.0188
3.W7
0.0135
Maximum
Static E-
0.0286 %FSO
Maximum
NoM7epeatadllty:
0.0137 %FSO
Electrical Term lnatlon: RED, -SUPPLY
BLACK: SUPPLY
BLUE: SHIELD
S opal• 03123 PSIGJmA
Zero Offset 1: 0.0000 PSIG
Sbpe2: 3.2023 mA(P810
Zero Offset2 3.9889 mA
Conversbn Factor: 1.0000
Cabulatbns:
Method 1• Calculate pressure In desired unhs, using
sensor's output as I ndependent va rla66.
PSIG = 0.3123 (mA - 3.9889 )+ 0.0000
Method 2 Calculate predbted sensor output In deslred
units us Ing pressu m as the Independent vadahla
rrLA = 3.2023 (PSIG - 0.0000 )+ 3.9889
Measurement Specialties, Inc. 51 1-757-766-1500
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA 1-800-745-8008

i
measurement'O
s
S P E( I A L T I E 5TM �0 i
1000 Lucas Way, Hampton, VA 23666 USA
Phone [phone], Fax [phone]
E-mail [e-mail]
www.meas-spec.com
online orders www.LevelandPressure.com

CE
O
Ir-
N
O
T-
O
d�
O
Nt
O
ti
ifm electronic
Installation Instructions
Electronic pressure sensor
12f -1-2—F-!LID rsao
PA32xx

Contents
1 Safety instructions................................................................................................2
2 Function and features...........................................................................................3
2.1 Applications....................................................................................................3
3 Installation............................................................................................................4
4 Electrical connection.............................................................................................4
5 Scale drawing.......................................................................................................5
6 Technical data.......................................................................................................6
1 Safety instructions
• Please read the product description prior to installing the unit.
• Ensure that the product is suitable for your application without any restrictions.
• If the operating instructions or the technical data are not adhered to, personal
injury and/or damage to property may occur.
• Please check for all applications that the product materials (see Technical data)
are compatible with the media to be measured.
• Use in gases at pressures > 25 bar only after contacting the manufacturer ifm.
For units with cULus approval and the scope of validity cULus:
The device shall be supplied from an isolating transformer having a secondary
Listed fuse rated as noted in the following table.
Overcurrent protection
Control -circuit wire size
Maximum protective device rating
Ampere
AWG
(mm2)
26
(0.13)
1
24
(0.20)
2
22
(0.32)
3
20
(0.52)
5
18
(0.82)
7
16
(1.3)
10
The Sensor shall be connected only by using any R/C (CYJV2) cord, having
suitable ratings.
2

2 Function and features
The pressure sensor detects the system pressure and converts it into an analog
output signal.
• 4... 20mA
2.1 Applications
• Type of pressure: relative pressure
Order no.
Measuring range
Permissible
overload pressure
Bursting
pressure
bar
PSI
bar
PSI
bar
PSI
PA3220
0...400
0...5 800
600
8 700
1 000
14 500
PA3221
0...250
0...3 625
400
5 800
850
12 300
PA3222
0...100
0...1 450
300
4 350
650
9 400
PA3223
0...25
0...363
150
2 175
350
5 075
PA3224
0...10
0...145
75
1087
150
2175
PA3226
0.25
0...36.3
20
290
50
725
PA3227
0...1
0...14.5
10
145
30
450
PA3228
0...0.25
0...3.63
10
145
30
450
MPa = bar _ 10 / kPa = bar x 100
Static and dynamic overpressures exceeding the indicated overload
pressure are to be avoided by taking appropriate measures.
The indicated bursting pressure must not be exceeded. Even if the bur-
sting pressure is exceeded only for a short time, the unit can be destroyed.
NOTE: Risk of injury!
Use in gases at pressures > 25 bar only after contacting the manufacturer ifm.
High-pressure units (400 bar) are supplied with an integrated damping device to
avoid any risk of injury in case of bursting when bursting pressure is exceeded.
When the damping device is removed it can become unusable.
If you have any questions, please contact ifm electronics sales specialists.
IKI

3 Installation
Before mounting and removing the sensor, make sure that no pressure is
applied to the system.
► Insert the unit in a'/4" NPT process connection.
► Tighten firmly.
4 Electrical connection
The unit must only be connected by an electrician.
• The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be observed.
Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.
► Disconnect power.
► Connect the unit as follows:
1 BN
L+
1 2 WH
L-
2 • • 4 > 4 BK
• n.c.
3 3 BU n.c.
Core colours of ifm sockets:
1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black),
n.c. = not connected.
2

5 Scale drawing
PA3221 ... PA3228
PA3220
030
030
I M12x1 I
I M12x1
Op
i L
i LO
ti
ti
ti
,(30 1 "N PT
f%0 I �„
/4 N PT
027 I
0 27
I I
Dimensions are in millimeters

6 Technical data
Operating voltage[V].......................................................................................9,6 ... 32 DC')
Analogueoutput.................................................................................................. 4 ... 20 mA
Load[0]................................................................... max. (UB - 9.6) x 50; 720 at UB = 24 V
Step response time analogue output [ms]...........................................................................3
Characteristics deviation [%]................................................. < ± 0.25 (BFSL) / < ± 0.5 (LS)
Repeatability[%]............................................................................................................< 0.1
Long-term stability [% of value of measuring range / 6 months] ..............................< ± 0.05
Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO) in the compensated temperature range 0 ... 80°C
(in% of the span/10K)2>
PA3220... PA3227
PA3228
greatest TEMPCO of the zero point
0.1
0.2
greatest TEMPCO of the span
0.2
0.3
Housing material ............ stainless steel (316512); FPM (Viton); PA; EPDM/X (Santoprene)
Materials (wetted parts).............................stainless steel (303522); ceramics; FPM (Viton)
Operating temperature [°C]...................................................................................25 ... +80
Medium temperature [°C]....................................................................................25 ... +902
Storage temperature[°C].................................................................................... -40 ... +100
Protection PA3220 ... PA3222
.........................................................................IP 68 / IP 69K
Protection PA3223 ... PA3228
...................................................................................... IP 65
Protection class..................................................................................................................I II
Insulation resistance [M0]......................................................................... > 100 (500 V DC)
Shock resistance [g].............................................................. 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Vibration resistance [g]................................................. 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 10 - 2000 Hz)
EMC
EN 61000-4-2 ESD:................................................................................. 4 kV CD / 8 WAD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: ....................................................................................... 30 V/m
EN61000-4-4 Burst: ...................................................................................................... 2 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: ........................................................................................ 10V
radiation of interference ..... according to the automotive directive 2004/104/EC / CISPR25
noise immunity ............... according to the automotive directive 2004/104/EC / ISO 11452-2
HFradiated..............................................................................................................100 V/m
pulse resistance ....................................................according to ISO7637-2 / severity level 3
1) to EN50178, SELV, PELV
2)-40... 90°C upon request
BFSL = Best Fit Straight Line / LS = Limit Value Setting
More information at www.ifm.com
0

CE
O
O
N
00
O
ti
ifm electronic
Operating instructions
Combined pressure sensor
12f -1-2-F-!LID rsao
PN22xx

Contents
1 Preliminary note...................................................................................................3
1.1 Symbols used................................................................................................3
2 Safety instructions...............................................................................................3
3 Function and features..........................................................................................4
4 Function...............................................................................................................5
4.1 Communication, parameter setting and evaluation.......................................5
4.2 Switching function..........................................................................................6
4.3 Analogue function.........................................................................................6
5 Installation............................................................................................................ 8
6 Electrical connection............................................................................................ 8
7 Operating and display elements..........................................................................9
8 Menu..................................................................................................................10
8.1 Menu structure.............................................................................................10
8.2 Explanation of the menu..............................................................................11
9 Parameter setting..............................................................................................12
9.1 Parameter setting general...........................................................................12
9.2 Setting the output signal..............................................................................14
9.2.1 Setting the output function..................................................................14
9.2.2 Setting the switching limits.................................................................14
9.2.3 Scaling the analogue value................................................................14
9.3 User settings (optional)................................................................................15
9.3.1 Setting the unit of measurement for the system pressure ..................15
9.3.2 Configuring the display.......................................................................15
9.3.3 Zero -point calibration..........................................................................15
9.3.4 Setting the delay time for the switching outputs.................................15
9.3.5 Setting the output polarity...................................................................16
9.3.6 Setting the damping for the switching outputs....................................16
9.3.7 Setting the damping for the analogue output......................................16
9.4 Service functions.........................................................................................16
9.4.1 Reading the min./max. values for the system pressure ......................16
10 Operation.........................................................................................................17
10.1 Read the set parameter values.................................................................17
10.2 Fault indication..........................................................................................17
2

11 Scale drawing..................................................................................................18
12 Technical data..................................................................................................18
12.1 Setting ranges...........................................................................................20
13 Factory setting.................................................................................................22
1 Preliminary note
1.1 Symbols used
► Instruction
> Reaction, result
[...] Designation of buttons, switches or indications
Cross-reference
Important note
• Non-compliance can result in malfunctions or interference.
2 Safety instructions
Read this document before installing the unit. Ensure that the product is suit-
able for your application without any restrictions.
• Non -adherence to the operating instructions or technical data can lead to
personal injury and/or damage to property.
• In all applications check compliance of the product materials (--� chapter 12
Technical data) with the media to be measured.
• Use in gases at pressures > 25 bar only after contacting the manufacturer ifm.
For units with cULus approval and the scope of validity cULus:
The device shall be supplied from an isolating transformer having a secondary
Listed fuse rated as noted in the following table.
Overcurrent protection
Control -circuit
wire size
Maximum protective device rating
Ampere
AWG
mm'
26
0.13
1
24
0.20
2
22
0.32
3
20
0.52
5
18
0.82
7
16
1.3
10
The Sensor shall be connected only by using any R/C (CYJV2) cord, having suitable ratings.
3

3 Function and features
The pressure sensor detects the system pressure of machines and installations.
Applications
Type of pressure: relative pressure
Order no.
Measuring range
Permissible
overload pressure
Bursting pressure
PSI
bar
PSI
bar
PSI
bar
PN2220
0...5 800
0...400
8 700
600
14 500
1 000
PN2221
0...3 630
0...250
5 800
400
12 300
850
PN2222
0...1 450
0...100
4 350
300
9 400
650
PN2223
-14.5... 362.5
-1... 25
1 450
100
5 075
350
PN2224
-14.5... 145
-1... 10
1088
75
2175
150
PN2226
-1.45... 36.25
-0.13... 2.50
290
20
725
50
PSI
mbar
PSI
bar
PSI
bar
PN2209
-14.5... 14.5
-1000... 1000
290
20
725
50
PN2227
-0.74... 14.5
-50... 1000
145
10
450
30
inH2O
mbar
inH2O
bar
inH2O
bar
PN2228
1 -5.0... 100.4
1 -12.5... 250.0
4 000
10
12 000
30
MPa = bar =10 / kPa = bar x 100
Static and dynamic overpressures exceeding the indicated overload pres-
sure are to be avoided by taking appropriate measures.
The indicated bursting pressure must not be exceeded. Even if the burst-
ing pressure is exceeded only for a short time, the unit can be destroyed.
NOTE: Risk of injury!
Use in gases at pressures > 25 bar only after contacting the manufacturer
ifm.
EA

4 Function
4.1 Communication, parameter setting and evaluation
• The unit shows the current system pressure on its display.
• It generates 2 output signals according to the parameter setting.
OUT1
• switching signal for pressure limit values.
OUT2
' switching signal for pressure limit values.
• analogue signal for pressure (4...20 mA or 0...10V).
• It moreover provides the process data via 10-Link.
• The unit is laid out for full bidirectional communication. So, the following op-
tions 9 p
tions are possible:
- Remote display: reading and display of the current system pressure.
- Remote evaluation: transfer of switching signals (only with PP2001).
- Remote parameter setting: reading and changing current parameter settings
with PP2001, FDT service program ifm Container or via 10-Link.
- Using PP2001 and the FDT service program ifm Container, the current pa-
rameter settings can be stored and transferred to other units of the same type.
The program library of the available DTM objects can be found at www.ifm.com
Service --� Download.
Device -specific parameter lists for 10-Link parameter setting are available at:
www.ifm.com --> Select your country --> Data sheet direct:

4.2 Switching function
OUTx changes its switching state if it is above or below the set switching limits
(SPx, rPx). The following switching functions can be selected:
• Hysteresis function / normally open: [OUx] _ [Hno] (---> fig. 1).
• Hysteresis function / normally closed: [OUx] _ [Hnc] (� fig. 1).
First the set point (SPx) is set, then the reset point (rPx) at the requested distance.
• Window function / normally open: [OUx] _ [Fno] (--� fig. 2).
• Window function / normally closed: [OUx] _ [Fnc] (--> fig. 2).
The width of the window can be set by means of the distance between SPx and
rPx. SPx = maximum value, rPx = minimum value.
P = system pressure; HY = hysteresis; FE = window
4.3 Analogue function
• [OU2] defines whether the set measuring range is provided as a 4...20 mA
signal ([OU2] _ [11) or a 0...10 V signal ([OU2] _ [U]).
• The analogue start point [ASP] determines at which measured value the output
signal is 4 mAor 0 V.
• The analogue end point [AEP] determines at which measured value the output
signal is 20 mAor 10 V.
Minimum distance between [ASP] and [AEP] = 25 % of the span.
0

Voltage output 0 ...10 V
Factory setting
Measuring range scaled
U [V]
U [V]
...................................
10
10-
.........................
-1 0
MEW P
-1 0
ASP AEP MEW P
P = system pressure, MEW = final value of the measuring range
In the set measuring range the output signal is between 0 and 10 V.
It is also indicated:
System pressure above the measuring range: output signal > 10 V.
Current output 4 ... 20 mA
Factory setting
Measuring range scaled
I [mA]
I [mA]
20
............................ ---
20
...................
4
4-
1
0 MEW P
-1
0 ASP AEP MEW P
P = system pressure, MEW = final value of the measuring range
In the set measuring range the output signal is between 4 and 20 mA.
Also signalled:
• System pressure above the measuring range: output signal > 20 mA.
• System pressure below the measuring range: output signal 4...3.8 mA.
7

5 Installation
Before mounting and removing the sensor, make sure that no pressure is
applied to the system.
► Insert the unit in a'/4" NPT process connection.
► Tighten firmly.
6 Electrical connection
The unit must be connected by a qualified electrician.
• The national and international regulations for the installation of electrical
equipment must be adhered to.
Voltage supply to EN50178, SELV, PELV.
► Disconnect power.
► Connect the unit as follows:
2 x p-switching
2 x n-switching
1 BN L+
BN L+
2 WH
2 WH
4 BK
4 BK
2:OUT2 3 BU
2:OUT2 3 BU
4: OUT1 L_
4: OUT1 L_
1 x p-switching / 1 x analogue
1 x n-switching / 1 x analogue
� BN
BN
L+
L+
2 WH
2 WH
4 BK
4 BK
2:OUT2 3 BU
2:OUT2 3 BU
4: OUT1 L-
4. OUT1 L—
Pin 4 (OUT1) = Data channel for bidirectional communication. Note: not to be used when
OUT1 = n-switching.
Core colours of ifm sockets:
1 = BN (brown), 2 = WH (white), 3 = BU (blue), 4 = BK (black).
0

7 Operating and display elements
I I 111701
00 00 03 00 J
Mode/Enter Set
1 to 8: Indicator LEDs
- LED 1 to LED 6 = system pressure in unit of measurement as indicated on the label.
- LEDs 4 to 6 not used for units with 3 adjustable units of measurement.
- LEDs 5 and 6 not used for units with 4 adjustable units of measurement.
- LED 7, LED 8 = switching state of the respective output.
9: Alphanumeric display, 4 digits
- Indication of the current system pressure.
- Indication of the parameters and parameter values.
10: Set pushbutton
- Setting of the parameter values (scrolling by holding pressed, incremental by pressing
briefly).
11: Mode/Enter pushbutton
- Selection of the parameters and acknowledgement of the parameter values.

8 Menu
8.1 Menu structure
RUN
SP
S
m /000
tj T
S
m
r-P 1
S
900
L. U
S
U
m
ni I I
UU I
S
Hr-ire
COF
S
00
CUB'
S
lino
CR r-
S
-- -- -- --
..........................................
dsl
S
00
SPC.3
S
BOO
S
PSP U
m
m
$ =
dr-1
00
r- P2
S
-Inrl
100
S
REP NSO
M.,
.........................................
dS2
S
00
E F
S
dr- 2
00
m
P--n
S
Pr-YP
dpp
S,
006
m
dpp
S
00/
m
d, S
S
-3
dL
m
Unt
S>-
PS T
10

8.2 Explanation of the menu
SP1/rP1
Maximum / minimum value for system pressure, at which output 1 changes
its switching status.
SP2/rP2
Maximum / minimum value for system pressure, at which output 2 changes
its switching status.
OU1
Output function for OUT1:
• Switching signal for the limit values: hysteresis function [H ..] or window
function [F ..], normally open [. no] or normally closed [. nc] each.
OU2
Output function for OUT2:
• Switching signal for the limit values: hysteresis function [H ..] or window
function [F ..], normally open [. no] or normally closed [. nc] each.
• Analogue signal for the current system pressure: 4...20 mA [1] or 0...10 V
[U].
ASP
Analogue start point for the system pressure: measured value at which
4 mA / or 0 V are output.
AEP
Analogue end point for the system pressure: measured value at which
20 mA / or 10 V are output.
EF
Extended functions / Opening menu level 2.
HI
Maximum value memory for the system pressure.
LO
Minimum value memory for the system pressure.
COF
Zero point calibration.
CAr
Calibration reset.
dS1/dS2
Switch -on delay for fur OUT1 / OUT2.
drl/dr2
Reset delay fur OUT1 / OUT2.
P-n
Output polarity: pnp / npn
dAP
Damping for the switching outputs
dAA
Damping for the analogue output
diS
Update rate and orientation of the display.
Uni
Standard unit of measurement for the system pressure.

9 Parameter setting
During the parameter setting process the unit remains in the operating mode. It
continues its monitoring function with the existing parameters until parameter set-
ting has been terminated.
9.1 Parameter setting general
Each parameter setting requires 3 steps:
1 Parameter selection
► Press [Mode/Enter] until the An
requested parameter is displayed. Mode/Enter set 0 . II 1
O
2 Setting of the parameter value
► Press [Set] and keep it pressed.
> Current setting value of the param-
eter flashes for 5 s.
> After 5 s: The setting value is
changed: incremental by press-
ing briefly or scrolling by holding
pressed.
A ►-„�
Mode/Enter Set
O
The numerical values are incremented continuously. If the value is to be reduced: Let
the display move to the maximum setting value. Then the cycle starts again at the
minimum setting value.
3 Acknowledgement of the parameter loll
value ._!10Ls.. _ _
Poo -Press [Mode/Enter] briefly. Mode/Enter Set C '1 I
> The parameter is displayed again. O —
The new setting value is stored.
Setting of other parameters:
► Start again with step 1.
Finishing the parameter setting:
► Press [Mode/Enter] several times until the current measured value is displayed or wait
for 15 s.
> The unit returns to the operating mode.
• If [SLoc] is displayed when attempting a modification of a parameter value, the
sensor is locked via software. This locking can only be removed via a param-
eter setting software.
• In case of parameter setting with the user interface of the ifm Container pro-
gram, the values can be directly entered in the specified fields.
12

• For 10-Link parameter setting --> device -specific parameter lists at: www.ifm.
com —> Select your country —> Data sheet direct:
• Changing from menu level 1 to menu level 2:
► Press [Mode/Enter] until [EF] is
displayed.
If the submenu is protected with an ac-
'�"�"�"
cess code, [Coll] flashes in the display.
► Press [Set] and keep it pressed until
Mode/Enter set
the valid code no. is displayed.
O
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
On delivery by ifm electronic: no access
restriction.
► Press [Set] briefly.
> The first parameter of the sub -menu
Mode/Enter Set
;
is displayed (here: [HI]).
With the user interface of the ifm Container program:
► Activate the [EF] button.
If menu level 2 is protected by an access code, the input field for the code no. is
activated.
► Enter valid code no.
• Locking / unlocking
The unit can be locked electronically to prevent unintentional wrong settings.
► Make sure that the unit is in the
normal operating mode.
► Press [Mode/Enter] + [Set] for 10 s
> [Loc] is displayed.
Mode/Enter Set
---- 10s---,
During operation: [Loc] is briefly displayed if you try to change parameter values.
► Press [Mode/Enter] + [Set] for 10 s.
> [uLoc] is displayed.
On delivery: Unlocked.
..........
Mode/Enter Set
---10s—,
1_1 L 1_l l_
13

• Timeout:
If no button is pressed for 15 s while the parameters are being set, the unit returns to
the operating mode with unchanged values.
9.2 Setting the output signal
9.2.1 Setting the output function
► Select [OU1] and set the switching function:
1 I1 1 1
[Hno] = hysteresis function / normally open,
1111 1
[Hnc] = hysteresis function / normally closed,
[Fno] = window function / normally open,
[Fnc] = window function / normally closed.
► Select [OU2] and set the function:
► 1► 1 __�
[Hno] = hysteresis function / normally open,
1 1
[Hnc] = hysteresis function / normally closed,
[Fno] = window function / normally open,
[Fnc] = window function / normally closed,
[1] = current signal proportional to the pressure 4...20 mA,
[U] = voltage signal proportional to the pressure 0...10 V.
9.2.2 Setting the switching limits
► Select [SP1] / [SP2] and set the value at which the output switches.
► =1 �
��
1 =11_=1
'
► Select [rP1] / [rP2] and set the value at which the output switches back.
rPx is always lower than SPx. The unit only accepts values which are lower
than SPx.
1 _I
1 1 1=
9.2.3 Scaling the analogue value
► Select [ASP] and set value at which 4 mA / 0 V are output.
1_=11_= ►__1
1 1 11
► Select [AEP] and set value at which 20 mA / 10 V are output.
1_=11 1-I
Minimum distance between ASP and AEP = 25 % of the span (scaling
1 I1 1
factor 1:4).
14

9.3 User settings (optional)
9.3.1 Setting the unit of measurement for the system pressure
► Select [Uni] and set the unit of measurement: i !t-!1
[bAr], [mbAr]
[MPA], [kPA]
[PSI]
[IH2O] (only PN2209, PN2227, PN2228)
[inHG] (only PN2209)
[mmWS] (only PN2228)
9.3.2 Configuring the display
► Select [diS] and set update rate and orientation of the display: 1=t 1
[dl]: Update of the measured value every 50 ms.
[d2]: Update of the measured value every 200 ms.
[0]: Update of the measured value every 600 ms.
[Ph]: Display of the measured peak value remains for a short time (peak
hold).
[rdl], [rd2], [rd3], [rPh]: Display like dl, d2, d3, Ph; rotated by 180°.
[OFF]: The display is deactivated in the operating mode.
9.3.3 Zero -point calibration
► Select [COF] and set a value between -5 % and 5 % of the final value
1 1-11
of the measuring range (for PN2209 ± 5 % of the span). The internal
1 11
measured value "0" is shifted by this amount.
Resets the calibration set by COF to the value set at the factory.
► 1-7) __
► Press [Mode/Enter] until [CAr] is displayed.
1 11
► Press [Set] and keep it pressed until [----] is displayed.
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
9.3.4 Setting the delay time for the switching outputs
[dS1] / [dS2] = switch -on delay for OUT1 / OUT2.
[drl ] / [dr2] = switch -off delay for OUT1 / OUT2.
► Select [dS1], [dS2], [drl] or [dr2], set value between 0.1 and 50 s (at 0.0 1_j C�1:1
the delay time is not active). dr-1
1-- __1
1=11 1
15

9.3.5 Setting the output polarity
► Select [P-n], set [PnP] or [nPn]. I P -- n
9.3.6 Setting the damping for the switching outputs
► Select [dAP], set value between 0.01 ... 4.00 s; (at 0.00 [dAP] time is 11_=11_=1
not active). 1-11 11
dAP-value = response time between pressure change and change of the
switching status in seconds (s).
Correlation between switching frequency and [dAP]: fmax = 1 _ 2dAP..
9.3.7 Setting the damping for the analogue output
► Select [dAA], set value between 0.01 ... 4.00 s; (at 0.00 [dAA] time is 11_=11_1=1
not active).
1=11 11
dAA-value = response time between pressure change and change of the
switching status in seconds (s).
[dAA] affects the 10-Link process data.
9.4 Service functions
9.4.1 Reading the min./max. values for the system pressure
► Select [HI] or [LO], press [Set] briefly. ►__� T
[HI] = maximum value, [LO] = minimum value. 1 1
Delete memory:
► Select [H I] or [LO].
► Press [Set] until [ ---- ] is displayed.
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly.
16

10 Operation
After power on of the supply voltage the unit is in the Run mode (= normal opera-
tion). It carries out its measurement and evaluation functions and generates output
signals according to the set parameters.
Operating indicators --� chapter 7 Operating and display elements.
10.1 Read the set parameter values
► Press [Mode/Enter] briefly to scroll the parameters.
► Press [Set] briefly to indicate the corresponding parameter value for 15 s. After
another 15 s the unit returns to the Run mode. 3
10.2 Fault indication
[OL]
overload pressure (measuring range exceeded)
[UL]
underpressure range (measuring range below the minimum value)
[SC1 ]
short circuit in OUT1 *
[SC2]
short circuit in OUT2*
[SC]
short circuit in both switching outputs*
*The output concerned is switched off as long as the short circuit exists.
This faults are indicated even if the display is deactivated.
17

11 Scale drawing
0 0
034 / 47
Cri Li Li LTJ Li
®i
i 1.4
x
I � �
I 0')
I
I cY)
I ti
I �
I
II N
qW.-
02
f%0 1/4"N PT
Dimensions are in millimeters
1: display; 2: LED's; 3: programming button
12 Technical data
Operating voltage[V]......................................................................................... 18...32 DC'
Current consumption[mA]............................................................................................. < 35
Currentrating [mA]................................................................................................... 2 x 250
Protection: short circuit, reverse polarity, overload
Voltagedrop [V].............................................................................................................. < 2
Power -on delay [s].......................................................................................................... 0.3
Min. response time switching outputs [ms]..................................................................... 1.5
Switching frequency [Hz]....................................................................................... max. 500
Analogue output................................................................................ 4 ... 20 mA / 0...10 V
Max. load current output [Q].......................................................................... (Ub -10) x 50
Min. load with voltage output[Q].................................................................................. 2000
Min. response time analogue output [ms].......................................................................... 3

Communication interface................................................................................... IO-Link 1.0
Baudrate [kBAUD]........................................................................................................ 38.4
Accuracy / deviations (in % of the span)')
-Accuracy of switch point......................................................................................... < _ 0.4
- Characteristics deviation .................................................... < ± 0.25 (BFSL) / < ± 0.5 (LS)
- Hysteresis................................................................................................................... < 0.1
- Repeatability (with temperature fluctuations < 10K)................................................ < ± 0.1
- Long-time stability (in % of the span per year) ........................................................ < ± 0.1
- Temperature coefficients (TEMPCO) in the compensated
temperature range 0... 80°C (in % of the span per 10 K)
- greatest TEMPCO of the zero point.................................................................... < _ 0.2
- greatest TEMPCO of the span........................................................................... < _ 0.2
Materials (wetted parts) ............................stainless steel (303522); ceramics; FPM (Viton)
Housing material .........stainless steel (304515); stainless steel (316512); PBTP (Pocan);
PEI; FPM (Viton)
in addition PTFE for PN2209, PN2223, PN2224, PN2226, PN2227, PN2228
Protection PN2220, PN2221, PN2222......................................................................... IP 67
Protection PN2209, PN2223, PN2224, PN2226, PN2227, PN2228 ............................ IP 65
Protectionclass................................................................................................................ III
Insulation resistance [MQ]........................................................................ > 100 (500 V DC)
Shock resistance [g].............................................................. 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11 ms)
Vibration resistance [g]............................................... 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 10 - 2000 Hz)
Switching cycles min..........................................................................................100 million
Operating temperature [°C]................................................................................ -25 ... +80
Storage temperature[°C]................................................................................... -40 ... +100
Medium temperature [°C]......................................................................................25 ... +80
EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD:.......................................................................................4 / 8 KV
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated: ............................................................................ 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: ...........................................................................................2 KV
EN 61000-4-5 Surge: .................................................................................. 0.5 / 1 KV
EN 61000-4-6 HF conducted: ............................................................................ 10 V
') to EN50178, SELV, PELV
') all indications are referred to a turn down of 1:1
19

12.1 Setting ranges
SP1 / SP2
rP1 / rP2
ASP
AEP
OP
min
max
min
max
min
max
min
max
PSI
-14.3
14.5
-14.4
14.4
-14.4
7.3
-7.2
14.5
0.1
cn
inH2O
-396
401
-399
398
-400
201
-199
401
1
0
N
inHg
-29.1
129.5
-29.4
29.3
-29.4
14.8
-14.6
29.5
0.1
a
mbar
-988
11000
-996
992
-996
500
-496
1000
4
kPa
-98.8
I 100
-99.6
99.2
-99.6
50.0
-49.6
100
0.4
PSI
I 60
15800
30
5770
0
4350
1450
5800
10
N
N
bar
4
400
2
398
0
300
100
400
a
MPa
0.4
40.0
0.2
39.8
0.0
30.0
10.0
40.0
0.1
PSI
I 30
3625
15
3610
0
2720
905
3625
5
N
N
bar
2.0
250.0
1.0
249.0
0.0
187.5
62.5
250.0
0.5
z
a
MPa
0.20
25.00
0.10
1 24.90
0.00
18.57
6.25
25.00
0.05
CM
PSI
12
1450
6
1444
0
1088
364
1450
2
N
z
bar
I 0.8
1100.0I
0.4
199.6
0.0
75.0
125.0
1100.0
0.2
a
MPa
10.08
110.00
0.04
19.96
0.00
17.50
12.50
110.00
0.02
N
PSI
I -11.5
1362.5
-13.0
361.0
-14.5
272.0
76.0
362.5
0.5
N
barE12
25.00
-0.90
24.90
-1.00
18.75
5.25
25.00
0.05
z
a
MPa2.50
-0.09
2.49
-0.10
1.88
0.53
2.50
0.01
PSI145.0
-13.6
144.2
-14.6
105.2
21.8
145.0
0.2
zbar10.00
-0.94
9.94
-1.00
7.26
1.50
10.00
0.02
MPa
1.000
-0.094
0.994
0.726
0.150
1 1.000
0.002
co
PSI
-1.50
36.25
-1.65
36.10
-1.80
27.20
7.25
36.25
0.05
N
1-0.1001
N
bar
-0.11
1
2.50
-0.12
2.49
-0.13
1.88
0.50
2.50
0.01
z
a
kPa
-10.5
250.0
-11.5
249.0
-12.5
187.5
50.0
250.0
0.5
AP = increments
20

SP1 / SP2
rP1 / rP2
ASP
AEP
OP
min
max
min
max
min
max
min
max
I
I PSI
-0.68
114.50
-0.74
14.44
-0.74
110.88
3.64
114.50
0.02
CM ti
N
inH2O
-18.5
I401.5
-20.0
400.0
-20.0
301.0
100.5I401.5
0.5
ambar
-46
1000
-50
996
-50
750
250
1000
kPa
-4.6
100.0
-5.0
99.6
-5.0
75.0
25.0
100.0
0.2
inH2O
-4.2
100.4
-4.6
100.0
-5.0
75.4
20.2
100.4
0.2
00
N
N
MMwS
-105
1
2550
-115
2540
-125
1910
510
2550
5
N
z
mbar
-10.5
250.0
-11.5
249.0
-12.5
187.5
50.0
250.0
0.5
a
kPa
-1.05
25.00
-1.15
24.90
-1.25
18.75
1 5.00
25.00
0.05
AP = increments
21

13 Factory setting
Factory setting
User setting
SP1
25 %VMR*
rP1
23 % VMR*
OU1
Hno
OU2
I
SP2
75 % VMR*
rP2
73 % VMR*
I
ASP
0
PN2209: -14A PSI
AEP
100 % VMR*
COF
0
dS1
0.0
d r1
0.0
dS2
0.0
dr2
0.0
P-n
PnP
dAP
0.06
dAA
0.10
diS
d2
Uni
PSI / inH2O
* = the indicated percentage of the final value of the measuring range of the correspond-
ing sensor in PSI / inH2O is set (for PN2209 the percentage of the span).
VMR = final value of the measuring range
More information at www.ifm.com
22

'"ff
Hoff MnvF
M 0 WN 0 w
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
Design, Operation and Maintenance Manual for Membrane
Bioreactors applying MaxFlow-module Technology
Abstract of Version 1.12 — September 2012
Translation from the German manual mmf Rev.2.02

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors ��►fr'
with MaxFlow-module technology Al"Al"Aff � � �
Preface
This manual, published by MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH, introduces design
and operational procedures for membrane bioreactors (MBRs) applying MaxFlow-
module technology to its potential clients. Besides detailed safety regulations and
procedures for MaxFlow-Module technology, basic design concepts regarding
membrane bioreactors are described. The details are in general form, there is no
requirement of completeness and could be different from the actual achievement.
Non -observance of the instructions regarding the use, operation and handling of
MaxFlow membrane modules can lead to expiration of warranty.
!!!This manual does not substitute a personal instruction
by specialists and operational staff !!!
In this manual the following security symbol will be used:
0
This symbol highlights that, in case of non -observance of the safety
instructions, risks arise which may severely endanger/injure service staff,
damage or destruct the membrane module or lead to environmental pollution.
If due to operational reasons, the usage of hazardous material is necessary,
please respect the requests of the national / local directives.
Page 2 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors ffff►l
with MaxFlow-module technology AFAFE � � �
In case of questions or problems concerning the technology provided by MaxFlow
Membran Filtration GmbH, please contact:
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
Magdeburger Str. 16a
D-45881 Gelsenkirchen, Germany
Phone: [phone]
Fax: [phone]
Cell phone: [phone]
Your team of MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
Page 3 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors HEN
with MaxFlow-module technology HEN �■ ' =
Table of contents
1 MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH.................................................................. 7
1.1 Company profiles............................................................................................... 7
1.1.1 A3 Water Solutions GmbH...................................................................... 7
1.1.2 MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH....................................................... 7
1.2 Filtration modules of the MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH .......................... 8
1.2.1 MaxFlow-Membrane modules microfiltration.......................................... 8
1.2.2 MaxFlow-Membrane modules ultrafiltration............................................ 9
1.2.3 MaxFlow-Multi modules with high density - Ultrafiltration ..................... 10
1.2.4 MaxFlow-Multi modules microfiltration.................................................. 11
1.2.5 MaxFlow-Multi modules ultrafiltration.................................................... 13
2 Safety instructions............................................................................................ 15
3 Basics of the membrane technology................................................................ 17
3.1 Definitions........................................................................................................ 17
3.2 Membrane filtration.......................................................................................... 20
3.3 Operating parameters of a membrane unit ...................................................... 23
3.4 Formation of a cake layer................................................................................ 24
3.5 Limitation of cake-layer-formation.................................................................... 24
4 Basics of membrane bioreactors..................................................................... 26
4.1 Basics of the biological wastewater treatment — applications and limits ......... 26
4.2 Parameters for characterisation of the wastewater ......................................... 27
4.3 The MBR-technology....................................................................................... 29
4.3.1 Pre-treatment........................................................................................ 32
4.3.1.1 Screen / sieve.................................................................................. 32
4.3.1.2 Grit chamber and grease separator ................................................. 33
4.3.2 Bioreactor..............................................................................................33
Page 4 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors HHAI '
with MaxFlow-module technology AFAFE � � �
4.3.2.1 Excess sludge.................................................................................. 34
5 Design parameters for membranes resp. membrane bioreactors................... 35
5.1 Basics for the design of the activated sludge tank .......................................... 35
5.2 Basics to design the membrane stage............................................................ 36
6 Arrangement and construction of the modules in a filtrationreaktor ................ 37
6.1 Arrangement and construction of the modules ................................................ 37
6.2 Design of a MBR.............................................................................................. 40
6.2.1 Hints for module arrangement.............................................................. 40
6.2.2 Pumping technology of the filtration unit ............................................... 41
6.2.3 Aeration................................................................................................. 41
6.2.4 Process measuring and control technology .......................................... 42
7 Membrane modules......................................................................................... 43
7.1 Installation of the membrane modules............................................................. 43
7.1.1 Installation in an empty tank................................................................. 43
7.1.2 Installation in a filled tank...................................................................... 44
7.2 Commissioning................................................................................................ 46
7.3 Shutdown......................................................................................................... 47
7.3.1 Disassembly of the modules................................................................. 47
7.3.2 Cleaning of the dismounted modules .................................................... 49
7.3.3 Conservation of the modules................................................................ 49
7.4 Transport and storage of the modules............................................................. 50
7.4.1 New modules......................................................................................... 50
7.4.2 Used modules....................................................................................... 50
7.5 The disposal of old modules............................................................................ 51
8 Intended Operation.......................................................................................... 51
8.1 Normal operation............................................................................................. 51
Page 5 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ���
with MaxFlow-module technology " M Mwr U ,-
8.1.1 Tests......................................................................................................52
8.2 Service and cleaning procedures.................................................................... 52
8.2.1 Service.................................................................................................. 52
8.2.1.1 Service notes................................................................................... 53
8.2.1.2 Maintenance-cleaning......................................................................53
8.2.1.3 Recovery -Cleaning / cleaning in place(CIP)................................... 54
8.2.1.4 External cleaning............................................................................. 56
8.2.1.5 Resistance to cleaning chemicals .................................................... 58
8.3 Monitoring........................................................................................................ 59
9 Approved chemicals......................................................................................... 61
9.1 Glycerine.......................................................................................................... 61
9.2 Ultrasil73.........................................................................................................61
9.3 A3 MembranPlus............................................................................................. 62
9.4 A3 Activator A 101........................................................................................... 63
9.5 A3 Activator S 101........................................................................................... 64
10 Manufacturer's declaration.............................................................................. 66
11 Annex............................................................................................................... 67
11.1 List of substances damaging the membrane ................................................... 67
11.2Example of P&ID.............................................................................................. 69
Page 6 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ���
with MaxFlow-module technology " M Mwr U ,-
1 MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
1.1 Company profiles
1.1.1 A3 Water Solutions GmbH
A3 Water Solutions GmbH consults clients in the commercial, industrial, and
municipal sector to find solutions in the field of water and wastewater treatment.
Combining innovative design ideas of state-of-the-art technology with the experience
of an international plant manufacturer, A3 Water Solutions GmbH is presenting
solutions, which are characterised by a high level of innovations and economical
feasibility.
1.1.2 MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH is focused on the production of microfiltration
and ultrafiltration membrane modules in the water and waste water area. The
MaxFlow membrane modules are used as immersed low-pressure filtration modules
in waste water treatment plants of every size as well as for filtration of surface water
in the drinking water production and in the production and process integrated filtration
process for recycling of recyclable material.
Page 7 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors HAWN ��
with MaxFlow-module technology � � ` -
1.2 Filtration modules of the MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
1.2.1 MaxFlow-Membrane modules microfiltration
Module type
M06-001
M20-002
M70-002
M70-003
Channel
---
B20-002
B70-002
---
Operating pressure
[mbar]
20 — 250
Temperature range
['C]
5-50
Operation
continuous / cyclic / pumped & gravity flow
Cleaning chemicals
bases, oxidant , tenside, acid
Module data
Membrane material
PVDF
Membrane surface
[mz]
6.3 21.5 68.0 66.7
Material module
PUR, PVC,
Pore size
[pm]
0.2
Permeability, water
[I/m2*h*bar]
> 1000
Flux rate, activated sludge
[I/m'*h]
15 - 35 15 - 35 15 - 35 15 - 35
Concentration, activated
sludge MLSS
[g/I]
8 - 15
Back wash pressure
[mbar]
< 50
pH, normal operation
5-9
pH, cleaning
2 —11 (max. 30' C)
Demand of cleaning
solution per unit (CIP-
Cleaning)
[I]
28
81
249
245
Design of filter bags
sandwich
Grouting
plastics
Module housing
Protective plates PVC
Dimensions
Width
[mm]
185
385
736
736
Height
[mm]
1090
1058
1070
1070
Height with aeration
channel
[mm]
--
1498
1510
--
Depth
[mm]
316
466
716
716
Depth with filtration pipe
[mm]
395
562
825
825
Weight, dry
[kg]
36
66
140
160
Weight, filled/wet
[kg]
70
170
470
490
# connections
2
2
2
2
Filtration pipe diameter
[DN]
1 16
25
50
50
Design
tube diffuser
# tubes
1 3 1 5 5
Material
PVC, PE, stainless steel
Aeration bubble size
medium-sized bubbles
Air demand per module
[Nm3/h]
4.8 16 48 48
Page 8 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
1.2.2 MaxFlow-Membrane modules ultrafiltration
iii " ■1 m m u l-
Module type
U06-001
U20-002
U70-002
U70-003
Channel
B20-002
B70-002
--
Operating pressure
[mbar]
20 — 250
Temperature range
[°C]
5-50
Operation
continuous / cyclic / pumped & gravity flow
Cleaning chemicals
Module data
Membrane material
bases, oxidant, tenside, acid
Polyethersulfon (PES)
Membrane surface
[m2]
6.3 21.5 68.0 66.7
Material module
PUR, PVC,
Molecular Weight Cut -Off
kDa
150
Permeability, water
[I/m2*h*bar]
> 300
Flux rate, activated sludge
[I/m2*h]
15 - 25 15 - 25 15 - 25 15 - 25
Concentration, activated
sludge MLSS
[g/I]
8 - 15
Back wash pressure
[mbar]
< 50
pH, normal operation
5-9
pH, cleaning
2 —11 (max. 30' C)
Demand of cleaning
solution per unit (CIP-
Cleaning)
[I]
28
81
249
245
Design of filter bags
sandwich
Grouting
plastics
Module housing
Protective plates PVC
Dimensions
Width
[mm]
185
385
736
736
Height
[mm]
1090
1058
1070
1070
Height with aeration
channel
[mm]
--
1498
1510
--
Depth
[mm]
316
466
716
716
Depth with filtration pipe
[mm]
395
562
825
825
Weight, dry
[kg]
36
66
140
160
Weight, filled/wet
[kg]
70
170
470
490
# connections
2
2
2
2
Filtration pipe diameter
[DN]
16
25
50
50
Aeration
Design
tube diffuser
# tubes
1 3 1 5 5
Material
PVC, PE, stainless steel
Aeration bubble size
medium-sized bubbles
Air demand per module
[Nm3/h]
4.8 16 48 48
Page 9 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ���
with MaxFlow-module technology t* M mwr u ,-
1.2.3 MaxFlow-Multi modules with high density - Ultrafiltration
Module type
U20-H-003
U20-HS-004
I U70-H-004
U70-HS-005
Channel
B20-002
B20-002
I B70-002
B70-002
Operating pressure
[mbar]
20 — 250
Temperature range
[°C]
5-50
Operation
continuous / cyclic / pumped & gravity flow
Cleaning chemicals
Module data
Membrane material
bases, oxidant, tenside, acid
Polyethersulfon (PES)
Membrane surface
[m2]
22.9
27.6
74.4
86.0
Membrane plates distance
[mm]
7.0
5.5
7.0
5.5
Material module
PUR, PVC,
Molecular Weight Cut -Off
kDa
150
Permeability, water
[I/m2*h*bar]
> 300
Flux rate, activated sludge
[I/m2*h]
15 - 25 15 - 25 15 - 25 15 - 25
Concentration, activated
sludge MLSS
[9/I]
8 - 15
Back wash pressure
[mbar]
< 50
pH, normal operation
5-9
pH, cleaning
2 —11 (max. 30' C)
Demand of cleaning
solution per unit (CIP-
Cleaning)
[I]
93
85
278
255
Design of filter bags
sandwich
Grouting
plastics
Module housing
Protective plates PVC
Dimensions
Width
[mm]
385
385
736
736
Height
[mm]
1058
1058
1070
1070
Height with aeration
channel
[mm]
1498
1498
1510
1510
Depth
[mm]
466
466
716
716
Depth with filtration pipe
[mm]
562
562
825
825
Weight, dry
[kg]
65
69
170
180
Weight, filled/wet
[kg]
172
185
500
520
# connections
2
2
2
2
Filtration pipe diameter
[DN]
25
25
50
50
Design
tube diffuser
# tubes
3 3 5 5
Material
PVC, PE, stainless steel
Aeration bubble size
medium-sized bubbles
Air demand per module
[Nm'/h]
16 16 48 48
Page 10 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
HAWN M
PI . a,
M06-001
M20-002
M70-002
or
or
7CIPictu
IF
U06-001
U20-002
U70-002
hannel
B20-002
B70-002re
40
1.2.4 MaxFlow-Multi modules microfiltration
Module type
M70-002 double stock
M70-003-MM-3-1-z-001
M70-003-MM-5-2-z
Channel
B70-002
B70-002
B70-002
Operating pressure
[mbar]
20 — 250
Temperature range
[°C]
5 - 50
Operation
continuous / cyclic, pumped & gravity flow
Cleaning chemicals
bases , oxidant , tenside, acid
Module data
Membrane material
PVDF
Membrane surface
(approx. data)
z
[m ]
140
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
210 420 630
Z=1 Z=2
700 1400
Material module
PUR, PVC, PP
Pore size
[um]
0.2
Permeability, water
[I/m2*h*bar]
> 1000
Flux rate, activated sludge
[I/m2*h]
15 - 35
Concentration, activated
sludge MLSS
[g/I]
8 - 15
Back wash pressure
[mbar]
< 50
pH, normal operation
5-9
pH, cleaning
2 — 11 (max. 30' C)
Demand of cleaning solution
per unit (CIP-Cleaning)
[I]
498
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
735 1470 2205
Z=1 Z=2
2450 4900
Page 11 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
HAWN Mrwf
* * a
Module type
M70-002 double stock
M70-003-MM-3-1-z-001
M70-003-MM-5-2-z
Channel
B70-002
B70-002
B70-002
Module data
Design of filter bags
sandwich
Grouting
plastics
Module housing
Protective plates PVC
Dimensions
Width
[mm]
742
2425
3710
Height
[mm]
2140
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
1070 2140 3210
Z=1 Z=2
1070 2140
Height with aeration channel
[mm]
2880
2350 3420 4490
2350 3420
Depth
[mm]
716
716
1432
Depth with filtration pipe
[mm]
825
825
1650
Weight, dry')[kg]
280
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
480 960 1480
Z=1 Z=2
1600 3200
Weight, filled/wet')
[kg]
1000
1500 3000 4500
5000 10000
# connections
4
6 12 18
20 40
Filtration pipe diameter
[DN]
50
50
50
Aeration
Design
tube diffuser
# tubes
5
15
50
Material
PVC, PE, stainless steel
Aeration bubble size
medium-sized bubbles
Air demand per module
[Nm']
48
144
480
Picture
') Weight without aeration unit
Page 12 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
1.2.5 MaxFlow-Multi modules ultrafiltration
HAWN r�r�F
■= _. f:
Module type
U70-002 double stock
U70-003-MM-3-1-z-001
U70-003-MM-5-2-z
Channel
B70-002
B70-002
B70-002
Operating pressure
[mbar]
20 — 250
Temperature range
[°C]
5 - 50
Operation
continuous / cyclic; pumped & gravity flow
Cleaning chemicals
bases, oxidant, tenside, acid
Module data
Membrane material
PES
Membrane surface
(approx. data)
[mz]
140
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
210 420 630
Z=1 Z=2
700 1400
Material module
PUR, PVC, PP
Molecular Weight Cut -Off
kDa
150
Permeability, water
[I/m2*h*bar]
> 300
Flux rate, activated sludge
[I/mz*h]
15 - 35
Concentration, activated
sludge MLSS
[g/I]
8 - 15
Back wash pressure
[mbar]
< 50
pH, normal operation
4-9
pH, cleaning
2 — 11
Demand of cleaning solution
per unit (CIP-Cleaning)
[I]
498
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
735 1470 2205
Z=1 Z=2
2450 4900
Page 13 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
AWAFAF
111 1"7'7
* w W
Module type
U70-002 double stock
U70-003-MM-3-1-z-001
U70-003-MM-5-2-z
Channel
B70-002
B70-002
B70-002
Module data
Design of filter bags
sandwich
Grouting
plastics
Module housing
Protective plates PVC
Dimensions
Width
[mm]
736
2448
3960
Height
[mm]
2140
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
1070 2140 3210
Z=1 Z=2
1070 2140
Height with aeration channel
[mm]
2880
2350 3420 4490
2350 3420
Depth
[mm]
716
716
1432
Depth with filtration pipe
[mm]
825
825
1650
Weight, dry')[kg]
280
Z=1 Z=2 Z=3
480 960 1480
Z=1 Z=2
1600 3200
Weight, filled/wet')
[kg]
1000
1500 3000 4500
5000 10000
# connections
4
6 12 18
20 40
Filtration pipe diameter
[DN]
50
50
50
Aeration
Design
tube diffuser
# tubes
5
15
50
Material
PVC, PE, stainless steel
Aeration bubble size
medium-sized bubbles
Air demand per module
[Nm']
49
144
480
Picture
') Weight without aeration unit
Page 14 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
2 Safety instructions
Please always consider:
Safety first!
iii go w =a W
The security installations, which were installed at the machine by the
manufacturer, are just the base of the industrial safety. The main
responsibility to guarantee an accident -free operation has to be taken on
by the operator and its trained staff.
Only appropriate and intended handling and the compliance with the
requested maintenance procedures can guarantee the functionality and a
long life -cycle of the membrane modules and of all the parts of the
installation. Moreover, appropriate and intended handling will help to
avoid any industrial accident.
Page 15 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * � asp N
The staff performing the operation and the maintenance of the filtration
plant has to have read and understood this manual. All the instructions
mentioned in this manual should be followed in detail. In order to
guarantee a high system security and to avoid any industrial accidents,
only authorized and well trained staff should be instructed in handling the
installation. A technical briefing regarding potential risks which may occur
during the operation of the installation should have been given to the
staff.
The manufacturer will not be liable for personal injuries resp. material
damage caused by improper handling or by non -observance of the
mentioned security advices. This risk will only be covered by the owner
resp. the operator of the installation.
An operation of the membrane modules, varying of the hints
mentioned in this manual, will cause the loss of any warranty right.
Page 16 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * � asp N
3 Basics of the membrane technology
3.1 Definitions
Listed below is a short overview of critical definitions concerning membrane
bioreactors and membrane technology.
Biofouling
Biofouling is a biological contamination of the membrane due to microorganisms
and their excrements. These particles will create a "biofilm", while first "pasting up"
and then, with increasing operation period, growing up at the membrane surface.
CIP treatment
Cleaning procedure where the module is cleaned without being removed. (Clean
in Place)
Concentrate
Portion of the flowrate which will be retained by the membrane (e.g. activated
sludge)
Covering layer
Deposit on the membrane caused by the filtration process comprising retained
organic and inorganic substances.
Cross -flux
The Cross -flux is the flowrate during the filtration process related to the membrane
surface ; unit: L/(m2*h).
Cross -flow
In this process type the feed flow constantly overflows the membranes parallel (the
membrane surface is installed parallel to the main flow direction) and the permeate
flow will be evacuated vertically to the main flow (cross -flow filtration). As this
overflow of the membranes will create shear forces at the membrane surface, a
balance between layer formation and layer removal is achieved. Considering
MBR-technologies with submerged membrane modules the cross -flow effect is
obtained by the aeration system in the bioreactor. In this way it is possible to limit
the layer formation.
Page 17 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology PI0 a
Dead -end -operation
Regarding the Dead -end -operation the membrane will be loaded vertically by the
main flow direction, compare „coffee filter". The removal of detained particles is
achieved by a periodic back -flow of the membranes.
Feed
Flowrate charging the membrane, e.g. activated sludge.
Filtrate
Water separated from the feed by pore filtration (mixture of substances).
Flux
Specific filtrate per square and time ; unit: L/m2*h.
Fouling
Accumulation of particles at the membrane surface, at or in pores of the
membrane structure. Depending on the materials provoking the fouling it is
differentiated between colloidal fouling, inorganic fouling (scaling) and biofouling.
Fouling is provoking a reduction of the filtration capacity and the permeability.
In -place -cleaning
In -place -cleaning is a cleaning procedure adapted to the membrane bioreactor
technology (additional information in chapter 8.2.1.3 — Recovery -Cleaning (CIP)).
Maintenance cleaning
Regular cleaning during normal operation.
--
MBR = membrane bioreactor
Membrane
Barrier, which is provoking the retaining of particles (for further information see
chapter 3.2).
Membrane area
Membrane surface which is available for the filtration process.
Module
Component, which is ready for connection (functional) and which consists of the
membrane or the membrane element, collecting line and fittings.
age 18 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors "A�r ■,�,�
with MaxFlow-module technology AFJF� � � �
Net flux
Performance of the installation in a long term period (considering filtration breaks,
back -flow periods and the volume of filtrate needed for the backflow process).
Operational pressure
The operational pressure is the driving force for the physical separation process
with membranes. This operational pressure is necessary in order to guarantee a
filtration process. The operational pressure is consisting of the transmembrane
pressure and several pressure losses occurring in the connected periphery of the
system.
Performance (filtration performance)
The performance is appointing how much permeate is produced in certain period ;
unit e.g. L/h.
Performance test with drinking water
Performance test of the membrane during a filtration process of drinking water at
20°C.
Permeability
Porosity of a membrane under defined conditions (e.g. temperature).
Permeate
Portion of the flow -rate which is passing the membrane.
Pore size
Average pore size of a porous membrane, relevant for the retaining performance
of a membrane. The pores of a membrane will usually not be homogenous — they
will be characterized by a particle size distribution ; unit: pm.
Porous membrane
In case of porous membranes (MF, UF) the selective separation is obtained by a
screen effect.
Cyclic operation
Standard operation: filtration phase with subsequent back -flow phase resp.
standstill phase.
Page 19 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology � 0
Retentate
Portion of the flow -rate which will be retained by the membrane (e.g. activated
sludge)
Scaling
Accumulation of inorganic ingredients at the membrane surface, if limits of
solubility of dissolved salts will fall below as a result of concentration increase
Solution -diffusion (or "nonporous" or "dense") membrane
In case of solution -diffusion -membranes (NF, RO) the selective separation is
obtained by different solubility and different character of diffusion.
Transmembrane pressure
Pressure difference between the filtrate side and the feed side.
Drinking water
Water, which is suitable for human usage: the pH -value of drinking water is
determined to be between 6.5 and 9.5; the water hardness should be between 0.9
and 4.4 mmol/I.
3.2 Membrane filtration
The membrane filtration is a physical process which can remove, depending on the
membrane type, a wide range of substances (from fine particles up to dissolved
ingredients) out of water or wastewater.
The classification of the membrane processes is depending on the cut-off size. The
transition between the different membrane processes is smooth.
The following processes are existing:
➢ Microfiltration (MF)
➢ Ultrafiltration (UF)
➢ Nanofiltration (NF)
➢ Reverse osmosis (RO)
Page 20 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
Membrane Reverse Osmosis Ultrafiltration
process
Nanofiltration
Size of the 100 200 10.000 20.000 100.000
retaining
substances
0,00 0,01 0,1
I reactive
Examples
dye
salts
I
tenside
sugar
metal
ion
antibiotics
I
enzyme
viruses
I I
fat— and oil -
emulsions
I I
gelatin
colloidal I
silicate
endocrinal effective
substances
iii n�rwF
w W
Microfiltration
1
500.000 molecularweight
[dalton]
1,0 approx. size
I [pm]
pigment dye
bacteria
activated sludge
flocs
yeast
Figure 1: Classification of membrane processes depending of their separating
mechanism [RAUTENBACH, 1997]'
The membranes are fine permeable layers (thickness approx. 0.1 µm — 0.5 µm),
which are superimposed on a support frame for stability reasons.
Concerning the separating mechanism it is differentiated between porous
membranes (MF, UF) and solution -diffusion -membranes (NF, RO).
Regarding the membranes of micro- and ultrafiltration applications the separation
process is based on microporous layers with defined pore sizes. Particles - or also
molecules -, which are bigger than the max. pore size of the membrane are retained
completely. The membranes of the nanofiltration and reverse osmosis applications
' RAUTENBACH (1997): Membranverfahren — Grundlagen der Modul- and Anlagenauslegung.
Springer Verlag, Berlin.
Page 21 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology PI0 a
are nonporous solution -diffusion -membranes. The solvent — usually water — can
diffuse through the membrane.
The driving force of the separating mechanism is a pressure difference
(transmembrane pressure) between the feed side and the permeate side.
The microfiltration (MF), which is prevalent used for the concentration of colloidal
suspensions, is usually operated in a pressure -difference -zone of 0.1 bar up to
0.3 bar.
The ultrafiltration (UF) is characterized by a higher separation capacity compared to
the microfiltration (due to the smaller membrane pore sizes). The ultrafiltration is
used for the concentration of macromolecular and colloidal solutions. Dissolved
matters will pass the membrane. A transmembrane pressure of 0.5 bar up to 10 bar
is usually required.
Nanofiltration membranes (NF) are solution -diffusion -membranes. The cut-off of this
process is characterized by a molecular weight of 200 up to 500 Dalton. As
nanofiltration membranes allow the separation of dissolved organic molecules and
polyvalent inorganic ions, they are predominantly installed for industrial applications.
A nanofiltration membrane is usually operated at transmembrane pressures between
2 bar and 40 bar.
The reverse osmosis (RO) is allowing a concentration of solids of a low molecular
weight. Also dissolved substances - salts and macromolecules — can be isolated out
of a liquid. The fields of application for the reverse osmosis include the desalination
of brack- and salt -water as well as the treatment of landfill leachate.
For the reverse osmosis processes solution -diffusion -membranes are used. Reverse
osmosis membranes will usually be operated at transmembrane pressures of 5 bar
up to 70 bar.
Page 22 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors AWN►W
with MaxFlow-module technology AFAIIAff � � �
3.3 Operating parameters of a membrane unit
Transmembrane pressure
The driving force of the separation process is the pressure difference between
feed- and permeate -side, the transmembrane pressure. In case of the submerged
low -pressure -filtration the transmembrane pressure is created by a vacuum on the
filtrate side.
Specific flux
The flow rate of a membrane is an indicator of the capacity under certain
circumstances. If the flow rate is related to the membrane surface, the result is the
specific flux L/(ml*h) of the membrane. The temporary specific flux during the
operation process is defined as gross flux. The net flux is describing the
performance of a system in a long term period (considering filtration breaks, back-
wash periods and the volume of filtrate needed for the back -wash process); unit:
e.g. m3/d related to the membrane surface.
Permeability
The permeability is describing the permeably character of a membrane. It is
defined as the ratio of specific gross flux and transmembrane pressure, unit:
L/(m2*h*bar).
The permeability is directly depending on the condition of the membrane and the
filtration attributes of the fluid which should be permeated.
Critical flux
According to FIELD et al. (1995)2 there is no decrease of the membrane
performance observed, while operating the membrane below a certain flux
(„subcritical"). However while exceeding this critical flux („overcritical"), there
occurs a reinforced membrane fouling and a performance decrease of the
membrane is noticed.
2 FIELD et al. (1995): Critical flux concept for microfiltration fouling. Journal of Membrane Science.
Page 23 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * � asp N
3.4 Formation of a cake layer
With proceeding period of operation a formation of a cake layer on the membrane
surface is to be observed caused by organic and inorganic solids retained by the
selective separation of the membrane. This layer will provoke a reduced filtrate flux
(at constant pressure) combined with an unwanted reduction of the performance of
the membrane. In order to guarantee the operation security and the cost-
effectiveness of membrane systems, a control -method for this layer -formation has to
be developed. A layer -control -mechanism results from the following constructive and
procedural steps:
➢ pre-treatment of the wastewater,
➢ process configuration
➢ elaboration of a cleaning strategy
These steps should be considered in the design phase.
3.5 Limitation of cake -layer -formation
A pre-treatment stage must eliminate particles and matters that can negatively
influence and/or damage the filtration process, such as abrasive solids, fats, oils and
fibres. Suitable methods have to be chosen according to the specific attributes of the
wastewater, as e.g.
➢ screen unit,
➢ lightweight material separator
➢ precipitation/ flocculation...
Please find a detailed description concerning this subject in chapter 4.3.1.
In order to guarantee the performance of the membranes, methods for removing the
cake layer at the membrane surface must be considered. Two types of substances
are differentiated:
- substances which can be released mechanically
- substances which can just be released by use of chemicals
Page 24 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors "lil' ■,�,�
with MaxFlow-module technology ��� � � �
Easily removable cake layers will usually be eliminated by the aeration device that is
installed below the membrane modules. As a result of the ascending air, a flow
parallel to the membrane surface generating shear forces is established. All deposits,
which cannot resist the shear forces, will be removed from the membrane surface.
Membrane layers, which cannot be removed in this manner, must be dissolved by
cleaning chemicals. A cleaning solution is pumped in the opposite direction to the
usual filtration direction into the membrane. The cleaning solution stays for a defined
time within the membrane while soaking it. The time span depends on chemical
concentration, temperature, type of fouling, etc. Afterwards, the substances „pre -
dissolved" in this way will be removed completely from the membrane either by the
shear forces caused by the ascending air or by a short back -flow of the permeate.
For a detailed description of the methods to maintain the filtration performance,
please refer to chapter 8.2.
Page 25 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * � asp N
4 Basics of membrane bioreactors
4.1 Basics of the biological wastewater treatment — applications and limits
The common attribute of all types of biological wastewater treatments (activated
sludge method, fixed bed reactor,...) is that the elimination of the solids is caused
exclusively by the metabolism activity of the micro-organism. Due to the
concentration of the micro-organisms (e.g. activated sludge) combined with the air -
entry the natural self -cleaning -effect of the water is accelerated — so the water will be
cleaned.
During the biological reduction process the micro-organisms oxidise the solids.
Besides the biomass production (cell growth) by the metabolism of the biomass
gases (e.g. elementary nitrogen) which will exit to the atmosphere will be produced.
The biological wastewater treatment processes were originally developed for the
elimination of carbon. Since the 90s there were appointed limiting values for
discharge of nutrients (nitrogen and phosphorus) in Germany depending on the size
of wastewater treatment plants (compare Abwasserverordnung, AbwV (2004)).
Therefore in wastewater treatment plants there are operated aerated and non -
aerated reactors which will eliminate the nitrogen (nitrification and denitrification) and
carbon. As a biological phosphorus elimination based on the technology of anaerobic
reactors is not a standard solution, more often the chemical phosphorus elimination is
applied. In waste water treatment plants the microorganisms are supplied with
sufficient oxygen so that they remove as much solid matter as possible as quickly as
possible. But when this occurs bacteria increase and new biomass is formed from a
part of the organic substance.
3 AbwV (2004): Verordnung Ober Anforderungen an das Einleiten von Abwasser in Gewasser. BGBI. I
Nr. 28 vom 22.6.2004
Page 26 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
4.2 Parameters for characterisation of the wastewater
►►►I
►►► r�rwF
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
The biochemical oxygen demand is a sum parameter for determining the organic
pollution rate of the wastewater. The necessary oxygen demand for bio-chemical
metabolism processes of easily degradable solids is appointed on standardized
basic conditions. E.g. the BOD5 is determining the volume of the oxygen
necessary for the biological degradation of the solids comprised in the wastewater
at a temperature of 20°C during 5 days. The higher the BOD-value, the higher is
the biodegradable portion of the raw water.
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
The chemical oxygen demand test is commonly used to indirectly measure the
amount of organic compounds in water. Contrary to the BOD-parameter the COD
is detecting the biotic degradable as well as the non -biotic degradable substances.
Volatile compounds which easily evaporate can not be registered.
The higher the COD -value, the higher is the portion of the organic and the
inorganic compounds in the raw water.
Total Organic Carbon (TOC)
The TOC is the amount of total carbon bound in an organic compound. The
dissolved organic and the individual organic bound carbon are registered.
Compared to the COD -parameter the bond rate, the oxidation rate and the
physical condition are not considered. The procedure of the TOC-determination is
a burning process in which all the carbon compound, part of the assay, will be
oxidized to CO2.
pH -value
The pH -value is considering the concentration of hydrogen -ions and is so an
indicator of acidity in aqueous solution. The pH -value is the negative common
logarithm of the hydrogen -ion -concentration which is calculated as mol H+/L. The
smaller the pH -value, the higher is the acidity of the solution. The pH -value of the
activated -sludge -water -mix has to be between 6.5 and 8.5, otherwise the
metabolisms of the biomass will be interrupted.
Page 27 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology " W =wr ,� ,-
For a detailed analysis of the available acid-/ base volume in addition the acid
capacity resp. the base capacity has to be determined.
Acid capacity / base capacity
The result of the acid capacity is an indicator for the buffer capacity of the water
compared to acid and is so guaranteeing the pH -value -stability. The acid capacity
of the water indicates the volume of acid — in practice 0.1 mol/L hydrochloric acid -
which is dissipated until achieving a pH value of 4.3. Caustic soda is used for the
base capacity in order to reach a pH value of 8.2 for a defined amount of water.
Temperature
While operating of a biological wastewater treatment installation it has to be paid
attention to the temperature as it strongly affects the metabolism of the micro-
organisms. Extreme (too low or too high) temperatures may negatively harm the
biological degradation process and may even destroy the biomass in the reactor.
The optimized temperature for a biological wastewater treatment is set between
10°C and 30°C.
Conductivity
In wastewater is the conductivity a sum parameter for the concentration of ions
and the salt compounds. The results are stated based on a reference temperature
(usually 25°C); 0.1 mS/m at 250C corresponds to 0.425 mg/L salt content (mg/L
TDS = total dissolved solids). The higher the electrical conductivity, the higher is
the rate of the dissolved salts. The measurement of the conductivity serves
amongst others for monitoring the salt -concentration of the influent. The
conductivity is measured in S/cm.
Nutrient rate
In order to guarantee a successful biological degradation the rate of BSB5 to
nitrogen to phosphorus should be approx. 100:5:1 (DWA, 19974). A lack of one of
these nutrients may harm the biological degradation process.
4 DWA (1997): Biologische and weitergehende Abwasserreinigung. Ernst & Sohn Verlag, 4. Auflage
Page 28 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors AWS►I
with MaxFlow-module technology Al"Al"Aff � � �
4.3 The MBR-technology
The membrane bioreactor (MBR) is a combination of the activated sludge process
and the membrane technology.
After the biological cleaning process the biomass (activated sludge) is not isolated by
the conventional sedimentation process in the clarifier, but by the membrane (micro -
or ultrafiltration). Due to the small pore size, the membrane is not only a barrier for
the activated sludge, but also for suspended substances, bacteria and viruses. The
high quality of the effluent, allows the use of the permeate as service water.
Optionally a subsequent membrane level may be considered, like nanofiltration or
reverse osmosis.
Regarding the MBR-technology 2 types of system arrangement (MUNLV, 2006)5 are
to be differentiated: wet installation and dry installation.
The "wet installation" is based on membranes which are directly submerged in the
activated sludge tank. Concerning the "dry installation" the membranes are installed
outside the aeration tank. The transport process will be provided by a pump, creating
the transmembrane pressure and the minimum flow -velocity. Apart from the
additional energy costs with this method of operation the mud flakes are under a
great deal of mechanical stress so that modules set up dry are not used in municipal
waste water treatment plants.
Regarding submerged modules the aeration device guaranteeing the necessary air
supply for the biomass degradation are installed under the membrane modules and
in the aeration tank. This upstream air flow will permanently pass the membrane
module and will relieve the cake layer from the membrane surface.
5 MUNLV (2006): Membrantechnik fur die Abwasserreinigung. Ministerium fur Umwelt, Naturschutz,
Landwirtschaft and Verbraucherschutz des Landes Nordrhein Westfalen, FIW-Verlag.
Page 29 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
Raw wastewater
Aeratic
Figure 2: Arrangement of membrane bioreactor
iii n�rwF
" w W
The MBR-technology provides the following main advantages compared to
conventional activated sludge systems:
➢ Clarifier can be economised, as the membrane stage retains the solids totally
(cp. phosphate reduction by adsorption)
➢ By installing further membrane modules, easy capacity upgrade of the MBR
installation possible
➢ Smaller bioreactor volume due to higher TS compounds at constant sludge
loading
➢ Obtaining a complete sludge generation interval of the biomass, due to a
higher sludge age
➢ Flexible installation place due to low weight and small dimensions
➢ Possible to influence the rate of the excess sludge by changing the sludge
loading
➢ Flexible and modular construction possible, as no additional external piping
necessary and as all existing installation components can easily be used.
➢ An automatic operation process is guaranteed by an independent control
system and a easy procedural principle
➢ The installation can easily monitored by checking the transmembrane
pressure development
Page 30 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * � asp N
➢ Good acceptance in high populated areas due to smaller property and easy
enclosure
➢ Reduction of residual organic contamination as well as hygienisation of the
plant's outlet to the greatest possible extent whereby measures for
hygienisation or more extensive secondary treatment can be omitted.
➢ A MBR-installation is less sensitive regarding the biological balance by
impulsive influent -charges, e.g. during heavy rain events
➢ Even in case of floating sludge a solid -free outlet quality can be guaranteed
➢ Safe separation process of all the particular solids even on mobile equipment
(e.g. on ships)
inlet
screen
inlet
activated sludge tank clarification grit filter
rrQ�
W0illwii.T.
GG
screen membrane bioreactor
outlet
outlet
Figure 3 Schematic of a conventional WWTP (above) and of a membrane
bioreactor
Systems with membrane technology are considered to be in the industrial wastewater
treatment and in the landfill leachate treatment as state-of-the-art technologies. In the
last years by developing the low -pressure -membrane system (submerged
membranes) a cost-effective application field was established in the sector of
domestic wastewater treatment. The combination of the activated sludge method and
the membrane technology is guaranteeing the elimination of carbon, phosphorus and
Page 31 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology " W =wr ,� ,-
nitrogen, but is also effecting persistent, toxic (carcinogenic, mutagenous and
hormonal active) and bio-accumulative micro -contaminants.
Furthermore the system will comply with the hygienic quality standards requested
e.g. in the „European council directive concerning the quality of bathing water"
(limiting value for faecal and total coliform-bacteria germs).
As membrane bioreactors can be operated with higher biomass concentration, the
activated sludge tank size can be reduced keeping the sludge loading constant —
cost-effectiveness.
Pollutants, which can not be eliminated by a membrane bioreactor, can be retained
by a direct after -treatment, as a nanofiltration or a reverse osmosis. The total solid
retention of the selective separation of a membrane bioreactor is increasing the
performance and the economic efficiency of optionally downstream treatment stages
(compared to after -treatments of conventional WWTP).
4.3.1 Pre-treatment
When pre -treating untreated water, all particles and waste water components that
may damage the membrane, modules or other parts of the plant must be removed
from the untreated water. Especially hairs, fibre tissues and fats in high
concentrations will provoke clogging on the membranes. Other materials may
damage the membrane by high mechanical stress or by sharp angles.
Compared with the plate modules used here, the risk of clogging is considerably
higher when hollow fibre modules are used. Nevertheless, good pre -cleaning should
be carried out in order to ensure fault -free operation. It must particularly be ensured
that the pre -cleaning process cannot be bypassed in the case of an error in the
sieving procedure and that thus no sewage, which has not undergone pre -cleaning,
can enter the membrane tank.
4.3.1.1 Screen / sieve
For eliminating bigger and fibered pollutants out of the inlet -flow, the installation of
screens or sieves is urgently requested.
A classification of screens or sieves according to their mesh size is listed in Table 1.
Page 32 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
Table 1: Classification of screens or sieves
HAWN MrwF
P1 . a
Type of screen
Mesh size
coarse rack
> 50 mm
strainer rack
10 mm — 20 mm
sieve
< 10mm — 1 mm
fine sieve
< 1 mm
4.3.1.2 Grit chamber and grease separator
In the grit chamber (and/or the grease separator) the flow -velocity of the wastewater
will be reduced in order to allow the sedimentation of mineral solids. A roll -flow is
obtained by aerating the grit chamber/ grease separator. A scum baffle is installed in
the tank in order to accumulate the grease components of the wastewater in a flow -
depressed area of the tank. The installation of a grit chamber/ grease separator is
necessary in order to protect the membranes and pumps as the cleaning effect of grit
chambers and grease separators is reducing the wearing of membrane and pumps.
4.3.2 Bioreactor
The elimination of the solids in the bioreactor is achieved by the concentrated micro-
organisms. Due to the selective separation of the membranes, standard average
TSS-concentrations in the activated sludge tank of MBRs are between 8 g/L and
15 g/L. which is significantly higher compared to conventional WWTPs (factor 3 - 5).
The type and the arrangement of the aeration system (intermittent aeration, upstream
den itrification) is chosen depending on the necessary elimination processes
(nitrification, denitrification, carbon elimination).
The necessary volume of the activated sludge tank is mainly influenced by the sludge
loading and sludge age. Most of the municipal membrane bioreactors are operated
with a sludge age of 25 days, so they are called installations with aerobic sludge
stabilisation (DWA, 1997)6. Basically it can be assumed that the biological processes
of MBRs do not vary from those of conventional activated sludge systems.
6 DWA (1997): Biologische and weitergehende Abwasserreinigung. Ernst & Sohn Verlag, 4. Auflage
Page 33 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology PI0
Usually the sludge of MBR-systems possesses a smaller floc size. Although this is
combined to a bigger specific floc surfaces, the capability of drainage of the sludge is
usually not negatively effected.
By adding A3 MembranPlus the quality of the activated sludge is improved so that
the flakes are denser and more compact and the sludge can be filtered better.
4.3.2.1 Excess sludge
As the growth of the micro-organisms is concentrating the activated sludge, this
additional sludge (excess sludge) has to be removed out of the system in order to
operate the system on a constant sludge loading.
The guideline A 131 of the German association for water, wastewater and waste
(DWA, 2000) is providing hints for estimating the volume of the excess sludge
production.
The treatment of the excess sludge is mainly achieved by the sludge dewatering (e.g.
centrifugal or chamber filter press) and/or by the sludge decomposition.
DWA (2000): Arbeitsblatt ATV-DVWK-A 131 — Bemessung von einstufigen Belebungsanlagen.
Gesellschaft zur Forderung der Abwassertechnik e.V., Hennef.
'age 34 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ���
with MaxFlow-module technology " M M>,r U ,-
5 Design parameters for membranes resp. membrane
bioreactors
5.1 Basics for the design of the activated sludge tank
The design procedure for membrane bioreactors is based in Germany on guidelines
for designing conventional WWTP with the activated sludge process. Beside the
guideline ATV-DVWK-A 131 of the DWA (2000)8 it is possible to design systems
based on the "Hochschulgruppenansatzes (HSG-Ansatz)", (BOHNKE et al. (1989)9,
DOHMANN et al. (1991)10), an approach established by a network of different
German universities. Moreover the Ministry of the Environment and Conservation,
Agriculture and Consumer Protection of the German State of North Rhine-Westphalia
(MUNLV) published a manual including notes and hints for the design of a membrane
bioreactor (MUNLV, 2006)11. This manual combines the characteristics of a MBR
with the design -guidelines which are based on the know-how of conventional
WWTPs.
Important parameters influencing the activated -sludge -tank -volume are: the inlet
concentrations, the design temperature, the relevant MLSS-concentration, the sludge
age resp. sludge loading and the requested monitoring parameters.
8 DWA (2000): Arbeitsblatt ATV-DVWK-A 131 — Bemessung von einstufigen Belebungsanlagen.
Gesellschaft zur Forderung der Abwassertechnik e.V., Hennef.
9 BOHNKE et al. (1989): Bemessung der Stickstoffel i m i nation in der Abwasserreinigung — Ergebnisse
eines Erfahrungsaustausches der Hochschulen. Korrespondenz Abwasser, Nr. 9, Jg. 36.
10 Dohmann et al. (1991): Bemessung der Belebungsbecken nach dem Ansatz der Hochschulgruppe
(HSG-Ansatz). Korrespondenz Abwasser, Nr. 8, Jg. 38.
11 MUNLV (2006): Membrantechnik fur die Abwasserreinigung. Ministerium fur Umwelt, Naturschutz,
Landwirtschaft and Verbraucherschutz des Landes Nordrhein Westfalen, FIW-Verlag.
Page 35 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors HAWAV
with MaxFlow-module technology � 0
5.2 Basics to design the membrane stage
The necessary membrane surface is achieved by the ratio of the maximum inlet flow
to the max. permeate flow.
Amembrane = Qinlet / Fu
Amembrane = Membrane area
Qinlet = maximum inlet flow
Fu = Flux
Using MaxFlow-modules in a MBR with municipal wastewater a continuous flux of
10...25 L/(M2*h) and a maximum flux of 40 — 50 L/(m2*h) for a period of max. 2 hours
is often assumed. In average, the permeate flux is equal to the inlet flow (considering
the cyclic operation). As a result of the pulse/pause operation, during the pause less
waste water is filtered than flows in and during the filtration operation the filtration
volume stream exceeds the influent flow. Overall the mean value of the filtrate
volume stream is the same as that of the inflow volume stream.
Considering the water volume displaced by the membranes and the necessary
nitrification -volume, it should be controlled if the nitrification volume for the installation
of the membranes is sufficient or if additional volume has to be provided.
Moreover for the calculation of the minimum height of the tank, the minimum charging
level and a safety factor for intense rain events (resp. mixing pond and equalizing
reservoir) has to be considered.
Page 36 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors AWSAW
with MaxFlow-module technology Al"Al"Aff Mill
6 Arrangement and construction of the modules in a
filtrationreaktor
6.1 Arrangement and construction of the modules
The MaxFlow-membrane modules (Figure 4) of the MaxFlow Membran Filtration
GmbH are plate modules, which are constructed by many parallel -arranged filter
bags with defined distances between these bags. The bags are fixed by collateral
grouting elements, in which the filtrate of the individual bags is collected and
discharged.
membrane module connection ofthe
collector line
n pipe
ball valve
Figure 4: MaxFlow-membrane module
The individual bags are hollow inside and covered with a membrane on both sides.
The module is totally submerged in the liquid which has to be filtrated. All substances
smaller than the stated cut-off, will pass the membrane and will be extracted by the
filtration pipe.
Basically filtration modules will be arranged in MBR installations as follows (Figure 5):
The aeration unit is placed under the filtration module and will be fixed with retaining
plates on the filtration module. Above the filtration module the connection for the
lifting modules is screwed on. For flexibility reasons the collector line should be a
tube line.
A filtration unit may be a one -storied membrane construction or a multi -storied
membrane construction, in which 2 or 3 modules are installed on top of each other.
'age 37 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
buoyancy sec
guide 1
lifting module
filtration module
brackets
aeration un
iii M
W W OW N F
permeate outlet
air inlet
Figure 5: Construction of a membrane module incl. aeration unit, filtration module and
lifting module — one -storied module (left) and 2-storied module (right)
Another possible arrangement is the multi -module (Figure 6): the aeration unit is
integrated in the module frame where max. 9 membrane modules can be installed in
total. As all the membrane modules can be dismounted completely, the installation/
disassembly effort is minimized. The main advantage of this arrangement is based on
the compact construction, minimized space requirements and the centralized air
supply.
The membrane modules will be installed in guide tubes. This must be done in such a
way as to prevent a lateral movement (slip) of the membrane modules (e.g. because
the tank or the water moves). Furthermore, the guide tubes must have lateral
reinforcements in order to prevent bulging of the module wall when back flushing the
module (counter bearings). The distance to the basement has to sufficient in order to
allow the formation of a roll -flow. To do this there must also be an open space next to
the module that is just as big as the area of the module (double area). The guide rod
ensures that the modules stay fixed in their place.
Page 38 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
HAWN ■ W - W ,
Figure 6: Design of a Multi -module -system with three modules arranged next to one another
and three modules arranged one above the other.
Furthermore, a buoyancy security fixes the module unit in the tank and prevents that
the modules float. In order to remove the modules out of the tank, this buoyancy
security has to be arranged above the water surface.
The placement resp. disassembly of the modules has to be completed by a crane, as
the modules will be inserted from above in the activated sludge tank.
Different module fixings, distances from the floor or the walls and
aeration equipment must be cleared with
• MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH.
Page 39 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
6.2 Design of a MBR
6.2.1 Hints for module arrangement
►►►'r'
►►► r�rwF
• It is required that the modules are totally submerged in the
1 activated sludge liquid guaranteeing always a minimum sludge -
coverage of the modules.
• In order to allow the formation of the necessary aeration roll -flow,
the footprint of the membrane tank should be double the size of
the assembly -area of the membrane modules (see below).
Furthermore the aeration modules need to keep a minimum
distance of 30 cm to the basin floor and the module footprint of the
side -by -side arranged modules must be equal to the face between
tank floor and aeration unit.
• The frames guide the modules sufficiently and sufficiently support
the side walls against bulging during back flushing.
Examples of membrane arrangements:
• Arrangement of the membrane bags parallel to the horizontal roll -flow direction
• Arrangement of maximum 2 module series parallel to the horizontal roll -flow
direction
Page 40 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
HAWN M
P1 . a,
1 Varying module arrangements have to be confirmed by
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH!
6.2.2 Pumping technology of the filtration unit
For filtrate -pumps usually rotary piston pumps, eccentric screw pumps or self -priming
centrifugal pumps are used as these pumps are easily adjustable and operate at
constant flow -rates and varying operational pressures. Also, positive displacement
pumps are used as they are self -priming and allow pumping an air -liquid -mixture.
Positive displacement pumps are bi-directional and can minimize equipment
installation for small and average sized systems (e.g.: no pump exchange necessary
during CIP cleaning of the membranes).
The resistance of the selected pumps to the chosen cleaning chemicals must be
confirmed.
6.2.3 Aeration
For the aeration of the MaxFlow-membrane modules a suitable aeration -aggregate is
offered by A3 Water Solutions GmbH. Self -designed aeration systems have to be
approved beforehand by MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH, in order to guarantee
the functional efficiency of the modules.
The necessary aeration rate for each type of MaxFlow-membrane module is noted in
the specifications in chapter 1.2.1. The aeration rate is related to footprint of the
module, viz. if 2 or 3 modules are installed on top of each other, the aeration rate will
remain constant as the footprint is constant too.
To ensure proper aeration, the aerator cartridges in the aerator module must be
checked regularly for proper functioning (homogeneous distribution of bubbles over
the whole length of the cartridge). The lifetimes of the aerator cartridges can be very
different depending on the waste water.
They should be replaced regularly:
➢ Communal sewage water: every 4-5 years (depending on the condition)
➢ Industrial waste water: every 2-3 years (depending on the condition)
Page 41 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors ffff►l
with MaxFlow-module technology Al"Al"Aff � � �
The aeration units is installed below the membrane modules by retaining plates and
they are serving for the air supply of the nitrification process as well as for the control
of the cake layer thickness — formation of the flow parallel to the membrane surface
(compare chapter 3.5).
1 Different module assembly or self -developed aeration equipment must
■ be cleared with MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH.
6.2.4 Process measuring and control technology
The process measuring and control technology are important equipments while
operating and controlling a MBR. For a higher operational safety the following
parameters should be measured online:
➢ Transmembrane pressure
➢ Permeate rate
➢ MLSS-concentration of the sludge (recommended)
➢ Dissolved oxygen in the activated sludge tank (recommended)
➢ air flow rate for the aeration of the membrane
Page 42 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
7 Membrane modules
7.1 Installation of the membrane modules
membrane module (1)
Figure 7: MaxFlow-Membrane module
iii
W w =a W
connection to
collector line (3)
7
1
e (4)
The membranes must be installed in frost -free conditions! Moreover the modules
should be protected against intensive solar irradiation, dust and temperatures
> 50°C!
Prior to commissioning, remove any impurities caused by the installation process,
substances used during treatment and contaminants from pipes and tanks.
7.1.1 Installation in an empty tank
1. Above the membrane module (1) a lifting module is installed and fixed. The
module can be lifted by a crane.
2. In case of a multi -storied arrangement the membrane modules will be installed
on top of each other and will be screwed on by retaining plates. The filtration
pipes will be interconnected by hose adapters and hose clamps.
3. The membrane module or the multi -storied modules will be installed on the
aeration unit and will be fixed by 2 retaining plates.
4. The lifting device is equipped with the buoyancy security.
Page 43 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors "lil' ■,�,�
with MaxFlow-module technology HAVE � � �
5. The tube adapter will be connected at the top of the filtration pipe (2) of the
module. The other end of the tube adapter is remaining unbolted in order to
make it possible that the air can escape from the module when the module is
emerged. Otherwise the module can be damaged! The ball valve must be
closed and the screwed connection must be tightened.
6. The aeration unit is connected with the compressor by a tube line (pay
attention to the temperature and sewage resistance of the tube).
7. The interconnected modules will be SMOOTHLY inserted, lifted by the
buoyancy security, along the guide tubes in the tank.
8. The buoyancy security will be fixed at the tank edge in order to avoid a buoying
upwards -effect of the modules in operation.
9. Checking/ controlling the connected tubes and the circumference.
10. The filtration pipe has to be unbolted to the atmospheric pressure in order to
allow air exhausting the module.
11. Control the tidiness of the tank. All impurities caused by the installation
process have to be cleaned.
12. Steady filling of the tank (directly after the installation of the modules), in order
to allowed trapped air to exhaust out of the membrane. The minimum distance
between the top of the module and the water surface must not be less than
30 cm after the filling process.
13. Close the filtration pipe.
7.1.2 Installation in a filled tank
1. Above the membrane module (1) a lifting module is installed and fixed. The
module can be lifted by a crane.
2. In case of a multi -storied arrangement the membrane modules will be installed
on top of each other and will be screwed on by retaining plates. The filtration
pipes will be interconnected by hose adapters and hose clamps.
3. The membrane module or the multi -storied modules will be installed on the
aeration unit and will be fixed by 2 retaining plates.
Page 44 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ���
with MaxFlow-module technology " M Mwr U ,-
4. The lifting device is equipped with the buoyancy security.
5. The tube adapter will be connected at the top of the filtration pipe (2) of the
module. The other end of the tube adapter is remaining in order to make it
possible that the air can escape from the module when the module is emerged.
Otherwise the module can be damaged! The ball valve (4) must be closed and
the screwed connection must be tightened.
6. The aeration unit is connected with the compressor via hose (pay attention to
the temperature and sewage resistance of the tube).
7. The interconnected modules will be SMOOTHLY inserted, lifted at the
buoyancy security, along the guide rails in the tank. The filtration pipe has to
be unbolted to the atmospheric pressure in order to allow air exhausting the
module.
8. The buoyancy security will be fixed at the tank edge in order to avoid a buoying
upwards -effect of the modules in operation.
➢ The activated sludge tank should contain NO contaminants or
sharp -edged items, like cable slips, swarf or wires.
➢ Move the module only by using the lifting module. NEVER use
the filtration pipe as a carrying handle!
➢ The module must not be installed by use of force! Avoid any kind
of blows impacting the module, e.g. hammer blows!
➢ The module must be protected against unintended fall during the
installation process! Multimodules must be protected against
toppling.
➢ When moving a multimodule, a cross beam is to be used. The
fastening using chains and belts is expressly prohibited!
➢ The dipping and immersion of the modules must be carried out
with open collector line with direct connection to the atmospheric
pressure in order to guarantee the captured air to be exhausted!
➢ The modules must be fixed in the tank against buoyancy!
Page 45 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
iii r�rr�F
■ 0 OW * WO
➢ The minimum distance between the top of the module and the
water surface must not be less than 0.3 m after the filling
process!
7.2 Commissioning
The procedure of the commissioning is as follows:
1. Module installation according to chapter 7.1.
2. Switching -on of the aeration unit. Never operate the modules with out aeration!
3. Closing the filtration pipe against the atmosphere
4. Starting the installation according to the manual of the operator
➢ The minimum distance between the top of the module and the
water surface must not be less than 30 cm after the filling
process!
➢ A fall -dry of the modules has to be avoided!
➢ Filtration must never be carried out without sufficient scavenging
air (according to the module's data sheet) being introduced below
the modules.
➢ The following parameters have to be considered for modules with
microfiltration membrane:
start-up period:48 - hours
Filtration capacity: <_ 15 1/(m2h)
Transmembrane pressure: <_ 40 mbar
Pulse/ Pause: 6 - 12 minutes filtration, 2 - 4 minutes pause
Page 46 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
i►► rrn�F
■r E n M
➢ Modules with ultrafiltration membranes should be retracted
slowly. To do this the filtration output of 101/(mlh) will be
increased to the output of the operating flow within a week.
Should two membrane pouches stick to each other on delivery
they must under no circumstances be pulled apart as this would
lead to the membrane separating in its dry state. Adhesions
loosen in water on their own and without consequential damage.
➢ The following parameters have to be considered for modules with
ultrafiltration membrane:
Filtration capacity: <_ 15 1/(mlh)
Transmembrane pressure: <_ 40 mbar
Pulse/ Pause: 6 - 12 minutes filtration, 2 - 4 minutes pause
7.3 Shutdown
7.3.1 Disassembly of the modules
The disassembly of the modules is carried out in the following steps:
1. Shut down the installation according to the manual of the operator.
2. Disconnect the aeration unit (depending on the type).
3. Open the filtration pipe, connected to atmosphere.
4. Pull the complete module block (on the buoyancy security) SMOOTHLY out of
the tank until the ball valve sticks out of the liquid.
In case of multi -storied modules pull the block SMOOTHLY out of the tank until
the first module sticks out of the liquid. Remove the tube adapter in order to
empty the module. Then pull the next module out of the liquid and open the
next hose adapter. Repeat this procedure until the ball valve of the last module
can be opened.
Page 47 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors ��►fr'
with MaxFlow-module technology AFAFE � � �
5. Open ball valve at the last membrane module and empty the module
completely.
6. Remove the entire module block out of the tank. Relieve the filtration pipe and
the aeration pipe. Pay attention that no person is located in the pivot range of
the crane.
7. When putting modules down ensure that they are put on a level, clean surface
that has no sharp objects on it. Always put the modules down on the full
surface and do not tilt.
8. After having removed the retaining plates, the modules can separated from
each other!
9. You must ensure that the module is not exposed to strong sunlight and / or too
high (> +500C)/ or too low (< +5°C) temperatures or start to dry or dry out.
➢ When moving a multimodule, a cross beam is to be used. The
fastening using chains and belts is expressly prohibited!
➢ The module must be SMOOTHLY lifted out of the water in order
to allow the modules to discharge during this lifting procedure.
➢ Move the module only by using the lifting module. Never use the
filtration pipe as a carrying handle!
➢ The module must be protected against unintended fall during the
disassembly process! Multimodules must be protected against
toppling.
➢ The module must not be dismounted by use of force! Avoid any
kind of blows impacting the module, e.g. hammer blows!
Page 48 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors HH►IL
with MaxFlow-module technology Al"Al"Aff � � �
7.3.2 Cleaning of the dismounted modules
The dismounted modules can be cleaned from rest of sludge by means of a SOFT
water -jet. Do never use a hard water -jet for the cleaning procedure (e.g. pressure
washer) as the membrane surface would be damaged!
The modules should be cleaned until all the rest of the sludge is removed from the
membrane or module surface and from the space between the membrane bags.
Cleaning is done from top to bottom in the module area which is in contact with the
activated sludge.
Prior to, during and after the cleaning, the modules must permanently be kept wet.
They must never become dry!
7.3.3 Conservation of the modules
The membrane modules must be conserved if they are not used for a longer period in
order to avoid any formation of mould. For that purpose the membrane modules must
be cleaned (see chapter 8.2.1) and dismounted (see chapter 7.3.1).
Modules with microfiltration membranes, which should be stored in wet conditions,
need to be protected against the formation of algae and mould by the usage of
antifreeze -solutions and biocides. The modules are dipped into a solution containing
20 - 40% glycerine and 2% Ultrasil 73. After that the modules will be drained and are
either shrink-wrapped in wet conditions in a plastic bag or will be dried first and then
shrink-wrapped in a plastic bag. Wet stored modules without antifreeze -solutions
should NEVER be exposed to frost circumstances.
Modules with ultrafiltration membranes must never become dry (membrane must
always be moistened with water). Should these modules be stored for more than
24 hours they must be protected from biological fouling by using a preservative.
Membranes can be soaked and then stored with:
or
or
a. a 20 % solution of fructose and a 2 % solution of Ultrasil 73
b. a 0.5 % solution of benzoic acid
Page 49 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * �
c. an aqueous solution with 0.5 - 1.0 % sodium bisulphite.
Here the whole membrane must be saturated with the preserving solution that must
be done with a short filtration with the solution. For longer storage the concentration
must be checked or changed regularly. Modules with ultrafiltration membranes must
not be exposed to frost at any time.
In case of questions concerning these
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH.
7.4 Transport and storage of the modules
7.4.1 New modules
procedures please contact
New filtration modules have to be stored in dry conditions. During the stocking the
modules should NOT be exposed to intensive solar irradiation, high temperatures or
frost. For storing the modules in dry conditions, the modules should be shrink-
wrapped in plastic bags by adding drying agent. The storage temperature should
never exceed 50 'C. Please note that the modules are shock -sensitive.
7.4.2 Used modules
Already used modules should be cleaned chemically before storage (see Chapter
8.2.1.4). No cleaning chemicals should remain in the membrane.
Modules must preferably be stored in wet conditions. A 40 — 60 % glycerine solution
is used for this. Here the solution must also penetrate the whole membrane (short
filtration). The modules must then be sealed in plastic bags.
Used, cleaned modules can also be dried for storage. To do this they must be
preserved with a 20 — 40 % glycerine solution before drying. The solution must
penetrate the membrane which is guaranteed by a short filtration. After emptying, the
suction pipe must be sealed and the air drawn off from the filtrate outlet so that the
membranes lie flat during drying and the module also dries from the inside. The
modules must not contain any residual moisture for storage because otherwise
mildew or algae could build up. The dried modules must then be sealed in plastic
bags with drying agents added.
Page 50 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors HAWAV
with MaxFlow-module technology � 0
Modules, which are forwarded for reparation or regeneration to the manufacturer,
have to be cleaned and dried completely before shipment. The type of package and
the type of shipment have to avoid any damages of the membrane modules caused
by the transport procedure.
7.5 The disposal of old modules
For the waste disposal of old submerged modules it has to be considered that these
are completely cleaned of sludge.
The entire membrane module has to be disposed as industrial waste.
8 Intended Operation
MaxFlow-membrane modules should only be used for the intended application area
of wastewater treatment.
Every modification by the client regarding the membrane modules or the utilities and
cleaning chemicals must be communicated and confirmed by
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH.
Every non -authorized procedure may result to the loss of warranty.
8.1 Normal operation
Membrane bioreactors with submerged membranes may be operated in a continuous
or in a cyclic form. There are permanent concentration- and filtrate volume flow. The
concentration from the dissolved matter would be nearly constant in case of a
consistent inflow ratio.
The MBR should be operated in a cyclic form.
1
The cyclic operation is characterized by a filtration time of 6 — 12 min., followed by an
interval time of 2 — 4 min (without filtration).
Page 51 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
►►► MrwF
P1 . a
The cyclic operation is needed for a minimization of the cake layer. In the interval
time there is no vacuum on the membrane and so the particles attached at the
membrane surface can easily be removed by the cross -flow provoked by the aeration
device.
The interval time with aeration must not be longer than 30 minutes. With longer
intervals, the scavenging air below the membrane modules must also be turned off,
in order to prevent destruction of the membrane modules. When filtration is carried
out again, heed that at first the scavenging air is turned on and only then filtration, in
order to ensure sufficient flushing of the membrane surfaces.
8.1.1 Tests
REGULAR TESTS
frequency
Check -list
daily
- Visual check of permeate regarding suspended matter
- Visual check regarding leakages
- Checking and recording the operational parameters
- permeability
- MLSS-concentration
- Flow -rate
- Transmembrane pressure
- amount of scavenging air
monthly
- Checking amount of stocked spare parts
every 6-months or
- chemical regeneration
when required
8.2 Service and cleaning procedures
8.2.1 Service
Regular maintained MaxFlow-membranes will have longer life -cycles. Besides daily
visual checks the maintenance work is including replacements of wear and tear parts.
Please consider the service notes in chapter 8.2.1.1.
Page 52 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
8.2.1.1 Service notes
►►►l�
►►► M
➢ The check- and maintenance -intervals should be followed
1 according to the handbook.
➢ In case of service teams with several persons, the responsibilities
should be clearly appointed.
➢ Do not repair damaged/ broken pipes, but replace these. Do
exchange hoses directly if porosity or tear is visible.
➢ Do retighten leaky screwing only in depressurized condition. Pass
hose connections between different installations parts and
engines break -free and protect these against damage.
➢ Do only use acceptable and compatible tools. Damaged parts
should be exchanged in time.
8.2.1.2 Maintenance -cleaning
The maintenance -cleaning for municipal wastewater will be arranged every
7 - 14 days after commissioning. For other types of wastewater the interval has to be
adapted. During the maintenance -cleaning there will be pumped a permeate -
cleaning -chemical -mixture (low concentration of the chemical liquid) in the membrane
(in the opposite direction to the standard operation direction). During the residence
time a portion of the low -concentrated cleaning solution will diffuse through the
membrane. So the "pre -dissolved" layer will be removed from the membrane. After a
period of 30 min. the cleaning solution will be evacuated out of the membrane by
changing to the standard operation (change of flow -direction).
Page 53 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
iii n�rwF
"wmmu
Notes for municipal wastewater:
I➢ cleaning period: every 7-14 days after commissioning
➢ back wash flow: module specific (see handbook)
➢ For microfiltration membrane:
back wash velocity: Back wash flow in 15 min
max. back wash pressure: + 50 mbar
residence time
chemicals:
➢ ultrafiltration membrane:
back wash velocity:
max. back wash pressure
residence time
chemicals:
30 min
sodium hypochlorite with 0.02 % free
chlorine; diluted (200 ppm)
Back wash flow in 15 min
+50 mbar
30 min
sodium hypochlorite with 0.02 % free
chlorine; diluted (200 ppm)
8.2.1.3 Recovery -Cleaning / cleaning in place (CIP)
During the so-called recovery cleaning method, the modules remain in the filtration
tank and they will be cleaned in 2 steps.
First an alkaline cleaning solution is transported from the permeate side into the
membranes. Before starting the cleaning process, the remaining water volume in the
modules should be as small as possible, what could be done with a short filtration.
The cleaning chemicals added remain within the membrane pouches for the duration
of the reaction time when the membrane module is aerated for a short time (to mix
the cleaning solution thoroughly). Then the used cleaning solution is drawn off again
(filtration operation) and fed back into the cleaning container.
The inserted cleaning solution remains for the residence time inside the filter bags
while the modules are aerated. Then the used cleaning solution is evacuated again
(filtration operation) in the reservoir for the cleaning solution.
Page 54 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology * � asp W
In a second cleaning step the procedure can be repeated with an acid cleaning
solution.
The used cleaning solutions may be reused by new concentration (control by pH -
measurement). After the third cleaning procedure the solutions should be discarded
at the latest.
Notes for municipal wastewater:
➢ Cleaning period: at a transmembrane pressure of 200 mbar
every —3 to 6 months
➢ Bach wash flow: module specific (see handbook)
➢ For microfiltration membrane:
Back wash velocity: back wash flow in 15 — 30 min
max. back wash pressure: +50 mbar
alkaline residence time: usually 2 — 3 hours
acid residence time: usually 1 - 2 hours
Cleaning chemical - alkaline: sodium hypochlorite with 0.34 %
free chlorine, diluted (3400 ppm), pH 10.5, T < 30°C
Cleaning chemical - acid: Citric acid on 0.5 %; alternative acetic
acid or formic acid, set pH 2 — 2.5, T < 30°C
➢ For ultrafiltration membrane:
Back wash velocity: back wash flow in 15 - 30 min
max. back wash pressure: +50 mbar
alkaline residence time: usually 2 — 3 hours
acid residence time: usually 1 - 2 hours
Cleaning chemical - alkaline: sodium hypochlorite with 0.08 %
free chlorine, diluted (850 ppm), pH 10.5, T <:
Cleaning chemical - acid: Citric acid on < 2 %; alternative acetic
acid or formic acid, set pH 2 — 2.5, T < 30°C
Page 55 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology � 0
As a dilution effect is occurring inside the modules, the concentrations of the sodium
hypochlorite will be twice as high as mentioned in Annex 11.1.
8.2.1.4 External cleaning
External cleaning containers are used for this. With materials that are used for wall
cladding (pipelines etc.) you must ensure that they are resistant to the cleaning
chemicals.
For an external cleaning the modules have to be dismounted and have to be cleaned
by fresh water or permeate. Do not damage the membrane by the water -jet.
1 The membrane modules should never be cleaned by use of a
pressure washer!
In the next step an alkaline cleaning is needed. The washed up module is inserted in
the cleaning reservoir filled up with the alkaline cleaning solution. Please make sure
that the filtration pipe is installed and has a direct contact to the atmosphere. A
recirculation should be created inside the reservoir provided by pump or by a cyclic
aeration. The overall duration of aeration must not exceed 30 minutes, otherwise it
may result in a damage of the membrane. After a residence time of about 2 —
3 hours, the module should be removed out of the reservoir.
In case of scaling deposits on the membrane surface it is necessary to continue by
an acidic cleaning procedure. This would be necessary if the transmembrane
pressure is still (after the alkaline cleaning) raised. The module has to be flushed
again. After that the module is inserted again in the cleaning reservoir (now filled up
with acidic solution). Should the same reservoir the used for alkaline cleaning, it is
imperative to pay attention that no liquid of the previous cleaning remains in the
reservoir. Otherwise, uncontrolled, dangerous chemical reactions can take place.
After a residence time of 1 — 2 hours the module is removed again out of the
reservoir, can be reinstalled in the filtration tank and will be operated again.
Page 56 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
Notes for municipal wastewater:
I➢ Cleaning period:
iii n�rwF
"wmmu
At a transmembrane pressure of 200 mbar (ultrafiltration)— every
3 to 6 months
➢ For microfiltration membrane
The membranes must be rinsed with sufficient water before and
after chemical cleaning.
alkaline residence time
acid residence time
usually 2 - 3 hours
usually 1 — 2 hours
Sodium hypochlorite on 0.2 % free chlorine, diluted (2000 ppm);
PH 10.5, T < 300C
Cleaning chemical acidic: Citric acid on 0.5 %; alternative acetic
acid or formic acid, pH 2 — 2.5, T < 300C
➢ For ultrafiltration membrane
The membranes must be rinsed with sufficient water before and
after chemical cleaning.
alkaline residence time
acid residence time
usually 2 - 3 hours
usually 1 — 2 hours
Sodium hypochlorite on 0.05 % free chlorine, diluted (500 ppm);
PH 10.5, T < 300C
Cleaning chemical acidic: Citric acid on < 2 %; alternative acetic
acid or formic acid, pH 2 — 2.5, T < 300C
Page 57 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
►►►l�
►►► M
The membrane surface must not be cleaned by hand or with sharp
1 or abrasive active items! Do not use a hard water jet for the
cleaning procedure (e.g. pressure washer) as the membrane
surface would be damaged!
8.2.1.5 Resistance to cleaning chemicals
The membranes are resistant to the following concentrations of cleaning chemicals:
Table 2: Resistance to cleaning chemicals (microfiltration)
Cleaning chemicals
concentration
pH (for all cleaning solutions)
2 < pH < 11 at a temperature of
max. 30 °C
pH (for all cleaning solutions)
2 < pH < 10 at a temperature of
max. 40 °C
H2O2
0,5 %
HCI
0,2 - 0,5 %
H2SO4
0,2 - 0,5 %
Citric acid
< 2 %
Acetic acid
< 2 %
Oxalic acid
0,2 - 0,5 %
Aspartic acid
0,2 - 0,5 %
Sodium hypochlorite
max. 0.2 % of active chlorine with
a temperature from < 200C
for max. 3 h
The membrane has a service life of 350,000 ppmh of chlorine under the specified
conditions.
Page 58 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
Table 3: Resistance to cleaning chemicals (Ultrafiltration)
HAWN Mn�F
in .
Cleaning chemicals
concentration
pH (for all cleaning solutions)
2 < pH < 11 at a temperature of
max. 30 °C
pH (for all cleaning solutions)
2 < pH < 10 at a temperature of
max. 40 °C
H2O2
1 %
Citric acid
< 2 %
Acetic acid
< 2 %
Sodium hypochlorite
100 — 500 ppm free chlorine
The membrane has a service life of 100,000 ppmh of chlorine under the specified
conditions.
For cleaning solutions which are not tested and confirmed by the
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH there is given no warranty regarding the
consistency of the membranes and the cleaning success.
In order to achieve best cleaning results, the optimized cleaning solutions offered by
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH can be used (see chapter 9).
8.3 Monitoring
During the monitoring process the following parameters should be controlled and
recorded in order to guarantee a reliable operation process and a high-class
permeate quality.
Page 59 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
Table 4: Form for monitoring procedure
HAWN
111 1"7'7�7T
PI W
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Name
Date
Time
Operation hours [h]
Time since cleaning [h]
Time since back wash [h]
Operation rate [min]
Pause rate [min]
Pressure operat. rate [mbar]
Pressure pause rate [mbar]
Permeability [I/(m2hbar)]
Flux [I/(m2*h)]
max. Flux in 24h [I/(m2h)]
for x hours [h]
min. Flux in 24h [I/(m2h)]
for y hours [h]
Permeate flow rate [I/h, m'/h]
Permeate appearance
Ntota, of permeate [mg/1]
NH4-N of permeate [mg/1]
COD of permeate [mg/1]
BOD5 of permeate [mg/1]
Ptota, of permeate [mg/1]
Page 60 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
9 Approved chemicals
iii n�rwF
"w=aW
The MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH is recommending the following chemicals:
Application
Chemicals
Conservation
Glycerine
Conservation
Ultrasil 73
Improvement of filtration
A3 MembranPlus
Alkaline Cleaner
A3 Activator A 101
Acidic cleaner
A3 Activator S 101
Subsequent you will find notes concerning the chemicals. In case of questions please
contact the MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH and consider the relevant spec
sheets.
9.1 Glycerine
The modules must be preserved with a 20 — 40%- glycerine solution for dry storage.
To do this the membrane is soaked with the solution by means of a short filtration.
When storing damp a 40 — 60%- solution is necessary. After being treated with the
preserving solution the modules are emptied and sealed in foil in both cases.
➢ Appearance: viscous, colourless liquid
➢ Density: 1.26 g/cm3 (20°C)
➢ pH value: 5 (100 g/I H20. 20°C)
9.2 Ultrasil 73
Ultrasil 73 is used as a biocide to preserve the membranes against mildew and algae
formation.
➢ Appearance: yellow -brown liquid
➢ Density: 1.05 g/cm3 - 1.09 g/cm3
➢ pH -value: 2.1 - 2.7
Ultrasi 73 is suited especially for the conservation of sensitive systems. In order to
use Ultrasil 73 for membrane modules, these modules have to be cleaned first. Then
Page 61 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ��� ��
with MaxFlow-module technology � 0
the modules are submerged for 20 — 30 minutes in a 2 %- Ultrasil 73 solution (with
20 - 40% Glycerine). Here a complete moistening of the membrane surfaces has to
be guaranteed during the entire application time. The conservation solution is to be
drawn into the membrane pores by brief filtration. After the residence time the
modules drip off above a collecting tray and then they will be dried at the air!
After the conservation the dried modules have to be packed airproof.
Direct contact of skin and eyes with Ultrasil 73 has to be avoided!
1 Breathing in or swallowing of Ultrasil 73 has to be avoided! While
handling with Ultrasil 73 goggles and protective glove must be
worn! Do never restore an already extracted portion back to the
reservoir!
Please note the safety data sheet!
9.3 A3 MembranPlus
The A3 MembranPlus is a special flocculant for membrane bioreactors. A3
MembranPlus is based on the mechanism of coagulation and is improving the
capacity and the efficiency of the MBR system.
A3 MembranPlus
➢ is allowing a higher flux at significantly reduced membrane fouling,
➢ is enlarging periods between membrane cleanings,
➢ is avoiding and removing the formation of skimmings on the surface,
➢ is guaranteeing a higher MBR-capacity also in exceptional circumstances and
➢ is compatible to the biomass.
A3 MembranPlus is totally water soluble and AOX-free.
➢ Appearance
➢ Density:
➢ pH -value
clear -yellow liquid
1.02 - 1.05 g/cm3
6.5
A3 MembranPlus can be dosed (as concentrate or with water diluted) at positions of
high turbulences into the MBR. In case of need a suitable dosing unit can be
Page 62 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors HAWAV
with MaxFlow-module technology � 0
delivered. The MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH is providing the system specific
dosing program as the optimized dosing rate is depending on a lot of site -specific
factors.
A3 MembranPlus is delivered in a jerry-can or in a barrel and should be stored
enclosed and frost -free. In compliance with these requirements the total functionality
of the product is confirmed for 12 months (in the original package).
As A3 MembranPuls reacts slightly acidic, goggles and protective
1 glove have to be worn while handling with A3 MembranPlus.
Do never restore an already extracted portion back to the reservoir!
Please note the safety data sheet!
9.4 A3 Activator A 101
A3 Activator 101 is an alkaline cleaner, which is used for a recovery -cleaning or an
external cleaning. The solution contains organic and inorganic complexing agent as
well as special active ingredients for removing organic deposits on the membranes.
Moreover the A3 ActivatorA 101 is free of phosphate.
Continuous cleaning cycles with A3 Activator A 101 will result in long membrane life
cycles with high flux rates.
➢ Appearance
➢ Density:
➢ pH -value:
yellowish liquid
- 1.35 - 1.37 g/cm3
12.4 - 13.0
Dosage unit with CIP- or tank -to -tank -procedure:
➢ Concentration: 2.0 - 5.0 %
➢ Temperature: 20 - 500 C
➢ Residence time: 30 - 60 minutes in the free -flushing -cycle
After usage it has to be flushed efficiently with fresh water in order to remove
deposits.
Close the reservoir always with the original closing and store the reservoirs in cool
conditions and without solar irradiation.
Page 63 of 69

Manual for design &operation of membrane bioreactors ���
with MaxFlow-module technology " M Mwr U ,-
As A3 Activator A 101 reacts in alkaline form, goggles and protective
■
gloves must be worn while handling with A3Activator A 101.
Do never restore an already extracted portion back to the reservoir!
Please note the safety data sheet!
9.5 A3 Activator S 101
A3 Activator S 101 is an acidic cleaner, which is used for a recovery -cleaning or an
external cleaning. The solution is especially used for removing layers which results
from water attributes, as e.g. carbonate, and is used in the free -flushing -cycle of the
system.
Continuous cleaning cycles with A3 Activator S 101 will result in long membrane life
cycles with high flux rates.
A3 Activator S does not contain any organic bound halogens (AOX). But A3 Activator
S contains phosphates.
➢ Appearance: uncoloured liquid
➢ Density: — 1.180 - 1.200 g/cm3
➢ pH -value: 1.2 - 1.8
Dosage with CIP- or tank -to -tank -procedure:
➢ Concentration:
1.0
- 5.0 %
➢ Temperature:
20 -
400 C
➢ Residence time:
10
— 30 minutes in the free -flushing -cycle
After usage it has to be flushed efficiently with fresh water in order to remove
deposits.
Close the reservoir always with the original closing and store the reservoirs in cool
conditions and without solar irradiation.
Page 64 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors AWSA
with MaxFlow-module technology AFJFJIF � � �
As A3 Activator A 101 reacts in acidic form, goggles and protective
1 gloves have to be worn while handling with A3 ActivatorA 101.
Do never restore an already extracted portion back to the reservoir!
Please note the safety data sheet!
Page 65 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
10 Manufacturer's declaration
HEN Mrrf
PI . a,
Declaration for the installation of a incomplete machinery
in terms of the Machinery Directive 98/37/EG, Annex II B
Herewith we,
MaxFlow Membran Filtration GmbH
Magdeburger Str. 16a
45881 Gelsenkirchen, Germany,
declare that the commissioning of the subsequently named incomplete machinery is
prohibited until it was noted that the machinery in which the incomplete machinery
will be installed in, is corresponding to the EG-machinery directive.
We approve the conformity to the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EWG.
Product: Microfiltration-Membrane module Type MaxFlow M06-001
MaxFlow M20-002
MaxFlow M70-002
MaxFlow U70-003
Ultrafiltration-Membrane module Type MaxFlow U06-001
MaxFlow U20-002
MaxFlow U70-002
MaxFlow U70-003
Engineer standards: 98/37/EWG
EN 292-1
EN 292-2
The special technical documents for incomplete machinery according to the
Machinery Directive 98/37/EG, Annex VI, are present.
Page 66 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
11 Annex
11.1 List of substances damaging the membrane
iii n�rr�F
"wmmu
Substances
Effect on membrane
concen-tration
1,1,1-tichlorethane
1
g/I
1-Nitropropane
2
g/I
2 N NaOH
3NKOH
5 % CIOH
50
g/I
Acetone
solvent
2
g/I
Amyl -alcohol
20
g/I
Fuel
solvent
2
g/I
Benzene
solvent
1
g/I
Butadiene
solvent
2
g/I
Butyl-alcohol/butanol
1
g/I
Cationic polymers
Cresol
solvent
1
g/I
Cyclohexane
solvent
1
g/I
Diacetone alcohol
solvent
2
g/I
Dichlorethane
solvent
1
g/I
Dimethyl formamide
solvent
1
g/I
Diesel oil
closing the pores
2
g/I
Dimethyl sulfoxide
solvent
1
g/I
Iron - & manganese
sludge
closing the pores
2
g/I
Ethyl alcohol / ethanol
solvent
200
g/I
Ethylene chloride
solvent
1
g/I
Ethyl formate
solvent
2
g/I
Formaldehyde
50
g/I
Soak wax
irreversible closing of the pores
2
g/I
Isopropyl alcohol
solvent
100
g/I
Cationic tenside
2
g/I
Cationic polymers
Base pH > 12
precipitations
Methyl alcohol /
methanol
solvent
50
g/I
Page 67 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxFlow-module technology
►►► ■ W .
Substances
Effect on membrane
concen-tration
Methylene chloride
solvent
1
g/I
Methyethyl ketone
solvent
2
g/I
Methyl isobutylketone
solvent
2
g/I
Non emulsified
organic fats
closing the pores
2
g/I
Nitrobenzol
solvent
1
g/I
Nitrobenzene
solvent
1
g/I
Nitro dilution
solvent
2
g/I
N-Methylpyrrolin
solvent
1
g/I
n-methyl Pyrrolidon
solvent
1
g/I
Phenol
solvent
1
g/I
Piperidine
solvent
1
g/I
Pyridine
solvent
1
g/I
Acid pH < 2
Silicone oil
irreversible closing of the pores
2
g/I
carbon tetrachloride
solvent
1
g/I
Tetrahydrofuran
solvent
1
g/I
Toluole
solvent
1
g/I
Toluen
solvent
1
g/I
Trichloroethylene
solvent
1
g/I
Xylene
solvent
1
g/I
Xylol
solvent
1
g/I
Sharp -edged solids
damage of the membrane
Degreaser
soaking/power drop
1
g/I
Page 68 of 69

Manual for design & operation of membrane bioreactors
with MaxRow module technology
11.2 Example of P&ID
Reservoir Reservoir
for cleaning for cleaning
solution solution
I
Blower
Filtrate,
permeate
aj
cwmmar (w+)
cwwma: lae.a)
vemar are �csmt
Cp
eae+wa•
�a'Mw nw�
(�D mwds+ames.
0 _m
Q
M
Permeate
Page 69 of 69
Draining
HEN
Affffffffi

FAGGIOLATI PUMPS's-P.A.
♦ ----MF
Arwww.faggiolatipumpsxom !SO 9001 - 1SO 14001
Macerata - Italy
ISO 80079 (ATEX)
it Istruzioni d'installazione a d'uso Elettropompe sommergibili
en Instructions for installation and usage Submersible pumps
fr Mode d'emploi et d'installation Electropompes submersibles
de Einbau- and Bedienungsanleitungen Tauchmotorpumpen
es Instrucciones de instalacion y use Electrobombas sumergibles
pt Instru�oes de instala�ao a utilizaVao Electrobombas
submersiveis

it
de
ISTRUZIONE D'INSTALLAZIONE
E
EINBAU-UND
D'USO
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNGEN
Dati di targa
3
Kenndaten
3
Limitazioni d'impiego
4
Einschrankungen
16
Applicazioni
4
Gerauschstarke
16
Installazione (norme di sicurezza)
4
Gesamtansicht
16
Collegamenti elettrici
5
Stromanschluss
17
Quadro elettrico
6
Schalttafel
18
Accoppiamento automatico
6
Automatische Kupplung
18
Montaggio
6
Montage
18
Ispezioni
7
Wartungseingriffe
19
Cambio olio
7
Olwechsel
19
Pulizia
7
Reinigung
19
Controlli
7
Kontrollen
19
Schema dei collegamenti elettrici
28
Schema der elektrischen anschhisse
28
en es
INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Y
AND USAGE USO
Rating plate
3
Datos de placa
3
Working limits
8
Limitaciones de empleo
20
Applications
8
Aplicaciones
20
Installation (safety regulations)
8
Instalaci6n (normas de seguridad)
20
Electrical connections
9
Conexiones electricas
21
Electrical panel
10
Cuadro electrico
22
Automatic coupling
10
Acoplamiento automatico
22
Assembly
10
Montaje
22
Inspections
1 1
Inspecciones
23
Oil change
11
Cambio aceite
23
Cleaning
11
Limpieza
23
Checking
11
Controles
23
Electrical connection diagram
28
Diagrama de las Conexiones electricas
28
fr
pt
INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION
ET
INSTRU(�OES DE INSTALA�AO
E
D'USAGE
UTILIZACAO
Plaque du constructeur
3
Placa de identifica9ao
3
Limites d'utilisation
12
Limita96es de use
24
Applications
12
Aplica96es
24
Installation (normes de securite)
12
Instala9ao ( normas de seguran9a)
24
Branchements electriques
13
Liga96es electricas
25
Tableau electrique
14
Quadro electrico
26
Assemblage automatique
14
Acoplagem automatica
26
Montage
14
Montagem
26
Inspections
15
Inspec96es
27
Changement de Thuile
15
Mudan9a de oleo
27
Nettoyage
15
Limpeza
27
Contr6les
15
Verifica96es
27
Schema des branchements electriques
28
Esquema das liga96es electricas
28
Il costruttore si riserva it diritto di modificare le caratteristiche tecniche senza alcun preavviso.
The manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical features without previous notice.
Le fabricant se reserve le droit de modifier les caracteristiques techniques des pompes sans preavis.
Der Hersteller behdlt sich das recht vor, die technischen Kenndaten ohne Vorankundigung zu dndern.
El fabricante se reserva el derecho de modificar las caracteristicas tecnicas sin previo aviso.
0 construtor reserva-se o direito de alterar as caracteristicas tecnicas sem qualquer aviso previo.

DATI DI TARGA - RATING PLATE - PLAQUE DU CONSTRUCTEUR - KENNDATEN -
DATOS DE LA PLACA - PLACA DE IDENTIFICAII�AO
4Y
1) Tipo di pompa - pump type - type de pompe - Pumpentyp -
tipo de bomba - tipo de bomba.
14 2) Portata massima - Max. delivery - debit max. — Max
Fordermenge - capacidad maxima - capacidade max.
3) N° di fasi, tensione nominale, frequenza - n° of phases, rated
13 voltage, frequency - n° de phases, tension nominale, frequence -
Stufenanzahl, Nennspannung, Frequenz - nro. de fases, tension
nominal, frecuencia - n° de fases, tensao nominal, frequencia.
4) Potenza nominale - rated power - puissance nominale —
1 Nennleistung - potencia nominal - potencia nominal.
11 5) Fattore di servizio - operation Duty - facteur de
10 fonctionnement - Betriebsfaktor - factor de servicio - factor de
servigo.
6) Corrente nominale motore — Nom. motor current - courant
5 6 7 $ g nom. moteur-Stromaufnahme - corriente nom. motor - corrente
FIG.1 nom. motor.
7) Capacity condensatore - capacitor rating - capacite condensateur - Kapazitat des Kondensators - capacidad condensador -
capacidade do consensador.
8) Prevalenza massima — Max. head - hauteur de refoulement max. — Max. Forderhohe - altura maxima - prevalencia max.
9) Classe isolamento - insulation class - classe isolation - isolierklasse - clase de aislamiento - classe isolamento.
10) Temperatura massima del liquido — Max. liquid temperature - temp.max du liquide - max. Flussigkeitstemperatur -
temp.max del liquido - temp.max do liquido
11) Fattore di potenza — power factor - fac. puissance - Leistungsfaktor factor de potencia - factor de potencia
12) Velocity di rotazione - rotation speed rpm - vitesse de rotation - nenndrhzahl - velocidad de rotacion - velocidade de
rotagao.
13) Peso - weight - poids - Gewicht - peso — peso.
14) N° di matricola - serial number - n° d'immatriculation - Seriennummer - n° de serie - n°de matricula.
"rif E date No
type
Kg
Qmax m3/h
Hmax m
SZ 20m
MOTOR DATA
IEC60
34-1
Ph ti
rpm
P2 kW
In
A
Cos
connection
F
Max
°C
O er.dut S1 IP
8
ns.cl.

it « Istruzioni originali »
AVVERTIMENTI PER LA SICUREZZA
DELLE PERSONE E DELLE COSE
Questa simbologia I ' assieme alle relative
diciture: "Pericolo" a "Avvertenza" indicano la potenzialita
del rischio derivante dal mancato rispetto della
prescrizione alla quale sono stati abbinati, come sotto
specificato.
Pericolo Avverte the la mancata osservanza
Rischio di scosse della prescrizione comporta un
elettriche
rischio di scosse elettriche.
A Pericolo Avverte the la mancata osservanza
della prescrizione comporta un
rischio di danno alle persone e/o alle
cose.
Avvertenza Avverte the la mancata osservanza
della prescrizione comporta un
rischio di danno alla pompa o
all' impianto.
MOVIMENTAZIONE
'Avvertenza Per la movimentazione della pompa
non imballata usufruire del gancio
appositamente predisposto sulla
testata della pompa.
APericolo E assolutamente vietato sollevare la
Rischio di scosse pompa tramite it cavo elettrico.
elettriche
LIMITAZIONI WIMPIEGO
❑ Avvertenza - Non lavorare con liquidi a
temperature superiori a (vedere
scheda tecnica pompa).
- La density del liquido pompato non
deve essere superiore a (vedere
scheda tecnica pompa).
- Il liquido da pompare pub contenere
parti solide fino al diametro
consentito dal passaggio attraverso la
girante.
- Livello minimo del liquido: la
pompa pub lavorare in servizio
continuo a pieno carico, purche it
livello del liquido risulti almeno a
meta dell'alloggio statore.
Versione con mantello di
raffreddamento: la pompa pub
lavorare in servizio continuo a pieno
carico, con installazione a secco,
oppure con it livello del liquido fino a
coprire it diffusore.
- Profondita di immersione: massimo
20m.
- Le elettropompe non possono essere
impiegate per prevalenze inferiori al
punto pi%i basso della curva
caratteristica nella scheda tecnica
della pompa. Per prevalenze inferiori,
it motore risulterebbe sovraccaricato.
Pericolo L'elettropompa non deve essere
utilizzata in ambienti con pericolo di
esplosione, ne per it pompaggio di
liquidi infiammabili.
RUMOROSITA
Non applicabile perche la pompa lavora immersa nei
pozzi.
Versione a secco: inferiore a 70 dB(A).
APPLICAZIONI
Questa serie di elettropompe sommergibili a stata
progettata per: pompaggio di acque di scarico industriali e
civili, pompaggio di fanghi, pompaggio di liquami leggeri
di allevamento a urina.
Sono disponibili nelle seguenti versioni:
• con dispositivo di discesa: it gruppo
elettropompa si collega automaticamente al piede
di accoppiamento, the e dotato di due tubi di
guida per agevolare la discesa nel pozzetto;
• con piede di sostegno: attacco per tubo flessibile,
maniglia a piede di appoggio.
INSTALLAZIONE
NORME DI SICUREZZA
Per prevenire it rischio di incidenti durante la
manutenzione o Finstallazione della pompa, e opportuno
seguire le seguenti norme.
Pericolo - Non lavorare mai da soli. Usate
cintura e corda di sicurezza, nonche
una maschera antigas se necessario.
Non ignorate it pericolo di
annegamento.
- Assicuratevi the ci sia sufficiente
ossigeno e the non ci sia presenza di
gas velenosi.
- Controllate i1 rischio di esplosioni,
prima di saldare o usare un attrezzo
elettrico.
- Non ignorare it pericolo per la
salute a osservate le norme igieniche.
- Fate attenzione ai rischi derivanti da
guasti elettrici.
- Assicuratevi the Fattrezzatura per it
sollevamento sia in buone condizioni.
- Provvedete ad uno sbarramento
adatto intorno all'area dove lavorate.
- Assicuratevi di avere la possibility
di un veloce ritorno all'aria aperta.
- Usate un carco, occhiali di
sicurezza a scarpe di protezione.
- Tutte le persone the lavorano in
stazioni di pompaggio di acque nere
devono essere vaccinate contro le
possibili malattie the possono essere
trasmesse.
4

it « Istruzioni originali »
- Non introdurre mai le dita
nell'apertura di aspirazione perch6
c'6 rischio di danno al contatto con la
girante. A tale proposito si avverte
the la pompa pub fermarsi e ripartire
automaticamente per 1'intervento di
protezioni termiche o telecomandi,
per cui solo l'interruttore
dell'alimentazione elimina detto
rischio.
La pompa 6 prevista per 1'impiego in liquidi the possono
essere dannosi alla salute. Per prevenire eventuali danni
agli occhi a alla pelle, osservate le seguenti norme, in caso
di intervento sulla pompa:
• uaate sempre occhiali antinfortunistici e guanti di
gomma;
• risciacquate bene la pompa con idropulitrice a
caldo, prima di iniziare 1'intervento;
• risciacquate i diversi componenti con acqua
pulita, dopo averli smontati;
• tenete uno straccio intorno alla vite della camera
olio, quando dovete svitarla. Questo per evitare
the eventuali spruzzi raggiungano gli occhi o la
pelle, qualora si fosse formats pressione nella
pompa a causa di infiltrazioni di liquido pompato.
Agite nel seguente modo, qualora prodotti chimici nocivi
dovessero venire a contatto:
con i vostri occhi: sciacquate immediatamente
con acqua corrente per 15 minuti, tenendo bene
aperte le palpebre. Mettetevi in contatto con un
oculista;
con la vostra pelle: togliete gli abiti contaminati,
lavate la pelle con acqua a sapone, se necessario
fatevi controllare da un medico.
SEGUITE TUTTE LE ALTRE REGOLE DI IGIENE E
SICUREZZA E LE NORME ED ORDINANZE LOCALI.
ATTREZZATURA DI SOLLEVAMENTO
Per sollevare la pompa, 6 necessaria un'apposita
attrezzatura, essa deve poter alzare la pompa a calarla nel
pozzo, possibilmente senza la necessity di una ripresa.
La distanza minima tra it gancio di sollevamento e it
chiusino/pavimento dovey essere 0,8m, per avere la
possibility di estrarre la pompa dal pozzo.
Un'attrezzatura di sollevamento sovradimensionata
potrebbe causare danni alla pompa, qualora quests si
incastrasse durante le operazioni di sollevamento.
Assicuratevi the 1'ancoraggio dell'attrezzatura di
sollevamento sia sicuro.
Pericolo ATTENZIONE! Tenetevi lontano dai
carichi sospesi.
COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI
L'intero impianto elettrico deve essere eseguito da
personale specializzato. Seguite norme a prescrizioni
locali.
Pericolo Nel caso di sostituzione del cavo, per
Rischio di scosse ragioni di sicurezza, it conduttore di
elettriche
terra (giallo-verde) dovey essere circa
50mm piii lungo dei conduttori di
fase.
In caso di distacco accidentale del
cavo, it terminale di terra dovey
essere 1'ultimo a staccarsi.
L'apparecchiatura di comando e
controllo non pub in alcun caso
essere installata nel pozzetto di
raccolta.
Ricordate the la corrente assorbita allo spunto per
1'avviamento diretto puo essere fino a 6 volte
1'assorbimento nominale. Accertatevi quindi the i fiisibili
o gli interruttori automatici abbiano la corretta taratura.
Ffl
Avvertenza - Eventuali giunzioni del cavo di
alimentazione devono essere
assolutamente stagne.
- Verificate the la tensione a la
frequenza della rete corrispondano ai
dati di targa dell'elettropompa.
- La tension di alimentazione deve
corrispondere a quella indicata sulla
targhetta, con tolleranza 10%.
- Controllare sempre la corrente
assorbita dall'elettropompa.
- Controllare the la taratura del rel6
termico di protezione non sia
superiore al valore da not indicato a
pag. 3.
MOTORE ELETTRICO
Motore asincrono a gabbia di scoiattolo, classe
d'isolamento H(180°C). A secco, raffreddato dal liquido
circostante. Grado di protezione IP68.
Il motore 6 progettato per lavoro continuo o intermittente,
con un massimo di 15 avviamenti per ora regolarmente
distanziati.
Il motore 6 progettato per un funzionamento con massimo
squilibrio di tensione tra le fasi del 5% (secondo le norme
CEI EN 60034-1).
SENSO DI ROTAZIONE
Il controllo del senso di rotazione deve essere effettuato
scrupolosamente all'atto della messa in funzione
dell' elettropompa.
❑Avvertenza Errato senso di rotazione provoca
' una notevole diminuzione di
portata a pub causare danni alla
pompa.
Il senso di rotazione 6 giusto se all'avviamento si nota un
contraccolpo in senso antiorario guardando la pompa dal
lato pressacavo.
Versione trifase: in caso di senso di rotazione errato
occorre scambiare tra loro 2 qualsiasi dei 3 fili di fase sulla
morsettiera del quadro elettrico.
Pericolo E' ASSOLUTAMENTE VIETATO
Rischio di scosse SOLLEVARE LA POMPA
elettriche TRAMITE IL CAVO ELETTRICO.

it « Istruzioni originali »
Abbiate particolarmente cura del cavo di alimentazione e
procedere ad una sostituzione immediata, se danneggiato.
❑Avvertenza ATTENZIONE! L'estremita del cavo
' non deve essere sommersa. I
terminali devono essere sicuramente
fssat sopra it livello massimo del
liquido, per evitare the Facqua possa
penetrare attraverso it cavo nel
motore.
QUADRO ELETTRICO*
Pericolo E vietato it collegamento diretto
ZYLxischio di sccsse della pompa tramite spina,
elettriche
collegare it cavo elettrico ad un
armadietto di comando con
protezione termica.
Le pompe sommergibili di questa serie devono essere
dotate di un quadro elettrico di comando. Tale quadro deve
essere previsto per permettere sia it funzionamento
manuale the automatico.
La dotazione minima deve prevedere circuito di comando
a bassa tensione, circuito per it controllo e la regolazione
automatica del livello, circuito di rilevazione anomalie di
funzionamento.
Il quadro di comando completo puo essere fornito su
richiesta.
* non applicabile per le elettropompe dotate di spina di
collegamento elettrico.
COMANDO AUTOMATICO
Il comando automatico dell'elettropompa viene ottenuto
mediante due regolatori automatici di livello the utilizzano
un interruttore a monocontatto (solo marcia a arresto).
Essi vengono installati all'interno del pozzetto appesi
all'apposita staffa, the viene ancorata all'orlo della botola
di accesso (vedi pag. 38).
Nel caso di installazione di piu pompe in un unico pozzetto
occorre prevedere Falternanza automatica del
funzionamento.
La regolazione dei livelli di intervento si esegue allentando
i blocchetti della staffa di fissaggio a alzando o abbassando
it cavetto di alimentazione. Il regolatore di marcia deve
essere posizionato a una quota inferiore a quella della
tubazione di arrivo del liquido.
Il regolatore di arresto va collocato in modo da evitare
aspirazione di aria da parte della pompa.
Mediante un altro regolatore e possibile collegare un
impianto di allarme (lampeggiante o sirena).
❑Avvertenza La differenza di livello tra la marcia e
' Farresto deve consentire un massimo
di 15 avviamenti all'ora.
Per garantire un corretto funzionamento e necessario
controllare the i regolatori possano galleggiare
liberamente, lontano dalle pareti e da possibili appigh; the
venga a contatto col fondo del pozzetto e the non vengano
direttamente investiti dalla corrente del liquido in ingresso.
I regolatori di livello devono essere ispezionati
periodicamente per eliminare eventuali sedimentazioni
dovute a sostanza grassa o corpi filamentosi the possono
impedire it regolare funzionamento.
RIVELATORE WINFILTRAZIONE
ACQUA
Per pompe equipaggiate di rivelatore incorporato
d'infiltrazione acqua nella camera olio.
Il sensore rileva la presenza d'acqua nell'olio quando la
percentuale supera it valore del 30%. Qualora it sensore
venisse attivato, si raccomanda di cambiare folio.
Se it sensore dovesse venire attivato nuovamente dopo
poco tempo dal cambio dell'olio, si raccomanda di
sostituire la tenuta meccanica (vedi cambio olio pag. 7).
ACCOPPIAMENTO AUTOMATICO CON
DISCESA GUIDATA DA DUE TUBI DI
GUIDA
Il sistema di accoppiamento automatico consente lavori di
ispezione rapidi a razionali.
Il piede di accoppiamento viene fissato sul fondo del
pozzetto assieme alla tubazione di mandata; due tubi di
guida to collegano alla staffa di ancoraggio fissata al bordo
della botola.
La pompa viene calata lungo i tubi di guida fino a
raggiungere la posizione esatta per Faccoppiamento; la
tenuta risultera perfetta grazie al peso stesso della pompa.
Questa operazione puo essere ripetuta innumerevoli volte e
facilita particolarmente i lavori di controllo e di ispezione;
la pompa viene semplicemente estratta dal pozzetto con
una catena (anche in caso di impianto allagato) controllata
o riparata a rimontata.
MONTAGGIO
Fissate la staffa superiore dei tubi di guida al
centro della parete interna della botola di accesso,
sul lato dove deve essere installata la tubazione di
mandata (vedi pag. 37).
Controllate per mezzo di un filo a piombo, the i
tubi guida risultino in posizione verticale.
2. Posizionate it piede di accoppiamento sul fondo
del pozzetto in modo the la sporgenza conica
sulla quale si impegnera it tubo di guida risulti a
piombo in corrispondenza della staffa superiore.
Contrassegnare i fori di fissaggio per le chiavarde
a espansione, togliere it piede e praticare i 4 fori,
inserire le chiavarde e posare it piede sulle stesse.
Posizionare i tubi di guida sulla apposita
sporgenza conica del piede e determinare la
lunghezza definitiva.
3. Per pozzi profondi piu di 6 m. risultano necessarie
staffe intermedie per la giunzione dei tubi guida.
4. Inserire i tubi guida tra la sporgenza conica del
piede e quella della staffa superiore,
verificandone nuovamente la perfetta verticalita.

it « Istruzioni originali »
5. Fissare definitivamente it piede di accoppiamento
con rondelle piane a dadi, inserire la staffa
superiore nei tubi di guida, in modo the non ci sia
nessun gioco verticale e fissarla.
6. Collegare la tubazione di mandata con
guamizione piana e viti al piede di
accoppiamento.
7. Inserire la guarnizione nella controflangia di
accoppiamento. Fissate la controflangia alla bocca
di mandata della pompa mediante viti.
8. Per calare la pompa nel pozzetto occorre fissare la
catena all'apposito occhiello o golfare sulla
testata della pompa (vedi pag. 38).
9. Infilare la controflangia di accoppiamento nella
staffa superiore e calare la pompa nel pozzetto
facendola scorrere lungo i tubi di guida.
Raggiungendo it fondo del pozzetto, la pompa si
collega automaticamente al piede di
accoppiamento.
10. Appendete la catena e i cavi elettrici alla staffa
superiore, sistemate i cavi elettrici entro le
apposite protezioni tra it pozzo e it quadro di
comando.
Avvertenza Assicuratevi the i cavi non siano
piegati o pressati in maniera da essere
soggetti a rotture o usura.
CONTROLLI E MANUTENZIONE
A! Pericolo ATTENZIONE! Non introdurre mai
le dita nell'apertura di aspirazione
perch6 c'e rischio di danno al
contatto con la girante; a tale
proposito si avverte the la pompa puo
fermarsi e ripartire automaticamente
per Fintervento di protezioni
termiche o telecomandi, per cui solo
Finterruzione dalla rete elettrica di
alimentazione elimina it suddetto
rischio.
ISPEZIONI
Controlli periodici a manutenzioni preventive garantiscono
un funzionamento piu sicuro net tempo.
La pompa deve essere ispezionata dopo 2000 ore di
funzionamento o almeno una volta all'anno e, in caso di
funzionamento in condizioni particolarmente gravose,
occorre eseguire l'ispezione piu frequentemente, in questa
occasione a necessario controllare to stato dell'olio.
In condizioni normali di funzionamento, occorre far
revisionare la pompa in officina ogni 3 anni.
CAMBIO OLIO
Il riempimento della camera olio viene eseguito in
fabbrica; qualora ci siano tracce di acqua o leggera
emulsione si rende necessario it cambio olio. Bisogna
estrarre la pompa dal pozzetto, it tappo dell'olio si trova
lateralmente alla camera olio, consigliamo di effettuare
Foperazione presso una officina.
Pericolo - ATTENZIONE! In caso di
infiltrazioni della tenuta, la camera
olio puo essere in pressione. Per
prevenire spruzzi, tenete uno straccio
intorno alla vite del serbatoio
dell'olio, quando la svitate.
- Svitare it tappo di chiusura della
camera olio e fare fuoriuscire
completamente folio, riempire quindi
con la quantity prescritta di
lubrificante (vedi pag. 3), richiudete
accuratamente sostituendo sempre la
rosetta di rame.
- Se notate evidenti tracce d'acqua o
se folio e fortemente emulsionato,
controllate la tenuta meccanica
inferiore se necessario sostituitela,
oppure rivolgetevi ad una officina
autorizzata.
PULIZIA
Per pulire la girante da corpi filamentosi puo essere
sufficiente avviare la pompa per pochi secondi con senso
di rotazione inverso.
Se la pompa viene impiegata per l'uso saltuario sarebbe
opportuno pulirla dopo ogni servizio mediante it
pompaggio di acqua pulita, per evitare depositi ed
incrostazioni.
Si consiglia di controllare periodicamente it
funzionamento degli interruttori automatici di livello,
specialmente nelle installazioni fisse. Azionando it
commutatore di selezione (posizione manuale) la vasca di
raccolta o it pozzetto vengono vuotati. Se si riscontrano
depositi di sporco sull'interruttore a galleggiante e
necessario rimuoverli.
Dopo la pulizia sarebbe opportuno lavare it pozzetto
immettendo acqua pulita; si dovrebbe inoltre osservare
alcuni cicli di marcia e arresto col commutatore in
posizione automatico.
CONTROLLI
Nel caso in cui la pompa funzioni, ma la portata a scarsa o
nulls controllate:
• it senso di rotazione della pompa. Vedere "Senso
di rotazione";
• the le valvole siano aperte a intatte;
• the i tubi, la girante e Feventuale griglia non
siano intasati;
• the la girante ruoti facilmente;
• the la prevalenza richiesta dall'impianto non sia
cambiata;
• the non ci siano perdite nelle tubazioni;
• the non sia usurata la girante.
Avvertenza non forzate la pompa piu volte ad
avviarsi se la protezione termica
interviene.

en « Translation of the original instructions »
SAFETY WARNINGS FOR PERSONS AND
EQUIPMENT
These symbols I I , I together with relative
words: "Danger" and "Warning", indicate the potential
risk deriving from failure to observe the safety precautions
to which they have been associated, as specified below.
QDanger Warms that failure to comply with
Risk of electric the safety precautions may result in
shock
electric shock.
A Danger Warns that failure to comply with the
safety precaution may result in
damage to person and/or equipment.
❑ Warning Warns that failure to comply with the
safety precautions may result in
damage to the pump or the plant.
HANDLING
'Warning Use the special lifting eyebolt on the
head of the pump for the handling of
the unpacked unit.
Danger Do not use the electrical cable to lift
Risk of electric the pump.
shock
WORKING LIMITS
Warning - Maximum temperature of pumped
liquid (see pump data sheet).
- The density of the pumped liquid
must not exceed (see pump data
sheet).
- The size of suspended solids present
in the pumped liquid must not exceed
the free passage through the impeller.
- Minimum liquid level: the pump
may work continuously at full load as
long as the liquid level does not drop
below the midpoint of the stator
housing.
With cooling jacket: the pump may
work continuously at full load, with
dry installation, or with diffuser
completely submerged.
- Immersion depth: maximum 20m.
- The electric pumps cannot be used
for heads below the lowest point in
the characteristic curve show in the
pump data sheet. Lower heads result
in the motor overload.
Danger The electric pumps must not be used
in environments where there is a risk
of explosions, or for the pumping of
flammable liquids.
NOISE
Not applicable because the pump works submerged in
wells.
By dry version: inferior to 70 db(A).
APPLICATIONS
This series of submersible pumps has been designed for
the pumping of waste water in industrial and civil
installations, pumping of mud and of light agricultural
sewage.
They are available in the following versions:
• with lowering device: the electric pump unit
connects automatically with the coupling foot,
which is fitted with two guide tubes to assist the
lowering inside the pit;
• with support foot: coupling for flexible tube,
handle and supporting foot.
INSTALLATION
SAFETY REGULATIONS
To avoid the risk of accidents during pump maintenance or
installation, the following regulations should be observed:
Danger - Never work alone. Use safety belt
1 and rope and also a gas mask, if
necessary. Do not overlook the risk
of drowning.
- Make sure that sufficient oxygen is
available and toxic fumes are present.
- Before welding or using electrical
equipment make sure there are no
risks of explosion.
- Do not overlook dangers to your
health; follow common hygienic
practices.
- Be aware of risks resulting from
electrical malfunctions.
- Make sure that the hoisting
equipment is in good condition.
- Install a suitable barrier around the
working area.
- Make sure that a fast easy exit to the
open air is available.
- Use a helmet, safety goggles and
protective shoes.
- All the people working in sewage
water pumping stations must be
vaccinated against any diseases that
may be transmitted.
- Never introduce your fingers inside
the suction opening as there is a risk
of injuries due to contact with the
impeller. Keep in mind that the pump
8

en « Translation of the original instructions »
may stop and restart automatically
following the triggering of thermal
protections or of remote control
devices; only the power supply
switch may eliminate this risk.
The pump has been designed to be used with liquids that
may be hazardous to your health. To avoid injuries to your
eyes or skin, comply with the following safety precautions
when operating on the pump:
• always use safety goggles and rubber gloves;
• rinse the pump well with a hot water cleaning
machine before servicing it;
• rinse the different components with clean water
after having disassembled them;
• wrap a rag around the oil chamber screw
whenever you have to loosen it, to prevent sprays
from reaching your skin or eyes in the event that
pressure has built up in the pump due to
infiltration of the pumped liquid.
In the event of contact with toxic chemicals, proceed as
follows:
• eyes: Rinse immediately with running water for
15 minutes keeping eyelids wide open. Contact an
eye doctor;
• skin: Remove the contaminated clothing, wash
skin with soap and water; if necessary, consult a
doctor.
FOLLOW ALL THE OTHER HYGIENIC AND SAFETY
PRACTICES AND LOCAL RULES AND
REGULATIONS.
HOISTING EQUIPMENT
Suitable hoisting equipment is necessary for lifting the
pump and lowering it inside the well, if possible without
requiring a take-up.
The minimum distance between the lifting hook and the
trap/floor must be 0.8m to allow for the extraction of the
pump from the well.
Oversized hoisting equipment may cause damage to the
pump in the event that it should get jammed during the
lifting operations. Make sure that the lifting equipment is
properly secured.
Q Danger WARNING! Keep clear of suspended
loads.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The entire electric system must be installed by skilled
personnel. Follow local rules and regulations.
Danger If the cable must be replaced, for
Risk of electric safety reasons, the earth conductor
shock (yellow -green) must be about 50 mm
longer than the phase conductors.
In the event that the cable should
accidentally come loose, the earth
terminal must be the last one to be
disconnected.
The command and control equipment
cannot be installed inside the sump
pit.
Remember that the initial input current for direct starting
may be up to 6 times the rated absorption; therefore, make
sure that the fuses or the automatic switches have the
adequate setting.
'Warning - Any splicing of the supply cable
must be absolutely water proof.
- Make sure that the mains voltage
and frequency correspond with the
pump rating.
- The supply voltage must agree with
the specifications indicated on the
rating plate, with a 10% tolerance.
- Always check the current absorbed
by the pump.
- Make sure that the setting of the
temperature relay does not exceed the
indicated value at page 3.
ELECTRIC MOTOR
Motor asynchronous squirrel cage type, insulation class H
(180cC). Dry motor, cooled by surrounding liquid.
Protection degree IP 68.
The motor is designed for continuous or intermittent
operation, with a maximum of 15 starts per hour at regular
intervals.
The motor is designed for work with 5% maximum
voltage unbalance between the phases (in compliance with
norms CEI EN 60034-1).
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
The direction of rotation must be carefully checked when
the pumps are started.
'Warning If the direction of rotation is wrong
the delivery of the pump is
inadequate and may result in
damage to the unit.
The direction of rotation is correct if, at starting, you
notice an counter -clockwise recoil when looking at the
pump from the cable gland side.
Three-phase: if the direction of rotation is wrong you need
to invert any 2 of the 3 phase wires on the terminal board
of the electrical box.
A�r
Danger DO NOT USE THE ELECTRIC
Risk of electric CABLE TO LIFT THE PUMP
shock
Take good care of the supply cable; replace it immediately
if damaged.
Warning WARNING! The end of the cable
must not be submerged. The cable
terminals must be securely fastened
above the maximum level of the
liquid, to prevent the water from

en « Translation of the original instructions »
penetrating inside the motor through
the cable.
ELECTRICAL PANEL*
Danger Do not connect the pump directly
Risk of electric by means a plug; connect the
shock electric cable to a control box with
thermal protection.
This series of submersible pumps must be equipped with
an electrical control panel. The panel must be designed to
allow both manual and automatic operation.
It should be equipped with at least a low voltage control
circuit, an automatic level control and adjustment circuit, a
circuit for detecting any operating anomalies.
The complete control panel can be supplied upon request.
* not applicable for electric pumps equipped of plug.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL
The automatic pump control is obtained by means of two
automatic level regulators which utilize a single -contact
switch (only on or off).
They are installed inside the sump fastened to the bracket
which is secured to the edge of the sump cover (see page
38).
An automatic alternating system must be provided for in
case more than one pump is installed in a single sump.
The intervention levels are adjusted by loosening the
clamps of the fastening bracket and by lifting or lowering
the supply cable. The pump activation regulator must be
positioned at a lower level than the liquid supply pipe.
The shut-off regulator must be positioned so as to prevent
the pump from sucking air.
An alarm system (flashing or siren) can be connected by
means of another regulator (positioned approx. 10 cm.
above the pump activation level).
❑ Warning The difference in level between the
pump activation and shutdown must
allow for a maximum of 15 starts per
hour.
To ensure proper operation the regulators must float freely,
be positioned away from the walls or any other
obstruction; they must not come into contact with the
bottom of the sump or be directly in the path of the liquid
supply stream.
The level regulators must also be periodically inspected to
eliminate any caking due to greasy substances or filaments
which may impede normal operations.
WATER INFILTRATION DETECTOR
For pump equipped with a built-in device that detects
water infiltration in the oil chamber.
The sensor reveals the presence of water in the oil when it
exceeds 30%. If the sensor is activated the oil should be
changed.
In the event that the sensor is activated again after a short
time since the oil was changed, we recommend the
replacement of the mechanical seal (see oil change page
11).
AUTOMATIC COUPLING WITH TWO
DESCENT GUIDING TUBES
The automatic coupling system allows for quick and
efficient inspection operations.
The coupling foot is fastened to the bottom of the sump
together with the delivery pipe; two guiding tubes connect
it to the anchoring bracket secured to the edge of the sump
cover.
The pump is lowered along the guiding tubes until it
reaches the exact coupling position; the seal will be tight
thanks to the weight of the pump.
This operation can be repeated any number of times and it
makes checking and inspection operations easier; the
pump is simply extracted from the sump by means of a
chain (even if the system is flooded), checked or repaired
and reassembled.
ASSEMBLY
1. Secure the upper bracket of the guiding tube to
the center of the inner wall below the sump cover,
on the side where the delivery pipe must be
installed (see page 37).
With the help of a plumb line make sure that the
guiding tubes is vertical.
2. Position the coupling foot at the bottom of the
sump in such a way that the tapered projection on
which the guiding tube will fit is plumb and in
line with the upper bracket.
Mark the fastening holes for the expansion bolts,
remove the foot and drill 4 holes, insert the bolts
and rest the foot on them.
Position the guiding tubes on the special tapered
projection on the foot and determine its final
length.
3. For wells that are more than 6 in deep,
intermediate brackets are necessary for the joining
of the guiding tubes.
4. Position the guiding tubes between the tapered
projection of the foot and that of the upper
bracket; again make sure that the tube is perfectly
vertical.
10

en « Translation of the original instructions »
5. Fasten the coupling foot using plain washers and
nuts; insert the upper bracket inside the guiding
tubes making sure that there is no verticals lack
and fasten it.
6. Connect the delivery pipe to the coupling foot
using a plain gasket and screws.
7. Insert the gasket inside the coupling
counterflange. Fasten the counterflange to the
pump delivery outlet with screws.
8. To lower the pump inside the sump secure the
chain to the special eye bolt cast on the head of
the unit (see page 38).
9. Fit the coupling counter flange in the upper
bracket and lower the pump inside the sump,
letting it slide along the guiding tubes.
When it reaches the bottom, the pump will
automatically connect with the coupling foot.
10. Secure the chain and electrical cables to the upper
bracket, fit the electrical cables inside the special
guards between the well and the control panel.
Warning Make sure that the cables are not bent
or pinched, to avoid undue wear or
damage.
CHECK AND MAINTENANCE
Danger WARNING! Never introduce your
fingers inside the suction inlet as
there is a risk of injuries due to
contact with the impeller. Keep in
mind that the pump may stop and
restart automatically following the
triggering of thermal protections or of
remote control devices; only the
interruption of the mains supply may
eliminate this risk.
INSPECTIONS
Periodical checks and preventive maintenance ensure safer
operation for a longer period of time. The pump must be
inspected after 2000 working hours or at least once a year
and, in case of operations under particularly stressful
conditions, the inspections must be more frequent. On
these occasions remember to check the oil.
Under normal working conditions the pump should be
overhauled by a qualified mechanic every three years.
OIL CHANGE
The oil chamber is filled at the factory; if there are traces
of water or light emulsion the oil has to be changed. The
pump must be extracted from the sump. The oil plug is on
the side of the oil chamber; we suggest performing this
operation at a shop.
Danger - WARNING! If there is infiltration
through the seal the oil chamber may
be under pressure. To avoid sprays
wrap a rag around the oil tank screw
when you loosen it.
- Loosen the oil chamber plug and let
all the oil out, then refill using the
prescribed quantity of lubricant (see
page 3); tighten the plug,
remembering that the copper washer
must always be replaced.
- If you notice that the oil is
emulsified or that there are evident
signs of water, check the lower
mechanical seal; replace it if
necessary or contact an authorized
dealer.
CLEANING
For clean impeller from filamentous materials, it can be
sufficient to start the pump for a few seconds, with
opposite direction of rotation.
If the pump is used only occasionally it should be cleaned
after each operation by flushing with clean water to
eliminate deposits and caking.
We recommend you periodically check the condition of
the automatic level switches, especially in fixed
installations. By activating the selector switch (manual
position) the tank or sump pit are emptied. If any dirt
deposits are found on the float switch they must be
removed.
After cleaning, the sump should be flushed with clean
water. A few start and stop cycles, with the selector switch
in automatic position, are recommended.
CHECKING
If the pump works but the delivery is inadequate check the
following:
• the direction of the pump rotation. See "Direction
of rotation";
• make sure the valves are open and intact;
• make sure the tubes, impeller and filter are not
obstructed;
• the impeller should rotate freely;
• make sure that the head required by the plant has
not changed;
• check for leaks in the pipes;
• make sure the impeller is not worn.
Warning Do not continuously try to start the
' mixer if the thermal protection
device triggers.
11

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
AVERTISSEMENTS CONCERNANT LA
SECURITE DES PERSONNES ET DES
CHOSES
Les s mboles , y 2h, ainsi que les mots
"Danger" et "Avertissement" indiquent un risque potentiel
du au non -respect des recommandations aux quelles ils
sont associes comme indiques ci-dessous.
ADanger Le non respect de ces
Risque recommandations entrain un risque
decharges
electriques de decharges electriques.
Danger Le non respect de ces
recommandations entrain un risque
pour la securite des personnes et/ou
des biens.
❑ Avertissement Le non respect de ces
recommandations entrain un risque
d'endommagement de la pompe on
de 1'installation.
MANUTENTION
'Avertissement Lors de la manutention de la
pompe hors de son emballage, utiliser
le crochet specifique place sur la tete
de la pompe.
QDanger Ne soulever en aucun cas la pompe
Risque par son cable electrique.
decharges
electriques
LIMITES D' UTILISATION
Avertissement Ne pas utiliser la pompe avec
des liquides dont la temperature de
passe (voir fiche technique de la
pompe).
La densite du liquide pompe ne doit
pas &re superieure a (voir fiche
technique de la pompe).
Le liquide a pomper peut contenir des
parties solides d'un diametre
maximum egal a celui permis par le
passage a travers la roue.
Niveau minimum du liquide: la
pompe peut travailler en service
continue a pleine charge, a condition
que le liquide pompe baigne au moins
a mi-hauteur le bloc moteur.
Version avec manteau de
refroidissement: la pompe pent
travailler en service continue a pleine
charge, a condition que la pompe soit
installee a sec ou que le liquide
pompe baigne au moins le diffuseur.
Profondeur d'immersion: maximum
20 m.
Les electropompes ne peuvent pas
etre utilisees pour des hauteurs HMT
inferieures au point le plus has de la
courbe caracteristique de la fiche
technique de la pompe. Pour des
hauteurs de HMT inferieures, le
moteur serait en surcharge.
Danger L'electropompe ne doit pas &re
utilisee dans des milieux avec risque
d'explosion, ni pour le pompage de
liquides inflammables.
NIVEAU SONORE
Non applicable, la pompe travaille immergee dans des
puits.
Version a sec: inferieur a 70 db (a).
APPLICATIONS
Cette serie d'electropompes submersibles a ete congue
pour: le pompage d'eaux usees industrielles et civiles, le
pompage de boues, le pompage de purins legers d'elevage
et d'urine.
Elles sont disponibles dans les versions suivantes:
• avec dispositif de descente: le groupe
electropompe se positionne automatiquement sur
le pied d'assemblage qui est equipe de deux tubes
de guidage pour faciliter la descente dans le
puisard;
• avec pied de soutien: raccord pour tube flexible,
poignee et pied d'appui.
INSTALLATION
NORMES DE SECURITE
Afin de prevenir le risque d'accidents lors de 1'entretien ou
de 1'installation de la pompe, it est conseille d'observer les
precautions suivantes:
Q Danger - Ne jamais travailler seul. Utiliser
une ceinture et une corde de securite,
ainsi qu'un masque a gaz, si
necessaire. Prendre en compte le
danger de noyade.
- S'assurer que la quantite d'oxygene
est suffisante et qu'il n'y a pas de gaz
toxiques.
- Controler qu'il n'y a pas de risque
d'explosion avant de souder ou
d'utiliser un outil electrique.
- Tenir compte des dangers pour la
sante et observer les normes
d'hygiene.
- Faire attention aux risques de
coulant des pannes electriques.
- S'assurer que 1'equipement pour le
levage est en bon etat.
- Proceder a un isolement approprie
(barrage) de la zone de travail.
- S'assurer une possibilite de retour
rapide a fair exterieur.
- Utiliser un casque, des lunettes et
des chaussures de securite.
- Toutes les personnes travaillant
dans des stations de pompage d'eaux
usees doivent etre vaccines contre
12

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
les eventuelles maladies
transmissibles.
- Ne jamais introduire les doigts dans
1'orifice d'aspiration: danger de
blessure lors du contact avec la roue.
A ce propos, nous precisons que la
pompe peut s'arreter et se remettre en
marche automatiquement apres
1'intervention de protections
thermiques ou de telecommandes; par
consequent, seul l'interruption de
1'alimentation elimine ce risque.
La pompe est prevue pour etre utilisee avec des liquides
qui peuvent etre dangereux pour la sante.
Pour prevenir d'eventuelles lesions aux yeux et sur la peau,
observer les recommandations suivantes lors d'une
intervention sur la pompe:
• toujours utiliser des lunettes de securite et des
gants en caoutchouc;
• bien rincer la pompe avec un nettoyeur a eau
chaude, avant de commencer l'intervention;
• rincer les differentes parties a 1'eau propre, apres
les avoir demontees;
• mettre un chiffon autour de la vis de la chambre
d'huile pour la devisser, afin d'eviter que
d'eventuelles eclaboussures n'atteignent les yeux
ou la peau, dans le cas ou des infiltrations du
liquide pomp& ont entrain& une surpression dans
la pompe.
Agir de la fagon suivante, si des produits chimiques nocifs
entrent en contact a:
avec les yeux: rincer immediatement sous le
robinet pendant 15 minutes, en maintenant les
paupieres bien ouvertes. Prendre contact avec un
oculiste;
avec la peau: en lever les habits contamines, laver
la peau avec de 1'eau et du savon; si necessaire,
consulter un medecin.
SUIVRE TOUTES LES AUTRES REGLES D'HYGIENE
ET DE SECURITE AINSI QUE LES NORMES ET LES
REGLEMENTS LOCAUX.
APPAREILLAGE DE LEVAGE
Pour soulever la pompe, un appareillage approprie est
necessaire. Il doit pouvoir soulever la pompe et la
descendre dans le puisard, si possible sans necessite de
reprendre le mouvement.
La distance minimum entre le crochet de levage et la dalle
/ le sol doit etre 0,8 in pour pouvoir retirer la pompe du
puisard.
Un appareillage de levage trop puissant pourrait
endommager la pompe, dans le cas ou celle-ci
s'encastrerait lors du levage. S'assurer que 1'ancrage de
1'appareillage de levage est sur.
Danger ATTENTION! Rester a distance des
charges suspendues.
BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
L'ensemble de 1'installation electrique doit etre realise par
des personnes qualifiees. Suivre les normes et les
reglements locaux.
QDanger Lors du remplacement du cable, pour
Risque de des raisons de securite, le conducteur
d6charges
8lectriquerique s de terre Oaune-vert) doit etre environ
50 mm plus long que les conducteurs
de phase.
En cas d'arrachement accidentel du
cable, la borne de terre doit etre la
derriere a se detacher.
L'appareillage de commande et de
contr6le ne peut en aucun cas etre
install& dans le puisard.
Se rappeler que le courant absorbe pour le demarrage
direct, a son maximum, peut atteindre jusqu'a six fois la
valeur de 1'absorption nominale. S'assurer donc que les
fusibles ou les interrupteurs automatiques sont regles
correctement.
Avertissement - Les 6ventuels raccords du
cable d'alimentation doivent etre
absolument 6tanches.
- Verifier que la tension et la
frequence du secteur correspondent
aux donnees de la plaque de
1'electropompe.
- La tension d'alimentation doit
correspondre a celle indiquee sur la
plaque du constructeur, avec une
tolerance de 10%.
- Toujours contr6ler le courant
absorbe par 1'e1ectropompe.
- Contr6ler que la valeur de reglage
du relais thermique de protection
n'est pas superieure a la valeur que
nous indiquons a la page 3.
MOTEUR ELECTRIQUE
Moteur asynchrone a cage d'ecureuil, classe d'isolation
H(180°C). A sec, refroidi par le liquide environnant. Degr&
de protection IP68.
Le moteur est conqu pour un fonctionnement continu ou
intermittent, avec un maximum de 15 demarrages par
heure, a intervalley reguliers.
Le moteur est congu pour un fonctionnement avec un &cart
de tension entre les phases de 5 % maximum (selon les
normes CEI EN 60034-1).
SANS DE ROTATION
Le contr6le du lens de rotation doit etre effectue
scrupuleusement au moment de la mice en marche des
electropompes.
❑ Avertissement Un sens de rotation inverse
provoque une diminution
considerable du debit et peut
endommager la pompe.
Le sens de rotation est correct si, lors du demarrage, on
observe un contrecoup dans le sens inverse des aiguilles
d'une montre, quand on regarde la pompe du c6te serre-
cable.
Thriphasee: si le sens de rotation nest pas le bon, permuter
2 des 3 fils de phase sur la boite a bornes du tableau
electrique.
13

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
QDanger NE SOULEVER EN AUCUN CAS
Risque de LA POMPE PAR SON CABLE
d8 triqus
elecuiques ELECTRIQUE.
Prendre particulierement soin du cable d'alimentation et le
remplacer immediatement s'il est endommage.
Avertissement ATTENTION! L'extremite du
cable ne doit pas etre immergee. Les
bornes doivent &re fixees de maniere
sure au-dessus du niveau maximum
du liquide, afin d'eviter que 1'eau ne
puisse penetrer dans le moteur par le
cable.
TABLEAU ELECTRIQUE*
Danger Ne jamais brancher directement la
t Risque de pompe par Fintermediaire d'une
eie tri aues fiche. Brancher le cable electrique
A un coffret de commande avec
protection thermique.
Les pompes submersibles de cette serie doivent etre reliees
a un tableau electrique de commande. Cc tableau doit
pouvoir permettre aussi bien le fonctionnement manuel
que celui automatique.
L'equipement minimum doit prevoir un circuit de
commande a basse tension, un circuit pour le contr6le et le
reglage automatique du niveau, un circuit de releve des
anomalies de fonctionnement.
Le tableau de commande complet peut etre fourni sur
demande.
* non applicable pour les pompes electriques equipees de
la fiche.
COMMANDE AUTOMATIQUE
La commande automatique de 1'e1ectropompe se fait par
1'intermediaire de deux regulateurs automatiques de niveau
qui utilisent un interrupteur a un seul contact (seulement
marche ou seulement arret).
Its sont installes a l'interieur du puisard, suspendus a la
bride speciale qui est fixee sur le bord de la trappe d'acces
(voir p. 38).
Dans le cas de l'installation de plusieurs pompes dans un
seul puisard, prevoir 1'alternance automatique de leur
fonctionnement.
Le reglage des niveaux d'intervention s'effectue en
desserrant les blocs de la bride de fixation, et en levant ou
en abaissant le fil d'alimentation. Le regulateur de marche
doit etre positionne a une hauteur inferieure a celle de la
canalisation d'arrivee du liquide.
Le regulateur d'arret doit &re place de fagon a eviter
1'aspiration d'air de la part de la pompe.
Par l'intermediaire d'un autre regulateur (positionne
environ 10 cm au-dessus du niveau de marche), it est
possible de brancher une installation d'alarme (clignotante
ou sonore).
Ffl
Avertissement La difference de niveau entre la
marche et 1'arret doit permettre un
maximum de 15 demarrages par
heure.
Pour garantir un fonctionnement correct, it est necessaire
de contr6ler que les regulateurs puissent flotter librement,
loin des parois et des obstacles eventuels, qu'ils ne
viennent pas en contact avec le fond du puisard, et qu'ils ne
soient pas directement entrains par le flux du liquide qui
entre.
Les regulateurs de niveau doivent en plus etre inspectes
regulierement pour eliminer les eventuels dep6ts de
substances grasses ou de corps filamenteux qui peuvent
empecher leur bon fonctionnement.
REVELATEUR DES INFILTRATIONS
WEAU
Pour pompe equipee d'un revelateur d'infiltration d'eau
dans la chambre a huile.
La revelation devient active des lors que le pourcentage
d'eau dans la chambre a huile atteint environs 30%. Si la
revelation est activee, la substitution de 1'huile est
recommandee.
Si, apres cette operation, la revelation s'active encore, la
garniture mecanique doit We substituee (voir changement
de Thuile, a la page 15).
ASSEMBLAGE AUTOMATIQUE AVEC
DESCENTE GUIDEE PAR DEUX TUBES
DE GUIDAGE
Le systeme d'assemblage automatique permet des
operations d'inspection rapides et rationnelles.
Le pied d'assemblage est fixe sur le fond du puisard, avec
la canalisation de refoulement. Deux tubes de guidage le
relient a la bride d'ancrage fixee sur le bord de la trappe.
La pompe est descendue le long des tubes de guidage
jusqu'a atteindre la position precise pour 1'assemblage.
L'etancheite sera parfaite grace au seul poids de la pompe.
Cette operation peut etre repetee de nombreuses fois et
facilite particulierement les travaux de contr6le et
d'inspection; la pompe est simplement retiree du puisard a
1'aide d'une chain (meme dans le cas d'une installation
immergee), contr6lee on reparee, puis remontee.
MONTAGE
Fixer la bride superieure des tubes de guidage an
centre de la paroi interieure de la trappe d'acces,
sur le c6te oii la canalisation de refoulement doit
etre installee (voir p. 37).
Contr6ler a 1'aide d'un fil a plomb que les tubes de
guidage sont verticaux.
2. Placer le pied d'assemblage sur le fond du puisard
de fagon que 1'ergot conique sur lequel s'engage
les tubes de guidage soit parfaitement au-dessous
de la bride superieure.
Marquer les trous de fixation pour les boulons a
expansion, enlever le pied et percer les 4 trous.
Inserer les boulons et mettre le pied en place.
Positionner les tubes de guidage sur 1'ergot
conique special du pied et determiner sa longueur
definitive.
Pour des puisards profonds deplus de 6 in, des
brides intermediaires sont necessaires pour le
raccord des tubes de guidage.
4. Placer les tubes de guidage entre 1'ergot conique
du pied et celui de la bride superieure, en verifiant
A nouveau qu'ils sont parfaitement verticaux.
14

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
5. Fixer definitivement le pied d'assemblage avec les
rondelles plates et les ecrous. Inserer la bride
superieure dans les tubes de guidage, de fagon
qu'il n'y ait pas de jeu dans le plan vertical, et la
fixer.
6. Brancher la canalisation de refoulement sur le
pied d'assemblage en utilisant le joint plat et les
vis.
7. Inserez le joint entre la glissiere et la pompe.
Fixez la glissiere de descente an refoulement de la
pompe par les vis en dotation
8. Pour descendre la pompe dans le puisard, fixer la
chain sur 1'anneau de levage de la pompe (voir p.
38).
9. Enfiler la contre bride d'assemblage dans la bride
superieure et descendre la pompe dans le puisard
en la faisant coulisser le long des tubes de
guidage.
Une fois le fond du puisard atteint, la pompe se
positionne automatiquement sur le pied
d'assemblage.
10. Suspendre la chain et les cables electriques a la
bride superieure. Placer les cables electriques
dans les protections speciales entre le puisard et le
tableau de commande.
Avertissement S'assurer que les cables ne sont
pas plies ou ecrases, d'une fagon qui
les userait ou entrainerait leur rupture
ou usure.
CONTROLES ET MANUTENTION
Q Danger ATTENTION! Ne jamais introduire
les doigts dans 1'orifice d'aspiration:
• danger de blessure lors du contact
avec la roue. A ce propos, nous
precisons que la pompe peut s'arreter
et se remettre en marche
automatiquement avec l'intervention
de protections thermiques ou de
telecommandes; par consequent, seul
l'interruption de 1'alimentation
elimine ce risque.
INSPECTIONS
Des contr6les et un entretien preventif reguliers
garantissent un fonctionnement plus sur et durable. La
pompe doit etre inspectee apres 2.000 heures de
fonctionnement ou an moins une fois par an, et, en cas de
fonctionnement dans des conditions particulierement
difficiles, les inspections doivent etre plus frequentes et it
faut egalement, dans ce cas, contr6ler Thuile. Dans des
conditions de fonctionnement normales, demander a un
atelier specialise d'effectuer la revision de la pompe tous
les 3 ans.
CHANGEMENT DE L'HUILE
Le remplissage de la chambre d'huile se fait en usine. S'il y
a des traces d'eau on une legere emulsion, it est necessaire
de changer Thuile. Retirer la pompe du puisard; le bouchon
d'huile se trouve sur le c6te de la chambre d'huile. Nous
conseillons de demander a un atelier specialise d'effectuer
cette operation.
Danger - ATTENTION! En cas d'infiltration
par le joint, la chambre d'huile peut se
trouver en surpression. Afin de
prevenir les eclaboussures, mettre un
chiffon autour de la vis du reservoir
d'huile lors de son devissage.
- Devisser le bouchon de fermeture
de la chambre d'huile et laisser
s'ecouler Thuile completement. La
remplir ensuite de la quantite
prescrite de lubrifiant (voir p. 3).
Refermer soigneusement, en
remplagant a chaque fois la rondelle
de cuivre.
- S'il y a des traces evidentes d'eau ou
si Thuile est fortement emulsionnee,
contr6ler le joint mecanique inferieur.
Si necessaire, la changer, ou bien
s'adresser a un atelier autorise. Pour
nettoyer la roue des substances
filamenteuses it suffit de demarer la
pompe pendant quelques secondes
dans le sens inverse de rotation.
NETTOYAGE
Pour nettoyer la roue des corps filamenteux, it peut etre
suffisant de faire demarrer la pompe pendant quelques
secondes dans le sens de rotation contraire.
Si la pompe est utilisee avec une frequence irreguliere, it
est conseille de la nettoyer apres chaque fonctionnement
en pompant de 1eau propre, afin d'eviter les dep6ts et les
incrustations.
Nous conseillons de contr6ler regulierement le
fonctionnement des interrupteurs automatiques de niveau,
particulierement pour les installations fixes. En actionnant
le commutateur de selection (position manuel), le reservoir
ou le puisard est vide. Si des dep6ts de salete se sont
formes sur l'interrupteur a flotteur, it est necessaire de les
eliminer.
Apres le nettoyage, it est conseille de laver le puisard en le
remplissant d'eau claire, ainsi que d'effectuer quelques
cycles de marche et d'arret avec le commutateur en
position automatique.
CONTROLES
Si la pompe fonctionne, mais que le debit est faible ou nul,
contr6ler:
• le sens de rotation de la pompe (voir "sens de
rotation");
• que les vannes sont ouvertes ou intactes;
• que les tuyaux, la roue et la grille eventuelle ne
sont pas bouches;
• que la roue tourne facilement;
• que la hauteur de refoulement requise par
l'installation n'a pas change;
• que les canalisations ne fuient pas;
• que la roue nest pas usee.
IT
Avertissement Ne pas forcer la pompe a
demarrer plusieurs fois si la
protection thermique intervient.
15

de « Ubersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUR
PERSONEN UND AUSRUSTUNG
Diese Svmbole I I ' I aeben. zusammen mit
den entsprechenden Schriftzugen "Gefahr" und "Vorsicht"
die Wahrscheinlichkeit eines Risikos an, das auf die
Nichtbeachtung der entsprechenden Vorschriften
zuruckgeht. Die Schriftzuge sind in den Vorschriften wie
folgt zu verstehen:
tGefahr! Macht darauf aufinerksam, da13 die
Gefahncche Nichtbeachtung der Vorschriften das
spannung Risiko elektrischer Schlage nach sich
ziehen kann.
IA Gefahr! Macht darauf aufinerksam, daf3 die
Nichtbeachtung der Vorschriften das
Risiko eines Schadens an Personen
bzw. Anlage nach Personen bzw.
Sachen nach sich ziehen kann.
'Vorsicht! Macht darauf aufinerksam, da13 die
Nichtbeachtung der Vorschriften das
Risiko eines Schadens an der Pumpe
bzw. Anlage nach sich ziehen kann.
TRANSPORT DER PUMPE
'Vorsicht! Beim Transportieren der
unverpackten Pumpe ist der eigens
auf dem Pumpenkopf vorgesehene
Haken zu ver wenden.
tGefahr! Es ist strengstens verboten, die
Gefahrliche Pumpe am Stromkabel anzuheben.
sp--g
EINSCHRANKUNGEN DES
ANWENDUNGSBEREICHS
'Vorsicht! - Die Temperatur der geforderten
Flussigkeiten darf nicht mehr als (siehe
Pumpenkennlinie Datenblatt).
- Die Dichte der geforderten Fliissigkeit
darf nicht mehr als (siehe
Pumpenkennlinie Datenblatt).
- Der Feststoffanteil in der geforderten
Flussigkeit mu13 dem maximalen
Laufrad-Durchgang entsprechen.
- Mindest-Fliissigkeitsstand: die Pumpe
kann bei Vollmast in Dauerbetrieb
arbeiten, sofern die Flussigkeit
mindestens bis zur Halfte des
Statorgehauses reicht.
Version mit Kuhlmantel: Die Pumpe
kann voll belastet, bei
Trockeninstallation oder
Flussigkeitsniveau bis zum Abdecken
des Verteilers in kontinuierlichem
Betrieb arbeiten.
- Max. tauchtiefe: 20 m.
- Die Motorpumpen eignen sich nicht fiir
F6rderh6hen, die unter dem tiefsten
Punkt der im Pumpenkennlinie
Datenblatt Kennlinie liegen. Bei
geringeren F6rderh6hen wurde der
Motor iiberlastet.
Gefahr! Die Motorpumpe darf weder in
explosionsgefahrdeten Raumen noch zur
F6rderung von feuergefahrlichen
Flussigkeiten verwendet werden.
GERAUSCHSTARKE
Nicht anwendbar, weil die Pumpe in die Brunnen getaucht
arbeitet.
Trockenversion: unter 70 dB(A).
ANWENDUNGEN
Diese Baureihe von Tauchmotorpumpen wurde fair die
Forderung von industriellen und zivilen Schmutzwassern,
Schlamm, leicht verschmutzten Abwassern aus
Ziichtungen und Urin entwickelt. Folgende Ausfuhrungen
sind verfugbar:
• mit Absenkvorrichtung: die
Motorpumpeneinheit wird automatisch mit deco
Kupplungsful3 verbunden, der mit zwei
Fii =gsrohren zum Absenken in den Gully
ausgestattet ist;
• mit Stiitzfufl: Anschlul3 fair Schlauch, Haltegriff
und Stutzfuf3.
GESAMTANSICHT DER ERSATZTEILE
AUFSTELLUNG
SICHERHEITS VORSCHRIFTEN
Um Unfallen wahrend der Wartung bzw. der Aufstellung
der Pumpe vorzubeugen, sind die nachfolgenden
Vorschriften zu beachten:
Q Gefahr! - Arbeiten Sie nie allein! Verwenden Sie
Sicherheitsgiirtel und-seile und, falls
erforderlich, eine Gasmaske.
Unterschatzen Sie nicht die
Ertrinkungsgefahr!
- Versichern Sie Bich, da13 ausreichend
Sauerstoff vorhanden ist und keine
Giftgase anfallen!
- Achten Sie auf eine eventuelle
Explosionsgefahr, bevor Sie
SchweiBarbeiten vornehmen oder ein
Elektrogerat verwenden!
- Achten Sie auf Gesundheitsrisiken und
befolgen Sie alle Hygienevorschriften!
- Achten Sie auf die durch Stromschaden
bedingten Risiken!
- Versichern Sie Bich, da13 alle
Hebevorrichtungen in einwandfreiem
Zustand sind!
- Grenzen Sie den Arbeitsbereich
entsprechend ab!
- Stellen Sie sicher, notfalls wieder rasch
an die Oberflache zuruckkehren zu
k6nnen!
- Verwenden Sie einen Helm,
Sicherheitsbrillen und Schutzschuhe!
16

de « Obersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
- Alle Personen, die in F6rderstationen
von Schmutzwasser arbeiten, mussen
gegen die eventuell auftretenden
Krankheiten geimpft sein!
- Das Einfuhren der Finger in die
Saug6ffnung ist aufgrund der
Verletzungsgefahr durch Beruhren des
Laufrades strengstens untersagt!
Diesbezuglich wird darauf hingewiesen,
daB die Pumpe durch den Eingriff der
Thermoschutzvorrichtungen oder
Fembedienungen automatisch angehalten
and wieder angelassen werden kann;
daher wird die oben erwahnte Gefahr nur
durch Unterbrechung der Stromspeisung
endgultig beseitigt.
Die Pumpe ist unter anderem fiir die F6rderung von
Flussigkeiten entwickelt worden, die fiir die menschliche
Gesundheit schadlich sein k6nnen. Um eventuelle Augen-
bzw. Hautschaden vorzubeugen, beachten Sie bei
Eingriffen an der Pumpe folgende Sicherheitsvorschriften:
• verwenden Sie immer Unfallschutzbrillen and
Gummihandschuhe!
• reinigen Sie die Pumpe sorgfaltig mit warmen
Wasser einer Reinigungsmaschine, bevor Sie mit
dem Eingriff beginnen!
• saubem Sie die verschiedenen Bestandteile nach
dem Ausbau mit ausreichend reinem Wasser!
• verwenden Sie zum Ausdrehen der Schraube der
Olkammer einen Lappen! Dadurch wird
verhindert, daB eventuelle Spritzer in Ihre Augen
oder auf Ihre Haut gelangen, falls sich im
Pumpeninneren aufgrund von
Fliissigkeitsinfiltrationen Druck angestaut hat.
Gehen Sie folgendermaf3en vor, wenn Sie mit schadlichen,
chemischen Produkte in Berahrung geraten:
• Augenkontakt: Spiilen Sie die Augen
unverzuglich and etwa 15 Minuten landaus and
Ufnen Sie dabei die Augenlider. Wenden Sie sich
an einen Augenarzt;
• Hautkontakt: Legen Sie die verschmutzten
Kleider ab, waschen Sie die Haut mit Wasser and
Seife and suchen Sie gegebenenfalls einen
Arztauf.
BEACHTEN SIE AUCH ALLE ANDEREN HYGIENE-
UND SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN UND DIE FOR
DAS JEWEILIGE GEBIET GELTENDEN
VORSCHRIFTEN UND REGELUNGEN!
HEBEVORRICHTUNGEN
Zum Anheben der Pumpe ist ein entsprechendes Werkzeug
erforderlich. Durch dieses muB die Pumpe, wenn m6glich
in einem einzigen Arbeitsgang, angehoben and in den
Brunnen abgesenkt werden k6nnen. Der Mindestabstand
zwischen dem Hebehaken and dem GullydeckelBoden
mu13 0,8 m betragen, um die Pumpe aus dem Brunnen
ziehen zu k6nnen. Durch ein zu groBes Hebewerkzeug
k6nnte die Pumpe beschadigt werden, wenn sie Bich
wahrend des Anhebens verklemmen sollte. Versichern Sie
sich auch, daB die Verankerung des Hebewerkzeugs
einwandfrei ausgefiihrt wurde.
Gefahr! ACHTUNG! Halten Sie sich von
Schwebelasten fern!
STROMANSCHLUSS
Die gesamte elektrische Anlage muB von Fachpersonal
bereitgestellt werden. Dabei sind die lokalen Vorschriften
and Normen zu beachten.
AGefahr! Bei Austausch des Kabels ist der (gelb-
Gefdhrliche grdne) Erdungsleiter aus
Spannung Sicherheitsgrunden etwa 50 mm Langer
zu lassen als die Phasenleiter.
Bei unabsichtlichem Abtrennen des
Kabels wird der Erdungsdraht, dank
dieser VorsichtsmaBnahme, als letzter
abgetrennt. Die Steuer- and
Kontrollanlage darf auf keinen Fall im
Auffanggully installiert werden.
Beachten Sic, da13 die beim direkten AnlaBsto13
aufgenommene Strommenge bis zu 6mal so gro13 wie die
Nennstromaufnahme sein kann. Versichem Sie Bich daher,
daB die Schmelzsicherungen oder automatischen Schalter
richtig geeicht wurden.
Vorsicht! Eventuelle Speisekabelverbindungen
mussen absolut wasserdicht sein.
Versichem Sie sich, daB die
Netzspannung and Frequenz mit den
Kenndaten der Pumpe iibereinstimmen.
Die Speisespannung muB der auf dem
Stromschild angegebenen Spannung
entsprechen, mit Abweichungstoleranzen
von 10%.
Kontrollieren Sie stets die
Stromaufnahme der Motorpumpe.
Versichern Sie sich, daB die Eichung des
Thermoschutzrelais den angezeigten
Wert nicht iibersteigen (siehe Seite 3).
ELEKTROMOTOR
Motor Asynchronmotor als Kafiglaufer, Isolationsklasse
H(180'C). Trockenlaufer and Kuhlung durch die
umgebende Fliissigkeit. Schutzart IP 68.
Der Motor eignet sich fiir Dauer- oder Intermittenzbetrieb,
mit einer maximalen stundlichen Anlaufhaufigkeit von 15
bei gleichmdBiger Verteilung.
Der Motor ist far einen Betrieb mit einer maximalen
Spannungsschwankung zwischen den Phasen von 5 %
(gemal3 CEI EN 60034-1) geeicht.
DREHRICHTUNG
Bei der Inbetriebnahme der Motorpumpe ist die
Drehrichtung sorgfaltig zu kontrollieren.
Vorsicht! Durch eine falsche Drehrichtung wird fl.die F6rderleistung erheblich
beeintrachtigt and es k6nnen Schaden
an der Pumpe selbst auftreten.
Die Drehrichtung ist korrekt, wenn beim Anlassen ein
Riickstol3 im Gegenuhrzeigersinn, bei Pumpenansicht von
der Seite des Kabelniederhalters, festgestellt werden kann.
Bei falscher Drehrichtung mussen zwei beliebige der drei
Phasendrahte auf dem Klemmenbrett der Schalttafel
umgesteckt werden.
tGefahr! ES IST STRENGSTENS
Gefdhrliche VERBOTEN, DIE PUMPE MIT
Spannung
17

de « Ubersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
DEM STROMKABEL
ANZUHEBEN.
Behandeln Sie das Speisekabel mit besonderer Sorgfalt
und ersetzen Sie es unverzuglich, wenn Sie Schaden
feststellen.
Vorsicht! ACHTUNG! Das Kabelende darf
' nicht getaucht werden. Die Enden
miissen sicher oberhalb des
maximalen Fliissigkeitsstandes
festgemacht werden, um ein
Eindringen des Wassers iiber das
Kabel in den Motor auszuschlieBen.
SCHALTTAFEL*
Gefahr! Der direkte AnschluB der Pumpe
t Gefahrliche mittels Stecker ist verboten;
sp--g schliel3en Sie das Stromkabel an
einen Schaltschrank mit
Uberlastschutz an.
Die Tauchmotorpumpen dieser Baureihe miissen mit einer
Schalttafel ausgestattet werden. Diese Schalttafel ist
vorzusehen, um sowohl den Hand-als auch den
Automatikbetrieb zu gewahrleisten.
Die Mindestausstattung muB einen Niederspannungs-
Schaltkreis, einen Kreislauf zur Kontrolle der
automatischen Niveauregelung und einen Stromkreis zur
Erhebung der Betriebsst6rungen vorsehen.
Eine komplette Schalttafel kann auf Anfrage geliefert
werden.
* nicht anwendbar fur die elektrischen Pumpen ausgeriistet
vom Stecker.
AUTOMATISCHE STEUERUNG
Die automatische Steuerung der Pumpe wird durch zwei
automatische Niveauregler erzielt, die einen Ein-Kontakt-
Schalter (nur Betrieb oder nur Anhalten) betatigen.
Diese werden im Inneren des Gullies an einem
entsprechenden Biigel eingebaut, der am Rand der
Zugangsklappe verankert wird (siehe Seite 38).
Bei Installation von mehreren Pumpen in einem einzigen
Brunnen, ist der automatische Wechselbetrieb vorzusehen.
Die Einstellung der Niveauregler erfolgt durch Lockern
der EndmaBe der Befestigungsbiigels und Anheben bzw.
Absenken des Speisekabels. Der Betriebsregler muB auf
einem Wert eingestellt werden, der unter dem Niveau der
Zugangsleitung der Fliissigkeit liegt.
Der Stoppregler ist so anzubringen, da13 ein Ansaugen von
Luft durch die Pumpe verhindert wird.
Durch einen anderen Regler (der etwa 10 cm oberhalb des
Betriebsniveaus installiert wird) kann eine Alarmanlage
(Blinklicht oder Sirene) angeschlossen werden.
Vorsicht! Der Abstand zwischen Betriebs-und
' Stoppniveau muB eine H6chstzahl von
15 Anlaufen pro Stunde gewahrleisten.
Um einen korrekten Betrieb zu versichern, muB
kontrolliert werden, da13 die Regler unbehindert
schwimmen k6nnen und Bich von den Wanden und von
eventuellen Hindernissen entfernt befinden; da13 sie weiters
den Brunnengrund nicht beriihren und da13 sie nicht direkt
vom eingehenden Fliissigkeitsstrom iiberschwemmt
werden.
Die Niveauregler sind in periodischen Abstanden zu
kontrollieren und eventuelle Ablagerungen zu entfernen,
die auf Fettstoffe oder faserige Feststoffe zuriickzufiihren
sind und den regularen Betrieb der Pumpe beeintrachtigen
k6nnten.
WASSERINFILTRATIONSERHEBER
Fur Die Pumpe mit einem eingebauten
Wasserinfiltrationserheber in der Olkammer ausgestattet.
Der Sensor erhebt die Gegenwart von Wasser im Ol,
sobald der Wert 30% iibersteigt. Wird dieser Sensor
ausgel6st, empfiehlt es sich, einen Olwechsel
vorzunehmen.
Sollte der Sensor kurz nach dem Olwechsel erneut
ausgel6st werden, empfiehlt es sich, die mechanische
Dichtung zu ersetzen (siehe Olwechsel S. 19).
AUTOMATISCHE KUPPLUNG MIT
DURCH EIN ODER ZWEI
FUHRUNGSROHRE GESTEUERTER
ABSENKUNG
Dank dem automatischen Kupplungssystem kann die
Pumpe rasch und wirksam kontrolliert werden.
Der Kupplungsful3 wird, gemeinsam mit der Druckleitung,
auf dem Grund des Gullies befestigt. Zwein Fiihrungsrohre
verbinden den StiitzfuB mit dem am Rand der Klappe
befestigten Verankerungsbiigel.
Die Pumpe wird langs des bzw. der Fiihrungsrohre
abgesenkt, bis die genaue Kupplungsposition erreicht ist;
die Dichtigkeit wird durch das Eigengewicht der Pumpe
selbst versichert.
Dieser Vorgang kann beliebig oft wiederholt werden und
erleichtert insbesondere alle Wartungs-und
Kontrolleingriffe. Die Pumpe wird ganz einfach mittels
einer Kette aus dem Gully geholt (auch bei Oberflutung
der Anlage), kontrolliert oder gewartet und wieder
eingebaut.
MONTAGE
Fixieren Sie den oberen Biigel des
Fiihrungsrohres in der Mitte der Innenwand der
Zugangsklappe, auf der Seite, auf welcher die
Druckleitung eingebaut werden muf3 (siehe Seite
37).
Versichern Sie Bich mittels eines Bleifadens, daf3
das Fiihrungsrohr perfekt senkrechtist.
2. Kupplungsfuf3 auf dem Grand des Gullies so
anbringen, daB der kegelf6rmige Vorsprung, auf
welchem den Fiihrungsrohreinrahstet, exakt
senkrecht unter dem oberen Biigel zu stehen
kommt.
Befestigungsl6cher der Ausdehnungs
Fundamentschrauben markieren, FuB entfernen
und 4 Locher bereitstellen, Fundamentschrauben
einfiihren und den FuB auf dieselben setzen.
Fiihrungsrohre auf den entsprechenden,
kegelformigen Vorsprung des Fuf3essatzen und
die endgiiltige Lange festlegen.
Fiir mehr als 6 m tiefe Brunnen mussen
Zwischenbiigel fiir die Verbindung der
Fiihrungsrohre angebracht werden.
4. Fiihrungsrohre zwischen dem kegelformigen
Vorsprung des FuBes und jenem des oberen
Biigels einfuhren und neuerdings die perfekte
Vertikalitat kontrollieren.
18

de « Obersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
5. Kupplungsfuf3 endgiiltig mit den
Unterlegscheiben and den Schrauben am
Kupplungsfuf3 befestigen.
6. Druckleitung mit einer flachen Dichtung and den
Schrauben am Kupplungsfuf3 befestigen.
7. Stecken Sic die Dichtung in den
Kopplungsgegenflansch. Verschrauben Sic den
Gegenflansch am Zufuhrmund der Pumpe.
8. Zum Absenken der Pumpe in den Gully ist die
Kette mit der entsprechenden, auf dem
Pumpenkopf aufgepreSten Ose zu verankern
(siehe Seite 38).
9. Kupplungsgegenflansch am oberen Biigel
befestigen and die Pumpe durch Absenken Tangs
den Fiihrungsrohre in den Gully ablassen.
Bei Erreichen des Brunnengrundes wird die
Pumpe automatisch mit dem Kupplungsfuf3
verbunden.
10. Hangen Sic die Kette and die Stromkabel an den
oberen Biigel and fdhren Sic die Stromkabel in
die entsprechenden Schutzhiilsen zwischen
Brunnen and Schalttafel ein.
'Vorsicht! Versichem Sic Bich, da13 die Kabel nicht
geknickt oder gedriickt werden, um
Bruch and Verschleif3 vorzubeugen.
KONTROLLEN UND WARTUNG
A! Gefahr! ACHTUNG! Ein Einfiihren der Finger in
die Saugbffnung ist aufgrund der
Beruhrungsgefahr mit dem Laufrad
strengstens verboten! Diesbezuglich wird
darauf hingewiesen, da13 die Pumpe
aufgrund des Eingriffs der
Thermoschutzvorrichtungen oder
Fernbedienungen automatisch angehalten
and wieder angelassen werden kann.
Daher kann die oben genannte Gefahr
nur durch die Unterbrechung der
Stromversorgung endgiiltig beseitigt
werden.
WARTUNGSEINGRIFFE
Vorbeugende, periodische Kontrollen and Wartungen
versichern einen auf Dauer einwandfreien Pumpenbetrieb.
Die Pumpe ist nach jeweils 2000 Betriebsstunden oder
mindestens einmal jahrlich zu kontrollieren. Bei besonders
schwerwiegenden Einsatzbedingungen ist eine haufigere
Kontrolle erforderlich, bei der auch der Zustand des Oles
iiberpr0ft werden muf3.
Unter normalen Einsatzbedingungen ist die Pumpe alle 3
Jahr in einer Werkstatte warten zu lassen.
OLWECHSEL
Das Ari illen der Olkammer erfolgt werkseitig. Wenn
Wasserspuren oder eine leichte Emulsion festgestellt
werden k6nnen, muf3 ein Olwechsel vorgenommen
werden. Hierzu wird die Pumpe aus dem Gully geholt. Der
Olstopfen befindet sich seitlich auf der Olkammer. Wie
empfehlen, diesen Wartungseingriff von einer Werkstatte
ausfiihren zu lassen.
Gefahr! - ACHTUNG! Bei Wassereinfiltrationen
A durch die Gleitringdichtung kann sich
Druckinder Olkammeranstauen. Um
Olaustritte zu vermeiden, ist die
Schraube des Olbehalters beim
Ausdrehen mit einem Lappen zu
umwickeln.
- VerschluBstopfen der Olkammer
aufdrehen and Ol vollkommen entleeren,
sodann die vorgeschriebene
Schmierolmenge (siehe Seite 3) wieder
einfiillen.
Stopfen sorgfaltig wieder schlieBen and
immer die Kupfer-Unterlegscheibe
ersetzen.
- Wenn auffallige Wasserspuren
festzustellen sind oder das Ol stark
emulgiert ist, muf3 die untere
Gleitringdichtung kontrolliert werden;
falls erforderlich, ist these zu ersetzen.
Wenden Sic Bich hierzu an eine
ermachtigte Werkstatte.
REINIGUNG
Wenn die Pumpe nur manchmal verwendet wird, sollte sie
nach jedem Betrieb mittels F6rderung von sauberem
Wasser gereinigt werden, um eventuelle Riickstande and
Verkrustungen zu vermeiden. Der Betrieb der
automatischen Niveauregler ist vor allem bei fixen
Installationen in periodischen Abstanden zu kontrollieren.
Durch Betatigen des Wahlumschalters (Handbetrieb)
werden die Auffangwanne oder der Gully entleert. Wenn
auf dem Schwimmerschalter Schmutzruckstande
festzustellen sind, miissen these entfernt werden. Nach der
Reinigung sollte der Gully durch Einlassen von
Frischwasser gesaubert werden; weiters ist die Pumpe, mit
Wahlschalter auf Automatik, einige Male anzulassen and
anzuhalten.
KONTROLLEN
Wenn die pumpe funktioniert, die F6rdermenge aber
gering oder gleich null ist, ist folgendes zu kontrollieren:
• die Drehrichtung der Pumpe-siehe
"Drehrichtung";
• daf3 die Ventile offen and unversehrt sind;
• daf3 die Rohre, das Laufrad and das eventuelle
Einlaufsieb nicht verstopft sind;
• daf3 das Laufrad unbehindert dreht;
• daf3 die von der Anlage geforderte F6rdermenge
nicht geandert wurde;
• daf3 keine Leckagen in den Leitungen sind;
• daf3 das Laufrad nicht verschlissen ist.
Vorsicht! Vermeiden sie ein mehrfaches
anlassen der pumpe, wenn der
Uberlastschutz eingreift.
19

es « Traducci6n del manual original »
ADVERTENCIAS PARA LA SEGURIDAD
DE LAS PERSONAS Y DE LAS COSAS
Esta simbologia I ' junto con las relativas
leyendas: "Peligro" y "Advertencia" indican la
potencialidad del riesgo derivado por la inobservancia de
la prescripci6n a la cual han sido asociados, como se
especifica aqui abajo:
AL Peligro Advierte que la inobservancia de la
7 Riesgo de prescripcion comporta un riesgo de
descargas
eleetricas descargas electricas.
A! Peligro Advierte que la inobservancia de la
prescripcion comporta un riesgo de
dano a las personas y/o cosas.
Advertencia Advierte que la inobservancia de la
prescripcion comporta un riesgo de
dano a la bomba o a la instalaci6n.
MOVILIZACION
'Advertencia Para la movilizaci6n de la bomba no
embalada usar el gancho ubicado en
la parte superior de la bomba.
APeligro Esta terminantemente prohibido alzar
Riesgo de la bomba por medio del cable
descargas el6ctrico.
elechicas
LIMITACIONES DE EMPLEO
❑Advertencia - No trabajar con liquidos a
' temperaturas superiores a (ver hoja
de datos de la bomba).
- La densidad del liquido bombeado
no debe ser superior a (ver hoja de
datos de la bomba).
- El liquido a bombear puede
contener partes s6lidas hasta un
diametro permitido por el pasaje a
traves del rotor.
- Nivel minimo de liquido: la bomba
puede trabajar en servicio continuo a
plena carga, siempre que el nivel del
liquido este por to menos en la mitad
del alojamiento estator.
Version con camisa de refrigeraci6n:
la bomba puede trabajar en servicio
continuo a plena carga, con
instalaci6n en seco o bien, con el
nivel del liquido hasta cubrir el
dif isor.
- Profundidad de inmersi6n: maximo
20 m.
- Las electrobombas no pueden ser
empleadas para alturas totales
nominales inferiores al punto mas
bajo de la curva caracteristica de la
bomba. Para alturas totales nominales
inferiores el motor estaria
sobrecargado.
Peligro La electrobomba no debe ser
utilizada en ambientes con peligro de
explosion ni para el bombeo de
liquidos inflamables.
I k"I 111
No aplicable porque la bomba trabaja sumergida en los
pozos.
Version a seco: inferior a 70 dB (A).
APLICACIONES
Esta serie de electrobombas sumergibles ha sido disenada
para: bombeo de aguas residuales industriales y
residenciales, bombeo de lodos, bombeo de liquido putrido
de criaderos y orina. Estan disponibles en las siguientes
versiones:
• con dispositivo de descenso: el grupo
electrobomba se conecta automaticamente al pie
de acoplamiento que esta dotado de dos tubos de
guia para facilitar el descenso en el sumidero;
• con pie de sosten: enganche para tubo flexible,
manija y pie de apoyo.
INSTALACION
NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD
Para prevenir el riesgo de accidentes durante el
mantenimiento o la instalaci6n de la bomba, se deben
seguir las siguientes normas:
Q Peligro - No trabajar jamas solos. Usar
cinturones o cuerdas de seguridad y si
es necesario, una mascara antigas.
Tenga presente el peligro de
ahogamiento.
- Asegurarse que haya suficiente
oxigeno y la inexistencia de gases
venenosos.
- Controlar el riesgo de explosiones,
antes de soldar o usar un equipo
electrico.
- No ignore el peligro para salud y
observe las normas higienicas.
- Asegurese que el equipo para la
elevaci6n este en buenas condiciones.
- Coloque barreras de protecci6n
alrededor del area de trabajo.
- Asegurese de poner salir
rapidamente hacia una zona al aire
libre.
- Use un casco, gafas de seguridad y
zapatos de protecci6n.
- Todas las personas que trabajan en
estaciones de bombeo de aguas
20

es o Traducci6n del manual original »
negras deben haber sido vacunadas
contra posibles enfermedades que
pueden ser transmitidas.
- No introducir jamas los dedos en la
apertura de aspiraci6n porque existe
riesgo de daft por contacto con el
rotor. A tal fin se advierte que la
bomba puede detenerse y volver a
arrancar automaticamente por la
intervenci6n de las protecciones
t6rmicas o mandos a distancia, por to
cual solo el interruptor de la
alimentaci6n elimina dicho riesgo.
La bomba ha sido prevista para el empleo en liquidos que
pueden ser daninos para la salud. Para prevenir eventuales
danos en los ojos y en la piel, observe las siguientes
normas, en caso de intervenci6n en la bomba:
• use siempre gafas de protecci6n y guantes de
goma;
• enjuague bien la bomba con una hidropulidora en
caliente, antes de iniciar la operaci6n;
• enjuague los distintos componentes con agua
limpia, despu6s de haberlos desmontados;
• tenga un trapo alrededor del tornillo de la camara
de aceite, cuando deba desenroscarlo, para evitar
que eventuales chorros del mismo lleguen a los
ojos o a la piel por la presi6n formada en la
bomba a causa de infiltraciones de liquido
bombeado.
Actue del modo siguiente, si entrara en contacto con
productos quimicos nocivos:
con vuestros ojos: enjuaguelos inmediatamente
con agua corriente por 15 minutos, teniendo bien
abiertos los parpados. P6ngase en contacto con un
oculista;
con vuestra piel: quitese las prendas
contaminadas, lavese la piel con agua y jab6n, si
es necesario hagase controlar por un m6dico.
SIGA TODAS LAS OTRAS REGLAS DE HIGIENE Y
SEGURIDAD Y LAS NORMAS Y REGLAMENTOS
LOCALES.
EQUIPO DE ELEVACION
Para alzar la bomba, es necesario un equipo especifico,
Este debe poder alzar la bomba y bajarla en el pozo,
posiblemente de una Bola vez.
La distancia minima entre el gancho de elevaci6n y el
cerramiento/pavimento debera ser de 0.8 m, para tener la
posibilidad de extraer la bomba del pozo.
Un equipo de elevaci6n sobredimensionado podria causar
danos a la bomba, en el caso que se encastrara durante las
operaciones de elevaci6n. Aseg6rese que el anclaje del
equipo de elevaci6n sea seguro.
0 Peligro iATENCION! Mantenerse alejado de
las cargas suspendidas.
CONEXIONE ELECTRICAS
Toda la instalaci6n el&ctrica debe ser ejecutada por
personal especializado. Siga las normas y las
prescripciones locales.
A` Peligro En el caso de sustituci6n del cable,
T Riesgo de por razones de seguridad, el
descargas electrical conductor de tierra (amarillo-verde)
debera ser de unos 50 mm mas largo
de los conductores de fase.
En caso de desconexi6n accidental
del cable, la terminal de tierra debera
ser la filtima a desconectarse.
El aparato de mando y control no
puede en ningun caso ser instalado en
el sumidero de recolecci6n.
Recuerde que la corriente absorbida de arranque para el
arranque directo puede ser hasta 6 veces la absorci6n
nominal. Asegurese que los fusibles o los interruptores
automaticos est&n calibrados correctamente.
'Advertencia - Eventuales juntas del cable de
alimentaci6n deben estar totalmente
herm6ticas.
- Verifique que la tensi6n y la
frecuencia de la red correspondan a
los datos de la placa de la
electrobomba.
- La tensi6n de alimentaci6n debe
corresponder con la indicada en la
placa, con una tolerancia del 10%.
- Controle que el calibrado del re16
t6rmico de protecci6n no sea superior
al valor indicado por nosotros a pag.
3.
MOTOR ELECTRICO
Motor asincr6nico a jaula de ardilla, aislamiento
H(180°C). En seco, enfriado por el liquido. Grado de
protecci6n IP68.
El motor ha sido disenado para un trabajo continuo o
intermitente, con un maximo de 15 arranques pro hora
distanciados regularmente.
El motor ha sido disenado para un funcionamiento con
maximo desequilibrio de tensi6n entre las fases del 5 %
(segun las normas CEI EN 60034-1).
SENTIDO DE ROTACION
El control del sentido de rotaci6n debe ser efectuado
escrupulosamente al momento de la puesta en
funcionamiento de la electrobomba.
Advertencia Un sentido de rotaci6n equivocado
provoca una disminuci6n notable
del caudal y puede causar danos a
la bomba.
El sentido de rotaci6n es adecuado si a la puesta en marcha
se nota un contragolpe en sentido antihorario mirando la
bomba desde el lado del prensacables.
21

es « Traducci6n del manual original »
Versi6n trifasico: en caso de sentido de rotaci6n err6neo se
deben intercambiar entre si 2 de los 3 cables de fase del
tablero de bornes del cuadro electrico.
QPeligro ESTA TERMINANTEMENTE
Riesgo de PROHIBIDO ALZAR LA BOMBA
desoargas elecUicas POR MEDIO DEL CABLE
ELECTRICO.
Tenga especial cuidado del cable de alimentaci6n y si esta
daflado, sustitnyalo inmediatamente.
❑Advertencia iATENCION! El extremo del cable
' no debe estar sumergido. Los
terminales deben estar fijados sobre
el nivel maximo del liquido para que
el agua pueda penetrar a trav6s del
cable del motor.
CUADRO ELECTRICO*
APeligro Se prohibe la conexi6n directa de la
Riesgo de bomba por medio del enchufe,
descargas
el6dricas conectar el cable el6ctrico a un
armario de mando con protecci6n
t6rmica.
Las bombas sumergibles de esta serie deben estar dotadas
de un cuadro el6ctrico de mando. Dicho cuadro debe
permitir tanto el f incionamiento manual como automatico.
La dotaci6n minima debe prever un circuito de mando de
baja tension, circuito para el control y la regulaci6n
automatica del nivel, circuito de detecci6n de anomalias de
funcionamiento.
El cuadro de mando completo puede suministrarse bajo
pedido.
* no aplicable para las electrobombas dotadas de enchufe
de conexi6n el6ctrica.
MANDO AUTOMATICO
El mando automatico de la electrobomba se obtiene
mediante dos reguladores automaticos de nivel que utilizan
un interruptor de monocontacto (s6lo marcha y parada).
Estos se instalan en el interior del sumidero colgados de la
respectiva brida, que se ancla en el borde de la trampilla de
acceso (ver pag. 38).
En el caso que se instalen varias bombas en un unico
sumidero se debe prever la alternancia automatica del
funcionamiento.
La regulaci6n de los niveles de intervenci6n se ejecuta
aflojando los bloqueos de la brida de fijaci6n y alzando o
bajando el cable de alimentaci6n. El regulador de marcha
debe estar posicionado a una cota inferior a la de la tuberia
de llegada del liquido.
El regulador de parada debe colocarse para evitar la
aspiraci6n de aire por pane de la bomba.
Con otro regulador es posible conectar una instalaci6n de
alarma (intermitente o sirena).
Advertencia La diferencia de nivel entre la marcha
y la parada debe permitir un maximo
de 15 arranques por hora.
Para garantizar un funcionamiento correcto es necesario
controlar que los reguladores puedan flotar libremente,
lejos de las paredes y de posibles asideros; que est6 en
contacto con el fondo del sumidero y que no sean
arrollados directamente por la corriente del liquido
entrante.
Los reguladores de nivel deben inspeccionarse
peri6dicamente para eliminar eventuales sedimentaciones
provocadas por sustancias grasosas o filamentos que
impidan su funcionamiento normal.
DETECTOR DE INFILTRACION DE
AGUA
Por bomba equipada con un detector incorporado de
infiltraci6n del agua en la camara de aceite.
El sensor detecta la presencia de agua en el aceite cuando
el porcentaje supera el valor del 30%. En el caso que se
activara el sensor, se aconseja cambiar el aceite.
Si el sensor se activara nuevamente despu6s de poco
tiempo del cambio de aceite, se recomienda sustituir el
sello mecanico (ver cambio aceite pag. 23).
ACOPLAMIENTO AUTOMATICO CON
DESCENSO GUTADO POR DOS TUBOS DE
GUTA
El sistema de acoplamiento automatico permite trabajos de
inspecci6n rapidos y racionales.
El pie de acoplamiento se fija en el fondo del sumidero
junto con la tuberia de impulsi6n; dos tubos de guia to
conectan al estribo de anclaje fijado en el borde de la
trampilla.
La bomba se baja a to largo de los tubos de guia hasta
alcanzar la posici6n exacta para el acoplamiento; la
fijaci6n sera perfecta gracias al peso de la bomba.
Esta operaci6n puede repetirse varias veces y facilita los
trabajos de control e inspecci6n: la bomba se extrae del
sumidero simplemente con una cadena (tambi6n en el caso
de instalaci6n inundada) controlada o reparada y
reensamblada.
MONTME
Fije el estribo superior de los tubos de guia en el
centro de la pared interior de la trampilla de
acceso, en el lado donde debe instalarse la tuberia
de impulsi6n (ver pag. 37).
Controle con un hilo de plomo, que los tubos guia
est&n en posici6n vertical.
2. Posicione el pie de acoplamiento en el fondo del
sumidero de modo que la parte c6nica saliente
sobre la cual se colocara el tubo de guia est6 a
pico en correspondencia con el estribo superior.
Marcar los orificios de fijaci6n para los pernos
pasantes a expansi6n, quitar el pie y realizar 4
orificios. Introducir los pernos pasantes y colocar
el pie sobre los mismos.
Posicione los tubos de guia en el saliente c6nico
del pie y determinar la longitud definitiva.
3. Para los sumideros que tengan una profundidad
mayor a 6 m. se deben usar estribos intermedios
para la juntura de los tubos guia.
4. Introduzca los tubos guia entre la parte c6nica
saliente del pie y la del estribo superior,
controlando que est6n perfectamente verticales.
5. Fije definitivamente el pie de acoplamiento con
arandelas planas y tuercas, introduzca el estribo
22

es « Traducci6n del manual original »
superior en los tubos de guia, de modo que no
haya ningun juego vertical y fijarla.
6. Conecte la tuberia de impulsi6n con
empaquetadura plana y tomillos al pie de
acoplamiento.
7. Introducir la empaquetadura en la contrabrida de
acoplamiento. Fije la contrabrida en la boca de
impulsi6n de la bomba mediante tornillos.
8. Para bajar la bomba en el sumidero se debe fijar
la cadena al respectivo ojal o cancamo en la
cabeza de la bomba (ver pag. 38).
9. Introduzca la contrabrida de acoplamiento en el
estribo superior y baje la bomba en el sumidero
haci6ndola desplazar a to largo de los tubos de
guia.
Llegando al fondo del sumidero, la bomba se LIMPIEZA
conecta automaticamente al pie de acoplamiento.
10. Cuelgue la cadena y los cables electricos al
estribo superior, coloque los cables el6ctricos
dentro de las protecciones entre el sumidero y el
cuadro de mandos.
Advertencia Aseg6rese que los cables no est6n
doblados o prensados de modo tal
que puedan romperse o desgastarse.
CONTROLES Y MANTENIMIENTO
!A
A Peligro iATENCION! No introduzca jamas
los dedos en la apertura de aspiraci6n
porque existe el riesgo de dafio por
contacto con e1 rotor; a tal fin se
advierte que la bomba puede
detenerse y rearrancar
automaticamente para la intervenci6n
de protecciones t6rmicas o mandos a
distancia, por to cual solo la
interrupci6n de la red el6ctrica de
alimentaci6n elimina el antedicho
riesgo.
INSPECCIONES
Controles peri6dicos y mantenimiento preventivo
garantizan un funcionamiento mas seguro en el tiempo.
La bomba debe inspeccionarse despu6s de 2000 horas de
funcionamiento o por to menos una vez at afio y, en caso
de funcionamiento en condiciones particularmente
gravosas, es necesario ejecutar la inspecci6n mas
frecuentemente, en esta ocasi6n es necesario controlar el
estado del aceite.
En condiciones de funcionamiento normal, es necesario
revisar la bomba en el taller cada 3 ahos.
CAMBIO ACEITE
El llenado de la camara de aceite se realiza en fabrica; en
el caso que hubiera rastros de agua o leve emulsi6n se
debe cambiar el aceite. Se debe extraer la bomba del
sumidero, el tap6n del aceite se encuentra lateralmente en
la camara de aceite, aconsejamos efectuar la operaci6n en
un taller.
Peligro - ATENCION! En caso de
infiltraciones de la empaquetadura, la
camara de aceite puede estar en
presi6n. Para prevenir salpicaduras,
coloque un trapo alrededor del
tornillo del tanque del aceite, cuando
to desenrosque.
- Desenrosque el tap6n de cierre de la
camara de aceite y haga salir
completamente el aceite, luego Ilene
con la cantidad prescrita de lubricante
(ver pag. 3), vuelva a cerrarlo
cuidadosamente sustituyendo siempre
la arandela de cobre.
- Si nota rastros de agua o si el aceite
se ha emulsionado fuertemente,
controle el sello mecanico inferior y
si es necesario, sustituyalo o dirijase
a un taller autorizado.
Para limpiar el rotor de cuerpos filamentosos puede ser
suficiente arrancar la bomba por algunos segundos en
sentido de rotaci6n inverso.
Si la bomba se emplea para un use esporadico, se la debe
limpiar despu6s de cada servicio mediante el bombeo de
agua limpia para evitar dep6sitos e incrustaciones.
Se aconseja controlar peri6dicamente el funcionamiento de
los interruptores automaticos de nivel, especialmente en
las instalaciones fijas. Accionando el conmutador de
selecci6n (posici6n manual) se vacian la tina de
recolecci6n o el sumidero. Si se encuentran dep6sitos de
suciedades en el interruptor del flotador, es necesario
eliminarlos.
Despu6s de la limpieza, se debe lavar el sumidero
introduciendo agua limpia; ademas se deberian observar
algunos ciclos de marcha y paro con el conmutador en
posici6n automatica.
CONTROLES
Si la bomba funciona pero el caudal es escaso o nulo,
controle:
• el sentido de rotaci6n de la bomba. Ver "sentido
de rotaci6n";
• que las valvulas est6n abiertas y en buenas
condiciones;
• que los tubos, el rotor y la rejilla no est6n
obstruidos;
• que el rotor gire facilmente;
• que la altura total nominal requerida por la
instalaci6n no haya cambiado;
• que no haya p6rdidas en las tuberias;
• que no est6 desgastado el rotor.
❑ Advertencia no fuerce la bomba para que
arranque si han intervenido las
protecciones.
23

pt « Tradugao do manual original »
ADVERTENCIAS PARA A SEGURANCA
DAS PESSOAS E BENS
Estes simbolos 2& 1 ' I juntamente corn as
respectivas indicagoes: "Perigo' e "Advertencia" indicam
a possibilidade de riscos derivados da nao observancia da
prescrigao a qual estao ligados, conforme abaixo descrito.
Perigo Avisa que a falta de observancia da
Risco de prescrigao comporta um risco de
descargas
electricas descarga el6ctrica.
A Perigo Avisa que a falta de observancia da
prescrigao comporta um risco de
danos para as pessoas a/ou para as
coisas.
Advertencia Avisa que a falta de observancia da
' prescrigao comporta um risco de
danos para a bomba ou para o
equipamento.
DESLOCACAO
'Advertencia Para a deslocagao da bomba nao
embalada, utilize o gancho
especificamente colocado na
extremidadeda bomba.
A` Perigo E absolutamente proibido levantar a
Risco de bomba com o cabo el6ctrico.
descargas
electricas
LIMITM�OES DE UTILIZA(AO
Advertencia - Nao trabalhe com liquidos a
temperaturas superiores a (folha de
I !]
dados da bomba).
- A densidade do liquido bombeado
nao deve ser superior a (folha de
dados da bomba).
- O liquido a bombear pode conter
partes s6lidas com diametro inferior
on igual ao permitido para a
passagem atraves do rotor.
- Nivel minimo do liquido: a bomba
pode trabalhar em servigo continuo
em plena carga, desde que o nivel de
liquido chegue pelo menos a metade
do vao do estator.
Versao com manta de arrefecimento:
A bomba pode trabalhar em servigo
continuo com carga total, com
instalagao a seco, ou entao com o
nivel de liquido ate cobrir o difusor.
- Profundidade de imersao: maximo
20m.
- As electrobombas nao podem ser
utilizadas para alturas Inferiores ao
ponto mais baixo da curva
caracteristica da bomba. Para alturas
inferiores, o motor ficaria
sobrecarregado.
Perigo A electrobomba nao deve ser
utilizada em ambientes com risco de
explosao, nem para o bombeamento
de liquidos inflamaveis.
RUIDO
Nao se aplica porque a bomba trabalha imersa nos pogos.
Versao a seco : Inferior a 70 dB(A).
APLICACOES
Esta serie de electrobombas submersiveis foi concebida
para: Bombeamento de aguas residuais industriais e
dom6sticas, bombeamento de lamas, bombeamento de
aguas de esgotos ligeiros de produgao animal a urina.
Estao diponiveis nas seguintes versoes:
• com dispositivo de descida: O grupo
electrobomba liga-se automaticamente ao pe de
acoplamento, que esta equipado com dois tubos
de guia para facilitar a descida na fossa;
• com pe de suporte: engate para tubo flexivel,
manipulo e pe de suporte.
INSTALA4�AO
NORMAS DE SEGURANCA
Para prevenir o risco de acidentes durante a manutengao ou
instalagao da bomba, 6 oportuno respeitar as seguintes
normas:
Perigo - Nunca trabalhar s6zinho. Use cinto
e corda de seguranga, bem como uma
mascara antigas se necessario. Nao
ignore o risco de afogamento.
- Assegure-se que haja oxigenio
suficiente e que nao haja presenga de
gases t6xicos.
- Controle o risco de explosoes, antes
de soldar on utilizar um utensilio
el6ctrico.
- Nao ignore o perigo para a saude
humana a observe as normas
higienicas.
- Tenha cuidado com os riscos
derivados das avarias electricas.
- Assegure-se que o equipamento
para a elevagao esteja em boas
condigoes.
- Providencie uma barreira adequada
em volta da area onde trabalha.
- Assegure-se que tem a possibilidade
de regressar depressa em espago
aberto.
- Use capacete, 6culos e calgado de
protecgao.
- Todas as pessoas que trabalham em
estagoes de bombeamento de esgotos
Devem ser vacinadas contra as
24

pt « Tradugao do manual original »
possiveis doengas que podem ser
transmitidas.
- Nunca introduza o dedo na abertura
do rotor porque existe risco de danos
em contatto com o rotor. Para tal
advertimos que a bomba pode parar e
recomegar automaticamente devido a
intervengao de protecg6es termicas
ou de telecomnados, pelo que s6 o
interruptor da alimentagao elimina o
referido risco.
A bomba foi concebida para uma utilizagao em liquidos
que podem ser perigosos para a saiide. Para prevenir
eventuais danos nos olhos e na pele, observe as seguintes
no=as, em caso de intervengao na bomba:
• use sempres 6culos contra acidentes e luvas de
borracha;
• enxagiie bem a bomba com jacto de agua sob
pressao a quente, antes de proceder a intervengao;
• enxagfie os diferentes componentes com agua
limpa, depois de os desmontar;
• segure num pano em volta do parafuso da camara
de 6leo quando o deve desaparafasar Isto para
evitar que eventuais projecg6es cheguem aos
olhos ou a pele, se se tiver formado pressao na
bomba por causa de infiltrag6es de liquido
bmbeado.
Agir da forma seguinte caso produtos quimicos entrem em
contatco:
• com os seus olhos: enxagiie imediatamente com
agua corrente durante 15 minutos, mantendo bem
abertas as palpebras. Contacte um oftamologista;
• com a sua pele: retire a roupa contaminada, lave a
pele com agua a sabao, se necessario contacte um
medico.
SIGA TODAS AS OUTRAS REGRAS DE HIGIENE E
SEGURANCA E AS NORMAS E REGULAMENTOS
LOCAIS
EQUIPAMENTO DE ELEVAQAO
Para levantar a bomba, e necessario equipamento
adequado, que deve poder levantar a bomba e instala-la na
fossa, se possivel sem a necessidade de voltar a desloca-la.
A distancia minima entre o gancho de elevagao e a
tampa/pavimento devera ser de 0,8m, para ter a
possibilidade de retirar a bomba do pogo.
Um equipamento de elevagao sobredimensionado poderia
causar danos na bomba, se esta ficasse encalhada durante
as operag6es de elevagao.
Certifique-se que a ancoragem do equipamento de
elevagao seja segura.
0 Perigo ATENQAO! Mantenha-se longe das
cargassuspensas.
LIGACOES ELECTRICAS
Toda a instalagao electrica deve ser executada por pessoal
especializado. Siga as normas a prescrig6es locais.
tPerigo Em caso de substituigao do cabo, por
Risco de raz6es de seguranga, o condutor de
descargas terra (amarelo-verde) devre ser cerca
elk icas
de 50mm mais comprido que os
condutores de fase.
Em caso de arranque acidental do
cabo, o terminal de terra devera ser o
ultimo a soltar-se.
Os instrumentos de comando e
controle na podem de forma alguma
ser instalados na fossa de recolha.
Lembre-se que a corrente absorvida no arranque inical
para o accionamento directo pode ser ate 6 vezes superior
A absorgao nominal. Assegure-se portanto que os fusiveis
ou os interruptores automaticos tenham a calibragao
correcta.
❑Advertencia - Eventuais unities no cabo de
' alimentagao devem ser absolutamente
estanques.
- Verifique que a tensao e a
frequencia da rede correspondam aos
dados da placa da elctrobomba.
- A tensao de alimentegao deve
corresponder a indicada na placa,
com tolerancia de 10%.
- Verifique sempre a corrente
absorvida pela electrobomba.
- Verifique que a calibragao do rele
termico de protec9ao nao seja
superior ao valor por n6s indicado a
pag. 3.
MOTOR ELECTRICO
Motor assincrono a gaiola de esquilo, classe de isolamento
H(180°C). A seco, arrefecido do liquido circunstante. Grau
de protec9ao IP68.
O motor foi concebido para um trabalho continuo ou
intermitentem com um maximo de 15 arranques por hora,
a intervalos regulares.
O motor foi projectado para um funcionamento com um
desequilibrio maximo de tensao entre as fases de 5%
(segundo as normas CEIEN60034-1).
SENTIDO DE ROTM�AO
O controle do sentido de rotagao deve ser efectuado
escrupolosamente na acto de entrada em funcionamento da
electrobomba.
Advertencia Um sentido de rotagio incorrecto
• provoca uma notivel diminuiVio de
caudal a pode causar danos a
bomba.
O sentido de rotagao esta correcto quando, no arranque, se
nota um contragolpe no sentido contrario ao dos ponteiros
de um rel6gio olhando para a bomba do lado de pressao do
cabo.
25

pt « Tradugao do manual original »
Versao trifasica: em caso de sentido de rotagao errado, 6
necessario trocar entre eles 2 dos 3 fios de fase no terminal
do quadro el6ctrico.
Perigo E ABSOLUTAMENTE PROIBIDO
QN-
Risco de LEVANTAR A BOMBA PELO
descargas electricas CABO ELECTRICO
Tenha em particular atengao o cabo de alimentagao e
proceda a sua substituigao imediata se estiver danificado.
❑Advertencia ATEN(�AO! A extremidade do cabo
' nao deve ser submersa. Os terminais
devem ser firmemenre fixados acima
do nivel maximo do liquido, para
evitar que a agua possa penetrar
atrav6s do cabo no motor.
QUADRO ELECTRICO*
QPerigo E proibida a liga�io directa da
Risco de bomba atrav6s de ficha, ligue o
descargas
electricas cabo eelectrico a um armirio de
comando com protecgio termica.
As bombas submersiveis desta s6rie devem ser dotadas de
um quadro el6ctrico de comando. Esse quadro deve ser
previsto de modo a permitir tanto o funcionamento manual
como automatico.
A dotagao minima deve prever um circuito de comando de
baixa tensao, circuito para a verificagao e a reguladoo
automatica do nivel, circuito detec9ao de anomalias de
funcionamento.
O quadro de comandos completo pode ser fornecido sob
pedido.
* nao se aplica para electrobombas equipadas com ficha de
ligagao el6ctrica.
COMANDO AUTOMATICO
O comando automatico da electrobomba obtem-se com
dois reguladores automaticos de nivel que utilizam um
interruptor de monocontacto ( s6 marcha a paragem).
Estes sao instalados dentro da fossa, pendurados no
respectivo gancho, que 6 colocado no rebordo do algapao
de acesso (ver pag. 38).
No caso de instalagao de varias bombas numa iinica fossa,
6 necessario prever a alternancia automatica do
funcionamento.
A reguladao dos niveis de intervengao 6 feita alargando os
blocos do gancho de fixagao e levantando ou rebaixando o
cabo de alimentagao. O regulador de marcha deve ser
posicionado numa quota inferior a da tubagem de chegada
do liquido.
O regulador de paragem deve ser colocado de modo a
evitar a aspiragao por parte da bomba.
Atrav6s de um outro regulador, 6 possivel ligar um
equipamento de alarme ( luz intermitente ou sirene).
❑Advertencia A diferenga de nivel entre a marcha e
' a paragem deve permitir um maximo
de 15 arranques por hora.
Para garantir o correcto funcionamento 6 necessario
verificar que os reguladores possam flutuar livremente,
longe das paredes e de possiveis agarras, que estejam em
contacto com o fundo da fossa e que nao sejam
directamente investidos pela corrente do liquido de
entrada.
Os reguladores de nivel devem ser inspeccionados
peri6dicamente para eliminar eventuais sedimentos
devidos a substancias gordas on corpos filamentosos que
podem impedir o normal funcionamento.
DETECTOR DE INFILTRA4�AO DE AGUA
Para bomba equipada com detector incorporado de
infiltragao de agua na camara de 6leo.
O sensor detecta a presenga de agua no 6leo quando a
percentagem supera os 30%. Se por acaso o sensor 6
activado, recomenda-se que seja trocado o 6leo.
Se o sensor devesse activar-se de novo pouco tempo
depois da mudanga de 6leo, recomendamos que substitua a
vedagao mecanica (ver mudanga de 6leo pag. 27).
ACOPLAMENTO AUTOMATICO COM
DESCIDA GUTADA POR DOIS TUBOS
GUTA
O sistema de acoplamento automatico permite efectuar
inspecg6es rapidas e racionais.
O p& de acoplamento 6 fixado no fundo da fossa
juntamente com a tubagem de descarga; dois tubos de guia
ligam-no ao gancho de ancoragem fixado no rebordo do
algapao.
A bomba 6 conduzida ao longo dos tubos de guia ate
atingir a posigao exacta para o acoplamento; a vedagao
sera perfeita gragas ao pr6prio peso da bomba.
Esta operagao pode ser repetida inumeras vezes e facilita
particularmente os trabalhos de verificagao a inspec9ao: a
bomba 6 simplesmente retirada da fossa com uma corrente
(mesmo em caso de equipamento conectado), verifcada on
reparada a montada de novo.
MONTAGEM
Fixe o gancho superior dos tubos de guia no
centro da parede interna do algapao de acesso, do
lado onde deve ser instalada a tubagem de
descarga (ver pag. 37).
Verifique por meio de um fio de chumbo,que os
tubos de guia estejam na posigao vertical.
2. Coloque o p6 de acoplamento no fundo da fossa
de modo a que a saliencia c6nica sobre a qual se
colocara o tubo de guia fique memso em
correspondencia com o gancho superior.
Marque os furos de fixagao para as cavilhas de
expansao, retire o p6 e faga os 4 furos, insira as
cavilhas e ponha o p6 nas mesmas.
Posicione os tubos de guia sobre a respectiva
saliencia c6nica do p6 e determine o comprimento
definitivo.
3. Para fossas com mail de 6m de profundidade sao
necessarios ganchos interm6dios para a undo dos
tubos guia.
26

pt « Tradugao do manual original »
4. Insira os tubos guia entre a saliencia c6nica do pe
e a do gancho superior, verificando novamente a
sua perfeita verticalidade.
5. Fixe definitivamente o pe de acoplamento com
anilhas planas a porcas, insira o gancho superior
nos tubos de guia, de modo a que nao haja
qualquer folga vertical e fixe-o.
6. Ligue a tubagem de descarga com anilha plana e
parafusos no pe de acoplamento.
7. Insira a guamigao na contraflange de
acoplamento. Fixe a contraflange na boca de
descarga da bomba com parafusos.
8. Para largar a bomba na fossa a necessario fixar a
corrente ao respectivo perno de olhal na
extremidade da bomba (ver pag. 38).
9. Enfie a contra flange de acoplamento no gancho
superior a instale a bomba na fossa fazendo-a
correr ao longo dos tubos de guia.
Ao atingir o fundo da fossa, a bomba liga-se
automaticamente ao pe de acoplamento.
10. Pendure a corrente a os cabos electricos no
gancho superior, fixe os cabos electricos com as
respectivas protecgoes entre a fossa e o quadro de
comando.
Advertencia Certifique-se que os cabos nao
• estejam dobrados ou comprimidos de
forma a estarem sujeitos a quebras e
desgaste.
VERIFICA(AO E MANUTEM�AO
Perigo ATENCAO! Nunca introduza o dedo
na abertura de aspiragao Porque
existe risco de danos em contacto
com o rotor, assim avisamos que a
bomba pode parar e recomegar
automaticamente com a intervengao
de protecgoes termicas ou de
telecomandos, pelo que s6 a
interrupgao da rede electrica de
alimentagao elimina o referido risco.
INSPMC OES
As verificagoes peri6dicas a as manutengoes preventivas
garantem um funcionamento mais seguro no tempo.
A bomba deve ser inspeccionada ap6s 2000 horas de
funcionamento on pelo menos uma vez por ano e, em caso
de funcionamento em condigoes particularmente severas, e
necessario efectuar a inspecgao com maior frequencia„ e
nessa altura a necessario verificar o estado do oleo.
Em condigoes normais de funcionamento, a necessario
fazer a revisao da bomba numa oficina de 3 em 3 anos.
MUDANCA DE OLEO
O enchimento da camara de 6leo e feito em fabrica; se
houver vestigios de agua ou uma ligeira emulsao, e
necessario mudar o 6leo. E preciso retirar a bomba do
pogo; a tampa do oleo encontra-se na lateral da camara de
oleo; aconselhamos que mande efectuar a operagao junto
de uma oficina.
A! Perigo - ATENQAO! Em caso de
infiltragoes na vedagao, a camara de
oleo pode estar sob pressao. Para
evitar projecgoes, segure num pano a
volta do parafuso do dep6sito de
6leo,quando o desaparafusar.
- Desaparafuse o tampao de fecho da
camara de 6leo e esvazie
completamente o oleo, encha entao
com a quantidade recomendada de
lubrificante (ver pag. 3), feche
cuidadosamente, substituindo sempre
a anilha de cobre.
- Se notar vestigios evidentes de agua
ou se o 6leo estiver muito
emulsionado, verifique a vedagao
mecanica inferior a se necessario
substitua-a, ou entao dirija-se a uma
oficina autorizada.
LIMPEZA
Para limpar o rotor de corpos filamentosos pode ser
suficiente activar a bomba durante alguns segundos no
sentido de rotagao inverso.
Se a bomba e utilizada ocasionalmente, seria oportuno
limpa-la ap6s cada servigo mediante bombeamento de
agua limpa, para evitar dep6sitos e incrustagoes.
Aconselhamos a verificar peri6dicamente o funcionamento
dos interruptores automaticos de nivel, em especial nas
instalagoes fixas. Ao accionar o comutador de selecgao
(posigao manual), a cuba de recolha ou a fossa sao
esvaziados. Se encontra dep6sitos de sujidade no
interruptor flutuante, a necessario retira-los.
Ap6s a limpeza seria oportuno limpar a fossa introduzindo
agua limpa; dever-se-ia igualmente efectuar alguns ciclos
de marcha a paragem com o comutador na posigao
automatica.
VERIFICA(�OES
Caso a bomba funcione mas o caudal seja fraco ou
inexistente verifique:
• o sentido de rotagao da bomba. Ver: "Sentido de
rotagad ;
• que as valvulas estejam abertas a intactas;
• que os tubos, o rotor e a eventual grelha nao
estejam entupidos;
• que o rotor rode facilmente;
• que a altura solicitada para a instalagao nao tenha
mudado;
• que nao haja perdas nas tubagens;
• que o rotor nao esteja desgastado.
Advertencia NAO FORCE A BOMBA A
LIGAR VARIAS VEZES SE A
PROTECAO TERMICA
INTERVEM
27

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI MONOFASE
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM SINGLE PHASE
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES MONOPHASEE
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE WECHSELSTR
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS MONOFASICAS
ESQUEMAS DAS LIGAI�OES ELECTRICAS MONOFASICAS
CAVO A 3 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 3 LEAD
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 3 CONDUCTEURS - 3 LEITER-KABEL
ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 3 CONDUTORES DA ELECTROBOMBA
i.2
ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
- CABLE A 3 CONDUCTORES DE LA
LI = RETE: COLORE MARRONE - MAINS: COLOUR BROWN - SECTEUR: COULEUR MARRON - NETZ:
FARBE BROWN - RED: COLOR MARRON - REDE: COR CASTANHA.
N = RETE: COLORE BLU - MAINS: COLOUR BLUE - SECTEUR: COULEUR BLEU - NETZ: FARBE BLAU -
RED: COLOR AZUL - REDE: COR AZUL.
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA - MASSA/TERRA.
28

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI MONOFASE
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM SINGLE PHASE
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES MONOPHASEE
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE WECHSELSTR
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS MONOFASICAS
ESQUEMAS DAS LIGAI�OES ELECTRICAS MONOFASICAS
CONDENSATORE - CA]
CONDENSATEUR - KO]
CONDENSADOR - CAP,
G.3
CAVO A 4 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 4 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 4 CONDUCTEURS - 4 LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 4 CONDUCTORES DE LA
ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 4 CONDUTORES DA ELECTROBOMBA.
U2/Zl = RETE: COLORE NERO - MAINS: COLOUR BLACK - SECTEUR: COULEUR NOIR - NETZ: FARBE
SCHWARZ - RED: COLOR NEGRO - REDE: COR PRETA.
Ul = CONDENSATORE + RETE: COLORE BLU - CAPACITOR + MAINS: COLOUR BLUE - CONDENSATEUR +
SECTEUR: COULEUR BLEU - KONDENSATOR + NETZ: FARBE BLAU - CONDENSADOR + RED: COLOR
AZUL - CONDENSADOR + REDE: COR AZUL.
Z2 = CONDENSATORE: COLORE MARRONE - CAPACITOR: COLOUR BROWN - CONDENSATEUR:
COULEUR MARRON - KONDENSATOR: FARBE BROWN - CONDENSADOR COLOR MARRON -
CONDENSADOR: COR CASTANHA.
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA - MASSA/TERRA.
29

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRI SCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXI6N DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGACAO DIRECTA
CAVO A 4 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 4 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 4 CONDUCTEURS - 4 LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 4 CONDUCTORES DE LA
ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 4 CONDUTORES DA ELECTROBOMBA.
W = RETE: COLORE GRIGIO - MAINS: COLOUR GRAY - SECTEUR: COULEUR GRIS - NETZ: FARBE GRAU -
RED: COLOR GRIS - REDE: COR CINZENTO.
V = RETE: COLORE NERO - MAINS: COLOUR BLACK - SECTEUR: COULEUR NOIR - NETZ: FARBE
SCHWARZ - RED: COLOR NEGRO - REDE: COR PRETA.
U = RETE: COLORE MARRONE - MAINS: COLOUR BROWN - SECTEUR: COULEUR MARRON - NETZ:
FARBE BROWN - RED COLOR MARRON - REDE: COR CASTANHA.
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA - MASSA/TERRA.
30

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRI SCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXI6N DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGACAO DIRECTA
A2
Da collegare al morsetto del rivelatore
acqua solo se 1'elettropompa e fornita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe only
if the pump is equipped with specific
control panel.
A connecter a la borne du detecteur eau
seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est munie du
coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die Motorpumpe mit
der entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al borne del revelador agua
solo si la electrobomba dispone del
respectivo cuadro de control.
A ligar ao borne do detector de agua so se
a electobomba e fornecida com o
respectivo quadro de controle.
DS
CAVI A 4 CONDUTTRRI
DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 4 LEAD ELECTRIC
PUMP CABLES CABLES DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 4 CONDUCTEURS - 4
LEITER-KABEL - CABLES A 4 CONDUCTORES
DE LA ELECTROBOMBA - CABOS DE 4
CONDUTORES DA ELECTROBOMBA.
Al
L1 L2 L3
FIG.13
W = RETE: COLORS GRIGIO - MAINS: COLOUR GRAY - SECTEUR: COULEUR GRIS - NETZ: FARBE
GRAU - RED: COLOR GRIS - REDE: COR CINZENTO.
V = RETE: COLORE NERO - MAINS: COLOUR BLACK - SECTEUR: COULEUR NOIR - NETZ: FARBE
SCHWARZ - RED: COLOR NEGRO - REDE: COR PRETA.
U = RETE: COLORE MARRONE - MAINS: COLOUR BROWN - SECTEUR: COULEUR MARRON - NETZ:
FARBE BROWN - RED COLOR MARRON - REDE: COR CASTANHA.
TBI - T112 = PROTETTORI TERMICL• MARRONE E GRIGIO - THERMAL PROBE: BROWN AND GRAY -
PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES: MARRON ET GRIS - THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN: BROWN
UND GRAU - PROTECTORES TERMICOS: MARRON Y GRIS - PROTECTORES TERMICOS: CASTANHA
E CINZENTO
DS = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA: NERO - HUMIDITY PROBE: BLACK - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU NOIR -
SENSOR: SCHWARZ - SONDA DETEC. AGUA: NEGRO - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA: PRETA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
N
J N N
a �
a X
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua a protettori termici. (a O
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. w D1} Q I
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques. p F_ N
Ausrdstung fur Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. a F7L J
LL
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. T Q
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores termicos. 6 T to w
w w
U
a.
a
31

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXI6N DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGACAO DIRECTA
Da collegare al morsetto del rivelatore
acqua solo se Felettropompa e fornita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe only
if the pump is equipped with specific
control panel.
A connecter a la borne du detecteur eau
seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est munie du
coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nor dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die Motorpumpe mit
der entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al borne del revelador agua
solo si la electrobomba dispone del
respectivo cuadro de control.
A ligar ao borne do detector de agua s6 se
a electobomba e fornecida com o
respectivo quadro de controle.
CAVO A 7 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 7
LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 7 CONDUCTEURS - 7 LEITER-
KABEL - CABLE A 7 CONDUCTORES DE LA
ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 7 CONDUTORES DA
ELECTROBOMBA.
DS
A2
m
L1 L2 L3
\y FIG.5
U(4) - V(5) - W(6) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED — REDE
TB1(1) — T112(2) = PROTETTORI TERMICI - THERMAL PROBE - PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES —
THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN - PROTECTORES TERMICOS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS
DS(3) = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA OPZIONALE - HUMIDITY PROBE OPTION - SONDE DE
PRESENCE D'EAU OPTION — SENSOR - SONDA DETEC. AGUA OPCIONAL - SONDA
DETECTORA DE AGUA OPCIONAL
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
o
J N N
a
X
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua e protettori termici. 0
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. w m Q Q
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques. 0 n F N
Ausrustung fiir Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. a w LLI J
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. ~ T Q
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores termicos. vi T w
w n
a
U H
a. W
a cn
w
a
32

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXI6N DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGACAO DIRECTA
Da collegare al morsetto del rivelatore
acqua solo se Felettropompa e fornita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe only
if the pump is equipped with specific
control panel.
A connecter a la borne du d6tecteur eau
seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est munie du
coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur darn
vorzunehmen, wenn die Motorpumpe mit
der entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al borne del revelador agua
solo si la electrobomba dispone del
respectivo cuadro de control.
A ligar ao borne do detector de agua s6 se
a electobomba e fornecida corn o
respectivo quadro de controle.
DS
CAVO A 10 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA
- 10 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 10 CONDUCTEURS - 10
LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 10 CONDUCTORES DE
LA ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 10 CONDUTORES
DA ELECTROBOMBA.
A2
W
L1 L2 L3
FIG.6
W2(7) - Ul(4) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED - REDE
U2(8) - VI(5) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED - REDE
V2(9) - WI(6) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED - REDE
TBI(1) - T112(2) = PROTETTORI TERMICI - THERMAL PROBE - PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES -
THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS
DS(3) = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA - HUMIDITY PROBE - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU- SENSOR -
SONDA DETEC. AGUA - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
o
J N N
Ivy
a �
a
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua e protettori termici. N
X
O
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. of
m Q Q
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques.
N
Ausrustung fdr Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. a w
W J
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. F T
LL
Q
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores termicos.
N z
fn T
W
W
cn
U H
H W
a. rn
w
x
33

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO STELLA/TRIANGOLO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM STAR/DELTA CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES CONNEXION ETOILE/TRIANGLE
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE STERN-DREIECK ANSCHLUI3
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXION ESTRELLA/TRIANGULO
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICAS LIGACAO ESTRELA/TRIANGULO
Da collegare al morsetto del
rivelatore acqua solo se
1'elettmpompa e fomita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe
only if the pump is equipped with
specific control panel.
A connecter a la borne du detecteur
eau seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est
munie du coffret de commande.
Der Anschlull an die Klemme der
Feuchfigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die
Motorpumpe mit der
entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al home del revelador
agua solo si la electrobomba
dispone del respectivo cuadro de
control.
A ligar ao bome do detector de agua
s6 se a electobomba a fornecida
com o respectivo quadm de
controle.
DS
CAVO A 10 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA -
10 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 10 CONDUCTEURS - 10
LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 10 CONDUCTORES DE
LA ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 10 CONDUTORES
DA ELECTROBOMBA.
A2
A2
A2
Al
Al
Al
L1 L2 L3
FIG.7
W2(7) — U2(8) — V2(9) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED — REDE
UI(4) — VI(5) — WI(6) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED — REDE
TBI(1) — T112(2) = PROTETTORI TERMICI - THERMAL PROBE - PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES —
THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN - PROTECTORES TERMICOS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS
DS(3) = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA - HUMIDITY PROBE - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU— SENSOR
- SONDA DETEC. AGUA - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
J
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua e protettori termici. a)X O
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. W m Q
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques. F N
Ausrustung fur Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. a w W J
Equipamiento Para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. T Q
LL
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores termicos. vi T W
W
N
U
H
a
34

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXI6N DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGAQAO DIRECTA
A
Da collegare al morsetto del rivelatore acqua
solo se Felettropompa e fomita dell'apposito
quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe only if
the pump is equipped with specific control
panel.
A connecter a la borne du detecteur eau
seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est munie du
coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die Motorpumpe mit der
entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert wird.
A conectar al borne del revelador agua solo
si la electrobomba dispone del respectivo
cuadro de control.
A ligar ao borne do detector de agua so se a
electobomba e fornecida com o respectivo
quadro de controle.
S
CAVI A 4 CONDUTTORI
DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 4 LEAD ELECTRIC
PUMP CABLES CABLES DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 4 CONDUCTEURS - 4
LEITER-KABEL - CABLES A 4 CONDUCTORES
DE LA ELECTROBOMBA - CABOS DE 4
CONDUTORES DA ELECTROBOMBA.
ff
L1 L2 L3
FIG.10
W2 - UI = RETE: GRIGIO E MARRONE - MAINS: GRAY AND BROWN - SECTEUR: GRIS ET MARRON -
NETZ: GRAU UND BROWN - RED: GRIS Y MARRON - REDE: CINZENTO E CASTANHA
U2 - V1 = RETE: MARRONE E NERO - MAINS: BROWN AND BLACK - SECTEUR: MARRON ET NOIR -
NETZ: BROWN UND SCHWARZ - RED: MARRON Y NEGRO - REDE: CASTANHA E PRETA
V2 - W1 = RETE: NERO E GRIGIO - MAINS: BLACK AND BROWN - SECTEUR: NOIR ET GRIS - NETZ:
SCHWARZ UND GRAU - RED: NEGRO Y GRIS - REDE: PRETA E CINZENTO
TBl - TB2 = PROTETTORI TERMICI: MARRONE E GRIGIO - THERMAL PROBE: BROWN AND GRAY -
PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES: MARRON ET GRIS - THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN: BROWN
UND GRAU - PROTECTORES TERMICOS: MARRON Y GRIS - PROTECTORES TERMICOS:
CASTANHA E CINZENTO
DS = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA: NERO - HUMIDITY PROBE: BLACK - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU NOIR
- SENSOR: SCHWARZ - SONDA DETEC. AGUA: NEGRO - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA: PRETA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
0 VT
o
J N N
a rn
a X
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua a protettori termici. y O
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. 3 KI
N
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques. 0 H
LU
Ausrustung fur Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. a W, J
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. T Q vi
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua e protectores termicos. vi T w
w rn
U F
F W
IL w
w
W
35

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO STELLA/TRIANGOLO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM STAR/DELTA CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES CONNEXION ETOILE/TRIANGLE
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE STERN-DREIECK ANSCHLUI3
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXION ESTRELLA/TRIANGULO
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICAS LIGAQAO ESTRELA/TRIANGULO
Da collegare al morsetto del A2 Al
rivelatore acqua solo se
1'elettropompa 6 fornita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo. A2
To be connected to the water -probe
only if the pump is equipped with
specific control panel.
A connecter a la borne du d6tecteur DS
can seulement si 1'61ectropompe est Q
munie du coffret de commande. Al
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die
Motorpumpe mit der
entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al home del revelador
agua solo si la electrobomba
dispone del respectivo cuadro de Y
control. L 1 L 2 L 3
A ligar ao home do detector de DS TB1 TB PE Ul Vl Wl PE W2 u2 V2 A2 Al
Agua s6 se a electobomba 6
fomecida com o respectivo quadro
de controle.
CAVI A 4 CONDUTTORI l
DELL'ELETTROPOMPA-4LEAD
ELECTRIC PUMP CABLES -
CABLES DE L'ELECTROPOMPE,
A 4 CONDUCTEURS - 4 LEITER-
KABEL - CABLES A 4
CONDUCTORES DE LA
ELECTROBOMBA - CABOS DE 4
CONDUTORES DA FIG.11
ELECTROBOMBA.
W2 - U2 - V2 = RETE: GRIGIO, MARRONE E NERO - MAINS: GRAY, BROWN AND BLACK - SECTEUR: GRIS,
MARRON ET NOIR - NETZ: GRAD, BROWN UND SCHWARZ - RED: GRIS, MARRON Y NEGRO -
REDE: CINZENTO, CASTANHA E PRETA
W1- Ul - V1 = RETE: GRIGIO, MARRONE E NERO - MAINS: GRAY, BROWN AND BLACK - SECTEUR: GRIS,
MARRON ET NOIR - NETZ: GRAU, BROWN UND SCHWARZ - RED: GRIS, MARRON Y NEGRO -
REDE: CINZENTO, CASTANHA E PRETA
TB1- T112 = PROTETTORI TERMICI: MARRONE E GRIGIO - THERMAL PROBE: BROWN AND GRAY -
PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES: MARRON ET GRIS - THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN:
BROWN UND GRAU - PROTECTORES TERMICOS: MARRON Y GRIS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS: CASTANHA E CINZENTO
DS = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA: NERO - HUMIDITY PROBE: BLACK - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU
NOIR - SENSOR: SCHWARZ - SONDA DETEC. AGUA: NEGRO - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA:
PRETA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
} N
J N N
a a
a X
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua e protettori termici. W M
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. L D1 Q <
Equipement pour sonde de pr6sence d'eau et protections thermiques. a W
y
Ausrustung far Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. F�LLJ
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores t6rmicos. T Q vi
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores t6rmicos. ui T w
w w
U
a.
a
36

INSTALLAZIONE CON PIEDE DI ACCOPPIAMENTO / INSTALLATION WITH COUPLING FOOT
INSTALLATION AVEC PIED WASSEMBLAGE / EINBAU MIT KUPPLUNGSFUSS
INSTALACI6N CON PIE DE ACOPLAMIENTO / INSTALA4rAO COM PE DE ACOPLAMENTO
Ref
Descrizione - Description - Description - Beschreibung -
DN50
DN65
DN80
DN100
DN150
DN200
DN250
DN300
Descri ci6n - Description
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Interasse laterale piede - Distance of coupling feet lateral side -
B
Entraxe lateral pied - Achsmal3e des Kupplungsfusses in
110
200
250
250
300
400
365
500
Fliel3richtung - Distancia lateral pie de acoplamiento - Entre-eixo
lateral p6
Interasse frontale piede - Distance of coupling feet front-end side -
120 /
C
Entrax frontal pied - AchsmaBe in der Breite des Kupplungsfusses
100
140*
160
160
200
250
320
500
- Distancia frontal pie de aco lamiento - Entre-eixo frontal p6
Distanza supporto tubi - Distance of pipes support - Distance de
85/
D
patte support des tubes - Distanz des Rohrspanners von
86
85
85
85
DO*
85
85
120
Schachtwand - Distancia soporte tubos - Distancia suporte tubos
Interasse tubi guida - Distance between guide rails - Entrax tubes
100 /
E
guidages - Abstand zwischen den Fiihrungsrohren - Distancia
40
100
100
100
124*
100
200
125
entre los tubos guia - Entre-eixo Tubos guia
Interasse fori supporto - Distance between support's holes -
F
Entrax des troux de la patte support - Abstand der
52
77,5
77,5
77,5
77,5 /
77,5
190
100
Befestigungsbohrungen Rohrspanner - Distancia entre agujeros de
38*
so orte - Entre-eixo faros de su orte
D1
Diametro foro - Hole diameter - DiamOre du trou —
10
16 /
16
16
16
20
20
20
Bohrun sdurchmesser - Diametro a u'eros - Diametro furo
20*
Diametro foro supporto - Support hole diameter - Diam&e du
02
trou de la patte superieur - Bohrungsdurchmesser Rohrspanner -
8
10
10
10
12*
10
12
12
Diametro agujero so orte - Diametro furo su orte
* version con doppia guida di scorrimento — double guide version — version double guidage - Doppelfiihrung version - versi6n
de la guia doble - versao do guia dupla
BULLONI DI ANCORAGGIO / ANCHOR BOLTS / BOULONS WANCRAGE
ANKERSCHRAUBEN / PERNOS DE ANCLAJE / CHUMBADORES
Type
D
mm
L min.
mm
S min
mm
al min.
mm
T
Nm
^T
/ 11
1 o
o
J
0 0�
0'l
VE.AZF 8/75
8
55
100
40
20
VE.AZF 10/120
10
60
100
50
45
VE.AZF 12/110
12
80
150
60
65
VE.AZF 16/110
16
80
180
85
115
VE.AZF 20/170
20
120
210
105
200
VE.A4 6/85
6
35
100
35
8
VE.A4 8/80
8
40
100
40
20
VE.A410/120
10
50
100
50
45
VE.A412/100
12
65
150
60
65
VE.A416/150
16
85
180
85
115
VE.A4 20/175
20
120
210
105
200
37

INSTALLAZIONE CON PIEDE DI ACCOPPIAMENTO - INSTALLATION WITH COUPLING FOOT
INSTALLATION AVEC PIED D'ASSEMBLAGE - EINBAU MIT KUPPLUNGSFUSS
INSTALACION CON PIE DE ACOPLAMIENTO - INSTALACAO COM PE DE ACOPLAMENTO
POS.
Descrizione - Description - Description - Beschreibung - Descripcion - Descrigao
1
Saracinesca - gate valve - vanne - schieber - valvula de compuerta - saracmesca
2
Valvola di ritegno - check valve - soupape de retention - riickschlagventil - valvula de retentibn - valvulas de retengao
3
Tubo di mandata - delivery pipe - tube de refoulement - druckleitung - tubo de impulsion - tubo de descarga
4
Tubo di guida - guide tube - tube de guidage - fiihrungsrohr - tubo de guia - tubo de guia
5
Pozzetto - sump - puisard - gully - sumidero - fossa de retengao
6
Piede di accoppiamento - coupling foot - pied d'assemblage - kupplungsfuss - pie de acoplamiento - pe de
acoplamento
7
Pompa sommergibile - submersible pump - pompe submersible - tauchmotorpumpe - bomba sumergible - bomba
submersivel
8
Regolatori di livello (galleggianti) - level regulator (floats) - regulateurs de niveau (flotteurs) - niveauregler
(schwimmersschalter) - reguladores de nivel (flotantes) - reguladores de nivel (flutuantes)
POSIZIONE DELLA CATENA DI SOLLEVAMENTO - POSITION OF LIFTING CHAIN
POSITION DE LA CHAINE DE LEVAGE - POSITION DER ANHEBENDEN KETTE
POSICION DE LA CADENA DE ELEVACION - POSICAO DO LEVANTAMENTO CADEIA
38

Tabella di interventi — maintenance record — tableau des interventions — Wartungstabelle -
cuadro de las intervenciones - registro da manutenVao
Data
Date
Date
Datum
Fecha
Data
Lavoro effettuato
Work performed
Operation effectuees
Durchgefiihrte arbeit
Trabajo realizado
O eragao efectuada
Osservazioni
Remarks
Observations
Anmerkungen
Observaciones
Observagoes
39

Doc. Cod. NET001 - rev. 0 — 09/2013
FAGGIOLATI PUMPS S.P.A.
Z.Ind.Sforzacosta — 62100 Macerata — ITALY
Tel. [phone] — Fax [phone]
e-mail: faggiolatipumpsgfaggiolatipumps.com

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
Content:
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
technical data page 1
assembly of diffusers page 2
test run page 3
operation page 4
assembly (changing) of diffuser membranes page 5
maintenance and cleaning page 6
Technical Data
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffuser on square pipe
B
1/2 A 0.
1/2 A
1
C
{f
1 2 3►U as►I 4 3
5 !!!
6
.D1-
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffuser on round pipe
B
1/2 A
e 1/2 A
FM
1
C
j
1 76!
q
6
.4 -- D2N
OTT GROUP
Membrane Tube Diffuser
low buoyancy
1. support pipe PP
2. membrane
3. flooded compartment
4. air distribution
5. locking bolt
6. air header
A
1000
1500
2000
effective membrane length
B
1200
1700
2200
total length of diffuser
C
067
067
067
outer diameter
D1
80 or
100
or 120
outer dimension (width x heigth)
D2
88.9
or
114.3 or
139.7 outer diameter (round pipe)
= DN80
or
DN100 or
DN125
dimension in mm
all diffuser dimensions
are
subject to normal fabrication tolerances
contact OTT if wallthickness of ss pipes is more than 3mm or if plastic pipes shall be used
page 1 of 7

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
1. Introduction
1.1 Control of delivered goods
Each diffuser, particularly the membrane tube, is to
be checked for damage that may have occurred
during shipping. Damage has to be reported to the
freight forwarding company and the seller
immediately.
1.2 Storage
The MAGNUM° diffusers are to be stored in their
original packaging in a dry and well -ventilated
place in accordance to DIN 7716. Do not store in
the open! Measures have to be taken to keep the
diffusers away from UV -radiation (sunshine), frost,
dust and works (e.g. welding) close to the storage -
place. The diffusers should be installed and
operated not later than six months after delivery to
avoid possibly harmful environmental influences.
Longtime -Storage of some spare parts for
replacement is possible but due to fast response of
our service not necessary in large numbers.
1.3 Layout / flow pattern
The diffusers and the air headers must be
arranged as specified in the layout of the plant.
The design of the aeration system, e.g. immersion
depth, or the distances between the diffusers and
the headers must comply with the specifications
and the technical presetting of OTT. When using
floating or retrievable systems avoid buoyancy,
and extreme swinging. Any contact of the diffusers
with internals (other diffusers, headers or racks)
will damage the membranes and must be avoided.
Strong waterflow can cause diffuser vibrations,
especially with the MAGNUM° 2000. This could be
harmful to the whole diffuser unit. Therefore, the
water flow should be along the longitudinal axis
(+/- 45°) of the diffuser. Please do not install
diffusers under or very close to mixers. Contact
your OTT representative for detailed installation
advice with regard to the flow regime and mixers.
Installation Magnum 2000
0
45° s�.e
:�41°
OTT GROUP
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
2. Assembly of diffusers
2.1 General instructions
The installation of the diffusers should be the final
step of all necessary installation works in the area
of the basin. Avoid damages by finishing concrete
works, welding, painting, or any other activities
before you take the diffusers out of their boxes.
Remove all impurities or loose parts from the basin
floor, walkways and side walls.
Before installing the diffuser, all impurities, such as
dust, stones, pieces of wood, etc. must be
removed from the inside of the pipes and headers.
For the correct installation of the diffuser the
following requirement must be fulfilled:
• diameter of connection hole: 38 +0.5 mm
■ the hole must be exactly centred on top of
the air header.
■ the holes must not be located in the
welded area of the air header
■ the holes must be free of burrs, particularly
on the inner edge
■ the surface of the header has to be free of
buckles. Deformations in the area of the
holes cause leakages.
■ the air headers must be height adjustable.
hole 0 38 mm + 0.5 mm
hole placed in the centre,
+/- n 9 mm of the ht-ndpr
■ For a proper installation the diffuser and
header have to be dry. Wet parts falsify
the required torque.
■ The ambient temperature should be above
0°C.
• Change both gaskets (spare parts) if the
diffuser is installed for a second time (e.g.
after changing the membranes).
■ If a (cordless) drill is used, the drill must
not exceed 60 rpm. The assembly has to
be finished using a reliable torque
controlled wrench as described above.

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
2.2 Diffuser installation in 3 steps
Insert the diffuser into the bore hole using
the fastening bolt (Clip -In° system). The
symbol (recycling/material PP) on the
middle part of the diffuser must point
towards the installing person. The locking
bolt is turned in line with the pipe (see
picture below).
Insert the bolt into the bore hole, away
from the body of the mechanic.
OTT GROUP
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
2.3 Test Run
In order to avoid any kind of negative impact on
the installed diffusers, keep the period between
installation and trial run (water coverage of
diffusers) as short as possible.
Fill up the basin carefully with clean water (e.g.
from the clarifiers) until the diffusers are covered
with 10 inch of water. Make sure that the inflowing
water does not fall directly on the diffusers or
damages them!
The trial run in the basin should be carried out
directly after installation. The water tightness of the
installed diffusers can be tested, by shutting off the
aeration. While the membranes close up, leaks
would keep putting air through.
3. After the diffuser is clipped into the hole Use the test run for starting up the diffusers.
tighten down the connection ONCE by For an optimum performance the diffusers
using a torque wrench, with a torque of must have been in operation for at least 24
27 Nm! Do not retighten the diffuser after hours at a maximum possible specific airflow
the torque once has been reached! (see table). This is especially important before
oxygen transfer tests.
You can watch an online installation movie on
our website at www.ott-system.com in the
category products and the sub -category
MAGNUM.
2.4 Downtime until start of operation
After the trial run and start up phase the system
can be operated. If the operation cannot be started
directly, the water level should be increased up to
1 meter minimum, and maintained until the system
is put into operation. Pay attention to water
evaporation or ice formation. During periods of
frost, the basin should be filled up to a swd of 3 m
(10 ft).
page 3 of 7

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
3. Operation
3.1 General instructions
Oil-, dust- and solvent -free air quality as well as air
filtration is required. The intake air must
correspond to the requirements laid out in TA
(Technische Arbeitsanweisungen). Dust filters for
environmental dust are to be designed for a "by
count efficiency" of at least 81 % in accordance
with EN 779 (BS 6540, Ashrae 52-76) filter grade
F7 or higher.
The air temperature at diffuser entry may not
exceed 80' C for FLEXNORM or 120' C for
FLEXSIL membranes respectively. The water
temperature should be between 5° and 35'
Celsius. Higher temperatures are possible but
please consult your OTT representative in this
case for additional information.
3.2 Operational airflow of the diffusers
Diffuser Throu h ut Rates
perforation
types
HE
micro
fine
normal
medium
[m3/hr/m]
[m3/hr/m]
[m3/hr/m]
m3/hr/m]
[m3/hr/m]
min
0,5
1
1
1,5
2
norm
4
7
8
9
12
max
6
12
16
18
24
daily
stretching
12
16
18
24
30
up to
flushing
18
24
27
36
40
up to
shutt off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
possible:
slot size 1 0.6 mm 1 1 mm 1 1.2 mm 1 1.4 mm 1 2 mm
1 m3/hr/m = 0.589 scfm/min/m
The operational airflow is depending on the
membrane perforation: Bigger membrane pores
allow higher air flow rates as shown in the table
above.
The diffusers should be operated at the maximum
possible air flow rate once a week for about 20
minutes. This way scaling and fouling can be
minimized sufficiently.
OTT GROUP
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
Do not exceed the above mentioned maximum air
flow rates.
3.3 Downtime after operation
In case a basin is taken out of operation, and
cannot be drained, it must be avoided that the
diffusers get covered by anaerobic sludge. Either
the active biomass must be flushed out or kept in
suspension by mixers.
After pumping out the basin or taking aeration
grids / racks out of the water, take care that
deposits and sludge do not dry on the membrane
tubes. The diffusers should not be placed in the
sun. Dried mineral deposits stick to the membrane,
so that cleaning might become impossible.
In case that the basin is emptied for a longer time,
the diffusers have to be covered with water (see
"Downtime until start of operation"). Further: see
maintenance instructions.
page 4 of 7

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
4. Assembly / Change of membrane -
tubes
4.1 Preparation / Cleaning
The polypropylene support pipes (bodies) of the
diffusers have to be cleaned and dried carefully
after removing the old membranes and before
starting to assemble the new membranes. Do not
reuse damaged support pipes.
The entire aeration system has to be checked for
dirt in the air headers or racks. All impurities, even
dust and sand, have to be taken (washed or
blown) out of the headers completely.
Depending on the type of aeration system and
local conditions, it could be useful to let air flow
through the system during the works. This might
avoid sludge to enter the open racks / pipes or air
headers. Please contact your OTT representative
for additional information.
OTT recommends taking the diffusers out of the
basin and conduct the replacement at an
appropriate work place.
4.2 Assembly of membrane -tube
Dry the support pipe (body) of the diffuser.
Push membrane onto the support pipe (away from
your body). Avoid using too much force when
assembling the membrane tube.
In case of difficulties, use "support air" by carefully
inserting the blowpipe of a compressor between
sleeve and support pipe.
Never use any lubricant!
Attention, important information
relevant for function and guarantee:
The centre line of the non perforated area of the
membrane has to be adjusted exactly on top of the
ridge. FLEXSIL° membranes do have a blue line in
the midst of the non perforated area. This blue line
has to be positioned exactly on top of the ridge.
Centre line of the non
perforated area of the
membrane positioned
exactly on 1200 and 600
o'clock position
OTT GROUP
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
4.3 Assembly of clamps
After the membrane tube is assembled and
adjusted on the support pipe, the clamps must be
installed on both ends of the membrane. Use only
original OTT GmbH clamps, and fasten the clamps
with the special pincer tool provided by OTT.
Attention, important information:
Clamps have to be closed in a way that there is an
opening of 2,7±0,2 mm (see sketch), this ensures
tight, close fit on the membrane sleeve.
closure of
clamp on
the top
- closure -up to:
2,7± 0,2 mm
Closed clamps point exactly to the top (12:00
position). The clamps are covered with the
excess length of the membranes by folding it back.
Both sealings of the diffuser have to been changed
before the diffuser with the new membrane is
assembled again. See the assembly instructions of
the complete diffusers for further information.
4.4 Start up
The membrane tube diffusers are ready for start-
up now. Please read the installation- and
operating- instructions for the completed diffusers
carefully and perform a new bubble pattern test.
page 5 of 7

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
5. Maintenance and cleaning of
membrane tube diffusers
OTT membrane tube diffusers operate reliable and
do not need intensive maintenance. Still regular
control and usual maintenance is strongly
recommended.
Wastewater contains various components which to
a certain extend do settle on the membrane. Some
are mentioned below:
■ carbonate (water hardness),
■ precipitants
■ polymeres (sludge conditioning)
Deposits on the diffuser are usually not harmful to
the membrane but might affect the pressure loss
and bubble pattern.
Certain solvents and oils can have a negative
impact on the membrane. In case of questions
address to you OTT representative.
Biological films are known to reduce the life time
on EPDM rubber membranes. If problems related
to biological films must be expected OTT
recommends using FLEXSIL membranes.
5.1 Lifetime
The lifetime of a diffuser is mainly depending on
the actual process and waste water conditions.
Therefore the suitability and quality of the chosen
membrane material is important. Please discuss
the given situation at the WWTP with the supplier
or your OTT representative to make a sustainable
choice.
OTT membranes are suitable for a waste water
quality as defined in the German „ATV
Arbeitsblattes A 115" latest edition. This means the
amount of industrial wastewater may not exceed
20 % of the total wastewater flow. In case of
questions please contact your OTT representative.
In order to maintain an economically operation and
a long life cycle follow the assembly, operation and
maintenance instructions for OTT diffusers.
5.2 Performance control
The best indication for layers and crusts on the
membrane is the pressure loss. Monitor the
development of your blower pressure over time.
Define a critical pressure where measures should
be taken.
OTT GROUP
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
5.2.1 Flushing with air
First measure should be the flushing with air. This
should be done if possible preemptively on a daily
basis as described in chapter 3.
5.2.2 Cleaning
The diffusers membrane can be cleaned with
water and a high pressure cleaner. The distance
between the membrane and nozzle of the high
pressure cleaner should be at least 0.5 meters.
Alternatively a brush can be used to clean smaller
numbers of membranes. If possible put air through
the diffusers during the cleaning process.
Important: Mechanical or chemical impact can
cause serious damage of the membranes, handle
the diffusers and the cleaning equipment with care!
The membrane may not be damaged, folded or
wrenched while cleaning the diffuser.
Do not use any detergents, solvents, alcohol or
acids for cleaning without having discussed the
case with your OTT representative.
5.2.3 Flushing formic acid
From a certain point on flushing with air may not
be sufficient. The reason can be calcium in the
perforation holes of the diffuser. In this case OTT
recommends flushing with formic acid. Do not use
other acids. The formic acid should be injected into
the air supply or drop pipe. Use an acid
concentration of 80% and 250 ml/hr per meter
installed diffuser length.
Handling acids is dangerous. Wear appropriate
protective clothing. Choose a dosing mechanism
that does not imperil your health. Contact the acid
supplier and follow the prescribed directions for
handling acids.
6. Service
It is possible to send a sample diffuser / membrane
to OTT GmbH. Deposits and the quality of the
membrane will be analysed and an appropriate
advise for cleaning and further measures will be
worked out. Please clean the diffuser before
sending it. Use water (especially clean the flooded
pipe) but do NOT brush or clean away the deposits
on the membrane. Please take care that the
page 6 of 7

Assembly, Operation, Maintenance of
MAGNUM° Membrane Tube Diffusers
and Membranes
4-2008
OTT System GmbH & Co.
Frankenring 21
D 30855 Langenhagen
Germany
Tel: +49 (0)511 / 78631 0
Fax: +49 (0)511 / 78631 40
Email: [e-mail]
www.ott-system.com
membrane does not dry during transportation - that
would affect the test.
III
OTT GROUP
page 7 of 7

N'
1
1
is
ip
JE
JO
JT
varisco,�
Pompe centrifughe autoadescanti
Self -priming centrifugal pumps
Pompes centrifuges auto-amorgantes
Selbstansaugende Kreiselpumpen
Bombas centrifugas autocebantes
mIstruzioni per I'uso a manutenzione
® Instructions for the use and maintenance
mInstructions pour ('utilisation et 1'entretien
mBetriebs- and Wartungsanleitungen
® Instrucciones pars el use y mantenimiento
solid pumping solutions
2
12
22
32
42
Ed. 2011 /01 - Rev. 02 - Cod. 558

ISTRUZIONI ORIGINALI
•
ATTENZIONE
NON METTERE IN FUNZIONE LA POMPA PRIMA DI AVERE LETTO E BEN
COMPRESO QUESTO MANUALE.
LA VARISCO SPA DECLINA OGNI E QUALSIASI RESPONSABILITA PER DANNI
DOVUTI ALLA NEGLIGENZA ED ALLA MANCATA OSSERVANZA DI QUANTO
RIPORTATO NEL PRESENTE MANUALE.
LA VARISCO SPA NON RISPONDE DEGLI EVENTUALI DANNI CAUSATI DA ERRATE
INTERPRETAZIONI DELLE ISTRUZIONI CONTENUTE NEL PRESENTE MANUALE
E PER DANNI CAUSATI DA UNA INSTALLAZIONE ERRATA E/O DA UN USO
IMPROPRIO DELLA POMPA STESSA.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
INDICE
.. 3
.. 3
.. 3
.. 4
.. 4
.. 4
.. 4
.. 4
.. 4
.. 5
.. 5
.. 5
.. 6
.. 9
11
11
11
11
11
11
52
55
2

1 IDENTIFICAZIONE
1.1 Costruttore
VARISCO S.p.A. - Terza Strada, 9 - Z.I. Nord - 35129 PADOVA - Italy
1.2 Tipo di pompa
Pompa centrifuga autoadescante ad asse orizzontale, con girante semiaperta per it passaggio di corpi solidi.
1.3 Modello
II modello e indicato sulla targhetta della pompa.
1.4 Anno di fabbricazione
L'anno di fabbricazione e indicato sulla targhetta della pompa.
1.5 Identificazione del manuale
Edizione : 2011/01 Rev.: 02 Cod. 558
1.6 Dati di targa
TYPE MATR. ITEM
identifica it modello della a it numero a it numero the collega la pompa
pompa a del gruppo (pompa/ di serie, alla documentazione contrattuale
riduttore/motore) della pompa (non sempre viene indicato)
[TYPE
kg
O C E MAT . ITEMa it peso del gruppo (pompa e
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max) kg carrello) escluso it peso dell'acqua
Anno di fabbricazione nel corpo pompa.
Varisco ISco S.p.A. -PADOVA - I Y [phone]
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max)
e la portata massima a la pressione massima a la potenza massima a it massimo numero di giri di
della pompa, misurata di esercizio della pompa applicabile, alla pompa funzionamento della pompa. La
al massimo numero di misurata al massimo al massimo numero di pompa non deve mai superare
giri (RPM) numero di giri (RPM) giri (RPM) tale numero di giri
I dati di targa si riferiscono al collaudo con acqua a 20° C e con massa volumica di 1000 kg/m3
1.7 Campo d'impiego
Pompe adatte al pompaggio di liquidi con viscositA fino a 50 cSt a contenenti corpi solidi. Sono utilizzate nell'industria, nel civile, nel
navale, nella depurazione delle acque, nell'edilizia a nell'agricoltura.
1.8 In caso di avaria telefonare al seguente numero: 049 82 94 111
2 GARANZIA
Tutti i prodotti della VARISCO SpA sono garantiti per un periodo di 12 mesi dalla data della prima messa in servizio a comunque non
oltre 18 mesi dalla data di consegna. Le riparazioni effettuate in garanzia non interrompono la decorrenza del periodo di garanzia. La
garanzia concerne difetti di materiale a di lavorazione the compromettano it funzionamento del prodotto a to rendano non idoneo all'uso
al quale it prodotto a destinato, purche denunciate tempestivamente a comunque non oltre 2 giorni dalla loro scoperta. Sono esclusi
i danneggiamenti derivanti dalle caratteristiche fisico/chimiche del liquido aspirato, cosi come i danneggiamenti delle parti the per
natura o destinazione sono soggette a usura o a deterioramento (guarnizioni di tenuta, diaframmi, valvole a vuoto e a pressione, parti
di gomma o plastica), o the dipendono dal mancato rispetto delle istruzioni d'uso e/o manutenzione, dal cattivo o inadeguato utilizzo 0
immagazzinamento del prodotto o da modifiche o riparazioni effettuate da personale non espressamente autorizzato dalla VARISCO SpA.
La non identificabilitA del numero di matricola a causa di esclusione dalla garanzia. La nostra prestazione di garanzia a tassativamente
subordinate al fatto the I'acquirente abbia ottemperato a tutte le proprie obbligazioni maturate sino al giorno della richiesta ed a quelle
scadenti nel corso dell'intervento in garanzia. La decisione se emettere una nota di accredito, riparare o sostituire la merce, a presa ad
insindacabile giudizio dalla VARISCO SpA. II rientro della merce pub essere fatto solo se autorizzato per iscritto, a porto franco VARISCO
SpA - Padova. Tutte le spese di smontaggio/rimontaggio del prodotto dal/sul luogo di installazione ed ogni altro intervento su cantiere
restano a carico dell'acquirente. La merce riparata o sostitutiva sar& riconsegnata all'acquirente franco fabbrica VARISCO SpA - Padova.
La merce sostituita diventa di proprietA della VARISCO SpA. E inteso the la suddetta garanzia a assorbente a sostitutiva delle garanzie o
responsabilitA previste per legge, ed esclude ogni altra responsabilitA della VARISCO SpA (risarcimento del danno, mancato guadagno,
campagne di ritiro, manodopera dell'acquirente, fermo cantiere, diminuzione del prezzo di vendita, ecc.). In caso di controversia a di
esclusiva competenza it foro di Padova.
2.1 ESCLUSIONI DALLA GARANZIA
La garanzia decade (oltre a quanto riportato nel contratto di fornitura):
- Qualora si dovesse verificare, un errore di manovra imputabile all'operatore.
- Qualora it danno fosse imputabile ad insufficiente manutenzione.
- Qualora fossero utilizzati pezzi di ricambio non originali.
- Qualora non fossero state seguite le istruzioni riportate in questo manuale.
Rimangono altresi esclusi dalla garanzia i danni derivanti da negligenza, incuria, cattivo utilizzo a use improprio della pompa. La
rimozione dei dispositivi di sicurezza, di cui la pompa a dotata, far& decadere, automaticamente la garanzia a le responsabilitA della
Ditta Costruttrice.

3 PRESCRIZIONI GENERALI
AII'atto del ricevimento controllare subito to stato del materiale, in particolare eventuali danni
dovuti al trasporto. Controllare inoltre I'esatta corrispondenza con la bolla di consegna. In caso di
contestazione, segnalare subito al vettore it danno e comunicarlo entro 48 ore alla sede di Padova.
Per ogni comunicazione segnalare sempre it tipo di pompa the a stampigliato sull'apposita targhetta
oppure it numero di matricola.
Le pompe vanno utilizzate esclusivamente per gli impieghi per i qual it Costruttore ha
precisato:
- i materiali di costruzione
- le condizioni operative (pressione, numero di giri, temperatura, ecc.)
- i settori di applicazione
Ogni altro utilizzo a cui la macchina venisse destinata a non contemplato in questo
manuale, scarica la Ditta Costruttrice da ogni a qualsiasi responsabilita per danni a
persone, animali o cose.
Per impieghi non precisati dal Costruttore, contattare I'Ufficio Tecnico della VARISCO S.p.A.:
049 82 94 111.
4 NORME DI SICUREZZA E PREVENZIONE INFORTUNI
Operando in prossimita della macchina, usare un abbigliamento adeguato
evitando indumenti larghi con parti svolazzanti (cravatta, sciarpa ecc.) the
potrebbero impigliarsi negli organi in movimento. Usare tute da lavoro
confezionate con specifici requisiti di sicurezza, guanti, scarpe isolanti,
occhiali, cuffie antirumore ed elmetto (fig. 1)
Non effettuare manutenzioni al motore quando a in moto
Non avvicinare le mani ad organi in movimento (es. cinghie, giunti ecc.).
Non salire sulla motopompa per effettuare interventi di qualsiasi genere.
5 IN CASO DI EMERGENZA
Togliere la tensione di linea (per le elettropompe).
Avvisare it personale responsabile dell'impianto.
6 MOVIMENTAZIONE E TRASPORTO
6.1 Modality di trasporto
La macchina deve essere trasportata in posizione orizzontale e in condizioni di sicurezza.
6.2 Messa in opera
Durante gli interventi di messa in opera a di manutenzione, occorre prevedere un trasporto sicuro
di tutti i componenti utilizzando apposite imbragature. La movimentazione deve essere eseguita da
personale specializzato onde evitare di danneggiare la pompa a provocare infortuni al personale.
I punti di sollevamento dei vari allestimenti devono essere utilizzati esclusivamente per sollevare
la macchina svuotata dell'acqua a staccata dalle tubazioni.
Nella figura 2 sono indicati, in neretto, i punti di sollevamento di alcuni basamenti.
! Velocity massima di sollevamento: Vmax < 0,5 m/s
Non sostare ne transitare sotto la pompa quando a sollevata! (fig. 3)
7 STOCCAGGIO
In caso di stoccaggio sistemare la pompa in luogo chiuso; se lasciata all'aperto, coprire la pompa con
un telo impermeabile, lubrificare i cuscinetti per prevenire la ruggine (fig. 4).
Evitare accumulo di umidita intorno alla pompa.
Non lasciare it corpo pompa pieno di liquido. Svuotarlo attraverso la portina (fig. 5) a it tappo
posteriore presente in alcuni modelli. Nei mesi invernali it liquido potrebbe congelare a causare
danni alla pompa. Quando it liquido a pericoloso, prendere tutte le precauzioni per prevenire
danni a infortuni.
Periodicamente far ruotare I'albero per evitare incrostazioni all'interno della pompa.
8 ASSEMBLAGGIO
Qualora la pompa fosse fornita nella versione ad albero libero (pompa a supporto) occorre accoppiarla
al motore elettrico tramite giunto di collegamento verificando:
- giunto adatto alla potenza da trasmettere.
- corretto allineamento del giunto (vedi paragr. 10).
- coprigiunto a norme di sicurezza.
- potenza nominale del motore.
- potenza assorbita dalla pompa (vedi targhetta del motore).
- numero di giri del motore (vedi targhetta del motore).
- numero di giri della pompa.
9 INSTALLAZIONE
II basamento del gruppo elettropompa deve essere ancorato su una soletta di calcestruzzo
livellata nella quale sono stati annegati i bulloni di fondazione secondo to schema allegato ad ogni
gruppo o fornibile a richiesta. La soletta deve essere robusta per assorbire qualsiasi vibrazione e
abbastanza rigida da mantenere I'allineamento del gruppo pompa/motore.
9.1 Montaggio
Durante I'operazione di ancoraggio del basamento alla soletta, si consiglia di verificare la planarita con
I'ausilio di una livella posta sopra la flangia della bocca di mandata della pompa.
Qualora fossero necessari degli adattamenti, adattare it piano della soletta al basamento, mai it
basamento alla soletta.
II corpo pompa deve essere provvisto di un opportuno sostegno quando e utilizzato con i gruppi di
moltiplicatori di giri per use agricolo.
fig. 2
128
fig.3
fig. 4

9.2 Tubazioni
Pulire accuratamente le tubazioni prima di collegarle alla pompa.
La tubazione di aspirazione deve avere un diametro uguale a quello della bocca di aspirazione della pompa (per diametri superiori
consultare la Varisco). Evitare, se possibile, curve, gomiti o strozzature the possano limitare I'afflusso di liquido alla pompa. Non
montare la valvola di fondo: la pompa e provvista di valvola di non ritorno (14) (fig. 10) incorporata.
Installare la pompa it piu vicino possibile al Iiquido da pompare, cercando, dove possibile, di diminuire la Iunghezza delta tubazione di
aspirazione.
Le connessioni delle tubazioni in aspirazione devono essere a perfetta tenuta d'aria: controllare i filetti, le guarnizioni delle flange, i
raccordi rapidi etc.
La tubazione di mandata deve consentire di far uscire Paria dall'impianto durante la fase d'innescamento della pompa.
Le tubazioni, di aspirazione a di mandata, vanno montate in modo da non generare tensioni nel corpo delta pompa.
10 ALLINEAMENTO
Prima di mettere in funzione la pompa a importante verificare I'allineamento tra i componenti del gruppo (giunto/motore).
Per i gruppi con basamento 1'esatto allineamento a eseguito in fabbrica, tuttavia all'arrivo sul luogo d'installazione occorre ricontrollare
I'allineamento:
- sistemare it basamento sul piano delta soletta infilando i tirafondi nei fori del basamento senza serrare a fondo i bulloni.
- togliere it coprigiunto.
- serrare i bulloni dei tirafondi e riverificare I'allineamento come indicato in figura 6 e regolarli, a seconda del tipo di giunto, come specificato nei
paragrafi 13.10; 13.11; 13.12.
- riposizionare it coprigiunto prima dell'avviamento.
disassamento disassamento
assiale � radiate
disassamento
parallelo
ff3 j P—
1 fig. 6
11 COLLEGAMENTO ELETTRICO
I collegamenti elettrici vanno effettuati esclusivamente da personale specializzato.
- Attenersi alle istruzioni del costruttore del motore a delle apparecchiature elettriche.
- Collegare correttamente la messa a terra del motore a controllare the it motore elettrico sia protetto da un salvamotore di
potenza adeguata.
- I motori elettrici trifase sono normalmente predisposti per essere collegati a 400 V (collegamento a stella). Per una alimentazione a
230 V, collegare a triangolo la morsettiera della basetta del motore elettrico secondo Io schema ad esso allegato.
- Per i motori forniti con tensioni particolari, seguire le indicazioni allegate al motore.
- Le sezioni dei cavi elettrici siano adeguate all'amperaggio.
- Una volta realizzati i collegamenti elettrici, chiudere la saracinesca della tubazione di mandata e verificare it corretto senso di
rotazione.
- La freccia sul corpo pompa indica it corretto senso di rotazione (fig. 7); se la pompa ruota in senso contrario, scambiare tra loro due
dei tre cavi di alimentazione.
A richiesta, le pompe the devono
pompare acque salmastre sono
provviste di protezione galvanica
anticorrosione the consiste in una
serie di dischi di zinco fissati sulla
portina di scarico. Ogni 1000 ore si
deve verificare to stato d'usura dello
zinco ed eventualmente sostituirlo.
Durante it funzionamento della
pompa controllare I'assorbimento
del motore elettrico the non deve
sur)erare auello indicato in targhetta.
12 AWIAMENTO
W V U W V U
0 0 o p p p
o==O==O I1011 I1011 I1011
Y X Z Y X Z
Y
Collegamento a stella Collegamento a
triangolo
Prima di mettere in funzione la pompa verificare the I'impianto sia correttamente ultimato dal punto di vista elettrico e
meccanico.
Verificare the tutti i sistemi di sicurezza siano attivi.
Verificare it corretto senso di rotazione della pompa (paragr. 11)
12.1 Controllo della tenuta
Prima di avviare la pompa, controllare it tipo di tenuta montato the a riportato nella targhetta della pompa.
12.1.1 Pompe con tenuta tipo 1 - 2
Le tenute tipo 1 e 2 sono gia riempite di grasso durante it montaggio; non necessitano di manutenzione nelle prime 500 ore di
funzionamento della pompa.
12.1.2 Pompe con tenuta tipo 3
Le tenute tipo 3 non necessitano di manutenzione.

12.1.3 Pompe con tenuta tipo 4 - 5
Le tenute tipo 4 e 5 sono flussate secondo le Normative API 610 PLAN 52 - 53 (vedi schema
in fig. 8)
PLAN 52 prevede it serbatoio non pressurizzato
PLAN 53 prevede it serbatoio pressurizzato con pressione di 1 - 2 bar superiore a quella di
esercizio della pompa.
II liquido di flussaggio deve essere compatibile con quello pompato.
12.2 Riempimento del corpo pompa
Riempire completamente it corpo pompa con liquido da pompare attraverso I'apposito foro situato
nella parte superiore del corpo (fig. 9) (in alcuni modelli a previsto un tappo). A pompa ferma it
corpo non si svuota a pertanto non a piO necessario riempirlo.
12.3 Innescamento
Attenzione: se la pompa non s'innesca, non farla funzionare per oltre 2 minuti onde evitare
it riscaldamento del liquido a it danneggiamento della tenuta.
Per it mancato innescamento si rimanda al paragrafo 14.1
A pompa innescata:
- Controllare la tenuta sull'albero: se di tipo meccanico non ci devono essere perdite
- Verificare the it valore di corrente assorbito dal motore non superi it valore di targa del motore.
- Se si ritiene the la pompa funzioni in modo anomalo a indispensabile arrestarla a ricercarne le cause. (vedi paragrafo 14)
13 MANUTENZIONE
La manutenzione deve essere eseguita a macchina ferma, togliendo la tensione di alimentazione; occorre fare in modo the delta
alimentazione venga ripristinata dallo stesso operatore the esegue la manutenzione.
Prima di intervenire sulla macchina per operazioni di manutenzione a indispensabile:
- Scollegare la pompa dalle tubazioni di aspirazione a mandata.
- Svuotare it corpo pompa dal liquido pompato attraverso la portina di scarico (fig. 5).
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere le dovute
precauzioni se it liquido e pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.)
70-0
25 0
34i
°1 20.2
20
20.2 20.1
19 52 20.3
03
52.1 84
53 -----� 21 fr O
24 /-22 r<25
- -s7
0-
43 20.1 20 71
58 ^55
y08
i
I 57 06 Q
4f 1
14.1 14 \ \ 02 67.1 45.2�A a 62
47 59 06.3 61
r r 48.1 45 I 06.2
52.1 @3 \\ 1 49 08.1 60
y 68.5 55.1 { (. ' 66 07
10 01
3 68.1
53.2 27 54
53.3 5\ 6 26 17 50 it 71.2 71.1
s3 fig. 10
6

13.1 Ispezione a controllo
Controllare periodicamente it buon funzionamento della pompa verificando, tramite la strumentazione d'impianto (manometro,
vuotometro, amperometro, etc.) se la pompa a costantemente idonea al servizio.
E' consigliabile una periodica manutenzione dei vari organi di usura ed in particolare della girante e del piatto d'usura.
13.2 Sostituzione della girante (fig. 10)
- Svuotare it corpo pompa come indicato a paragr. 7.
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere le
dovute precauzioni se it liquido a pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.).
- Svitare i dadi (52) a rimuovere it corpo pompa, cercando di non danneggiare la guarnizione (43).
- Bloccare la girante (03) a svitare it dado autobloccante (33).
- Rimuovere la girante a sostituirla con una nuova.
- Sostituire eventualmente la guarnizione (43).
- Per it montaggio procedere al contrario.
- Controllare 1'esatta posizione della girante rispetto al piatto d'usura come indicato al punto 13.7.
13.3 Sostituzione del piatto d'usura (fig. 10)
- Svuotare it corpo pompa come indicato a paragr. 7.
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere le
dovute precauzioni se it liquido a pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.).
- Svitare i dadi (52) a rimuovere it corpo pompa cercando di non danneggiare la guarnizione (43);
- Svitare le viti a testa con esagono incassato (57)
- Rimuovere a sostituire it piatto d'usura (02)
- Sostituire eventualmente la guarnizione (43)
- Per it montaggio procedere al contrario.
- Controllare 1'esatta posizione della girante rispetto al piatto d'usura come indicato al punto 13.7.
13.4 Sostituzione della valvola (fig. 10)
- Svuotare it corpo pompa come indicato a paragr. 7.
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere le
dovute precauzioni se it liquido a pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.).
- togliere i dadi (52.1)
- sfilare it portavalvola (10)
- sfilare la valvola (14.1)
- montare la nuova valvola con la cerniera verso I'alto
- pulire la sede valvola del portavalvola (10) a rimontarlo
- alcune valvole sono provviste di una linguetta the sporge all'esterno, in questo caso, nel fissare i dadi si deve sostenere it peso della
valvola tirando la linguetta.
13.5 Sostituzione della tenuta tipo 1 - 2 - 3 (riferimento figg. 10,11,12)
- Svuotare it corpo pompa come indicato a paragr. 7.
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel
portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere le dovute precauzioni se it liquido e
pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.).
- Svitare i dadi (52) a rimuovere it corpo pompa, cercando di non danneggiare la
guarnizione (43).
- bloccare la girante (03) a togliere it dado autobloccante (33)
- rimuovere la girante
- sfilare it portamotore (19). Assieme a questo si sfila automaticamente anche la parte
rotante della tenuta (40) montata sul distanziere (31)
- sfilare dal portamotore la controfaccia (39) con la relativa guarnizione (38)
- smontare i1 paraolio (41)
- lavare con solvente it portamotore per togliere i residui di grasso vecchio a pulire bene
la sede del paraolio a della controfaccia.
- montare un nuovo paraolio sul portamotore. Per facilitare it montaggio bagnare con olio
la sede a it paraolio stesso.
- montare la controfaccia (39) completa di guarnizione (38). Per facilitare I'operazione
bagnare la sede a la guarnizione con alcool. Aiutarsi se necessario con un tampone di
legno o simile per spingere la controfaccia (39) nella sede.
- rimettere in sede it portamotore facendo attenzione a non urtare con I'albero la
controfaccia, the se di ceramica, potrebbe facilmente scheggiarsi o spezzarsi.
- fissare it portamotore con le viti (45, 45.1).
- ungere con olio la tenuta (40), it distanziere (31) a infilare su un lato del distanziere la
tenuta.
- infilare it distanziere con la tenuta sull'albero vincendo la leggera resitenza offerta dal paraolio.
Fare attenzione the la tenuta non si sfili dal distanziere.
- infilare I'anello di sostegno tenuta (25.1). Spingere quest'ultimo in avanti fino a the sia possibile rimontare la linguetta (60).
- rimontare la girante (03), la rondella (66) ed avvitare it dado (33);
- controllare I'esatta posizione della girante rispetto al piatto d'usura come indicato al punto 13.7.
- rimontare la guarnizione del corpo (43) spalmando entrambi i lati di grasso.
- rimontare it corpo a fissare i dadi, controllando the la girante ruoti libera;
- riempire la camera di lubrificazione della tenuta (vedi paragr. 12.1.1; 12.1.2) di grasso.

13.6 Sostituzione della tenuta tipo 4 - 5 (riferimento figg. 10, 13, 14, 15, 16)
- Svuotare it cor o om a come
p p p
indicato a paragr. 7.
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono
rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa,
nel portamotore, nella condotta di
aspirazione; prendere le dovute
precauzioni se it liquido a pericoloso
(infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso,
infetto ecc.).
- Svitare i dadi (52) (fig. 10) a rimuovere
it corpo pompa, cercando di non
danneggiare la guarnizione (43).
- Bloccare la girante (03) a togliere it
dado autobloccante (33).
- Rimuovere la girante.
- Scollegare le tubazioni di flussaggio. r
- Fissare i posizionatori (25.4) di blocco
della tenuta nelle apposite sedi
(fig. 13).
- Allentare i grani di bloccaggio della °
camicia sull'albero (fig. 14). r
- Svitare le viti (20.2) the fissano la < r 20.2
flangia della tenuta al portamotore fig. 15
(fig. 15).
- Togliere it portamotore (19).
- Togliere la tenuta (25), it distanziere (31), it portatenuta (20) a la guarnizione (20.1).
- Se la guarnizione (20.1) risultasse danneggiata, sostituirla.
Per it montaggio procedere al contrario
- Lubrificare leggermente it distanziere (31) per facilitare it montaggio iniziale della tenuta (fig. 16)
- Stringere accuratamente le viti (20.2) (fig. 15) di fissaggio della flangia con azione incrociata onde evitare tensioni sull'anello stazionario della
tenuta.
- Serrare con forza i grani (fig. 14).
- Togliere i posizionatori (25.4) (fig. 13) di blocco tenuta a fissarli sugli appositi fori della flangia per un riutilizzo in fase di smontaggio.
- Riallacciare le tubazioni di flussaggio, ripristinare it flussaggio a sfiatare la zona attorno alla tenuta the non deve funzionare a secco
nemmeno per pochi attimi.
13.7 Posizionamento girante rispetto al/ai piatto/i d'usura
- In tutti i modelli la distanza the
intercorre tra la sommitA delle pale
della girante a it piano del piatto
d'usura deve essere compresa tra
0,3 - 0,6 mm (fig. 19). Nei modello
12" la distanza richiesta tra girante e
piatti d'usura anteriore a posteriore
deve essere compresa tra 0,6 - 1 mm
(fig. 22).
Per ottenere cid le quote A e B di
fig. 17, 18, 20, 21 devono risultare
piatto
0.6. 1 mm d'usura
I
irante fig.22
con le guarnizioni corpo a piatto
posteriore. Uinterposizione della guarnizione (43) (fig. 10) di spessore 0,5 mm determina la distanza richiesta (fig. 19).
13.8 Manutenzione dei cuscinetti (fig. 10)
La pompa viene fornita con i cuscinetti giA ingrassati a non richiedono manutenzione per le prime 500 ore di funzionamento.
I cuscinetti del supporto devono essere mantenuti lubrificati appropriatamente, mai con molto grasso the pud provocare un surriscaldamento
con conseguente danneggiamento del cuscinetto; N.B.: per le versioni JP/JE monoblocco vedi ALLEGATO 1 pag. 52.
girante fig. 19
0,3 +0,6 mm
piatto
d'usura
it piu possibile uguali. A tale scopo
si usano gli anelli di compensazione
(25.2) (fig. 11) forniti con la tenuta
di ricambio. Tali anelli servono a
spostare in avanti la girante nel caso
venga a trovarsi troppo distante dal
piatto di usurafrontale o troppo vicina
a quello posteriore (quando previsto).
Gli anelli di compensazione vanno
montati tra I'anello sostieni tenuta
(25.1) (fig. 11) a la girante. Ulteriori
aggiustamenti possono essere fatti
13.9 Sostituzione dei cuscinetti
- Svuotare it corpo pompa come indicato a paragr. 7.
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere le
dovute precauzioni se it liquido a pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.).
- smontare it corpo, it portamotore a la tenuta meccanica.
- togliere it semigiunto d'accoppiamento a la chiavetta dell'albero.
- togliere it copricuscinetto esterno (08).
- estrarre I'albero completo dalla parte del giunto.
- estrarre i cuscinetti con I' estrattore oppure con una pressa.
- per it montaggio procedere al contrario.

13.10 Sostituzione tasselli giunto TWIN -DISC (Serie RBD)
- togliere la pompa dalla sua sede.
- togliere i tasselli usurati a sostituirli con i nuovi.
- verificare Io stato d'usura della flangia d'alluminio
- accoppiare la pompa al motore.
- errore max. di allineamento: 0,7 mm.
- nell'ordinare i tasselli, indicare it diametro dell'albero e it tipo di giunto.
13.11 Sostituzione elastomero giunto SURE -FLEX
- svitare le viti di ancoraggio alla base della pompa o del motore e allontanare i due
semigiunti.
- togliere 1'elastomero usurato a sostituirlo con quello nuovo. Nel caso di elastomero in
due pezzi (tipo S) Iasciare the l'anello in acciaio sia Iibero di muoversi in una delle due
gole adiacenti la dentatura.
- accostare la pompa al motore e imboccare la dentatura del semigiunto a quella
dell'elastomero.
- compattare it giunto Iasciando un gioco assiale di 2 mm max. per i giunti tipo J e
3 mm max. per i giunti tipo S.
- controllare I'allineamento radiate a angolare net modo seguente:
- radiale: (fig. 23) con una riga, appoggiata sulfa superficie esterna dei semigiunti a in almeno
quattro punti delta circonferenza, misurare it massimo disallineamento (quota C) e riportarlo
it piu possibile prossimo a zero (vedi tabella).
- angolare: (fig. 23) con un calibro misurare in almeno quattro punti la distanza tra i due
semigiunti a portare la variazione (b-a) quanto piu possibile prossima a zero (vedi tabella)
- serrare le viti di ancoraggio alla base delta pompa e del motore.
- per l'ordinazione delle parti di ricambio indicare it tipo di giunto (stampigliato all'interno
dei semigiunti) e it diametro dell'albero.
13.12 Sostituzione elastomeri giunto GBF (fig. 24)
- svitare le viti di ancoraggio alla base della pompa o del motore a allontanare i due
semigiunti.
- togliere i tasselli usurati a sostituirli con i nuovi fissandoli nella loro sede con un po' di
col lante.
- avvicinare pompa e motore fino a completa chiusura del giunto quindi arretrare di
2 - 3 mm per staccare i semigiunti.
- serrare le viti di ancoraggio della pompa a del motore alla base.
- nell'ordinazione dei tasselli indicare it diametro dell'albero a it tipo del giunto.
14 MALFUNZIONAMENTO: CAUSE E RIMEDI
14.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Attenzione: prima di esaminare le possibile cause di malfunzionamento, accertarsi
the gli strumenti di controllo (il vuotometro, it manometro, it misuratore di girl, it
misuratore di portata, it quadro elettrico di misura etc.) funzionino correttamente.
La pompa non s'innesca
it corpo pompa a vuoto o non a abbastanza pieno
riempire it corpo pompa attraverso it foro di riempimento (fig. 9).
eccessivo riscaldamento del liquido dentro it corpo pompa
aggiungere del liquido freddo nel corpo pompa attraverso it foro di riempimento (fig.
9).
possibili infiltrazioni d'aria nelle giunture o presenza di crepe nella tubazione di
aspirazione
controllare it serraggio delle giunture, ispezionare la tubazione di aspirazione.
la tubazione di mandata a in pressione
sfiatare la tubazione di mandata.
it numero di girl della pompa a basso
aumentare it numero di giri solo dopo aver verificato i dati contrattuali a le curve
caratteristiche della pompa.
la girante pub essere consumata o rotta
attraverso la portina di ispezione (26) (fig. 10) controllare to stato della girante, oppure
smontare it corpo pompa come descritto nel paragrafo 13.2
Tipo
giunto
Velocity
max.
Coppia max. dNm
Servizio
Servizio
(giri/min)
continuo
intermitt.
8 S
4500
17
2
10 S
4000
31
30
loss
4000
31
30
11 S
3500
48
62
14 S
2800
94
121
osemigiunto
elastomero
semigi nto
b
Tzi
fig. 23 at
Tipo
giunto
C
mm
(b-a)
mm
Coppia
N m
J4
0,25
1,1
10
J5
0,4
1,4
20
S6
0,4
1,8
40
S7
05
2,1
70
fig. 24
elastomero
L
Tipo giunto
Coppia max kgm
rpm
14
15
4800
20
25
4400
27
40
4100
40
60
3500
55
80
3300
88
110
3000
110
150
2700
145
190
2500
180
240
2200
250
300
2150
330
400
2000
it dente d'innesco pub essere usurato
smontare it corpo pompa come illustrato nel paragrafo 13.2. Eseguire un riporto di saldatura the dovra essere successivamente profilato.
Se it dente d'innesco a molto usurato, sostituire it corpo.
1'eventuale filtro in aspirazione pub essere otturato
rimuovere i detriti.
9 I'altezza d'aspirazione a eccessiva
diminuire I'altezza d'aspirazione.
10 entra aria dalla tenuta
smontare la tenuta a pulirla (vedi paragr. 13.5; 13.6); se it malfunzionamento persiste allora cambiare la tenuta.
11 girante ostruita da corpi estranei
smontare it corpo e rimuovere i corpi estranei.

14.2 La pampa non eroga la portata
12 la pampa non a innescata
vedere le cause riportate nel punto 14.1.
13 la prevalenza richiesta dall'impianto a superiore a quella di progetto della pampa
rivedere it progetto dell'impianto o la scelta della pompa.
14 eccessive perdite di carico in aspirazione
rivedere la distribuzione delle curve, valvole, strozzature etc. ; se necessario aumentare it diametro delle tubazioni.
15 girante ostruita da corpi estranei
smontare it corpo e rimuovere i corpi estranei.
16 le tubazioni di aspirazione / mandata possono essere ostruite o intasate
localizzare it punto ostruito o intasato a pulire.
14.3 La pampa non eroga una portata sufficiente
17 infiltrazioni d'aria in aspirazione
controllare it serraggio delle giunture a ispezionare la tubazione di aspirazione.
18 la girante e/o it piatto d'usura possono essere consumati
si deve provvedere alla loro sostituzione smontando la pompa come descritto nei paragrafi (13.2; 13.3).
19 la tubazione di aspirazione a di diametro insufficiente
sostituire la tubazione di aspirazione.
Verificare altre possibili cause: vedi paragrafo 14.2.
14.4 La pampa non sviluppa una pressione sufficiente
20 la viscosity del liquido a superiore a quella prevista
contattare la casa costruttrice della pompa dopo aver misurato la viscosita del liquido the per le pompe centrifughe non deve essere
maggiore di 50 cSt.
Verificare altre possibili cause: vedi it punto 5 del paragrafo 14.1 e it paragrafo 14.2.
14.5 La pampa assorbe eccessiva potenza
21 la velocity di rotazione a troppo alta
verificare la corretta velocity di rotazione.
22 la pampa funziona con dati diversi da quell contrattuali
verificare le condizioni di esercizio della pompa a confrontarle con quelle di targa.
23 it peso specifico del liquido a superiore a quello prestabilito
misurare it peso specifico del liquido e confrontarlo con quello contrattuale.
24 errato allineamento del gruppo
verificare it corretto allineamento del gruppo come indicato al paragrafo 10.
25 possibili attriti intern! tra le part! rotanti a quelle fisse
smontare it corpo pompa come indicato al paragrafo 13.2 e verificare se ci sono superfici strisciate.
26 corpi estranei nella girante
smontare it corpo pompa come indicato al paragrafo 13.2 e rimuovere i corpi estranei.
14.6 La pampa vibra ed a rumorosa
27 it funzionamento e a portata troppo ridotta
verificare la corretta regolazione delle valvole dell'impianto e I'indicazione del manometro e del vuotometro.
28 la pampa o le tubazioni non sono fissate rigidamente
controllare it corretto serraggio delle tubazioni dell'impianto.
29 la pampa cavita
vedi paragrafo 14.2
Verificare le possibili cause: vedi paragrafo 14.1.
30 corpi estranei nella girante
smontare it corpo pompa come indicato al paragrafo 13.2 e rimuovere i corpi estranei.
14.7 La pampa si blocca
31 guasti meccanici
controllare I'integrita dell'albero, dei giunti, del motore, di eventuali pulegge e cinghie, di eventuali moltiplicatori/riduttori etc.
32 corpi estranei nella girante
ispezionare I'interno del corpo pompa attraverso la portina d'ispezione (26) (fig. 10) altrimenti smontare it corpo pompa come indicato
a paragrafo 13.2
14.8 1 cuscinetti hanno breve durata
33 mancanza di lubrificazione
lubrificare i cuscinetti come descritto net paragrafo 13.8
34 corpi estranei nei cuscinetti
cambiare i cuscinetti come descritto net paragrafo 13.9
35 1 cuscinetti sono arrugginiti
cambiare i cuscinetti come descritto net paragrafo 13.9
14.9 La tenuta perde
36 tenuta tipo 1 - 2
questo tipo di tenuta e adatto al pompaggio di Iiquidi torbidi o contenenti abrasivi e prodotti petroliferi con temperatura fino a 110' C:
ogni 500 ore ingrassare attraverso I'apposito ingrassatore a sfera fino a the non esce grasso. Se ben Iubrificata puo funzionare a secco
per 2 minuti. Qualora durante it funzionamento ci fosse perdita di liquido, provvedere alla sostituzione della tenuta. (vedi paragrafo
13.5)
37 tenuta tipo 3
Non ha bisogno di particolare manutenzione. Qualora si verifichi una perdita di liquido, provvedere alla sostituzione della tenuta (vedi
paragrafo 13.5)
IN

38 tenuta con flussaggio tipo 4 - 5
prima della messa in marcia della pompa, collegare la presa del flussaggio the e posta sulla tenuta, con la linea del liquido di flussaggio
con pressione di almeno 2 bar superiore a quella di esercizio della pompa. Assicurarsi the prima dell'avviamento della pompa e durante
it suo funzionamento vi sia un flusso costante di liquido nella tenuta. Tale flussaggio consente una forte diluizione del prodotto pompato
in prossimita della tenuta in modo da farla funzionare nelle migliori condizioni possibili. Alla fermata della pompa, se si prevede the
questa rimarra inattiva per piu giorni, provvedere al suo svuotamento, come indicato a paragrafo 7 e al suo completo lavaggio tramite
la portina superiore di riempimento (fig. 9).
14.10 La tenuta si surriscalda
la pompa non s'innesca (vedi paragrafo 14.1 - 14.9)
14.11 Le parti in gomma del giunto si usurano rapidamente
Verificare it corretto allineamento del gruppo come indicato a paragrafo 10
15 RISCHI RESIDUI
I rischi residui sono quelli the non si possono eliminare con la progettazione della pompa:
- urti
- sovrapressioni anomale
- malfunzionamento improprio
- errori di manovra in prossimita della pompa.
16 RIPARAZIONE
Prima di intervenire sulla macchina a indispensabile:
- togliere la tensione (intervenire come a paragrafo 13)
- chiudere le saracinesche in aspirazione a mandata della pompa
- se it liquido pompato e caldo lasciar raffreddare la pompa alla temperatura ambiente
- se it liquido pompato a pericoloso attenersi alle procedure di sicurezza per la manipolazione dei liquidi pericolosi
- svuotare it corpo pompa dal liquido pompato come indicato a paragrafo 7.
- rimuovere e pulire da eventuali residui del liquido pompato.
17 SMONTAGGIO
17.1 Smontaggio della pompa dall'impianto
Eseguire quanto riportato nel paragrafo 16
- togliere i bulloni delle flange aspirante e premente.
- togliere le viti di fissaggio della pompa al basamento.
- sfilare la pompa dall' eventuale giunto o smontarla dal motore elettrico.
- prima di sollevare la pompa con appropriati mezzi di sollevamento, fare riferimento alla tabella dei pesi delle pompe.
18 MONTAGGIO
18.1 Montaggio della pompa sull'impianto
- sollevare la pompa con appropriati mezzi di sollevamento.
- posizionare la pompa sul basamento.
- ripristinare gli eventuali collegamenti con it giunto o con it motore elettrico:
- verificare I'allineamento come descritto al paragrafo 10.
- fissare la pompa al basamento.
- collegare la pompa alle tubazioni.
- montare gli eventuali coprigiunti.
19 RICAMBI
Per mantenere efficiente it servizio della pompa a consigliabile, all'atto dell'ordinazione della pompa, dotarsi di ricambi consigliati per
un primo intervento:
- tenuta.
- girante.
- piatto d'usura.
- serie completa di guarnizioni.
- valvola a clapet.
- dado autobloccante della girante.
19.1 Come ordinare i ricambi
Per ordinare i pezzi di ricambio occorre indicare:
- tipo di pompa.
- numero di matricola della pompa.
- it numero di riferimento a di designazione del pezzo, come indicato nei fogli ricambi.
20 ROTTAMAZIONE
- Non disperdere la pompa, o parti di essa, nell'ambiente.
- Le parti metalliche possono essere riconvertite in materia prima.
- Grassi a olii vanno raccolti e stoccati a norma di legge per essere smaltiti dagli Enti preposti.
- Le guarnizioni in elastomero vanno separate a avviate a discarica autorizzata.
if

TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS
•
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE THE PUMP UNTIL YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD
THIS MANUAL.
VARISCO SPA DECLINES ALL AND EVERY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGE DUE TO
NEGLIGENCE AND FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS
MANUAL.
VARISCO SPA WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGE CAUSE BY INCORRECT
INTERPRETATION OF THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THIS MANUAL OR FOR DAMAGE
CAUSED BY INCORRECT INSTALLATION AND/OR BY IMPROPER USE OF THE
PUMP ITSELF.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
16
19
21
21
21
21
21
21
52
55
12

1 IDENTIFICATION
1.1 Manufacturer:
Varisco S.p.A., Terza Strada 9 - Z.I. Nord - 35129 PADOVA - Italy
1.2 Type of pump
Horizontal self -priming centrifugal pump with semi -open impeller for handling liquids containing solids in suspension.
1.3 Model
The type of pump is indicated on the pump name plate.
1.4 Year of manufacture
The year of manufacture is indicated on the pump name plate.
1.5 Instruction book identification
Edition: 2011 /01
1.6 Nameplate information
Revision:02 Cod.558
TYPE
identifies the model of the
pump and/or unit (pump/gear
box/motor etc.)
Year of manufacture
m3/h (max)
the maximum capacity
of the pump, measured
at the maximum speed
MATR. ITEM
the serial the number which links the pump
number of / to the contract documents (only if
the pump requested)
TYPE
O C EIMATR. ITEM
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max) kg
1t llgq I V SCO S.p.A.- PADOVA - I LY [phone]
m (max) kW
the closed valve head of the maximum input
the pump measured at power of the pump at
the maximum speed the maximum speed
kg
the weight of the pump or of
the unit, excluding the weight of
liquid in the pump casing.
RPM (max)
the maximum operating rotation
speed of the pump. The pump
must never be run faster than
this speed.
The values shown for the capacity (m3/h), head (m), power (kW) and speed (RPM) refer to testing with water at 20' C and density
1000 kg/m3
1.7 Field of application
The pumps are suitable for handling liquids of viscosity up to 50 cSt containing solids in suspension. They are used in industry, civil
engineering, shipbuilding, waste water treatment, construction and agriculture.
1.8 In case of breakdown contact Varisco S.p.A.: + 39 049 82 94 111
2 WARRANTY
All products manufactured by VARISCO SpA are guaranteed for 12 months from the date on which they are commissioned for the first time,
but not more than 18 months from the delivery date. Repairs under guarantee will not extend the warranty terms. The warranty covers material
and manufacturing defects that impair the way the product operates and make it unfit for the purpose for which it was designed, so long as
such defects are notified immediately, in any case no later than 2 days from the date on which they are discovered. Damage deriving from
the physical/chemical characteristics of the pumped fluid are not covered by the warranty, neither is damage to parts which, owing to their
nature or envisaged use, are liable to wear out or deteriorate (seals, diaphragms, vacuum and pressure valves, rubber and plastic parts), nor
damage which has been caused by failure to comply with the use and/or maintenance instructions, by bad or inadequate use or storage of
the product or by modifications or repairs made by persons who have not been explicitly authorized by VARISCO SpA. The warranty becomes
void if the serial number of the product cannot be identified. The warranty we furnish strictly depends on the purchaser having fulfilled all
the payments due until the date on which the claim is made and those that fall due during the warranty intervention. The decision to issue
a credit note, repair or replace the product is at the discretion of VARISCO SpA, whose decision about such matters is final. The goods
may only be returned if authorized in writing, and must be sent carriage free to VARISCO SpA - Padua. All the expenses for disassembling/
re -assembling the product from/in the installation site and all other operations therein are at the purchaser's charge. The repaired or replaced
goods will be re -consigned to the purchaser ex works of VARISCO SpA - Padua. Substituted goods become the property of VARISCO SpA. It
is hereby understood that this warranty absorbs and substitutes the warranties or liabilities established by law, and excludes all other liability
of VARISCO SpA (reimbursement of damages, loss of profit, withdrawal campaigns, the purchaser's manpower, building site standstills, sale
price reduction, etc.). All disputes are the exclusive competence of the court of Padua.
2.1 WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS
The warranty becomes void (besides the matters indicated in the supply contract):
- If there has been a manoeuvring error ascribable to the operator.
- If the damage has been caused by insufficient maintenance.
- If spurious spare parts have been used.
- Following failure to comply with the instructions in this manual.
Damages due to negligence, carelessness, bad and improper use of the pump are also excluded from warranty coverage. Removal of the
safety devices with which the pump is equipped will automatically void the warranty and relieve the Manufacturer from all deriving liability.
13

3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The goods must be examined on arrival to ascertain any damage caused during shipment.
Loss or damage must be notified immediately to the carriers and to the sender. Check that
the goods correspond exactly to the description on the shipping documents and report any
differences as soon as possible to the sender. Always quote the pump type and serial number.
The pumps must be used only for applications for which the manufacturers have
specified:
- the construction materials
- the operating conditions (pressure, speed, temperature, etc.)
- the field of application
Any other use the unit is put to that is not contemplated in this manual shall relieve the
Manufacturer of any and all liability for injury of persons or animals or for demage to
property.
For any applications not contemplated by the Manufacturer, contact VARISCO SpA's Technical
Department: [phone].
4 SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION INFORMATION
When working near the pump, dress appropriately, avoiding clothes with loose items (ties, scarves, etc.) which could get caught in moving
parts. Use overalls made according to safety regulations, gloves, insulating shoes, safety glasses, ear plugs and helmet (fig.1).
Do not carry out maintenance on the engine while it is running.
Keep hands away from moving parts (e.g. belts, couplings, etc.).
Do not mount on the pump to carry out maintenance operations of any kind.
5 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Turn off the electrical supply (for electrically driven pumps).
Notify the person responsible for running the plant immediately.
6 HANDLING AND TRANSPORT
6.1 Method of transport
The unit must be safely moved and in horizontal way.
6.2 Installation
During installation and maintenance, all the components used
must be handled and transported securely by using suitable
slings. Handling must be carried out by specialised personnel
to avoid damage to the pump and to persons. The lifting points
of the various configurations must be used to lift the unit
only, which must be drained from water and disconnected
from the pipes. Figure 2 highlights in black the lifting points of
some typical base plates.
• Maximum lifting speed: Vmax s 0,5 m/s
Do not stand or pass under the pump while it is being
hoisted! (fig. 3)
7 STORAGE
Store the pump under cover wherever possible. If the pump must be stored in the open, cover it
with a tarpaulin and grease the bearings to avoid rusting. (fig. 4).
Avoid the accumulation of moisture around the pump.
Drain the casing through the drain cover (fig. 5) and the rear plug mounted on some models.
During winter months and cold weather, the liquid could freeze and damage the pump
casing. If the liquid is hazardous, take all necessary precautions to avoid damage and
injury before emptying the pump casing. From time to time, turn the pump shaft to avoid
encrustation inside the pump.
8 ASSEMBLY
If the pump is supplied with bare shaft (pedestal version) it must be coupled to an electric
motor or internal combustion engine, taking account of the following:
- the coupling must be correctly sized for the power to be transmitted
- the coupling must be correctly aligned (see paragraph 10)
- the coupling guard must comply with applicable safety standards
- the rated power of the motor
- the power absorbed by the pump (see the motor name plate)
- the motor or engine speed (see the motor name plate)
- the pump speed
9 INSTALLATION
it
fig. 2
The base plates of electrically driven pumps must be anchored to a levelled concrete slab in which the foundation bolts have been buried
following the diagram supplied with the unit or available on request. The slab must be robust to absorb any vibrations and sufficiently
rigid to maintain the alignment of the pump to the motor.
9.1 Assembly
While the base plate is being anchored to the slab, check the flatness by placing a spirit level on the delivery flange of the pump.
If adjustments are necessary, the face of the slab must be adapted to the base plate, never the base plate to the slab.
The pump casing must be suitably supported when the pump is coupled to a gear box for agricultural use.
14

9.2 Pipework
Clean the pipes thoroughly before connecting them to the pump.
The suction line must have a diameter equal to that of the pump suction port (for diameters greater than that of the pump port, consult
Varisco). If possible, avoid curves, elbows and constrictions which can limit the flow of liquid to the pump. Do not install a foot valve: the
pump has a non return valve (14) incorporated in the suction port (fig. 10).
Install the pump as close as possible to the liquid to be pumped. Try, where possible, to reduce the length of the suction line.
The suction line connections must be completely airtight: check pipe threads, flange gaskets, quick couplings, etc.
The delivery line must let air escape from the system while the pump is priming.
The suction and delivery lines must be mounted in such a way as not to create a strain on the pump casing.
10 ALIGNMENT
Before starting the pump for the first time, it is important to check the alignment between the components of the unit (coupling/
motor).
The alignment of pumps supplied on base plates is checked during manufacture. However, it should be rechecked during installation
as follows:
- set up the base plate on top of the slab and insert the anchor bolts in the holds on the base plate without tightening the nuts completely
- remove the coupling guard.
- tighten the anchor bolt nuts and recheck the alignment as shown in fig.6. Adjust the alignment, if necessary, according to the type of
coupling as described in paragraphs 13.10; 13.11; 13.12.
- replace the coupling guard before starting the pump.
axial � radial
misalignment misalignment
� parallel
ff3 In misalignment
P_ 1 fig. 6
11 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections should only be carried out by specialised personnel.
Follow the instructions of the manufacturers of the electric motor and electrical equipment.
Earth the motor correctly and ensure that the electric motor is protected by an adequately rated overload cut-out.
- Three phase electric motors are usually supplied for 400 V (star connection). For 230 V supply, connect the motor terminal box in the
delta configuration as shown in the wiring diagram attached.
- Special voltage motors may be supplied. In this case, follow the instructions supplied with the motor.
- The cross section of the cables must be adequate for the current required by the motor.
- When the motor has been connected, close the delivery line gate valve and check that the direction of rotation is correct.
- The arrow on the pump casing shows the correct direction of rotation (fig.7); if the pump rotates in the opposite direction, interchange
two of the three wires of the supply cable in the terminal box.
On request, pumps for brackish
water can be supplied with galvanic
protection against corrosion. This
consists of a series of zinc discs fixed
to the clean out cover. Check the state
of wear of the zinc every 1000 hours
and replace if necessary.
While the pump is running, check
that the current does not exceed that
shown on the motor name plate.
12 STARTING
W V U W V U
0 0 0
o=0=0
Y X Z Y X Z
Y A
Star connection Delta connection
Before operating the pump, check that the electrical and mechanical parts of the system have been correctly installed.
Check that all safety devices are operative.
Check that the pump rotates in the correct direction (see paragraph 11).
12.1 Mechanical seal check
Before starting the pump, check the type of mechanical seal shown on the pump name plate.
12.1.1 Pumps with type 1 or 2 mechanical seals
Type 1 and 2 mechanical seals are filled with grease during assembly. They do not require maintenance during the first 500 hours of
operation of the pump.
12.1.2 Pumps with type 3 mechanical seals
Type 3 mechanical seals are not lubricated.
15

12.1.3 Pumps with type TCW - TCBW mechanical seals
13
M
Type TCW, TCBW mechanical seals are flushed according to API 610 Plan 52-53 (see diagram in
fig. 8).
Plan 52 has a non -pressurised tank.
Plan 53 has a pressurised tank with a pressure from 1 to 2 bar higher than the pump operating
pressure.
The flushing liquid must be compatible with the pumped liquid.
12.2 Filling the pump casing
Fill the pump casing completely with the liquid to be pumped through the opening on the top of
the casing (fig. 9). Some models have a plug. When the pump is stopped, the casing does not
empty and therefore it is not necessary to refill it.
12.3 Priming
Attention: if the pump does not prime, do not operate it for more than 2 minutes to avoid
overheating the liquid and damaging the seal.
If the pump does not prime, read paragraph 14.1.
Never exceed the maximum speed shown on the pump name plate.
When the pump has primed:
- Check the shaft seal for leaks.
- Check that the current absorbed by the motor does not exceed the rated value shown on the name plate.
If the pump does not seem to be operating normally, it must be stopped and the cause found (see paragraph 15).
MAINTENANCE
Before maintenance is carried out, the pump must be stopped and the electrical supply disconnected. The supply must only be
switched on again by the person who carries out the maintenance.
Before carrying out maintenance on the unit, it is essential you:
- Disconnect the pump from the suction and delivery pipes.
- Drain liquid from the pump casing by means of the drain cover (fig. 5)
Attention: residual liquid may be found in the pump casing, head and suction line. Take the necessary precautions if the liquid is
hazardous, inflammable, corrosive, poisonous, infected, etc.
70 --§
25 0
34i
°1 20.2
20
20.2 20.1
19 52 20.3
03
52.1 84
53 -----� 21 fr O
24 /-22 r<25
- -s7
0-
43 20.1 20 71
58 ^55
y08
i
I 57 06 Q
4f 1
14.1 14 \ \ 02 67.1 45.2�A a 62
47 59 06.3 61
r 48.1 45 I 06.2
52.1 0 49 08.1 60
y 68.5 55.1 { (. ' 66 07
10 01
3 68.1
48
53.2 27 54 I \
53.3 5\ 6 71.2 26 17 50 � 71.1
s3 fig. 10
16

13.1 Inspection and checks
Check from time to time that the pump is working correctly. Use the instruments mounted in the system (pressure gauge, vacuum gauge,
ammeter, etc.) to see if the pump continues to meet its duty.
Periodic maintenance of the parts subject to wear, in particular, the impeller and wear plate, is recommended.
13.2 Replacing the impeller (fig. 10)
- Drain the pump casing as described in paragraph 7.
Attention: residual liquid may be found inside the pump casing, head and suction line; take all necessary precautions if the liquid is
hazardous (inflammable, corrosive, poisonous, infected, etc.)
- Unscrew the nuts (52) and remove the pump casing, taking care not to damage the casing gasket (43)
- Block the impeller (03) and unscrew the self-locking impeller nut (33)
- Remove the impeller and replace it with a new one
- If necessary, replace the casing gasket (43)
- To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
- Check that the distance between the impeller and the front wear plate as described in paragraph 13.7
13.3 Replacing the wear plate (fig. 10)
- Drain the pump casing as described in paragraph 7.
Attention: residual liquid may be found inside the pump casing, head and suction line; take all necessary precautions if the liquid is
hazardous (inflammable, corrosive, poisonous, infected, etc.)
- Unscrew the nuts (52) and remove the pump casing, taking care not to damage the casing gasket (43)
- Unscrew the wear plate screws (57)
- Remove and replace the wear plate (02)
If necessary, replace the casing gasket (43)
- To reassemble, proceed in reverse order
- Check that the distance between the impeller and the front wear plate as described in paragraph 13.7
13.4 Replacing the check valve (fig. 10)
- Drain the pump casing as described in paragraph 7.
Attention: residual liquid may be found inside the pump casing, head and suction line; take all necessary precautions if the liquid is
hazardous (inflammable, corrosive, poisonous, infected, etc.)
- Remove the nuts (52.1)
- Slip off the suction flange (10)
- Slip off the check valve (14.1)
- Mount the new check valve with the hinge towards the top
- Clean the valve seat of the suction flange (10) and reassemble it
- Some check valves have a tongue which protrudes outside the suction flange. In this case, the weight of the check valve must be borne
while tightening the nuts by pulling this tongue
13.5 Replacing the mechanical seal type 1 - 2 - 3 (figs. 10, 11, 12)
- Drain the pump casing as described in paragraph 7.
Attention: residual liquid may be found inside the pump casing, head and suction
line; take all necessary precautions if the liquid is hazardous (inflammable, corrosive,
poisonous, infected, etc.)
- Remove the nuts (52) and remove the casing (01).
- Block the impeller (03) and remove the self-locking impeller nut (33)
- Remove the impeller
- Remove the head (19). The rotating part of the seal (40) mounted on the shaft sleeve
(31) will slide off the shaft together with the head
- Remove the stationary seat (39) and its gasket (38) from the head
- Remove the lip seal 'Al)
- Wash the head with solvent to remove any residue of grease and clean the seats of the
stationary seal and lip seal thoroughly
- Mount a new lip seal in the head. To facilitate assembly, smear a little oil on the seat and
on the outer surface of the lip seal
- Mount the stationary portion of the seal (39) together with its gasket (38). To facilitate
this operation, wet the seat on the head and the gasket with methylated spirits. If
necessary, use a wooden plunger or similar to push the stationary seal (39) into its seat
- Reassemble the head taking care not to touch the shaft with the stationary seal
seat. If this is ceramic, it could easily break or chip
- Tighten the head screws (45) and nuts (45.1)
- Smear the gasket of the rotating seal seat (40) and the shaft sleeve (31) with oil and slip
the seal on to one end of the shaft sleeve
- Slip the sleeve and seal on to the shaft and push to overcome the slight resistance
offered by the lip seal. Take care that the seal does not slip off the shaft sleeve.
- Mount the seal support ring (25.1). Push this forward until it is possible to reassemble
the impeller key (60)
- Reassemble the impeller (03), the impeller washer (66) and tighten the impeller nut (33)
- Check that the distance between the impeller and the front wear plate as described in paragraph 13.7
- Reassemble the casing gasket (43) after smearing both sides with grease
- Reassemble the casing and tighten the nuts, checking that the impeller is free to rotate
- Fill the seal lubrication chamber (see paragraph 12.1.1, 12.1.2) with grease.
39
25.1
25.2
fig. 11
17

13.6 Replacing type 4 - 5 cartridge seals (fig. 10, 13, 14, 15, 16)
- Drain the um casin as described
p p g
in paragraph 7.
Attention: residual liquid may be
found inside the pump casing, head
and suction line; take all necessary
precautions if the liquid is hazardous
(inflammable, corrosive, poisonous,
infected, etc.)
- Unscrew the nuts (52) (fig. 10) and
remove the pump casing, taking
care not to damage the casing
gasket (43)
- Block the impeller (03) and remove
the self-locking impeller nut (33)
- Remove the impeller
- Disconnect the flushing lines. r
- Fix the seal lock setting plates (25.4) o:.
in their seats (fig. 13) t% 20.3
-Loosen the grub screws of the (r,
shaft sleeve (fig. 14) °
- Unscrew the screws (20.2) which r
fix the seal flange to the head (fig.15) < r 20.2
- Remove the head (19) fig. 15
- Remove the seal (25), the shaft
sleeve (31), the seal box (20) and
the gasket (20.1)
- If the gasket (20.1) is damaged, replace it.
To assemble, proceed in reverse order
- To facilitate the initial assembly of the seal (fig. 16), smear a little oil on the shaft sleeve (31)
- Tighten the fixing screws (20.2) carefully (fig. 15) so as to avoid strain on the stationary seat of the seal
- Tighten the grub screws as far as they will go (fig. 14)
- Remove the setting plates (25.4) which hold the seal (fig. 13) and fix them in the appropriate holes in the flange so that they can be
used again to remove the seal
- Reconnect the flushing lines, begin flushing and bleed out air from the area around the seal. The seal must not run dry even for a
few moments.
13.7 Positioning the impeller with reference to the wear plate(s)
-In all models, the distance between
the top of the impeller blades and fig. 17
the surface of the wear plate must
be between 0.3 - 0.6 mm (fig. 19).
For the 12" model, the distance P 0
between the impeller and the front , a
and rear wear plates must be -
between 0.6 - 1 mm (fig. 22). To
achieve this, dimensions A and B in
figs. 17, 18, 20, 21 must be as nearly
as possible equal. To this end, use
the shims (25.2) (fig. 11) supplied
with spare mechanical seals. These
shims are used to move the impeller
further forward if it is too far from
the front wear plate or too near the
rear wear plate. The shims should be
mounted between the seal support A
ring (25.1) (fig. 11) and the impeller.
Further adjustments can be carried
out using casing gaskets (and rear
wear plate gaskets on models which
fit these). The presence of the casing
fig. 20
fig. 18
fig. 21
impeller fig. 19
n\ 0,3 . 0,6 mm
plate
gasket (43) (fig. 10) 0.5 mm thick
then creates the correct distance
(fig. 19).
13.8 Maintenance of the bearings (fig. 10)
The pump is supplied with the bearings already greased and does not require maintenance for the first 500 hours of operation.
The bearings in the bearing housing must be lubricated appropriately, avoiding the use of too much grease which can cause overheating
and, as a result, damage to the bearings. NOTE: consult ANNEX 1 on page 52 for the JP/JE monobloc versions.
13.9 Replacing the bearings
- Drain the pump casing as described in paragraph 7.
Attention: residual liquid may be found inside the pump casing, head and suction line; take all necessary precautions if the liquid is
hazardous (inflammable, corrosive, poisonous, infected, etc.)
- Remove the casing, the head and the mechanical seal
- Remove the flexible coupling hub and the shaft key
- Remove the outer bearing cover (08)
- Extract the shaft from the coupling side
- Extract the bearings using a bearing extractor
- To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.
18

13.10 Replacing the TWIN -DISC coupling blocks (RBD series)
- Remove the pump from its seat
- Remove the worn blocks and replace them with new ones
- Check the state of wear of the aluminium flange
- Couple the pump to the engine
- Maximum alignment error: 0.7 mm
- When ordering spare rubber blocks, specify the shaft diameter and the type of coupling.
13.11 Replacing the rubber collar of SURE -FLEX couplings (fig. 23)
- Unscrew the anchor bolts at the base of the pump or motor and separate the two halves
of the coupling
- Remove the worn rubber collar and replace it with a new one. In the case of two piece
rubber collars (type S) leave the steel ring free to move in one of the two grooves near
the indentation
- Move the pump towards the motor and fit the indentation of the half coupling to that
of the rubber collar
- Close the coupling leaving an axial play of 2 mm max. for type J couplings and 3 mm
max. for type S couplings
- Check the radial and angular alignment as follows:
Radial: (fig. 23) with a ruler placed on the outer surface of the half couplings, measure the
maximum misalignment (dimension C) in at least four points around the circumference
and try to bring it as close as possible to zero (see table)
- Angular: (fig. 23) with a gauge, measure at a minimum of four points the distance
between the two halves of the coupling and bring the difference (b-a) as close as possible
to zero (see table)
- Tighten the anchor bolts at the base of the pump and motor
- When ordering spare parts, specify the type of coupling (stamped on the inside of the
half couplings) and the shaft diameter.
13.12 Replacing the rubber dowels of GFB flexible couplings (fig. 24)
- Unscrew the anchor bolts at the base of the pump or engine and separate the two
halves of the coupling
- Remove the worn dowels and replace them with new ones, fixing them in place with a
little adhesive
- Move the pump towards the engine until the coupling is completely closed, then draw
it back by 2-3 mm to separate the two halves of the coupling
- Tighten the bolts which anchor the pump and engine to the base plate
- When ordering dowels, specify the diameter of the shaft and the type of coupling.
14 OPERATING PROBLEMS: CAUSES AND REMEDIES
14.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Attention: before examining the possible causes of operating problems, ensure
that all control instruments (vacuum gauge, pressure gauge, revolution counter,
flow recorder, electrical gauges etc.) are working correctly.
The pump does not prime
The pump casing is empty or non sufficiently full
fill the pump casing through the priming cover or plug (fig. 9)
The liquid inside the pump casing is overheated
add cold liquid to the pump casing through the priming cover or plug (fig. 9)
Air leaks in the joints or cracks in the suction line
Check that couplings and clamps are tight and inspect the suction line
Delivery line under pressure
bleed the delivery line
Low rotation speed of the pump
increase the speed only after having verified the contract data and the pump
performance curve
The impeller is worn or broken
check the state of the impeller through the impeller inspection cover (26) (fig. 10), or
Coupling
type
Max.
speed
Max. torque dNm
Cont.
Intermitt.
(RPM)
duty
duty
8 S
4500
17
2
10 S
4000
31
30
loss
4000
31
30
11 S
3500
48
62
14 S
2800
94
121
o/Half coupling
Rubber collar
Half c upling
b
C
fig. 23 at
Coupling
type
C
mm
(b-a)
mm
Torque
N m
J4
0,25
1,1
10
J5
0,4
1,4
20
S6
0,4
1,8
40
S7
05
2,1
70
fig. 24
rubber dowel
Coupling type
Max torque kgm
rpm
14
15
4800
20
25
4400
27
40
4100
40
60
3500
55
80
3300
88
110
3000
110
150
2700
145
190
2500
180
240
2200
250
300
2150
330
400
2000
remove the pump casing as described in paragraph 13.2
The cutwater (leading edge of the volute) is worn
remove the casing as described in paragraph 13.2. Build up the cutwater with weld and shape it to restore the original profile.
If the cutwater is severely damaged, replace the casing.
The suction strainer (if fitted) is clogged
remove the obstructions
The suction lift is too high
reduce the suction lift
10 Air enters through the mechanical seal
disassemble the seal and clean it (see paragraph 13.5, 13.6); if the problem persists, change the seal
11 The suction or discharge lines are obstructed or clogged
locate the obstructed or clogged area and clean
im

14.2 The pump does not deliver liquid
12 The pump is not primed
see the points listed under 14.1
13 The head required by the system is greater than the rated head of the pump
revise the system design or re -select the pump
14 Excessive friction losses in the suction line
revise the distribution of elbows, valves, restrictions etc.; if necessary increase the diameter of the pipework
15 The impeller is clogged by foreign objects
disassemble the casing and remove the foreign objects
16 The suction or discharge lines are obstructed or clogged
locate the obstructed or clogged area and clean
14.3 The pump does not have sufficient capacity
17 Air leaks in the suction line
check that the couplings are airtight and inspect the suction line
18 The impeller and/or wear plate are worn
they should be replaced by disassembling the pump as described in paragraphs 13.2 and 13.3
19 The diameter of the suction line is too small
replace the suction line
Check the other possible causes in paragraph 14.2
14.4 The pump does not provide enough pressure
20 The viscosity of the liquid is higher than expected
contact the manufacturers after measuring the viscosity; for centrifugal pumps this should not exceed 50 cSt
Check other possible causes: see point 5 of paragraph 14.1 and paragraph 14.2
14.5 The pump absorbs too much power
21 The rotation speed is too high
check the correct rotation speed
22 The pump operates under conditions which are different for those specified
check the operating conditions of the pump and compare them to those on the pump name plate
23 The density of the liquid is higher than specified
measure the density (or specific gravity) of the liquid and compare it to the agreed figure
24 Incorrect alignment of the unit
check that the unit is correctly aligned as described in paragraph 10
25 Friction inside the pump between the rotating and non rotating components
remove the pump casing as described in paragraph 13.2 and check if there are signs of rubbing on the surfaces
26 Foreign bodies trapped in the impeller
remove the pump casing as described in paragraph 13.2 and remove the foreign debris.
14.6 The pump vibrates and is noisy
27 The pump is operating at too low a capacity
check the settings of the valves in the system and the readings on the pressure and vacuum gauges
28 The pump or the pipework are not well fixed
check that the pipework is correctly clamped
29 The pump cavitates
see paragraph 14.2
Check the possible causes in paragraph 14.1
30 Foreign bodies trapped in the impeller
remove the pump casing as described in paragraph 13.2 and remove the foreign debris.
14.7 The pump jams
31 Mechanical breakdown
check the shaft, flexible coupling, motor, pulleys and belts, gear boxes etc. for breakages
32 Foreign bodies jammed inside the pump
check inside the pump casing by opening the inspection cover (26) (fig.10) otherwise remove the pump casing as described in
paragraph 13.2
14.8 The bearings have a short lifetime
33 Lack of lubrication
lubricate the bearings as described in paragraph 13.8
34 Foreign bodies in the bearings
change the bearings as described in paragraph 13.9
35 The bearings are rusted
change the bearings as described in paragraph 13.9
14.9 The mechanical seal leaks
36 1 - 2 type seal
this type of seal is suitable for pumping dirty liquids or liquids containing abrasive particles or petroleum products at temperatures up
to 110°C; grease every 500 hours through the grease nipple until grease comes out behind the seal. If well lubricated, this seal can run
dry for 2 minutes. If the seal leaks during operation, it must be replaced (see paragraph 13.5)
37 3 type seal
this seal does not require maintenance. If it leaks, replace it (see paragraph 13.5))
20

38 4 - 5 type flushed seal
before starting up the pump, connect the flushing hole in the seal area to the flushing liquid line with a pressure of at least 2 bar above
the operating pressure of the pump. Ensure before starting the pump and during operation that there is a constant flow of flushing
liquid in the seal. Flushing ensures that the liquid will be diluted in the seal area to allow the seal to operate under the best possible
conditions. When the pump is stopped, and will not be restarted again for some days, empty the pump as described in paragraph 7
and wash it completely through the upper priming cover (fig. 9).
14.10 The seal overheats
The pump does not prime (see paragraphs 14.1 and 14.9)
14.11 The elastomer portions of the flexible coupling wear out quickly
Check that the pump is correctly aligned as described in paragraph 10
15 RESIDUAL RISKS
Residual risks are those which cannot be eliminated through the pump design:
-knocks
-anomalous pressure rises
-misuse
-manoeuvring errors in the vicinity of the pump
16 REPAIRS
Before carrying out repairs on the pump it is essential to:
-turn off the mains power (follow the directions in paragraph 13)
-close the gate valves on the suction and discharge sides of the pump
-if the pumped liquid is hot, wait until the pump has cooled down to ambient temperature
-if the pumped liquid is hazardous, follow the safety procedures for handling hazardous liquids
-drain the pump casing as described in paragraph 7
-remove and clean any residues of the pumped liquid
17 DISASSEMBLY
17.1 Removing the pump from the system
Carry out the instructions in paragraph 16
-remove the nuts of the suction and discharge flanges
-remove the bolts which fix the pump to the base plate
-slip the pump out of the flexible coupling (if fitted) or remove it from the electric motor
-before lifting the pump with appropriate lifting devices, check the weight of the pump
18 ASSEMBLY
18.1 Mounting the pump in the system
-lift the pump using suitable lifting devices
-position the pump on the base plate
-reconnect to the flexible coupling or electric motor
-check the alignment as described in paragraph 10
-fix the pump to the base plate
-connect the pump to the pipework
-remount any coupling guards fitted
19 SPARE PARTS
To ensure that the pump continues to operate well as time goes on, it is advisable, when ordering the pump, to acquire the spare parts
recommended for the first maintenance operation:
mechanical seal
impeller
wear plate
set of gaskets
check valve
self-locking impeller nut
19.1 Ordering spare parts
To order spare parts, specify the following:
- type of pump
- serial number of the pump
- reference number and description of the part as shown in the exploded drawing
20 DISPOSAL
- Do not dispose the pump, or any part of it, in the environment.
- Metal parts can be recycled as scrap.
-Grease and oil must be recovered and stored as prescribed by the relevant legislation for disposal by approved agencies.
- Elastomer gaskets must be removed and disposed of in an approved waste disposal unit.
21

TRADUCTION DE LA NOTICE ORIGINALE
•
ATTENTION
NE PAS METTRE EN SERVICE LA POMPE AVANT D'AVOIR LU ET BIEN COMPRIS
CE MANUEL.
VARISCO SPA DECLINE TOUTE RESPONSABILITE EN CAS DE DOMMAGES DUS
A LA NEGLIGENCE OU A L'INOBSERVATION DES INDICATIONS FOURNIES DANS
LE PRESENT MANUEL.
VARISCO SPA NEST PAS RESPONSABLE DES DEGATS EVENTUELS PROVOQUES
PAR DES INTERPRETATIONS ERRONEES DES INSTRUCTIONS CONTENUES DANS
LE PRESENT MANUEL ET DES DOMMAGES CAUSES PAR UNE MISE EN PLACE
ERRONEE OU PAR UNE UTILISATION IMPROPRE DE LA POMPE.
INDEX
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
26
29
31
31
31
31
31
31
53
56
22

1
IDENTIFICATION
1.1
Constructeur
VARISCO S.p.A. - Terza Strada, 9 - Z.I. Nord - 35129 PADOVA - Italy
1.2
Type de pompe
Pompe centrifuge horizontale auto-amorgante avec turbine semi-ouverte permettant le passage de
corps solides.
1.3
Modele
Le modele est indiqu6 sur la plaque de la pompe
1.4
Annee de fabrication
Uannee de fabrication est indiquee sur la plaque de la pompe
1.5
Identification du manuel
Edition: 2011 /01 Revision:02 Cod.558
1.6
Donn6es reportees sur la plaque
TYPE MATR.
ITEM
Indique le modele de la Num6ro de
Numero qui retie la pompe a la
pompe et du groupe (pompe/ s6rie de la
documentation contractuelle (il
r6ducteur/ moteur) pompe
z
VTYPE
n'est pas toujours indique)
/
"
kg
0 C E MAT . ITEMPoids
du groupe (pompe et cha-
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max) kg
riot), sauf le poids de I'eau dans
Annee de production
le corps de la pompe.
vpCISCO I ISCO S.p.A.- PADOVA - I Y [phone]
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max)
Debit maximum de la Pression maximum de Puissance maximum Nombre maximum de tours de
pompe mesur6 avec le service de la pompe applicable a la pompe fonctionnement de la pompe. La
nombre maximum de mesur6e avec le nombre avec le nombre maxi- pompe ne doit jamais d6passer
tours (RPM) maximum de tours (RPM) mum de tours (RPM) ce nombre de tours
Les donnees reportees sur la plaque se referent a I'essai avec de I'eau a 20oC et une masse volumique de 1000 kg/m3
1.7 Domaine d'emploi
Pompage de liquides ayant une viscosit6 jusqu'a un maximum de 50 cSt contenant des corps solides. Ces pompes sont utilisees dans
l'industrie, le genie civil, le secteur naval, le batiment, I'agriculture et pour 1'6puration des eaux.
1.8 Oue faire en cas de panne? Telephoner au numero suivant: [phone]
2 GARANTIE
Tous Ies produits de VARISCO SpA sont garantis 12 mois a compter de la date de premiere mise en service et ,dans tous Ies cas, 18 mois
au plus a compter de la date de Iivraison. Les reparations effectu6es sous garantie n'influent pas sur le calcul de la p6riode de garantie.
La garantie concerne Ies vices de matiere et de fabrication qui compromettent le fonctionnement du produit et le rendent inappropri6 a
l'usage auquel it est destine, a condition de Ies denoncer imm6diatement et dans tous Ies cas pas au-dela de 2 jours apres Ieur apparition.
Exclusions : dommages d6rivant des caract6ristiques physiques et chimiques du liquide aspire, ainsi que Ies d6gats des parties qui
par Ieur nature ou destination sont soumises a usure ou a deterioration Qoints d'6tanch6it6, diaphragmes, vannes a vide et a pression,
pieces en caoutchouc ou plastique), ou qui dependent de I'inobservation des instructions d'utilisationet/ou d'entretien, d'une mauvaise
utilisation ou d'un entreposage inapproprie du produit, de modificationsou reparations effectuees par du personnel non express6ment
autoris6 par VARISCO SpA. La non identification du numero de serie est une cause d'exclusion de la garantie. Notre prestation de garantie
est formellement subordonn6e au fait que I'acheteur ait obtemp6r6 a toutes ses obligations jusqu'au jour de la demande et a celles qui
s'appliquent au cours de l'intervention sous garantie. La decision d'emettre une note d'avoir, r6parer ou remplacer la marchandise est prise
unilateralement par VARISCO SpA. Le retour de la marchandise ne peut titre fait que si autorise par 6crit et en port franc a VARISCO SpA
- Padoue. Tous Ies frais de d6montage/remontage du/sur le lieu de mise en place et toute autre intervention sur chantier'sont a la charge
de I'acheteur. La marchandise r6paree sera Iivr6e a l'acheteur depart usine VARISCO SpA - Padoue. La marchandise remplac6e devient la
propriW de VARISCO SpA. 11 est entendu que cette garantie remplace toutes garanties ou responsabilit6s pr6vues par la Ioi, en excluant
toute autre responsabilite de VARISCO SpA (dommages-int6rets, manque a gagner, campagnes de retrait, main d'oeuvre de I'acheteur,
arret chantier, diminution du prix de vente, etc.). En cas de litige seul le tribunal de Padoue est competent.
2.1 EXCLUSIONS DE LA GARANTIE
La garantie sera sans effet dans Ies cas suivants (en plus des conditions pr6vues selon le contrat de fourniture):
- En cas de manoeuvre erron6e imputable a l'op6rateur.
- En cas de dommage imputable a un entretien insuffisant.
- En cas d'utilisation de pieces d6tach6es non d'origine.
- Au cas ou Ies instructions d6crites dans ce manuel ne seraient pas respect6es.
Entre autres la garantie ne couvre pas Ies dommages dus a la negligence, ('inattention, la mauvaise utilisation et 1'emploi non appropri6
de la pompe. Le demontage des dispositifs de s6curit6, dont est dot6e la pompe, entraine automatiquement 1'expiration de la garantie
et des responsabilites du Constructeur.
23

3 CONSULS GENERAUX
Controler si la pompe est en bon etat a la livraison et si elle n'a pas subi de dommages durant le
transport. Controler egalement si la marchandise reque correspond a celle reportee sur le bulletin
de livraison. En cas de contestation, signaler immediatement le dommage au transporteur et
le communiquer dans les 48 heures qui suivent au siege de Padoue. Toujours signaler le type
de pompe grave sur la plaque et le numero de serie sur les communications envoyees au
constructeur.
Les pompes ne doivent titre utilisees clue pour les emplois pour lesquels le Fabricant a
precise:
- les materiaux de construction
- les conditions de fonctionnement (pression, nombre de tours, temperature, etc.)
- les secteurs d'application
Le Fabricant decline toute responsabilite en cas d'accidents ou de dommages aux animaux
ou aux biens si la machine devait We destinee a usage qui nest pas prevu dans ce manuel.
Pour les emplois qui ne sont pas precises par le Fabricant, priere de contacter le Service
Technique de VARISCO S.p.A.: [phone].
4 NORMES DE SECURITE ET DE PREVENTION DES ACCIDENTS
Toujours s'habiller de fagon appropriee en evitant les vetements larges avec
des elements qui pendent (cravate, echarpe, etc.) et peuvent se prendre dans
les organes en mouvement pour travailler a proximite de la machine. Endosser
une combinaison de travail fabriquee en respectant certaines conditions
specifiques de securite, un casque, des gants et des lunettes de protection,
des chaussures isolantes et un casque antibruit (fig. 1).
Ne pas intervenir sur le moteur lorsqu'il est en train de tourner.
Ne pas approcher les mains des organes en mouvement (ex. courroies,
joints, etc.).
Ne pas monter sur la motopompe pour effectuer une operation quelconque.
5 QUE FAIRE EN CAS D'URGENCE?
Nbrancher le courant du reseau (pour le electropompes).
Informer le personnel responsable de ('installation.
6 MODE DE TRANSPORT
6.1 Manutention et transport
La machine doit titre transportee horizontalement en respectant les normes de securite.
6.2 Soulevement
Prevoir le transport sur de tous les composants a I'aide d'elingues specifiques au moment de soulever
et de deplacer la pompe. La manutention doit titre effectuee par du personnel specialise afin de ne pas
abimer la pompe et d'eviter les accidents.
Les points de levage des differents equipements doivent titre utilises exclusivement pour
soulever la machine videe de I'eau et detachee des tuyaux. Les points de soulevement de certains
socles sont indiques en caracteres gras sur la figure 2.
A!Vitesse maximum de soulevement: Vmax < 0,5 m/s
Ne pas s'arreter ni passer en dessous de la pompe lorsqu'elle est soulevee (fig. 3).
7 STOCKAGE
En cas de stockage, mettre la pompe a I'abri ou la recouvrir d'une bache impermeable s'il faut la laisser
en plein air. Graisser les roulements pour eviter qu'ils ne rouillent (fig. 4).
Eviter ('accumulation d'humidite autour de la pompe.
Ne pas laisser le liquide dans le corps de la pompe mais le vider par le trou prevu a cet effet
(fig. 5), ou en devissant le bouchon arriere prevu sur certains modeles, car it pourrait geler
en hiver et abimer la pompe. Prendre toutes les precautions qui s'imposent pour eviter les
accidents ou les dommages avant de vider le corps de la pompe si le liquide est dangereux.
Faire tourner regulierement I'arbre pour eviter les incrustations a I'interieur de la pompe.
8 ASSEMBLAGE
Si la pompe est fournie dans la version a arbre libre (pompe avec support), it faut I'accoupler au
moteur a I'aide du joint correspondant en verifiant:
si le joint est adapte a la puissance a transmettre
si le joint est aligne correctement (voir par. 10)
si le couvre-joint est conforme aux normes de securite
la puissance nominale du moteur
la puissance absorbee par la pompe (voir plaque du moteur)
le nombre de tours du moteur (voir plaque du moteur)
le nombre de tours de la pompe.
9 INSTALLATION
Le socle du groupe electropompe doit titre ancre a une dalle de beton nivelee dans laquelle les boulons
de fondation ont ete noyes, comme d'apres le schema joint a chaque groupe qui peut titre fourni sur
demande. La dalle doit titre robuste pour pouvoir absorber n'importe quelle vibration et assez rigide
afin de maintenir I'alignement du groupe pompe/ moteur.
9.1 Montage
II est conseille en fixant le socle a la dalle de verifier si 1'ensemble est bien de niveau a I'aide d'un
niveau a bulle place sur la bride de ('orifice de refoulement de la pompe.
Adapter le plan de la dalle au socle et jamais le contraire si des ajustements s'averent necessaires.
Le corps de la pompe doit titre equipe d'un support adequat lorsque la pompe est accouplee a un
24 multiplicateur de vitesse pour 1'emploi en agriculture.
JIF
fig. 2
128
fig.3
fig. 4

9.2 Tuyaux
Nettoyer soigneusement les tuyaux avant de les relier a la pompe.
Le tuyau d'aspiration doit avoir un diametre egal a celui de ('orifice d'aspiration de la pompe (consulter Varisco pour des diametres
superieurs). Eviter, si possible, les coudes ou les etranglements pouvant limiter I'arrivee de liquide a la pompe. Ne pas monter la
soupape de pied car la pompe est equipee d'un clapet anti-retour incorpore (14) (fig. 10).
Installer la pompe le plus pres possible du Iiquide a pomper en essayant, si possible, de reduire la Iongueur du tuyau d'aspiration.
Les raccords des tuyaux en aspiration doivent titre parfaitement etanches a I'air: controler les filets, les joints des brides, les raccords
rapides, etc.
Le tuyau de refoulement doit permettre de faire sortir I'air de ('installation durant la phase d'amorgage de la pompe.
Les tuyaux d'aspiration et de refoulement doivent titre montes de fagon a ne pas creer de tensions dans le corps de la pompe.
10 ALIGNEMENT
II est important de verifier si les composants du groupe Qoint/ moteur) sont bien alignes avant de faire demarrer la pompe.
L'alignement correct est fait en usine pour les groupes avec socle. II est toutefois necessaire de le controler a nouveau sur le lieu
d'installation:
- Placer le socle sur le plan de la dalle en enfilant les tire -fonds clans les trous du socle sans serrer les boulons a fond.
- Enlever le protege joint
- Serrer les boulons des tire -fonds, verifier I'alignement comme indique sur la figure 6 et les regler, selon le type de joint, comme indique
clans les paragraphes 13.10; 13.11 et 13.12.
- Remettre le protege joint avant de faire demarrer la pompe.
desaxement desaxement
axial � radial
desaxement
In parallele
P_
1 fig. 6
11 BRANCHEMENT ELECTRIQUE
Les branchements electriques ne doivent titre effectues que par du personnel specialise.
- Se conformer aux instructions du constructeur du moteur et des appareillages electriques.
- Brancher correctement la mise a la terre du moteur et controler si le moteur electrique est protege par un coupe -circuit ayant
une puissance appropriee.
- Les moteurs electriques triphases sont normalement prevus pour titre branches en 400 V (branchement en etoile). Brancher la plaque
A bornes du moteur electrique en triangle, comme d'apres le schema joint a ce dernier, pour une alimentation en 230 V.
- Suivre les indications jointes au moteur pour les moteurs avec des tensions speciales.
- La section des cables electriques doit titre appropriee a ('amperage.
- Quand les branchements electriques sont termines, refermer la vanne du tuyau de refoulement et controler si le sens de rotation est
correct.
- La fleche sur le corps de la pompe indique le sens de rotation correct (fig. 7); inverser deux des trois cables d'alimentation si la pompe
tourne clans le sens contraire.
Sur demande, les pompes qui
doivent pomper des eaux saumatres
sont equipees d'une protection
galvanique anticorrosion qui consiste
en une serie de disques de zinc fixes
sur le trou de vidange. Controler
I'etat d'usure du zinc toutes les
1000 heures de fonctionnement et le
remplacer si c'est le cas.
Controler I'absorption du moteur
electrique, qui ne doit jamais depasser
celle indiquee sur la plaque, durant le
W V U W V U
0 0 0
Y X Z Y X Z
Y 0
Branchement en etoile Branchement en
triangle
fonctionnement de la pompe.
12 DEMARRAGE
Verifier si ('installation a ete faite correctement au niveau electrique et mecanique avant de mettre la pompe en marche.
Verifier si tous les dispositifs de securite fonctionnent correctement.
Verifier si la pompe tourne dans le bon sens (par. 11).
12.1 Controle de la garniture
Avant de faire demarrer la pompe, controler le type de garniture reporte sur la plaque de la pompe.
12.1.1 Pompes avec garniture de type 1 - 2
Les garnitures de type 1 ou 2 ont deja Me remplies de graisse au moment du montage et ne necessitent d'aucun entretien durant les
500 premieres heures de fonctionnement de la pompe.
12.1.2 Pompes avec garniture de type 3
Les garnitures de type 3 ne necessitent d'aucun entretien.
25

12.1.3 Pompes avec garniture de type 4 - 5
Les garnitures de type 4 et 5 disposent d'un circuit de lavage comme d'apres les normes
API 610 PLAN 52 — 53 (voir schema de la fig. 8).
PLAN 52 prevoit un reservoir non pressurise.
PLAN 53 prevoit un reservoir pressurise avec une pression de 1 - 2 bar superieure a celle de
service de la pompe.
Le liquide de lavage doit titre compatible avec le liquide pompe.
12.2 Remplissage du corps de la pompe
Remplir completement le corps de la pompe de liquide a pomper par le trou situe dans la partie
superieure de celui-ci (fig. 9) (un bouchon est prevu dans certains modeles). Le corps ne se vide
pas quand la pompe s'arrete et it West donc plus necessaire de le remplir.
12.3 Amorgage
Attention: ne pas faire fonctionner la pompe pendant plus de 2 minutes si elle ne s'amorce
pas afin de ne pas abimer la garniture et d'eviter la surchauffe du liquide.
Voir dans ce cas le paragraphe 14.1
Proceder comme suit quand la pompe est amorcee:
- Controler la garniture sur I'arbre: it ne doit pas y avoir de fuites si elle de type mecanique.
- Controler si le courant absorbe par le moteur ne depasse pas la valeur indiquee sur la plaque correspondante.
- Arreter la pompe et rechercher la cause de I'anomalie (voir paragraphe 14) si elle ne fonctionne pas bien.
13 ENTRETIEN
L'operateur prepose a 1'entretien doit arreter la pompe et couper le courant avant d'effectuer une operation quelconque. II doit
ensuite retablir lui-meme le courant.
Avant d'intervenir sur la machine pour des operations d'entretien, it est indispensable
- Detacher la pompe des tuyaux d'aspiration et de refoulement.
- Vider le corps de la pompe du liquide pompe par le troi prevu a cet effet (fig. 5)
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester dans le corps de la pompe, dans le porte-moteur et dans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre les
precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
70 --§
25 0
34i
°1 20.2
20
20.2 20.1
19 52 20.3
03
52.1 84
53 -----� 21 fr O
24 /-22 r<25
- -s7
0-
43 20.1 20 71
58 ^55
y08
i
I 57 06 Q
4f 1
14.1 14 \ \ 02 67.1 45.2�A a 62
47 59 06.3 61
r r 48.1 45 I 06.2
52.1 @3 \\ 1 49 08.1 60
y 68.5 55.1 { (. ' 66 07
10 01
3 68.1
53.2 27 54
53.3 5\ 6 26 17 50 11
71.2 71.1
s3 fig. 10
26

13.1 Inspection et controle
Controler regulierement si la pompe fonctionne bien en verifiant si elle est toujours en mesure de pomper correctement a I'aide
d'instruments appropries (manometre, vacuometre, amperemetre, etc.).
11 est conseille d'effectuer 1'entretien perioclique des differents organes sujets a usure, en particulier la turbine et la plaque d'usure.
13.2 Remplacement de la turbine (fig. 10)
- Vider le corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 7.
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester clans le corps de la pompe, clans le porte-moteur et clans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre
les precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
- Devisser les ecrous (52) et enlever le corps de la pompe en veillant a ne pas abimer le joint (43).
- Bloquer la turbine (03) et devisser 1'ecrou a blocage automatique (33).
- Enlever la turbine et la remplacer par une neuve.
- Remplacer eventuellement le joint (43)
- Proceder de la meme fagon mais en sens inverse pour remonter la turbine.
- Controler si la turbine est Bien placee par rapport a la plaque d'usure, comme indique au point 13.7.
13.3 Remplacement de la plaque d'usure (fig. 10)
- Vider le corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 7.
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester dans le corps de la pompe, clans le porte-moteur et clans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre
les precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
- Devisser les ecrous (52) et enlever le corps de la pompe en veillant a ne pas abimer le joint (43).
- Devisser les vis a tete hexagonale encastree (57).
- Enlever et remplacer la plaque d'usure (02).
- Remplacer eventuellement le joint (43).
- Proceder de la meme fagon mais en sens inverse pour remonter la plaque d'usure.
- Controler si la turbine est bien placee par rapport a la plaque d'usure, comme indique au point 13.7.
13.4 Remplacement de la soupape (fig. 10)
13.5
- Vider le corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 7.
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester clans le corps de la pompe, clans le porte-moteur et clans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre
les precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
- Enlever les ecrous (52.1).
- Retirer le porte-soupape (10).
- Retirer la soupape (14.1).
- Monter la soupape neuve avec la charniere tournee vers le haut.
- Nettoyer le logement de la soupape du porte-soupape (10) et le remonter.
- Certaines soupapes sont equipees d'une languette qui depasse a 1'exterieur. II faut alors soutenir le poids de la soupape en tirant la
languette au moment de fixer les ecrous.
Remplacement de la garniture de type 1 - 2 - 3 (fig. 10,11 et 12)
- Vider le corps de la pompe comme indique au par. 7.
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester clans le corps de la pompe, dans le porte-
moteur et clans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre les precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide
est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
- Devisser les ecrous (52) et enlever le corps de la pompe en veillant a ne pas abimer le
joint (43).
- Bloquer la turbine (03) et enlever I'ecrou a blocage automatique (33).
- Enlever la turbine.
- Retirer le porte-moteur (19). La partie tournante de la garniture (40) montee sur 1'entretoise
(31) s'enleve automatiquement en meme temps que celui-ci.
- Enlever la contre-face M91 ainsi que le joint corresponclant (38) du Porte-moteur.
- Demonter le pare-huile (41).
- Laver le porte-moteur avec du solvant pour enlever les residus de graisse usee et bien
nettoyer le logement du pare-huile et de la contre-face.
- Monter un pare-huile neuf sur le porte-moteur. Huiler le logement et le pare-huile pour
faciliter le montage.
- Monter la contre-face (39) et le joint (38). Mouiller le logement et le joint avec de I'alcool
pour faciliter cette operation. Se servir eventuellement d'un morceau de bois (ou d'un
outil du meme genre) pour pousser la contre-face (39) clans son logement.
- Remettre le porte-moteur dans son logement en veillant a ne par heurter la contre-
face avec Parbre car elle pourrait s'ebrecher ou se casser si elle est en ceramique.
- Fixer le porte-moteur avec les vis (45 et 45.1).
- Huiler la garniture (40), 1'entretoise (31) et enfiler la garniture sur un cote de 1'entretoise.
- Enfiler I'entretoise avec la garniture sur I'arbre en forgant un peu a cause de la legere
resistance opposee par le pare-huile.
Willer a ce que la garniture ne s'enleve pas de 1'entretoise.
- Enfiler I'anneau qui soutient la garniture (25.1). Pousser ce dernier en avant jusqu'a ce
qu'il soit possible de remonter la languette (60).
- Remonter la turbine (03), la rondelle (66) et visser I'ecrou (33).
- Controler si la turbine est bien placee par rapport a la plaque d'usure, comme indique au point 13.7.
- Remonter le joint du corps (43) en mettant de la graisse des deux cotes.
- Remonter le corps et fixer les ecrous en controlant si la turbine tourne librement.
- Remplir la chambre de lubrification de la turbine (voir par. 12.1.1; 12.1.2) de graisse.
27

13.6 Remplacement de la garniture de
type 4 - 5 (reference fig. 10, 13, 14,
15 et 16)
- Vider le corps de la pompe comme
indique au paragraphe 7.
Attention: des residus de liquide
peuvent rester dans le corps de la
pompe, clans le porte-moteur et
clans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre
les precautions qui s'imposent si le
liquide est dangereux (inflammable,
corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
- Devisser Ies ecrous (52) (fig. 10) et
enlever le corps de la pompe en .:
veillant a ne pas abimer le joint (43). C r
- Bloquer la turbine (03) et enlever
1'ecrou A blocage automatique 20.3
- Enlever la turbine. [/
- Detacher les tuyaux du circuit de U
Iavage. �.
- Fixer les goujons (25.4) qui bloquent
la garniture clans les rogements 20.2
correspondants (fig. 13). fig. 15
- Desserrer les boulons sans tete qui
bloquent la chemise sur I'arbre (fig. 14).
- Devisser les vis (20.2) qui fixent la bride de la garniture au porte-moteur (fig. 15).
- Enlever le porte-moteur (19).
- Enlever la garniture (25), 1'entretoise (31), le porte-garniture (20) et le joint (20.1).
- Remplacer le joint (20.1) s'il est abime.
Proceder de la meme fagon mais en sens inverse pour remonter la garniture
- Graisser Iegerement 1'entretoise (31) pour faciliter le montage initial de la garniture (fig. 16).
- Serrer soigneusement les vis (20.2) (fig. 15) qui fixent la bride en procedant par croix, afin d'eviter des tensions sur I'anneau fixe de la
garniture.
- Serrer les boulons sans tote avec force (fig. 14)-
- Enlever les goujons (25.4) (fg. 13) qui bloquent la garniture et les fixer sur les trous prevus A cet effet de la bride afin de les utiliser clurant
la phase de demontage.
- Remettre les tuyaux du circuit de Iavage, retablir le circuit et evacuer I'air autour de la garniture qui ne doit en aucun cas fonctionner A sec.
13.7 Position de la turbine par rapport
A la (aux) plaque/s d'usure
- La distance entre le haut des pales
de la turbine et le plan de la plaque
d'usure doit titre comprise entre 0,3
et 0,6 mm (fig. 19), quel que soft le
modele.
- Pour le modele 12", la distance entre
la turbine et les plaques d'usure
avant et arriere doit titre comprise
entre 0,6 et 1 mm (fig. 22).
Plaque
0.6. 1 mm d'usure
I
Turbine fig.22
montes entre I'anneau qui soutient la
garniture (25.1) (fig. 11) et la turbine. D'autres ajustements peuvent titre faits avec les joints du corps et la plaque d'usure arriere. Le
joint (43) (fig. 10) qui a une epaisseur de 0,5 mm permet d'obtenir la distance voulue (fig. 19).
13.8 Entretien des roulements (fig. 10)
La pompe est fournie avec les roulements dejA graisses et ceux-ci ne necessitent d'aucun entretien pendant les 500 premieres heures
de fonctionnement.
Les roulements du support doivent toujours We lubrifies de fagon appropriee mais sans utiliser trop de graisse pour ne pas provoquer
de surchauffe, ce qui les abimerait. NOTE: pour les versions JP/JE monobloc, voir ('ANNEXE 1 page 53.
Turbine fig. 19
0,3.0,6 mm
Plaque
d'usure
- II faut pur cela que les cotes A et
B des fig. 17, 18, 20 et 21 soient
le plus possible egales. II est donc
necessaire d'utiliser les anneaux de
compensation (25.2) (fig. 11) fournis
avec la garniture de rechange.
Ces anneaux servent A deplacer la
turbine vers I'avant au cas o6 elle
soit trop loin de la plaque d'usure
frontale ou trop pres de celle arriere
(quand elle est prevue). Les anneaux
de compensation doivent titre
13.9 Remplacement des roulements
- Vider le corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 7.
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester clans le corps de la pompe, clans le porte-moteur et clans le tuyau d'aspiration; prendre
les precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollu(§, etc.).
- Demonter le corps, le porte-moteur et la garniture mecanique.
- Enlever le clemi-joint d'accouplement et la clavette de I'arbre.
- Enlever le couvre roulement externe (08).
- Extraire I'arbre complet du cote du joint.
- Extraire les roulements avec 1'extracteur ou avec une presse.
28 - Proceder de la meme fagon mais en sens inverse pour remonter le roulement.

13.10 Remplacement des chevilles du joint TWIN -DISC (Serie RBD)
- Enlever la pompe de son logement.
- Enlever les chevilles usees et les remplacer par des neuves.
- Verifier 1'etat d'usure de la bride en aluminium.
- Accoupler la pompe au moteur.
- Erreur max. d'alignement: 0,7 mm.
- Indiquer le diametre de I'arbre et le type de joint au moment de commander les chevilles.
13.11 Remplacement de I'elastomere du joint SURE -FLEX (fig. 23)
- Devisser les vis qui fixent la pompe ou le moteur au socle et eloigner les deux demi-
joints.
- Enlever 1'e1astomere use et le remplacer par un neuf. S'il s'agit d'un elastomere en deux
morceaux (type S), faire en sorte que I'anneau en acier soit libre de se deplacer dans
une des deux gorges adjacentes a la denture.
- Rapprocher la pompe du moteur et faire coincider la denture du demi-joint avec celle
de 1'e1astomere.
- Compacter le joint en laissant un jeu axial de 2 mm max. pour les joints type J et de
3 mm max. pour les joints type S.
- Controler I'alignement radial et angulaire de la fagon suivante:
- radial: (fig. 23) mesurer le desalignement maximum (cote C) avec une regle posse sur
la surface externe des demi-joints et sur au moins quatre ponts de la circonference et
le ramener le plus possible a zero (voir tableau).
- angulaire: (fig. 23) mesurer la distance entre les deux demi-joints sur au moins quatre
points avec une jauge et ramener la difference (b-a) le plus possible vers le zero (voir
tableau).
- Serrer les vis qui fixent la pompe ou le moteur au socle.
- Indiquer le type de joint (grave a l'interieur des demi-joints) et le diametre de I'arbre au
moment de commander les pieces detachees.
13.12 Remplacement des elastomeres du joint GBF (fig. 24)
- Devisser les vis qui fixent la pompe ou le moteur au socle et eloigner les deux demi-
joints.
- Enlever les chevilles usees et les remplacer par des neuves en les fixant dans leur
logement avec un peu de colle.
- Rapprocher la pompe du moteur jusqu'a la fermeture complete du joint et reculer de
2/3 mm pour detacher les demi-joints.
- Serrer les vis qui fixent la pompe ou le moteur au socle.
- Indiquer le diametre de I'arbre et le type de joint au moment de commander les chevilles.
14 MAUVAIS FONCTIONNEMENT. CAUSES ET SOLUTIONS
Attention: avant d'examiner les causes possibles de mauvais fonctionnement,
verifier si les instruments de controle (vacuometre, manometre, compte-tours,
mesureur de debit, tableau electrique de mesure, etc.) fonctionnent correctement.
14.1 La pompe ne s'amorce pas
1 Le corps de la pompe est vide ou n'est pas suffisamment plein
remplir le corps de la pompe par le trou de remplissage (fig. 9).
2 Le liquide dans le corps de la pompe chauffe trop
ajouter du liquide froid dans le corps de la pompe par le trou de remplissage (fig. 9).
3 Infiltrations possibles d'air dans les jonctions ou presence de fissures dans le
tuyau d'aspiration
verifier si les jonctions sont bien serrees et controler le tuyau d'aspiration.
4 Le tuyau de refoulement est sous pression
evacuer I'air du tuyau de refoulement.
5 Le nombre de tours de la pompe est bas
n'augmenter le nombre de tours qu'apres avoir controle les donnees sur le contrat et
les courbes caracteristiques de la pompe.
6 La turbine est usee ou cassee
controler 1'etat de la turbine par le trou d'inspection (26) (fig. 10) ou demonter le corps
de la pompe comme indique au parag. 13.2.
7 La dent d'amorgage est usee
demonter le corps de la pompe comme indique au par. 13.2. Faire un report de
soudure qui devra ensuite titre profile. Remplacer le corps si la dent d'amorgage est trop usee.
8 Le filtre en aspiration 6ventuel dolt titre bouch6
enlever les residus.
9 La hauteur d'aspiration est excessive
la reduire.
10 De fair entre par la garniture
demonter la garniture et la nettoyer (voir par. 13.5 et 13.6); remplacer la garniture si le mauvais fonctionnement persiste.
11 Des corps strangers bouchent la turbine
demonter le corps de la pompe et enlever les corps strangers
Type de
joint
Vitesse
max.
Couple max. dNm
Service
Service
(tours/min)
Continu
Intermittent
8 S
4500
17
2
10 S
4000
31
30
loss
4000
31
30
Ills
3500
48
62
14 S
2800
94
121
r
..� •-
Elastombre
-
II �1 IIIIII
1 � III
Type de
joint
®®®
fig. 24
Elastomere
L
Type de joint
Couple max. kgm
tours/min
14
15
4800
20
25
4400
27
40
4100
40
60
3500
55
80
3300
88
110
3000
110
150
2700
145
190
2500
180
240
2200
250
300
2150
3301
400
2000
29

14.2 La pompe ne donne aucun debit
12 La pompe ne s'est pas amorese
voir les causes reportees au point 14.1.
13 La hauteur d'slsvation requise par ('installation est superieure a celle prevue sur le projet de la pompe
revoir le projet de ('installation ou le choix de la pompe.
14 Pertes de charge excessives en aspiration
revoir la distribution des coudes, des soupapes, des etranglements, etc.; augmenter le diametre des tuyaux si necessaire.
15 Des corps strangers bouchent la turbine
demonter le corps de la pompe et enlever les corps strangers.
16 Les tuyaux d'aspiration/ de refoulement sont sans doute bouchss ou engorges
localiser 1'endroit bouche ou engorge et le nettoyer.
14.3 La pompe n'a pas un debit suffisant
17 Infiltrations d'air dans le tuyau d'aspiration
verifier si les jonctions sont bien serrees et controler le tuyau d'aspiration.
18 La turbine et/ou la plaque d'usure est usse
la remplacer en demontant la pompe comme indique aux paragraphes (13.2 et 13.3).
19 Le diametre du tuyau d'aspiration est trop petit
remplacer le tuyau d'aspiration.
Voir les autres causes possibles au paragraphe 14.2.
14.4 La pompe ne fournit pas une pression suffisante
20 La viscosite du liquide est superieure a celle prevue
contacter le constructeur de la pompe apres avoir mesure la viscosite du liquide qui ne doit pas titre superieure a 50 cSt pour les
pompes centrifuges.
Voir les autres causes possibles au point 5 du paragraphe 14.1 et au paragraphe 14.2.
14.5 La pompe absorbe trop de puissance
21 La vitesse de rotation est trop 6levse
veiller a ce que la vitesse de rotation soit correcte.
22 La pompe fonctionne avec des donnses diffsrentes de celles spscifises par contrat
controler les conditions de fonctionnement de la pompe et les comparer a celles de la plaque.
23 Le poids specifique du liquide est supsrieur a celui indique
mesurer le poids specifique du liquide et le comparer a celui fixe par contrat.
24 Mauvais alignement du groupe
controler si I'alignement du groupe est correct comme indique au paragraphe 10.
25 Frottements internes possibles entre les organes tournants et ceux fixes
demonter le corps de la pompe comme indique au par. 13.2 et verifier si les surfaces sont sujettes a un frottement quelconque.
26 Corps strangers dans la turbine
demonter le corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 13.2 et enlever les corps strangers
14.6 La pompe vibre et est bruyante
27 La pompe fonctionne avec un debit trop bas
controler le reglage des soupapes de ('installation ainsi que ('indication du manometre et du vacuometre.
28 La pompe ou les tuyaux ne sont pas fixes de fagon rigide
controler si les tuyaux de ('installation sont serres correctement.
29 La pompe est en cavitation
voir le paragraphe 14.2 et les causes possibles au paragraphe 14.1
30 Corps strangers dans la turbine
demonter le corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 13.2 et enlever les corps strangers.
14.7 La pompe se bloque
31 Ennuis mscaniques
controler si I'arbre, les joints, le moteur, les poulies eventuelles, les courroies, les multi pl icateurs/ reducteurs, etc. sont en bon etat.
32 Corps strangers dans la turbine
controler I'interieur du corps de la pompe par le trou d'inspection (26) (fig. 10) ou demonter le corps de la pompe comme indique au
paragraphe 13.2.
14.8 Les roulements ne durent pas longtemps
33 absence de lubrification
lubrifier les roulements comme indique au paragraphe 13.8.
34 corps strangers dans les roulements
remplacer les roulements comme indique au paragraphe 13.9.
35 Les roulements sont rouillss
remplacer les roulements comme indique au paragraphe 13.9.
14.9 La garniture fuit
36 Garniture type 1 - 2
Cette garniture est indiquee pour le pompage de liquides troubles ou contenant des substances abrasives et des produits
petroliferes ayant une temperature jusqu'a 110°C; graisser la garniture toutes les 500 heures a I'aide du graisseur a biller jusqu'a
ce que la graisse sorte. La garniture peut fonctionner a sec pendant 2 minutes si elle est bien graissee. Remplacer la garniture (voir
paragraphe 13.5) s'il y a fuite de liquide durant le fonctionnement.
37 Garniture type 3
Elle n'a besoin d'aucun type d'entretien. Remplacer la garniture (voir par. 13.5) en cas de fuite de liquide.
30

38 Garniture avec circuit de lavage de type 4 - 5
Avant de mettre la pompe en marche, relier la prise du circuit de lavage (qui se trouve sur la garniture) a la ligne du liquide correspondant
avec une pression d'au moins 2 bar en plus par rapport a celle de service de la pompe. Controler si le liquide arrive regulierement
dans la garniture avant de faire demarrer la pompe et durant son fonctionnement. Le circuit de lavage permet de diluer au maximum le
produit pompe a proximite de la garniture afin de la faire fonctionner de fagon optimale. Si la pompe ne dois pas fonctionner pendant
plusieurs jours, la vider comme indique au paragraphe 7 et la laver entierement grace au trou superieur de remplissage (fig. 9).
14.10 Surchauffe de la garniture
La pompe ne s'amorce pas (voir paragraphes 14.1 et 14.9).
14.11 Les parties en caoutchouc du joint s'usent rapidement
Controler si le groupe est aligne correctement, comme indique au paragraphe 10.
15 RISQUES RESIDUELS
Les risques residuels sont ceux qu'il est impossible d'eliminer en concevant la pompe:
- chocs
- surpression anormale
- mauvais fonctionnement anormal
- erreurs de manoeuvre a proximite de la pompe.
16 REPARATIONS
II est indispensable d'effectuer les operations suivantes avant d'intervenir sur la machine:
- couper le courant (intervenir comme indique au paragraphe 13)
- refermer les vannes en aspiration et refoulement de la pompe
- laisser la pompe se refroidir a la temperature ambiante si le liquide pompe est chaud
- se conformer aux normes de securite pour la manipulation des liquides dangereux si le liquide pompe est dangereux
- vider le liquide pompe du corps de la pompe comme indique au paragraphe 7
- nettoyer le corps de la pompe et enlever les residus eventuels du liquide pompe.
17 DEMONTAGE
17.1 Demontage de la pompe de ('installation
Proceder comme indique au paragraphe 16.
- Enlever les boulons des brides aspirante et foulante
- Enlever les vis qui fixent la pompe au socle
- Retirer la pompe du joint eventuel ou la demonter du moteur electrique
- Se referer au tableau du poids des pompes avant de soulever la pompe avec des moyens appropries
18 MONTAGE
18.1 Montage de la pompe sur ('installation
- Soulever la pompe avec des moyens de soulevement appropries
- Placer la pompe sur le socle
- Retablir les raccordements eventuels avec le joint ou avec le moteur electrique
- Controler I'alignement comme indique au paragraphe 10
- Fixer la pompe au socle
- Relier la pompe aux tuyaux
- Monter les couvre-joints eventuels
19 PIECES DETACHEES
II est conseille de commander les pieces detachees ci-dessous en meme temps que la pompe pour pouvoir eventuellement intervenir
sur le groupe et le maintenir en parfait etat.
- garniture
- turbine
- plaque d'usure
- serie complete de joints
- soupape a clapet
- ecrou a blocage automatique de la turbine
19.1 Comment commander les pieces detachees
Pour commander les pieces detachees, indiquer:
- le type de pompe
- le numero de serie de la pompe
- le numero de reference et de dessin de la piece, comme indique dans les formulaires de commande des pieces detachees.
20 DEMOLITION
- Ne pas jeter la pompe, ou ses parties, n'importe ou.
- Les parties metalliques peuvent titre fondues pour en faire de la matiere premiere.
- La graisse et I'huile doivent titre recueillies, stockees et recyclees conformement aux lois en vigueur.
- Les joints en elastomere doivent titre enleves et jetes dans une dechetterie autorisee.
31

OBERSETZUNG DER ORIGINALBETRIEBSANLEITUNG
•
ACHTUNG
DIE PUMPE NICHT IN BETRIEB NEHMEN, BEVOR MAN DIESES HANDBUCH
GELESEN UND GUT VERSTANDEN HAT.
VARISCO SPA HAFTET NICHT FOR SCHADEN INFOLGE FAHRLASSIGKEIT UND
NICHTBEACHTUNG DER BESTIMMUNGEN DIESES HANDBUCHS.
VARISCO SPA HAFTET NICHT FOR ETWAIGE SCHADEN INFOLGE DER FALSCHEN
AUSLEGUNG DER IN DIESEM HANDBUCH STEHENDEN ANWEISUNGEN
UND FOR SCHADEN INFOLGE EINER FALSCHEN INSTALLATION BZW. DES
BESTIMMUNGSWIDRIGEN GEBRAUCHS DER PUMPE.
INHALT
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
36
39
41
41
41
41
41
41
53
57
32

1 IDENTIFIZIERUNG
1.1 Hersteller
VARISCO S.p.A. - Terza Strada, 9 - Z.I. Nord - 35129 PADOVA - Italy
1.2 Pumpentyp
Selbstansaugende Kreiselpumpe mit horizontaler Achse, mit Halboffenes Laufrad fur den Durchlass von Festkorpern.
1.3 Modell
Das Modell wird auf dem Typenschild der Pumpe angegeben.
1.4 Baujahr
Das Baujahr wird auf dem Typenschild der Pumpe angegeben
1.5 Identifizierung des Handbuches
Ausgabe : 2011/01 Rev.: 02
1.6 Daten auf dem Typenschild
TYPE
identifiziert das Modell der
Pumpe und des Aggregats
(Pumpe/U ntersetzu n g/Motor)
Baujahr
Kod. 558
MATR.
dies ist die
Seriennummer der
Pumpe
TYPE
O C E MAT . ITEM'
m3/h (max.) m (max.) kW RPM (max) kg
Vww!p I IS OO S.p.A.- PADOVA - I Y +39 049 _8Z14J11
ITEM
dies ist die Nummer, die die Pumpe
mit den Vertragsunterlagen verbin-
det (wird nicht immer angegeben)
kg
dies ist das Gewicht des
Aggregats (Pumpe und Wagen),
ohne das Gewicht des Wassers
im Korper der Pumpe.
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max)
dies ist der max. dies ist der max. dies ist die max. Leistung, die dies ist die max. Drehzahl fOr den
Durchsatz der Pumpe, Betriebsdruck der Pumpe, bei der max. Drehzahl (U/min.) Betrieb der Pumpe. Die Pumpe
gemessen bei der max. gemessen bei der max. an die Pumpe angelegt wer- darf nie these Drehzahl Ober-
Drehzahl (U/min.) Drehzahl (U/min.) den kann schreiten
Die Daten auf dem Typenschild beziehen sich auf eine Abnahmeprufung mit einer Wassertemperatur von 20° C und einer
Volumenmasse von 1.000 kg/m3
1.7 Anwendungsbereich
Pumpen zum Pumpen von FlOssigkeiten mit einer Viskositat von bis zu50 cSt mit enthaltenen Festkorpern. Werden in der Industrie, im
Baugewerbe, im Schiffbau, bei der Wasseraufbereitung, im Wohnungsbau und in der Landwirtschaft eingesetzt.
1.8 Bei Funktionsst6rungen die folgende Nummer anrufen: [phone]
2 GARANTIE
Alle Produkte der VARISCO SpA stehen auf die Dauer von 12 Monaten ab dem Datum der ersten Betriebnahme und auf jeden Fall nicht uber 18
Monate ab dem Lieferdatum unter Garantie. Die in der Garantiezeit ausgefuhrten Reparaturen unterbrechen nicht den Ablauf der Garantiezeit. Die
Garantie betrifft Material- und Fabrikationsdefekte, die den Betrieb des Produkts in Frage stellen und es ungeeignet fur den Gebrauch machen,
fur den das Produkt bestimmt ist, vorausgesetzt these Mangel werden rechtzeitig und nicht spater als 2 Tage nach ihrer Entdeckung gemeldet.
Ausgenommen von der Garantie sind Schaden, die sich aus den physikalischen und chemischen Eigenschaften des F6rdermediums ergeben,
wie auch die Beschadigungen der Teile, die ihrer Beschaffenheit oder ihrer Bestimmung nach VerschleiB unterliegen (Dichtungen, Membranen,
Vakuum-und Druckventile, Teile aus Gummi und Kunststoff), oder die von der Nichtbeachtung der Gebrauchs- und Wartungsanleitungen, der
falschen oder unangemessenen Benutzung bzw. Lagerhaltung des Produkts oder Anderungen Oder Reparaturen des Produkts abhangen, die
durch Personal ausgef0hrt wurden, das nicht ausdriicklich von der VARISCO SpA dazu befugt worden ist. Eine nicht eindeutig identifizierbare
Seriennummer fuhrt zum Ausschluss der Garantie. Unsere Garantieleistung hangt auf jeden Fall immer davon ab, class der Kaufer seine
Verpflichtungen erfilllt hat, die bis zum Tag der Garantieanforderung zu erfiillen waren und die im Laufe des Eingriffs wahrend der Garantie fallig
werden. Der Beschluss, eine Gutschrift auszustellen, die Ware zu reparieren Oder zu ersetzen, wird nach freiem Ermessen von der VARISCO
SpA getroffen. Die Retournierung der Ware ist erst nach einer schriftlichen Genehmigung zulassig. Die Ware muss in diesem Fall frachtfrei an
VARISCO SpA, Padua zu Versand gebracht werden. Alle Kosten fur den Aus- und Wiedereinbau des Produkts am Installationsort und jeden
anderen Einriff auf der Baustelle gehen zu Lasten des Kaufers. Die reparierte und ausgetauschte Ware wird dem Kaufer ab Werk VARISCO SpA,
Padua ausgeliefert. Die ausgetauschte Ware wird Eigentum der VARISCO SpA. Es versteht sich von selbst, class die oben stehende Garantie alle
anderen Garantien oder Haftungen aufnimmt und ersetzt, die gesetzlich vorgesehen sind. Sie schlieSt jede andere Haftung der VARISCO SpA
aus (Schadensersatz, Gewinnausfall, R(icknahmeaktionen, Lohnkosten des Kaufers, Stillstand der Baustelle, Verringerung des Verkaufspreises
etc.). Bei Streitfrage ist nur und ausschlie6lich das Gericht Padua zustandig.
2.1 AUSSCHLUSS DER GARANTIE
Die Garantie verfallt (neben den Fallen, die im Liefervertrag vorgesehen sind):
- wenn es zu einer Fehlbedienung kommt, filr die der Bediener verantwortlich ist.
- wenn es zu einem Schaden kommt, der auf unzureichencler Wartung beruht.
- wenn Ersatzteile benutzt werden, die kein Original sind.
- wenn die Anweisungen, die in diesem Handbuch stehen, nicht beachtet werden.
Ebenfalls von der Garantie ausgeschlossen sind die Schaden, die auf Nachlassigkeit, mangelnder Pflege, falschem Gebrauch und
bestimmungswidriger Benutzung der Pumpe beruhen. Der Ausbau der Sicherheitsvorrichtungen, mit denen die Pumpe ausgestattet ist,
fUhrt automatisch zum Verfall der Garantie und der Herstellerhaftung.
33

3 ALLGEMEINE VORSCHRIFTEN
Beim Empfang sofort den Zustand des Materials kontrollieren, insbesondere auf eventuelle
Transportschaden. AuBerdem die genaue Obereinstimmung mit den Angaben auf dem
Lieferschein OberprOfen. Im Falle von Beanstandungen den Schaden sofort dem Spediteur
mitteilen and innerhalb von 48 Stunden dem Firmensitz in Padua melden.
Bei alien Mitteilungen immer den Typ der Pumpe angeben, der in das entsprechende Schild
eingestanzt ist, oder die Seriennummer.
Die Pumpen durfen ausschlief3lich fur die Zwecke eingesetzt werden, die der Hersteller
angegeben hat:
- die Konstruktionsmaterialien
- die Betriebsbedingungen (Druck, Drehzahl, Temperatur usw.)
- die Anwendungsbereiche
Jede andere Verwendungsweise, fOr die die Maschine eingesetzt wird and die im
vorliegenden Handbuch nicht enthalten ist, entbindet den Hersteller von jeder Haftung fur
Sachschaden oder Verletzungen von Menschen oder Tieren.
Bei vom Hersteller nicht angegebenen Einsatzweisen die technische Abteilung von VARISCO
S.p.A. kontaktieren: [phone].
4 NORMEN ZUR SICHERHEIT UND UNFALLVERHOTUNG
Bei der Arbeit in der Nahe der Maschine angemessene Kleidung tragen and weite Kleidungsstucke mit losen Teilen (Krawatte, Schal usw.)
vermeiden, die sich in den beweglichen Bauteilen verfangen k6nnen. Arbeitskleidung tragen, die den Sicherheitsbestimmungen entspricht:
Handschuhe, isolierende Schuhe, Billen, Geh6rschutz and Helm (Abb. 1)
Keine Wartungsarbeiten am Motor vornehmen, wenn dieser in Betrieb M.
Die Hande nie den in Bewegung befindlichen Bauteilen (zum Beispiel
Riemen, Kupplungen usw.) annahern.
Nicht auf die Motorpumpe steigen, um Eingriffe vorzunehmen.
5 BEI NOTFALLEN
Die Spannung der Leitung abschalten (bei Elektropumpen).
Das fOr die Anlage verantwortliche Personal benachrichtigen.
6 BEWEGUNG UND TRANSPORT
6.1 Transportmodalitat
Die Maschine muss in horizontaler Lage and unter sicheren Bedingungen
6.2
I I
Abb. 2
transportiert werden.
Inbetriebnahme
Wahrend der Eingriffe zur Inbetriebnahme and der Wartung muss ein sicherer Transport aller Komponenten unter Benutzung geeigneter
Anschlagungen sichergestellt werden. Die Bewegung muss von Fachpersonal vorgenommen werden, um Beschadigungen der Pumpe
sowie die Verletzung des Personals zu vermeiden.
Die Hebepunkte der verschiedenen Ausrustungen dOrfen ausschlief3lich zum Heben der von den
Leitungen getrennen Maschine verwendet werden, aus der das Wasser abgelassen wurde. Auf
Abbildung 2 werden die Hebepunkte einiger Untergestellen in fett dargestellt. Abb.3
! Max. Hubgeschwindigkeit: Vmax s 0,5 m/s
Nicht unter der Pumpe durchgehen oder sich darunter aufhalten, wenn sie angehoben ist! (Abb. 3)
7 LAGERUNG
Im Falle der Lagerung die Pumpe in einem geschlossenen Raum unterbringen; bei der Lagerung der
Pumpe im Freien mit einer undurchlassigen Plane abdecken and die Lager schmieren, um Rostbildung
zu vermeiden (Abb. 4). Ansammlung von Feuchtigkeit im Innern der Pumpe verhindern
Den Pumpenkorper nicht mit Flussigkeit gefUllt lassen. Durch die Klappe (Abb. 5) and den
hinteren Stopfen entleeren, die bei einigen Modellen vorhanden sind. In den Wintermonaten
konnte die Pumpe einfrieren, was zu Beschadigungen derselben fuhren kann. Die erforderlichen
MaBnahmen zur Vermeidung von Beschadigungen and Unfallen ergreifen, falls die Flussigkeit
gefahrlich ist. In regelm5f3igen Abstanden die Welle drehen, um Verkrustungen im Innern der
Pumpe zu vermeiden.
8 MONTAGE
Falls die Pumpe in der Ausfuhrung mit freier Welle (Pumpe mit Halterung) geliefert wird, so muss sie mit
der Kupplung an den Elektromotor angebracht werden; dabei muss Oberproft werden:
- Kupplung, die fur die zu Obertragende Leistung angemessen ist.
- die korrekte Ausrichtung der Kupplung (siehe Abschnitt 10).
- Kupplungsabdeckung nach Sicherheitsnorm.
- die Nennleistung des Motors.
- die Leistungsaufnahme des Motors (siehe Typenschild des Motors).
- die Drehzahl des Motors (siehe Typenschild des Motors).
- Seriennummer der Pumpe.
9 INSTALLATION
Das Untergestell des Aggregats der Elektropumpe muss an dem nivellierten Betonboden verankert
werden, in den die Fundamentschrauben unter Beachtung des Plans eingelassen worden sind, der
jedem Aggregat beiliegt oder auf Anfrage geliefert werden kann. Der Boden muss ausreichend stark
sein, um alle Vibrationen aufzunehmen and so starr, class die richtige Ausrichtung des Aggregats
Pumpe/Motor gewahrleistet ist.
9.1 Montage
Wahrend der Verankerung des Untergestells am Boden sollte die Ebenheit mit Hilfe einer Wasserwaage
kontrolliert werden, die Ober dem Flansch des Auslassstutzens der Pumpe aufgelegt wird.
Falls Anpassungen erforderlich sind, so wird der Boden an das Untergestell angepasst, nie das
Untergestell an den Boden.
Der Pumpenkorper muss mit einer geeigneten Halterung ausgestattet werden, wenn er mit
34 DrehzahlObersetzungen fOr den Einsatz in der Landwirtschaft verwendet wird.
�I
Abb. 4

9.2 Leitungen
Die Leitungen vor dem AnschlieBen an die Pumpe sorgfaitig reinigen.
Die Ansaugleitung muss einen Durchmesser aufweisen, der dem Durchmesser des Ansaugstutzens der Pumpe entspricht (fur gr6l3ere
Durchmesser Varisco konsultieren). Falls moglich Kurven, Kniestucke oder Drosselungen vermeiden, die den Zufluss der Flussigkeit
zur Pumpe behindern konnen. kein Bodenventil montieren: Die Pumpe weist ein integriertes Ruckschlagventil (14) (Abb. 10) auf. Die
Pumpe so nahe wie moglich an der zu pumpenden Flussigkeit installieren and wo moglich versuchen, die Lange der Ansaugleitung
zu reduzieren. Die Anschlusse der Ansaugleitungen mussen vollkommen luftdicht sein. Die Gewinde, die Dichtung der Flansche, die
Schnellkupplungen usw. kontrollieren.
Die Auslassleitung muss das Auswerfen der Luft aus der Anlage wahrend der Phase des Ansaugens der Pumpe gestatten.
Die Ansaug- and Auslassleitungen werden so montiert, dass sie keine Spannungen im Pumpenkorper erzeugen.
10 AUSRICHTUNG
Vor der Inbetriebnahme der Pumpe muss die Ausrichtung der Komponenten des Aggregats (Kupplung/Motor) kontrolliert
werden.
Bei den Aggregaten mit Untergestell wird die genaue Ausrichtung im Werk vorgenommen; die Ausrichtung sollte jedoch bei der Ankunft
am Installationsort erneut kontrolliert werden.
- Das Untergestell auf den Boden aufsetzen and die Tiefzieher in die Bohrungen des Untergestells einfOhren, ohne die Schrauben fest
anzuziehen.
- Die Kupplungsabdeckung entfernen.
- Die Schrauben der Tiefzieher anziehen, die Ausrichtung wie auf Abbildung 6 angegeben uberprufen and in Abhangigkeit vom Typ der Kupplung
wie in den Abschnitten 13.10, 13.11 and 13.12 angegeben einstellen.
- Vor dem Starten die Kupplungsabdeckung wieder anbringen.
Achseverschiebung Achsverschiebung
radial
Achsverschiebung
parallel
1 Abb.6
11 ELEKTRISCHER ANSCHLUSS
Die elektrischen Anschlusse durfen ausschliel3lich von Fachpersonal vorgenommen werden.
- Die Anweisungen des Herstellers des Motors and der elektrischen Bauteile beachten.
- Die Erdung des Motors korrekt anschlieBen and sicherstellen, dass der Elektromotor mit einem Motorschutzschalter mit geeigneter
Leistung geschutzt wird.
- Die Drehstrommotoren sind normalerweise for den Anschluss an 400 V (Sternanschluss) vorbereitet. Bei der Speisung mit 230 V mit einem
Dreiecksanschluss die Klemmleiste an der Unterseite des Elektromotors gem5B beiliegendem Schaltplan anschliel3en.
- Bei Motoren, die mit besonderen Spannungen geliefert werden, die dem Motor beiliegenden Anweisungen beachten.
- Der Querschnitt der Elektrokabel muss der Stromstarke angemessen sein.
- Nach der AusfOhrung der elektrischen Anschlusse den Schieber der Auslassleitung schlie6en and die korrekte Rotationsrichtung uberprufen.
- Der Pfeil auf dem Pumpenkorper zeigt die korrekte Rotationsrichtung an (Abb. 7); zwei der drei Leiter der Speisung miteinander vertauschen,
falls sich die Pumpe in die falsche Richtung dreht.
Auf Anfrage werden die Pumpen, die
Salzwasser pumpen mussen, mit einer
galvanische Antikorrosionsbehandlung
versehen, die aus einer Reihe von
an der Auslassklappe angebrachten
Zinkscheiben besteht. Alle 1.000
Betriebsstunden muss der
Abnutzungszustand des Zinks
Oberpruft werden; gegebenenfalls
ersetzen. Wahrend des Betriebs
der Pumpe sicherstellen, dass die
Leistungsaufnahme des Elektromotors
den auf dem Typenschild angegebenen
w V U w V U
o O O Q Q Q
O==C==C) (Iljll �II Ilj �II Ilj
Y X Z Y X Z
Y A
Sternanschluss Dreieckanschluss
Wert nicht Obersteigt.
12 STARTEN
Vor der Inbetriebnahme der Pumpe sicherstellen, dass die Anlage unter elektrischem and mechanischen Gesichtspunkt
ordnungsgem5B fertiggestellt worden ist.
Sicherstellen, dass samtliche Sicherheitssysteme aktiv sind.
Die korrekte Rotationsrichtung der Pumpe sicherstellen (Abschnitt 11)
12.1 Kontrolle der Dichtigkeit
Vor dem Starten der Pumpe den Typ der montierten Dichtung kontrollieren, der auf dem Typenschild der Pumpe angegeben wird.
12.1.1 Pumpen mit Dichtung Typ 1 - 2
Die Dichtungen vom Typ 1 oder 2 werden bereits wahrend der Montage mit Fett gef011t; sie machen wahrend der ersten 500
Betriebsstunden der Pumpe keine Wartung erforderlich.
12.1.2 Pumpen mit Dichtung Typ 3
Die Dichtungen vom Typ 3 machen keine Wartung erforderlich.
35

12.1.3 Pumpen mit Dichtung vom Typ 4 - 5
Die Dichtungen vom Typ 4 and 5 werden nach Norm API 610 PLAN 52 - 53 gespOlt (siehe Plan
auf Abb. 8)
PLAN 52 sieht einen nicht unter Druck stehenden Behalter vor
PLAN 53 sieht einen Behalter vor, der unter einem Druck steht, der 1 - 2 bar hoher als der
Betriebsdruck der Pumpe ist.
Der SpOlfliissigkeit muss mit der gepumpten Flussigkeit kompatibel sein.
12.2 Fullen des Pumpenkorpers
Den Pumpenkorper durch die entsprechencle Offnung auf der Oberseite des K6rpers (Abb.9)
vollstanclig mit der zu pumpenden FlOssigkeit fullen (bei einigen Modellen ist ein Stopfen
vorgesehen). Bei stehender Pumpe entleert sich der Korper nicht and daher ist das Fullen nicht
erforderlich.
12.3 Ansaugen
Achtung: Falls die Pumpe nicht ansaugt, so dart sie nicht langer als zwei Minuten betrieben
werden, um eine Uberhitzung der Flussigkeit and eine Beschadigung der Dichtung zu
vermeiden. Im Falle der ausbieibenden Ansaugung wird auf Abschnitt 14.1 verwiesen.
Mit angesaugter Pumpe:
- Die Dichtung der Welle kontrollieren: bei mechanischen Dichtungen dOrfen keine Lecks vorhanden sein
- Sicherstellen, class der Wert der Stromaufnahme des Motors den Wert auf dem Typenschild des Motors nicht Obersteigt.
- Falls die Pumpe nicht normal zu funktionieren scheint, so muss sie angehalten werden, um die Ursachen zu suchen. (siehe Abschnitt 14 )
13 WARTUNG
Die Wartung muss bei stehender Maschine vorgenommen werden; dazu die Spannung unterbrechen; es muss sichergestellt
werden, dass die Spannung nicht von Dritten wieder eingeschaltet werden kann.
Vor der Durchf0hrung von Wartungsarbeiten an der Maschine mussen die folgenden Arbeiten vorgenommen werden:
- Klemmen Sie die Pumpe von der Ansaugleitung and der Auslassleitung ab.
- Entleeren Sie den Pumpenkorper von der gepumpten Flussigkeit durch die Auslassklappe (Abb. 5)
Achtung: Es k6nnen FlOssigkeitsruckstande im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei
gefahrlichen (entflammbaren, atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) FlOssigkeiten die erforderlichen MaBnahmen ergreifen.
70-0
25 0
34i
°1 20.2
20
20.2 20.1
19 52 20.3
03
52.1 84
53 -----� 21 fr O
24 /-22 r<25
- -s7
0-
43 20.1 20 71
58 ^55
y08
i
I 57 06 Q
4f 1
14.1 14 \ \ 02 67.1 45.2�A a 62
47 59 06.3 61
r r 48.1 45 I 06.2
52.1 @3 \\ 1 49 08.1 60
y 68.5 55.1 { (. ' 66 07
10 01
3 68.1
48-
53.2 06.1
27 54
53.3 52617 50 \71.1
16 63 1 71.2 Abb. 10
36

13.1 Inspektion and Kontrolle
In regelmABigen Abstanden den ordnungsgemABen Betrieb der Pumpe mit den Instrumenten der Anlage (Manometer, Vakuummesser,
Amperemeter usw.) kontrollieren, um sicherzustellen, class die Pumpe stets einsatzbereit ist.
Es wird empfohlen, verschiedene Bauteile in regelmd6igen Abstanden zu kontrollieren, vor allem das Laufrad and den
Verschleil3teller.
13.2 Ersetzung des Laufrades (Abb. 10)
- Den Pumpenk6rper entleeren wie in Abschnitt. 7.
Achtung: Es k6nnen Fliissigkeitsruckstancle im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei
gefahrlichen (entflammbaren, atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) Flussigkeiten die erforderlichen MaBnahmen ergreifen.
- Die Muttern (52) 16sen and den Pumpenk6rper entfernen; dabei darauf achten, class die Dichtung (43) nicht beschadigt wird.
- Das Laufrad (03) Blockieren and die selbstblockierende Mutter (33) abschrauben.
- Das Laufrad entfernen and mit einem neuen ersetzen.
- gegebenenfalls die Dichtung (43) ersetzen.
- Beim Einbau in umgekehrter Reihenfolge vorgehen.
- Die genaue Position des Laufrades mit Bezug auf den VerschleiBteller kontrollieren, wie in Punkt 13.7 angegeben.
13.3 Ersetzung des Verschleil3tellers (Abb. 10)
- Den Pumpenk6rper entleeren wie in Abschnitt. 7.
Achtung: Es k6nnen FlOssigkeitsruckstancle im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei
gefahrlichen (entflammbaren, atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) Flussigkeiten die erforderlichen Mal3nahmen ergreifen.
- Die Muttern (52) 16sen and den Pumpenk6rper entfernen; dabei darauf achten, class die Dichtung (43) nicht beschadigt wird;
- Die Innensechskantschrauben (57) 16sen
- Den Verschleil3teller (02) ausbauen and ersetzen
- Gegebenenfalls die Dichtung (43) ersetzen
- Beim Einbau in umgekehrter Reihenfolge vorgehen.
- Die genaue Position des Laufrades mit Bezug auf den Verschleil3teller kontrollieren, wie in Punkt 13.7 angegeben.
13.4 Ersetzung des Ventils (Abb. 10)
- Den Pumpenk6rper entleeren, wie in Abschnitt. 7.
Achtung: Es k6nnen Flussigkeitsriickstande im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei
gefahrlichen (entflammbaren, atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) Fliissigkeiten die erforderlichen Mal3nahmen ergreifen.
- die Muttern (52.1) entfernen
- die Ventilhalterung (10) herausnehmen
- das Ventil (14.1) herausnehmen
- das neue Ventil mit deco Scharnier nach oben einsetzen
- den Ventilsitz der Ventilhalterung (10) reinigen and wieder einsetzen
- einige Ventile weisen eine Feder auf, die nach aul3en ubersteht; in diesem Fall muss beim Anziehen der Muttern das Gewicht des Ventils
Burch Ziehen der Feder getragen werden.
13.5 Ersetzung der Dichtung vom Typ 1 - 2 - 3 (Bezug Abb. 10,11 and 12)
- Den Pumpenk6rper entleeren, wie in Abschnitt. 7.
Achtung: Es k6nnen Flilssigkeitsrilckstande im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der
Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei gefahrlichen (entflammbaren,
atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) Flilssigkeiten die erforderlichen Mal3nahmen ergreifen.
- die Muttern (52) 16sen and den Pumpenk6rper entfernen; dabei darauf achten, class die
Dichtung (43) nicht beschadigt wird.
- das Laufrad (03) blockieren and die selbstblockierende Mutter (33) entfernen.
- das Laufrad entfernen
- die Motorhalterung (19) herausnehmen. Zusammen wird automatisch auch der rotierende
Teil der Dichtung (40) herausgenommen, der auf dem Distanzstuck (31) montiert ist
- den Gegenflansch (39) mit der entsprechenden Dichtung (38) von der Motorhalterung
abnehmen
- die Olwanne (41) abbauen
- die Motorhalterung mit 1-6sungsmittel reinigen, um Rilckstande von altem Fett zu
entfernen and den Sitz der Olwanne sowie des Gegenflansches sorgfaltig reinigen.
- eine neue Olwanne auf der Motorhalterung montieren. Zur Vereinfachung der Montage
den Sitz der Olwanne ein6len.
- Den Gegenflansch (39) mit der Dichtung (38) montieren. Zur Vereinfachung des Vorgans
den Sitz and die Dichtung mit Alkohol anfeuchten. Mit Hilfe eines Holzpuffers oder einer
ahnlichen Vorrichtung den Gegenflansch (39) in den Sitz schieben.
- die Motorhalterung wieder in den Sitz einsetzen and darauf achten, class die
Welle nicht gegen den Gegenflansch st6l3t, die leicht absplittern oder zerbrechen
k6nnte, falls sie aus Keramik besteht.
- die Motorhalterung mit den Schrauben (45, 45.1) befestigen.
- die Dichtung (40) and das Distanzstuck (31) einolen and die Dichtung auf einer Seite des
Distanzstilckes aufsetzen.
- das Distanzstuck mit der Dichtung auf die Welle aufsetzen and dabei den leichten Widerstand der Olwanne Oberwinden.
Dabei darauf achten, dass sich die Dichtung nicht vom Distanzstuck lost.
- den Halterungsring der Dichtung (25.1) einsetzen. Den letzteren vorschieben, bis die Feder (60) wieder angebracht werden kann.
- das Laufrad (03) and die Scheibe (66) wieder anbringen and die Mutter (33) anziehen;
- die genaue Position des Laufrades mit Bezug auf den Verschleil3teller kontrollieren, wie in Punkt 13.7 angegeben.
- die Dichtung des K6rpers (43) wieder anbringen and beide Teile einfetten.
- den K6rper wieder anbringen and die Muttern anziehen; dabei sicherstellen, dass sich das Laufrad ungehindert dreht;
- die Schmierungskammer der Dichtung mit Fett f011en (siehe Abschnitt 12.1.1; 12.1.2).
37

13.6 Ersetzung der Dichtungen vom Typ 4 - 5 (Bezug Abb. 10, 13, 14, 15 and 16)
Den Pumpenkorper entleeren, we in
Abschnitt. 7.
Achtung: Es kbnnen
FlossigkeitsrOckstande im Innern des
Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung
sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei
gefahrlichen (entflammbaren, atzenden,
giftigen, infiziernden usw.) FlOssigkeiten
die erforderlichen MaBnahmen ergreifen.
Die Muttern (52) (Abb. 10) Ibsen and den
Pumpenkorper entfernen; dabei darauf
achten, class die Dichtung (43) nicht
beschadigt wird.
Den Laufrad (03) blockieren and die
selbstblockierende Mutter (33)
abschrauben. c r
Den Laufrad entternen. o:
Die Sp011eitungen abklemmen. _ . r j20,1
Die Positioniervorrichtungen (25.4) zumBlockieren der Dichtung in ihren Sitzen
anbringen. (Abb. 13)
Die Blockierstifte der Manschelle auf der c 20.2
Welle Ibsen (Abb. 14). Abb. 15
Die Schrauben (20.2) Ibsen, mit denen der
Dichtungsflansch an der Motorhalterung
angebracht ist (Abb. 15).
Die Motorhalterung 11M herausnehmen.
Die Dichtung (25), das DistanzstOck (31), die Dichtungshalterung (20) and die Dichtung (20.1) herausnehmen.
Die Dichtung (20.1) ersetzen, falls sie beschadigt ist.
Beim Einbau in umgekehrter Reihenfolge vorgehen.
Das DistanzstOck (31) leicht schmieren, um die anfangliche Montage der Dichtung zu vereinfachen (Abb. 16)
Die Schrauben (20.2) fur die Befestigung des Flansches von Hand Ober Kreuz anziehen, um Spannungen auf deco Feststellring der Dichtung zu vermeiden.
Die Stifte kraftig anziehen (Abb. 14).
Die Positioniervorrichtungen (25.4) (Abb. 13) zum Blockieren der Dichtung entternen and an den entsprechenden Bohrungen des Flansches anbringen, so
class sie in der Phase des Ausbaus wiederverwendet werden konnen.
Die Sp011eitungen wieder anschliel3en, die SpOlung wieder herstellen and den Bereich der Dichtung entlOften, der auch nicht nur fur wenige Augenblicke
in Betrieb genommen werden darf.
13.7 Positionierung des Laufrades mit Bezug auf den/die Verschlei8teller
- Bei allen Modellen muss das DistanzstOck
zwischen dem oberen Teil der Schauben
des Laufrades and dem Verschleil3teller
0,3 - 0,6 mm betragen (Abb. 19). Beim
Modell 12" muss das DistanzstOck
zwischen das Laufrad and dem vorderen
and hinteren Verschleil3teller 0,6 - 1 mm
betragen (Abb 22).
Dazu mOssen die Abmessungen A and
B der Abbildungen 17, 18, 20 and 21
mbglichst gleich sein. Dazu werden die
Versch
0.6; 1 mm leil3teller
I
Laufrad fig.22
hinterem Teller vorgenommen werden. Das
Zwischenlegen der Dichtung (43) (Abb. 10) mit einer Starke von 0,5 mm bewirkt den erforderlichen Abstand (Abb. 19).
13.8 Wartung der Lager (Abb. 10)
Die Pumpe wird mit Lagern geliefert, die bereits geschmiert sind and die in den ersten 500 Betriebsstunden keine Wartung erforderlich machen.
Die Halterungslager mOssen in geeigneter Weise geschmiert werden, nie mit zu viel Fett, das zu Oberhitzungen and folglich zu Beschadigungen des Lagers
fOhren kann. ANM.: fur die Monoblockversionen JP/JE siehe ANHANG 1 Seie 53.
13.9 Ersetzung der Lager
Den Pumpenkorper entleeren, wie in Abschnitt. 7.
Achtung: Es konnen FlOssigkeitsrUckstande im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben; bei gefahrlichen
(entflammbaren, atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) FlOssigkeiten die erforderlichen MaBnahmen ergreifen.
den Korper, die Motorhalterung and die mechanische Dichtung ausbauen.
die Kupplungshalfte and den Keil der WeIIe entternen.
die au8ere Lagerabdeckung (08) entternen.
die vollstandige WeIIe aus dem Kupplungsteil herausziehen.
die Lager mit einem Abzieher oder einer Presse abziehen.
38 beim Einbau in umgekehrter Reihenfolge vorgehen.
Laufrad fig. 19
0,3 +0,6 mm
Versch
leil3tellei
Kompensationsringe (25.2) (Abb. 11)
verwendet, die mit der Ersatzdichtung
geliefert werden. Diese Ringe dienen dazu,
das Laufrad nach vorne zu schieben,
wenn er sich zu weit vom vorderen
Verschleil3teller entfernt oder zu nahe am
hinteren (falls vorgesehen) befindet. Die
Kompensationsringe werden zwischen
den Halterungsringen der Dichtung (25.1)
(Abb. 11) and das Laufrad montiert.
Weitere Anpassungen konnen mit
den Dichtungen zwischen Korper and

13.10 Ersetzung der Kupplungsstifte TWIN -DISC (Serie RBD)
- die Pumpe aus ihrem Sitz nehmen.
- die abgenutzte Stifte entfernen and durch neue ersetzen.
- den Abnutungszustand des Aluminiumflansches uberprOfen
- die Pumpe an den Motor anbringen.
- max. Ausrichtungsfehler: 0,7 mm
- bei der Bestellung der Stifte den Durchmesser der Welle and den Typ der Kupplung
angeben.
13.11 Ersetzung der Elastomerkupplung SURE -FLEX (Abb. 23)
- die Verankerungsschrauben an der Basis der Pumpe oder des Motors I6sen and die
beiden Kupplungshalften entfernen.
- den abgenutzten Elastomer entfernen and durch einen neuen ersetzen. Im Falle eines
Elastomers aus zwei teilen (Typ S) darauf achten, class der Stahlring sich in einem der
beiden Kehlen neben der Zahnung ungehindert bewegen kann.
- die Pumpe an den Motor annahern and die Zahnung der Kupplungshalfte in die des
Elastomers einsetzen.
- die Kupplung zusammendrucken and ein max. Achsspiel von 2 mm for die Kupplungen
vom Typ J and von 3 mm for die Kupplungen vom Typ S Iassen.
- die radiale Ausrichtung and die Winkelausrichtung auf folgencle Weise kontrollieren:
- radial: (Abb. 23) ein Lineal auf die AuBenflache der Kupplungshalften an zumindest vier
Punkten des Umfangs auflegen, die max. Abweichung (Quote C) messen and so nahe wie
m6glich an Null bringen (siehe Tabelle).
- winkel: (Abb. 23) mit einem Kaliber an zumindest vier Punkten den Abstand zwischen
den beiden Kupplungshalften messen and den Unterschied (b-a) so nahe wie moglich an
Null bringen (siehe Tabelle).
- die Verankerungsschrauben an der Basis der Pumpe and des Motors anziehen.
- bei der Bestellung der Ersatzteile den Typ der Kupplung (im Innern der Kupplungshalfte
eingestanzt) and den Durchmesser der WeIIe angeben.
13.12 Ersetzung der Elastomerkupplung GBF (Abb. 24)
- die Verankerungsschrauben an der Basis der Pumpe oder des Motors l6sen and die
beiden Kupplungshalften entfernen.
- die abgenutzten Stifte entfernen, durch neue ersetzen and mit ein wenig Kleber an ihrem
Sitz befestigen.
- die Pumpe an den Motor annahern, bis die Fuge vollstanclig geschlossen ist, and dann
um 2 - 3 mm zurOckziehen, um die Kupplungshalften voneinander zu trennen
- die Verankerungsschrauben der Pumpe and des Motors am Unterbau festziehen.
- bei der Bestellung der DObel den Durchmesser der WeIIe and den Kupplungstyp angeben.
14
14.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
FUNKTIONSSTORUNGEN: URSACHEN UND BEHEBUNG
Achtung: Vor der Untersuchung der m6glichen Ursachen von Funktionsst6rungen
sicherstellen, class die Kontrollinstrumente (das Vakuummeter, das Manometer,
der Drehzahlmesser, der Durchsatzmesser, die Schalttafel usw.) ordnungsgem5B
funktionieren.
Die Pumpe saugt nicht an
der Pumpenk6rper ist leer oder nicht ausreichend gefiallt
den Pumpenk6rper durch die Einfull6ffnung fullen (Abb. 9).
zu starke Erwarmung der Fliissigkeit im Pumpenk6rper
durch die Einfull6ffnung kalte Flussigkeit in den Pumpenk6rper einfullen (Abb. 9).
gegebenenfalls Eindringen von Luft an den Kupplungen oder Vorhandensein von
Risse in der Ansaugleitung
den Anzugs der Kupplungen kontrollieren, die Ansaugleitung inspektionieren.
die Auslassleitung steht unter Druck
die Auslassleitung entluften.
die Drehzahl der Pumpe ist zu niedrig
die Drehzahl der Pumpe nur anheben, nachdem die vertraglich vereinbarten Daten and
die Leistungskurven der Pumpe Oberpruft worden sind.
das Laufrad kann abgenutzt oder gebrochen sein
durch die Inspektions6ffnung (26) (Abb. 10) den Zustand des Laufrades kontrollieren
oder den Pumpenk6rper zerlegen, wie in Abschnitt 13.2 beschrieben
der Eingreifzahn kann abgenutzt sein
den Pumpenk6rper zerlegen, wie in Abschnitt 13.2 beschrieben. Einen Auftrag durch SchweiBung ausfuhren, der anschlieBend profiliert
werden muss. Den K6rper ersetzen, falls der Eingreifzahn stark abgenutzt ist.
der Ansaugfilter kann verstopft sein
den Abrieb entfernen..
die Ansaugh6he ist zu groB
die Ansaughohe recluzieren.
In die Dichtung dringt Luft ein
die Dichtung ausbauen and reinigen (siehe Abschnitt 13.5; 13.6); die Dichtung auswechseln, falls die Funktionsst6rung fortbesteht.
der Laufrad wird durch Fremdk6rper verstopft
den Pumpenk6rper zerlegen and die Fremdk6rper entfernen.
Typ
Kupplung
Geschwindigkeit
max.
Max. Drehmoment dNm
Dauerbetrieb
Intermittierender
(U/min.)
Betrieb
8 S
4500
17
2
10 S
4000
31
30
loss
4000
31
30
11 S
3500
48
62
14 S
2800
94
121
oupplungshalfte
Elastomer
Kupplungsh 'Ifte
b
C
Abb. 23 a
TO
Kupplung
c
mm
(b-a)
mm
Drehmoment
N m
J4
0,25
1,1
10
J5
0,4
1,4
20
S6
0,4
1,8
40
S7
0,5
2,1
70
Abb. 24
Elastomer
L
Kupplungstyp
Max. Drehmoment kgm
U/min.
14
15
4800
20
25
4400
27
40
4100
40
60
3500
55
80
3300
88
110
3000
110
150
2700
145
190
2500
180
240
2200
250
300
2150
330
400
2000
39

14.2 Die Pumpe erzeugt keinen Durchsatz
12 die Pumpe hat nicht angesaugt
siehe die in Punkt 14.1 angegebenen Ursachen.
13 die von der Anlage verlangte Forderhohe uberschreitet die vorgesehene Forderhohe der Pumpe
die Auslegung der Anlage oder die Wahl der Pumpe andern.
14 zu gro8e Lastverluste bei der Ansaugung
die Verteilung der Kurven, Ventile, Drosselungen usw. andern. Falls erforderlich den Durchmesser der Leitungen erh6hen.
15 der Laufrad wird durch Fremdk6rper verstopft
den Pumpenk6rper zerlegen and die Fremdk6rper entfernen.
16 die Ansaug- and/oder Auslassleitung kann verstopft sein
die verstopfte Stelle suchen and reinigen.
14.3 Die Pumpe erreicht keinen ausreichenden Durchsatz
17 Eindringen von Luft in der Ansaugung
den Anzug der Kupplungen kontrollieren and die Ansaugleitung inspektionieren.
18 das Laufrad and/oder der Verschlei8teller kann abgenutzt sein
ersetzen; dazu die Pumpe wie in den Abschnitten (13.2; 13.3) beschrieben zerlegen.
19 der Durchmesser der Ansaugleitung ist unzureichend
die Ansaugleitung auswechseln.
Fur weitere m6gliche Ursachen siehe Abschnitt 14.2.
14.4 Die Pumpe erreicht keinen ausreichenden Druck
20 die Viskositat der Flussigkeit ist haher als vorgesehen
den Hersteller der Pumpe kontaktieren, nachdem die Viskositat der Flussigkeit gemessen worden ist, die bei Kreiselpumpen 50 cSt
nicht iiberschreiten darf.
Andere M6glichkeiten uberprufen: siehe Punkt 5 in Abschnitt 14.1 sowie Abschnitt 14.2.
14.5 Die Pumpe nimmt zu viel Leistung auf
21 die Rotationsgeschwindigkeit ist zu hoch
die korrekte Rotationsgeschwindigkeit uberprufen.
22 die Pumpe arbeitet mit Daten, die von den vertraglich vereinbarten verschieden sind
die Betriebsbedingungen der Pumpe uberprufen and mit denen auf dem Typenschild vergleichen.
23 das spezifische Gewicht der Flussigkeit ist gr68er als vorgesehen
das spezifische Gewicht der Flussigkeit messen and mit dem vertraglich vereinbarten vergleichen.
24 faische Ausrichtung des Aggregats
die korrekte Ausrichtung uberprufen, wie in Abschnitt 10 angegeben.
25 gegebenenfalls Abrieb zwischen den rotierenden and den festen Bauteilen
den Pumpenkorper wie in Abschnitt 13.2 angegeben zerlegen and uberprufen, ob die Oberflachen zerkratzt sind.
26 Fremdk6rper im Laufrad
den Pumpenkorper wie in Abschnitt 13.2 angegeben zerlegen and die Fremdk6rper entfernen.
14.6 Die Pumpe vibriert and ist laut
27 die Pumpe arbeitet mit zu stark reduziertem Durchsatz
die korrekte Einstellung der Ventile der Anlage sowie die Anzeige des Manometers and des Vakuummessers uberprufen.
28 die Pumpe oder die Leitungen sind nicht starr befestigt
den korrekten Anzug der Leitungen der Anlage kontrollieren.
29 die Pumpe weist Hohlraume auf
siehe Abschnitt 14.2
Die m6glichen Ursachen uberprufen: siehe Abschnitt 14.1
30 Fremdk6rper im Laufrad
den Pumpenkorper wie in Abschnitt 13.2 angegeben zerlegen and die Fremdk6rper entfernen.
14.7 Die Pumpe blockiert
31 mechanische Dichtungen
die Unversehrtheit der Welle, der Anschlusse, des Motors, der eventuellen Riemenscheiben and Riemen sowie der eventuellen
Ubersetzungen/Untersetzungen usw. kontrollieren
32 Fremdk6rper im Laufrad
das Innere des Pumpenk6rpers durch die Inspektionsklappe inspektionieren (26) (Abb. 10); anderenfalls den Pumpenkorper zerlegen,
wie in Abschnitt 13.2 angegeben
14.8 Die Lager haben eine kurze Lebensdauer
33 keine Schmierung
die Lager schmieren, wie in Abschnitt 13.8 beschrieben
34 Fremdk6rper in den Lagern
die Lager auswechseln, wie in Abschnitt 13.9 beschrieben
35 die Lager sind verrostet
die Lager auswechseln, wie in Abschnitt 13.9 beschrieben
14.9 Die Dichtung ist undicht
36 Dichtung Typ 1 - 2
die Dichtung ist zum Pumpen von truben FlOssigkeiten, Flussigkeiten, die abrasive Stoffe enthalten sowie von Petrolprodukten mit einer
Temperatur von bis zu 110 °C geeignet: alle 500 Betriebsstunden mit der entsprechenden Kugelschmierungsvorrichtung schmieren,
bis das Fett austritt Bei guter Schmierung kann sie zwei Minuten trocken laufen. Die Dichtung ersetzen, falls wahrend des Betriebs
Flussigkeit austritt. (siehe Abschnitt 13.5)
40

37 Dichtung Typ 3
Macht keine besondere Wartung erforderlich. Die Dichtung ersetzen, falls wahrend des Betriebs Flussigkeit austritt (siehe Abschnitt
13.5)
38 Dichtung mit VerflOssigung Typ 4 - 5
vor der Inbetriebnahme der Pumpe an den VerflOssigungsanschluss an der Dichtung die Leitung mit der VerflOssigungsflOssigkeit
mit einem Druck anschlieBen, der zuminclest 2 bar Ober dem Betriebsdruck der Pumpe liegt. Vor dem Starten der Pumpe and
wahrend ihres Betriebs sicherstellen, class ein konstanter Fluss der Flussigkeit fur die SpOlung der Dichtung vorhanden ist. Diese
Spulung gestattet eine starke VerdOnnung des gepumpten Produkts in der Nahe der Dichtung, so class sie unter den bestm6glichen
Bedingungen arbeitet. Die Pumpe bei Anhalten entleeren, falls sie fur einige Tage nicht benutzt wird, wie in Abschnitt 7 angegeben and
durch die obere Einf011bffnung (Abb. 9) vollstandig reinigen.
14.10 Die Dichtung wird Uberhitzt
Die Pumpe saugt nicht an (siehe Abschnitt 14.1 - 14.9)
14.11 Die Bauteile aus Gummi der Kupplung verschlei8en schnell
die korrekte Ausrichtung des Aggregats OberprOfen, wie in Abschnitt 10 angegeben
15 RESTRISIKEN
Die Restrisiken sind diejenigen, die durch die Planung der Pumpe nicht behoben werden konnen:
- StbBe
- anomaler Oberdruck
- auBergew6hnliche Funktionsstorung
- Man6verfehler in der Nahe der Pumpe.
16 REPARATUR
Die folgenden Arbeiten mussen vor der Durchf0hrung von Eingriffen an der Maschine unbedingt vorgenommen werden:
- die Spannung unterbrechen wie in Abschnitt 13 angegeben vorgehen)
- die Schieber der Ansaugung and des Auslasses der Pumpe schlieBen
- die Pumpe auf Raumtemperatur abkuhlen lassen, falls die gepumpte Flussigkeit heiB ist
- die Sicherheitsvorschriften fur den Umgang mit gefahrlichen Flussigkeiten beachten, falls die gepumpte Flussigkeit gefahrlich ist
- die gepumpte Flussigkeit aus dem Pumpenk6rper ablassen; siehe dazu Abschnitt 7.
- eventuelle ROckstande der gepumpten FlOssigkeit entfernen and reinigen.
17 AUSBAU
17.1 Ausbau der Pumpe aus der Anlage
Die on Abschnitt 16 angegebenen Arbeiten ausf0hren
- die Schrauben von Ansaugflansch and Druckflansch entfernen
- die Schrauben entfernen, mit der die Pumpe am Untergestell befestigt ist
- die Pumpe von der eventuellen Kupplung abziehen oder vom Motor abbauen
- vor dem Heben der Pumpe mit geeigneten Hebevorrichtungen auf die Tabelle mit do Gewichten der Pumpen Bezug nehmen.
18 MONTAGE
18.1 Einbau der Pumpe in die Anlage
- Die Pumpe mit geeigneten Hebevorrichtungen anheben
- Die Pumpe auf dem Untergestell positionieren
- Die eventuellen Anschlusse an die Kupplung oder den Elektromotor wiederherstellen:
- die Ausrichtung wie in Abschnitt 10 beschrieben OberprOfen
- Die Pumpe am Untergestell befestigen.
- Die Pumpe an die Leitungen anschlieBen.
- Die eventuellen Kupplungsabdeckungen montieren.
19 ERSATZTEILE
Zur Aufrechterhaltung des effizienten Betriebs der Pumpe wird empfohlen, bei der Bestellung der Pumper die folgenden empfohlenen
Ersatzteile fur einen ersten Eingriff mitzubestellen:
- Dichtung
- Laufrad
- VerschleiBteller
- kompletter Satz Dichtungen
- Drosselventil
- selbstsperrende Mutter des Laufrad
19.1 Bestellung von Ersatzteilen
Bei der Bestellung von Ersatzteilen muss angegeben werden:
- Pumpentyp
- Seriennummer der Pumpe
- die Referenznummer and die Bezeichnung des Bauteils, wie auf den Ersatzteilblattern angegeben.
20 VERSCHROTTUNG
- Die Pumpe and alle ihre Bauteile mussen ordnungsgemH entsorgt werden.
- Die Metallteile konnen als Rohstoffe weiterverwertet werden.
- Fette and Ole mussen aufgefangen and ordnungsgem, fB von den amtlichen Stellen entsorgt werden.
- Die Elastomerdichtungen mussen ausgebaut and ordnungsgemaiB von den amtlichen Stellen entsorgt werden.
41

TRADUCCION DEL MANUAL ORIGINAL
•
ATENCION
NO PONER EN FUNCIONAMIENTO LA BOMBA ANTES DE HABER LEIDO Y
COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL.
VARISCO SPA DECLINA CUALQUIER TIPO DE RESPONSABILIDAD DEBIDO A
DANOS PROVOCADOS POR NEGLIGENCIA O POR EL INCUMPLIMIENTO DE LO
INDICADO EN EL PRESENTE MANUAL.
VARISCO SPA NO RESPONDE POR LOS EVENTUALES DANOS CAUSADOS DEBI DOS
A INTERPRETACIONES ERRADAS DE LAS INSTRUCCIONES CONTENIDAS EN EL
PRESENTE MANUAL Y POR DANOS CAUSADOS EN CASO DE UNA INSTALACION
ERRADA Y/O POR EL USO INCORRECTO DE LA BOMBA MISMA.
INDICE
43
43
43
44
44
44
44
44
44
45
45
45
46
49
51
51
51
51
51
51
54
58
42

1 IDENTIFICACION
1.1 Constructor
VARISCO S.p.A. - Terza Strada, 9 - Z.I. Nord - 35129 PADOVA - Italy
1.2 Tipo de bomba
Bomba centrifuga autocebante con eje horizontal y impulsor semiabierto para el paso de los cuerpos s6lidos.
1.3 Modelo
El modelo se indica en la placa de la bomba.
1.4 Ano de fabricacion
El ano de fabricacion se indica en la placa de la bomba.
1.5 Identificacion del manual
Edici6n:2011/01 Rev.:02 Cod.558
1.6 Datos de placa
TYPE MATR. ITEM
identifica el modelo de la es el numero es el numero que relaciona la
bomba y del grupo (bomba/ de serie bomba con la documentaci6n de
reductor/motor) de la bomba contrato (no siempre se indica)
[TYPE
kg
O C E MAT " ITEM'es el peso del grupo (bomba y
m3/h (max) m (max) kw RPM (max) kg carretilla) sin incluir el peso del
Aho de fabric acion agua en el cuerpo de la bomba.
varisco Isco &p.A.- PADOVA - NY
[phone]
m3/h (max) m (max) kW RPM (max)
es el caudal maximo es la presi6n maxima de es la potencia maxima es el maximo numero de revo-
de la bomba, medida ejercicio de la bomba, aplicable a la bomba luciones de funcionamiento de
al maximo numero de medida al maximo name- al maximo numero de la bomba. La bomba no debe
revoluciones (RPM) ro de revoluciones (RPM) revoluciones (RPM) nunca superar tal numero de
revoluciones
Los datos de placa se refieren a la prueba con agua a 20' C y con densidad 1000 kg/m3
1.7 Campo de utilizacion
Bombas aptas para bombear liquidos con viscosidad de hasta 50 cSt. que contengan cuerpos s6lidos. Se utilizan en la industria, en
el sector civil, en el naval, en la depuracion de las aguas, en la construccion y en la agricultura.
1.8 En caso de averfa Ilamar al siguiente numero: [phone]
2 GARANTIA
Todos los productos de VARISCO SpA cuentan con un periodo de garantia de 12 meses desde la fecha de la puesta en funci6n; de todas
maneras, el periodo maximo de la misma es de 18 meses desde la fecha de entrega. Las reparaciones efectuadas bajo la garantia no
interrumpen el curso del periodo de la misma. La garantia cubre defectos de material y de fabricacion que comprometan el funcionamiento
del producto a impidan el use idoneo para el cual el mismo ha sido destinado, con la condicion que dichos defectos lean senalados como
maximo dentro de 2 dias desde el momento en que han sido identificados. Se excluyen los danos debidos a las caracterfsticas fisico/
qufmicas del liquido aspirado como asf tambien, las piezas sujetas a desgaste o deterioro (guarniciones estancas, diafragmas, valvulas de
vacfo y de presi6n, piezas de goma o de plastico), o que dependan del incumplimiento de las instrucciones de utilizacion, mantenimiento o
almacenamiento. La garantia se anula tambien en caso de modificaciones o reparaciones efectuadas por parte de personal no autorizado
expresamente por VARISCO SpA, como asf tambien, si el numero de matrfcula no es identificable. Nuestra prestaci6n de garantia esta
completamente subordinada al hecho que el comprador haya cumplido con todas sus obligaciones hasta el dia de la solicitud y a las
que caduquen durante la intervenci6n en garantia. La decision entre restituir el dinero (emisi6n nota de credito) o bien reparar o sustituir
la mercancia, la tomara VARISCO SpA y dicha decision sera inapelable. La mercancia deberA enviarse franco de porte y sera posible
efectuar dicho envfo solo si se cuenta con la autorizaci6n previa de VARISCO SpA - Padova. Todos los gastos de desmontaje-montaje del
producto desde el/en el lugar de instalacion y cualquier otro tipo de intervenci6n en el lugar de trabajo, quedan a cargo del comprador.
La mercancia reparada o sustituida se volvera a entregar al comprador franco fabrica VARISCO SpA. La mercancia sustituida se convierte
en propiedad de VARISCO SpA. Queda entendido que dicha garantia asimila y sustituye las garantias o responsabilidades previstas por
la ley y excluye cualquier otra responsabilidad de VARISCO SpA (resarcimiento del dano, perdida de ganancia, campahas de retiro, mano
de obra del comprador, parada de las obras, disminucion del precios de venta, etc.).
Por cualquier tipo de litigio el unico fuero competente es el de Padova.
2.1 EXCLUSION DE LA GARANTIA
La garantia pierde toda validez (ademas de Io indicado en el contrato de suministro):
- Si se verifica un error de maniobra por parte del operador.
- Si el dano puede ser imputado a un mantenimiento insuficiente.
- Si se utilizan piezas de repuesto no originales.
- Si no se respetaron las instrucciones indicadas en este manual.
Quedan excluidos de la garantia los danos causados por negligencia, incuria, utilizacion de la bomba en forma inadecuada. Si se
quitan los dispositivos de seguridad con los que la bomba cuenta, la garantia y la responsabilidad del fabricante pierden validez
automaticamente.
43

3 PRESCRIPCIONES GENERALES
En el momento de la recepci6n controlar enseguida el estado del material, en particular eventuales
danos debidos al transporte. Ademas controlar la exacta correspondencia con el boletfn de
despacho y entrega. En caso de contestaci6n, senalar enseguida al agente de transporte el dano
y comunicarlo dentro de 48 horas a la sede de Padua.
Para cualquier comunicaci6n senalar el tipo de bomba que se reproduce en la placa o bien el
numero de matrfcula.
Las bombas deben ser utilizadas exclusivamente para los empleos para los que el
Constructor ha precisado:
- los materiales de construcci6n
- las condiciones operativas (presi6n, numero de revoluciones, temperatura, etc.)
- los sectores de aplicaci6n
Cualquier otro empleo para el que se destine la maquina que no este contemplado en
este manual, exime a la Empresa constructora de cualquier responsabilidad por danos a
personas, animales o cosas.
Para empleos no precisados por el Constructor, contactar el Despacho Tecnico de VARISCO
S.p.A.: [phone].
4 NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD Y PREVENCION DE ACCIDENTES
Trabajando en proximidad de la maquina, usar un vestuario adecuado evitando prendas anchas con partes aleteantes (corbata, bufanda,
etcetera) que podrian enredarse en los 6rganos en movimiento. Usar chandales de trabajo confeccionados con los requisitos de seguridad
especfficos, guantes, zapatos aislantes, gafas, cofias antirruidos y casco (fig. 1)
No efectuar manutenciones al motor cuando esta en movimiento.
No acercar las manos a 6rganos en movimiento (ej. correas, acoplamientos,
etcetera).
No subirse a la bomba para efectuar intervenciones de cualquier genero.
5 EN CASO DE EMERGENCIA
Desconectar la tension de Ifnea (para las electrobombas).
Avisar al personal responsable de la instalaci6n.
6 DESPLAZAMIENTO Y TRANSPORTE
6.1
6.2
Mdl'ddd t rt
I I
fig. 2
o a i a a ranspo e
La maquina se debe transportar siempre en posici6n horizontal y en condiciones de seguridad.
Colocaci6n
Durante la colocaci6n y manutenci6n, es necesario prever un transporte seguro de todos los
componentes utilizando adecuadas eslingas. El desplazamiento tiene que ser ejecutado por personal
especializado para evitar danos a la bomba y provocar accidentes al personal.
Los puntos de levantamiento de los distintos montajes deben ser utilizados exclusivamente
para levantar la maquina sin agua y desconectada de las tuberfas. En la figura 2 son indicados, en
negrita, los puntos de levantamiento de algunos z6calos.
! Velocidad maxima de levantamiento: Vmax < 0,5 m/s
lNo estacionar ni transitar bajo la bomba cuando esta levantada! (fig. 3)
7 ALMACENAMIENTO
En caso de almacenamiento colocar la bomba en un lugar cerrado; si se deja a la intemperie, cubrirla
con un pano impermeable, lubricar los cojines para evitar el 6xido (fig. 4). Evitar la acumulaci6n de
humedad en la bomba.
No dejar el cuerpo de la bomba Ileno de liquido. Vaciarlo por la compuerta (fig. 5) y el tap6n
posterior presente en algunos modelos. En los meses invernales el liquido se podrfa congelar y
causar danos a la bomba. Cuando el liquido es peligroso, antes de vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba,
tomar todas las precauciones para evitar danos y accidentes.
Peri6dicamente hacer girar el eje pars evitar incrustaciones dentro de la bomba.
8 ENSAMBLAJE
En caso de que la bomba fuera suministrada en la versi6n con eje fibre (bomba con soporte) es
necesario acoplarla al motor mediante acoplamiento comprobando:
- que el acoplamiento sea acorde a la potencia que se transmite.
- la correcta alineaci6n del acoplamiento (ver secci6n. 10).
- que la protecci6n del acoplamiento cumpla con las normas de seguridad.
- la potencia nominal del motor.
- la potencia absorbida por la bomba (ver placa del motor).
- el numero de revoluciones del motor (ver placa del motor).
- el numero de revoluciones de la bomba.
9 INSTALACION
El z6calo del grupo electrobomba se debe anclar a una losa de hormig6n nivelada en la que los pernos
de los cimientos hayan sido introducidos segun el esquema que se suministra a pedido. La losa tiene
que ser robusta para absorber cualquier vibraci6n y bastante rigida para mantener la alineaci6n del
grupo bomba/motor.
9.1 Montaje
Durante la operaci6n de anclaje del z6calo a la losa, se aconseja comprobar la planeidad con la ayuda
de un nivel de albanil puesto sobre la brida de la boca de descarga de la bomba.
En caso de que fuera necesario realizar adaptaciones, adaptar el plano de la losa al z6calo, nunca el
z6calo a la losa.
El cuerpo de la bomba debe tener un sosten cuando es utilizado con los grupos de multiplicadores de
revoluciones para use agrfcola.
w
fig.3
fig. 4
44

9.2 Tuberias
10
11
Limpiar esmeradamente las tuberias antes de conectarlas a la bomba.
La tuberia de aspiraci6n debe tener un diametro igual al de la boca de aspiracion de la bomba (para diametros superiores consultar a
Varisco). Evitar, si posible, curvas, codos o estrangulamientos que puedan limitar el aflujo de liquido a la bomba. No montar la valvula
de fondo: la bomba cuenta con una valvula antirretorno (14) (fig. 10) incorporada. Instalar la bomba to mas cerca posible al liquido que
se bombea, tratando, donde sea posible, de disminuir el largo de la tuberia de aspiracion. Las conexiones de las tuberias de aspiracion
deben ser completamente estancas: controlar las roscas, las guarniciones de las bridas, los acoplamientos rapidos, etc.
La tuberia de descarga debe permitir hacer salir el aire de la instalaci6n durante la fase de cebado de la bomba.
Las tuberias, de aspiracion y de descarga, deben ser montadas en modo tal de no provocar tensiones en el cuerpo de la bomba.
ALINEACION
Antes de poner en funcionamiento la bomba es importante comprobar la alineaci6n entre los componentes del grupo
(acoplamiento/motor).
Para los grupos con z6calo la exacta alineacion es ejecutada en la fabrica, sin embargo a la Ilegada al lugar de instalaci6n hace falta
controlar la alineacion:
- colocar el zocalo sobre el plano de la losa introduciendo los tirafondos en los agujeros del zocalo sin apretar demasiado los pernos.
- sacar la protecci6n del acoplamiento.
- apretar los pernos de los tirafondos y volver a verificar la alineacion como indicado en figura 6 y regularlos, segun el tipo de acoplamiento,
como precisado en las secciones 13.10; 13.11; 13.12.
- recolocar la proteccion del acoplamiento antes del arranque.
desalineaci6n desalineaci6n
axial � radial
� J desalineaci6n
ff3 d1J n paralela
i—
1 fig. 6
CONEXION ELECTRICA
Las conexiones electricas deben ser efectuadas exclusivamente por personal especializado.
- Atenerse a las instrucciones del constructor del motor y de los aparatos electricos.
- Conectar correctamente la toma a tierra del motor y controlar que el motor electrico este protegido por un cortacircuitos de
potencia adecuada.
- Los motores electricos trifasicos normalmente se han preparado para ser conectados a 400 V (conexi6n en estrella). Para una
alimentaci6n a 230 V, conectar en delta el panel de bornes de la base del motor electrico seg6n el esquema que se anexa con el mismo.
- Para los motores con valores de tensi6n particulares, seguir las indicaciones que se anexan al motor.
- Las secciones de los cables electricos sean adecuadas al amperaje.
- Cuando se hayan realizado las conexiones electricas, cerrar la compuerta de la tuberia de descarga y verificar el sentido correcto de
rotaci6n.
- La flecha del cuerpo de la bomba indica el sentido correcto de rotaci6n (fig. 7); si la bomba gira en sentido contrario, intercambiar dos
de los tres cables de alimentaci6n.
A solicitud, las bombas que deben
bombear aguas salobres cueman
con una proteccion galvanica
anticorrosi6n que consiste en una
serie de discos de cinc fijados
en las compuertas de descarga.
Cada 1000 horas se debe verificar
el estado de desgaste del cinc y
eventualmente reemplazarlo.
Durante el funcionamiento de la
bomba controlar la absorci6n del
motor electrico, esta no debe
superar el valor indicado en la placa.
12 ARRANQUE
W V U W V U
0 0 0
YXZ Y X Z
Y 0
Conexi6n en estrella Conexi6n en delta
Antes de poner en funcionamiento la bomba comprobar que la instalaci6n haya sido completada correctamente desde el punto
de vista electrico y mecanico.
Verificar que todos los sistemas de seguridad esten activos.
Controlar que el sentido de rotaci6n de la bomba sea el correcto (secci6n 11)
12.1 Control de la estanqueidad
Antes de poner en marcha la bomba, controlar el tipo de junta estanca montada que se reproduce en la placa.
12.1.1 Bombas con juntas estancas tipo 1 - 2
Las juntas estancas tipo 1 o 2 se Henan de grasa durante el montaje; no necesitan manutenci6n en las primeras 500 horas de
funcionamiento de la bomba.
12.1.2 Bombas con juntas estancas tipo 3
Las juntas estancas de tipo 3 no necesitan manutenci6n.
45

12.1.3 Bombas con juntas estancas tipo 4 - 5
12.2
12.3
Las juntas estancas tipo 4 - 5 son fluxadas segun las Normativas ABEJAS 610 PLAN 52 - 53
(vease esquema en fig. 8)
PLAN 52 requiere un tanque no presurizado
PLAN 53 requiere un tanque presurizado con presi6n de 1 - 2 bar superiores a la de ejercicio
de la bomba.
El liquido de fluxado debe ser compatible con el bombeado.
Llenado del cuerpo de la bomba
Llenar completamente el cuerpo bomba con liquido de bombear por el agujero situado en la parte
superior del cuerpo (fig. 9) (en algunos modelos existe un tap6n). Con la bomba detenida, el cuerpo
no se vacia y por tanto, ya no es necesario Ilenarlo.
Cebado
Atenci6n: si la bomba no se ceba, no hacerla funcionar por mas de dos minutos, para evitar
el calentamiento del liquido y el dano de la junta estanca. Si falla el cebado, ver la secci6n
14.1
Con la bomba cebada:
- Controlar la estanqueidad en el eje: si es de tipo mecanico no deben haber perdidas
- Comprobar que el valor de corriente absorbido por el motor no supere al valor de placa del motor.
- Si se cree que la bomba funcione de modo an6malo es indispensable pararla a investigar las causas del problema. (ver secci6n 14)
13 MANTENIMIENTO
La manutenci6n debe ser ejecutada con la maquina detenida, desconectando la alimentaci6n; es necesario que la alimentaci6n sea
restablecida por el mismo operador que ejecuta la manutenci6n.
Antes de intervenir en la maquina para efectuar el mantenimiento, es indispensable:
- Desconectar la bomba de las tuberias de aspiraci6n y descarga.
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba del liquido bombeado por la compuerta de descarga (fig. 5)
Atencion: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor, en el conducto de aspiraci6n; tomar las debidas
precauciones si el liquido es peligroso (inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
70 --§
25 0
34i
01 20.2
20
20.2 20.1
19 52 20.3
03
52.1
34
53 -----� 21 r O
24 — 22 25
/ 43 20.1 20 61
a a.: 58 9 55
` ® 08
l 1. 57 06 Q�
\ \ 45.1
02 45.2 f A : a
14.1 14 67.1 1 / Q 62
47 59 L 06.3 61
r 48.1 45 I 06.2 \ 7
52.1 @3 49 08.1 60
y 68.5 55.1 { (. t 66 10 � 01 � . `. �. � � •. 33 07
3 68.1�\,
48—
53.2 27 54 06.1
53.3 5\ 6 26 17 50 �I 71.2 71.1
s3 fig. 10
46

13.1 Inspecci6n y control
Controlar peri6dicamente el buen funcionamiento de la bomba verificando, mediante la instrumentaci6n de la instalaci6n (man6metro,
vacu6metro, amperimetro, etc.) si la bomba estd apta para el funcionamiento. Se aconseja una manutenci6n peri6dica de los varios
componentes sujetos a desgaste y en particular, de la rueda de alabes y del plato de desgaste.
13.2 Sustituci6n de la rueda de alabes (fig. 10)
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como indicado en la secci6n. 7.
Atenci6n: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor, en el conducto de aspiraci6n; tomar las debidas
precauciones si el liquido es peligroso (inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
- Desenroscar las tuercas (52) y sacar el cuerpo de la bomba, tratando de no danar la junta (43).
- Parar la rueda de alabes (03) y desenroscar la tuerca autobloqueante (33).
- Sacar la rueda de alabes y reemplazarla con un nueva.
- Eventualmente reemplazar la guarnici6n (43).
- Para el montaje proceder al reves.
- Controlar la exacta posici6n de la rueda de alabes con respecto al plato de desgaste como indicado en el punto 13.7.
13.3 Sustituci6n del plato de desgaste (fig. 10)
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como indicado en la secci6n. 7.
Atenci6n: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor, en el conducto de aspiracion; tomar las debidas
precauciones si el liquido es peligroso (inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
- Desenroscar las tuercas (52) y sacar el cuerpo de la bomba, tratando de no danar la junta (43)
- Destornillar los tornillos de cabeza hexagonal (57)
- Sacar y sustituir el plato de desgaste (02)
- Eventualmente reemplazar la guarnici6n (43)
- Para el montaje proceder al reves.
- Controlar la exacta posici6n de la rueda de alabes con respecto al plato de desgaste como indicado en el punto 13.7.
13.4 Sustituci6n de la valvula (fig. 10)
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como indicado en la secci6n. 7.
Atenci6n: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor, en el conducto de aspiracion; tomar las debidas
precauciones si el liquido es peligroso (inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
- sacar las tuercas (52.1)
- sacar el portavAlvula (10)
- sacar la valvula (14.1)
- montar la nueva valvula con la bisagra hacia arriba
- limpiar el alojamiento de la valvula del portavalvola (10) y reensamblarlo
- algunas vAlvulas cuentan con una lengueta que avanza al exterior, en este caso, al fijar las tuercas se debe sustentar el peso de la
valvula tirando la lengOeta.
13.5 Sustituci6n de la junta estanca tipo 1 - 2 - 3 (referencia fig. 10,11,12)
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como indicado en la secci6n. 7.
Atenci6n: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor,
en el conducto de aspiracion; tomar las debidas precauciones si el liquido es peligroso
(inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
- Desenroscar las tuercas (52) y sacar el cuerpo de la bomba, tratando de no danar la
junta (43).
- Parar la rueda de alabes (03) y desenroscar la tuerca autobloqueante (33)
- sacar la rueda de alabes
- sacar el portamotor (19). Junto a este sale automaticamente la parte rotatoria de la junta
estanca (40) montada en el distanciador (31)
- sacar del portamotor la guarnici6n fija (39) y la relativa guarnici6n (38)
- sacar el sello de aceite (41)
- lavar con solvente el portamotor para sacar los restos de grasa vieja y limpiar bien el
alojamiento del sello de aceite y de la guarnici6n fija.
- montar un nuevo sello de aceite en el portamotor. Para facilitar el montaje mojar con
aceite el alojamiento y el sello de aceite.
- montar la guarnici6n fija (39) con su guarnici6n (38). Para facilitar la operaci6n mojar el
alojamiento y la guarnici6n con alcohol. Ayudarse si necesario con un taco de madera o
parecido para empujar la guarnici6n fija (39) en el alojamiento.
- reponer en el alojamiento el portamotor teniendo cuidado con que la guarnici6n
fija no choque con el eje, si esta es de ceramica, podria mellarse facilmente o
partirse.
- fijar el portamotor con los tornillos (45, 45.1).
- untar con aceite la junta estanca (40), el distanciador (31) e introducir por un lado del
distanciador la junta estanca.
- introducir el distanciador con la junta estanca en el eje, venciendo la ligera resistencia que opone el sello de aceite.
Tener cuidado con que la junta estanca no se salga del distanciador.
- introducir el anillo de sosten de la junta estanca (25.1). Empujar hacia adelante este ultimo hasta que sea posible
reensamblar la lengGeta (60).
- reensamblar la rueda de alabes (03), la arandela (66) y enroscar la tuerca (33);
- Controlar la exacta posici6n de la rueda de alabes con respecto al plato de desgaste como indicado en el punto 13.7.
- reensamblar la guarnici6n del cuerpo (43) untando ambos lados con grasa.
- reensamblar el cuerpo y fijar las tuercas, controlando que la rueda de Alabes gire libremente;
- Ilenar la camara de lubricaci6n de la junta estanca (vease la secci6n 12.1.1; 12.1.2) de grasa.
39 40
/ 25.1
_—Ie�-A
fig. 11
47

13.6 Sustituci6n de la junta estanca tipo 4 - 5 (referencia fig. 10, 13, 14, 15, 16)
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como
indicado en la secci6n. 7.
Atencion: pudieran quedar restos de
liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba,
en el portamotor, en el conducto
de aspiraci6n; tomar las debidas
precauciones si el liquido es peligroso
(inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso,
infectado, etc.).
- Destornillar las tuercas (52) (fig. 10)
y sacar el cuerpo de la bomba,
tratando de no dahar la junta (43).
- Parar la rueda de alabes (03) y
desenroscar la tuerca autobloqueante
(33)
- Sacar la rueda de alabes. c r
- Desconectar las tuberias de fluxado. o
- Fijar los posicionadores (25.4) de r /20.3
bloqueo de la junta estanca en los �j/
alojamientos adecuados. (fig. 13).
- Aflojar los tornillos de fijaci6n de la
camisa al eje (fig. 14). < 20.2
- Aflojar los tornillos (20.2) que fijan fig. 15
la brida de la junta estanca al
portamotor (fig. 15).
- Sacar el portamotor (19).
- Sacar la junta estanca (25), el distanciador (31), el portajunta (20) y la guarnici6n 190.1).
- Si la guarnicion (20.1) estuviera danada, reemplazarla.
Para el montaje proceder al reves
- Lubricar ligeramente el distanciador (31) para facilitar el montaje inicial de la junta estanca (fig. 16)
- Apretar bien los tornillos (20.2) (fig. 15) de fijacion de la arandela con acci6n cruzada para evitar tensiones sobre el anillo estacionario de la
junta estanca.
- Apretar con fuerza los tornillos sin cabeza (fig. 14).
- Sacar los posicionadores (25.4) (fig. 13) de bloqueo de la junta estanca y fijarlos a los agujeros de la arandela para su reutilizaci6n en fase
de desmontaje.
- Volver a conectar las tuberias de fluxado las canerias de fluxado, restablecer el fluxado y resollar la zona alrededor de la junta estanca,
que no debe funcionar en seco ni por unos instantes.
13.7 Colocaci6n de la rueda de alabes respecto al/a los plato/platos de desgaste
- En todos Ios modelos la distancia
entre el extremo de los alabes de
la rueda de alabes y el piano del
plato de desgaste debe estar entre
0,3 - 0,6 mm (fig. 19). En el modelo
12" la distancia requerida entre rueda
de alabes y loa platos de desgaste
anteriores y posteriores deben estar
entre 0,6 - 1 mm (fig. 22). Para
conseguir esto, las cotas A y B de
la fig. 17, 18, 20, 21 tiene que ser Io
mas osible tires Con tat ob'etivo
p p 1
se usan los anillos de compensation
(25.2) (fig. 11) suministrados con
la junta estanca de repuesto. Tales
anillos sirven para desplazar hacia
adelante la rueda de alabes en el caso
que se encuentre demasiado lejos del
plato de desgaste frontal o demasiado
cerca del posterior (cuando previsto).
Los anillos de compensacon deben
ser montados entre el anillo de
sosten de la junta estanca (25.1)
f' 11 1 d d Al b I'
s fig. 19
0,3:0,6 mm
desga-
ste
plato de
desga-
ste
fig. 22
( ig. ) y a rue a e a a es. U teriores
reparaciones pueden ser hechas con las guarniciones del cuerpo y del plate posterior. La interposici6n de la guarnicion (43) (fig. 10) de
espesor 0,5 mm determina la distancia requerida (fig. 19).
13.8 Manutenci6n de los cojinetes (fig. 10)
Los cojinetes de la bomba estan ya engrasados y no necesitan de manutenci6n por las primeras 500 horas de funcionamiento.
Los cojinetes del soporte deben ser mantenidos lubricados apropiadamente, nunca con demasiada grasa ya que esta puede provocar
un sobrecalentamiento con el consiguiente dafio del cojinete. NOTA: para las versiones JP/JE monobloque vease ANEXO 1 pig. 54.
13.9 Sustituci6n de los cojinetes
- Vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como indicado en la secci6n. 7.
Atenci6n: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor, en el conducto de aspiraci6n; tomar las debidas
precauciones si el liquido es peligroso (inflamable, corrosive, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
- sacar el cuerpo, el portamotor y la junta estanca mecanica.
- sacar el semiacoplamiento y la chaveta del eje.
- sacar la protecci6n externa de los cojinetes (08).
- extraer el eje completo de la parte del acoplamiento.
48

- extraer los cojines con el extractor o bien con una prensa.
- Para el montai.e proceder al reves.
13.10 Sustituci6n de tornillos del acoplamiento TWIN -DISC (Serie RBD)
- sacar la bomba de su alojamiento.
- sacar los bloques gastados y reemplazarlos con los nuevos.
- verificar el estado de desgaste de la brida de aluminio
- acoplar la bomba al motor.
- error max. de alineacion: 0,7 mm.
- al ordenar los bloques, indicar el diametro del eje y el tipo de acoplamiento.
13.11 Sustituci6n del elast6mero del acoplamiento SURE -FLEX (fig. 23)
- destornillar los tornillos de anclaje a la base de la bomba o el motor y separar los dos
semiacoplamientos.
- sacar el elastomero desgastado y reemplazarlo con el nuevo. En el caso de elastomero
de dos piezas (tipo S) dejar que el anillo de acero se mueva libremente en una de las
dos ranuras adyacentes a la dentadura.
- acercar la bomba al motor y embocar la dentadura del semiacoplamiento a la del
elastomero.
- compactar el acoplamiento dejando un juego axial de 2 mm max. para los acoplamientos
tipo J y 3 mm max. por los acoplamientos tipo S.
- controlar la alineacion radial y angular en el modo siguiente:
- radial: (fig. 23), con una raya, apoyada en la superficie externa de los semiacoplamientos y
en al menos cuatro puntos de la circunferencia, medir la maxima inclinacion (cota C) y Ilevarla
to mas posible a cero (ver tabla).
- angular: (fig. 23) con un calibre medir en al menos cuatro puntos la distancia entre los dos
semiacoplamientos y Ilevar la variacion ( I to mas posible a cero (ver tabla)
- atornillar los tornillos de anclaje de la bomba y del motor a la base.
- para el pedido de las partes de repuesto indicar el tipo de acoplamiento (estampillado
dentro de los semiacoplamientos) y el diametro del eje.
13.12 Sustituci6n de los elast6meros del acoplamiento GBF (fig. 24)
- destornillar los tornillos de anclaje a la base de la bomba o el motor y separar los dos
semiacoplamientos.
- sacar los tornillos gastados y reemplazarlos con los nuevos fijandolos en su lugar con
adhesivo.
- acercar bomba al motor hasta el cierre completo del acoplamiento, luego retroceder de
2 - 3 mm para despegar los semiacoplamientos.
- atornillar los tornillos de anclaje de la bomba y del motor a la base.
- al ordenar los bloques, indicar el diametro del eje y el tipo de acoplamiento.
14 FUNCIONAMIENTO INCORRECTO: CAUSAS Y REMEDIOS
14.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Atenci6n: antes de examinar las posibles causas de funcionamiento defectuoso,
cerciorarse que los instrumentos de control (el vacu6metro, el man6metro, el
medidor de revoluciones, el medidor de caudal, el cuadro electrico de medici6n,
etc.) funcionen correctamente.
La bomba no se ceba
el cuerpo de la bomba esta vacio o no esta bastante Ileno
Ilenar el cuerpo de la bomba por el agujero de Ilenado (fig. 9).
excesivo calentamiento del Ifquido dentro del cuerpo de la bomba
agregar liquido frio por el cuerpo de la bomba por el agujero de Ilenado (fig. 9).
posibles infiltraciones de aire por las juntas o presencia de grietas en la tuberfa de
aspiraci6n
verificar el apretamiento de las juntas, inspeccionar la tuberia de aspiracion.
la tuberia de descarga esta bajo presi6n
resollar la tuberia de descarga.
el numero de revoluciones de la bomba es bajo
aumentar el numero de revoluciones despues de haber verificado los datos
contractuales y las curvas caracteristicas de la bomba.
la rueda de alabes puede estar gastada o rota
I la compuerta de inspeccion (26) (fig. 10) controlar el estado de la rueda de alabes,
o bien, desmontar el cuerpo de la bomba como descrito en la seccion 13.2
el diente de engrane puede estar desgastado
desmontar el cuerpo de la bomba como se ilustra en la seccion 13.2. Agregar soldadura y perfilar sucesivamente. Si el diente de engrane
esta muy se gastado, sustituirlo.
el eventual filtro en la secci6n de aspiraci6n puede estar obstruido
remover los detritos.
la altura de aspiraci6n es excesiva
disminuir la altura de aspiraci6n.
entra aire por la junta estanca
desmontar la junta estanca y limpiarla (ver seccion 13.5; 13.6); si el funcionamiento defectuoso persiste entonces cambiar la junta
estanca.
rueda de alabes obstruida por cuerpos extranos
desmontar el cuerpo y remover los cuerpos extranos.
Tipo
acopla-
Velocidad
max.
(rpm)
par max. dNm
Funcionamiento
Funcionamiento
miento
continuo
intermitente
8 S
4500
17
2
los
4000
31
30
loss
4000
31
30
11 S
3500
48
62
14 S
2800
94
121
oemiacoplamiento
elastomero
semiacopla iento
b
C
fig. 23 a
Tipo
acoplamiento
C
mm
(b-a)
mm
Par
N m
J4
0,25
1,1
10
J5
0,4
1,4
20
S6
0,4
1,8
40
S7
0,5
1 2,1
70
fig. 24
elastomero
L
Tipo
acoplamiento
Par max kgm
rpm
14
15
4800
20
25
4400
27
40
4100
40
1 60
3500
55
80
3300
88
110
3000
110
150
2700
145
190
2500
180
240
2200
250
300
j 2150
330
400
1 2000
49

14.2 La bomba no produce caudal
12 la bomba no esta cebada
ver las causas indicadas en el punto 14.1.
13 la altura que necesita la instalacion es superior a la de proyecto de la bomba
revisar el proyecto de la instalacion o la eleccion de la bomba.
14 excesivas perdidas de carga en la seccion de aspiraci6n
revisar la distribucion de las curvas, valvulas, estrangulamientos, etc. ; si fuera necesario, aumentar el diametro de las tuberias.
15 rueda de alabes obstruida por cuerpos extranos
desmontar el cuerpo y remover los cuerpos extranos.
16 las tuberias de aspiraci6n / descarga pueden estar obstruidas o atascadas
localizar el punto obstruido o atascado y limpiarlo.
14.3 La bomba no suministra un caudal suficiente
17 filtraciones de aire en la seccion de aspiraci6n
controlar el apretamiento de las juntas e inspeccionar la tuberia de aspiraci6n.
18 la rueda de alabes y/o el plato de desgaste pueden estar desgastadosse
debe sustituirlos, desmontando la bomba como se describe en las secciones (13.2; 13.3).
19 la tuberia de aspiraci6n tiene un diametro insuficiente
sustituir la tuberia de aspiraci6n.
Verificar otras causas posibles: ver la seccion 14.2.
14.4 La bomba no produce una presion suficiente
20 la viscosidad del liquido es superior a la prevista
contactar a la casa constructors de la bomba despues de haber medido la viscosidad del liquido, que no debe ser mayor que 50 cSt
para las bombas centrifugas.
Verificar otras causas posibles: ver el punto 5 de la seccion 14.1 y la 14.2.
14.5 La bomba absorbe demasiada potencia
21 la velocidad de rotacion es demasiado alta
verificar la correcta velocidad de rotacion.
22 la bomba funciona con datos diferentes a los contractuales
verificar las condiciones de ejercicio de la bomba y compararlas con las de placa.
23 el peso especffico del liquido es superior al preestablecido
medir el peso especifico del liquido y compararlo con el contractual.
24 alineacion errada del grupo
verificar la correcta alineacion del grupo como se indica en la seccion 10.
25 posibles roces interiores entre las partes rotatorias y fijas
desmontar el cuerpo de la bomba como se indica en la seccion. 13.2 y verificar si existen superficies rozadas.
26 cuerpos extranos en la rueda de alabes
desmontar el cuerpo de la bomba como se indica en la seccion 13.2 y extraer los cuerpos extranos.
14.6 La bomba vibra y tiene ruidos
27 el caudal de funcionamiento es demasiado poco
verificar la correcta regulacion de las valvulas de la instalacion y la indicacion del manometro y el vacuometro.
28 la bomba o las tuberias no estan fijadas rigidamente
controlar el apretamiento correcto de las tuberias de la instalacion.
29 la bomba presenta cavitacion
ver la seccion 14.2
Verificare las posibles causas: ver seccion 14.1.
30 cuerpos extranos en la rueda de alabes
desmontar el cuerpo de la bomba como se indica en la seccion 13.2 y remover los cuerpos extranos.
14.7 La bomba se bloquea
31 danados mecanicos
controlar la integridad del eje, de los acoplamientos, del motor, de eventuales poleas y correas, de eventuales multiplicadores/
reductores etc.
32 cuerpos extranos en la rueda de alabes
examinar la parte interna del cuerpo de la bomba por la compuerta de inspeccion (26) (fig. 10) de to contrario, desmontar el cuerpo
de la bomba como se indica en la seccion 13.2
14.8 Los cojinetes duran poco
33 falta de lubrificacion
lubricar los cojinetes como se describe en la seccion 13.8
34 cuerpos extranos en los cojinetes
cambiar los cojinetes como descrito en la seccion 13.9
35 los cojinetes estan oxidados
cambiare los cojines como se describe en la seccion 13.9
14.9 La junta estanca pierde liquido
36 junta estanca tipo 1 - 2
este tipo de junta estanca sirve para el bombeo de liquidos turbios o que contengan abrasivos y productos petroliferos con temperatura
de hasta 110' C: cada 500 horas engrasar por el lubricador de bola hasta que salga la grasa. Si esta bien lubricada puede funcionar
en seco por 2 minutos. En caso de que durante el funcionamiento hubiera perdidas de liquido, sustituir la junta estanca. (ver seccion
13.5)
37 junta estanca tipo 3
no necesita manutencion particular. En caso de que se produzca una perdida de liquido, sustituir la junta estanca (ver seccion 13.5)
50

38 junta estanca con fluxado tipo 4 - 5
antes de la puesta en marcha de la bomba, conectar la toma del fluxado situada sobre la junta estanca, con la linea del liquido de
fluxado, con presion de al menos 2 bar superior a la de ejercicio de la bomba. Cerciorarse que antes del arranque de la bomba y
durante su funcionamiento haya un flujo constante de liquido en la junta estanca. Tal fluxado permite una fuerte dilucion del producto
bombeado en proximidad de la junta estanca, en modo que hacerla funcionar en las mejores condiciones posibles. Cuando se detiene
la bomba, si se preve que esta quedara inactiva por varios dias, vaciarla como indicado en la seccion 7 y lavarla por la compuerta
superior de Ilenado (fig. 9).
14.10 La junta estanca se sobrecalienta
la bomba no se ceba (ver seccion 14.1 - 14.9)
14.11 Las partes de goma del acoplamiento se desgastan rapidamente
Verificar la correcta alineacion del grupo como indicado en la seccion 10
15 RIESGOS RESIDUALES
Los riesgos residuales son aquellos que no se pueden eliminar con el proyecto de la bomba:
-choques
- sobrepresiones anomalas
- funcionamiento defectuoso
- errores de maniobra en proximidad de la bomba.
16 REPARACION
Antes de intervenir en la maquina es indispensable:
- desconectar la tension (intervenir como en la seccion 13)
- cerrar las compuertas de la seccion de aspiracion y descarga de la bomba
- si el Ifquido bombeado esta caliente, dejar enfriar la bomba a la temperatura ambiente
- si el liquido bombeado es peligroso atenerse a los procedimientos de seguridad para la manipulacion de los liquidos
peligrosos
- vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba del liquido bombeado como indicado en la seccion 7.
- limpiar los eventuates restos del liquido bombeado.
17 DESMONTAJE
17.1 Desmontaje de la bomba de la instalacion
Ejecutar to indicado en la seccion 16
- sacar los pernos de las bridas de aspiracion y descarga.
- sacar los tornillos de fijacion de la bomba al zocalo.
- sacar la bomba del acoplamiento o desmontarta del motor electrico.
- antes de levantar la bomba con los medios de levantamiento apropiados, hacer referencia a la tabta de los pesos de las bombas.
18 MONTAJE
18.1 Montaje de la bomba en la instalacidn
- levantar la bomba con los medios de levantamiento apropiados.
- colocar la bomba sobre el zocalo.
- restablecer las conexones con el acoplamiento o con el motor electrico:
- verificar la alineacion como descrito en la seccion 10.
- fijar la bomba al zocalo.
- conectar la bomba a las tuberias.
- montar las protecciones de los acoplamientos.
19 PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
Para mantener el buen funcionamiento de la bomba se aconseja, en el momento de la orden, equiparse con las piezas de repuesto
aconsejadas para la primera intervencion:
- junta estanca.
- rueda de alabes.
- plato de desgaste.
- serie completa de guarniciones.
- valvula de cierre.
- tuerca autobloqueante de la rueda de alabes.
19.1 4C6mo ordenar las piezas de repuesto?
Para pedir las piezas de repuesto es necesario indicar:
- tipo de bomba.
- numero de matricula de la bomba.
- el numero de referencia y designacion de la pieza, como indicado en las hojas con las piezas de repuestos.
20 DESGUACE
- No abandonar la bomba o partes de la misma en el ambiente.
- Las partes metalicas se pueden reconvertir en materia prima.
- Las grasas y aceites se deben recoger y almacenar a norma de ley para ser eliminados por los Entes encargados.
- Las guarniciones de elastomero deben ser separadas y Ilevadas a un vertedero autorizado para ser eliminados a norma de ley.
51

ALLEGATO 1
JE MONOBLOCCO
Manutenzione dei cuscinetti serie JP / JE MONOBLOCCO
• la pompa viene fornita con due cuscinetti del tipo 2RS, schermati entrambi i lati, aventi la quantity di grasso sufficiente per la durata
d'impiego.
Sostituzione dei cuscinetti:
- svuotare it corpo pompa come indicato al paragrafo 7
Attenzione: residui di liquido possono rimanere all'interno del corpo pompa, nel portamotore, nella condotta di aspirazione; prendere
le dovute precauzioni se it liquido a pericoloso (infiammabile, corrosivo, velenoso, infetto ecc.).
- smontare la parte pompante dal motore svitando le viti (04.2) della campana (04) a le viti (07.5) dell'albero (07)
- smontare it corpo pompa (01), girante (03) a tenuta (25)
- svitare la ghiera (08) a togliere it seeger (71)
- estrarre I'albero (07) completo di cuscinetti dalla parte della campana (04)
- estrarre la ghiera (63) e i cuscinetti (58-59) con un estrattore oppure con una pressa
- per it montaggio procedere al contrario
ANNEX 1
JE MONOBLOC
Servicing required by the JP / JE MONOBLOC series bearings
• the pump is supplied with two 2RS bearings shielded on both sides and with a sufficient amount of grease for as long as it lasts.
How to replace the bearings:
- drain the pump casing as shown in section 7
Attention: residual liquid may be found inside the pump casing, head and suction line; take all necessary precautions if the liquid is
hazardous (inflammable, corrosive, poisonous, infected, etc.)
- disassemble the pumping part from the motor by unscrewing the screws (04.2) of the bell mouth (04) and the screws (07.5) of the
shaft (07)
- disassemble the pump casing (01), impeller (03) and seal (25)
- unscrew the ring nut (08) and remove the seeger ring (71)
- take out the shaft (07), complete with bearings, from the side with the bell mouth (04)
- remove the ring nut (63) and the bearings (58-59) with the aid of a puller or press.
- work through the instructions in reverse order to re -assemble the parts.
58.4 53.1
d9 \/ 24
52.1
47
�21
j f 03A 0
I f
—45
04
59
45.1
45.2
04.2 63
04.3
07
It 70.8 0
57.1 � 70.1 0-70 70
57.$ 77�70.2 70.2
703 70.3
52

ANNEXE 1
JE MONOBLOC
Entretien des roulements serie JP / JE MONOBLOC
• la pompe est fournie avec deux roulements de type 2RS, etanches des deux cotes, ayant la quantite de graisse suffisante pour la
duree d'utilisation.
Remplacement des roulements:
- vider le corps de pompe comme indique au paragraphe 7
Attention: des residus de liquide peuvent rester clans le corps de la pompe, clans le porte-moteur et dans le tuyau d'aspiration;
prendre les precautions qui s'imposent si le liquide est dangereux (inflammable, corrosif, toxique, pollue, etc.).
- demonter ('unite de pompage du moteur apres avoir devisse les vis (04.2) de la bride (04) et les vis (07.5) de I'arbre (07)
- demonter le corps de pompe (01), la roue (03) et 1'etancheite (25)
- devisser la bague (08) et enlever Panneau seeger (71)
- extraire I'arbre (07) avec les roulements du cote de la bride (04)
- extraire la bague (63) et les roulements (58-59) au moyen d'un extracteur ou d'une presse.
- pour le montage, proceder clans le sens contraire
ANHANGI
JE MONOBLOCK
Wartung der Lager Serie JP / JE MONOBLOCK
• Die Pumpe wind mit zwei Lagern vom Typ 2RS geliefert, das beidseitig abgeschirmt sind and eine Fettmenge haben, die for die ganze
Nutzungsdauer ausreicht.
Austausch der Lager:
- Das Pumpengehause wie in Abschnitt 7 beschrieben entleeren.
Achtung: es konnen Flussigkeitsruckstande im Innern des Pumpengehauses, der Motorhalterung sowie in der Ansaugleitung bleiben;
bei gefahrlichen (entflammbaren, atzenden, giftigen, infiziernden usw.) Flussigkeiten die erforderlichen MaBnahmen ergreifen.
- den Pumpenteil vom Motor ausbauen, indem man die Schrauben (04.2) der Glocke (04) and die Schrauben (07.5) der Welle (07)
losschraubt.
- das Pumpengehause (01), das Laufrad (03) and die Dichtung (25) entfernen.
- die Ringmutter (08) schrauben and den Sicherungsring entfernen (71).
- die Welle (07) mit den Lagern von der Seite der Glocke (04) herausziehen.
- die Ringmutter (63) and die Lager (58-59) mit Hilfe eines Ausziehwerkzeugs oder mit einer Presse herausziehen.
- for den Einbau in der umgekehrten Reihenfolge vorgehen.
58.4 33.1
\ / 24
U
$tl.5 52.1
47
�21
j f 03A 0
I f
—45
04
59
45.1
45.2
04.2 63
0#,s
04.3
07
It 70.8 0
57.1 � 70•1 0-70 70
57.$ 77�70.2 70.2
703 70.3

AN EXO 1
JE MONOBLOQUE
Mantenimiento de los cojinetes serie JP / JE MONOBLOCCO
• la pompa se suministra con dos cojinetes del tipo 2RS, blindados en ambos lados, con una cantidad de grasa suficiente para la
durabilidad de empleo
Sustitucion de los cojinetes:
- vaciar el cuerpo de la bomba como se indica en la seccion 7
Atencidn: pudieran quedar restos de liquido en el cuerpo de la bomba, en el portamotor, en el conducto de aspiracion; tomar las
debidas precauciones si el liquido es peligroso (inflamable, corrosivo, venenoso, infectado, etc.).
- desmontar la bomba del motor desenroscando los tornillos (04.2) de la campana (04) y los tornillos (07.5) del eje (0.7)
- desmontar el cuerpo bomba (01), el rodete (03) y el cierre (25
- desenroscar el anillo (08) y quitar el seeger (71)
- extraer el eje (07) con los respectivos cojinetes de la parte de la campana (04)
- extraer el anillo (63) y los cojinetes (58-59) mediante un extractor o una prensa
- para el montaje operar en el sentido inverso
03A
745
04 '
' S9
r
JY i
} Y •� 5
}
45.1
45.2 / "I
443 }!
04.3 !
04.5
63
57.1
57.3
7a,s
7a.i �7a
74.2 70.2
703 70.3
70
54

ALLEGATO 2 - ANNEX 2
COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO - TORQUE VALUES
Coppie massime di serraggio per viti con filettatura metrica ISO a passo grosso, classe di resistenza 8.8.
Maximum torque values for ISO metric coarse pitch screw threads, grade 8.8.
NORMA DIN 267
According to STANDARD DIN 267
Coppie di serragggio
Torque values
Diametro
nominale / Size
O vite / screw
Esagono / Hex
mm
Classe di resistenza 8.8
Strength Grade 8.8
Nm
M5
8
6
M6
10
10
M8
13
24
M10
17
50
M12
19
84
M14
22
135
M 16
24
205
M 18
27
283
M20
30
400
M22
34
532
M24
36
691
M27
41
1010
M30
46
1370
Coppie massime di serraggio per dadi a manigliette (fig.1-fig.2; Rif. N°: 53, 53.2) su portine (fig.1-fig.2; Rif. N°: 16, 23, 26).
Maximum torque values for nuts and wrenches (fig.1-fig.2; Pos. Nr: 53, 53.2) on covers (fig.1-fig.2; Pos. Nr.: 16, 23, 26).
Diametro nominale / Size
Coppie di serragggio
0 dado o maniglietta / nut or wrench
Torque values
Nm
M10
25
M12
40
r{ 4 23 53.1
�52.1
21
f [22
52.1�-
10
14.1 i
li1 j
J �
53- 16
17 fig. 2
15
Coppie di serraggio per la bocca di mandata a di aspirazione della pompa (21, 10).
Torque values for delivery flange and suction flange of the pump (21, 10).
Coppie di serragggio (Nm)
Filettatura GAS
Torque values (Nm)
BSP thread
Maximum
1 1 /2"-11
90
2"-11
150
55

ANNEXE 2
COUPLES DE SERRAGE
Couples maximaux de serrage pour vis avec filetage metrique ISO a pas large, classe de resistance 8.8.
NORME DIN 267
Couples de serrage
Diametre nominal
H vis
Six pans
mm
Classe de resistance 8.8
Nm
M5
8
6
M6
10
10
M8
13
24
M10
17
50
M12
19
84
M14
22
135
M 16
24
205
M 18
27
283
M20
30
400
M22
34
532
M24
36
691
M27
41
1010
M30
46
1370
Couples maximaux de serrage pour ecrous et petites poignees (fig.1-fig.2 ; Ref. N° : 53, 53.2) sur portes (fig.1-fig.2 ; R6f. N°
16, 23, 26).
Diametre nominal
0 ecrou ou petite poignee
Couples de serrage
Nm
M10
25
M12
40
,.
d49 4S
52.1
10
14
— aat1
�-
} .f 17 fig. 1
Couples de serrage pour la bouche de refoulement et d'aspiration de la pompe (21, 10).
Filetage GAZ
Couples de serrage (Nm)
Maximum
1 1 /2"-11
90
2"-11
150
53.4 53'1
a3 �24
s2.1
a1
� sz
fig. 2
56

ANHANG2
ANZUGSDREHMOMENTE
Maximale Anzugsdrehmomente fur Schrauben mit metrischem ISO-Normalgewinde, Festigkeitsklasse 8.8.
DIN NORM 267
Anzugsdrehmomente
Nenndurchmesser
0 Schraube
Sechskant
mm
Festigkeitsklasse 8.8
Nm
M5
8
6
M6
10
10
M8
13
24
M10
17
50
M12
19
84
M14
22
135
M 16
24
205
M 18
27
283
M20
30
400
M22
34
532
M24
36
691
M27
41
1010
M30
46
1370
Maximale Anzugsdrehmoments fur Muttern and Griffe (Abb. 1 - Abb. 2, Nr.: 53, 53.2) an TUrchen (Abb. 1 - Abb. 2, Nr.: 16, 23, 26).
Nenndurchmesser
H Mutter oder Griff
Anzugsdrehmomente
Nm
M10
25
M12
40
ye-
a
23 21
22
b.
llow-
e 4a
sa y�
I" i•_ _ _ —so..
77 i
s3
15
17
Abb.1
51
53.5 —
53--/
Anzugsdrehmomente fur Druck- and Saugstutzen der Pumpe (21, 10).
Anzugsdrehmomente (Nm)
GAS-Gewinde
Maximum
1 1 /2"-11
90
2"-11
150
53.4 53.1
23—� �24
�. �52-1
ay
Q 22
57

AN EXO 2
PARES DE APRIETE
Pares maximos de apriete para tornillos con rosca metrica ISO de Paso grueso, clase de resistencia 8.8.
NORMA DIN 267
Pares de apriete
Diametro nominal
0 tornillo
Hexagono
mm
Clase de resistencia 8.8
Nm
M5
8
6
M6
10
10
M8
13
24
M10
17
50
M12
19
84
M14
22
135
M16
24
205
M18
27
283
M20
30
400
M22
34
532
M24
36
691
M27
41
1010
M30
46
1370
Pares maximos de apriete Para tuercas y palomillas (fig.1-fig.2; Ref. N°: 53, 53.2) en tapones (fig.1-fig.2; Ref. N°: 165 23, 26).
Diametro nominal
O tuerca o palomilla
Pares de apriete
Nm
M10
25
M12
40
53.2-
�d2.3
73 21
n
24
I- 4�
53.5 —
53—/
fig. 1
Pares de apriete para la boca de impulsion y de aspiracion de la bomba (21, 10).
Pares de apriete (Nm)
Rosca GAS
Maximo
1 1/211-11
90
211-11
150
53.4 53.1
52.1
21
22
fig. 2
58

VARISCO SpA
Terza Strada, 9 - Z.I. Nord - 35129 PADOVA - Italy
Tel. [phone] - Fax [phone]
www.variscospa.com
Vendite Italia: Tel. [phone] - Fax [phone]
[e-mail]
International sales: Ph. [phone] - Fax [phone]
[e-mail]

Manual
BlueBox
WE MAKE
LIOUIDS
TRANSPARENT.
DOC 486 0003-E-5.0-BDA
www.go-sys.de

,a>xsooaE�,.
BlueBox
Copyright
This Manual contains information which is the intellectual property of GO Systemelektronik GmbH. The user
is obliged to use this information exclusively to run the instrument. It is not permitted to pass this information
to third parties. Reproducing, copying, editing or extracting the manual contents is only allowed with the ex-
press permission of GO Systemelektronik GmbH.
Changes
GO Systemelektronik GmbH retains the right to modify the contents of the manual without prior notice.
Liability Exclusion
GO Systemelektronik GmbH takes no responsibility for correct system operation under all possible operating
conditions. It is not possible to guarantee that the software will function completely without error under all
possible circumstances. GO Systemelektronik GmbH cannot therefore accept liability for direct or indirect
damage resulting from system operation or the contents of this manual.
Product Observance
Within the scope of our obligation for product observance GO Systemelektronik GmbH will endeavour to
warn third parties about all identified dangers which could arise from the interaction between hardware and
software and from the use of other components. Effective product observance is only possible with ade-
quate information from the end user about the planned field of application and the hardware and software
used. If the conditions of use change or if the hardware or software are changed, due to the complex rela-
tionships between hardware and software it is no longer possible to describe all possible dangers and their
effects on the total system, in particular on our system. This manual does not describe every possible prop-
erty and combination of the system. For further information, please contact GO Systemelektronik GmbH.
Manufacturer's declaration
In setting up the device it is important amongst other things to note the correct electrical connections, protec-
tion against connections to foreign bodies, humidity, protection against excessive moisture due to condensa-
tion and to the overheating of the device in proper and improper use.
The implementation of these measures is the responsibility of the installers who setup this device.
@ GO Systemelektronik GmbH
Faluner Weg 1
D- 24109 Kiel
Germany
Tel.: [phone]
Fax: [phone]
http://www.go-sys.de
[e-mail]
valid from firmware version: 2.75.8
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 2 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WEMAKE
BlueBox
Table of contents
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 3 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
1 Properties and functions of the BlueBox
The BlueBox is the central element of the BlueBox-System. The BlueBox-System is a modular designed
measurement and control system.
The BlueBox is connected via CAN (Controller Area Network) technology with sensors and actuators.
For data processing and communication the BlueBox is equipped with the common interfaces.
1.1 Essential properties of the system
• Due to its modular structure the BlueBox system can handle almost every conceivable measurement
and control tasks.
• A BlueBox can be connected with up to 200 sensors or actuators. The connection takes place via sensor
modules' and actuator modules' (output modules).
• In addition to sensors and actuators from our own product range, we also integrate products of almost all
other manufacturers.
• The sensor -actuator modules and can be used in bus or star ciruit configuration decentralized over dis-
tances of up to 1000 meters (optionally longer).
• Measurement transfer and communication takes place via Ethernet, Internet, cellular radio3 (UMTS),
telephone line (ISDN, analogue), EMC or Modbus (RS-232 / RS-485), current outputs3 (4 — 20 mA).
• In mobile use it is possible to the connect the BlueBox with a GPS for the continuous position determi-
nation.
`sensor modules, a-g- Temperature, pH value, oxygen
II Temp I pH 0, 1
IIII I u I BlueBox
output modules for actuator
e_g. Relays, Pumps
o-�o-
external
power supply unit
BlueBox-System
schematic setup
data output and communication
via common interfaces
Internet USB
PLC
SMS E-mail
fllIIIIIIIIfI
u!Illuun!
uuuunlr!
nununln
LAN
' It is possible to connect multiple sensors/actuators to a sensor module.
2 A star circuit can only be used with a repeater (see 5 Connection of the CAN -bus repeater).
3 optional
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 4 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
mu
1.2 Technical data
Computer: PC 104, 200 MHz to 500 MHz
Operation system Linux®
Random access memory 256 MB (optional 512 MB)
Display: Touchpanel 240x128 pixel
�. •� 10 mq�
20
Article -No. 486 0003
Storage media: Industrial Compact Flash Card 1 GB; 512 MB; 128 MB
Mechanical data: Housing dimensions: 280 mm x 170 mm x 90 mm (W x L x H)
Weight: approx. 2,6 kg
Protection class: IP 65
Die-cast aluminum housing, powder coated
Colour: RAL 5010
Power supply: Nominal voltage: 24 V DC (18 V — 36 V)*
Nominal power: 10 W,
additionally max. 1 A at the output to the modules
Interfaces: 1 x RS-232 or RS-485 (half -duplex)
1 x CAN
1 x Ethernet 10/100MBit
1 x USB
optional: 2 x current output 4 mA — 20 mA
Modem: optional: Modem UMTS
optional: Modem ISDN/analogue
Ambient conditions: Ambient temperature: Storage: -10 °C to +50 °C
Operation: -20 °C to +45 °C
avoid direct sunlight
To ensure equipment protection and the proper functioning of the device, the above conditions are strictly to
be adhered to!
* The connected modules receive their power from the BlueBox. Some modules have a constricted input range, so there
is a input voltage tolerance of ± 10%.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 5 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
2 Before installation
2.1 Safety notices and warnings
Please read the manual carefully before using the BlueBox. Keep this also within easy reach. Pass the
BlueBox never without the manual to other people. The manufacturer is not liable for improper use.
This unit is designed with Low Voltage Directive and the safety regulations for electronic devices.
The trouble -free operation and reliability can only be assured if you pay attention to the generally applicable
safety measures and special safety instructions in this manual .
• Before the connection of the Blue Box to the power supply make sure that the labeled BlueBox operating
voltage matches the supply voltage (indicating the areas of power supply).
• The correct functioning and operational safety of the device can only be ensured, if the ambient condi-
tions that are specified in the section 1.2 "Technical data" are complianced.
• If the device is transported from a cold to a warm environment condensation may result in a failure of the
function. In this case, wait until the device temperature is at the level of the ambient temperature before
a new start-up.
• Maintenance and repair work may only be performed by a specialist who is authorized by GO
Systemelektronik.
If you assume that the device can no longer be operated safely, it is taken out of service and avoid re-
starting.
The safety may be compromised by the device if, for example, the device:
• has visible damages,
• no longer works as required,
• has been stored in improper conditions for a longer time,
• was exposed to improper transport conditions.
In cases of doubt give notice to GO Systemelektronik GmbH . If necessary send the device to GO
Systemelektronik for reparation respectively maintenance.
2.2 Basic equipment for operation
To operate the BlueBox in a meaningful way, a basic equipment is required:
1 x BlueBox
1 x CAN connection cable with a matching cable plug
1 x 24 V DC power supply unit with a connection cable to the BlueBox (43 W or 108 W)
1 x Sensor module or actuator module with connected sensor/actuator
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 6 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
3 Installation
3.1 Mounting of the BlueBox
Before mounting the BlueBox check the scope of delivery for completeness:
(this is an example for a minimum delivery scope without power supply and without sensor-/actuatormodule)
1. BlueBox
2. Manual BlueBox
3. Configuration Sheet
4. Drilling template
Manual — --
BlueBox "'" ^ ""... r ""` ■
Be careful when choosing the location of the BlueBox, the location has to achieve the following properties:
• rain -and sun -protected location
• convenient location for a mobile network coverage, if the Blue Box is used with an optional modem*
The Blue Box should be mounted on a vertical surface.
The drilling template is used for mounting on a flat surface. Please choose suitable mounting screws and
dowels, which are suitable for the material of the mounting surface.
Remove the covers on both sides of the BlueBox.
Below you see the holes for the mounting screws.
Despite the construction of the BlueBox in protection class IP 65you have to install the measuring instrument
in a rain -and sun -protected site.
If this is not possible, the BlueBox must be mounted in an additional housing.
A great advantage of the BlueBox is their design flexibility. Therefore construction of installation will vary by
application. A description of the structure and assembly of the BlueBox can only serve as an example.
UMTS, ISDN, analogue
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 7 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
3.2 Connection options
The BlueBox has the following connection options:
1. Ground connection
2. Power supply (24 V DC) via a 5-pin M12 panel plug (male)
3. Connection CAN -bus via a 5-pin M12 panel jack (female)
CAN -bus connection to the BlueBox sensor -/actuator modules via 4-wire CAN -Bus connection cable
4. USB connection
Please note: The USB port on the BlueBox is provided for data storage and update the firmware.
5. LAN port for LAN cables in standard or cross-link design (see also 3.4).
6. Connection serial interface via a 3-pin M8 panel plug (male), RS-232 or RS-485
7. Connection current output* 4 to 20 mA via a 4-pin M8 panel jack (female)
8. Connection current output* 4 to 20 mA via a 4-pin M8 panel jack (female)
9. Hole for an antenna or cable modem
Modems (optional):
• UMTS modem with antenna
• analogue modem
• ISDN modem
optional
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 8 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
3.21 Connector pin assignment at the BlueBox
1
•
•
•4
3
1
1
2
O
O
O
40 03
4
•
1•
Power supply 24 V DC
panel plug (M12, male)
3 +24 V DC
4 GND 24 V
CAN -bus
panel jack (M12, female)
1 CAN-H
2 CAN-L
3 +24 V DC
4 GND 24 V
RS-232 or RS-485
panel plug (M8, male)
• 3 1 GND
3 TX
4 RX
2 Current output 4 — 20 mA (optional)
panel jack (M8, female)
1 1 +24 V DC
2 I -Return
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 9 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
3.3 Connecting of the power supply
For connecting the power to the BlueBox you need an external power supply.
24 V DC cable) -
The power supply is available in two versions:
Power supply for the BlueBox (48 806 K00 00 Al), 43 W
Power supply for the BlueBox (48 806 K00 00 131), 108 W
220 V AC cable
QThe BlueBox should only be installed by a qualified person using suitable tools. Incorrect installa-
tion can result in serious malfunction and could damage the instrument.
Compare the BlueBox data for voltage and frequency with the available supply before connecting the power.
Please notice that the power supply unit is placed close to the BlueBox because the voltage is declining with
the length of the connecting cable.
QPlease notice that it is necessary to use the appropriate conductor cable for the environment. In
the outside area it is advisable to use a rubber cable that is approved for the usage site.
The cable jack located on the 24 V DC cable is to stuck in an unambiguous way in the corresponding panel
plug of the BlueBox.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 10 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
3.4 LAN -connection
The LAN port allows the connection of the Blue Box to a Local Area Network or directly to a PC.
Thus, a retrieval of data and direct communication with the BlueBox is possible. This requires the installation
of the BlueBox PC software on your local computer (see Manual BlueBox PC Software).
The connection to a network is made by a RJ-45-connector at the bottom of the BlueBox (see also 3.2 Con-
nection options).
For this connection you have to choose one of two different connecting cables.
• For connecting to a network you need a standard RJ-45 cable.
• For connecting to a PC you need a RJ-45-crosslink cable.
(Only if the PC has no automatic switch of the network interface.)
Please ensure that the RJ-45-plug snaps into the socket with a "click"!
If the closing cannot be inserted on the socket, please put vaseline on the rubber seal and try it again care-
fully.
Precondition for the protection class IP65:
• tightly twisted connector with protection class IP65 or higher on the
Q CAN -bus and power connection*
• fitted caps on the USB and LAN connection
or
• USB or LAN connector with protection class IP65 or higher.
* The delivered plugs from GO Systemelektronik have the protection class IP65.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 11 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
3.5 CAN -bus termination and RS-485 termination at the BlueBox
The CAN -bus termination is factory preset to ON.'
If you need to change the termination, open the housing2 and set the respective termination switch to either
ON or OFF.
On001[=51
�10n Off �
N N OffS1
RS-485 Termination ; ; CAN -Bus Termination
3.6 Jumper position RS-232 or RS-485
The BlueBox is factory preset to RS-232 unless requested otherwise by the customer.
If you need to change the jumper positions, open the housing and place the jumpers correspondingly.
Mo 0 0 10 B B 0-jumper
nmv anmv
a a a a a a
RS-232 RS-485
' If the BlueBox is configured to RS-485 by GO Systemelektronik, its termination is factory preset to ON.
2 see Appendix F - Opening a BlueBox housing
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 12 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
4 Connection of sensor and actuator
modules
The connection of sensor- or actuator modules to
the BlueBox is made by CAN* (Controller Area
Net -work). The connection at
the BlueBox is a M12-male-socket (see 3.2)
In the most cases the CAN -network is built as a
line -structure. At other structures the topology of
the network has to be conform to CAN -bus.
In a line structure the first and the last unit must
be terminated (see section 4.3 Termination of the
CAN -bus).
example sensors
temperature conduativy oxygen
example actuators
relay pump
connection diagram sensors/actuators
To connect a sensor -/actuator module with the
BlueBox insert the M12 male plug from the
CAN -connection cable into the M 12 female sock-
et at the BlueBox.
The other end of the CAN -connection cable can
be connected to a sensor -/actuator module in two
ways:
1. Connection with M12 male plug, see 4.1
Note the correct PIN assignment of the male plug
using the pin label.
When using a cable of the type LiYCY 2x2x0, 5
mm 2 (article no. 339 0001), the color coding ap-
plies to the table below.
2. Connection with spring clips, see 4.2
Note the correct terminal connections using the
circuit board label.
When using a cable of the type LiYCY 2x2x0.5
mmz (article no. 339 0001), the color coding ap-
plies to the table below.
color coding cable type UYCY 2x2x0.5 mmz
(article no. 339 00011
PIN no.
Clip no.
color coding
function
1
green (GN)
CAN -High
2
yellow (YE)
CAN -Low
3
white (WH)
+24 V DC
4
brown (BN)
24 V GND
A
If no module is connected, the BlueBox is not detected from the
BlueBox PC software.
Error message: Socket Error # 10061/Connection refused)
The CAN -bus (Controller Area Network) is an asyn-
chronous serial bus system and belongs to the field -
bus.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 13 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
4.1 Connection via M12 male plug
As an example of connecting a sensor -/actuator
module using a 4-pin cable and two M12 connect-
ors in the following the connection of a pH sensor
as a final module is shown. At the bottom of the
sensor housing is a four -pin M12 socket. In this
the four -pin M12 male plug off the CAN connec-
tion cable is inserted and fixed by turning the un-
ion nut.
pH sensor
earthing optional sensor connection
Aftamw
0 VMk-)V
sensor connection via M12-connector
(final module)
If the sensor module should be connected as a
pass module it is made by using a Y-splitter.
sensor connection via Y-splitter
(pass module)
4.1.1 Mounting of the M12 male plug at
the CAN -bus cable
1. Remove the coating of the cable (approx. 40
mm)
2. Put the preas-
sembled union nut
on the cable as far
as it will go.
3. Put the cable
strand in the
marked guidance
(configuration see
the table on the
previous page).
4. Cut off the over-
laying end of the
cable strand.
exemplary connection of a M 12 plug
with a 4-PIN cable
CAN -bus connecting cables or connectors can be
ordered by us under the following article numbers.
Article no.:
Cable for data and supply 3390001
M 12 male plug 3381100
M 12 Y-splitter 3381500
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 14 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
4.2 Connection via spring clips
The CAN -bus connecting cable will be brought
inside the housing through a grommet and con-
nected to a socket connector that plugs into the
header of the CAN -bus connection (1).
The clamps are suitable for wire cross sections
between 0.5 and 2.5 mmZ. The cable has to be
isolated until a length of 9 or 10 mm. The cable
strand is put in the clamp how described in the
following:
Please push down the spring with a suitable
screw driver underneath the upper hole (3) in
which the cable bared will be insert (2).
Remove the screw driver from the spring.
,I
•
L �D
A
sensor connection with spring clips
(final module)
•
The cable strand should be connected with the
clamp. Please check this by an easy traction at
the cable. If it is not, repeat the procedure.
If not all cable grommets in the hous-
ing are required, make sure that the
Qunused cable entries must be sealed
with plugs.
Only then the housing has the protec-
tion class IP 65.
Below is shown how a sensor on the spring clip as
a pass module will be connected. In this case the
CAN -bus cable that goes to the next module has
to be connected with a row of the spring clip plug.
Please attend to the correct colour coding.
sensor connection via spring clamps
(pass module)
color coding cable type UYCY 2x2x0.5 mm2
(article no. 339 00011
PIN no.
Clip no.
color coding
function
1
green (GN)
CAN -High
2
yellow (YE)
CAN -Low
3
white (WH)
+24 V DC
4
brown (BN)
24 V GND
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 15 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE E `QU os
4.3 Termination of the CAN -bus
It is important to "terminate" the specific modules
in the right way. Physical this means, that a mod-
ule at the beginning or the end of a bus has to be
endued with a closing resistor. With this "termina-
tion" the CAN -bus is closed, this prevents signal
reflections and signal interference.
Modules that are inside of a bus (pass modules)
may accordingly have no terminating resistor.
final module Vass module Vass module
temperature I I conductivity I I oxygen
final module
L■
l A
schematic representation of the CAN -bus line
structure, example
The on- and off -switching of the terminating resis-
tor is done with a DIP switch. This DIP switch is
located in the module housing next to the con-
nection clamps of the sensors and is labeled
"Termination".
The termination is switched on when the DIP
switch in position "ON".
The termination is switched off when the DIP
switch in position "OFF".
At the BlueBox itself, the termination resistor can
also be switched on and off. Here too, the DIP
switch is located next to the terminal to the cable
leading from the M12 connector on the mother-
board. Because the BlueBox is in the majority of
installations at the beginning of the CAN -bus, the
BlueBox is terminated at the factory, i.e. the ter-
mination resistor is switched on.
If the Blue Box is in the middle of a CAN -bus, the
termination of the BlueBox must be switched off.
see:
3.5 CAN -bus termination and RS-485 termination
at the BlueBox
DIP switch on position „ON", the termination
resistor is switched on.
The device is a final module.
DIP switch on position „OFF", the termination
resistor is switched on.
The device is a pass module.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 16 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
4.4 Checking the Termination
Please take notice of the correct termination of the
single modules to assure a correct performance of
the CAN -bus.
The termination can be controlled by measuring
the resistance between CAN -High and CAN -Low
with a multimeter.
The measurement can be done at any device of
the CAN -bus -system.
The easiest way to measure this resistance is
underneath the spring clips. That is the reason
why it is advisable to measure at modules with
clamps.
The measuring procedure is described in the fol-
lowing:
Consider that the modules that are going to be
proved are without voltage, i.e. the power supply
of the BLUEBOX has to be switched off.
Measure the resistance between CAN -High and
CAN -Low as it is shown in the illustration.
The measured value should be between 55 0
and 70 0. At the following divergency the respec-
tive errors are:.
0 Q short circuit in line
< 550 more than one module terminated
Korrekte Terminierung
1200 only one termination
(for example, only the BlueBox is
terminated)
>120 Q no module is terminated or
cable break
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 17 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

as<x4a vex,.
BlueBox
5 Connection of the CAN -bus repeater
(article no. 486 R000)
The active CAN repeater is a module to enlarge the CAN -bus topology. A repeater provides eight galvanic
disconnected bus segments.
Each of this bus segments can connect up to five modules on a max. length of 1000 m. The individual bus
segments are to be provided as necessary with a separate power supply.
The connection is carried out by circuit board connectors. The transfer rate is adjusted by the factory to a
value between 5 kBit/s and 50 kBit/s.
In case of long cable lengths or security applications the use of an active CAN repeater is inadvisable.
The figure below shows which connections of the CAN -bus inside the CAN repeater have to be terminated.
The figure can only be seen as an example.
fermina[ion
DF� DN
50 kbit/s
.2G4N-L
— 7 -?AV
— 4 AV GNO
FO
Port
t
'T
Fix Part Port Pon Pon P•]R port Par P;.ri
Input 1 2 3 s ., 1- 1 o
E6
rrenhegPoA1$ ConnPori CAN -bus repeater
Dnnneclors Port t�
T: Termination with DIP switch
1W ❑ p o o DIP switch at "ON"
low
I I I I
Systemelrktronik
FWUP41 Weg i
D-xglog Kiel
www.ga-sys.dr 0
5 kGitls
Pnrt Pori Port PG r, Purl Port Pon
2 3T 4 T `' T $T 7 T a T
Modul 1 I I Modulo 11
Ma'drul6
11
Modui 5
Modul2 T
Modul 3
T
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 18 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
6 The configuration sheet
The configuration sheets contains the necessary settings to run the BlueBox.
SOConfiguTation 'mem "
5y t—kkt—k Product: 6lueBox bate: �8.o6.�z
Central Unit
Serial number
A1234
Password
xxxxx
Story a device
CF-512
Network :
TCP/IP Address
192,16
8.1.167
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Port
14111
Password
xxxxx
Login Name
bluebox
Central Unit:
Serial number
A1234
Password
xxxxx
Storage device
CF-512
Serial number serial number of a BlueBox
With this serial number the BlueBox is identified by the
BlueBox PC Software.
b set at the factory, not changeable
Password password of a BlueBox
Is required to change the BlueBox system settings.
b set at the factory, not changeable
Storage device model and size of the internal memory of the BlueBox, here CF-512
(CF =Compact Flash, 512 = 512 MB)
r* set at the factory, changeable by replacing
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 19 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Network:
TCP/IP Address
192.168.1.167
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Port
14111
Password
xxxxx
Login Name
bluebox
TCP / IP Address IP address of BlueBox
At this address, the BlueBox is addressed on the network.
b set at the factory, changeable
Netmask netmask of the BlueBox
b set at the factory, changeable
Gateway default gateway of the Blue Box
b set at the factory, changeable
Port network Port of BlueBox
b set at the factory, not changeable
Password network password of BlueBox
Is needed to access the BlueBox via the AMS software.
r* set at the factory, not changeable
Login name user name for a modem connection
=> set at the factory, not changeable
see Manual BlueBox PC Software,
3.3 Password settings (RAS-Configuration)
iternet Gateway BlueBox settings:
P 91.221.182.141
'assword xxxxx
IP IP-Address of a Internet Gateways
-> can be configured at the factory, changeable
Password BlueBox password of an Internet Gateway
b can be configured at the factory, changeable
' IP-Address of the GO webservers (default address)
2 changeable only at the default address
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 20 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Internet Gatewav Windows settings:
I P
datagateway.go-sys.de
Username
bluebox
Password Windows
xxxxx
If the BlueBox is accessed via a gateway (e.g. a UMTS connection), you have to enter these access
data in the BlueBox SQL Software (see instructions BlueBox PC Software, 3.2.1 Settings of an exist-
ing BlueBox).
Nebinterface: http://webinterface.go-sys.de )
Username A12345
Password xxxxx
Access data for the webinterface (http://webinterface.go-sys.de)
Username user name of the webinterface
b on request from GO Systemelektronik
Password passwort of the webinterface
b on request from GO Systemelektronik
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 21 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osr "I
BlueBox
7 Switching on the BlueBox and password input
After the Blue Box has been started by switching on the power supply, shortly thereafter on the display' ap-
pear in succession the following notes.
During this time the BlueBox checks the database and initiates the system.
GO SYSTEMELEKTRONIK
Faluner Weg 1 D-24109 Kiel+049-431-58080-0 WWW.GO-SYS.DE
Init
System
Then the BlueBox initiates the connected sensors and actuators.
Boot Info
09:19:39
10.07.10
Search
Sensors 3 / 3
Aktuators 0/0
Virtual Sensors 1 / 1
Li
Menu
Boot Info
09:19:39
10.07.10
Ready
Sensors 3 / 3
Aktuators 0/0
Virtual Sensors 1 / 1
Ok
Once the initialization is complete, the display shows the number of connected sensors, actuators and virtual
sensors 2. After 20 seconds or after pressing > OK < the Parameter display (8.1) appears.
' At delivery the touch panel is calibrated and ready for use. After a longer storage it may be necessary to adjust for the
touch panel (see Appendix A).
2 The setup of virtual sensors is done with the AMS software, see manual BlueBox PC Software.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 22 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
Password input
Call-up the System menu 8.2.1 requires a password consisting of 4 digits.
The password can be found in the configuration shee\
Password
�3E �3E �3E �3E
;:E]
Deletes the last entered digit.
O Configuration
Central Unit:
Network:
Page: v,
TCPAP Address
192,168.1.167
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Part
14111
Password
xxxxx
Login Name
bluebox
Internet Gateway BlueBox settings:
IP 91,221.182,141
Password I xxxxx
Internet Gateway Windows settings:
IP dat atewa . s s.de
Usemame Ibluebox
Password I xxxxx
Webinterface: [ n,m.rn� n n ertaa.�oe
PUsemame A12345 1
Password xxxxx 1
This dokument contains
r�...y•.euy.w .m.
confidential information
r �_ Verifies the password and switches to the System menu.
If the password is incorrect, you receive an error message.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 23 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8 The menu operation
8.1 Parameter display
Here, as an example, the Parameter display of an oxygen sensor with integrated temperature sensor and a
ph sensor.
The measured value of a sensor is displayed for 6 s, thereafter the display switches in a cycling way to the
display of the next sensor.
1. Oxygen
2. Temperature
3. pH value
20
09:19:39
10.0 7.10
Oxygen
10 Mg/1
14
09:19:39
10.07.10
pH value
o
11
pH
60
09:19:39
rl
•J
10.0 7.10
Temperature
o
18OC
�
so 0 Menu
Error messages appear instead of the parameter (see Appendix G - Status and error messages).
Switches to the Parameter display of the previous sensor.
Switches the cycling of the Parameter display off.
f
Switches to the Parameter display of the next sensor.
Switches the cycling of the Parameter display off.
Switches the cycling of the Parameter display on and off.
70
1
The button is also a status indicator.
Menu
Switches to the Main menu.
Cycling on: In the upper right corner time and date is displayed.
Cycling off: In the upper right corner time and date of the last measurement is displayed.
When there is no user inactivity in all other menus for 2 minutes, the software switches back to the Parame-
ter display.
The bar graph on the left side of the display shows the current measured value.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 24 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2 Main menu
Menu Parameter display 8.1
Main menu 09:19:39
10.07.10
System User
Sensor list Actuator list
Sensor Help
=ystemSwitches to the System menu via a password input (see 7).
.s
Sensor list Switches to the menu of the Sensor list.
•s
Sensor Switches to the Sensor menu of the sensor, which is displayed in the Parameter dis-
•9
play.
ZES
r Switches to the menu of the User variables.
•s
Actuator list Switches to the actuator list.
..s
Help Switches to the Help menu.
..s
[� Switches to the Parameter display.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 25 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1 System menu
IEEE:] Main menu 8.2
System menu 09:19:39
10.07.10
Network Modem Language
Fime771 [
GPS
Shutdown Display
Network Switches to the Network menu.
Time Switches to the Time menu.
shutdown Shuts down the BlueBox.
Modem Switches to the Modem menu.
5EE]
Switches to the GPS menu.
f
Display Switches to the Display menu.
Language Switches to the Language menu.
Switches back to the Main menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 26 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1 Network Menu
Network System menu 8.2.1
r
The network connection allows data exchange with the BlueBox and a remote control.
To ensure the accuracy of the timing, you can synchronize the time setting of the BlueBox with a timeserver.
Network menu
IP-Address
IP-Netmask
Gateway
09:19:39
10.0 7.10
Timeserver
Internet
Info
=ddressSwitches to the input of the local IP address.
IP Netmask Switches to the input of the local Netmask.
r
Gateway Switches to the input of the IP address of the device, which executes the connection to
other networks.
Timeserver Switches to the input of the IP address of a timeserver.
Internet Switches to the settings of a direct Internet connection.
=nfoSwitches to the Info menu.
r
Switches back to the System menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 27 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.1 IP-Address menu
IP-Address Network menu 8.2.1.1
Here you can change the IP address, which identifies the BlueBox on your local network.
The IP address is configured at the factory (see configuration sheet).
The current value is displayed.
IP-Address EIE 3
192.168.1.169 EEE
EEE
EU]
Ok
input of the IP address with the numeric keys
Network:
TCP/IP Address
192.168.1.167
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Port
14111
Password
xxxxx
Login Name
bluebox
see configuration sheet
41 Deletes the last entered character.
ok Saves the IP address.
r�
Switches back to the Network menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 28 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.2 Netmask menu
IP-Netmask Network menu 8.2.1.1
Here you can change the netmask, the netmask defines the IP address range of the network ..
The netmask is configured at the factory (see configuration sheet).
The current value is displayed.
Netmask aaa
255.255.255.0 EEE
EEE
H11
Ok
input of the netmask with the numeric keys
Network:
TCP/IP Address
192.168.1.167
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Port
14111
Password
xxxxx
Login Name
bluebox
see configuration sheet
(� Deletes the last entered character.
�T
r�
ok Saves the netmask..
Switches back to the Network menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 29 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.3 Gateway IP-Address (default gateway)
Gateway Network menu 8.2.1.1
If the BlueBox shall communicate via the LAN connection with other networks, enter the IP address of the
device that executes the connection (another BlueBox, routers, servers, etc.).
The current value is displayed.
Gateway EE 3
0.0.0.0 EEE
oao
Ell]
Ok
input of the IP address of the gateway with the numeric keys
Network:
TCP/IP Address
192.168.1.167
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Port
14111
Password
xxxxx
Login Name
bluebox
see configuration sheet, default 0.0.0.0
(� Deletes the last entered character.
r
ok Saves the IP address of the gateway
r�
Switches back to the Network menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 30 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.4 Input timeserver
Timeserver Network menu 8.2.1.1
After entering an IP address or a Web address of a time server, the BlueBox automatically synchronizes your
system time with the server time. The current IP address or web address is displayed.
O OOOODO00 O°
0 DOOOODOD O
0 ODOODODO 0
O OOODOOOO O
OK ABC ��
O OOOODO00 O°
O OODOODOO° 0
O OO° ODO" ODO 0
0 OOOOODOO
ooOOO00%OO
OOOOOOOOOO
O O O O O O O OO O
O OO O O OO O O O
oK ABC ��
oK Saves the input and switches back to the Network menu settings.
ABC ? Switches between the three input menu back and forth.
abc
_ LED Deletes the last entered character.
�D Switches back to the Network menu without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 31 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5 Internet settings
Internet Network menu 8.2.1.1
From this menu you can determine the manner of connection of the Blue Box to a computer on the Internet
and set the connection on and off.
Requires an Internet connection via the network cable to the BlueBox or an Internet connection via an inter-
nal or external* GPRS/UMTS modem (see 8.2.1.4 Modem menu).
Internet settings
09:19:39
10.07.10
UDP settings
Service enabled
Gateway settings
DynDNS settings
Internet settings
09:19:39
10.07.10
UDP settings
Service disabled
Gateway settings
DynDNS settings
View Service enabled View Service disabled
UDP settings Switches to the menu of the UDP settings. UDP = User Datagram Protocol
Gateway settings Switches to the menu of the Gateway settings of the Internet connection.
DynDNS settings Switches to the menu of the DynDNS settings of the Internet connection. Only
by a connection via GPRS/UMTS modem.
Service enabled For service tasks GO Systemelektronik can access from the outside to the
BlueBox.
Service enabled: access to the operating system functions of BlueBox
Service disabled Service disabled: no access to operating system functions of BlueBox
-T Default: Service enabled
The button is also a status indicator.
Switches back to the Network menu.
External modems are not supported from GO Systemelektronik.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 32 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5.1 UDP settings
UDP settings Menu Internet settings 8.2.1.1.5
r
The UDP settings are necessary for the transmission of measurement data to a PC (e.g. for the online data
service BlueGate).
UDP settings
IP-Address
Encryption on
Password
View Encryption on
09:19:39
10.0 7.10
UDP settings
IP-Address
Encryption off
View Encryption off
09:19:39
10.07.10
�ddresSwitches to the input of the IP address of the destination computer.
Encryption on Switches the AES encryption of the connection off and on.
f The button is also a status indicator.
Default = Encryption off
Encryption off
The button is also a status indicator.
Password Switches to the setting of the encryption password.
Only visible at <Enxcryption on>.
Switches back to the menu Internet settings.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 33 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5.1.1 Setting IP address (UDP)
IP Address Menu UDP settings 8.2.1.1.5.1
Here you can enter the IP address of the destination computer in the Internet, to which the measuring data is
transmitted. The UDP protocol via port 14112 is used for the transmission. The current IP address is shown.
91.221.182.141 DE3]
EEE
EEE
Ell]
Ok
If a access to the BlueGate server was ordered, the IP address of the BlueBox is set to the default address
91.221.182.141 upon delivery.
41 Deletes the last entered character.
t
ok Saves the IP address.
<_ Switches back to the menu UDP settings.
Internet Gateway BlueBox settings:
IP 91.221.182.141
Password xxxxx
see configuration sheet
see also 8.2.1.1.5.2 Gateway settings (Internet)
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 34 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WEMAKE
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5.1.2 Determine the password of the encryption
Password Menu UDP settings 8.2.1.1.5.1
..S
The current setting is displayed.
OOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOODDO
oK ABC ��
OOOOOOOOO °0
OOOOOOOO oDO
OOOOODOOOO
OOOOOOODO
OOOOO °OOOOO
OO OO O OO OOO
OO OO O OO OOO
OOO O O OO O OO
OK ABC ��
YoK Saves the input and switches back to the Menu UDP settings.
AEC ;y Switches between the three input menu back and forth.
� Y
abc
Deletes the last entered character.
Y
Switches back to the Menu UDP settings without saving the input.
Y
Internet Gateway BlueBox settings:
I P 91.221.182.141
Password I xxxxx
see configuration sheet
see also 8.2.1.1.5.2 Gateway settings (Internet)
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 35 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5.2 Gateway settings (Internet)
Gateway settings Menu Internet settings 8.2.1.1.5
If the BlueBox shall communicate bidirectional with a computer in the Internet, enter here the IP address of
your BlueBox gateway and the associated password.
IP address and password you get from GO System elektronik (see configuration sheet).
G=teway
Gateway PW
Gateway settings 09:19:39
10.0 7.10
Gateway IP
Gateway PW
Input of the IP address of the gateway.
Input of the password of the gateway.
Switches back to the Menu Internet settings.
Internet Gatewav BlueBox settinas:
IP
91.221.182.141
Gateway IP
Password
xxxxx
Gateway PW
see configuration sheet
A gateway is necessary if any of those conditions is met:
1. The UMTS Internet connection has, assigned by the provider, a private IP address.
private IP address space: 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
2. Your provider blocks access from the Internet with a firewall.
3. More than one BlueBox is connected with the Internet via a UMTS modem.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 36 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WEMAKE
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5.2.1 Input gateway settings (Internet)
Gateway IP Menu Gateway settings (Internet) 8.2.1.1.5.2
Gateway PW
Input of the IP address or web address of the gateway and input of the password of this connection.
The current setting is displayed.
aK Saves the input and switches back to the Menu Gateway settings (Internet).
AEC ? Switches between the three input menus back and forth.
abc
_ t Deletes the last entered character.
Switches back to the Menu Gateway settings (Internet) without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 37 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.1.1.5.3 DynDNS settings
DynDNS settings Menu Internet settings 8.2.1.1.5
Here you can enter the DynDNS settings.
For the correct entries: Contact your DynDNS provider.
Currently only the DynDNS service www.dyndns.org is supported.
DynDNS settings
09:19:39
10.0 7.10
Host
Username
Password
Host Input Name under which the BlueBox on DynDNS can be reached
Username Input Login Username of your DynDNS account
Password Input Login password of your DynDNS account
r
= Switches back to the menu Internet settings.
If you need no Internet gateway (see 1.1.2), you can access via a DynDNS service from the Internet on the
BlueBox.
Condition is:
1. Your GPRS / UMTS Internet connection has a public IP address.
2. The access is not blocked by the provider.
1L File 1 Setup Options Visualisation Tools Help
Note:
In the Network settings
off the BlueBox in the
BlueBox Software the
encryption of the con-
nection must be ena-
bled.
There are no approved
non -encrypted connec-
tions over the Internet.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 38 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.1.1.5.3.1 Input DynDNS settings
Host DynDNS settings 8.2.1.1.5.3
Username
Password
The current setting is displayed.
0 �0000000 0°
0 00000000 0
0 000000�0 0
0 00000000 0
oK ABC �� i
0 00000000 0°
0 00000000° 0
0 00° 000H 000 0
0 00000000
O O O O O O OO O
O O O O O O O OO O
O OO O O OO O O
oK ABC ��
oK Saves the input and switches back to the Menu DynDNS settings.
Watc
Switches between the three input menu back and forth.
Deletes the last entered character.
Switches back to the Menu DynDNS without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 39 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.1.6 Info Network
4 Info Network menu 8.2.1.1
Here the current network settings are listed.
r
8.2.1.2 Time menu
Info
IP-Address
192.168.1.60
Netmask
255.255.255.0
Gateway
0.0.0.0
Timeserver
(no sync)
Switches back to the Network menu.
=TIMI
System menu 8.2.1
Time 09:19:39
10.07.10
Date Time drift
Time
Time zone
Date Switches to the input of the date.
=,mSwitches to the input of the time.
=,Tme Switches to the input of the time zone.
=,me Switches to the input of the time drift.
4:=Switches back to the System menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 40 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.2.1 Date menu
Date 8.2.1.2 Time menu
Date
Day
1 0.0 7 . 1 0 Month
Year
Day
Selection of day setting
Y
Month
Selection of month setting
Year
Selection of year setting
selection -1
selection +1
Switches back to the Time menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 41 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.1.2.2 Time menu
Time 8.2.1.2 Time menu
r
Time
Hour
09:19:39 Min
Sec
Hour Selection of hour setting
Min Selection of minute setting
-jEE�]
Selection of second setting
selection -1
selection +1
(� Switches back to the Time menu
QFirst set the time zone before you set the time.
• Summer time is adjusted only by changing the time zone (e.g. from +1 to +2).
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 42 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.1.2.3 Time zone menu
Time zone 8.2.1.2 Time menu
Time zone 0
10.07.10
+ 2:00 h
0 0 0
QPlease note that the setting described here only has impact on the displayed time zone and not
on the data -bound time.
time zone -0,25
time zone +0,25
(� Switches back to the Time menu.
8.2.1.2.4 Time drift menu
Time drift 8.2.1.2 Time menu
l
Time drift per day �F�
0.00S EEE
[J8 ]E
E 1111
Ok
The time drift refers to the daily clock drift of the internal clock. Enter the value of the clock drift in seconds
here and the clock drift is corrected.
EDeletes the last entered character.
ok Saves the input and switches back to the Time menu.
<- Switches back to the Time menu without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 43 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.3 Shutdown
r
snucdown System menu 8.2.1
For a proper operation it is necessary to shut down the BlueBox before disconnecting the power supply.
Shutdown? 09:19:39
10.07.10
YES NO
Yes Shutdown of the BlueBox
No Switches back to the System menu
The state of the shutdown is displayed.
The shutdown is complete.
You can turn off the BlueBox by interrupting the power supply.
A
If the BlueBox is not disconnected from the power supply after shutdown, it restarts again au-
tomatically after 10 minutes.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 44 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.1.4 Modem menu / Modem settings
Modem System menu 8.2.1
r
The view varies depending on the selected modem type (see: 8.2.1.4.3 Modem type settings).
Modem menu 09:19:39
10.07.10
Port Modem type
PIN UNITS
Info
Port Switches to the Modem port setup.
w PIN Switches to the input of the PIN number of the modem.
Only visible if modem type <GSM> or <GPRS/UMTS> is selected in the Modem type
settings (see:8.2.1.4.3 Modem type settings ).
Modem type Switches to the modem type settings.
uMrs Switches to the UMTS settings.
Only visible if modem type <GPRS/UMTS> is selected in the Modem type settings
(see: 8.2.1.4.3 Modem type settings ).
Info Switches to the Info menu of the modem settings.
r Switches back to the System menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 45 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.1.4.1 Modem port setup
Port Modem menu 8.2.1.4
r
Modem port setup
Off
Serial 1
USB 1
USB 2
off Enables or disables the modem connection
Factory default: disabled
Serial 1 Factory -mounted modems are connected to the serial port 1, in this case you press this
button.
,4uSB 1 If you have an external modem* on the USB plug at the housing of the BlueBox, press
this button (alternatively USB 2).
4uSB 2 If you have an external modem* on the USB plug at the housing of the BlueBox, press
this button (alternatively USB 1).
i
Switches back to the Modem Menu.
External modems are not supported from GO Systemelektronik.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 46 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.4.2 Input of the PIN number
PIN Modem menu 8.2.1.4
r
Q It is important to change the PIN number before installing or activating a new UMTS card, as
otherwise the UMTS card will be disabled by standardly repeated queries.
Modem PIN EEE
EEE
EEE
El0
Ok
Input of the PIN number with the numeric keys
Deletes the last entered character.
r
ok Saves the input and switches back to the Modem Menu.
<_ Switches back to the Modem Menu without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 47 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.4.3 Modem type settings
Modem type Modem menu 8.2.1.4
r
From this menu, the type of a connected modem is set.
Modem type
Off Analog
GSM GPRS/UMTS
ISDN
Off
No modem is connected.
GSM
A GSM modem* is connected.
ISDN
An ISDN modem is connected.
An Analogue modem Is connected.
Analog
r.. ..
GPRS/UMTS A GPRS modem* or a UMTS modem is connected.
Saves the input and switches back to the Modem Menu.
optional extra equipment
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 48 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.4.4 UMTS settings
UMTS Modem menu 8.2.1.4
r
From this menu, you set up your UMTS connection. For APN, username and password, contact your UMTS
provider.
UMTS settings
APN
Username Password
Routing disabled
APN Input APN (Access Point Name)
Username Input Username (Login name)
Password Input Password (Login password)
Routing disabled / Switches the routing on and off.
T The button is also a status indicator.
Routing enabled Factory default: routing off
Switches back to the Modem Menu.
The routing must be switched on, if you use this BlueBox as an Internet router. This is for example the case,
when via this BlueBox other BlueBoxes send measured values.
Please note that the connected BlueBoxes must use the IP address of the routing BlueBox as the address of
the default gateway see (8.2.1.1.3).
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 49 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.1.4.4.1 Input UMTS settings
APN UMTS settings 8.2.1.4.4
Username
Password
The current setting is displayed.
OO OO OD000 °O
00 DO O ODOOO
DO OO D OOOOO
OO OO 0 OOOOO
oK ABC ��
DODO O DOODO°
O�OD O ODOO° 0
DOO° 0 0 O" DODO
DODO 0 00 OO
O O O O O O O % O O
OOOOOOOOOO
O O O O O O O OO O
0000000000
oK ABC ��
aK
Saves the input and switches
back to the Menu UMTS settings.
I
Switches between the three in -
put menu back and forth.
abc
s Deletes the last entered character.
-� Switches back to the Menu UMTS settings without saving the input.
8.2.1.4.5 Modem Info (UMTS)
r
Info Modem menu 8.2.1.4
Modem Info
APN :nn
Username : nn
Password :nn
IP-Address :nn
RX bytes :nn
TX bytes :nn
Display of the actual settings of the UMTS modem
RX bytes: received data since connection started
TX bytes: transfered data since connection started
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 50 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.1.5 GPS Menu
r
�Ps System menu 8.2.1
GPS Menu 09:19:39
10.07.10
Port Switches to the settings of the connection of a GPS receiver.
Info Switches to the information menu of the GPS connection, here are the relevant GPS
data listed.
Switches back to the System menu
8.2.1.5.1 GPS Port Setup
Port GPS menu 8.2.1.5
r
..T
GPS Port Setup
09:19:39
10.07.10
Off
Serial 1
USB 1
USB 2
Off Enables or disables the GPS connection.
Factory default setting: disabled
Serial 1 Factory -mounted GPS receivers are connected to the serial port 1, in this case you
press this button.
USB 1 If you have an external GPS receiver module* at the USB plug on the housing of the
BlueBox, press this button (or USB 2).
'4uSB 2 If you have an external GPS receiver module* at the USB plug on the housing of the
BlueBox, press this button (or USB 1).
Switches back to the GPS menu.
External modems are not supported from GO Systemelektronik.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 51 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.1.6 Display
=1P
System menu 8.2.1
r
Display 09:19:39
10.07.10
Light
Dark
Press a point on the bar for Light or Dark to set the value of the backlight of the display.
When there is no user activity, after 150 seconds the software turns the backlight of the display to the value
of Light to the value of Dark. If there is user activity it switches back.
At an elevated temperature of the CPU the Dark value is ignored and the backlight of the display is switched
off.
Saves the setting and switches back to the system menu.
8.2.1.7 Language settings
Language System menu 8.2.1
Language settings
Deutsch
Espanol
Fran4aise
Deutsch Selection menu language German, the button is also a status indicator.
English Selection menu language English, the button is also a status indicator.
4EE=
Selection menu language Spanish, the button is also a status indicator.
Fran4aise Selection menu language French, the button is also a status indicator.
4:=Switches back to the system menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 52 / 73
www.go-sys.cle [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.2 Sensor list
=1-1-r
Main menu 8.2
r
Use this menu to access the menu of the connected sensors.
1/1
Oxygen
pH value
A
Temperature
The buttons of the sensors are arranged alphabetically. If necessary you can change a sensor name with the
AMS software.
In the example chosen here is the
1st Sensor, an oxygen sensor.
2nd Sensor, a pH sensor.
3rd Sensor, a temperature sensor.
Oxygen Switches to the menu of the oxygen sensor.
pH value Switches to the menu of the pH sensor.
Temperature Switches to the menu of the temperature sensor.
Scrolls the list.
Switches back to the Main menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 53 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

as<x4a vex,.
BlueBox
8.2.3 Sensor menu
Example oxygen
Sensor Main menu 8.2
Switches to the Sensor menu of the sensor, which is displayed in the Parameter
display.
Oxygen Sensor list 8.2.2
From this menu you can determine the settings of a connected sensor and calibrate it (if necessary), repre-
sent their values over time and see the current settings of the sensor. For the specific settings of the con-
nected sensor, please refer to the description of the sensors.
Oxygen 09:19:39
10.07.10
Interval Table
Fverage71
Diagram
Calibration Info
Interval Switches to the input of the measurement interval.
Average Switches to the input of the measurement average.
Calibration Switches to the calibration menus.
=ableSwitches to the table display.
Diagram Switches to the diagram display.
=nfoSwitches to the sensor information.
(� Switches back to the sensor menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 54 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE E `QU os
BlueBox
8.2.3.1 Interval and Average
Interval Sensor menu 8.2.3
r
Average
Interval: Period in seconds between the end of a measurement and the end of the next measurement.
Choose the interval according to the characteristics of the sensor. Each sensor requires a certain minimum
period for measuring a value.
Please note the data sheet of the sensor.
The higher the interval is set, the fewer measurements are taken, the shorter the download time.
Averaging: The measured value is the arithmetic average of the selected number of single measurements.
Interval 0�] �] Average 11 2 3
Aktual value 60 EEE Aktual value 6
oao 000
00 00
Ok � Ok
Current settings are displayed as "Actual value".
interval
single
measurements new
(here 5) measurement
measurement cycle
measuring
time
4=1
Deletes the last entered character.
Ok Saves the input and switches back to the Sensor menu.
r�
<- Switches back to the Sensor menu without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 55 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

WE u osE "I
BlueBox
8.2.3.2 Calibration
Calibration Sensor menu 8.2.3
r
The BlueBox allows calibration of sensors in the connected state. Calibration is password protected, see: 7
Switching on the BlueBox and password input.
Oxygen
Oxygen calibration
0.0 mg/I
Set
09:19:39
10.07.10
set Switches to the input of the first measuring point.
Switches back to the sensor menu.
.s
A detailed description of the calibration can be found at:
Appendix B / Calibrating a pH sensor
Appendix C / Calibration of an oxygen sensor
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 56 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.3.3 Table display (sensor values)
Table Sensor menu 8.2.3
Table
Statistics List
Statistics
Oxygen [mg/11
min. max.
mittl.
1 h
8.4 10.6
9.4
6h
8.3 9.7
9.2
12h
9.1 11.7
10.0
24h
8.8 10.9
9.4
7d
8.7 11.1
10.8
JL�
LISt
r
10.0 7.10
Oxygen [mg/11
08:56:38
8.8
08:57:38
8.8
08:58:38
9.0
09::38
00
8.
1
n
09:01:38
9.2
09:02:38
9.2
Scrolls the list.
I
4
Statistics of the measurement values over the past
24 hours and the last 7 days.
List of the measurement values of one day.
Displays the measurement values of the previous day.
>� Displays the measurement values of the nest day.
Switches to the sensor menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 57 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.3.4 Diagram display (sensor values)
Diagram Sensor menu 8.2.3
Auto scale
12
11
10
9
8
6
4
3
2
4LRange]
Diagram
Auto scale Range
Measurement values over the past 21 - 24 hours
(depending on the range of values), scaled to
min/max of all measured values.
Pushing on the display switches
to the sensor menu.
Measurement values over the past 21 - 24 hours
(depending on the range of values).
Pushing on the display switches
�s to the sensor menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 58 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.3.5 Sensor info
Info Sensor menu 8.2.3
Oxygen
Comment
Sensor serial no
Interval
Average
Resolution
Parameter
Unit
Last update
tox000032
60
6
0.1
Oxygen
mg/I
01:33:01
03.04.10
Commnent general comment for the sensor
Sensor serial no DAM -ID (8-digit designation of the Data Acquisition Module) +
run number of the sensor (0-9)
Interval measurement interval of the sensor
Average measurement average
Resolution measurement resolution
Parameter name of the parameter
Unit unit of the parameter
Last update date of the last measurement
= Switches back to the sensor menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 59 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.4 User variables
user Main menu 8.2
Example with two user variables
l�l
Variablel
Variable2 A
The AMS program as part of the BlueBox PC Software allows users to define variables that can be changed
directly in the BlueBox.
Variablel Switches to the menu of the first variable.
Variable2 Switches to the menu of the second variable.
Switches back to the Main menu.
menu of the first variable
Variablel
z.s
09:19:39
10.07.1 0
Setzen
The current value of the user variable is shown.
Setzen Switches to the input menu of the first variable.
Switches back to the menu of the user variable
input menu of the user variable
Variablel FEE
EEE
Fao
Fo-I 0 [1
OkI <- I
Here you can change the value of the user variable.
(� Deletes the last entered character.
ok Saves the input and switches back to the menu of the user variable.
switches back to the menu of the user variable without saving the input.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 60 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.5 Actuator list
Actuator list Main menu 8.2
Use this menu to access the menu of the connected actuators.
tit
Relay t
Relay 2
The buttons of the actuators are arranged alphabetically.
If necessary you can change a sensor name with the AMS software.
In the example chosen here there are two relays.
Relay 1 Switches to the menu of the first actuator.
,Relay 2 == Switches to the menu of the second actuator.
-i
IScrolls the list.
?
Switches back to the Main menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 61 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.5.1 Actuator menu
Example Relais 1
Relay 1 Actuator list 8.2.5
Relay 1
_]
FS
Diagram
Info
09:19:39
10.07.10
From this menu you can turn on and off a connected actuator and represent his values over time and see the
current settings of the actuator. For the specific settings of the connected actuator, please refer to the de-
scription of the actuator.
set Switches to the set menu of the actuator.
Diagram Switches to the diagram display of the actuator behaviour.
=nf.Switches to the info menu of the actuator.
Switches back to the main menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 62 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
8.2.5.1.1 Actuator setting
Example Relais 1
=SIt
Actuator menu 8.2.5.1
Relay 1 09:19:39
10.07.10
From this menu you can determine the status of a connected actuator, in this example you can turn a relay
on and off. For the specific settings of the connected actuator, please refer to the description of the actuator.
oN Switches the relay on, the button is also a status indicator.
Y Switches the relay off, the button is also a status indicator.
OFF E.
Switches back to the Actuator menu.
.s
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 63 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.5.2 Diagram display (actuator)
Diagram Actuator menu 8.2.5.1
innrnm
Displays the status of an actuator over the last 21 to 24 hours (similar 8.2.3.4 Diagram display (sensor val-
ues)).
8.2.5.3 Actuator info
Info Actuator menu 8.2.5.1
Relay 1
Comment
Pumpe 1
Sensor serial no.
fst002788
Interval
300
Average
1
Resolution
1
Parameter
switch
Unit
Last update
01:33:01
03.04.10
Comment general comment for the actuator
Sensor serial no. i.e. actuator number
Interval Inspection interval for the query function of the actuator
Average 1 - default value for actuators
Resolution 1 - default value for actuators
Parameter switch - default value for relays
Unit not used
Last update The update function is used for a function query and happens after
each inspection interval.
_ L= Switches back to the Actuator menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 64 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osr "I
8.2.6 Help menu
Help Main menu 8.2
r
WSYSTEM ELEMONIK
Faluner Weg 1
D-24109 Kiel
Germany
Tel [phone]
Fax [phone]
Info
Info Switches to the info menu of the system.
Switches to the menus of the plug and clip connection.
Switches back to the Main menu.
8.2.6.1 Info menu of the system
-JEHD
Help menu 8.2.6
System Info
09:19:39
10.07.10
Sensors
= 3 / 3
Actuators
= 0 / 0
Virtual Sensors
= 1 / 1
Software Version
= 2.69.82
UPS
= N/V
Switches back to the Help menu.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 65 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
8.2.6.2 Plug and clip connection
Help menu 8.2.6
9
Shows the pin assignments at the BlueBox for the current version.
plug male: M12-pin connector on the CAN -bus cable
338 1100 is the article number of the M12 pin connector.
plug female: M12 female connector on the power supply cable
338 1000 is the article number of the M12 socket plug.
Color coding is for the GO standard cable.
Shows the terminal connections of the CAN -bus cable into the
sensor modules for socket connectors with 4 contacts.
338 0130 is the article number of the 4-terminal socket con-
nector.
Color coding is for the GO standard cable.
Switches back.
f
f Switches forward.
(� Switches to the Main menu.
f
M12 Plug 4
plug male [
33811001
1 green CAN-H
2 yellow CAN-L
3 4
3 white +24
4 brown GND24V
plug female [
338 1000 1
4 3
3 white +24
4 brown GND24V
�4 Connector
[ 338 of 301 1 green
CAN-H
0000
2 yellow
CAN-L
3 white
+24V
O0(]�
4 brown
GND24V
1 4
T
0
GO Systemelektronik GmbH
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 66 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Appendix A - Adjustment of the touch display
If the display responses not or wrong to a button, a display adjustment is necessary.
While switching on power, press display until
the notice
"touch adjustment ?
don't touch for normal use
touch adjustment 7
appears. donn't touch for normal use
Left off the display immediately. tououchiornor;�
I donn't touch far normal use
Press the display immediately again for more touch adjustment?
than one second. donn't touch for normal use
�al touch this blinking dot
A blinking dot appears at top left.
Press the blinking dot top left.
A blinking dot appears at bottom right. touchthisb]MkingdoI - _a
J
Press the blinking dot bottom right. 1
The adjustment is finished.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 67 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Appendix B - Calibrating a pH sensor
The pH sensor is an electrochemical sensor. To function properly, electrochemical sensors have to recalibrate in regular intervals.
This is best done weekly, but at least a monthy.
For the two -point calibration you need two calibration fluids with different pH values, eg pH 4 and pH 9.2.
In this two -point calibration it is always the lower value first and then the higher value is measured.
The Bluebox independently calculates the calibration curve.
The calibration fluids are available as accessories under the item no. 3615910 at GO-Systemelektronik.
In addition, you need clean water for rinsing of the probes between the calibration steps.
Calibration set
Pr U
pH sensor in
tap water
Press the Main Menu on <Sensorlist>, then on the desired sensor and then <Calibration>.
OOO
EIE]EI
OOO
❑o OO
00
To protect against misuse there is a password protection set up.
The four -digit code number is in the information sheet. Continue with
Before the calibration starts, it is neccesary to rinse the selected pH sensor with clean tap water. This
preventspollutionof the calibration fluid.
i_�
�Ar
Open the bottle with the calibration fluid pH4. The with clean tap water rinsed pH sensor can be gently screwed into the interior of
the bottle with the calibration fluid. Now turn around the pH sensor together with the bottle, so that the sensor end is lapped with
calibration fluid.
Leave the sensor in the calibration fluid until the display is stable
pH 09:19:39
09.07.08
1. Value
4.3 pH
Set I <--
pH ��I
0F0
MR
0FIF]
Ok
pH 09:19:39
09.07.08 pH F IIF]
2. Value OOO
9.3 pH IMF]
OOO
Set O Ok O
Pressing <Set> leads to the input of the first measuring point.
Enter the pH value of the calibration fluid (here pH 4).
Continue with ok
The process is repeated with the second calibration fluid.
pH
Continue with
ok completed
<-
The calibration is completed.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 68 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Appendix C - Calibration of an oxygen sensor
The oxygen sensor is an electrochemical sensor. To function properly, electrochemical sensors have to be recalibrated at regular
intervals. This is best done weekly, but at least monthly.
There are two types of calibration:
• Calibration with a reference fluid
and
• Calibration in the air.
Press in the measurement display on <Menu> and <Sensorlist> on the main menu, then on the desired sensor and then on <Calibra-
tion>.
14.0 09:19:39
09.07.08
Oxygen 1 w
14,9 mg/1
Menu
0.0
Main Menu
System
Sensorlist
Oyxgen 1
PH 1
Interval
Sensorlist
A
Oxigen 2
Sensor
Sensor 4
Average
Calibration
SensorEl
To protect against misuse there is a password protection set up.
The four -digit code number is in the information sheet.
Calibration with a reference fluid
Immerse the oxygen sensor in the reference fluid and wait until the displayed value is stable.
Oxygen'! 09:19:39
09.07.08
Oxygen Calibration
10.5 mg/1
Set
Oxygen 1 El3
10 ❑❑❑
�EF9_1
ODO
Ok E:]O
Continue with set Enter the oxygen content of the
reference fluid.
Continue with ok
Calibration in air
Hold the oxygen sensor approximately 15 minutes to the air.
Oxygen 1 09:19:39
09.07.08 Oxygen 1 aa3
Oxygen Calibration aE]
14.9 mg/1 _1 EI00
aoo
Set
Continue with set Enter -1
Continue with ok
Password
aoo
EEE
F--]=
Continue with 5=
Oxygen'! 09:19:39
09.07.08
Oxygen Calibration
10.0 mg/1
Set
Check whether the measured value
agrees with the reference value.
Continue with set
Calibration completed
The calibration is completed.
After 2 seconds the BlueBox
switches to the measurand repre-
sentation.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 69 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

,a>xsooaE,.
BlueBox
Appendix D - Example configuration BlueGate-Server
BlueBox settings: see also 8.2.1.1.5.1 UDP settings
�tti Menu Internet settings 8.2.1.1.5
{
-.T
UDP settings
09:19:39
1 0.07.10
IP-Address
Encryption on
Password
see configuration sheet:
1❑
2O
The current value is displayed.
Internet Gateway BlueBox settings:
IP 91.221.182.141
Password xxxxx
II
2
OOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOO❑° O
OOOOOOOOOO
OOOOOOOOOO
oK ABC
Router settings:
For transmission of measurement data to the BlueGate Server the following port must be configured:
• Port 14112 UDP -> 91.221.182.141
For bidirectional communication with the BlueBox the following port must be configured:
• Port 14003 TCP <-> 91.221.182.141
For Windows -Software communication the following port must be configured:
• Port 14002 TCP <-> datagateway.go-sys.de
If a time server is connected to the BlueBox the following configuration is necessary:
• Port 37 TCP/UDP <-> Timeserver IP.
Note: If the internal network is not a Class A, B or C network then communication with the BlueBox is only
possible over: 0 Port 14110/TCP (SSL encrypted)
Unencrypted communication with the BlueBox is only possible from the following networks:
• 10.0.0.0/8 Class A network
• 172.16.0.0/12 Class B network
• 192.168.0.0/16 Class C network
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 70 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Appendix E - Update of the BlueBox firmware
Precondition is an operating LAN connection of the BlueBox.
Start FirmwareUpdate.exe on your PC.
File Help
BlueBox
Firmware 2.75-8 ouch
• Select the tab <Default>.
• Enter the network password of the BlueBox.
(see 6 „The configuration sheet" item Network)
• enter the IP-Address of the BlueBox.
(see 6 „The configuration sheet" item Network)
BlueBox Firmware Update
Update Success
Success
Firmware version of
the update
2, Update
Click <Update>
Default I Gateway
BlueBox Password
IP-Address
Ru
Click <OK>
J File • . • ,
,o Reboot BlueBox ?
OK Yes No
EA Update
Click <OK>
PA
Update Success date
J
I BlueBox
Firmware 2.75-8 Touch
Update Success I',. �
The BlueBox reboots, you can close the window.
Wait until the BlueBox is ready.
The update is completed successfully.
Click <Yes>.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 71 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
WE u osE "I
Appendix F - Opening a BlueBox housing
A
Shut down the BlueBox.
Disconnect the BlueBox from the power supply.
1. Remove the covers on both sides of the BlueBox.
2. Unscrew the four fixing screws.
3. Open the housing by hinging the cover from the front to the back.
In the cover there is the mainboard.
F�
A
This work must be carried out by qualified persons using suitable tools.
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 72 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

BlueBox
Appendix G - Status and error messages
Display
Description
Parameter
The sensor sends data.
No data
The sensor sends no data.
Wait
The BlueBox is waiting for the first measured value.
[Parameter]
Sensor warning, the measured value may be faulty.
Calc error
AMS formula error
? Sensor
In an AMS formula an unknown sensor is used.
Calc run
The computing time in an AMS formula has been exceeded
(for or while loop).
<min Parameter
The minimum measured value as determined in AMS was underrunned.
>max Parameter
The maximum measured value as determined in AMS was exceeded.
Com error
Communication error with the sensor
ADC min
The lower limit of the AD converter was underrunned.
ADC max
The upper limit of the AD converter was exceeded.
Dev error
Device error
GO Systemelektronik GmbH Faluner Weg 1 24109 Kiel Germany Tel.: [phone] Fax:-58080-11 Page 73 / 73
www.go-sys.de [e-mail]

Installing Your PROCON Pump
Your PROCON pump is a precision -built piece of equipment. Handle it
carefully. PROCON pumps should be installed only by qualified technicians.
NOTICE
When you install your pump, follow these guidelines:
• Do not hammer or mishandle your pump.
• Keep all foreign materials out of your pump.
• Never vise or grip the round body portion of the pump
housing. Grip only the square inlet/outlet bosses when
you install fittings. Always support the pump when you
install fittings to avoid bending the V-band clamp even if
the pump is already mounted to the motor.
• Make sure the power is off before working with an electric
motor. If possible, lock out the power at a disconnect.
• Make sure you have an adequate, well -lit work space and
use the correct tools.
• Do not use any components that are damaged or
deformed. You should not have to force any parts
together. If you receive parts that are damaged or
deformed, call your PROCON factory representative.
We test every PROCON pump at the factory for pressure and flow. If the
pump has a relief valve, we set it to your specifications.
CAUTION
Do not tamper with the relief valve on your pump. If you think the
relief valve needs to be reset, contact your PROCON factory
representative.
We make every effort to ensure that your pump is of the highest quality. To
get the most out of your pump, read and follow these instructions
carefully.

For all motors --examining your pump before you get started
Do not remove the shinninn nluns from the
ports at the top of the pump until time to
install fittings.
•
Examine the mounting surfaces on the
pump.
Before you install your pump, you must carefully unpack the pump and
examine and prepare it to be installed. Follow these steps for all types of
motors.
NOTICE
Do not exchange one pump model for another. Pumps are
carefully engineered to meet specific requirements and flow rates.
All pumps within a series have the same housing. They may look
alike, but they perform' differently. Check the model number to
make sure you have the correct pump before you install it.
Using the wrong pump may damage your pump, your system, or
your electric motor.
1 Take the pump out of its shipping container.
Do not remove the shipping plugs from the port until the fittings are
ready to be installed. This will keep debris out of the pump.
If the pump has a shaft coupling, remove the coupling and discard the
foam shipping strip. Reinsert the coupling.
Be careful when handling the pump; do not drop it or bang it. If you
mishandle the pump, especially the shaft end, you can disrupt or
damage internal clearances and impair performance of your pump.
2 Examine the mounting surfaces.
Carefully remove any burrs or raised metal which may have occurred
during unpacking and handling to make sure the pump will sit and be
aligned properly.
Now you are ready to mount the pump to a motor. PROCON pumps work
with two types of electric motors -- a carbonator style motor (NEMA 48YZ
frame) and a C-frame motor (NEMA 56C frame). Follow the steps for the
type of motor you are using.

Mounting your pump on a 56C frame motor
You should have these parts:
• bolt -on PROCON pump
• PROCON motor adapter
• 3-piece drive shaft coupling
• 56C frame motor
0
Bolt -on pump
adapter coupling
Correctly assembling the coupling and the adapter, and
mounting the pump is a trial and error process. You may have
to try several times before you get it right. Follow these steps
after you have examined your pump.
Mount the drive shaft coupling.
a. Make sure motor is electrically disconnected and
cannot accidentally turn on.
b. Mount the half of the coupling for the motor onto the
motor shaft and tighten the set screw.
c. Insert the elastomer piece onto the motor piece.
d. Mount the half of the coupling for the pump onto the
pump shaft, but do not tighten the set screw.
Make sure the coupling slides easily onto the pump and
the motor shaft -- do not force it. Make sure the shaft does
56C frame motor not protrude into the space occupied by the elastomer
piece. Series 6 pumps require a shaft key.
2 Mount the motor adapter onto the motor using four 3/8
inch dia. by 1 inch long bolts (16 threads/inch) and lock
washers.
Rotate the pump to orient the inlet/outlet ports as desired.
3 Trial mount the pump onto the motor adapter while
simultaneously engaging the coupling pieces.
4 Check to make sure that the coupling is properly engaged.
5 Tighten the set screw on the pump coupling half.
6 Check your assembly.
The elastomer coupling piece should have about 1/16 inch
of play between the two metal pieces.
If it does, go to step 7.
If it does not, repeat steps 1 through 5, until the assembly
is correct.
7 Fasten the pump to the adapter using three 1/4 inch dia.
by 3/4 inch bolts (20 threads/inch) and lock washers. For
Series 6 pumps, use two 3/8 inch dia. by 1 inch bolts (16
threads/inch).

8 Check to make sure that your motor rotates correctly.
Motor rotation must correspond to the rotation arrow on the nameplate
of the pump.
Mounting your pump on a 48YZ frame motor
You should have these parts: After you have examined your pump for damage, follow these steps.
• clamp -on PROCON pump 1 Make sure motor is electrically disconnected and cannot accidentally
• PROCON V-band clamp turn on.
• 48YZ frame motor
2 Slip the V-band onto the motor ring flange.
0 3 Mount the pump to the motor by inserting the tang (shaft) of the pump
into the slot on the motor.
° ° 4 Rotate the pump to orient the inlet/outlet ports as desired.
5 Make sure the ring flanges on the pump and on the motor are properly
Clamp -on pump 48YZ frame motor engaged and flush against one another.
V-band clamp 6 Make sure the clamp is fully seated around the entire circumference of
the pump and motor flanges.
7 Tighten the V-band clamp using 15 to 30 inch -pounds of torque.
Note: Do not over tighten the clamp. The V-band clamp is designed
to support the pump and fittings only. Loads caused by rigid
plumbing or heavy attachments may result in misalignment.

For all motors --installing the plumbing
When you finish mounting your pump on a motor, you must install the
plumbing for the pump. Follow these steps after you have mounted your
pump.
1 Install the inlet and outlet fittings.
Support the pump by using a backup wrench on the square port
bosses. Do not put any strain on the V-band clamp.
Use brass fittings or plastic fittings on a brass pump. Use stainless
steel or plastic fittings on a stainless steel pump. Using dissimilar
metals can cause corrosion, which may get into the pump and cause
damage.
Use Teflon thread tape to install the fittings. Do not let any thread tape
get into the pump and do not over -tighten the fittings.
Use a backup wrench on the square port 2 Check the inlet line.
boss to support the pump.
Make sure that the inlet line is big enough to allow adequate flow to the
inlet port of the pump (3/8 inch internal diameter for Series 1, 2, & 3 ;
1/2 inch internal diameter for Series 4 & 5; 1 inch internal diameter for
the Series 6; all elevated temperature applications above 150'F must
have oversized inlet piping).
Make sure that the inlet line is clean and properly flushed out. Protect
the pump with a 100 mesh or finer strainer or filter.
3 Connect the inlet line to the fitting on the pump.
4 Connect the outlet line to the fitting on the pump.

FAGGIOLATI PUMPS'&P.A.
♦ ---w
www.faggiolatipumps.com rso 9001 - 1so 14001
Macerata - Italy
ISO 80079 (ATEx)
it Istruzioni d'installazione a d'uso
per Miscelatori Sommergibili
en Instructions for installation and
usage Submersible Mixers
fr Instruction pour Pinstallation et
l'utilisation d'agitateurs
submersibles
de Anleitung fur Installation and
Gebrauch Tauchmischer
es Instrucciones de instalacion y use
para Mezcladores sumergibles
pt Instru�oes para a instalapao e
para o use dos Misturadores a
imersao
Serie: GM, XM, DM, EM

it
ISTRUZIONE D'INSTALLAZIONE
D'USO
DATI DI TARGA
LIMITAZIONI D'IMPIEGO
APPLICAZIONI
INSTALLAZIONE (norme di sicurezza)
COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI
ISPEZIONI
CAMBIO OLIO
PULIZIA
SCHEMI DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI
DISEGNI DI INGOMBRO
en
de
E
ANLEITUNG FUR INSTALLATION
UND
GEBRAUCH
3
TYPENSCHILDDATEN
3
4
BENUTZUNGSBESCHRANKUNGEN
13
4
ZWECK DER MASCHINE
13
4
INSTALLATION (Sicherheitsnormen)
13
5
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLUSSE
14
6
KONTROLLEN
15
6
OLWECHSEL
15
6
RENIGUNG
15
22
SCHEMA ELEKTRISCHE
22
26
ENTWURFZEICHNUNGEN
26
es
INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACION Y
AND USAGE USO
RATING PLATE
3
DATOS DE LA PLACA
3
WORKING LIMITS
7
LIMITACIONES DE EMPLEO
16
APPLICATIONS
7
APLICACIONES
16
INSTALLATION (safety regulations)
7
INSTALACI6N (normas de seguridad)
16
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
8
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS
17
INSPECTIONS
9
INSPECCIONES
18
OIL CHANGE
9
CAMBIO ACEITE
18
CLEANING
9
LIMPIEZA
18
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
22
ESQUEMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECT.
22
OUTLINE DRAWINGS
26
DIBUJOS DIMENSIONALES
26
fr
INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION ET
pt
INSTRUCAO PARA A INSTALA4'AO E O
D'UTILISATION USO
DONNEES NOMINALES
3
DADOS DE CHAPA
3
LIMITATIONS D'UTILISATION
10
LIMITAQOES DO USO
19
APPLICATIONS
10
APLICAQOES
19
INSTALLATION (normes di s6curit6)
10
INSTALAQAO (normas de seguran9a)
19
BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
11
CIRCUITOS ELECTRICOS
20
INSPECTIONS
12
INSPECQOES
21
VIDANGE DE L'HUILE
12
MUDANQA OLEO
21
NETTOYAGE
12
LIMPEZA
21
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECT.
22
ESQUEMA DAS LIGAQOES ELECTRICAS
22
DESSIN D'ENCOMBREMENT
26
DESENHOS DA DIMENSAO TOTAL
26
Il costruttore si riserva it diritto di modificare le caratteristiche tecniche senza alcun preavviso.
The manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical features without previous notice.
Le fabricant se r6serve le droit de modifier les caract6ristiques techniques sans preavis.
Der Hersteller behalt sich das recht vor, die technischen Kenndaten ohne Vorankiindigung zu andern.
El fabricante se reserva el derecho de modificar las caracteristicas tecnicas sin previo aviso.
O construtor reserva-se o direito de alterar as caracteristicas tecnicas sem qualquer aviso previo.
2

DATI DI TARGA - RATING PLATE - DONNEES NOMINALES - TYPENSCHILDDATEN -
PLACA DE DATOS - DADOS DE CHAPA
0 U� U
1) Tipo di miscelatore - Mixer type - Type de agitateur —
Mischerart - Tipo de mezclador - Tipo de misturador.
2) Diametro elica - Propeller diameter - Diametre helice —
Mischschraubendurchmesser - Diametro helice - Diametro
Helice.
3) N° di fasi, tensione nominale, frequenza - n° of phases,
rated voltage, frequency - n° de phases, tension nominale,
frequence - Stufenanzahl, Nennspannung, Frequenz - nro.
de fases, tension nominal, frecuencia - n° de faces, tensao
nominal, frequencia.
4) Potenza nominale - nominal power - Puissance
nominale— Nominalleistung - Potencia nominal - Potencia
nominal.
5) Fattore di servizio - Operation duty - Facteur de service
— Betriebsart - Factor de servicio - Factor de servigo.
6) Corrente nominale - Nominal current - Courant nominal
— Nominalstrom - Corriente nominal - Limite de corrente.
7) Capacity condensatore - capacitor rating - capacite
condensateur - Kapazitat des Kondensators - capacidad
condensador- capacidade do consensador.
8) Spinta di reazione - reaction thrust - pousse de reaction — reaktionsschub - empuje de reaccion - impulso de reacgao.
9) Classe di isolamento - Insulation class - Classe d'isolation — Isolierklasse - Clase de aislamiento - Classe de isolamento.
10) Temperatura massima del liquido - Max. liquid temperature - temp.max du liquide - max. Flussigkeitstemperatur
temp.max del liquido - temp.max do liquido.
11) Fattore di potenza - power factor - fac. Puissance — Leistungsfaktor - factor de potencia - factor de potencia.
12) Velocity di rotazione - rotation speed - Vitesse de rotation— Mischschraubendrehgeschwindigkeit - Velocidad rotacion
Velocidade do rotor.
13) Peso — Weight — Poids — Gewicht — Peso — Peso.
14) N° di matricola - Serial number - Nbre de matricule — Matrikelnr - Numero de serie - N° de identifica�ao.

it « Istruzioni originali »
AWERTIMENTI PER LA SICUREZZA
DELLE PERSONE E DELLE COSE
Questa simbologia I ' assieme alle relative
diciture: "Pericolo" a "Avvertenza" indicano la
potenziality del rischio derivante dal mancato rispetto della
prescrizione alla quale sono stati abbinati, come sotto
specificato:
Pericolo Awerte the la mancata osservanza
Rischio di scosse della prescrizione comporta un
elettriche
rischio di scosse elettriche.
Q Pericolo Awerte the la mancata osservanza
della prescrizione comporta un
rischio di danno alle persone a alle
cose.
Ffl
Avvertenza Avverte the la mancata osservanza
della prescrizione comporta un
rischio di danno al miscelatore
MOVIMENTAZIONE
Awertenza ATTENZIONE! non appoggiare it
miscelatore sull'elica.
'WIN ------
Mo
0
MY1
1I
aAvvertenza Per la movimentazione del
miscelatore non imballato, usufruire
del gancio appositamente predisposto
sulla carcassa dello stesso.
QPericolo E' assolutamente vietato sollevare it
Rischio di scosse miscelatore tramite it cavo elettrico.
elettriche
LIMITAZIONI D'IMPIEGO
Awertenza - Non lavorare con liquidi a
' temperature superiori a (vedere
scheda tecnica miscelatore).
- La density del liquido miscelato non
deve essere superiors a (vedere
scheda tecnica miscelatore).
- LIVELLO MINIMO DEL
LIQUIDO: it battente dell'acqua al di
sopra dell'elica e riportato nelle
dimensioni a pag. 26-33.
- PROFONDITA D'IMMERSIONE:
massimo 10 m.
Pericolo Soltanto miscelatori in version
A1 antideflagrante Ex d IIB T4 devono
essere utilizzati in ambienti con
pericolo di esplosione o di incendi.
Pertanto Putilizzatore deve essere a
conoscenza delle caratteristiche
chimiche e fisiche del liquido
miscelato.
RUMOROSITA
Non applicabile perche it miscelatore lavora immerso nella
vasca.
APPLICAZIONI
Questo tipo di miscelatore sommergibile e stato progettato
per:
Miscelazione di acque bianche e rmozione dei
depositi di fondo;
Agitazione e circolazione di liquami in impianti
di depurazione civili;
Miscelazione a circolazione dei fanghi.
INSTALLAZIONE
NORME DI SICUREZZA
Per prevenire it rischio di incidenti durante la
manutenzione o Finstallazione del miscelatore, e
opportuno seguire le seguenti norme:
Pericolo - Non lavorare mai da soli. Usate cintura
e corda di sicurezza, nonche una
maschera antigas se necessario. Non
ignorate it pericolo di annegamento.
- Assicuratevi the ci sia sufficiente
ossigeno e the non ci sia presenza di gas
velenosi.
- Controllate it rischio di esplosioni,
prima di saldare o usare un attrezzo
elettrico.
- Non ignorare it pericolo per la salute e
osservate le norme igieniche.
- Fate attenzione ai rischi derivanti da
guasti elettrici.
- Assicuratevi the Fattrezzatura per it
sollevamento sia in buone condizioni.
- Prowedete ad uno sbarramento adatto
intorno all'area dove lavorate.
- Assicuratevi di avere la possibility di un
veloce ritomo all'aria aperta.
- Usate casco, occhiali di sicurezza e
scarpe di protezione.
- Tutte le persone the lavorano in
stazioni di miscelazione di acque nere
devono essere vaccinate contro le
possibili malattie the possono essere
trasmesse.
- Non introdurre mai le mani vicino
1'elica. A tale proposito si awerte the it
miscelatore puo fermarsi e ripartire
automaticamente per Fintervento di
protezioni termiche o telecomandi, per
cui solo Finterruttore dell'alimentazione
elimina detto rischio.
- Per miscelatore in versione ATEX non
smontare la macchina quando vi e la
possibility di presenza di gas esplosivi
nell'atmosfera.
- Il miscelatore deve essere utilizzato
solo nel rispetto dei dati indicati sulla
targhetta di omologazione.
Il miscelatore e previsto per Fimpiego in liquidi the
possono essere dannosi alla salute. Per prevenire eventuali
danni agli occhi a alla pelle, osservate le seguenti norme,
in caso di intervento sul miscelatore:
4

it « Istruzioni originali »
• Usate sempre occhiali antinfortunistici e guanti di
gomma.
• Risciacquate bene it miscelatore con idropulitrice
a caldo, prima di iniziare 1'intervento.
• Risciacquate i diversi componenti con acqua
pulita, dopo averli smontati.
• Tenete uno straccio intorno alla vite della camera
olio, quando dovete svitarla. Questo per evitare
the eventuali spruzzi raggiungano gli occhi o la
pelle, qualora si fosse formats pressione nel
miscelatore a causa di infiltrazioni di liquido
miscelato.
Agite nel seguente modo, qualora prodotti chimici nocivi
dovessero venire a contatto.
Con i vostri occhi:
• Sciacquate immediatamente con acqua corrente
per 15 minuti, tenendo bene aperte le palpebre.
Mettetevi in contatto con un oculista.
Con la vostra pelle:
• Togliete gli abiti contaminati, lavate la pelle con
acqua a sapone, se necessario fatevi controllare da
un medico.
SEGUITE TUTTE LE REGOLE DI IGIENE E
SICUREZZA NONCHE LE EVENTUALI ORDINANZE
LOCALI.
ATTREZZATURA DI SOLLEVAMENTO
Per sollevare it miscelatore, a necessaria un'apposita
attrezzatura, essa deve poter alzare it miscelatore a calarlo
nella vasca, possibilmente senza la necessity di una ripresa.
La distanza minima tra it gancio di sollevamento e it bordo
vasca dovey essere secondo pagg. 26-33, per avere la
possibility di estrarre it miscelatore dalla vasca.
Un'attrezzatura di sollevamento sovradimensionata
potrebbe causare danni al miscelatore, qualora questo si
incastrasse durante le operazioni di sollevamento.
Assicuratevi the 1'ancoraggio dell'attrezzatura di
sollevamento sia sicura.
Pericolo ATTENZIONE! Tenetevi lontano dai
carichi sospesi.
COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI
L'intero impianto elettrico deve essere eseguito da
personale specializzato. Seguite norme a prescrizioni
locali. La casa costruttrice non si assume alcuna
responsability in caso di interventi effettuati da personale
non autorizzato.
Pericolo Nel caso di sostituzione del cavo, per
Rischio di scosse ragioni di sicurezza, it conduttore di
clemiche terra (giallo-verde) dovey essere circa
50mm piii lungo dei conduttori di
fase. In caso di distacco accidentale
del cavo, it terminale di terra dovey
essere 1'ultimo a staccarsi.
L'apparecchiatura di comando e
controllo non pub in alcun caso
essere installata nel pozzetto di
raccolta.
Ricordate the la corrente assorbita allo spunto per
1'avviamento diretto puo essere fino a 6 volte
1'assorbimento nominale. Accertatevi quindi the i fusibili
o gli interruttori automatici abbiano la corretta taratura.
Awertenza - Eventuali giunzioni del cavo di
alimentazione devono essere
assolutamente stagne.
- Verificate the la tensione a la
frequenza della rete corrispondono ai
dati di targa del miscelatore.
- La tension di alimentazione deve
corrispondere a quella indicata sulla
targhetta, con tolleranza 10%.
- Controllare sempre la corrente
assorbita dal miscelatore.
- Controllare the la taratura del rele
termico di protezione non sia
superiore al valore da not indicato a
pag. 3.
MOTORE ELETTRICO
Motore asincrono a gabbia di scoiattolo, classe
d'isolamento H(180°C). A secco, raffreddato dal liquido
circostante. Grado di protezione IP68.
Il motore 6 progettato per lavoro continuo o intermittente,
con un massimo di 15 awiamenti per ora regolarmente
distanziati.
Il motore e progettato per un fimzionamento con massimo
squilibrio di tensione tra le fasi del 5% (secondo le norme
CEI EN 60034-1).
SENSO DI ROTAZIONE
Il controllo del senso di rotazione deve essere effettuato
scrupolosamente all'atto della messa in funzione del
miscelatore.
Ff]
Awertenza Errato senso di rotazione provoca
una notevole diminuzione delle
prestazioni a pub causare danni al
miscelatore.
Il senso di rotazione a giusto se 1'elica vista posteriormente
(lato motore), ruota in senso orario. In caso di senso di
rotazione errato occorre scambiare tra Toro 2 qualsiasi dei 3
conduttori di fase sulla morsettiera del quadro elettrico.
APericolo E ASSOLUTAMENTE VIETATO
Rischio di scosse SOLLEVARE IL MISCELATORE
elettriche TRAMITE IL CAVO ELETTRICO.
Abbiate particolarmente cura del cavo di alimentazione e
procedere ad una sostituzione immediata, se danneggiato.
Awertenza ATTENZIONE! L'estremity del cavo
non deve essere sommersa. I
terminali devono essere sicuramente
fissati sopra it livello massimo del
liquido, per evitare the 1'acqua possa
penetrare attraverso it cavo nel
motore.

it « Istruzioni originali »
QUADRO ELETTRICO prevenire spruzzi, tenete uno straccio
intorno alla vite del serbatoio
QPericolo E' assolutamente vietato it dell'olio, quando la svitate.
xischio di scosse collegamento diretto della pP elettriche - Svitare it to o di chiusura della
macchina tramite spina, collegare it camera olio e fare fuoriuscire
cavo elettrico ad un armadietto di completamente folio, riempire quindi
comando con protezione termica. con la quantity prescritta di
lubrificante (vedi pag. 3), richiudete
Le macchine devono essere dotate di un quadro elettrico di accuratamente a sostituendo sempre
comando. Tale quadro deve essere previsto per permettere la stessa rosetta di rame.
sia it funzionamento manuale the automatico. La - Se notate evidenti tracce d'acqua o
dotazione minima deve prevedere circuito di comando a se folio e fortemente emulsionato,
bassa tensione, circuito per it controllo e la regolazione controllate la tenuta meccanica
automatica del livello, circuito di rilevazione anomalie di inferiors se necessario sostituitela,
funzionamento. Il quadro di comando completo puo essere oppure rivolgetevi ad una officina
fornito su richiesta. autorizzata.
Gh schemi di collegamento sono riportati a pag.
22 PULIZIA
RIVELATORE D'INFILTRAZIONE
ACQUA
Per miscelatori equipaggiati di rivelatore incorporato
d'infiltrazione acqua nella camera olio.
Il sensors rileva la presenza d'acqua nell'olio quando la
percentuale supera it valore del 30%. Qualora it sensors
venisse attivato, si raccomanda di cambiare folio.
Se it sensore dovesse venire attivato nuovamente dopo
poco tempo dal cambio dell'olio, si raccomanda di
sostituire la tenuta meccanica.
CONTROLLI E MANUTENZIONE
Pericolo ATTENZIONE! Si avverte the it
miscelatore puo fermarsi e ripartire
automaticamente per 1'intervento di
protezioni termiche o telecomandi,
per cui non intervenire mai in
prossimity dell'elica senza prima aver
effettuato l'interruzione della
macchina dalla rete elettrica di
alimentazione.
ISPEZIONI
Controlli periodici a manutenzioni preventive garantiscono
un funzionamento piu sicuro nel tempo.
Il miscelatore deve essere ispezionato dopo 2000 ore di
funzionamento o almeno una volta all'anno e, in caso di
funzionamento in condizioni particolarmente gravose,
occorre eseguire l'ispezione pifi frequentemente, in questa
occasione a necessario controllare to stato dell'olio.
In condizioni normali di funzionamento, a consigliabile far
revisionare it miscelatore in una officina autorizzata ogni
tre anni.
CAMBIO OLIO
Il riempimento della camera olio viene eseguito in
fabbrica; qualora ci siano tracce di acqua o leggera
emulsione si rende necessario it cambio dell'olio. Bisogna
estrarre it miscelatore dal pozzetto, it tappo dell'olio si
trova lateralmente alla camera olio, consigliamo di
effettuare l'operazione presso una officina autorizzata.
Pericolo - ATTENZIONE! In caso di
1 infiltrazioni dalla tenuta, la camera
olio puo essere in pressione. Per
Per pulire 1'elica da corpi filamentosi puo essere
sufficiente avviare it miscelatore per pochi secondi con
senso di rotazione inverso.
Se it miscelatore viene impiegato per 1'uso saltuario, per
evitare depositi ed incrostazioni, sarebbe indispensabile
pulirlo dopo ogni servizio mediante 1'immersione a la
miscelazione di acqua pulita,. Dopo la pulizia lavare la
vasca immettendo nella stessa acqua pulita.
Avvertenza NON FORZATE IL
' MISCELATORE AD AWIARSI
PIU VOLTE SE INTERVIENE LA
PROTEZIONE TERMICA.

en « Translation of the original instructions »
SAFETY WARNINGS FOR PERSONS AND
EQUIPMENT
These symbols I ' I together with the relative
words: "Danger" and "Warning", indicate the potential
risk deriving from failure to observe the safety precautions
to which they have been associated, as specified below:
ADanger Warns that failure to comply with the
Risk of electric safety precautions may result in
shock
electric shock.
Danger
Warns that failure to comply with the
safety precautions may result in
damage to person and/or equipment.
Warning
Warns that failure to comply with the
•
safety precautions may result in
damage to the mixer or the plant.
HANDLING
Warning
CAUTION! do not use the propeller
to rest the mixer.
Warning Use the special lifting eyebolt on the
casing of the mixer for the handling
of the unpacked unit.
Danger Do not use the electrical cable to lift
Risk of electric the mixer.
shock
WORKING LIMITS
J-1 Warning - As about of mixed liquid max
temperature (see mixer data sheet).
- The density of the mixed liquid must
not exceed (see mixer data sheet).
- MINIMUM WATER LEVEL: The
water level above the propeller is quoted
in the dimensions at page 26-33.
- IMMERSION DEPTH: maximum 10m.
Danger Only mixers in explosion -proof version
• Ex d IIB T4 must be used environments
in which there is explosion danger.
Therefore the end user must know the
chemical characteristics of the liquid.
NOISE
Not applicable, since the mixer works submerged in wells.
APPLICATIONS
This submersible mixer has been designed for the
following used:
• Blending of waste water and mud moving.
• Blending and recirculation of sewer water
effluent.
• Blending and recirculation of mud.
INSTALLATION
SAFETY REGULATIONS
To avoid the risk of accidents during mixer maintenance or
installation, the following regulations should be observed:
Danger - Never work alone. Use safety belt
and rope and also a gas mask, if
necessary. Do not overlook the risk
of drawing.
- Make sure that sufficient oxygen is
available and toxic fumes are present.
- Before welding or using electrical
equipment make sure there are no
risks of explosion.
- Do not overlook dangers to your
health; follow common hygienic
practices.
- Be aware of risks resulting from
electrical malfunctions.
- Make sure that the hoisting
equipment is in good condition.
Install a suitable barrier around the
working area.
- Make sure that a fast easy exit to the
open air is available.
- Use a helmet, safety goggles and
protective shoes.
- All the people working in sewage
water mixing stations must be
vaccinated against any diseases that
may be transmitted.
- Never introduce your fingers near
the propeller. Keep in mind that the
mixer may stop and restart
automatically following the
triggering of thermal protections or of
remote control devices; only the
power supply switch may eliminate
this risk.
- For mixer in version ATEX do not
disassemble the equipment when
there is the eventuality of explosive
gas presence in the atmosphere.
- The mixer must be used only in the
respect of the data indicated on the
nameplate.
The mixer has been designed to be used with liquids that
may be hazardous to your health. To avoid injuries to your
eyes or skin, comply with the following safety precautions
when operating on the mixer:
• Always use safety goggles and rubber glaives.
• Rinse the mixer well with a hot water cleaning
machine before servicing it.
Rinse the different components with clean water
after having disassembled them.
Wrap a rag around the oil chamber screw
whenever you have to loosen it, to prevent sprays
from reaching your skin or eyes in the event that
pressure has built up in the mixer due to
infiltration of the mixed liquid.
In the event of contact with toxic chemicals, proceed as
follows:

en « Translation of the original instructions »
Eyes:
Skin:
Rinse immediately with running water for 15
minutes keeping eyelids wide open. Contact an
eye doctor.
Remove the contaminated clothing, wash skin
with soap and water; if necessary, consult a
doctor.
FOLLOW ALL THE OTHER HYGIENIC AND SAFETY
PRACTICES AND LOCAL RULES AND
REGULATIONS.
HOISTING EQUIPMENT
Suitable hoisting equipment is necessary for lifting the
mixer and lowering it inside the tank, if possible without
requiring a take-up. The minimum distance between the
lifting hook and the edge of the tank must be like show to
pages 26-33 to allow for the extraction of the mixer from
the tank. Oversized hoisting equipment may cause damage
to the mixer in the event that it should get jammed during
the lifting operations. Make sure that the lifting equipment
is properly secured.
Q Danger WARNING! Keep clear of suspended
loads.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The entire electric system must be installed by skilled
personnel. Follow local rules and regulations. The
manufacturer does not assume any responsibility in case of
services carried on by not authorized personnel.
Danger If the cable must be replaced, for
Risk of electric safety reasons, the earth conductor
shook (yellow -green) must be about 50mm
longer than the phase conductors.
In the event that the cable should
accidentally come loose, the earth
terminal must be the last one to be
disconnected. The command and
control equipment cannot be installed
inside the sump pit.
Remember that the initial input current for direct starting
may be up to 6 times the rated absorption; therefore, make
sure that the fuses or the automatic switches have the
adequate setting.
Warning - Any splicing of the supply cable
must be absolutely waterproof.
- Make sure that the mains voltage
and frequency correspond with the
mixer rating.
- The supply voltage must agree with
the specifications indicated on the
rating plate, with a 10% tolerance.
- Always check the current absorbed
by the mixer.
- Make sure that the setting of the
temperature relay does not exceed the
indicated value pag 3.
ELECTRIC MOTOR
Motor asynchronous squirrel cage type, insulation class H
(180°C). Dry motor, cooled by surrounding liquid.
Protection degree IP 68.
The motor is designed for continuous or intermittent
operation, with a maximum of 15 starts per hour at regular
intervals.
The motor is designed for work with 5% maximum
voltage unbalance between the phases (in compliance with
norms CEI EN 60034-1).
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
The direction of rotation must be carefully checked when
the mixer are started.
Warning If the direction of rotation is wrong
Ff-1 the delivery of the mixer
inadequate and may result in
damage to the unit.
The direction of rotation is correct if, at starting, you
notice an clockwise recoil when looking at the mixer from
the cable gland side. If the direction of rotation is wrong
you need to invert any 2 of the 3 phase wires on the
terminal board of the electrical box.
Danger DO NOT USE THE ELECTRICAL
Risk of electric CABLE TO LIFT THE MIXER
shock
Take good care of the supply cable; replace it immediately
if damaged.
Warning The end of the cable must not be
submerged. The cable terminals must
be securely fastened above the
maximum level of the liquid, to
prevent the water from penetrating
inside the motor through the cable.
ELECTRICAL PANEL
tDanger Do not connect the pump directly
Risk of electric by a plug; connect the electric cable
shock to a control box with thermal
protection.
This series of submersible pumps must be equipped with
an electrical control panel. The panel must be designed to
allow both manual and automatic operation. It should be
equipped with at least a low voltage control circuit, an
automatic level control an adjustment circuit, a circuit for
detecting any operating anomalies. If required the
complete control panel can be supplied.
See page 22 for electrical connection diagram.

en « Translation of the original instructions »
WATER INFILTRATION DETECTOR CLEANING
For mixer equipped with a built-in device that detects
water infiltration in the oil chamber.
The sensor reveals the presence of water in the oil when it
exceeds 30%. If the sensor is activated the oil should be
changed.
In the event that the sensor is activated again after a short
time since the oil was changed, we recommend the
replacement of the mechanical seal.
CHECK AND MAINTENANCE
Q Danger WARNING! Never introduce your
fingers inside the suction inlet as
there is a risk of injuries due to
contact with the propeller. Keep in
mind that the mixer may stop and
restart automatically following the
triggering of thermal protections or of
remote control devices; only the
interruption of the mains supply may
eliminate this risk.
INSPECTIONS
Periodical checks and preventive maintenance ensure safer
operation for a longer period of time. The mixer must be
inspected after 2000 working hours or at least once a year
and, in case of operations under particularly stressful
conditions, the inspections must be more frequent. On
these occasions remember to check the oil.
Under normal working conditions the mixer should be
overhauled by a qualified mechanic every three years.
OIL CHANGE
The oil chamber is filled at the factory; if there are traces
of water or light emulsion the oil has to be changed. The
mixer must be extracted from the sump. The oil plug is on
the side of the oil chamber; we suggest performing this
operation at a shop authorized.
Danger - WARNING! If there is infiltration
1 through the seal the oil chamber may
be under pressure. To avoid sprays
wrap a rag around the oil tank screw
when you loosen it.
- Loosen the oil chamber plug and let
all the oil out, then refill using the
prescribed quantity of lubricant (see
page 3); tighten the plug,
remembering that the copper washer
must always be replaced.
- If you notice that the oil is
emulsified or that there are evident
signs of water, check the lower
mechanical seal; replace it if
necessary or contact an authorized
dealer.
If the mixer is used only occasionally it should be cleaned
after each operation by flushing with clean water to
eliminate deposits and caking. After cleaning, the sump
should be flushed with clean water.
aWarning DO NOT CONTINUOUSLY TRY
• TO START THE MIXER IF THE
THERMAL PROTECTION
DEVICE TRIGGERS.

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
AVERTISSEMENTS CONCERNANT LA
SECURITE DES PERSONNES ET DES
CHOSES
Ces s mboles , y en meme temps que les
mentions correspondantes: "Danger" et "Avertissement",
indiquent 1'eventualite de 1'existence d'un risque naissant
de 1'absence de respect de la prescription a laquelle ils sont
combines, comme specifie ci-dessous:
tDanger Avertit du fait que Fabsence de
Risque de respect de la prescription entraine un
secousses
61ectriques risque de secousses electriques.
Danger Avertit du fait que Fabsence de
respect de la prescription entraine un
risque de dommage aux personnel et
aux choses.
Avertissement Avertit du fait que Fabsence de
respect de la prescription entraine le
risque d'endommager le melangeur
DEPLACEMENT
Avertissement ATTENTION! ne soutien pas
I'agitateur par son helice.
Avertissement Pour le deplacement du
' melangeur non emballe, utiliser le
crochet qui est prevu a cet effet sur la
carcasse de celui-ci.
QDanger Il est absolument interdit de soulever
Risque de le melangeur par le cable electrique.
secousses
electiques
LIMITATIONS D'UTILISATION
Avertissement - Ne pas travailler avec des
• liquides se trouvant a des temperatures
superieures a (voir fiche technique du
melangeur).
- La densite du liquide melange ne doit
pas titre superieure a (voir fiche
technique du melangeur).
- NIVEAU MINIMUM DU LIQUIDE:
le battant de Peau au-dessus de Phelice
est fourni sous les dimensions qui sont
fournies a la page 26-33.
- profondeur d'immersion: 1Om max.
Danger Seuls des melangeurs sous la version
antideflagrante Ex d II13 T4 peuvent etre
utilises dans des milieux ambiants
presentant des dangers d'explosion ou
d'incendie. L'utilisateur doit en
consequence titre au courant des
caracteristiques chimiques et physiques
du liquide melange.
NIVEAU DE BRUIT
Non applicable parce que le melangeur fonctionne
immerge dans la cuve.
APPLICATIONS
Ce type de melangeur submersible a ete conqu pour:
• Melange d'eaux blanches et elimination des
dep6ts du fond;
• Agitation et mise en circulation de liquides dans
des installations civiles de depuration ;
• Melange et mise en circulation des boues.
INSTALLATION
NORMES DE SECURITE
Pour prevenir le risque d'accidents pendant 1'entretien ou
1'installation du melangeur, it est necessaire de se
conformer aux normes suivantes:
Danger - Ne travaillez jamais tout seul. Utilisez
une ceinture et une corde de securite,
ainsi qu'un masque anti-gaz si c'est
necessaire. Ne sous-estimez pas le
danger de noyade.
- Assurez-vous qu'il y a suffisamment
d'oxygene et qu'on nest pas en presence
de gaz nocifs.
- Controlez le risque d'explosions, avant
de souder ou d'utiliser un outil
electrique.
- N'ignorez pas le danger pour la sante et
respectez les normes hygieniques.
- Faites attention aux risques derivant des
pannes electriques.
- Assurez-vous que 1'equipement pour le
soulevement est dans de bonnes
conditions.
- Veillez a placer des barrieres autour de
le la zone oii vous travaillez.
- Assurez-vous qu'il existe la possibilite
d'un retour rapide a fair libre.
- Utilisez casque, lunettes de securite et
chaussures de protection.
- Toutes les personnel qui travaillent
dans des stations de melangeage d'eaux
noires doivent titre vaccines contre les
eventuelles maladies qui peuvent etre
transmises.
- Ne jamais placer les mains a proximite
de 11elice. A ce propos, on avertit que le
melangeur peut s'arreter et repartir
automatiquement a la suite de
1'intervention des protections thermiques
on des telecommandes, en consequence
de quoi, seul 1'interrupteur de
1'alimentation elimine ce risque.
- Pour les melangeurs sous la version
ATEX, ne pas demonter la machine
quand it existe la possibilite d'une
presence de gaz explosifs dans
1'atmosphere.
- Le melangeur doit etre utilise
uniquement en respectant les donnees
nominales indiquees sur la plaquette
d'homologation.
10

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
Le melangeur est prevu pour etre employe dans des
liquides qui peuvent etre nuisibles pour la sant&. Pour
pr&venir tout dommage &ventuel aux yeux et a la peau,
observez les normes suivantes, dans le cas d'une
intervention sur le melangeur :
• Utilisez toujours des lunettes anti -accidents et des
gants de caoutchouc.
• Rincez bien le melangeur avec un appareil
d'hydro-nettoyage a chaud, avant de commencer
l'intervention.
• Rincez les differents composants avec de Feau
propre, apr&s les avoir demontes.
• Mettez un chiffon autour de la vis de la chambre a
huile, quand vous devez la d&visser. Ceci
permettra d'eviter que des jets &ventuels
n'atteignent les yeux ou la peau, au cas ou se
serait forme& une pression dans le melangeur en
raison d'infiltrations du liquide melange.
Agissez de la mani&re suivante, si des produits chimiques
nocifs devaient entrer en contact avec vos yeux:
Rincez imm&diatement a Feau courante pendant
15 minutes, en tenant les paupi&res bien ouvertes.
Mettez-vous en contact avec un oculiste.
avec votre peau:
• Enlevez les habits contamines, lavez la peau avec
de Feau et de savon, si necessaire faites-vous
contr6ler par un medecin.
SUIVEZ TOUTES LES REGLES D'HYGIENE ET DE
SECURITE AINSI OUE LES EVENTUELLES
REGLEMENTS EN VIGUEUR AU NIVEAU LOCAL.
EQUIPEMENT DE SOULEVEMENT
Pour soulever le melangeur, un equipement special est
necessaire, it doit etre en mesure de pouvoir soulever le
melangeur et de le faire descendre dans le bassin, si
possible sans que soit necessaire une reprise. La distance
minimum entre le crochet de soulevement et la bord du
bassin devra etre selon pages 26-33 pour avoir la
possibilite d'extraire le melangeur du bassin. Un
equipement de soulevement surdimensionn& pourrait
provoquer des dommages au melangeur au cas oii celui-ci
se coincerait pendant les operations de soulevement.
Assurez-vous que 1'ancrage de 1'6quipement de
soulevement est sur.
Q• Danger ATTENTION! Demeurez a bonne
distance des charges suspendues.
BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
L'installation &lectrique dans son ensemble doit etre
realisee par un personnel specialise. Suivez les normes et
les prescriptions locales. La maison constructrice n'assume
aucune responsabilit& en cas d'interventions effectu&e par
un personnel non autorise.
QDanger En cas de remplacement du cable,
Risque de pour des raisons de securite, le
secousses
electriques conducteur de terre, (jaune-vert),
devra etre plus long d'environ 50mm
par rapport aux conducteurs de phase.
En cas de detachement accidentel du
cable, le terminal de terre devra etre
le dernier a se detacher.
L'appareillage de commande et de
contr6le ne peut en aucun cas pas etre
install& dans le puisard de r&colte.
Rappelez-vous que le courant absorb& an decollage pour le
d&marrage direct peut aller jusqu'a 6 fois 1'absorption
nominale. Verifiez-par consequent que les fusibles ou les
interrupteurs automatiques pr&sentent un reglage correct.
Avertissement - D'&ventuels raccords du cable
• d'alimentation doivent etre 1-1 absolument etanches.
- Verifiez que la tension et la
frequence du reseau correspondent
aux donnees nominales du
melangeur.
- La tension d'alimentation doit
correspondre a celle qui figure sur la
plaquette, avec une tolerance de 10%.
- Contr6lez toujours le courant
absorb& par le melangeur.
- Contr6lez que le reglage du relais
thermique de protection nest pas
sup&rieur a la valeur que nous
indiquons a la page 3.
MOTEUR ELECTRIQUE
Moteur asynchrone a cage d'ecureuil, classe d'isolation
H(180°C). A sec, refroidi par le liquide environnant. Degre
de protection IP68.
Le moteur est congu pour un fonctionnement continu ou
intermittent, avec un maximum de 15 demarrages par
heure, a intervalles r&guliers.
Le moteur est congu pour un fonctionnement avec un &cart
de tension entre les phases de 5 % maximum (selon les
normes CEI EN 60034-1).
SENS DE ROTATION
Le contr6le du Sens de rotation doit etre scrupuleusement
effectue au moment de la mise en fonction du melangeur.
Avertissement Un sens errone de rotation
F' provoque une diminution
considerable des prestations et peut
provoquer des dommages au
melangeur.
Le sens de rotation est juste si 1'Mice, vue post&rieurement
(cote moteur), tourne dans le sens horaire. En cas de sens
de rotation errone, it faut permuter entre eux 2 conducteurs
quelconques parmi les 3 conducteurs de phase sur la
barrette de connexion du tableau &lectrique.
Danger IL EST ABSOLUMENT INTERDIT
Risque de DE SOULEVER LE MELANGEUR
secousses PAR LE CABLE ELECTRIOUE.
electriques
Faites particuli&rement attention au cable d'alimentation et
procedez a un remplacement immediat de ce dernier an cas
ou it serait endommag&.
Avertissement ATTENTION! L'extr&mit& du
' cable ne doit pas etre immerg&e. Les
terminaux doivent etre solidement
fixes au-dessus du niveau maximum
du liquide, pour eviter que 1'eau ne
puisse p&n&trer a travers le cable dans
le moteur.
11

fr « Traduction de la notice originale »
TABLEAU ELECTRIQUE
ADanger Il est absolument interdit de
Risque de proceder a une connexion directe
secousses de la machine par le biais d'une
electriques fiche, reliez le cable electrique a
une petite armoire de commande
avec protection thermique.
Les machines doivent etre dotees d'un tableau electrique de
commande. Ce tableau doit etre prevu pour permettre aussi
bien un fonctionnement manuel qu'automatique.
L'equipement minimum doit prevoir un circuit de
commande a basses tensions, un circuit pour les controles
et la regulation automatique du niveau, un circuit de
detection des anomalies de fonctionnement. Le tableau de
bord complet pent etre foumi sur demande.
Les schemas de connexion sont fournis a la page
22.
REVELATEUR DES INFILTRATIONS
D'EAU
Pour agitateurs equipee d'un revelateur d'infiltration d'eau
dans la chambre a huile.
La revelation devient active des lors que le pourcentage
d'eau dans la chambre a huile atteint environs 30%. Si la
revelation est activee, la substitution de Thuile est
recommandee.
Si, apres cette operation, la revelation s'active encore, la
garniture mecanique doit etre substituee.
CONTROLES ET MANUTENTION
Q Danger ATTENTION! On avertit que le
melangeur peut s'arreter et repartir
automatiquement a la suite de
1'intervention de protections
thermiques ou de telecommandes, en
consequence de quoi, it ne faut
jamais intervenir a proximite de
1'helice sans avoir auparavant procede
au debranchement de la machine du
reseau electrique d'alimentation.
INSPECTIONS
Des controles periodiques et des entretiens preventifs
garantissent un fonctionnement plus sur au fil du temps. Le
melangeur doit etre inspecte toutes les 2000 heures de
fonctionnement on an moins une fois par an et, en cas de
fonctionnement dans des conditions particulierement
severes, it faut proceder a 1'inspection plus frequemment
encore, a cette occasion, it est necessaire de controler 1'etat
de Thuile. Dans des conditions normales de
fonctionnement, it est conseillable de faire reviser le
melangeur dans un atelier agree tous les trois ans.
VIDANGE DE L'HUILE
Le remplissage de la chambre a huile est realise en usine;
s'il y a des traces d'eau ou d'emulsion legere, la vidange de
Thuile s'impose. Il faut extraire le melangeur du puisard,
le bouchon de Thuile se trouve sur le cote de la chambre a
huile, nous conseillons de faire effectuer l'operation aupres
d'un atelier autorise.
Danger - ATTENTION! En cas d'infiltrations
1 de la garniture d'etancheite, la
chambre a huile peut etre sous
pression. Pour eviter des projections,
placez un chiffon autour de la vis du
reservoir d'huile, quand vous le
devissez.
- Devissez le bouchon de fermeture
de la chambre a huile et faites sortir
Thuile completement, remplissez
ensuite avec la quantite de lubrifiant
prescrite (voir page. 3), refermez
soigneusement et en remplagant
toujours la meme rosette de cuivre.
- Si vous remarquez des traces
evidentes d'eau ou si Thuile est
fortement emulsionnee, controlez la
garniture d'etancheite mecanique
inferieure et, si necessaire,
remplacez-la, ou adressez-vous a un
atelier autorise.
NETTOYAGE
Pour nettoyer 1'helice des corps filamenteux, it peut etre
suffisant de faire demarrer le melangeur pendant quelques
secondes dans le sens de rotation contraire.
Si le melangeur est employe dans le cadre d'une utilisation
irreguliere, pour eviter des depots et des incrustations, it
serait indispensable de le nettoyer apres chaque service par
une immersion et un melange dans de 1eau propre. Apres
le nettoyage, lavez la cuve en introduisant de 1eau propre
an sein de celle-ci.
Avertissement ne forcez pas le melangeur a
' demarrer plusieurs fois si la
protection thermique intervient.
12

de « Ubersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE ZUR
VERMEIDUNG VON PERSONEN- UND
SACHSCHADEN
Diese Svmbole � ' I in Verbindune mit den
Hinweisen: "Gefahr" and "Wamung" deuten auf
potentielle Risiken durch Missachtung der damit
verbundenen Vorschriften hin, die wie folgt beschrieben
sind:
tGefahr Damit wird darauf hingewiesen, dass
Gefahr von bei Missachtung der Vorschrift die
ele
ktrischen
Gear von elektrischen cchlagen Gefahr lkthShlaen g
besteht.
A Gefahr Damit wird darauf hingewiesen, dass
bei Missachtung der Vorschrift
Personen- oder Sachschdden
verursacht werden k6nnen.
FqWarnung Damit wird darauf hingewiesen, dass
- bei Missachtung der Vorschrift der
Mischer beschadigt werden kann.
VERSTELLEN
Warnung ACHTUNG! es ist verboten, die
mischer mit dem propeller
unterstiitzung.
N�lIII
.�.��
•r 1► o
Warnung Zum Verstellen des unverpackten
' Mischers verwenden Sie den dafiir
vorgesehenen Haken an dessen
Gehause.
A�►
Gefahr Es ist strengstens verboten, den
Gefahr von Mischer am elektrischen Kabel zu
elektrischen heben.
Schlagen
BENUTZUNGSBESCHRANKUNGEN
Warnung - Niemals mit Flussigkeiten
arbeiten, deren Temperatur die
angegebenen Grenzen iiberschreitet.
(siehe Mischerkennlinie Datenblatt)
- Die Dichte der gemischten Fliissigkeit
darf nicht h6her als (siehe
Mischerkennlinie Datenblatt).
MINDESTNIVEAU DER
FLUSSIGKEIT: Das Wasserniveau iiber
der Mischschraube ist in den
Abmessungen auf S. 26-33 angegeben
- EINTAUCHTIEFE: max. 10 m.
Gefahr Nur Mischer in explosionssicherer
• Version Ex d IIB T4 diirfen in
Umgebung mit Explosions-oder
Brandgefahr verwendet werden.
Daher muss der Benutzer die chemischen
and physikalischen Merkmale der
Mischfliissigkeit kennen.
LARMPEGEL
Trifft nicht zu, da der Mischer in die Wanne eingetaucht
arbeitet.
ZWECK DER MASCHINE
Diese Tauchmischerart wurde entworfen fiir:
• Das Mischen von Reinwasser and die Entfemung
von Bodensatzen;
• Das Riihren and die Zirkulation von Abwassern
in 6ffentlichen Klaranlagen;
• Das Mischen and die Zirkulation von Schlamm.
INSTALLATION
SICHERHEITSNORMEN
Um Brandgefahr wahrend der Wartung oder Installation
des Tauchmischers vorzubeugen, sollten die folgenden
Sicherheitsnormen beachtet werden:
Gefahr - Niemals alleine arbeiten.
Verwenden Sie Sicherheitsgurt and —
seil, Bowie gegebenenfalls eine
Gasmaske. Achten Sie auf
Ertrinkgefahr!
- Versichern Sie Bich, dass geniigend
Sauerstoff zur VerfUgung steht and
keine Giftgase vorhanden sind.
- Achten Sie auf Explosionsgefahr,
bevor Schwei8arbeiten vorgenommen
oder elektrische Werkzeuge
verwendet werden.
- Achten Sie auf Gefahren fdr die
Gesundheit and die damit
verbundenen Hygienevorschriften.
- Achten Sie auf Risiken durch
elektrische Schaden.
- Versichern Sie Bich, dass die
Hubvorrichtung funktionstuchtig ist.
- Sorgen Sie fur eine Absperrung um
den Arbeitsbereich.
- Vergewissern Sie sich, jederzeit die
M6glichkeit zu haben, rasch an die
frische Luft zu gelangen.
- Verwenden Sie Helm, Schutzbrillen
and Schutzschuhe.
- Alle Personen, die in
Abwassermischstationen arbeiten,
miissen gegen m6gliche, ansteckende
Krankheiten geimpft sein.
- Greifen Sie niemals mit den Handen
in die Mischschraube. Diesbezuglich
wird darauf hingewiesen, dass der
Mischer durch Ausl6sung von
Thermoschutzvorrichtungen oder
Fernbedienungen automatisch stehen
bleiben and wieder weiterlaufen kann
and daher kann diesem Risiko nur
durch Betatigung des
13

de « Ubersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
Stromversorgungsschalters
vorgebeugt werden.
- Mischer Version ATEX diirfen
nicht zerlegt werden, wenn
explosives Gas in der Luft sein
k6nnte.
- Der Mischer darf nur unter
Berucksichtigung der auf deco
Typengenehmigungsschild
angegebenen Daten verwendet
werden.
Der Mischer ist fiir den Einsatz in Fliissigkeiten
vorgesehen, die gesundheitsschadlich sein konnen. Um
eventuelle Augen- oder Hautschaden zu vermeiden,
beachten Sic bei Eingriffen am Mischer die folgenden
Normen:
Beniitzen Sic stets Unfallschutzbrillen und
Gummihandschuhe.
Spulen Sic den Mischer mit dem
HochdruckheiBwasserstrahlgerat aus, bevor Sic
eventuelle Eingriffe vomehmen.
Spulen Sic die verschiedenen Maschinenteile mit
sauberem Wasser ab, nachdem Sie these
abmontiert haben.
• Legen Sie um die Schraube der Olkammer einen
Lappen, wenn Sie these lockern mussen, um zu
vermeiden, dass Fliissigkeit in die Augen oder auf
die Haut spritzen k6nnte, sollte sich Druck im
Mischer infolge von
Mischfliissigkeitsinfiltrationen gebildet haben.
Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, sollten schadliche chemische
Substanzen in Berfthrung kommen mit den Augen:
• Spulen Sie these sofort 15 Minuten lang unter
laufendem Wasser aus und halten Sie dabei die
Augen gut offen. Setzen Sie sich mit einem
Augenarzt in Verbindung.
mit der Haut:
• Ziehen Sie die verseuchten Kleidungsstiicke aus,
waschen Sie die Haut mit Wasser und Seife und
lassen Sie sich gegebenenfalls von einem Arzt
untersuchen.
BEFOLGEN SIE ALLE HYGIENE — UND
SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN, SOWIE
EVENTUELLE LOKALE BESTIMMUNGEN.
Um den Mischer zu heben, wird eine entsprechende
Vorrichtung benotigt, die den Mischer heben und in den
Bassin senken kann, ohne diesen Vorgang wiederholen zu
miissen. Der Mindestabstand zwischen Hubhaken und
Bassinrand muss nach Seiten 26-33, um den Mischer aus
dem Bassin ziehen zu k6nnen. Eine zu groBe
Hubvorrichtung k6nnte Schaden am Mischer verursachen,
sollte dieser wahrend des Hubvorgangs stecken bleiben.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Verankerung der
Hubvorrichtung sicher ist.
A Gefahr ACHTUNG! Bleiben Sie
/ : \ schwebenden Lasten fern.
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLUSSE
Alle elektrischen Anschhisse mussen von spezialisiertem
technischem Personal durchgefiihrt werden. Befolgen Sie
die lokalen Bestimmungen und Vorschriften. Die
Herstellerfirma iibemimmt keine Verantwortung, sollten
these Eingriffe nicht von autorisiertem Personal
vorgenommen werden.
AGefahr Bei Kabelwechsel muss der Erdleiter
Gefahr von (gelb-gran) aus Sicherheitsgrunden
elektrischen um ca. 50mm Langer als der
Schlagen
Phasenleiter sein. Bei versehentlicher
Kabellosung muss das Erdendstuck
als letztes herausgezogen werden.
Die Steuer- und Kontrollvorrichtung
darf auf keinen Fall im
Sammelbecken installiert werden.
Denken Sic Baran, dass der im Startmoment
aufgenommene Strom bis zu 6 Mal gr6f3er als die
Nominalaufnahme sein kann. Vergewissern Sic Bich daher,
dass die Sicherungen oder Automatikschalter richtig tariert
sind.
Warnung - Eventuelle
• Speisungskabelverbindungen mussen
absolut wasserdicht sein.
- Kontrollieren Sic, dass
Netzspannung und—frequenz den
Typenschildangaben des Mischers
entsprechen.
- Die Speisungsspannung muss den
Typenschildangaben entsprechen,
wobei ein Toleranzbereich von 10%
zulassig ist.
- Kontrollieren Sie immer die
Stromaufnahme des Mischers.
- Kontrollieren Sie, dass die
Tarierung des Thermoschutzrelais
den von uns angegebenen Wert nicht
iibersteigt auf s. 3.
ELEKTROMOTOR
Motor Asynchronmotor als Kafiglaufer, Isolationsklasse
H(1800C). Trockenlaufer und Kiihlung durch die
umgebende Fliissigkeit. Schutzart IP 68.
Der Motor eignet sich fur Dauer- oder Intermittenzbetrieb,
mit einer maximalen stundlichen Anlaufhaufigkeit von 15
bei gleichmal3iger Verteilung.
Der Motor ist flir einen Betrieb mit einer maximalen
Spannungsschwankung zwischen den Phasen von 5 %
(gemaf3 CEI EN 60034-1) geeicht.
ROTATIONSRICHTUNG
Die Rotationsrichtung muss tunlichst bei
Mischerinbetriebnahme kontrolliert werden.
Warnung Eine falsche Rotationsrichtung
verursacht eine beachtliche
Leistungssenkung und kann
Schaden am Mischer verursachen.
Die Rotationsrichtung ist darn korrekt, wenn sich die
Mischschraube von hinten gesehen (Motorseite) in den
Uhrzeigersinn dreht. Bei falscher Rotationsrichtung
mussen 2 beliebige der 3 Phasenleiter am Klemmbrett der
elektrischen Schalttafel getauscht werden.
QGefahr ES IST STRENGSTENS
Gefahr von VERBOTEN, DEN MISCHER AM
elektrSchIdgen ELEKTRISCHEN KABEL ZU
Schlagen
HEBEN.
Achten Sie besonders auf das Speisungskabel und
tauschen Se dieses bei Beschadigung sofort aus.
T
Warnung ACHTUNG! Das Kabelende darf
nicht untergetaucht werden. Die
14

de « Obersetzung der Originalbetriebsanleitung »
Enden mussen sicher uber deco
Fliissigkeitshochstniveau fixiert
werden, um zu vermeiden, dass
Wasser uber das Kabel in den Motor
gelangt.
ELEKTRISCHE SCHALTTAFEL
QGefahr Es ist strengstens verboten, die
Gefahr von Maschine direkt mit dem
elektrischen
Schlagen Steckkontakt anzuschheBen,
schlieflen Sie das elektrische Kabel
an einen Steuerkasten mit
Thermoschutz an.
Die Maschinen mussen mit einer elektrischen Schalttafel
ausgestattet sein. Diese Schalttafel muss sowohl far
Handbetrieb wie auch Automatikbetrieb einsetzbar sein.
Sic muss mindestens uber Niedrigspannungssteuerkreis,
Kontrollkreis, automatische Niveauregulierung and
Betriebsanomalieerhebungskreis verfiigen. Die Schalttafel
ist auf Anfrage lieferbar.
Siehe schaltschemen auf s. 22.
WASSERINFILTRATIONSERHEBER
Fur Die Mischer mit einem eingebauten
Wasserinfiltrationserheber in der Olkammer ausgestattet.
Der Sensor erhebt die Gegenwart von Wasser im Ol,
sobald der Wert 30% iibersteigt. Wird dieser Sensor
ausgelost, empfiehlt es sich, einen Olwechsel
vorzunehmen.
Sollte der Sensor kurz nach dem Olwechsel erneut
ausgelost werden, empfiehlt es sich, die mechanische
Dichtung zu ersetzen.
KONTROLLEN UND WARTUNG
Q Gefahr ACHTUNG! Es wird darauf
hingewiesen, dass der Mischer durch
Auslosung von
Thermoschutzvorrichtungen oder
Fembedienungen automatisch stehen
bleiben and wieder weiterlaufen
kann; daher darf niemals in
Mischschraubenndhe gewerkt
werden, ohne dass vorher der
Netzstromanschluss der Maschine
unterbrochen wurde.
KONTROLLEN
RegelmdBige Kontrollen and Vorsorgewartungen
gewdhrleisten einen langfristig sicheren Betrieb.
Der Mischer muss nach 2000 Betriebsstunden oder
zumindest einmal jahrlich and unter besonders schweren
Betriebsbedingungen ofter kontrolliert werden, wobei bei
dieser Gelegenheit auch der Olstand gepr ift werden muss.
Bei normalen Betriebsbedingungen wird empfohlen, den
Mischer in einer autorisierten Werkstatt alle 3 Jahre pr ifen
zu lassen.
ULWECHSEL
Die Fiillung der Olkammer wird werkseitig vorgenommen;
sollten Wasser- oder leichte Emulsionsreste festgestellt
werden, ist ein Olwechsel vorzunehmen. Der Mischer
muss aus dem Brunnen genommen werden, der
Olverschluss befindet sich seitlich der Olkammer; es wird
empfohlen, diesen Eingriff in einer Autorisierte Werkstatt
durchfdhren zu lassen.
Gefahr - ACHTUNG! Bei Infiltrationen an
• der Dichtung, kann die Olkammer
unter Druck stehen. Um Spritzer zu
vermeiden, legen Sic einen Lappen
um die Schraube des Oltanks, wenn
Sic these lockern.
- Lockern Sic den Verschluss der
Olkammer and lassen Sic das Ol
komplett ausrinnen, fiillen Sic danach
die vorgeschriebene
Schmiermittelmenge nach (siehe S.
3), verschlieBen Sic sorgsam and
tauschen Sic immer die
Kupferunterlegscheibe aus.
- Sollten eindeutig Wasserspuren
festgestellt werden oder das Ol stark
emulgiert sein, kontrollieren Sic die
untere mechanische Dichtung,
tauschen Sic these gegebenenfalls
aus oder wenden Sic sich an eine
autorisierte Werkstatt.
REINIGUNG
Um die Mischschraube von Faserteilchen zu befreien,
geniigt es vielleicht sogar, den Mischer nur einige
Sekunden in Rotationsgegenrichtung zu starten.
Wenn der Mischer nicht regelmdBig verwendet wird, sollte
er, um Ablagerungen and Verkrustungen zu vermeiden,
nach jedem Betrieb durch Untertauchen and Mischen in
sauberem Wasser gereinigt werden. Waschen Sic nach der
Reinigung die Wanne mit sauberem Wasser.
Warnung forcieren sie niemals den mischer,
um ihn mehrmals hintereinander
zu starten, sollte der thermoschutz
ausgelost worden sein.
15

es « Traducci6n del manual original »
ADVERTENCIAS PARA LA SEGURIDAD
DE LAS PERSONAS Y DE LAS COSAS
Esta simbologia I ' junto con sus relativas
leyendas: "Peligro" y "Advertencia" indican la
potencialidad del riesgo derivado por la inobservancia de
la prescripci6n a la cual ban sido asociadas, como se
especifica aqui abajo:
tPeligro Advierte que la inobservancia de la
Riesgo de prescripci6n comporta un riesgo de
descargas descargas el6ctricas.
electricas
Peligro Advierte que la inobservancia de la
prescripci6n comporta un riesgo de
dano a las personas y a las cosas.
Advertencia Advierte que la inobservancia de la
prescripci6n comporta un riesgo de
dano al mezclador.
MOVILIZACION
Advertencia iATENCION! esta prohibido apoyar
el agitador sobre la h6lice.
I ,
•i� o
II14
I ' o IIIE/F., XIII
o
Advertencia Para la movilizaci6n del mezclador
no embalado, utilizar el gancho
predispuesto especificamente para
ello en la carcasa del mismo.
APeligro Esta terminantemente prohibido alzar
Riesgo de el mezclador por medio del cable
descargas el&ctrico.
electricas
LIMITACIONES DE EMPLEO
11-1
Advertencia - No trabajar con liquidos que tengan
una temperatura superior a (ver hoja
de datos de mezclador).
- La densidad del liquido mezclado
no debe ser superior a (ver hoja de
datos de mezclador).
- NIVEL M1NIMO DEL LIQUIDO:
el nivel del agua por encima de la
h6lice esta indicado en las
dimensiones de la pag. 26-33.
PROFUNDIDAD DE
INMERSION: maximo 10 m.
Peligro Solamente los mezcladores
antideflagrantes de la versi6n EX d
IIB T4 pueden utilizarse en
ambientes con peligro de explosiones
o de incendios.
Por consiguiente, el utilizador debe
conocer las caracteristicas quimicas y
flsicas del liquido mezclado.
RUIDO
No aplicable porque el mezclador trabaja sumergido en un
pozo.
APLICACIONES
Este tipo de mezclador sumergible ha sido disenado para
los siguientes usos:
Mezcla de aguas residuales y remoci6n de los
dep6sitos de fondo;
Agitaci6n y circulaci6n de liquido putrido en
instalaciones civiles de depuraci6n;
Mezcla y circulaci6n de lodos.
INSTALACION
NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD
Para prevenir el riesgo de accidentes durante las
operaciones de mantenimiento a instalaci6n del mezclador,
es conveniente tener en cuenta las siguientes normas:
Peligro - Nunca trabaje solo. Use un cintur6n
y una cuerda de seguridad, y si es
necesario una mascara antigas. No
desestime el peligro de ahogamiento.
- Asegurese que hays suficiente
oxigeno y que el ambiente est6 libre
de gases venenosos.
- Controle el riesgo de explosiones,
antes de soldar o usar una
herramienta el6ctrica.
- No desestime el peligro para la
salud y observe las normas
higi&nicas.
- Preste atenci6n a los riesgos
derivados de desperfectos el6ctricos.
- Cerci6rese que el equipo para la
elevaci6n est6 en buenas condiciones.
- Coloque barreras adecuadas en el
perimetro del area de trabajo.
- Ase&ese de disponer de un rapido
acceso al aire libre.
- Use casco, gafas de seguridad y
zapatos de protecci6n.
- Todas las personas que trabajan en
estaciones de mezclado de aguas
residuales deben vacunarse contra las
posibles enfermedades que puedan
transmitirse.
- Nunca introduzca las mans en las
proximidades de la h6lice. Tenga
presente que el mezclador puede
detenerse y rearrancar
automaticamente por la intervenci6n
de protections t6rmicas o
telemandos, por to cual, finicamente
el interruptor de la alimentaci6n
elimina dicho riesgo.
- Para mezclar con el modelo ATEX
no desmonte la maquina cuando
exista la posibilidad de presencia de
gases explosivos en la atm6sfera.
- El mezclador debe utilizarse s6lo en
el respeto de los datos indicados en la
plaqueta de homologaci6n.
El mezclador ha sido disenado para ser usado en liquidos
que pueden ser daninos para la salud. Para evitar
16

es « Traducci6n del manual original »
eventuales danos a los ojos y a la piel, observe las
siguientes normas cuando utilice el mezclador.
• Use siempre gafas de protecci6n y guantes de
goma.
• Enjuague bien el mezclador con una
hidropulidora en caliente, antes de iniciar la
operaci6n.
• Enjuague los distintos componentes con agua
limpia, luego de haberlos desmontado.
• Coloque un trapo alrededor del tomillo de la
camara de aceite, cuando tenga que
desatomillarlo. Esto evitara que eventuales
salpicaduras lleguen a sus ojos o a la piel en el
caso que se hubiera formado presi6n en el
mezclador a causa de infiltraciones del liquido
mezclado.
Tome las siguientes medidas en el caso de contacto con
productos quimicos nocivos:.
Contacto con sus ojos:
• Enjuaguelos inmediatamente con agua corriente
durante 15 minutos, manteniendo bien abiertos
los parpados. Consulte a un oculista.
Contacto con la piel:
• Quitese todas las ropas contaminadas, lavese la
piel con agua y jab6n y si es necesario, consulte
un medico.
SIGUA TODAS LAS REGLAS DE HIGIENE Y
SEGURIDAD Y LAS EVENTUALES ORDENANZAS
LOCALES.
EQUIPOS DE ELEVACI6N
Para alzar el mezclador, es necesario disponer del
equipamiento adecuado que pueda elevar el mezclador y
bajarlo en el tanque, posiblemente sin la necesidad de tener
que subirla. La distancia minima entre el gancho de
elevaci6n y el borde de tanque debera ser segun paginas
26-33 para poder extraer el mezclador de tanque. Un
equipo de elevaci6n sobredimensionado podria causar
danos al mezclador, en el caso que Este se encastrara
durante las operaciones de elevaci6n. Cerci6rese que el
anclaje del equipo de elevaci6n est6 fijado debidamente.
A Peligro JATENCION! Mant6ngase alejado de
las cargas suspendidas.
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS
Toda el sistema el6ctrico debe ser instalado por personal
especializado. Siga las normas y las prescripciones locales.
El fabricante no se asume ninguna responsabilidad en el
caso de operaciones llevadas a cabo por personal no
autorizado.
QPeligro En el caso que sea necesario sustituir
Riesgo de el cable, por razones de seguridad, el
descargas conductor de tierra (amarillos-verde)
ekdricas
debera ser aproximadamente 50 mm
mas largo que los conductores de
fase. En caso de desacoplamiento
accidental del cable, la terminal de
tierra debera ser la ultimo que debe
desconectarse. El aparato de mando y
control no puede en ningun caso
instalarse en el pozo de recogida.
Recuerde que la corriente absorbida inicial de arranque
para la puesta en marcha directa puede ser hasta 6 veces la
absorci6n nominal. Controle por to tanto, que los fusibles
y los interruptores automaticos tengan el calibrado
adecuado.
Advertencia - Las eventuales uniones del cable de
• alimentaci6n deben estar
absolutamente hermeticas.
- Compruebe que la tensi6n y la
frecuencia de la red correspondan a
los datos de la placa del mezclador.
- La tensi6n de alimentaci6n debe
concordar con la indicada en la placa,
con una tolerancia del 10%.
- Controlar siempre la corriente
absorbida del mezclador.
- Controlar que el calibrado del rele
t6rmico de protecci6n no sea superior
al valor indicado por nosotros en la
pag. 22.
MOTOR ELECTRICO
Motor asincr6nico a jaula de ardilla, aislamiento
H(180°C). En seco, enfriado por el liquido. Grado de
protecci6n IP68.
El motor ha sido disenado para un trabajo continuo o
intermitente, con un maximo de 15 arranques pro hora
distanciados regularmente.
El motor ha sido disenado para un funcionamiento con
maximo desequilibrio de tensi6n entre las fases del 5 %
(segun las normas CEI EN 60034-1).
SENTIDO DE ROTACION
El control del sentido de rotaci6n debe se efectuado
cuidadosamente al momento de la puesta en
funcionamiento del mezclador.
Advertencia Un sentido de rotaci6n err6neo
' provoca una disminuci6n
importante de las prestaciones y
puede causar danos al mezclador.
El sentido de rotaci6n es el correcto si la h6lice vista desde
atras (lado motor), gira en sentido horario. Si el sentido de
rotaci6n es incorrecto es necesario intercambiar 2 de los 3
conductores de fase en el tablero de bomes del cuadro
el6ctrico.
APeligro ESTA TERMINANTEMENTE
Riesgo de PROHIBIDO ALZAR EL
descargas MEZCLADOR TIRANDO DEL
electricas
CABLE ELECTRICO.
Tenga especial cuidado del cable de alimentaci6n y si esta
danado, sustitayalo inmediatamente.
Advertencia iATENCION! El extremo del cable
IT I no debe estar sumergido. Las
terminales deben estar colocadas
firmemente arriba del nivel maximo
del liquido, para evitar que el agua
pueda penetrar en el motor a trav6s
del cable.
17

es « Traducci6n del manual original »
CUADRO ELECTRICO
Peligro Esti absolutamente prohibido
Riesgo de conectar la miquina directamente
descargas
eleetricas con un enchufe, conectar el cable
electrico a un armario de comando
con proteccion termica.
Las maquinas deben estar dotadas de un cuadro electrico
de mando. Dicho cuadro debe estar predispuesto para
permitir el funcionamiento manual o automatico. La
dotaci6n minima debe incluir un circuito de mando de baja
tension, un circuito para el control y la regulaci6n
automatica del nivel, un circuito de detecci6n de anomalias
de funcionamiento. El cuadro de mando completo puede
suministrarse bajo pedido.
Los esquemas de conexi6n estan en la pag. 22.
DETECTOR DE INFILTRACION DE
AGUA
Por mezcladores equipada con un detector incorporado de
infiltraci6n del agua en la camara de aceite.
El sensor detecta la presencia de agua en el aceite cuando
el porcentaje supera el valor del 30%. En el caso que se
activara el sensor, se aconseja cambiar el aceite.
Si el sensor se activara nuevamente despues de poco
tiempo del cambio de aceite, se recomienda sustituir el
sello mecanico.
CONTROLES Y MANTENIMIENTO
Peligro iATENCION! Se advierte que el
mezclador puede detenerse y
arrancarse automaticamente por la
intervenci6n de protecciones termicas
o telemandos, por consiguiente,
nunca trabaje en las proximidades de
la Mice sin haber primero
desconectado la maquina de la red
electrica de alimentaci6n.
INSPECCIONES
Los controles peri6dicos y los mantenimientos preventivos
garantizan un funcionamiento mas seguro por un mayor
periodo de tiempo.
El mezclador debe inspeccionarse despues de cada 2000
horas de funcionamiento o por to menos una vez al aiio y,
en caso de funcionamiento en condiciones particularmente
gravosas, es necesario ejecutar la inspecci6n con una
mayor frecuencia, debiendose controlar tambien en este
caso el estado del aceite.
En condiciones de funcionamiento normal, es aconsejable
revisar el mezclador en un taller autorizado cada tres aiios.
CAMBIO ACEITE
El llenado de la camara de aceite se efectua en fabrica; en
el caso que existan rastros de agua o una ligera emulsi6n
es necesario cambiar el aceite. Se debe extraer el
mezclador del pozo, el tap6n del aceite se encuentra en la
parte lateral de la camara, aconsejamos de efectuar esta
operaci6n en un taller autorizado.
Peligro - iATENCION! En caso de
infiltraciones a traves de la junta de
estanqueidad, la camara de aceite
puede encontrarse bajo presi6n. Para
evitar salpicaduras, coloque un trapo
alrededor del tornillo de la camara de,
cuando to desatornille.
- Desenrosque el tap6n de cierre de la
camara de aceite y deje salir todo el
aceite y luego 116nala con la cantidad
de lubricante prescrita (ver pag. 3)
vuelva a cerrar el tap6n y
sustituyendo siempre la misma
abrazadera de cobre.
- Si nota evidentes rastros de agua o
que el aceite esta fuertemente
emulsionado, controle el sello
mecanico inferior y si es necesario
sustitayalo o dirijase a un taller
autorizado.
LIMPIEZA
Para limpiar la helice de cuerpos filamentosos puede ser
suficiente hacer arrancar el mezclador durante algunos
segundos con sentido de rotaci6n contrario.
Si el mezclador se usa esporadicamente, para evitar la
constituci6n de dep6sitos a incrustaciones, es
indispensable limpiarlo despues de cada servicio
sumergi6ndolo en agua limpia. Despues de la limpieza
lavar la tina introduciendo en la misma agua limpia.
Advertencia no fuerce el mezclador
IT I arrancindolo varias veces si
interviene la proteccion termica.
18

pt « Tradu9ao do manual original »
ADVERTENCIAS PARA A SEGURANCA
DAS PESSOAS E DAS COISAS
Esta simbologia I 1 ' junto as relativas
legendas: "Perigo" e "Advertencia", indica a
potencialidade do risco derivante da falta de respeito da
prescrigao a qual, como 6 abaixo especificado, foram
unidas:
tPerigo Alerta que o nao respeito da
Risco de choques prescrigao implica um risco de
electricos
choques el6ctricos.
Perigo Alerta que o nao respeito da
prescrigao implica um risco de
prejuizo a pessoas a coisas.
Advertencia Alerta que o nao respeito da
' prescrigao implica um risco de
prejuizo ao misturador.
MOVIMENTA(AO
11-1 Advertencia PERIGO! 6 proibido apoyar
misturadore pela h6lice.
L
ln�
I o 0II.I I.I►lo
Advertencia Para a movimentagao do misturador
nao embalado, usufruir do gancho
colocado sobre a caixa do mesmo.
APerigo E absolutamente proibido levantar o
Risco de choque misturador usando o cabo el6ctrico.
electrico
LIMITM�OES DO USO
Advertencia - Nao trabalhar com liquidos a
temperaturas superiores a (folha de dados
da misturador).
- A densidade do liquido misturado nao
deve ser superior a (folha de dados da
misturador).
- NIVEL MINIMO DO LIQUIDO: na
pagina 26-33 sao decsritas as dimens6es
das bra9olas da agua acima do h6lice.
- PROFUNDIDADE DE IMERSAO:
maximo 10 M.
•Q Perigo Misturadores a prova de explosao Ex d IIB
T4 s6 devem ser utilizados em ambientes
onde 6 possivel encontrar perigo de
explosao ou de incendios.
Portanto o utilizador deve conhecer as
caracteristicas quimicas a fisicas do liquido
misturado.
RUIDO
Nao pode ser considerado porque o misturador trabalha
submergido no tanque.
APLICACOES
Este tipo de misturador a imersao foi projectado para:
• a mistura de aguas brancas a extracgao dos
dep6sitos de fundo;
a agitagao e circulagao de estrumes em
instalag6es civis de depuragao;
Mistura e circulagao das lamas.
INSTALACAO
NORMAS DE SEGURAN(�A
Para prevenir o risco de acidentes durante a manutengao ou
instalagao do misturador, 6 oportuno seguir as seguintes
normas:
Perigo - Nunca trabalhar sozinhos. Usar um
cinto a uma cords de seguranga, e se
for necessario uma mascara antigas.
Nao ignorar o perigo de afogamento.
- Assegurar-se que haja oxigenio
suficiente a que os gases venenos
sejam ausentes.
- Controlar o risco de explos6es,
antes de soldar ou usar um
instrumento el6ctrico.
- Nao ignorar o perigo para a saude e
observar as normas higi&nicas. .
- Cuidar dos riscos derivantes das
avarias el6ctricas.
- Assegurar-se que o equipamento
para o levantamento esteja em boas
condig6es.
- Criar uma barragem adequada em
volta da area onde trabalham.
- Assegurar-se de ter a possibilidade
de um veloz retorno ao ar livre.
- Usar o capacete, 6culos de
seguranga a sapatos de protec9ao.
- Todas as pessoas que trabalham nas
estag6es de mistura das aguas pretas
devem ser vacinadas contra as
possiveis doengas que podem ser
transmitidas.
- Nunca introduzir as maos perto da
h6lice. A este prop6sito alerta-se que
o misturador pode parar e voltar a
partir automaticamente pela
intervengao de protecg6es t6rmicas
ou controles remotos, por isso s6 o
interruptor da alimentagao elimina
esse risco.
- Com o misturador ATEX nao
desmontar a maquina quando ha a
possibilidade de presenga de gases
explosivos na atmosfera.
- O misturador deve ser utilizado s6
no respeito dos dados indicados na
plaqueta de certificagao.
O misturador foi construido para ser submergido em
liquidos que podem ser nocivos para a saude. Para prevenir
os eventuais danos aos olhos e a pele, observar as
seguintes normas, em caso de intervengao sobre o
misturador:
• Usar sempre viseiras de protec9ao e luvas de
borracha.
• Lavar bem o misturador com maquina de jacto de
agua a alta pressao quente, antes de iniciar a
intervengao.
19

pt « Tradugao do manual original »
Lavar as diversas componentes corn agua limpa,
ap6s t6-las desmontadas.
Colocar um pano em volta do parafuso da camara
oleo, quando o devem desaparafusar. Isto para
evitar que eventuais jactos alcancem os olhos ou a
pele, se se fosse formada pressao no misturdaor
por causa de infiltragoes de liquido misturado.
Agir no seguinte modo se produtos quimicos nocivos
tivessem que vir em contacto.
Com os vossos olhos:
• Lavar imediatamnete com agua por 15 minutos,
tendo bem abertas as palpebras. Contactar um
oculista.
Com a vossa pele:
• Tirar os vestidos contaminados, lavar a pele com
agua a sabao, se for necessario efectuar uma visita
m6dica.
SEGUIR TODAS AS REGRAS DE HIGIENE E
SEGURANCA ALEM DAS EVENTUAIS
DISPOSICOES LOCAIS
EQUIPAMENTO DE LEVANTAMENTO
Para levantar o misturador, 6 necessario um equipamento
especifico, esse equipamento deve poder levantar o
misturador a cala-lo no tanque, possivelmente sem a
necessidade de um reinicio. A distancia minima entre o
gancho de levantamento e a bordo tanque devera ser de
acordo com paginas 26-33, para ter a possibilidade de
extrair o misturador do tanque. Um equipamento de
levantamento sobredimensionado poderia causar danos ao
misturador, se este se engastasse durante as operagoes de
levantamento. Assegurar-se que a ancoragem do
equipamento de levantamento seja segura.
Q Perigo CUIDADO! Manter-se longe das
cargassuspensas.
CIRCUITOS ELECTRICOS
A inteira instalagao el6ctrica deve ser feita por pessoal
especializado. Sigam as normas e as prescrigoes locais. A
casa construtora nao se responsabiliza no caso de
intervengoes efectuadas por pessoal nao autorizado.
Perigo No caso da substituigao do cabo, por
Risco de razoes de seguranga, o cabo de terra
choque (amarelo-verde) devera ser cerca de
ekctrico
50mm mais longo dos condutores de
fase. Em caso de desengate acidental
do cabo, o bornes de terra devera ser
o ultimo a desengatar-se
A aparelhagem de comando e
controlo nao pode em caso nenhum
ser instalada no colector para recolha
de sujidade.
Lembrem-se que a corrente absorvida ao estado inicial de
arranque para o accionamento directo pode ser at6 seis
vezes a absorgao nominal. Verifiquem portanto que os
f isiveis on os interruptores automaticos tenham a correcta
calibragem.
FflAdvertencia - Eventuais juntas do cabo de
- alimentagao devem ser absolutamente
estanques.
- Verifiquem que a tensao e a
frequencia da rede correspondam aos
dados de chapa do misturador.
- A tensao de alimentagao deve
corresponder aquela indicada na
plaqueta, com tolerancia 10%.
- Controlar sempre a corrente
absorvida pelo misturador.
- Controlar que a calibragem do rek
t6rmico de protecgao nao seja
superior ao valor por n6s indicado na
pagina 22.
MOTOR ELECTRICO
Motor assincrono a gaiola de esquilo, classe de isolamento
H(180°C). A seco, arrefecido do liquido circunstante. Grau
de protecgao IP68.
O motor foi concebido para um trabalho continuo ou
intermitentem com um maximo de 15 arranques por hora,
a intervalos regulares.
O motor foi projectado para um funcionamento com um
desequilibrio maximo de tensao entre as fases de 5%
(segundo as normas CEIEN60034-1).
DIREC4�AO DE ROTACAO
O controlo da direcgao de rotagao deve ser efectuado
minuciosamente quando se acciona o misturador.
Advertencia A errada direcgio de rotagio
provoca uma significativa
diminuigio das prestagoes a pode
causar danos ao misturador.
A direcgao de rotagao esta correcta se a h6lice, vista do
lado traseiro (lado motor), roda em sentido horario. No
caso de direcgao de rotagao errada ocorre trocar entre os
dois qualquer dos 3 conductores de fase na caixa de
conexao do painel el6ctrico.
Perigo E ABSOLUTAMENTE PROIBIDO
Risco de LEVANTAR O MISTURADOR
choque electrico PELO CABO ELECTRICO
Ter um cuidado particular do cabo de alimentagao e
proceder a uma substituigao imediata, se for sinistrado.
F-f
Advertencia ATENCAO! A extremidade do cabo
nao deve ser submergida. Os
terminais devem ser com certeza
fixados acima do nivel maximo do
liquido, para evitar que a agua possa
entrar atrav6s do cabo no motor.
20

pt « Tradugao do manual original »
PAINEL ELECTRICO
Perigo E absolutamente proibido a ligagio
xisco de directa da maquina atraves da
choque
electrico tomada, ligar o cabo electrico a um
armario de comando com
protecgao termica.
As maquinas devem ser dotadas de um painel electrico de
comando. Este painel deve ser previsto para permitir quer
o funcionamento manual quer automatico. A dotagao
minima deve prever circuito de comando a baixa tensao,
circuito para o controle e a regulagao automatica do nivel,
circuito de detecgao de anomalias de funcionamento. O
painel de comando completo pode ser fornecido a pedido.
Os esquemas de ligagao sao descritos na pagina
22. LIMPEZA
DETECTOR DE INFILTRA('AO DE AGUA
Para misturadores equipada com detector incorporado de
infiltragao de agua na camara de oleo.
O sensor detecta a presenga de agua no oleo quando a
percentagem supera os 30%. Se por acaso o sensor e
activado, recomenda-se que seja trocado o oleo.
Se o sensor devesse activar-se de novo pouco tempo
depois da mudanga de oleo, recomendamos que substitua a
vedagao mecanica.
VERIFICACAO E MANUTENCAO
Perigo ATENQAO! Alerta-se que o
misturador pode parar e voltar a partir
automaticamente pela intervengao de
protecgoes termicas on controlo
remoto, por isso nunca intervir em
proximidade da helice sem antes ter
efectuado a interrupgao da maquina
da rede electrica de alimentagao.
INSPECI�OES
Controles periodicos a manutengoes preventivas garantem
um funcionamento mais seguro ao longo do tempo.
O misturador deve ser inspeccionado depois terem passado
2000 horas de funcionamento ou pelo menos uma vez por
ano e, em caso de funcionamento em condigoes
particularmente penosas, ocorre executar a inspec9ao mais
frequentemente, nesta ocasiao a necessario controlar o
estado do oleo.
Em normais condigoes de funcionamento, e aconselhavel
fazer a revisao do misturador numa garagem autorizada
cada tres anos.
MUDAM�A DE OLEO
O reabastecimento da camara oleo e feito na fabrica; se ha
rastreios de agua ou ligeira emulsao e oportuno a mudanga
de oleo. E necessario extrair o misturador do pogo, a tampa
do oleo encontra-se ao lado da camara oleo, aconselhamos
de cumprir a operagao numa oficina autorizada.
Perigo - ATENQAO! Em caso de
infiltragoes do vedante, a camara oleo
pode estar em pressao. Para prevenir
jactos manter, quando o
desaparafusam, um pano em volta do
parafuso do tanque do oleo.
- Desaparafusar a tampa do fecho da
camara oleo e deixar sair
completamente o oleo, encher
portanto com a quantidade definida
de lubrificante (ver pagina 3) e fechar
cuidadosamente substituindo sempre
a mesma anilha de cobre.
- Se notarem evidentes sinais de agua
ou se o oleo for fortemente
emulsionado, controlar o vedante
mecanico inferior, se for necessario
substituem-no ou contactem uma
garagem autorizada.
Pode ser suficiente accionar o misturador por poucos
segundos com direcgao de rotagao inversa para limpar a
helice de corpos filamentosos.
Se o misturador for empregue para use ocasional, sera
indispensavel limpa-lo depois de cada servigo atraves da
imersao e a mistura de agua limpa, para evitar depositos.
Depois da limpeza lavar o tanque introduzindo no mesmo
agua limpa.
Advertencia Nao forcem o misturador a
accionar-se mais vezes se intervir a
protecVio termica.
21

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRI SCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXION DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGA(;AO DIRECTA
CAVO A 4 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 4 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 4 CONDUCTEURS - 4 LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 4 CONDUCTORES DE LA
ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 4 CONDUTORES DA ELECTROBOMBA.
W = RETE: COLORE GRIGIO - MAINS: COLOUR GRAY - SECTEUR: COULEUR GRIS - NETZ: FARBE GRAU -
RED: COLOR GRIS - REDE: COR CINZENTO.
V = RETE: COLORE NERO - MAINS: COLOUR BLACK - SECTEUR: COULEUR NOIR - NETZ: FARBE
SCHWARZ - RED: COLOR NEGRO - REDE: COR PRETA.
U = RETE: COLORE MARRONE - MAINS: COLOUR BROWN - SECTEUR: COULEUR MARRON - NETZ:
FARBE BROWN - RED COLOR MARRON - REDE: COR CASTANHA.
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA - MASSA/TERRA.
22

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXION DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGA(;AO DIRECTA
Da collegare al morsetto del rivelatore
acqua solo se 1'elettropompa & fornita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe only
if the pump is equipped with specific
control panel.
A connecter a la borne du detecteur eau
seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est munie du
coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die Motorpumpe mit
der entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al home del revelador agua
solo si la electrobomba dispone del
respectivo cuadro de control.
A ligar ao home do detector de agua s6 se
a electobomba a fornecida com o
respectivo quadro de controle.
CAVO A 7 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA - 7
LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 7 CONDUCTEURS - 7 LEITER-
KABEL - CABLE A 7 CONDUCTORES DE LA
ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 7 CONDUTORES DA
ELECTROBOMBA.
DS
A2
Al
L1 L2 L3
\y FIG.5
U(4) - V(5) - W(6) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED - REDE
TBI(1) - T112(2) = PROTETTORI TERMICI - THERMAL PROBE - PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES -
THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN - PROTECTORES TERMICOS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS
DS(3) = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA OPZIONALE - HUMIDITY PROBE OPTION - SONDE DE
PRESENCE D'EAU OPTION - SENSOR - SONDA DETEC. AGUA OPCIONAL - SONDA
DETECTORA DE AGUA OPCIONAL
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
o
J N N
X
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua e protettori termici. N O
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. 3 N <
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques. p H
Ausrustung fair Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. a W J
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. T LL
Q vi
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores t6rmicos. ui T Cl) w
W co
fY
V F
a. W
a w
W
rr
23

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO DIRETTO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM DIRECT CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES BRANCHEMENT DIRECT
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXION DIRECTA
ESQUEMA DAS LIGACOES ELECTRICA LIGA(;AO DIRECTA
Da collegare al morsetto del rivelatore
acqua solo se 1'elettropompa e fornita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe only
if the pump is equipped with specific
control panel.
A connecter a la borne du detecteur eau
seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est munie du
coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die Motorpumpe mit
der entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al borne del revelador agua
solo si la electrobomba dispone del
respectivo cuadro de control.
A ligar ao bome do detector de agua so se
a electobomba a fornecida corn o
respectivo quadro de controle.
DS
CAVO A 10 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA
- 10 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'$LECTROPOMPE, A 10 CONDUCTEURS - 10
LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 10 CONDUCTORES DE
LA ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 10 CONDUTORES
DA ELECTROBOMBA.
A2
m
L1 L2 L3
9[ell
W2(7) — Ul(4) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ -
RED - REDE
U2(8) - VI(5) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ -
RED - REDE
V2(9) - W1(6) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ -
RED - REDE
T111(1) - TB2(2) = PROTETTORI TERMICI - THERMAL PROBE - PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES -
THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN
- PROTECTORES
TERMICOS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS
DS(3) = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA - HUMIDITY PROBE - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU- SENSOR -
SONDA DETEC. AGUA - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND
- MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
y
J
o w oo
N N
X
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua a protettori termici.
m
Q
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections.
Equipement
w ^
}
pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques.
0 F
H
Ausrustung fur Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen.
a w
W J
LL
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos.
~ T
Q ai
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores termicos.
vi T
to w
W
K
(n
-r T
C.) H
H W
a (n
w
24

SCHEMA DEI COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI COLLEGAMENTO STELLA/TRIANGOLO
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM STAR/DELTA CONNECTION
SCHEMA DES BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES CONNEXION ETOILE/TRIANGLE
SCHEMA DER ELEKTRISCHEN ANSCHLUSSE STERN-DREIECK ANSCHLUI3
DIAGRAMA DE LAS CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS CONEXION ESTRELLA/TRIANGULO
ESQUEMA DAS LIGA4^S ELECTRICAS LIGA(;AO ESTRELA/TRIANGULO
Da collegare al morsetto del
rivelatore acqua solo se
1'elettropompa e fomita
dell'apposito quadro di controllo.
To be connected to the water -probe
only if the pump is equipped with
specific control panel.
A connecter a la home du detecteur
eau seulement si 1'e1ectropompe est
munie du coffret de commande.
Der AnschluB an die Klemme der
Feuchtigkeitssonde ist nur dann
vorzunehmen, wenn die
Motorpumpe mit der
entsprechenden Schalttafel geliefert
wird.
A conectar al home del revelador
agua solo si la electrobomba
dispone del respectivo cuadro de
control.
A ligar ao bome do detector de agua
s6 se a electobomba a fornecida
com o respectivo quadro de
controle.
DS
CAVO A 10 CONDUTTORI DELL'ELETTROPOMPA -
10 LEAD ELECTRIC PUMP CABLE - CABLE DE
L'ELECTROPOMPE, A 10 CONDUCTEURS - 10
LEITER-KABEL - CABLE A 10 CONDUCTORES DE
LA ELECTROBOMBA - CABO DE 10 CONDUTORES
DA ELECTROBOMBA.
A2 I I Al
A2
Q
Al
Y
Ll
L2
L3
Tn „�
„� A2
Al
FIG.7
W2(7) — U2(8) — V2(9) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED — REDE
U1(4) — V1(5) — W1(6) = RETE - MAINS - SECTEUR - NETZ - RED — REDE
T111(1) — TB2(2) = PROTETTORI TERMICI - THERMAL PROBE - PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES —
THERMOSCHUTZVORRICHTUNGEN - PROTECTORES TERMICOS - PROTECTORES
TERMICOS
DS(3) = SONDA RILEV. ACQUA - HUMIDITY PROBE - SONDE DE PRESENCE D'EAU— SENSOR
- SONDA DETEC. AGUA - SONDA DETECTORA DE AGUA
PE = MASSA/TERRA - EARTH/GROUND - MASSE/TERRE - MASSE/ERDE - MASA / TIERRA -
MASSA/TERRA.
J N N
d �
Apparecchiatura per sonda rilevamento acqua a protettori termici. m X
Equipment for humidity probe and thermal protections. U 0
Equipement pour sonde de presence d'eau et protections thermiques.
W }a of
Ausrustung fur Detektionssonde and Thermoschutzvorrichtungen. p H
Equipamiento para sonda detec. agua y protectores termicos. a W _ J
LL
O equipamento para sonda detectora de agua a protectores termicos. T Q vi
� T W
W V1
K
U F
H W
a m
W
W
25

DISEGNI DI INGOMBRO (mm) / OUTLINE DRAWINGS (mm) / DESSIN
D'ENCOMBREMENT (mm) / ENTWURFZEICHNUNGEN (mm) / DIBUJOS DIMENSIONALES
(mm) / DESENHOS DA DIMENSAO TOTAL (mm)
SERIE: GM17
355 _ V
S 5
80
90
x o
d o
L 2„
0
0
o
CU
o
0
Ln
A
Pos escrizione / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
escripci6n / Descri4ao
M iscelatore sommergibile / Submersible mixer / Melangeurs
A submersibles / Tauchmischer / Mezcladores sumergibles /
isturadores a imersao
ivello minimo di sommerglbilita / Minimum submersible level /
iveau minimum de submergibilite / Mindesttauchniveau / Nivel
6 inimo de sumergibilidad / Nivel minlmo de imersao
�L A Type: V
truttura 6i sostegno / Lifting system / Structure de
S outien / Stu tzstrukt ur / Estructura de sosten /
strutura suporte
Type; M
EE nstra da muro / Wallplate / Plnt de mur / Wnndpintte /
lac. de la pared / Placa da parede
26

SERIE: GM18
T
v
355
+�t
Ln
0
M `O
10
I
$
80
90
x
2" I
� �
0250
X
_�
CDCD
CDCD
Ln X I \ \
1
866
777
MAX 150 Kg
° o I
I
A
3050
M
I
0
$�
I 0
F
H I
� \
I E
199
g
I
Pos
escrizione / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
escripcl6n / Descri4do
I
iscelatore sommergibile / Submersible mixer / M@langeurs
A
submerslbtes / Tauchmischer / Mezcladores sumergibles /
isturadores d Imersdo
5
CD ��
0
LO
I
i
0
—
ivello minimo dl sommergibilitd / Minimum submersible level /
iveau minimum de submergibilit€ / Mindesttauchniveau / Nivel
fnimo de sumergibilidad / Nfvel mfnimo de Imersdo
L
Type, T
d i
� I
d
41
In
*
4
B+D+F+I
Istema guida / Guide system / Rall de guide / FOhrerschiene
Carril de gufa / Carril de gula
C+H
Istema di sollevomento / Lifting system / SystOme de levag
Anhebendes System / Sistema de elevacl6n / Slstema
evantando
752
A
Type- V
truttura dl sostegno / Lifting system / Structure de
S
outlen / Stutzstruktur / Estructura de sost@n /
p
I
strutura suporte
Type, M
E
lastra da muro / Wallplate /Plat de mur / Wandplatte /
laca de la pared / Placa da parede
27

SERIE: GM19 - XM19 - DM19 - EM19
T
escrizione / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
escripcibn / Descrigao
iscelatore sommergibile / Submersible mixer / Melangeurs
ubmersibles / Tauchmischer / Mezcladares sumergibles /
isturadores d imersdo
ivello minimo di sommergibilitd / Minimum submersible level /
iveau minimum de submergibilite / Mindesttauchniveau / Nivel
inimo de sumergibilidad / Nivel minimo de imersdo
Type: T
istema guida / Guide system / Rail de guide / Fuhrerschiene
Carril de guia / Carril de guia
istema di sollevamento / Lifting system / Syst6me de levag
Anhebendes System / Sistemo de elevacibn / Sistema
evantando
28

SERIE: GM30 - XM30 - DM30 - EM30
T 250_
866
777 °
MAX 150 Kg o
CU =
�a----E) =
9q3O Lv��
❑ 60x60
o -300
u�
cd
C c
F °
H
199 D D z
B
El
CD
17
0
Q o °
+I
Pale / Blades / Pale / Blad /
Paleta / Palheta Hl H2 H3 Ll
A L 1 2 525 378 667 671
3 584 437 730 726
D Pos escrizione / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
escripci6n / Descri4ao
Iscelatore sommergibile / Submersible Mixer / Melangeurs
A ubmersibles / Tauchmischer / Mezcladores sumerglbles /
Isturadores a imersao
v Ivello minimo di sommergibilita / Minimum submersible level /
Iveau minimum de submergibilite / Mindesttauchniveau / Nivel
inimo de sumergibilidad / Nfvel minlmc de imersao
Type T
B+D+F+I Istema gulch / Guide system / Rail de guide / Fuhrerschiene
Carrll de guia / Carrll de gula
Istema di sollevamento / Lifting system / Systeme de levag
C+H Anhebendes System / Sistema de elevaci6n / Sistema
evantardo
29

SERIE: GM37 — XM37 — DM37 — EM37
T
NOW
p9n
me / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
on / Descri46o
,re sommergibile / Submersible mixer / Melangeurs
oles / Tauchmischer / Mezcladores sumergibles /
Dres d imersdo
nimo di sommerglbilitd / Minimum submersible level /
nimum de submergibilite / Mindesttauchniveau / Nlvel
sumergibllidad / Nivel minimo de imersflc
Type T
guida / Guide system / Rail de guide / Fuhrerschiene
de guia / Carril de guia
A sollevamento / Lifting system / Systeme de levag
c+H VV nnneaendes System / Sistema de elevacion / Sistema
levantando
30

SERIE: GM40 - XM40 - DM40 - EM40
ii
I
escrizione / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
escripcibn / Descri4So
lsceLatore sommergibile / Submersible mixer / M@langeurs
ubmersibles / Tauchmischer / Mezcladores sumergibles /
Isturadores at Imersdo
ivello minimo dl sommergibilit3 / Minimum submersible level /
Iveau minimum de submergibilit@ / Mindesttauchniveau / Nivel
Tnimo de sumergibilidad / NTvel minimo de Imers6o
Type, T
B+D+F+I�Istema gulda / Guide system / Rail de guide / Fuhrerschlene
Carril de guTa / Carril de gula
stema di sollevamento / Lifting system / SystPme de
C+H Anhebendes System / Sistema de elevacibn / Sistema
31

SERIE: GM40S - XM40S - DM40S - EM40S
:crlption / Descriptlon / Beschreibung / l
:crl4do
rrglblle / Submersible mixer / M@langeurs
iuchmischer / Mezcladores sumergibles /
iersdo
ommergibllltd / Minimum submersible level /
submergibillt@ / Mlndesttauchniveau / Nivel
bllldad / Nivel minlmo de Imersdo
Type, T
iuide system / Rail de guide / FOhrerschienel
/ Carrll de gula
�Istema dl sollevamento / Lifting system / Syst@me de
C+H Anhebendes System / Sistema de e(evac16n / Sistema
32

SERIE: GM60 - XM60 - DM60 - EM60
T
scrizione / Description / Description / Beschreibung /
scripci6n / Descri4do
celatore sommergibile / Submersible mixer / M@longeurs
omersibles / Touchmischer / Mezcladores sumergibles /
turadores d imersdo
ello minima di sommergibilitd / Minimum submersible level /
eau minimum de submergibilit@ / Mindesttouchniveou / Nivel
limo de sumergibilidad / Nivel minimo de imersdo
Type: T
g+p+F+l istema guida / Guide system / Rail de guide / FOhrerschiene
Carril de guia / Carril de guia
istema di sollevomento / Lifting system / Syst@me de levag
C+H Anhebendes System / Sistema de elevoci6n / Sistema
evontando
33

Installazione struttura sostegno (SSM050) / Installation of support system / Installation structure soutien /
Installation stiitzstruktur / Instalaci6n estructura de sost6n / Instalagao estrutura suporte
26
68
7
45
\ ,
+ +
dLO
A + Ln
90 0
B Cn �
V
In
}
70
1
25
2
90
80
A
0
(U
1
BJ
M
o-ti a 1
Nm
f
0f
230
Pos,
Type
Lt
mm
0f
mm
P
mm
Nm
S
mm
al
mm
3
VE,ZF12/110
110
12
80
65
150
60
Pos
Descrizione / Descrlptlon / Descrlptlon / Beschrelbung / Descripcibn / Descr1gdo
1-2
Rosetta / Washer / RondeUe
/ Unterlegschelbe / Arandela / Lamela
3
Dado / Nut / tcrou / Schraubenmutter / Turca / Porca
4
rasseLLo / Anchor bolt / Boulon d'ancrage / Ankerbolzen / Perno de ancladero / Perno de
ancoragem
4
aval(otto / U bolt / Boulon
6trier / U-Bolzen / Perno en U / Perno em U
34

Installazione palo guida (PG60) — Installation of guide rail — Installation rail de guide — Installation
fiihrerschiene — Instalaci6n carril de guia — Instalagao carril de guia
PG60L...-OP
Zr
PG60L...-OF
Zr 6
5 Z 60 5 Z 60
O O
l
_ o _
20 20
Data: 27/04/2010 - Rev,1
Pos escrizlone / Description / Description / Beschrelbung /
escripcl6n / Descrl46o
1-2 ncoraggi chimicl / Chemical anchors / Ancrages chlmique /
hemische Anker / Ancladero quimicas / Ancoragem quimicas
3 Rosetta / Washer / Rondelle / Unterlegschelbe / Arandela /
nmela
N4 Dado / Nut / 9crou / Schraubenmutter / Turca / Porca
o� qj C__ �Istema diorlentamento / Orientation system / Syst@me
5 'orlentatlon / Lagebestimmung System / Sistema de orientaci6n /
Q Istema do orlenta4Qo
J
6 Vite / Scre* / Vis / Schraube / Tornillo / Parafuso
0p ncoraggi chimicl / Chemical anchors / Ancrages chlmique /
7-11 hemische Anker / Ancladero quimicas / Ancoragem quimicas
8 lastra di fondo / Bottom plate / Plaque / Bodenplatte / Placa
e fondo / Placa Inferior
Lb Of P S al
Pos. Type mm mm mm Nm mm mm erno di ancoragglo / Anchor pin / Axe d'ancrage / Ankerstift
1-2 VF.LBM12x160 160 14 I10 40 140 50 /
9 erno de ancladero / Perno de ancoragem
taffa finecorsa / Knock -off stirrup / Etrler d@brayage /
7-I1 VF,LBM16x190 190 18 125 80 160 65 10 bschaltvorrichtung / Soporte / Suporte
35

Installazione palo guida (PG100) — Installation of guide rail — Installation rail de guide — Installation
fiihrerschiene — Instalaci6n carril de guia — Instalagao carril de guia
PG100L...-OP
Z
9
5 I 60
p o
0 ® a @ CI
O -
20
Nm
jor� �f
Lb 0f P S al
Pos. Type mm mm mm Nm mm mm
1-2 VF.LBM12x160 160 14 I10 40 140 50
7-11 VF,LBM16xI90 190 18 125 80 160 65
PG100L...-OF
Z
Data; 27/04/2010 - Rev.1
Pos escrizlone / Description / Description / Beschrelbung /
escripcl6n / Descrl4ao
1-2 ncoraggi chimici / Chemical anchors / Ancrages chimique /
hemische Anker / Ancladero quimicas / Ancoragem quimicos
3 osetta / Washer / Rondelle / Unterlegschelbe / Arandela /
4 Oado / Nut / 9crou / Schraubenmutter / Turca / Porca
Istema di orientamento / Orientation system / Syst@me
5 forlentation / Lagebestimmung System / Sistema de orientaci6n /
Istema do orlenta4Qo
6 Vite / Scre* / Vis / Schraube / Tornillo / Parafuso
7-11 ncoraggi chimici / Chemical anchors / Ancrages chimique /
hemische Anker / Ancladero quimicas / Ancoragem quimicas
8 lastra di fondo / Bottom plate / Plaque / Bodenplatte / Placa
e fondo / Placa Inferior
9 erno di ancoraggio / Anchor pin / Axe d'ancrage / Ankerstift /
erno de ancladero / Perno de ancoragem
10 taffa finecorsa / Knock -off stirrup / Etrler d@brayage /
bschaltvorrichtung / Soporte / Suporte
36

Regolazione dell'inclinazione del miscelatore
Einstellung der Mischerneigung
Procedura
1 — selezionare la gradazione di orientamento a assemblare
i rulli di scorrimento sulla staffa guida, rispettando la
numerazione. Per passare dalle gradazioni 0°, -10°, -20°
alle gradazioni +10°, +20° e viceversa, e necessario
capovolgere la staffa di scorrimento.
2 - regolare la lunghezza delle catene in modo the
entrambi i rami risultino in tensione e the i 2 rulli lato
miscelatore siano paralleli al palo guida.
Regulating the inclination of the mixer
Procedure
1 — select the degree of inclination and assemble the
sliding rollers on the guiding bracket, observing the
numbering. To change from an inclination of 0°, -10°, -20°
to +10°, +20° and vice verse, it is necessary to turn the
sliding bracket upside down.
2 - adjust the length of the chains so that both branches are
taught and that the 2 rollers on the mixer side are parallel
to the guiding pole.
Reglage de Finclinaison du melangeur
Procedure
1 - selectionner la gradation d'orientation et assembler les
rouleaux de coulissement sur 1'etrier guide, en respectant la
numerotation. Pour passer des gradations 0°, -10°, -20°
aux gradations +10°, +20° et vice versa, it taut renverser
1'etrier de coulissement.
2 - regler la longueur des chames afin que les deux
branches soient sous tension et que les 2 rouleaux cote
melangeur soient paralleles au pieu guide.
Verfahren
1 — den Ausrichtungsgrad auswahlen and die Laufrollen
auf den Fiihrungsbiigeln einbauen, dabei die
Nummerierung einhalten. Um von den Graden 0°, -10°, -
20° auf die Grade +10°, +20° iiberzugehen and umgekehrt
mit der Laufbiigel auf den Kopf gestellt werden.
2 - die Lange der Ketten einstellen, damit beide Zweige
unter Spannung stehen and die 2 Rollen an der
Mischerseite parallel zum Fiihr uzgsmast stehen.
Regulaci6n de la inclinaci6n del mezclador
Procedimiento
1 — Seleccione la graduaci6n de orientaci6n y monte los
rodillos de deslizamiento en el soporte guia, respetando la
numeraci6n. Para pasar de las graduaciones 0°, -10°, -20°
a las graduaciones +10°, +20°, y viceversa, hay que dar la
vuelta a la guia de deslizamiento.
2 — Regule la longitud de las cadenas de tal forma que
ambos brazos esten en tension y que los 2 rodillos del lado
del mezclador esten paralelos al soporte guia.
Regulacinn de la inclinacion del mezclador
Procedimiento
1 — Seleccione la graduaci6n de orientaci6n y monte los
rodillos de deslizamiento en el soporte guia, respetando la
numeraci6n. Para pasar de las graduaciones 0°, -10°, -20°
a las graduaciones +10°, +20°, y viceversa, hay que dar la
vuelta a la guia de deslizamiento.
2 — Regule la longitud de las cadenas de tal forma que
ambos brazos esten en tension y que los 2 rodillos del lado
del mezclador esten paralelos al soporte guia.
00
-100
-200
1-4-6
2-4-5
1-3-5
4
4
3
i°
0
do
°
o
� "
90 o
5'
o
a
5,
+10'
+20'
A
5-4-7
1-7-3
o
+
&
5
q�
0
+i
�
do
-
_
77io1
9
00
4
to
°a
3 °
37

Tabella di interventi — maintenance record — tableau des interventions — Wartungstabelle -
cuadro de las intervenciones - registro da manuten�ao
Data
Date
Date
Datum
Fecha
Data
Lavoro effettuato
Work performed
Operation effectuees
Durchgefdhrte arbeit
Trabajo realizado
O eragao efectuada
Osservazioni
Remarks
Observations
Anmerkungen
Observaciones
Observagoes
Doc. Cod. MIXF - rev. 0 — 09/2013
FAGGIOLATI PUMPS S.P.A.
Z.Ind.Sforzacosta — 62100 Macerata — ITALY
Tel. [phone] — Fax [phone]
e-mail: faQQiolatipumpskfa igg olatipumps.com

For models UV-1, UV-2, UV-6, UV-8C, UV-12C, & UV24B
Polaris Scientific Ultraviolet ( PO Box 927, Chino Hills, CA 91709 USA

Table of Contents
SafetyInstructions........................................................................................................ 1
Operation & Maintenance Instructions................................................................. 2-3
WarningSystems........................................................................................................... 4
Installing Your Disinfection System......................................................................... 5-6
TroubleshootingGuide............................................................................................... 6-7
WaterChemistry............................................................................................................ 7
Warranty Information.................................................................................................. 8
Parts& Accessories....................................................................................................... 9
Product Specifications.................................................................................................. 10
CAUTION
EYE PROTECTION
FRAGILE

Operation & Maintenance Instructions
B. QUARTZ SLEEVE REPLACEMENT AND/OR CLEANING:
If the water contains any hardness minerals (calcium or magnesium), iron or
manganese, the quartz sleeve will require periodic cleaning. To remove the quartz
sleeve, first the UV lamp as outlined above:
a) Shut off water supply and drain all lines.
b) Drain the UV chamber (use a small bucket under the unit to prevent a spill),
using drain port provided.
c) Remove nuts from chamber, checking for the free floating spring inside
sleeve at the opposite end to the lamp connection (do not allow quartz
sleeve to fall).
d) Carefully remove 0-rings from the quartz sleeve. As the O-ring may tend to
adhere to the quartz sleeve, it is recommended to replace the 0-ringsannually.
e) Clean the quartz sleeve with a cloth soaked in CLR, vinegar or some other
mild acid and then rinse avoiding the introduction ofanywaterto the inside
of the sleeve.
f) Re -assemble the quartz sleeve with spring in the UV chamber allowing the
sleeve to protrude an equal distance from both ends of the UV chamber.
g) Wet the 0-rings and slide onto each end of the quartz sleeve and reassemble
the gland nuts (hand tight is sufficient).
h) Re -tighten all connections, turn on water and check for leaks;
i) Re -install the UV lamp and lamp connector as per prior instructions.
j) Reconnect system to power source.
Note: Ifthe system is put on a temporary by-pass orifit becomes contaminated after the disinfection
system, it will be necessary to shock the system with household bleach for a full20 minutes before
resuming use of the water.
C. UV SENSOR REPLACEMENT AND/OR CLEANING
1. Mineral deposits and sediment may accumulate on the sensor probe
decreasing the UV detection rate. Good maintenance of filtration equipment
will reduce the accumulation of residues. If necessary, remove the sensor probe
after a few months and proceed with cleaning process. Repeat the process as
often as necessary to keep the sensor probe clean.
2. Disconnect the UV sensor from the rear of the disinfection system and drain
Aj the reactor chamber as per prior instructions. Remove the sensor probe by
unscrewing retaining nut. Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor probe
itself. Any tampering with the internal components of the sensor probe
will result in voiding the warranty. The probe face should be cleaned with a
commercial available scale remover (CLR, Lime -Away, etc.) and lint free cloth.
Carefully reassemble the sensor probe into the sensor boss by first inserting
the sensor O-ring and then the sensor itself. Screw the sensor retaining nut
and tighten to achieve a water tight seal. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN. Attach the
sensor cable to the connector on the rear of the UV disinfection system.
Page 3

Warning Systems
LAMP FAILURE SYSTEM (UV--1, UV-2, UV-6, UV:8C, UV-12C, UV-24B)
The audible alarm and indicator lights on the systems continuously monitor
a lamp operation. If the lamp does not start at any time, the indicator red light
will glow and audible alarm will sound. This alarm indicated the UV lamp is no
longer operating and must be corrected. Please refer to Troubleshooting Guide for
corrective procedures.
ULTRAVIOLET MONITORING SYSTEM
The ultraviolet sensor system features a complete warning system for continuous
water protection by constantly sensing the UV INTENSITY at the inside surface of
the cell. The system features a single LED indicator light, which will operate two
distinct colors, GREEN and RED. When the UV output level changes, the warning
system will operate in the following manner;
GREEN - indicates that the UV intensity is satisfactory and the unit is in good
working order.
RED - indicates that the unit needs immediate attention, the audible alarm will
automatically sound when the LED monitor light switches to red. If the
damp has been in service for a year or more it should be replaced. The
quartz sleeve and/or sensor probe may require cleaning. The alarm will
continue until the sensor detects adequate UV intensity. When a lamp is
replaced it is recommended to clean the quartz sleeve and sensor probe
prior to returning the system to service.
THIS ADVANCED WARNING SYSTEM HAS BEEN INSTALLED TO
PROVIDE YOU WITH THE OPTIMUM PRECAUTIONS TO ENSURE
HIGH EFFICIENCY IN THE PROTECTION AGAINST MICROBIOLOGICAL
CONTAMINATION IN YOUR WATER. DO NOT DISREGARD THE
- - WARNING LIGHTS.
THE BEST WAY TO CHECK UV OPERATION IS TO HAVE THE WATER TESTED FOR BACTERIA
BY A RECOGNIZED TESTING AGENCY ON A REGULAR BASIS.
Page 4

Installing Your Disinfection System
• The complete water system, including any pressure or hot water tanks, must
be sterilized before start up by flushing with chlorine (household bleach) to
destroy any residual contamination.
• The disinfection system should be connected to a ground fault interrupter.
• The disinfection system is intended for indoor use only, do not install
disinfection system where it may be exposed to the weather.
• Install the disinfection system on cold water line only.
• If treating the entire house, install the disinfection system before any branch lines.
Ideally, your disinfection system should .be the last treatment your water
receives prior to use.
• A 5 micron sediment filter must precede the disinfection system.
1. Remove the disinfection system from the shipping carton. For shipping
purposes, the UV lamp is packed in a separate tube. Set the lamp aside for use
later. The disinfection system should be mounted in the horizontal position,
with the inlet/outlet ports facing up. If the system must be installed in the
vertical position, make sure the inlet port is the one at the bottom of the
system. Mount the unit in a clear space with at least 36" (91.5 cm) of space
at the lamp end to facilitate lamp and or quartz sleeve removal. Fasten the
disinfection system to a suitable mounting platform with reinforcements.
2. It isrecommendedto install a suitable flow restrictor in order that the flow
rate. The use of a by-pass with shut-off valves is recommended for emergency
use of untreated water when your disinfection system is being serviced. Apply
two turns of Teflon tape around the port threads to ensure a tight join before
connecting unions.
Note: When the UV unit has been by-passed for service, the complete
water system must be sterilized once again with chlorine to destroy any
contamination that may have passed during by-pass.
DO NOT SOLDER CONNECTIONS WHILE ATTACHED TO THE DISINFECTION SYSTEM AS THIS COULD
DAMAGE THE O-ringS SEALS.
3. When all plumbing connections are made, slowly turn on the water supply
and check for leaks. The most likely cause for leaks is from the O-ring seal.
In case of a leak, shut water off, drain cell, remove the retainer nut, wipe the
O-ring and threads clean and re -install.
4. Once it is determined that there are no leaks, very carefully slide the UV lamp
into the UV chamber making sure the lamp pins are accessible for connection
with the lamp connector cable. Attach the lamp connector to the UV lamp, as
outlined in "UV Lamp Replacement" on page 5. Plug the disinfection system
into the ground fault interrupter, and check to see if the UV lamp is illuminated.
NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE BURNING UV LAMP. Allow the water to run
for a few minutes to clear any air or dust that may be in the cell.
Note: When there is no flow, the water in the cell will become warm, as the UV
Page 5

Installing Your Disinfection System & Troubleshooting Guide
disinfection system lamp is always on. To remedy this, run cold water tap anywhere
in the house for a minute to flush out the warm water.
Note: As the system requires time to reach its full operating capacity, please allow
the disinfection system to operate 3-5 minutes prior to using the water from unit. In
addition, to clear any air or debris form the system, open the faucet and allow water
to run through the disinfection system for 2-3 minutes.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
ng any work on the disinfection system unplug the unit first and never
,ig UV lamp.
s
Replace filter cartridge with appropriate
diment pre -filter is five micron cartridge. NOTE: Check source
�d of water supply as fluctuations may occur in
source pressure
sleeve is stained or Clean sleeve with scale cleaner and eliminate
source staining problem
/ lamp is spent
Replace UV lamp
e in feedwater quality
Have the source water tested to ensure it is
still within the allowable parameters for use
with this unit
nination after
It is imperative that the effluent water
!ction system
stream be shocked with chlorine after the
water leaves the disinfection system the
disinfection system must have a bacteria free
distribution system to work effectively
on problem caused
Run water until air is purged
equent use
I by air in the water
Run water until air purged
m with 0-ring seals
Ensure the 0-ring is in place, check for cuts or
ind nuts and/or
abrasions, clean 0-ring, moisten with water
probe on monitored
and re -install, replace if necessary
nsation on reactor
Check location of disinfection system and
rer caused by
control humidity
ive humidity
luate inlet/outlet port
Check thread connections, re -seal with Teflon
ctions
tape and re -tighten
Page 6

Troubleshooting Guide & Water Chemistry
ON
OFF
ON
Correct operating conditions, units is
functioning properly
OFF
ON
OFF
The UV lamp is spent, requires
replacement lamp.
UV lamp not connected to power source.
Check connection and reconnect lamp.
Ballast has switched off. To reset ballast
remove power to unit by disconnecting
power cord from electrical plug for a
minimum of 30 seconds then reapply
power.
LED indicator burnt out or wire lead
broken. Replace LED assembly.
OFF
OFF
ON
LED indicator burnt out or wire lead
broken. Replace LED assembly.
WATER CHEMISTRY
Water quality is extremely important for the optimum performance of your UV
system. The following levels are recommended for installation:
• Iron:<0.3 ppm (0.3 mg/L)
• Hardness *:< 7 gpg (120 mg/L)
• Turbidity: < 1 NTU
• Manganese: < 0.05 ppm (0.05 mg/L)
• Tannins: < 0.1 ppm (0.1 mg/L)
• UV Transmittance: > 75% (call factory for recommendations on applications
where UVT < 75%)
* Where total hardness is less than 7 gpg, the UV unit should operate efficiently provided the quartz
sleeve is cleaned periodically. If total hardness is over 7 gpg, the water should be softened.
If your water chemistry contains levels in excess of those mentioned above, proper
pre-treatment is recommended to correct these water problems prior to the
installation of your UV disinfection system. These water quality parameters can be
tested by your local dealer, or by most private analytical laboratories. Proper pre-
treatment is essential for the UV disinfection system to operate as intended.
Page 7

Warranty Information
Manufacturer warrants the ultraviolet disinfection system's hardware and electrical
systems to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of five
(5) years from the date of purchase by the original owner (consumer) on a pro-
rated basis'. Manufacturer warrants the ultraviolet lamps and sensor probes to be
free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year and the
reactor chamber for a period of seven (7) years. The warrantor will at its option
and expense, either repair or replace such units subject to the following conditions,
exceptions, and exclusions.
CONDITIONS, EXCEPTIONS, AND EXCLUSIONS
The foregoing limited Warranty is subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Water passed through the unit must fall within the following parameters:
a) Iron: <0.3 ppm (0.3 mg/L)
b) Hardness*:<7 gpg (120 mg/L)
c)Turbidity: < 1 NTU
d) Manganese: < 0.05 ppm (0,05 mg/L)
e) Tannins: < 0,1 ppm (03 mg/L)
f) UV Transmittance: > 75% (call factory for recommendations on
applications where UVT < 75%)
* Where total hardness is less than 7gpg, the water should be softened
Warranty will be void, if the proper steps are not taken to ensure that
these impurities are not present.
2. This limited Warranty shall not apply to any unit which has been repaired or
altered by anyone other than the Warrantor or by a person authorized by the
Warrantor, nor to any units which have been subject to misuse, neglect, or
accident. Do not remove any of the products labels. Warranty will be deemed
null and void if any of the products original labels are removed.
3. This limited Warranty runs exclusively to the original Consumer and with
respect to the original installation only.
4. WARRANTOR SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR
5. This limited Warranty excludes the cost of labour in removing any defective
unit or installing any replacement unit. This limited Warranty applies only to a
unit when returned to the Warrantor at the owner's expense and in accordance
with shipping instructions received from the Warrantor.
Page 8

UV-NUT-1 UV-NUT-2
Stainless Steel Long Nut Stainless Steel Short Nut
for Wire Connection for End Plug
for Models UV-8C—UV-1009 for Models UV-8C— UV- 1008
Parts & Accessories
UV-NUT-3
UV -PLUG
UV -SEAL
Plastic Nut
Plastic Plug for Nuts
Seal for Sleeve and Nut
for Wire Connection
for Models UV-7C—UV-1008
for Models UV-iC—UV-1008
for Models UV-lC& UV-2C
UV-32SPRING
UV-39SPRING
UV -TIMER
Stainless Steel Spring
Stainless Steel Spring
CounterRmer
forModelUV--8C
forMode1UV-71C-UV-1008
for Models UV-248-UV-7008
GL10SEV GL32SE4P
IOW 212mm Germicidal Lamp 32W 645mm Germicidal Lamp
Single End 4 Pin 254nm Single End 4 Pin 254nm
for Models UV-248—UV-7008 for Models UV-248— UV- 1008
GL14SE4P GL39SE4P -
14W287mm Germicidal Lamp 39W843mm Germicidal Lamp
Single End 4 Pin 254nm Single End 4 Pin 254nm
for Models UV-248—UV-7008 for Models UV-248— UV- 1008
GL24SE4P
24W 436mm Germicidal Lamp
Single End 4 Pin 254nm
for Models UV-248— UV-1008
QS10
QS32
Quartz Sleeve 245mm
Quartz Sleeve 665mm
for10WUVLamp
for 32W UV Lamp
forModelUV-IC
forModelUV-8C
QS14
QS39
Quartz Sleeve 331 mm
Quartz Sleeve 890mm
forl4W UV Lamp
for 39W UV Lamp
forModelUV-2C
(wModelsUV-12C—UV-1008
QS24
Quartz Sleeve 535mm
for24W UV Lamp
forModel UV-6C
Page 9

Product Specifications
UV PERFORMANCE
Polaris Scientific UltravioletTm Sterilization Systems germicidal lamps are specially
designed Ultraviolet radiation lamps which produce a rated wavelength of
254nm. Ultraviolet radiation in the 200-300 nm range is very effective in killing
microorganisms such as bacteria, virus, mold and yeast.
Polaris Scientific UltravioletTm Sterilization Systems are ideal for use in drinking
water, waste water and ground water remediation. They are also ideal for bottling
plants, pharmaceutical applications, semiconductor sterilization and the food
industry.
BALLAST
Polaris Scientific UltravioletTM Sterilization Systems utilize a natural quartz sleeve
to protect the lamp and allow the maximum amount of UV rays to penetrate and
disinfect the water.
Polaris Scientific UltravioletTM Sterilization Systems are your best choice in
Ultraviolet Sterilization. With it's durable construction, high quality quartz sleeve
and performance lamps you can't go wrong.
w�
UV-24B
Page 10

Training
Operation and maintenance personnel will be provided the training needed for successful
completion of assigned tasks. In general, training should be provided on an annual basis,
including refresher training. The Operation and Maintenance Program Supervisor will make an
annual assessment of training needs and schedule the training.
Documentation
Inspection and maintenance activities including training shall be recorded on appropriate forms
including the name(s) of the personnel completing the work, the date of the activity, the nature
and results of the activity and a description of follow up work needed. The documentation shall
be provided to the Operation and Maintenance Program Supervisor who will schedule additional

CONTACTS
F1 Mike Myers- Owner Representative — 252-235-4900
F1 Emergency — 911
F1 North Carolina Department of Environmental and Natural Resources- Emergency- 800-858-
0368
F1 Burgin Engineering, Inc. — Process Engineer — 803-730-1175